Today’s News 22nd August 2020

  • China & The US: The 21st Century's "Great Game"
    China & The US: The 21st Century's "Great Game"

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/22/2020 – 00:00

    Authored by Conn Hallinan via Counterpunch.org,

    From 1830 to 1895, the British and Russian empires schemed and plotted over control of Central and South Asia. At the heart of the “Great Game” was England’s certainty that the Russians had designs on India. So wars were fought, borders drawn, and generations of young met death in desolate passes and lonely outposts.

    In the end, it was all illusion. Russia never planned to challenge British rule in India and the bloody wars settled nothing, although the arbitrary borders and ethnic tensions stoked by colonialism’s strategy of divide and conquer live on today. Thus China, India, Pakistan, Afghanistan, and Nepal battle over lines drawn in London, while Beijing, Tokyo and Seoul vie for tiny uninhabited islands, remnants of Imperial Japan.

    That history is important to keep in mind when one begins to unpack the rationales behind the increasingly dangerous standoff between China and the United States in the South China Sea.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To the Americans, China is a fast rising competitor that doesn’t play by the rules and threatens one of the most important trade routes on the globe in a region long dominated by Washington. U.S. Secretary of State Mike Pompeo has essentially called for regime change.

    According to Ryan Hass, former China director on the National Security Council, the Trump administration is trying to “reorient the U.S.-China relationship toward an all-encompassing systemic rivalry that cannot be reversed” by administrations that follow. In short, a cold war not unlike that between the U.S. and the Soviet Union.

    To the Chinese, the last 200 years—China does tend to think in centuries, not decades—has been an anomaly in their long history. Once the richest country on the globe that introduced the world to everything from silk to gunpowder, 19th Century China became a dumping ground for British opium, incapable of even controlling its own coastlines.

    China has never forgotten those years of humiliation or the damage colonialism helped inflict on its people. Those memories are an ingredient in the current crisis.

    But China is not the only country with memories.

    The U.S. has dominated the Pacific Ocean – sometimes called an “American lake” – since the end of World War II. Suddenly Americans have a competitor, although it is a rivalry that routinely gets overblown.

    An example is conservative New York Times columnist, Bret Stephens, who recently warned that China’s Navy has more ships than the US Navy, ignoring the fact that most of China’s ships are small Coast Guard frigates and corvettes. China’s major strategic concern is the defense of its coasts, where several invasions in the 19th and 20th centuries have come.

    The Chinese strategy is “area denial”: keeping American aircraft carriers at arm’s length. To this end, Beijing has illegally seized numerous small islands and reefs in the South China Sea to create a barrier to the US Navy.

    But China’s major thrust is economic through its massive Belt and Road Initiative (BRI), not military, and is currently targeting South Asia as an area for development.

    South Asia is enormously complex, comprising Afghanistan, Pakistan, India, Bangladesh, Bhutan, Tibet, the Maldives and Sri Lanka. Its 1.6 billion people constitute almost a quarter of the world’s population, but it only accounts for 2 percent of the global GDP and 1.3 percent of world trade.

    Those figures translate into a poverty level of 44 percent, just 2 percent higher than the world’s most impoverished region, sub-Saharan Africa. Close to 85 percent of South Asia’s population makes less than $2 a day.

    Much of this is a result of colonialism, which derailed local economies, suppressed manufacturing, and forced countries to adopt monocrop cultures focused on export. The globalization of capital in the 1980s accelerated the economic inequality that colonialism had bequeathed the region.

    Development in South Asia has been beholden to the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund (IMF), which require borrowers to open their markets to western capital and reduce debts through severe austerity measures, throttling everything from health care to transportation.

    This economic strategy – sometimes called the “Washington Consensus” – generates “debt traps”: countries cut back on public spending, which depresses their economies and increases debt, which leads to yet more rounds of borrowing and austerity.

    The World Bank and the IMF have been particularly stingy about lending for infrastructure development, an essential part of building a modern economy. It is “the inadequacy and rigidness of the various western monetary institutions that have driven South Asia into the arms of China,” says economist Anthony Howell in the South Asia Journal.

    The Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) takes a different tack. Through a combination of infrastructure development, trade and financial aid, countries in Asia, Africa, the Middle East and Europe are linked into what is essentially a new “Silk Road.” Some 138 countries have signed up.

    Using a variety of institutions—the China Development Bank, the Silk Road Fund, the Export-Import Bank of China, and the Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank–Beijing has been building roads, rail systems and ports throughout South Asia.

    For decades, western lenders have either ignored South Asia—with the exception of India—or put so many restrictions on development funds that the region has stagnated economically. The Chinese Initiative has the potential to reverse this, al;arming the West and India, the only nation in the region not to join the BRI.

    The European Union has also been resistant to the Initiative, although Italy has signed on. A number of Middle East countries have also joined the BRI and the China-Arab Cooperation Forum. Saudi Arabia, the United Arab Emirates and Egypt have signed on to China’s Digital Silk Road, a network of navigation satellites that compete with America’s GPS, Russia’s GLONASS and European Union’s Galileo. China also recently signed a $400 billon, 25-year trade and military partnership with Iran.

    Needless to say, Washington is hardly happy about China elbowing its way into a US-dominated region that contains a significant portion of the world’s energy supplies.

    In a worldwide competition for markets and influence, China is demonstrating considerable strengths. That, of course, creates friction. The US, and to a certain extent the EU, have launched a campaign to freeze China out of markets and restrict its access to advanced technology. The White House successfully lobbied Great Britain and Australia to bar the Chinese company, Huawei, from installing a 5G digital network, and is pressuring Israel and Brazil to do the same.

    Not all of the current tensions are economic. The Trump administration needs a diversion from its massive failure to control the pandemic, and the Republican Party has made China bashing a centerpiece of its election strategy. There is even the possibility that the White House might pull off an “October surprise” and initiate some kind of military clash with China.

    It is unlikely that Trump wants a full-scale war, but an incident in the South China Sea might rally Americans behind the White House. The danger is real, especially since polls in China and the United States show there is growing hostility between both groups of people.

    But the tensions go beyond President Trump’s desperate need to be re-elected. China is re-asserting itself as a regional power and a force to be reckoned with worldwide. That the US and its allies view that with enmity is hardly a surprise. Britain did its best to block the rise of Germany before World War I, and the US did much the same with Japan in the lead up to the Pacific War.

    Germany and Japan were great military powers with a willingness to use violence to get their way. China is not a great military power and is more interested in creating profits than empires. In any case, a war between nuclear-armed powers is almost unimaginable (which is not to say it can’t happen).

    China recently softened its language toward the US, stressing peaceful co-existence.

    “We should not let nationalism and hotheadness somehow kidnap our foreign policy,” says Xu Quinduo of the state-run China Radio.

    “Tough rhetoric should not replace rational diplomacy.”

    The new tone suggests that China has no enthusiasm for competing with the US military, but would rather take the long view and let initiatives like the Belt and Road work for it. Unlike the Russians, the Chinese don’t want to see Trump re-elected and they clearly have decided not to give him any excuse to ratchet up the tensions as an election year ploy.

    China’s recent clash with India, and its bullying of countries in the South China Sea, including Vietnam, Malaysia, the Philippines, and Brunei, have isolated Beijing, and the Chinese leadership may be waking to the fact that they need allies, not adversaries.

    And patience.

  • Visualizing Where The Next Billion Internet Users Come From?
    Visualizing Where The Next Billion Internet Users Come From?

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 23:40

    Internet adoption has steadily increased over the years – it’s more than doubled since 2010.

    But, as Visual Capitalist’s Carmen Ang details below, despite its widespread use, a significant portion of the global population still isn’t connected to the internet, and in certain areas of the world, the number of disconnected people skews towards higher percentages.

    Using information from DataReportal, this visual highlights which regions have the greatest number of people disconnected from the web. We’ll also dive into why some regions have low numbers, and take a look at which countries have seen the most growth in the last year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Top 10 Most Disconnected, by Number of People

    The majority of countries with lower rates of internet access are in Asia and Africa. Here’s a look at the top 10 countries with the highest numbers of people not connected to the web:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Interestingly, India has the highest number of disconnected people despite having the second largest online market in the world. That being said, 50% of the country’s population still doesn’t have internet access—for reference, only 14% of the U.S. population remains disconnected to the web. Clearly, India has some untapped potential.

    China takes second place, with over 582 million people not connected to the internet. This is partly because of the country’s significant rural population—in 2019, 39% of the country’s population was living in rural areas.

    The gap in internet access between rural and urban China is significant. This was made apparent during China’s recent switch to online learning in response to the pandemic. While one-third of elementary school children living in rural areas weren’t able to access their online classes, only 5.7% of city dwellers weren’t able to log on.

    It’s important to note that the rural-urban divide is an issue in many countries, not just China. Even places like the U.S. struggle to provide internet access to remote or rugged rural areas.

    Top 10 Most Disconnected, by Share of Population

    While India, China, and Pakistan have the highest number of people without internet access, there are countries arguably more disconnected.

    Here’s a look at the top 10 most disconnected countries, by share of population:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There are various reasons why these regions have a high percentage of people not online—some are political, which is the case of North Korea, where only a select few people can access the wider web. Regular citizens are restricted from using the global internet but have access to a domestic intranet called Kwangmyong.

    Other reasons are financial, which is the case in South Sudan. The country has struggled with civil conflict and economic hardship for years, which has caused widespread poverty throughout the nation. It’s also stifled infrastructural development—only 2% of the country has access to electricity as of 2020, which explains why so few people have access to the web.

    In the case of Papua New Guinea, a massive rural population is likely the reason behind its low percentage of internet users—80% of the population lives in rural areas, with little to no connections to modern life.

    Fastest Growing Regions

    While internet advancements like 5G are happening in certain regions, and showing no signs of slowing down, there’s still a long way to go before we reach global connectivity.

    Despite the long road ahead, the gap is closing, and previously untapped markets are seeing significant growth. Here’s a look at the top five fast-growing regions:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Africa has seen significant growth, mainly because of a massive spike of internet users in the Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC)—between 2019 and 2020, the country’s number of internet users increased by 9 million (+122%). This growth has been facilitated by non-profit organizations and companies like Facebook, which have invested heavily in the development of Africa’s internet connectivity.

    India has also seen significant growth—between 2019 and 2020, the number of internet users in the country grew by 128 million (+23%).

    If these countries continue to grow at similar rates, who knows what the breakdown of internet users will look like in the next few years?

  • Idlib Is Burning: New Proxy War In Deir Ezzor
    Idlib Is Burning: New Proxy War In Deir Ezzor

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 23:20

    By SouthFront,

    The series of unfortunate events involving the US-led coalition, Turkey and Turkish proxies continues in Syria’s Greater Idlib.

    Late on August 19 and early on August 20, the Syrian Arab Army (SAA) shelled positions of Hayat Tahrir al-Sham near Haranabush and al-Sheikh Bahr in southern Idlib with what pro-opposition sources called “long-range rockets”. Despite multiple claims in pro-opposition media about fierce SAA strikes, no casualties were reported. The SAA likely used BM-27 Uragan or BM-30 Smerch heavy rocket launchers. The BM-27 has a range of 37 km, while the more advanced BM-30 can hit targets up to 90 km away.

    On the same day, unidentified gunmen destroyed communication towers used by the Turkistan Islamic Party near the town of Ras Elhisn, which is located right on Turkey’s border. The Turkistan Islamic Party, which as well as Hayat Tahrir al-Sham has an al-Qaeda-like ideology, is an internationally-recognized terrorist group mostly consisting of Uyghur militants. The group has a strong presence in northern Lattakia, western and southern Idlib and is one of the main allies of Hayat Tahrir al-Sham. The terrorist group’s main stronghold is Jisr al-Shughur.

    Over the previous few days, the Russian Aerospace Forces conducted a series of airstrikes on positions of Hayat Tahrir al-Sham across Greater Idlib punishing the group for the recent IED attack on the joint Turkish-Russian patrol on the M4 highway. Meanwhile, two US combat drones crashed in the region as a result of a mysterious incident that pro-US sources described as a midair collision.

    If the situation in Idlib further deteriorates with such speed, the Turkish attempts to stabilize it by deploying additional troops and equipment there will appear to be not enough to keep Turkish al-Qaeda friends under control in the area.

    A Syrian pro-government group known as the Popular Resistance in the Eastern Region (PR-ER) has claimed responsibility for the recent rocket attack on U.S. troops in Deir Ezzor. Three unguided rockets landed in the vicinity of the CONICO gas plant, where U.S. forces are deployed, late in the hours of August 18. The U.S. military confirmed the incident without reporting any losses.

    The PR-ER said in a statement that the rocket strike was in response to an earlier attack by U.S. forces at a Syrian Arab Army checkpoint near the village of Tal al-Dhahab in the northern al-Hasakah countryside. The U.S. attack left a Syrian service member, Malik Muhammad al-Muhaimid, dead and injured at least two others.

    The PR-ER first surfaced over 2 years ago declaring the aim of fighting the US occupation of northeastern Syria. Since then, it has claimed responsibility for several attacks on US forces. However, the group’s activity remained relatively low recently. The intensification of its actions may be linked with the growing tensions between the Syrians and US forces in the region.

    Meanwhile, Turkish proxies also entered the game on the banks of the Euphrates. On August 18, the pro-Turkish armed group “Gathering of Rebels in the Land of Deir Ezzor” released a statement threatening Syrian, Russian, Iranian and Kurdish forces in the province with attacks.

    It also claimed responsibility for the IED blast that killed a Russian major-general near Deir Ezzor city. The group self-identifies as a unit of the Turkish-backed Syrian National Army (SNA). This was, however, denied by the SNA. Pro-Turkish sources claim that this armed group was created by the Kurds to discredit the Syrian patriots on Turkish paychecks. It’s as if there is something that can done to discredit pro-Turkish groups more than what they have done by themselves.

    Deir Ezzor province seems to be becoming a center for the new proxy battle for the Syrian energy resources.

  • China Says The World Has "Sour Grapes" About Massive Wuhan Water Park Concert
    China Says The World Has "Sour Grapes" About Massive Wuhan Water Park Concert

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 23:00

    Videos and photographs of a massive electronic music concert that took place at a Wuhan water park days ago have sparked outrage from the international community regarding the concert’s lack of social distancing or mask-wearing.

    But China says the beef is unjustified. Rather, they said that “critics are just bitter about their own nations’ poor handling of the Covid-19 pandemic,” according to a new report from RT

    The photos of the concert quickly went viral after they were released and while some said they offered hope to a post-Covid world, others were critical of China. For example, the Daily Telegraph in Australia released a front page photo of the party stating: “Life’s a beach in Wuhan as world pays virus price.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China called the criticisms “foreign sour grapes” in a Global Times article:

    Scenes of residents in Wuhan, the city that was put under lockdown for 76 days due to the coronavirus epidemic, dancing to the music while cooling off in a water park amid the summer heat have gone viral on social media including Twitter, but the reaction from foreign netizens exposed overseas “sour grapes” and also prompted some to reflect on epidemic control in their own countries.

    Recall, about 24 hours ago, we reported that thousands of concert-goers piled into the Wuhan Maya Beach Water Park last weekend to attend the massive concert.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We noted: “The scene would be considered “unthinkable” in many other parts of the world, yet in Wuhan – who had arguably the strictest lockdowns of any geographic location – life is starting to look like it did pre-pandemic.”

    The city had not reported any new cases since mid-May, after lifting a 76 day draconian lockdown in early April.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Wuhan Maya Beach Water Park reopened late in June and crowds finally began to come out in August.

    Despite the turnout for this concert, the water park says it is only doing half the business it did the year prior. The park currently gets about 15,000 daily visitors during weekends and is trying to entice new business by offering half price discounts. 

    Wuhan was the original epicenter of the coronavirus and accounts for 60% of all cases in the country, according to China.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We concluded:

    Whether or not China has been honest with its infection numbers remains to be seen; but maybe the world should take a cue from ground zero relaxing its lockdown measures in what is also likely a nod to the growing body of evidence that the virus may not be as devastating as the world once thought. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

     

  • Exposing The Challenge Of Marxism
    Exposing The Challenge Of Marxism

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 22:40

    Authored by Yoram Hazony via Quillette.com,

    I. The collapse of institutional liberalism

    For a generation after the fall of the Berlin Wall in 1989, most Americans and Europeans regarded Marxism as an enemy that had been defeated once and for all. But they were wrong…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A mere 30 years later, Marxism is back, and making an astonishingly successful bid to seize control of the most important American media companies, universities and schools, major corporations and philanthropic organizations, and even the courts, the government bureaucracy, and some churches. As American cities succumb to rioting, arson, and looting, it appears as though the liberal custodians of many of these institutions—from the New York Times to Princeton University—have despaired of regaining control of them, and are instead adopting a policy of accommodation. That is, they are attempting to appease their Marxist employees by giving in to some of their demands in the hope of not being swept away entirely.

    We don’t know what will happen for certain. But based on the experience of recent years, we can venture a pretty good guess. Institutional liberalism lacks the resources to contend with this threat. Liberalism is being expelled from its former strongholds, and the hegemony of liberal ideas, as we have known it since the 1960s, will end. Anti-Marxist liberals are about to find themselves in much the same situation that has characterized conservatives, nationalists, and Christians for some time now: They are about to find themselves in the opposition.

    This means that some brave liberals will soon be waging war on the very institutions they so recently controlled. They will try to build up alternative educational and media platforms in the shadow of the prestigious, wealthy, powerful institutions they have lost. Meanwhile, others will continue to work in the mainstream media, universities, tech companies, philanthropies, and government bureaucracy, learning to keep their liberalism to themselves and to let their colleagues believe that they too are Marxists—just as many conservatives learned long ago how to keep their conservatism to themselves and let their colleagues believe they are liberals.

    This is the new reality that is emerging. There is blood in the water and the new Marxists will not rest content with their recent victories. In America, they will press their advantage and try to seize the Democratic Party. They will seek to reduce the Republican Party to a weak imitation of their own new ideology, or to ban it outright as a racist organization. And in other democratic countries, they will attempt to imitate their successes in America. No free nation will be spared this trial. So let us not avert our eyes and tell ourselves that this curse isn’t coming for us. Because it is coming for us.

    In this essay, I would like to offer some initial remarks about the new Marxist victories in America – about what has happened and what’s likely to happen next…

    II. The Marxist framework

    Anti-Marxist liberals have labored under numerous disadvantages in the recent struggles to maintain control of liberal organizations. One is that they are often not confident they can use the term “Marxist” in good faith to describe those seeking to overthrow them. This is because their tormentors do not follow the precedent of the Communist Party, the Nazis, and various other political movements that branded themselves using a particular party name and issued an explicit manifesto to define it. Instead, they disorient their opponents by referring to their beliefs with a shifting vocabulary of terms, including “the Left,” “Progressivism,” “Social Justice,” “Anti-Racism,” “Anti-Fascism,” “Black Lives Matter,” “Critical Race Theory,” “Identity Politics,” “Political Correctness,” “Wokeness,” and more. When liberals try to use these terms they often find themselves deplored for not using them correctly, and this itself becomes a weapon in the hands of those who wish to humiliate and ultimately destroy them.

    The best way to escape this trap is to recognize the movement presently seeking to overthrow liberalism for what it is: an updated version of Marxism. I do not say this to disparage anyone. I say this because it is true. And because recognizing this truth will help us understand what we are facing.

    The new Marxists do not use the technical jargon that was devised by 19th-century Communists. They don’t talk about the bourgeoisieproletariatclass strugglealienation of laborcommodity fetishism, and the rest, and in fact they have developed their own jargon tailored to present circumstances in America, Britain, and elsewhere. Nevertheless, their politics are based on Marx’s framework for critiquing liberalism (what Marx calls the “ideology of the bourgeoisie”) and overthrowing it. We can describe Marx’s political framework as follows:

    1. Oppressor and oppressed
    Marx argues that, as an empirical matter, people invariably form themselves into cohesive groups (he calls them classes), which exploit one another to the extent they are able. A liberal political order is no different in this from any other, and it tends toward two classes, one of which owns and controls pretty much everything (the oppressor); while the other is exploited, and the fruit of its labor appropriated, so that it does not advance and, in fact, remains forever enslaved (the oppressed). In addition, Marx sees the state itself, its laws and its mechanisms of enforcement, as a tool that the oppressor class uses to keep the regime of oppression in place and to assist in carrying out this work.

    2. False consciousness
    Marx recognizes that the liberal businessmen, politicians, lawyers, and intellectuals who keep this system in place are unaware that they are the oppressors, and that what they think of as progress has only established new conditions of oppression. Indeed, even the working class may not know that they are exploited and oppressed. This is because they all think in terms of liberal categories (e.g., the individual’s right to freely sell his labor) which obscure the systematic oppression that is taking place. This ignorance of the fact that one is an oppressor or oppressed is called the ruling ideology (Engels later coined the phrase false consciousness to describe it)and it is only overcome when one is awakened to what is happening and learns to recognize reality using true categories.

    3. Revolutionary reconstitution of society
    Marx suggests that, historically, oppressed classes have materially improved their conditions only through a revolutionary reconstitution of society at large—that is, through the destruction of the oppressor class, and of the social norms and ideas that hold the regime of systematic oppression in place. He even specifies that liberals will supply the oppressed with the tools needed to overthrow them. There is a period of “more or less veiled civil war, raging within existing society, up to the point where that war breaks out into open revolution” and the “violent overthrow” of the liberal oppressors. At this point, the oppressed seize control of the state.

    4. Total disappearance of class antagonisms
    Marx promises that after the oppressed underclass takes control of the state, the exploitation of individuals by other individuals will be “put to an end” and the antagonism between classes of individuals will totally disappear. How this is to be done is not specified.

    Marxist political theories have undergone much development and elaboration over nearly two centuries. The story of how “neo-Marxism” emerged after the First World War in the writings of the Frankfurt School and Antonio Gramsci has been frequently told, and academics will have their hands full for many years to come arguing over how much influence was exerted on various successor movements by Michel Foucault, post-modernism, and more. But for present purposes, this level of detail is not necessary, and I will use the term “Marxist” in a broad sense to refer to any political or intellectual movement that is built upon Marx’s general framework as I’ve just described it. This includes the “Progressive” or “Anti-Racism” movement now advancing toward the conquest of liberalism in America and Britain. This movement uses racialist categories such as whites and people of color to describe the oppressors and the oppressed in our day. But it relies entirely on Marx’s general framework for its critique of liberalism and for its plan of action against the liberal political order. It is simply an updated Marxism.

    III. The attraction and power of Marxism

    Although many liberals and conservatives say that Marxism is “nothing but a great lie,” this isn’t quite right. Liberal societies have repeatedly proved themselves vulnerable to Marxism, and now we are seeing with our own eyes how the greatest liberal institutions in the world are being handed over to Marxists and their allies. If Marxism is nothing but a great lie, why are liberal societies so vulnerable to it? We must understand the enduring attraction and strength of Marxism. And we will never understand it unless we recognize that Marxism captures certain aspects of the truth that are missing from Enlightenment liberalism.

    Which aspects of the truth?

    Marx’s principal insight is the recognition that the categories liberals use to construct their theory of political reality (liberty, equality, rights, and consent) are insufficient for understanding the political domain. They are insufficient because the liberal picture of the political world leaves out two phenomena that are, according to Marx, absolutely central to human political experience: The fact that people invariably form cohesive classes or groups; and the fact that these classes or groups invariably oppress or exploit one another, with the state itself functioning as an instrument of the oppressor class.

    My liberal friends tend to believe that oppression and exploitation exist only in traditional or authoritarian societies, whereas liberal society is free (or almost free) from all that. But this isn’t true. Marx is right to see that every society consists of cohesive classes or groups, and that political life everywhere is primarily about the power relations among different groups. He is also right that at any given time, one group (or a coalition of groups) dominates the state, and that the laws and policies of the state tend to reflect the interests and ideals of this dominant group. Moreover, Marx is right when he says that the dominant group tends to see its own preferred laws and policies as reflecting “reason” or “nature,” and works to disseminate its way of looking at things throughout society, so that various kinds of injustice and oppression tend to be obscured from view.

    For example, despite decades of experimentation with vouchers and charter schools, the dominant form of American liberalism remains strongly committed to the public school system. In most places, this is a monopolistic system that requires children of all backgrounds to receive what is, in effect, an atheistic education stripped clean of references to God or the Bible. Although liberals sincerely believe that this policy is justified by the theory of “separation of church and state,” or by the argument that society needs schools that are “for everyone,” the fact is that these theories justify what really is a system aimed at inculcating their own Enlightenment liberalism. Seen from a conservative perspective, this amounts to a quiet persecution of religious families. Similarly, the pornography industry is nothing but a horrific instrument for exploiting poor women, although it is justified by liberal elites on grounds of “free speech” and other freedoms reserved to “consenting adults.” And in the same way, indiscriminate offshoring of manufacturing capacity is considered to be an expression of property rights by liberal elites, who benefit from cheap Chinese labor at the expense of their own working-class neighbors.

    No, Marxist political theory is not simply a great lie. By analyzing society in terms of power relations among classes or groups, we can bring to light important political phenomena to which Enlightenment liberal theories—theories that tend to reduce politics to the individual and his or her private liberties—are systematically blind.

    This is the principal reason that Marxist ideas are so attractive. In every society, there will always be plenty of people who have reason to feel they’ve been oppressed or exploited. Some of these claims will be worthy of remedy and some less so. But virtually all of them are susceptible to a Marxist interpretation, which shows how they result from systematic oppression by the dominant classes, and justifies responding with outrage and violence. And those who are troubled by such apparent oppression will frequently find themselves at home among the Marxists.

    Of course, liberals have not remained unmoved in the face of criticism based on the reality of group power relations. Measures such as the US Civil Rights Act of 1964 explicitly outlawed discriminatory practices against a variety of classes or groups; and subsequent “Affirmative Action” programs sought to strengthen underprivileged classes through quotas, hiring goals, and other methods. But these efforts have not come close to creating a society free from power relations among classes or groups. If anything, the sense that “the system is rigged” in favor of certain classes or groups at the expense of others has only grown more pronounced.

    Despite having had more than 150 years to work on it, liberalism still hasn’t found a way to persuasively address the challenge posed by Marx’s thought.

    IV. The flaws that make Marxism fatal

    We’ve looked at what Marxist political theory gets right and why it’s such a powerful doctrine. But there are also plenty of problems with the Marxist framework, a number of them fatal.

    The first of these is that while Marxism proposes an empirical investigation of the power relations among classes or groups, it simply assumes that wherever one discovers a relationship between a more powerful group and a weaker one, that relation will be one of oppressor and oppressed. This makes it seem as if every hierarchical relationship is just another version of the horrific exploitation of black slaves by Virginia plantation owners before the Civil War. But in most cases, hierarchical relationships are not enslavement. Thus, while it is true that kings have normally been more powerful than their subjects, employers more powerful than their employees, and parents more powerful than their children, these have not necessarily been straightforward relations of oppressor and oppressed. Much more common are mixed relationships, in which both the stronger and the weaker receive certain benefits, and in which both can also point to hardships that must be endured in order to maintain it.

    The fact that the Marxist framework presupposes a relationship of oppressor and oppressed leads to the second great difficulty, which is the assumption that every society is so exploitative that it must be heading toward the overthrow of the dominant class or group. But if it is possible for weaker groups to benefit from their position, and not just to be oppressed by it, then we have arrived at the possibility of a conservative society: One in which there is a dominant class or loyalty group (or coalition of groups), which seeks to balance the benefits and the burdens of the existing order so as to avoid actual oppression. In such a case, the overthrow and destruction of the dominant group may not be necessary. Indeed, when considering the likely consequences of a revolutionary reconstitution of society—often including not only civil war, but foreign invasion as the political order collapses—most groups in a conservative society may well prefer to preserve the existing order, or to largely preserve it, rather than to endure Marx’s alternative.

    This brings us to the third failing of the Marxist framework. This is the notorious absence of a clear view as to what the underclass, having overthrown its oppressors and seized the state, is supposed to do with its newfound power. Marx is emphatic that once they have control of the state, the oppressed classes will be able to end oppression. But these claims appear to be unfounded. After all, we’ve said that the strength of the Marxist framework lies in its willingness to recognize that power relations do exist among classes and groups in every society, and that these can be oppressive and exploitative in every society. And if this is an empirical fact—as indeed it seems to be—then how will the Marxists who have overthrown liberalism be able use the state to obtain the total abolition of class antagonisms? At this point, Marx’s empiricist posture evaporates, and his framework becomes completely utopian.

    When liberals and conservatives talk about Marxism being “nothing but a big lie,” this is what they mean. The Marxist goal of seizing the state and using it to eliminate all oppression is an empty promise. Marx did not know how the state could actually bring this about, and neither have any of his followers. In fact, we now have many historical cases in which Marxists have seized the state: In Russia and Eastern Europe, China, North Korea, and Cambodia, Cuba and Venezuela. But nowhere has the Marxists’ attempt at a “revolutionary reconstitution of society” by the state been anything other than a parade of horrors. In every case, the Marxists themselves form a new class or group, using the power of the state to exploit and oppress other classes in the most extreme ways—up to and including repeated recourse to murdering millions of their own people. Yet for all this, utopia never comes and oppression never ends.

    Marxist society, like all other societies, consists of classes and groups arranged in a hierarchical order. But the aim of reconstituting society and the assertion that the state is responsible for achieving this feat makes the Marxist state much more aggressive, and more willing to resort to coercion and bloodshed, than the liberal regime it seeks to replace.

    V. The dance of liberalism and Marxism

    It is often said that liberalism and Marxism are “opposites,” with liberalism committed to freeing the individual from coercion by the state and Marxism endorsing unlimited coercion in pursuit of a reconstituted society. But what if it turned out that liberalism has a tendency to give way and transfer power to Marxists within a few decades? Far from being the opposite of Marxism, liberalism would merely be a gateway to Marxism.

    A compelling analysis of the structural similarities between Enlightenment liberalism and Marxism has been published by the Polish political theorist Ryszard Legutko under the title The Demon in Democracy: Totalitarian Temptations in Free Societies (2016). A subsequent book by Christopher Caldwell, The Age of Entitlement (2020), has similarly documented the manner in which the American constitutional revolution of the 1960s, whose purpose was to establish the rule of liberalism, has in fact brought about a swift transition to a “Progressive” politics that is, as I’ve said, a version of Marxism. With these accounts in mind, I’d like to propose a way of understanding the core relationship that binds liberalism and Marxism to one another and makes them something other than “opposites.”

    Enlightenment liberalism is a rationalist system built on the premise that human beings are, by nature, free and equal. It is further asserted that this truth is “self-evident,” meaning that all of us can recognize it through the exercise of reason alone, without reference to the particular national or religious traditions of our time and place.

    But there are difficulties with this system. One of these is that, as it turns out, highly abstract terms such as freedom, equality, and justice cannot be given stable content by means of reason alone. To see this, consider the following problems:

    1. If all men are free and equal, how is it that not everyone who wishes to do so may enter the United States and take up residence there?

    By reason alone, it can be argued that since all men are free and equal, they should be equally free to take up residence in the United States. This appears straightforward, and any argument to the contrary will have to depend on traditional concepts such as nation, state, territory, border, citizenship, and so on—none of which are self-evident or accessible to reason alone.

    2. If all men are free and equal, how is it that not everyone who wants to may register for courses at Princeton University?

    By reason alone, it can be argued that if all are free and equal, they should be equally free to register for courses at Princeton on a first come, first served basis. This, too, appears straightforward. Any argument to the contrary will have to depend on traditional concepts such as private property, corporation, freedom of association, education, course of study, merit, and so on. And, again, none of this is self-evident.

    3. If all men are free and equal, how can you justify preventing a man who feels he is a woman from competing in a women’s track and field competition in a public school?

    By reason alone, it can be said that since all are free and equal, a man who feels he is a woman should be equally free to compete in a women’s track and field competition. Any argument to the contrary will have to depend on traditional concepts of such as man, woman, women’s rights, athletic competition, competition class, fairness, and so on, none of which is accessible to reason alone.

    Such examples can be multiplied without end. The truth is that reason alone gets us almost nowhere in settling arguments over what is meant by freedom and equality. So where does the meaning of these terms come from?

    I’ve said that every society consists of classes or groups. These stand in various power relations to one another, which find expression in the political, legal, religious, and moral traditions that are handed down by the strongest classes or groups. It is only within the context of these traditions that we come to believe that words like freedom and equality mean one thing and not another, and to develop a “common sense” of how different interests and concerns are to be balanced against one another in actual cases.

    But what happens if you dispense with those traditions? This, after all, is what Enlightenment liberalism seeks to do. Enlightenment liberals observe that inherited traditions are always flawed or unjust in certain ways, and for this reason they feel justified in setting inherited tradition aside and appealing directly to abstract principles such as freedom and equality. The trouble is, there is no such thing as a society in which everyone is free and equal in all ways. Even in a liberal society, there will always be countless ways in which a given class or group may be unfree or unequal with respect to the others. And since this is so, Marxists will always be able to say that some or all of these instances of unfreedom and inequality are instances of oppression.

    Thus the endless dance of liberalism and Marxism, which goes like this:

    1. Liberals declare that henceforth all will be free and equal, emphasizing that reason (not tradition) will determine the content of each individual’s rights.

    2. Marxists, exercising reason, point to many genuine instances of unfreedom and inequality in society, decrying them as oppression and demanding new rights.

    3. Liberals, embarrassed by the presence of unfreedom and inequality after having declared that all would be free and equal, adopt some of the Marxists’ demands for new rights.

    4. Return to #1 above and repeat.

    Of course, not all liberals give in to the Marxists’ demands—and certainly not on every occasion. Nevertheless, the dance is real. As a generalized view of what happens over time, this picture is accurate, as we’ve seen throughout the democratic world over the last 70 years. Liberals progressively adopt the critical theories of the Marxists over time, whether the subject is God and religion, man and woman, honor and duty, family, nation, or anything else.

    A few observations, then, concerning this dance of liberalism and Marxism:

    First, notice that the dance is a byproduct of liberalism. It exists because Enlightenment liberalism sets freedom and equality as the standard by which government is to be judged, and describes the individual’s power of reason alone, independent of tradition, as the instrument by which this judgment is to be obtained. In so doing, liberalism creates Marxists. Like the sorcerer’s apprentice, it constantly calls into being individuals who exercise reason, identify instances of unfreedom and inequality in society, and conclude from this that they (or others) are oppressed and that a revolutionary reconstitution of society is necessary to eliminate the oppression. It is telling that this dynamic is already visible during the French Revolution and in the radical regimes in Pennsylvania and other states during the American Revolution. A proto-Marxism was generated by Enlightenment liberalism even before Marx proposed a formal structure for describing it a few decades later.

    Second, the dance only moves in one direction. In a liberal society, Marxist criticism brings many liberals to progressively abandon the conceptions of freedom and equality with which they set out, and to adopt new conceptions proposed by Marxists. But the reverse movement—of Marxists toward liberalism—seems terribly weak in comparison. How can this be? If Enlightenment liberalism is true, and its premises are indeed “self-evident” or a “product of reason,” it should be the case that under conditions of freedom, individuals will exercise reason and reach liberal conclusions. Why, then, do liberal societies produce a rapid movement toward Marxist ideas, and not an ever-greater belief in liberalism?

    The key to understanding this dynamic is this: Although liberals believe their views are “self-evident” or the “product of reason,” most of the time they are actually relying on inherited conceptions of what freedom and equality are, and inherited norms of how to apply these concepts to real-world cases. In other words, the conflict between liberalism and its Marxist critics is one between a dominant class or group wishing to conserve its traditions (liberals), and a revolutionary group (Marxists) combining criticial reasoning with a willingness to jettison all inherited constraints to overthrow these traditions. But while Marxists know very well that their aim is to destroy the intellectual and cultural traditions that are holding liberalism in place, their liberal opponents for the most part refuse to engage in the kind of conservatism that would be needed to defend their traditions and strengthen them. Indeed, liberals frequently disparage tradition, telling their children and students that all they need is to reason freely and “draw your own conclusions.”

    The result is a radical imbalance between Marxists, who consciously work to bring about a conceptual revolution, and liberals whose insistence on “freedom from inherited tradition” provides little or no defense—and indeed, opens the door for precisely the kinds of arguments and tactics that Marxists use against them. This imbalance means that the dance moves only in one direction, and that liberal ideas tend to collapse before Marxist criticism in a matter of decades.

    VI. The Marxist endgame and democracy’s end 

    Not very long ago, most of us living in free societies knew that Marxism was not compatible with democracy. But with liberal institutions overrun by “Progressives” and “Anti-Racists,” much of what was once obvious about Marxism, and much of what was once obvious about democracy, has been forgotten. It is time to revisit some of these once-obvious truths.

    Under democratic government, violent warfare among competing classes and groups is brought to an end and replaced by non-violent rivalry among political parties. This doesn’t mean that power relations among loyalty groups come to an end. It doesn’t mean that injustice and oppression come to an end. It only means that instead of resolving their disagreements through bloodshed, the various groups that make up a given society form themselves into political parties devoted to trying to unseat one another in periodic elections. Under such a system, one party rules for a fixed term, but its rivals know they will get to rule in turn if they can win the next election. It is the possibility of being able to take power and rule the country without widespread killing and destruction that entices all sides to lay down their weapons and take up electoral politics instead.

    The most basic thing one needs to know about a democratic regime, then, is this: You need to have at least two legitimate political parties for democracy to work. By a legitimate political party, I mean one that is recognized by its rivals as having a right to rule if it wins an election. For example, a liberal party may grant legitimacy to a conservative party (even though they don’t like them much), and in return this conservative party may grant legitimacy to a liberal party (even though they don’t like them much). Indeed, this is the way most modern democratic nations have been governed.

    But legitimacy is one of those traditional political concepts that Marxist criticism is now on the verge of destroying. From the Marxist point of view, our inherited concept of legitimacy is nothing more than an instrument the ruling classes use to perpetuate injustice and oppression. The word legitimacy takes on its true meaning only with reference to the oppressed classes or groups that the Marxist sees as the sole legitimate rulers of the nation. In other words, Marxist political theory confers legitimacy on only one political party—the party of the oppressed, whose aim is the revolutionary reconstitution of society. And this means that the Marxist political framework cannot co-exist with democratic government. Indeed, the entire purpose of democratic government, with its plurality of legitimate parties, is to avoid the violent reconstitution of society that Marxist political theory regards as the only reasonable aim of politics.

    Simply put, the Marxist framework and democratic political theory are opposed to one another in principle. A Marxist cannot grant legitimacy to liberal or conservative points of view without giving up the heart of Marxist theory, which is that these points of view are inextricably bound up with systematic injustice and must be overthrown, by violence if necessary. This is why the very idea that a dissenting opinion—one that is not “Progressive” or “Anti-Racist”—could be considered legitimate has disappeared from liberal institutions as Marxists have gained power. At first, liberals capitulated to their Marxist colleagues’ demand that conservative viewpoints be considered illegitimate (because conservatives are “authoritarian” or “fascist”). This was the dynamic that brought about the elimination of conservatives from most of the leading universities and media outlets in America.

    But by the summer of 2020, this arrangement had run its course. In the United States, Marxists were now strong enough to demand that liberals fall into line on virtually any issue they considered pressing. In what were recently liberal institutions, a liberal point of view has likewise ceased to be legitimate. This is the meaning of the expulsion of liberal journalists from the New York Times and other news organisations. It is the reason that Woodrow Wilson’s name was removed from buildings at Princeton University, and for similar acts at other universities and schools. These expulsions and renamings are the equivalent of raising a Marxist flag over each university, newspaper, and corporation in turn, as the legitimacy of the old liberalism is revoked.

    Until 2016, America sill had two legitimate political parties. But when Donald Trump was elected president, the talk of his being “authoritarian” or “fascist” was used to discredit the traditional liberal point of view, according to which a duly elected president, the candidate chosen by half the public through constitutional procedures, should be accorded legitimacy. Instead a “resistance” was declared, whose purpose was to delegitimize the president, those who worked with him, and those who voted for him.

    I know that many liberals believe that this rejection of Trump’s legitimacy was directed only at him, personally. They believe, as a liberal friend wrote to me recently, that when this particular president is removed from office, America will be able to return to normal.

    But nothing of the sort is going to happen. The Marxists who have seized control of the means of producing and disseminating ideas in America cannot, without betraying their cause, confer legitimacy on any conservative government. And they cannot grant legitimacy to any form of liberalism that is not supine before them. This means that whatever President Trump’s electoral fortunes, the “resistance” is not going to end. It is just beginning.

    With the Marxist conquest of liberal institutions, we have entered a new phase in American history (and, consequently, in the history of all democratic nations). We have entered the phase in which Marxists, having conquered the universities, the media, and major corporations, will seek to apply this model to the conquest of the political arena as a whole.

    How will they do this? As in the universities and the media, they will use their presence within liberal institutions to force liberals to break the bonds of mutual legitimacy that bind them to conservatives—and therefore to two-party democracy. They will not demand the delegitimization of just President Trump, but of all conservatives. We’ve already seen this in the efforts to delegitimize the views of Senators Josh Hawley, Tom Cotton, and Tim Scott, as well as the media personality Tucker Carlson and others. Then they will move on to delegitimizing liberals who treat conservative views as legitimate, such as James Bennet, Bari Weiss, and Andrew Sullivan. As was the case in the universities and media, many liberals will accommodate these Marxist tactics in the belief that by delegitimizing conservatives they can appease the Marxists and turn them into strategic allies.

    But the Marxists will not be appeased because what they’re after is the conquest of liberalism itself—already happening as they persuade liberals to abandon their traditional two-party conception of political legitimacy, and with it their commitment to a democratic regime. The collapse of the bonds of mutual legitimacy that have tied liberals to conservatives in a democratic system of government will not make the liberals in question Marxists quite yet. But it will make them the supine lackeys of these Marxists, without the power to resist anything that “Progressives” and “Anti-Racists” designate as being important. And it will get them accustomed to the coming one-party regime, in which liberals will have a splendid role to play—if they are willing to give up their liberalism.

    I know that many liberals are confused, and that they still suppose there are various alternatives before them. But it isn’t true. At this point, most of the alternatives that existed a few years ago are gone.

    Liberals will have to choose between two alternatives:

    1. Either they will submit to the Marxists, and help them bring democracy in America to an end,

    2. Or they will assemble a pro-democracy alliance with conservatives.

    There aren’t any other choices.

  • Meet Toyko's New Transparent Public Toilets
    Meet Toyko's New Transparent Public Toilets

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 22:20

    Having finally solved the grand monetary policy puzzle, Japan has now moved on to other crucial societal problems, like getting people to feel comfortable using public toilets. 

    At least, that was the thinking behind Tokyo’s new transparent public toilets: to help ease “toilet anxiety”, according to Forbes

    In Japan, where public toilets are held to a higher standard of cleanliness than most other place around the world, the country’s residents still “harbor a fear that public toilets are dark, dirty, smelly and scary.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That’s why the non-profit Nippon Foundation has now launched “The Tokyo Toilet Project”, which has asked 16 well known architects to renovate 17 public toilets located in one of the busiest areas of Tokyo, the public parks of Shibuya. 

    The idea was to apply a design that would make public bathrooms comfortable and accessible to everyone. The Nippon Foundation has a goal “that people will feel comfortable using these public toilets and to foster a spirit of hospitality for the next person.”

    Pritzker Prize-winning architect Shigeru Ban is the brain-child behind the transparent restrooms. The smartglass they are built with turns opaque when someone is in them. The Nippon Foundation commented: “There are two concerns with public toilets, especially those located in parks. The first is whether it is clean inside, and the second is that no one is secretly waiting inside.”

    “At night, they light up the parks like a beautiful lantern,” the Foundation concluded. 

  • Can Trump Learn From The Last Three Defeated Incumbents?
    Can Trump Learn From The Last Three Defeated Incumbents?

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 22:00

    Authored by Myra Adams via RealClearPoliticsa.com,

    Since the end of World War II, there have been 18 U.S. presidential elections, 11 of which involved incumbents. Eight of those presidents won reelection, demonstrating the power of incumbency. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Conversely, the familiar tag line “past performance does not guarantee future results,” heard at the end of financial ads, is equally applicable. Subjected to that devastating truth were the last three one-term presidents – Gerald Ford, Jimmy Carter, and George H.W. Bush, all forced to join the “exclusive club” Donald Trump is fervently trying to avoid.

    Examining the failed reelection campaigns of 1976, 1980, and 1992 may offer lessons for the current Oval Office occupant.

    Election of 1976

    Gerald Ford (48% of the popular vote) vs. Jimmy Carter (50.1%)

    Electoral College: Ford 240, Carter 297 

    Why Ford Lost: First, he was an unelected incumbent, and his unpopular pardon of disgraced predecessor Richard Nixon dogged his campaign. (Over the years, however, the pardon decision was viewed more favorably.)

    Second, Ford presided over what was perceived as a lackluster economy with high unemployment/inflation and slow growth. In the same vein, Ford’s much-derided Whip Inflation Now initiative still ranks high among domestic policy blunders. (During my after-school job as a Woolworth’s cashier, management pinned a WIN button on my blouse.)

    Third, the dramatic fall of South Vietnam occurred on April 30, 1975. The helicopter evacuations from the roof of the U.S. Embassy in Saigon left a devastating image that not only stained Ford’s administration but negatively impacted American foreign policy for decades.

    Fourth, even with the economy showing signs of improvement in 1976, Ford could not escape the general feeling that voters thought it was time to put the calamitous Nixon/Watergate/Vietnam years in the rearview mirror.

    Enter Jimmy Carter, a little known one-term governor and peanut farmer from Georgia. He was positioned as an unblemished “outsider” when Washington’s leadership represented scandal and failure at home and abroad. With the slogan “A Leader, for a Change,” Carter parlayed that prevailing national attitude to his advantage, while famously saying, “I will never lie to you.” 

    Ford’s Last Job Approval Rating Before the 1976 Election50%.

    Ford Campaign Ad:  “Peace With Freedom.”

    Lessons for Trump:

    A similar “time to move on” national attitude must be messaged against, but in a positiveunifying way. 

    Election of 1980

    Jimmy Carter (41% of the popular vote) vs. Ronald Reagan (50.7%)

    Electoral College: Carter 49, Reagan 489

    Why Carter Lost: A majority of Americans had come to the conclusion that he was a weak leader who was not up to the task.

    Voters were fed up with a disastrous negative-growth economy (-0.3 GDP). There was high unemployment (7.2%); hyper-inflation (13.3% in 1979, 12.5% in 1980); record-high interest rates (average mortgage interest rate: 13.7%) and an energy crisis.

    All of the above was coupled with seemingly out-of-control international events perceived by voters as rooted in flawed presidential leadership responsible for America’s diminished global standing. The national ego was battered by the Iranian hostage crisis, including a deadly desert rescue debacle;  Russia’s invasion of Afghanistan; and America’s absence at the 1980 Moscow Olympics. 

    The stars were aligned for two-term former California Gov. Ronald Reagan to win in the greatest landslide since Franklin Roosevelt’s 1936 reelection. Reagan presented himself as a strong, principled leader with an optimistic vision of the future. Contributing to Reagan’s success was an ability to connect with Americans through his extraordinary communication skills (especially compared to Carter’s), honed by his years as a Hollywood actor and leader of the nation’s most populous state.

    Reagan’s campaign slogan was “Let’s make America great again.” (Sound familiar?)

    Most Memorable Campaign Moment: At the end of the only debate between Carter and Reagan, held on Oct. 28, 1980, the challenger looked straight into the television camera and asked, “Are you better off now than you were four years ago?” Since then, that question has been raised in nearly all presidential campaigns by both parties.

    Carter’s Last Job Approval Rating Before the Election33%   

    Carter Campaign AdsHerehere, and here.

    Lessons for Trump:

    Carter was perceived as reluctant leader, poor communicator, and generally not up to the demands of the job. Forty years later, Trump views himself as strong, tough, and decisive at home and abroad. But there is a YUGE gap between Trump’s perception and that of many voters, which must be bridged if he is to be reelected in this time of grave national crises.

    Election of 1992

    George H.W. Bush (37.4% of the popular vote) vs. Bill Clinton (43%) vs. Ross Perot (18.9%)

    Electoral College: Bush 168, Clinton 370, Perot 0

    Why Bush Lost:  First, a now-iconic campaign slogan, “It’s the economy, stupid,” was brilliantly hatched and executed by Clinton’s team. The economy was in recession through much of 1992, and Clinton’s message discipline was solid.

    Second, Bush’s defeat could be couched as “passing the torch to a new generation.” (A classic phrase from President John F. Kennedy’s 1961 inaugural address.) Clinton was a charismatic Arkansas governor who, at age 46, was the first baby boomer to be nominated by a major party.

    Third, Clinton out-campaigned and out-maneuvered President Bush, who had successfully led the nation through the Persian Gulf War. Team Clinton created and implemented “rapid response” messaging along with a “war room.” They hammered the perception that the president was out of touch with the times, including pop culture. But Clinton was “hip,” and when he played the saxophone on “The Arsenio Hall Show,” presidential campaigns were changed forever.

    Fourth is the most contested factor that might explain Bush’s defeat — Ross Perot’s role as the third-party candidate. But the enduring question is to what degree, since Perot won nearly 19% of the popular vote. Upon Perot’s death last year, RealClearPolitics elections analyst Sean Trende revisited this quandary in a piece headlined “We Don’t Know Whether Perot Cost Bush in 1992.”

    Most Memorable Campaign Moment: In truth, there were few memorable moments from that campaign, but one brief gesture by the incumbent forever enshrined itself in presidential debate history. Here is a U.S. News & World Report headline: “George H.W. Bush Checks His Watch During Debate With Bill Clinton and Ross Perot.” The subhead: “Where Bush appeared impatient, ‘Clinton steps in and empathizes, empathizes, empathizes.’ “

    That innocent wristwatch glance crystallized the perception that President Bush’s time was up.

    Bush’s Last Job Approval Rating Before the 1992 Election34%   

    Bush Campaign Ad“Agenda” from October 1992.

    Lessons for Trump:

    Don’t be outmaneuvered on the campaign “trail,” which is even more challenging this year with no physical “trail.”

    Have a clear, concise pitch and institute “message discipline.”

    Feel the pain of your people. Bill Clinton mastered that act with Bush perceived as being less empathic to the struggles of average Americans. Trump is plagued with a similar problem as the entire nation struggles to deal with the coronavirus and crippled economy. 

    Overall Lessons for Trump From the Last Three One-Term Presidents

    If the election verdict is “time to move on,” be graceful and accept the will of the people.  A hallmark of our nation is its smooth transition of power.

    But if defeated, look forward to “doing good” as an ex-president. Americans have a remarkably strong and consistent record of liking their ex-presidents (reelected or not) more than when they were in the Oval Office.

    And please never again say, “It’ll end up being a rigged election” or I should get a third term. Both statements practically guarantee that Jimmy Carter will personally welcome you to his lonely, exclusive club where he is the only living member.

  • Virginia Plans Mandatory COVID-19 Vaccinations For All Residents
    Virginia Plans Mandatory COVID-19 Vaccinations For All Residents

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 21:40

    As Friday’s hospitalization numbers across the Sun Belt appear to confirm CDC head Dr. Robert Redfield’s assertion that the American COVID-19 outbreak has peaked and is starting to fade, the State of Virginia is setting a new precedent by seriously discussing forcing Virginians to be vaccinated with whatever rushed-to-marked candidate the FDA approves first.

    During an interview that aired on Friday, the state’s health commissioner said he planned to invoke state law to make vaccinations mandatory – once a western product is available, presumably.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Norman Oliver

    Here’s more from ABC News 8:

    State Health Commissioner Dr. Norman Oliver told 8News on Friday that he plans to mandate coronavirus vaccinations for Virginians once one is made available to the public.

    Virginia state law gives the Commissioner of Health the authority to mandate immediate immunizations during a public health crisis if a vaccine is available. Health officials say an immunization could be released as early as 2021.

    Dr. Oliver says that, as long as he is still the Health Commissioner, he intends to mandate the coronavirus vaccine.

    “It is killing people now, we don’t have a treatment for it and if we develop a vaccine that can prevent it from spreading in the community we will save hundreds and hundreds of lives,” Oliver said.

    Pro-medical-choice activists in the state argue that the issue is a matter of medical choice, and that the hasty “expedited” approval process being implemented by the FDA is grounds for concern. State health authorities insist, meanwhile, that they would never mandate a vaccine that hadn’t already proven to be safe.

    Virginia Freedom Keepers Director of Communications Kathleen Medaries, a mother of three from Chesterfield, says this is a matter of medical choice.This is not a Republican or Democrat issue. It’s not a pro-vaccine or anti-vaccine issue,” Medaries said. “For me, it’s an issue of being able to assess each vaccine for myself and my family one at a time.”

    […]

    “He shouldn’t be the one person to make a decision for all of Virginians,””Medaries responded.

    The state’s top medical official is opposed to a bill that has been put forth in the state assembly that would create more exemptions to the mandatory vaccination power, allowing exemptions on religious and other grounds.

    Oliver believes that COVID-19 is a public health emergency that should take precedent over everything else, and that vaccine-assisted herd immunity is the state’s best and only real defense.

    The decision comes after Massachusetts said it would make the flu vaccine mandatory this year as part of a campaign to protect the state’s medical system. We suspect Virginia and Massachusetts won’t be the only states to discuss mandatory COVID and/or flu vaccination in the coming weeks, as the school year begins.

  • "It's Just Absolutely Incredible": What's Going On In The Corporate Bond Market Is Stunning
    "It's Just Absolutely Incredible": What's Going On In The Corporate Bond Market Is Stunning

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 21:21

    In a recent report from hedge fund giant Brevan Howard, the investor pointed out the biggest flaw in the policy response to the covid pandemic: “Many businesses face solvency risks that are not addressed by borrowing; a debt overhang cannot be cured by more borrowing no matter how cheap it may be.

    While that statement is absolutely true, and it applies not only to the aftermath of the covid shutdowns but everything that has happened in the past decade, it hasn’t stopped both government and corporations from going on a historic borrowing spree, in the former case thanks to “helicopter money” whereby central banks now directly monetize all the debt government treasurys have to sell, and in the latter as company CFOs take advantage of record low rates to borrow as much as possible before the window closes. This can be seen in the Goldman chart below which shows that both investment grade and high yield leverage is at all time high levels:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The numbers are staggering: on Friday, BofA Chief Investment Strategist Michael Hartnett calculated that US corporate bond issuance is currently annualizing a mindblowing $2.5 trillion this year, between $2.1TN for IG and $0.4TN for high yield. As Bloomberg writes today, while much of that fresh cash – more than $1.6 trillion in total – has helped scores of companies stay afloat during the pandemic lockdown, “it now threatens to curb an economic recovery that was already showing signs of sputtering” as many companies will have to divert even more cash to repaying these obligations at the same time that their profits sink, leaving them with less to spend on expanding payrolls or upgrading facilities in months ahead.

    The paradox is that this is all by design: in doing everything in its power to prevent the corporate debt bubble – which was already at a record size before the covid pandemic – from bursting, the US central bank unleashed monetary policies that have terminally decoupled the bond market from all fundamentals, while also arresting default risks by taking over credit risk without punishing investors and moving into lower-rated debt than ever before, which started off the risk-on period as Nordea’s Andreas Steno Larsen writes today and shows in the following chart:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In a sign of just how pronounced the borrowing overhang has become, Bloomberg points out that the average junk-rated company had debt levels relative to earnings that were so high in the middle of the year, according to a new analysis by Bloomberg Intelligence, that they almost would have tripped do-not-touch alerts from banking regulators a few years ago. Those warnings back then only applied to a handful of borrowers. Had regulators not opted to drop these warnings, they could today apply to far more.

    Corporations have also been borrowing heavily as the Fed has slashed short-term interest rates to near zero and supported credit markets through, for example, buying company bonds. Lower rates have spurred investors to buy higher-yielding, riskier securities, which has allowed even junk-rated firms to borrow more to tide them over during the crisis. High-grade issuers have already sold more bonds in 2020 than any other full year in history. Junk corporations have surpassed 2019’s total already.

    Some specifics: leverage (i.e., the ratio of total debt to Ebitda) for investment-grade companies was 3.53x in the second quarter for the Bloomberg Barclays U.S. Corporate high-grade index. That’s the highest in data going back to 1998, and is up from 3.42 in the first three months of the year, when the impact of the pandemic was only just beginning to show up in earnings. It compares with a 20-year average of 2.65.

    For high yield, leverage stood at a record 5.42 at the end of June, up from 4.93 at the end of March and 4.44 at the end of 2019. Avis Budget Group Inc., the car rental company, had debt equal to 27 times earnings as of June 30, up from five times at the end of March, as it burned cash in the second quarter, although that figure could improve later this year as its earnings start to rebound. In 2016, banking regulators pushed back against leveraged buyouts that left companies with ratios above six.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    No matter how one slices the data the message is clear: “An overburdened corporate sector is likely to grow less rapidly and that could slow the whole recovery down,” said Kathy Jones, chief fixed-income strategist for Charles Schwab.

    Of course, none of that matters now when rates are at all time lows, but fast forward a few years when inflation kicks in and suddenly corporate America is facing another unprecedented crisis as it has to not only rollover record amounts of debt but has to refi into ever higher rates.

    Quoting Lale Topcuoglu, senior fund manager at JO Hambro Capital Management in New York, Bloomberg warns that a slower recovery could have wide-reaching implications in financial markets. Many securities prices reflect investors’ expectation that profits will normalize next year, when in fact it could take at least two or three years. Not surprisingly, she believes that many junk bonds as being overpriced.

    “It just seems absolutely incredible how much people are closing their eyes and buying,” Topcuoglu said.

    The good news is that unlike last year when much of the new debt issuance went to fund stock buybacks, much of the debt sold in recent months has refinanced maturing borrowings allowing companies to lock in even lower rates for the next 5 to 10 years; furthermore many of the companies are holding on to the money they raised as cash and may end up not spending it.

    And while the fact that companies managed to stay afloat during the pandemic is “a good thing compared with the alternative of even more corporations having gone bankrupt” not all companies have been able to access that credit, with smaller borrowers often getting shut out as a DoubleLine Portlio Manager wrote WEdnesday in “Large Firms Reap Benefits From Central Bank Easing As Small Ones Suffer.”

    To be sure, even the large companies face a day of reckoning or as Bloomberg puts it simply “a hangover” as many corporations were already groaning under their debt loads even before the Covid-19 pandemic, and now will have to work harder to cut borrowings as earnings remain depressed. Even if companies are hanging on to the money they borrowed, they must still pay interest on it, and could eventually use the cash if the pandemic drags on. Many will simply revert to using the debt proceeds to repurchasing their stock and make quick profits for management and shareholders as we pointed out earlier this week. Ultimately it is the economy, and the middle class workers who will suffer the most as chief JPM economist Michael Feroli wrote, warning that with corporations shunting more of their earnings toward paying interest and paying down debt, they will struggle to hire and invest as much as they would at the end of a more conventional recession.” That could translate to a relatively sluggish recovery instead of the fast, “V-shaped” one many investors hope for.

    “The debt overhang is going to be a headwind for capital spending and for hiring, not just in the second half of the year but probably into next year as well,” Feroli said.

    Another paradox is that as corporate leverage is rising to all time highs, rates continue to sink as investors have no choice but to buy their debt, which in turn forces even more debt issuance, even higher leverage and so on, until the Fed is tasked with yet another corporate debt bailout:

    With short-term interest rates having fallen to near-zero levels, borrowing is cheaper for most companies than it was just a year ago. Average yields on U.S. investment-grade corporate bonds touched all time lows of 1.82% earlier this month, and are still hovering near those levels, according to Bloomberg Barclays index data.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As a result of record low rates, even as leverage soars, interest coverage, or EBITDA to total interest expense, has fallen to 5.8 in the second quarter for investment-grade companies, compared with a 20-year average closer to 7. The June 2020 level was the lowest since 2003. For junk-rated companies, the interest coverage ratio fell to 2.3 in June, also the lowest since 2003.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unlike the 2008 bubble, ratings firms have taken note of the broad downward trend in credit quality, with S&P downgrading more high-yield debt in the second quarter, relative to upgrades, than any time in at least a decade, according to data compiled by Bloomberg. That too has not stopped investors from piling on: just recently junk-rated Ball Corporation sold debt for the lowest ever yield for a “high” yield bond at 2.875%.

    Meanwhile, corporate earnings per share fell by about a third in the second quarter from the same period last year, and are likely to fall in the third and fourth quarters as well and may not recover their 2018 levels until the end of 2021. As a result, strategists expect leverage and interest coverage to erode further.

    None of this fazes investors who have gone “balls to the wall” buying corporate debt with the Fed’s blessing now that the central bank is buying both investment grade and high yield ETFs and bonds in the open market. To justify the euphoria, investors have given companies a break for about a year and are looking ahead into mid-2021 or even later to evaluate where they will perform after, for example, the world finds and distributes a Covid-19 vaccine. That to Bloomberg explains why cruise companies that are burning cash, such as Royal Caribbean Cruises Ltd. and Carnival Corp., have been able to borrow repeatedly, and have seen most of their new bonds trade well above the price at which they were originally sold.

    But even if bond prices are broadly rising, investors need to be cognizant of the risks they’re buying, said Schwab’s Jones.

    This cycle is very different because we’ve had so much support from central banks and we have so much liquidity in the market,” Jones said. “But the old saying ‘liquidity does not equate to solvency’ is something people need to keep in mind when they’re investing.”

    Brevan Howard would most certainly agree.

    We give the final word to GnS Economics’ founder Tuomas Malinen who today writes that “we have stock markets that have decoupled from real economic activity to an unprecedented degree and a moribund European banking sector practically doomed to collapse. The constant resuscitation and bailouts of the central banks since the last crisis in 2009 have pushed us to the brink of  ‘Financial Armageddon’, initiated this time by the repo-market implosion and the coronavirus pandemic.”

    His conclusion: “When it truly gets going, as it likely will, do not blame the virus. Blame the reckless central bankers.

  • This Is What A Nation Cut Off From The Rest Of The World Looks Like
    This Is What A Nation Cut Off From The Rest Of The World Looks Like

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 21:20

    Submitted by Christopher Dembik of Saxobank

    Earlier this morning, there has been a couple of Japanese data releases. Japanese consumer price inflation was unexciting with a rate at 0% YoY. While we see some relative price changes in many countries, the basic story for the moment is that inflation will remain low in most countries. In addition, Japan National Tourism Organization has published its latest data regarding the flow of foreign visitors in July. Basically, it shows what a nation cut off from the rest of the world looks like.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The flow of foreign visitors in Japan published by Japan National Tourism Organization is out this morning.

    The country was supposed to welcome an unprecedented number of Olympic fans from all around the world just about now, but the pandemic has turned everything upside down.

    Arrivals of foreign visitors plunge 99% YoY in July, at 3,800 individuals (slightly up compared to the previous month, when it stood at 2,600 individuals). For the sake of comparison, at the beginning of the year, the country recorded more than 2.6 million foreign visitors in a month’s time.

    Whilst the country expected to draw around 40 million visitors this year, the final number for 2020 might fall to 7-8 million at best, which would represent a drop of 80% compared to the target. Over the past years, the contribution of travel and tourism to GDP has significantly increased, to reach 7% in 2019, on the back of government’s incentives to promote foreign tourism via marketing push overseas and eased visa requirements.

    The COVID-19 constitutes a serious setback for the government’s hopes for tourism and it is unlikely that the recent campaign to spur domestic tourism launched on July 22 will offset losses generated by the drop in the flow of foreign visitors. Considering the number of new COVID-19 cases has sharply increased since mid-July and that many countries at global level are facing the acute risk of second wave, the country is not expected to reopen to foreigners anytime soon and will probably postpone initial plans to let foreign students and businessmen return.

    Like Japan, many other countries has decided to close borders to fight against the spread of the virus, thus hitting hard the tourism sector. At the start of the pandemic, many economists underestimated the negative ripple effect on tourism.

    Now, there is a broad consensus that global tourism will not get back to normal before at least 2022-23, if it ever gets back to normal.

  • Black Billionaire Who Paid Off Morehouse Graduates' Loans Under Investigation By IRS
    Black Billionaire Who Paid Off Morehouse Graduates' Loans Under Investigation By IRS

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 21:00

    Black billionaire Robert Smith who, along with Floyd Mayweather and Tyler Perry, paid for George Floyd’s extravagant funeral, and who – most famously – once promised to pay off the student loans for an entire class of Morehouse College students at the close of his speech, is fighting a criminal tax inquiry, Bloomberg reports.

    The story of the actual fraud is somewhat opaque – not unlike the deed itself, which allegedly saw assets flow through various offshore entities connected to Smith and another businessman who was one of Smith’s early mentors, Robert Brockman (the man who gave Smith some of the early investor capital he used to power). In 2000, Brockman contributed to the $1 billion Smith used to launch his San Francisco-based Vista Partners, a private equity firm.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to Bloomberg, Smith is trying to convince the DoJ to forgo any criminal charges and instead settle the matter civilly. Given the current climate, the IRS pursuing one of America’s only black billionaires wouldn’t be a great look for the federal government, and the DoJ might have a hard time convincing a jury, especially considering the confusing nature of the investigation, which involves tracing $200 million in assets through a web of offshore entities before they can even establish whether Smith was indeed the beneficial owner of these assets.

    Justice Department to forgo criminal charges and resolve his case with a civil settlement, according to three of the people. A conviction could send him to prison and force him out of Vista Equity Partners, a money management firm with $65 billion in assets that has brought him fame and a luxe lifestyle.

    Part of his defense rests on a reported pledge by the private equity fund to direct proceeds to charity. If prosecutors determine that the proceeds were designated for charity all along, it could bolster the argument that Smith was never the beneficial owner and not liable for taxes.

    Interestingly enough, Bloomberg’s sources claim Smith has talked to prosecutors about the possibility of cooperating in exchange for leniency. Similar to the allegations against Steve Bannon, Smith appears to be only a secondary suspect – and it’s possible that the investigation into Smith was only brought about to pressure him to cooperate.

    Whatever the case may be, it’s early days.

    The Justice Department has discretion in deciding whom to charge, weighing factors such as the prosecution’s evidence, the strength of the defense and the way a jury would likely respond to the facts. Smith, a prominent Black businessman and philanthropist, may be viewed sympathetically by a jury in a time of protests for racial justice, lawyers said.

    “The issue of jury appeal is often considered by prosecutors in cases that are a close call,” said David S. Weinstein, a former federal prosecutor in Miami who isn’t involved in the case. “If 12 jurors believe they want to acquit a defendant based on something other than the evidence, that’s their inherent right. They may believe it’s not the right time or place to bring a case against a particular defendant.”

    Smith pledged $34 million to pay off the student loans of an entire Morehouse College class last year, a dedication that earned him a place among Bloomberg’s ’50 People Who Defined 2019″.

    But given the nature of the allegations against him, after reading the Bloomberg story, it’s worth wondering: Would Bloomberg’s reporters have been this forgiving if the person at the center of the investigation was anybody but the black billionaire who became a folk hero by paying off a whole class of students’ loans?

  • Why 'Smarter Computers' Won't Make Socialism More Workable
    Why 'Smarter Computers' Won't Make Socialism More Workable

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 20:40

    Authored by Mark DeWeaver via The Mises Institute,

    Austrian economists have traditionally argued against central planning on the grounds that much of the economically relevant knowledge in society could never be made available to a single planning authority. But today, with an unprecedented and ever increasing volume and variety of data now potentially accessible to the planner, it seems that an omniscient government may be possible after all. Has the big data revolution rendered the promarket arguments of Ludwig von Mises and Friedrich von Hayek obsolete?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In chapter 3 of their 1920 bestseller, The ABC of Communism, Soviet theorists Nikolai Bukharin and Yevgeni Preobrazhensky claimed that in the communist society of the future the state would “know in advance how much labor to assign to the various branches of industry; what products are required and how much of each it is necessary to produce; how and where machines must be provided.”

    In reality, of course, the Soviet Union never came close to realizing this vision.

    Given the impossibility of setting targets for the millions of individual items required by a modern economy, planning at the highest level had to be limited to some sixty thousand aggregate categories, which were then disaggregated at lower tiers of the bureaucracy (see chapter 7 of  János Kornai’s The Socialist System for more on planning in the USSR). Contrary to Bukharin and Preobrazhensky’s expectations, the result was a chronic failure to allocate resources efficiently. Shortages of essential industrial and consumer goods became the norm.

    Could this failure have been avoided if only more advanced computational capabilities had been available? Nowadays, problems involving millions of variables are no longer insoluble. Might the day have at last arrived when, as Oscar Lange wrote in 1967, the market process “may be considered as a computing device of the pre-electronic age?”

    As several authors have recently argued (here and here, for example), in the absence of markets planning would have to proceed without the information on supply and demand conditions revealed by actual transactions. In the short term it might be possible to make decisions about “what products are required and how much of each it is necessary to produce” based on the supply-demand equilibria prevailing in a preexisting market economy, but as the situation changed the plan would quickly lose its relevance to the real world. Sooner or later, the planner would end up “floundering in the ocean of possible and conceivable economic combinations without the compass of economic calculation,” as Mises put it in Economic Calculation in the Socialist Commonwealth.

    But in fact an even more fundamental objection can be raised: the market process is nothing like a computing device. As Austrian economists have long emphasized, competition in markets is not simply a mechanism for transitioning to preexisting equilibrium outcomes. It is rather an engine of knowledge creation and entrepreneurial discovery. Running a business is not just a matter of resolving uncertainty about “known unknowns” through an orderly learning procedure. It requires realizations regarding “unknown unknowns” that did not initially play a role in decision-making.

    Consider, for example, the famous case of Walmart’s use of data analytics to predict a jump in demand for strawberry Pop-Tarts in areas about to be hit by Hurricane Frances in 2004. As a series of zeros and ones in computer memory, the big data behind this prediction was not in itself information. It had first to be interpreted by a human being with an incentive to answer a particular question and a hypothesis about which variables might be significant. Someone had to have an intuition that an adverse weather event might create a profit opportunity at some particular time and place. Big data and artificial intelligence are tools to enhance the entrepreneurial discovery process, not a substitute for the inspiration of the profit-seeking market participant.

    The existence of big databases does not make it any easier to centralize society’s stock of useful knowledge, because local knowledge is necessary to make productive use of data. “Planners,” as Israel Kirzner points out in chapter 2 of The Meaning of Market Process, “simply do not know what to look for: they do not know where or of what kind the knowledge gaps are.” Even if provided with links to every network node in existence, they would still be incapable of replicating the insights of countless individual decision-makers, each with his or her own unique viewpoint and distinct motivation to generate data-driven ideas.

    Big data analytics is a means of strengthening the market process by reducing search costs, not a means of replacing it. This technology undoubtedly has important operational implications for individual companies. But it does not make the private firm any less necessary as an institution for efficient resource allocation. Indeed, big data is entirely irrelevant to Hayek’s local knowledge problem, because it does not provide any new means of aggregating the understandings of different individuals. Big data, while covering a wealth of different local situations, is not knowledge. Artificial intelligence software does not “know” anything.

    There is thus no reason to think central planning could work any better with bigger datasets and faster processing power than it did during Soviet times, when the planning had to be done with slide rules and primitive mainframes. Smarter devices will not make socialism smarter.

  • Suspect In Brutal Portland Head-Kicking Turns Himself In After Manhunt
    Suspect In Brutal Portland Head-Kicking Turns Himself In After Manhunt

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 20:20

    A 25-year-old man has turned himself in after Portland police launched a manhunt for him in connection to a brutal Sunday night attack on a man which put him in the hospital.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Marquise Lee Love was booked into the Multnomah County Detention Center on Friday after turning himself in just before 8:30 a.m. according to jail records.

    “I am pleased the suspect in this case turned himself in and appreciate all of the efforts to facilitate this safe resolution,” said PPB Chief Chuck Lovell, according to Fox News. “Thank you to all of the members of the public who have provided information and tips to our investigators. Your assistance is very much appreciated.”

     Love was caught on video kicking victim Adam Haner in the head. Haner says he was yanked” out of his truck “before I even got my door open,” adding “I was just standing for myself as a citizen.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “If you can’t do that on a street, then what can you do?”

    Haner was seen on video revving the engine of his truck and slowly rolling the vehicle forward until he speeds away — all while people from the group can be seen running up to the vehicle, kicking and shouting at it. Just moments before he drove off, someone from the crowd was seen punching and jumping his girlfriend, who was identified in reports as Tammie Martin.

    Shortly before 10:30 p.m. Sunday, police responded to a 911 call from someone who reported that protesters “chased a white Ford” 4×4 truck, which then crashed in the downtown area, according to a department press release. A caller told police an estimated nine to 10 people began “beating the guy,” the caller stated. –Fox News

    “Investigators learned that the victim may have been trying to help a transgender female who had some of her things stolen in the area … where this incident began,” police said on Monday.”

    Haner was transported to a hospital while still unconscious. He is now recovering at home.

  • Navy Seal Credited With Killing Bin Laden Banned From Delta Flights Over Maskless Pic
    Navy Seal Credited With Killing Bin Laden Banned From Delta Flights Over Maskless Pic

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 20:20

    In the latest bizarre incident of this ‘lockdown summer’ of COVID-19 social distancing measures and policies, Robert J. O’Neill  the former US Navy Seal who’s long claimed to have taken the kill shot on Osama bin Laden during the famous May 2011 raid on the Abbottabad, Pakistan compound — says he’s been permanently banned from Delta Air Lines for sharing a social media pic.

    Specifically, he appeared to brag about flouting Delta’s mandatory mask policy aboard flights in the post. A since deleted tweet and photo showed O’Neill sitting on a Delta flight Wednesday while maskless.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The now deleted photo which got former Navy Seal Robert J. O’Neill in trouble with Delta.

    Other passengers all around him could be seen with masks, while O’Neill commented in the post, subsequently deleted when it became center of controversy: “I’m not a pu**y.”

    “I didn’t delete my tweet. My wife did,” he later wrote. A day later on Thursday, he tweeted, “I just got banned from Delta for posting a picture… Wow.” 

    “I had my mask in my lap. Everyone has gone crazy,” he stated additionally.

    Needless to say the 44-year old who has been frequently featured in the media, especially on Fox News, for his heroism during arguably the US military’s most famous terrorist targeted kill operation in history, set off a firestorm on social media, with other high profile people and even celebrities like Alyssa Milano piling on against him.

    Milano and some others went so far as to dramatically claim the veteran and war hero might actually end up killing people by not wearing a mask:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Weeks prior to the Delta incident, O’Neill vowed to stand his ground against authorities as well as social pressures which he says are ultimately overstepping bounds:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    He hasn’t backed down, instead going on the offensive against what he’s cast as a fundamental issue of individual liberty.

    After his original photo post went viral, in which he also decried the airline’s “dumbass mask” policy, Delta said it would review the matter. 

    And some supporters on Twitter noted the irony of the whole situation:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    An official Delta statement cited in The New York Post said subsequently, “All customers who don’t comply with our mask-wearing requirement risk losing their ability to fly Delta in the future.” It’s even possible that Delta was willing to initially let it slide or at least look the other way, but then the social media mob jumped on the issue – led by celebrities – and the rest is history.

  • Biden: "I Would Shut Country Down Again If Recommended By Scientists"
    Biden: "I Would Shut Country Down Again If Recommended By Scientists"

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 20:00

    Throughout the Democratic National Convention there was a common, if contradictory, theme: on one hand, the Democrats bashed Trump for his response to the covid pandemic while at the same time they lamented the dismal state of the economy, where millions have lost their jobs and countless corporations have gone bankrupt. Well, which one is it, because you can’t have both: if Trump had enacted a more forceful response to the pandemic, the US economy would have been shut down for longer (as Neel Kashkari now urges, seeking another 6 weeks of shutdowns and setting the stage for the next crisis); alternatively the economy would be firing on all cylinders but the fallout from covid would be much more widespread. 

    On Friday afternoon, in an exclusive interview with ABC “World News Tonight”, Biden revealed on which side of the fence he is saying that as president, he would shut the country down to stop the spread of COVID-19 if the move was recommended to him by scientists.

    “I would shut it down; I would listen to the scientists,” Biden told Muir Friday, alongside his running mate, Kamala Harris, during their first joint interview since officially becoming the Democratic Party’s presidential and vice presidential nominees.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Biden also criticized what he argued is the “fundamental flaw” of the Trump administration’s response to the coronavirus pandemic, that the nation cannot begin to recover economically until the virus and public health emergency is under control, which is strange considering that in isolated cases such as Sweden which did not succumb to the media panic and did not enforce a uniform shutdown – while at the same time not forcing the population to take draconian measures to limit the spread of covid – the economy hit was far less than most of its European counterparts, while the Covid breakout has almost completely faded.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “I will be prepared to do whatever it takes to save lives because we cannot get the country moving, until we control the virus,” Biden added. “That is the fundamental flaw of this administration’s thinking to begin with. In order to keep the country running and moving and the economy growing, and people employed, you have to fix the virus, you have to deal with the virus.”

    Biden’s statement brings up one immediate question: which scientists would he listen to? The WHO which, under heavy influence from China, pretended for well over a month that covid was innocuous as the following Feb 23 soundbite from WHO Director Tedros Ghebreyesus confirms:

    I have spoken consistently about the need for facts, not fear. Using the word pandemic now does not fit the facts, but it may certainly cause fear. This is not the time to focus on what word we use. That will not prevent a single infection today or save a single life today.

    … and only on March 11 – just days before the US announced economic shutdowns – declared the coronavirus outbreak a pandemic (apparently succumbing to “causing fear”). Or perhaps Biden should have listened to scientists like the US Surgeon General Jerome Adams, who on February 29 tweeted “Seriously people- STOP BUYING MASKS! They are NOT effective in preventing general public from catching #Coronavirus.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Or perhaps he meant listening to scientists like Anthony Fauci who on June 12 said “we know that you don’t need an N95 [mask] if you’re an ordinary person in the street” adding that “masks are not 100% protective.” When confronted with this contradiction in the government’s public-health advice, Fauci said “actually the circumstances have changed,” he said. “That’s the reason why.”

    So will Biden shutdown the entire economy, leading to tens of millions more in job losses, just because it is the prevailing opinion circumstance at the time that he should do so?

    Or perhaps what Biden meant to say is that as a leader it is his job to weigh costs and benefits of all policy options, as the catastrophic consequences of another economic shutdown could and likely would outweigh the benefits from a draconian response to a disease which as we showed recently has led to virtually no outsized under-40 fatalities, and yet as Jim Reid said in July, it is the “younger people will be suffering most from the economic impact of Covid-19 for many years to come, we wonder how history will judge the global response.”

    We wonder too, especially now that we know that if there is another wave of covid in the US – whether domestic, or imported from China again or some other country – the US will have another full-blown economic shutdown, just as Minneapolis Fed president Neel Kashkari has been urging (we also know who Fed chair would be in a Biden administration). 

    One final point about science, best laid out on twitter, is that “Science is NOT a magic wand. Especially “science” as it’s practiced today. Bureaucratic science is ALL about consensus. What gets funded is political. What gets published is political.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

     

  • US Says Maduro Keeping Hundreds Of Americans "Hostage" As They Can't Leave Venezuela
    US Says Maduro Keeping Hundreds Of Americans "Hostage" As They Can't Leave Venezuela

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 19:40

    The US State Department says the government of President Nicolas Maduro is blocking US citizens from leaving Venezuela, including dual nationals, after the United States attempted to arrange evacuation flights that Washington says are for “humanitarian” needs.

    “We have made offers in the past that would allow U.S. citizens to leave, but all were rejected by Maduro and his cronies,” US State Dept. spokeswoman Morgan Ortagus said in a written statement.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Venezuela state-owned airline company Conviasa, file image.

    She said the US is currently exploring other options for getting Americans back safely to US soil, though without giving numbers of Americans stuck inside the Latin American country.

    Caracas appears to be disputing these claims, however, with Foreign Minister Jorge Arreaza stating on Thursday that the government has offered to return American citizens via flights on state-owned airline Conviasa.

    Ironically, the standoff appears centered on the fact that Conviasa remains under far-reaching Venezuela sanctions which have been in effect over the past year.

    A US diplomat based in neighboring Colombia alleged that Maduro was keeping the Americans “hostage”. James Story of the State Department’s Venezuela Affairs Unit gave in indication last week that the standoff could involve up to 1000 people or more.

    “I have more than 800 people who have asked for my support in helping leave the country,” he said, according to Reuters.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Aftermath of last May’s botched coup attempt by a Florida-based mercenary firm which attempted to enter Venezuela using boats out of Colombia. Image: ABC News

    So it appears the repatriation issue is centered on the Maduro government finding a creative way and leverage to highlight how destructive the sanctions regimen is on the country in what’s essentially a “use our state-owned airline or else it’s not our problem” moment.

    The crisis of the stranded Americans comes as not only sanctions are further crushing the already spiraling socialist economic and system, including derelict public infrastructure, but after the bizarre failed “invasion” attempt of a group of former Green Berets turned mercenaries on May 4. Two Americans were given 20 year prison sentences each, in a plot the Trump administration insists it had nothing to do with.

  • Former Green Beret Who Allegedly Spied For Russia Arrested
    Former Green Beret Who Allegedly Spied For Russia Arrested

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 19:20

    The latest in what has become a steady drumbeat of arrests of foreign spies and double-agents in the intelligence community continued on Friday when federal prosecutors charged a former Green Beret living in northern Virginia with espionage activity dating back to 1996.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The spy was accused of working with Russian Intelligence, and was even assigned a code name by his Russian handlers, implying that he was a de facto part of their organization. He allegedly signed a statement saying he wanted “to serve Russia.”

    It’s already the second arrest this week involving a US official caught stealing and transmitting US secrets to a foreign power. On Aug. 17, an ex-CIA officer was charged in Hawaii. Other cases involving corporate America and academia have cropped up earlier this year as well. 

    The US attorney who brought the case in released a statement promising to hold service member double-agents “accountable”.

    “When service members collude to provide classified information to our foreign adversaries, they betray the oaths they swore to their country and their fellow service members,” said G. Zachary Terwilliger, U.S. Attorney for the Eastern District of Virginia., whose office is prosecuting the case. “As this indictment reflects, we will be steadfast and dogged in holding such individuals accountable.”

    Debbins was arrested Friday, prosecutors told the AP. However, online court records remain sealed, so details of the case including related to Debbins’ representation are unclear.

    The espionage allegedly occurred between 1996 to 2011, prosecutors say, a period where Debbins served in the US Army Special Forces as a Green Beret.

  • AG Barr Throws Cold Water On Possible Trump Pardon Of "Traitor" Edward Snowden
    AG Barr Throws Cold Water On Possible Trump Pardon Of "Traitor" Edward Snowden

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 19:00

    Once again President Trump’s anti-establishment and ‘anti-deep state’ instincts look like they’ll be promptly reigned in by those around him. He shocked leaders in Congress and within his own administration when one week ago he mused openly in a New York Post interview that maybe Edward Snowden should be pardoned. In follow-up he said at a press briefing last Saturday “There are many, many people – it seems to be a split decision that many people think that he should be somehow treated differently, and other people think he did very bad things.” And further that: “I’m going to take a very good look at it.”

    The president raised eyebrows and anxiety across the D.C. beltway with his unprecedented remarks: “There are a lot of people that think that he is not being treated fairly. I mean, I hear that,” he had initially told NY Post, before adding: “Many people are on his side, I will say that. I don’t know him, never met him. But many people are on his side.” This immediately raised hopes among those that hail the NSA leaker as a whistleblower who exposed deeply unconstitutional surveillance of the domestic populace that he might one day soon see freedom.

    But now Attorney General William Barr is throwing cold water on such a bold prospect, saying to the Associated Press on Friday that he’d be “vehemently opposed” to any initiative to pardon Snowden, who remains on the run from US authorities – but given asylum in Russia. If he were to return to the United States he would face severe charges related to the Espionage Act and spilling of state secrets, which would certainly bring life imprisonment.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “He was a traitor and the information he provided our adversaries greatly hurt the safety of the American people,” Barr said in the new comments. Interestingly, Trump’s own view as expressed years ago was that Snowden was a “traitor”.

    Barr’s latest comments frame Snowden’s actions as motivated by money and fame, and not of out of a sense of patriotism or concern for upholding the Constitution: “He was peddling it around like a commercial merchant. We can’t tolerate that,” Barr added firmly.

    Recall that last year the DOJ under Barr fought to ensure that Snowden wouldn’t see any money generated from US sales of his tell-all book Permanent Record.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Critics have still claimed that Snowden has raked in millions from his online remote appearances at conferences, and in speaking events and interviews.

    This whole latest discussion as to the administration’s stance on Snowden had arisen when in the NY Post interview Trump’s former advisor Carter Page was brought up in connection with allegations of abuse and illegal surveillance under the aegis of the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act and the secret FISA court.

    After years of the whole sordid ‘Russiagate’ saga, it appears Trump has formed a new perspective and appreciation for just what Snowden was exposing, and what the government contractor was up against.

  • "These Are Staggering Numbers": Spending By Unemployed Americans Plunges As Fiscal Stimulus Ends
    "These Are Staggering Numbers": Spending By Unemployed Americans Plunges As Fiscal Stimulus Ends

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 18:40

    One month ago, with millions of newly unemployed Americans fearful about their future in an economy transformed by the covid pandemic, Deutsche Bank’s Jim Reid made a remarkable observation: “Recessions don’t usually result in personal income soaring, but this one has thanks to government support around the world.” This was shown in the following chart:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This was not a surprise: as Bank of America writes, one of the regular features of US recessions since the 1950s is that they always trigger, with a bit of a lag, an expansion of unemployment benefits. In normal times, benefits in the US are lower than for most other developed market economies, but there is an attempt to close some of the gap during the recession. In recent recessions the additional benefits have tended to be earlier, bigger and last longer. Thus benefits weren’t enhanced until the end of the 2001 recession and provided 13 weeks of additional benefits through Mar 2004. However, for the Great Recession of 2008-9 enhanced benefits were enacted on July 2008, a year before the end of the recession, lasting through December 2013, with the unemployment rate down to 6.7%.

    Initially the response to this crisis continued the trend toward stronger responses. Facing a much deeper and faster recession, enhanced benefits were almost immediately implemented and included a large bonus benefit of $600/week. Unfortunately, 4 months later and policy has taken a 180 degree turn: the benefit has been allowed to expire with an unemployment rate still north of 10%. Needless to say, it seems a bit early to declare mission accomplished.

    That said, the US is now caught in an unprecedented dilemma – as BofA also notes, “Absent government support disposable income would have fallen the most in history; with that support it has risen the most in history.”

    So what’s Congress – and the President – to do?

    Well, while the full impact of this economic transformation has yet to be felt across the country, at least for some the government support ended on July 31 when the infamous “fiscal cliff” hit and has yet to be renewed by Congress (executive orders signed by Trump two weeks ago have offset only a modest portion of the stimulus). The group most directly affected are recipients of unemployment insurance (UI) who have seen a notable reduction in income.

    To quantify the impact, Bank of America examined spending trends of the population of card holders who receive UI through ACH
    (direct deposit) and compared to all other households. What it found was a dramatic divergence as the YOY rate of growth for UI recipients slowed dramatically but increased for the broader population since Aug 1st.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    By income, over the past two weeks, the YOY growth rate slowed by 12% for the unemployed cohort (formerly) earning under $50K vs. a roughly 5% drop for the middle and upper income cohorts.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Some more math: a closeer look at the US household income statement underscores the resulting hole in household income as a result of the lapsing of the fiscal stimulu. The $600/week benefit was not a small support to the unemployed, it accounted for more than 60% of unemployment benefits in June (Chart 1). As the numbers on the chart indicate, that means a payment equivalent to about 5% of household income just disappeared. We don’t have data yet for July and August, but the daily treasury statement confirms the collapse in payments (Chart 2). In July the average daily outlay was $4.8bn, in the past five working days it has collapsed to $2.3bn, or a drop of more than half from the peak stimulus period.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    These charts show just how reliant on the government much of America has become.

    To be sure, much has been made about the resilience of the consumer so far in this crisis. Indeed, while services spending remains depressed, retail sales have fully recovered. However, as shown above, this recovery is deeply dependent on fiscal support. The next chart decomposes the various sources of income in recent months-unemployment benefits, other tax and transfer benefits, labor income, proprietors income and other income.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And here is BofA’s remarkable observation: “Absent government support disposable income would have fallen the most in history; with that support it has risen the most in history.” Note that the role of government stimulus is even bigger because the surge in proprietors income was due to another (now fading) federal program-the Paycheck Protection Program.

    So just how much of a hit to consumption – which represents 70% of US GDP – is coming?

    Well besides the already noted slump in spending by unemployed Americans, it will take time to see the full effect of the lost payments on consumer spending since presumably some recipients have savings or can postpone rent, credit card and other bills. The early evidence suggests “a moderate shock” according to BofA which again notes – see chart 4 above – that among the unemployed, lower income groups were among the hardest hit, with the YOY growth rate slowing by 12% for the cohort earning under $50K vs. a roughly 5pp drop for the middle and upper income cohorts.

    While the bank has not done a formal simulation of the impact of the lost fiscal stimulus, a simple illustrative example from the Petersen Institute can give a sense of the magnitude. First, they assume that 20MM people were unemployed at the end of July and that the $600 benefit has a fiscal multiplier of 1.5 (around the midpoint of the CBO’s range of estimates). The expiration of the $600/weekly benefit would therefore remove about $50bn in income from the economy per month. By their estimate, this would result in about a 2.5% decline in GDP, 2MM less jobs over the next year and a 1.2pp increase in the unemployment rate.

    As BofA summarizes “while illustrative, these are staggering numbers.” Moreover, based on the latest claims data there were around 15MM people on standard unemployment benefits as of the week ending August 8 with millions more in other programs such as Pandemic Unemployment Assistance (PUA). Thus, the full impact will likely be even more acute than modeled by BofA.

    The final question is whether President Trump’s executive orders can offset the shock to incomes.

    Let’s look first at the unemployment benefits and then at executive orders as a group. The executive order earmarks the $44bn in remaining FEMA funds for unemployment benefits of $300/week. In addition, initially it required states to provide $100/week in matching funds, but that requirement was dropped as it became clear that it would deter cash-strapped states from participating. Since the program is new it will take time for states to set up the new system, and indeed as we pointed out earlier this week, only 7 states have so far signed up for the $300 unemployment stimulus plan. Hopefully a number of states will have the program up and running by the September 1 launch date. While this new payment cuts the income shock in half, the funds are likely to only be enough to cover a month or so or into early October, one month ahead of the elections. Moreover, the order is backdated to start on Aug 1. So in practice, the funds may be disbursed quickly after states have set up their programs.

    The other major executive order is the deferral in the employee component of the payroll tax from September 1 until December 31. Objectively, this will provide very little support to consumer spending, and as we also noted earlier, business lobbies are already complaining that the program is “unworkable” – a letter co-signed by a number of groups including the US Chamber of Commerce, the National Retail Federation, the National Association of Manufactures and others argued that (1) the order would result in a significant tax bill in 2021 for employees, (2) the implementation of the order is unworkable and (3) many members expect to decline to actually adopt the deferral.

    Even for workers at firms that do implement the deferral the impact on spending will likely be very small. Households that are not in financial distress will save most of the tax cut in anticipation of a big bill at tax year end. Of course, workers that are in distress due to unemployment will not benefit from cutting a tax they are not paying. That leaves a relatively small group of households that remain cash strapped even though they are still employed. Presumably they will spend a good part of the tax cut.

    What happens next?

    As we have reported almost every day for the past three weeks, Congressional negotiations seem hopelessly bogged down and furthermore, Congress is currently on recess with funding the post office has become a major distraction. Both parties are having their conventions. Both parties are watching to see if the executive orders work. And an election looms.

    As BofA’s economists concludes, while they had hoped for a deal this month, “increasingly it looks like one only comes after Labor Day and after demonstrable pain in the economy.” Unfortunately, in a world in which the market no longer reflects the economy, it is unclear just what signal US politicians will seek to determine that the economy is “in pain.” Ironically this will make the disconnect between the soaring market which just hit a fresh all time high and the economy which is about to double dip, even more grotesque.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 21st August 2020

  • Swiss Watch Exports Tumble In July As Pandemic Slump Eases 
    Swiss Watch Exports Tumble In July As Pandemic Slump Eases 

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 02:45

    Could the worst be over for the Swiss watch industry? 

    The Swiss watch industry experienced an unparalleled shock, in the first half of the year, sparked by the virus pandemic resulting in a plunge in watch exports. However, there is some good news, the rate of decline in exports appears to be slowing, which was boosted by Chinese demand, reported Federation of the Swiss Watch Industry. 

    The federation reported Thursday watch exports in July plunged 17% on a year-over-year basis to $1.8 billion. The decline’s rate of change over the month was about 50% less than the prior month.

    Shipments to the US were “stable” over the month, but compared to China, demand jumped 59%.

    Performance in the main export markets for Swiss watches varied significantly in July. China (+59.1%) posted a second consecutive month of very strong growth, illustrating the early recovery in this market and the gradual resumption of domestic rather than foreign sales. Exports to the United States (-0.6%) were stable compared with July 2019, after three months of extremely poor performance. The situation in Hong Kong (-42.9%) showed no real signs of improving, although the decline was slightly less sharp than in April. Surprisingly, the United Kingdom (+2.5%) showed some signs of recovery ahead of other European markets, which were either stable (Germany -1.1%) or down sharply (Italy -33.6% and France -30.6%). Japan, in fourth place (-32.1%), another country deprived of Chinese tourists, remained clearly in the red. – the federation 

    The federation said, “less expensive watches saw a more significant fall, while those at the other end of the scale held up better, posting only a third of the decline in comparison. Volumes, in particular, decreased sharply for watches under 200 francs (export price), falling by -41.5% compared with last year. Watches priced at over 3,000 francs saw a dip in the value of 11.1%.” 

    The Swiss watch industry has been greatly affected by the virus-induced downturn, crushing worldwide consumers (see: “”Second Month Of Quasi-Paralysis” – Swiss Watch Exports Collapse 68% In May”).

    With recent data from the US, Europe, and China all pointing to a global economic recovery stalling, it’s likely the overall demand for Swiss watches will remain in a slump for several years. 

    Even before the virus pandemic, the Swiss watch industry was contending with overall shipments at three-decade lows. Demand for diamonds, jewelry, and timepieces were declining well before 2020.

    Smartwatches, such as the Apple Watch, Samsung Galaxy Watch, and the Garmin smartwatch, have taken considerable market share from Swiss watchmakers. 

    Perhaps the Chinese panic buying of fancy Swiss watches in July comes as smart money swaps out fiat for physical assets. 

  • Why Brennan, Strzok, & DOJ Needed Julian Assange Arrested; And Why UK Officials Obliged…
    Why Brennan, Strzok, & DOJ Needed Julian Assange Arrested; And Why UK Officials Obliged…

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/21/2020 – 02:00

    Authored by ‘sundance’ via TheConservativeTreehouse.com,

    According to reports in November of 2019, U.S Attorney John Durham and U.S. Attorney General Bill Barr were spending time on a narrowed focus looking carefully at CIA activity in the 2016 presidential election. One recent quote from a media-voice increasingly sympathetic to a political deep-state notes:

    “One British official with knowledge of Barr’s wish list presented to London commented that “it is like nothing we have come across before, they are basically asking, in quite robust terms, for help in doing a hatchet job on their own intelligence services””. (Link)

    It is interesting that quote came from a British intelligence official, as there appears to be  evidence of an extensive CIA operation that likely involved U.K. intelligence services. In addition, and as a direct outcome, there is an aspect to the CIA operation that overlaps with both a U.S. and U.K. need to keep Wikileaks founder Julian Assange under tight control. In this outline we will explain where corrupt U.S. and U.K. interests merge.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To understand the risk that Julian Assange represented to CIA interests, it is important to understand just how extensive the operations of the CIA were in 2016. It is within this network of foreign and domestic operations where FBI Agent Peter Strzok is clearly working as a bridge between the CIA and FBI operations.

    By now people are familiar with the construct of CIA operations involving Joseph Mifsud, the Maltese professor now generally admitted/identified as a western intelligence operative who was tasked by the CIA (John Brennan) to run an operation against Trump campaign official George Papadopoulos in both Italy (Rome) and London. {Go Deep}

    In a similar fashion the CIA tasked U.S. intelligence asset Stefan Halper to target another Trump campaign official, Carter Page. Under the auspices of being a Cambridge Professor Stefan Halper also targeted General Michael Flynn. Additionally, using assistance from a female FBI agent under the false name Azra Turk, Halper also targeted Papadopoulos.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The initial operations to target Flynn, Papadopoulos and Page were all based overseas. This seemingly makes the CIA exploitation of the assets and the targets much easier.

    One of the more interesting aspects to the Durham probe is a possibility of a paper-trail created as a result of the tasking operations. We should watch closely for more evidence of a paper trail as some congressional reps have hinted toward documented evidence (transcripts, recordings, reports) that are exculpatory to the targets (Page & Papadop). HPSCI Ranking Member Devin Nunes has strongly hinted that very specific exculpatory evidence was known to the FBI and yet withheld from the FISA application used against Carter Page that also mentions George Papadopoulos. I digress…

    However, there is an aspect to the domestic U.S. operation that also bears the fingerprints of the CIA; only this time due to the restrictive laws on targets inside the U.S. the CIA aspect is less prominent. This is where FBI Agent Peter Strzok working for both agencies starts to become important.

    Remember, it’s clear in the text messages Strzok has a working relationship with what he called their “sister agency”, the CIA. Additionally, Brennan has admitted Strzok helped write the January 2017 Intelligence Community Assessment (ICA) which outlines the Russia narrative; and it is almost guaranteed the July 31st, 2016, “Electronic Communication” from the CIA to the FBI that originated FBI operation “Crossfire Hurricane” was co-authored from the CIA by Strzok…. and Strzok immediately used that EC to travel to London to debrief intelligence officials around Australian Ambassador to the U.K. Alexander Downer.

    In short, Peter Strzok appears to be the very eager, profoundly overzealous James Bond wannabe, who acted as a bridge between the CIA and the FBI. The perfect type of FBI career agent for CIA Director John Brennan to utilize.

    Fusion-GPS founder Glenn Simpson hired CIA Open Source analyst Nellie Ohr toward the end of 2015; at appropriately the same time as “FBI Contractors” were identified exploiting the NSA database and extracting information on a specific set of U.S. persons.

    It was also Fusion-GPS founder Glenn Simpson who was domestically tasked with a Russian lobbyist named Natalia Veselnitskya. A little reported Russian Deputy Attorney General named Saak Albertovich Karapetyan was working double-agents for the CIA and Kremlin. Karapetyan was directing the foreign operations of Natalia Veselnitskaya, and Glenn Simpson was organizing her inside the U.S.

    Glenn Simpson managed Veselnitskaya through the 2016 Trump Tower meeting with Donald Trump Jr. However, once the CIA/Fusion-GPS operation using Veselnitskaya started to unravel with public reporting… back in Russia Deputy AG Karapetyan fell out of a helicopter to his death (just before it crashed).

    Simultaneously timed in late 2015 through mid 2016, there was a domestic FBI operation using a young Russian named Maria Butina tasked to run up against republican presidential candidates. According to Patrick Byrne, Butina’s handler, it was FBI agent Peter Strzok who was giving Byrne the instructions on where to send her. {Go Deep}

    All of this context outlines the extent to which the CIA was openly involved in constructing a political operation that settled upon anyone in candidate Donald Trump’s orbit.

    International operations directed by the CIA, and domestic operations seemingly directed by Peter Strzok operating with a foot in both agencies. [Strzok gets CIA service coin]

    Recap: ♦Mifsud tasked against Papadopoulos (CIA). ♦Halper tasked against Flynn (CIA), Page (CIA), and Papadopoulos (CIA). ♦Azra Turk, pretending to be Halper asst, tasked against Papadopoulos (FBI). ♦Veselnitskaya tasked against Donald Trump Jr (CIA, Fusion-GPS). ♦Butina tasked against Trump, and Donald Trump Jr (FBI).

    Additionally, Christopher Steele was a British intelligence officer, hired by Fusion-GPS to assemble and launder fraudulent intelligence information within his dossier. And we cannot forget Oleg Deripaska, a Russian oligarch, who was recruited by Asst. FBI Director Andrew McCabe to participate in running an operation against the Trump campaign and create the impression of Russian involvement. Deripaska refused to participate.

    All of this engagement directly controlled by U.S. intelligence; and all of this intended to give a specific Russia impression. This predicate is presumably what John Durham is currently reviewing.

    The key point of all that background is to see how committed the CIA and FBI were to the constructed narrative of Russia interfering with the 2016 election. The CIA, FBI, and by extension the DOJ, put a hell of a lot of work into it. Intelligence community work that Durham is now unraveling.

    We also know specifically that John Durham is looking at the construct of the Intelligence Community Assessment (ICA); and talking to CIA analysts who participated in the construct of the January 2017 report that bolstered the false appearance of Russian interference in the 2016 election. This is important because it ties in to the next part that involves Julian Assange and Wikileaks.

    On April 11th, 2019, the Julian Assange indictment was unsealed in the EDVA. From the indictment we discover it was under seal since March 6th, 2018:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    (Link to pdf)

    On Tuesday April 15th more investigative material was released. Again, note the dates: Grand Jury, *December of 2017* This means FBI investigation prior to….

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The FBI investigation took place prior to December 2017, it was coordinated through the Eastern District of Virginia (EDVA) where Dana Boente was U.S. Attorney at the time. The grand jury indictment was sealed from March of 2018 until after Mueller completed his investigation, April 2019.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Why the delay?

    What was the DOJ waiting for?

    Here’s where it gets interesting….

    The FBI submission to the Grand Jury in December of 2017 was four months after congressman Dana Rohrabacher talked to Julian Assange in August of 2017: “Assange told a U.S. congressman … he can prove the leaked Democratic Party documents … did not come from Russia.”

    (August 2017, The Hill Via John Solomon) Julian Assange told a U.S. congressman on Tuesday he can prove the leaked Democratic Party documents he published during last year’s election did not come from Russia and promised additional helpful information about the leaks in the near future.

    Rep. Dana Rohrabacher, a California Republican who is friendly to Russia and chairs an important House subcommittee on Eurasia policy, became the first American congressman to meet with Assange during a three-hour private gathering at the Ecuadorian Embassy in London, where the WikiLeaks founder has been holed up for years.

    Rohrabacher recounted his conversation with Assange to The Hill.

    “Our three-hour meeting covered a wide array of issues, including the WikiLeaks exposure of the DNC [Democratic National Committee] emails during last year’s presidential election,” Rohrabacher said, “Julian emphatically stated that the Russians were not involved in the hacking or disclosure of those emails.”

    Pressed for more detail on the source of the documents, Rohrabacher said he had information to share privately with President Trump. (read more)

    Knowing how much effort the CIA and FBI put into the Russia collusion-conspiracy narrative, it would make sense for the FBI to take keen interest after this August 2017 meeting between Rohrabacher and Assange; and why the FBI would quickly gather specific evidence (related to Wikileaks and Bradley Manning) for a grand jury by December 2017.

    Within three months of the grand jury the DOJ generated an indictment and sealed it in March 2018. The EDVA sat on the indictment while the Mueller probe was ongoing.

    As soon as the Mueller probe ended, on April 11th, 2019, a planned and coordinated effort between the U.K. and U.S. was executed; Julian Assange was forcibly arrested and removed from the Ecuadorian embassy in London, and the EDVA indictment was unsealed (link).

    As a person who has researched this three year fiasco; including the ridiculously false 2016 Russian hacking/interference narrative: “17 intelligence agencies”, Joint Analysis Report (JAR) needed for Obama’s anti-Russia narrative in December ’16; and then a month later the ridiculously political Intelligence Community Assessment (ICA) in January ’17; this timing against Assange is too coincidental.

    It doesn’t take a deep researcher to see the aligned Deep State motive to control Julian Assange because the Mueller report was dependent on Russia cybercrimes, and that narrative is contingent on the Russia DNC hack story which Julian Assange disputes.

    This is critical. The Weissmann/Mueller report contains claims that Russia hacked the DNC servers as the central element to the Russia interference narrative in the U.S. election. This claim is directly disputed by WikiLeaks and Julian Assange, as outlined during the Dana Rohrabacher interview, and by Julian Assange on-the-record statements.

    The predicate for Robert Mueller’s investigation was specifically due to Russian interference in the 2016 election. The fulcrum for this Russia interference claim is the intelligence community assessment; and the only factual evidence claimed within the ICA is that Russia hacked the DNC servers; a claim only made possible by relying on forensic computer analysis from Crowdstrike, a DNC contractor.

    The CIA holds a massive conflict of self-interest in upholding the Russian hacking claim. The FBI holds a massive interest in maintaining that claim. All of those foreign countries whose intelligence apparatus participated with Brennan and Strzok also have a vested self-interest in maintaining that Russia hacking and interference narrative.

    Julian Assange is the only person with direct knowledge of how Wikileaks gained custody of the DNC emails; and Assange has claimed he has evidence it was not from a hack.

    This Russian “hacking” claim is ultimately so important to the CIA, FBI, DOJ, ODNI and U.K intelligence apparatus…. Well, right there is the obvious motive to shut Assange down as soon intelligence officials knew the Mueller report was going to be public.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now, if we know this, and you know this; and everything is cited and factual… well, then certainly AG Bill Barr knows this.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The $64,000 dollar question is: will they say so publicly?

  • "If You're Reading This, You Might Be A Conspiracy Theorist…"
    “If You’re Reading This, You Might Be A Conspiracy Theorist…”

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 23:45

    Authored by John Steppling via Off-Guardian.org,

    “…a permanent modern scenario: apocalypse looms…and it doesn’t occur.”

    – Susan Sontag, AIDs and its Metaphors

    “I should not misuse this opportunity to give you a lecture about, say, logic. I call this a misuse, for to explain a scientific matter to you it would need a course of lectures and not an hour’s paper. Another alternative would have been to give you what’s called a popular scientific lecture, that is a lecture intended to make you believe that you understand a thing which actually you don’t understand, and to gratify what I believe to be one of the lowest desires of modern people, namely the superficial curiosity about the latest discoveries of science. I rejected these alternatives.”

    – Ludwig Wittgenstein, A Lecture on Ethics

    If you’re reading this, then you’ve probably been called a conspiracy theorist. Also you’ve been derided and shamed for questioning the “science” of the Covid debacle.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The idea of science is now a badly corrupted idea. In a nation, today, (the USA) which in educational terms ranks 25th globally in science skills and reading, and well below that in math; all one hears is a clarion call to science. In reading skills the US placed below Malta, Portugal, and right about the same as Kazakhstan.

    But in a nation that no longer reads, and *can* no longer read, it is not surprising that knowledge is absorbed via the new hieroglyphics of gifs (interestingly the creator of gifs wanted it pronounced with a soft g the more to sound like a peanut butter brand) and memes.

    So-called ‘response memes’ are the new version of conversation, and most register and communicate (sic) confusion. As beer ad marketers know, the state of your brain after consuming a six pack is pretty much the standard target ideal for advertising. And it relays a message that six pack confusion is actually a good and perhaps even sexy state in which to find oneself.

    Education is for those with money, those who can afford the proper foundational skills to get into Harvard, MIT, Cal Tech and the Stanford. For everyone else science is Star Trek.

    But I digress. The point is that most Americans imagine that they revere science, and they ridicule anyone they think of as unscientific. But they think of it in cult terms, really. Its a religion of sorts. The only people who don’t are those ‘real’ religious zealots, Dominionist and Charismatic Christians (like Mike Pompeo, Mike Pence, Rick Perry, Betsy DeVos et al) who hold positions of enormous power in the US government under the least scientific president in history.

    The Christian right doesn’t like any science, ANY science. But for most of that target demographic (the educated mostly white 30%), the cry is to “trust the science”…even the great Greta says to “trust the science”.

    The problem is, science is not neutral, its as politicized as media and news and the pronouncements of celebrities.

    In May 2020, The Lancet published an article revisiting the 1957 and 1968 Influenza pandemics.

    The 1957 outbreak was not caused by a coronavirus—the first human coronavirus would not be discovered until 1965—but by an influenza virus. However, in 1957, no one could be sure that the virus that had been isolated in Hong Kong was a new pandemic strain or simply a descendant of the previous 1918–19 pandemic influenza virus.

    The result was that as the UK’s weekly death count mounted, peaking at about 600 in the week ending Oct 17, 1957, there were few hysterical tabloid newspaper headlines and no calls for social distancing. Instead, the news cycle was dominated by the Soviet Union’s launch of Sputnik and the aftermath of the fire at the Windscale nuclear reactor in the UK.

    By the time this influenza pandemic — known colloquially at the time as “Asian flu” — had concluded the following April, an estimated 20 000 people in the UK and 80 000 citizens in the USA were dead. Worldwide, the pandemic, sparked by a new H2N2 influenza subtype, would result in more than 1 million deaths.

    To date, Covid 19 has not reached the million death marker in the US, and yet we are seeing the most draconian lockdowns in modern history, the total suspension of democratic process and a level of hysteria (especially in the U.S. and UK) unprecedented. I wrote about some aspects of this on my blog here, mostly touching on the cultural effects

    Allow me to quote The Lancet again.

    The subsequent 1968 influenza pandemic — or “Hong Kong flu” or “Mao flu” as some western tabloids dubbed it — would have an even more dramatic impact, killing more than 30 000 individuals in the UK and 100 000 people in the USA, with half the deaths among individuals younger than 65 years — the reverse of COVID-19 deaths in the current pandemic.

    Yet, while at the height of the outbreak in December, 1968, The New York Times described the pandemic as “one of the worst in the nation’s history”, there were few school closures and businesses, for the most, continued to operate as normal.

    I remember the 68 Hong Kong flu. I was in my last year of high school. The summer after was Woodstock, the ‘summer of love’. Not a lot of social distancing going on. But we are past numbers and statistics having any real meaning. The Covid narrative is now in the realm of allegory.

    The media perspective is utterly predictable. Liberal outlets that have the inside track to government are seen to be reinforcing the mainstream story (VOX, Slate, Huff Post, The Guardian and Washington Post). In a recent VOX article the message was only a sociopath would NOT wear a mask and that the ‘science’ was unanimous.

    Of course its no such thing. But the message of sites like VOX, or Daily Beast, or Wa Po or the truly reprehensible Guardian, are always going to be to hammer away ‘on message’. The same is true for what passes for moderate news organs like the NY Times, ABC News, The Hill, and BBC. There has been virtually no dissenting opinions expressed in these rags.

    All these news outlets are given clear messages by the spin doctors in government, by the White House, and by contacts within the State Department and Pentagon. And by the advertising firms employed by the state (such as Ruder Finn).

    “Ad agencies are not in the business of doing science.”

    – Dr. Arnold S. Relman (Madison Ave. Has Growing Role In the Business of Drug Research, NY Times 2002)

    The WHO, the CDC, and most every other NGO or government agency of any size hires advertising firms. The WHO, which is tied to the United Nations, is a reasonably sinister organization, actually.

    Just picking up a random publication from the WHO, on what they call ‘the tobacco epidemic’ and you find on page 33 the following chapter heading “Objective: Effective surveillance, monitoring and evaluation systems in place to monitor tobacco use.”

    Reading further and all this is really saying is that the populace of any country is best put under surveillance. It’s for their own good, you see.

    But back to the science. Here is a small trip down memory lane

    Institutions of medicine, global and national possess no more integrity than your average NGO (Amnesty International, Médecins Sans Frontières, Oxfam et al). And that means not very much.

    To understand the nature of institutional corruption one must understand Imperialism. The institutions of Imperialist nations are going to further Imperialist ideology. (see Antonio Gramsci, ideological hegemony). The US is not in the business of helping Americans.

    Modern monopoly forms better reflect that scientific knowledge, and its advanced application to production, are concentrated, ultimately, not in physical objects but in human beings and human interaction with those objects. It is monopoly of the labour power of the most highly educated workers, by both imperialist states and Multi National Corporations, that forms the ultimate and most stable base of imperialist reproduction.

    – Sam King (Lenin’s theory of imperialism: a defence of its relevance in the 21st century, MLR)

    The idea of super-exploitation needs to be conceptually generalised at the necessary level of abstraction and incorporated in the theory of imperialism. Super-exploitation is a specific condition within the capitalist mode of production […] the hidden common essence defining imperialism.

    he working class of the oppressed nations/Third World/Global South is systematically paid below the value of labour power of the working class of the oppressor nations/First World/Global North. This is not because the Southern working class produces less value, but because it is more oppressed and more exploited.

    – Andy Higginbottom (Structure and Essence in Capital 1, quoted by John Smith Imperialism in the Twenty-First Century)

    The US jobless rate just hit 2.1 million. Officially. Making the total something over forty million. Its much higher in reality. Nobody has work. There is no work and we are at the start of a period of massive evictions, foreclosures, and delinquencies – and the homeless population will soon reach Biblical proportions (in some cities, such as Los Angeles, its already Biblical). Will be simply of a magnitude never before seen.

    Hence the authoritarian policing of lockdowns in, for example, New Zealand, suggests something like a practice run. The ruling class in western nations knows full well this is coming. And one wonders if it’s not, in fact, a part of the plan (oh here is where someone says conspiracy theory…probably Louis Proyect).

    Yes it’s a fucking conspiracy theory. It is a theory based on evidence, however.

    Why are the US and UK and a host of other countries deliberately ensuring a massive depression? Because they care about your health? They are worried we all might catch the flu? Has the US ever demonstrated a concern with your health and well being before?

    Remember how many discretionary tax dollars go to health care and how much to defense. Conspiracies do occur. The denial of that fact seems to be a hallmark of the pseudo or false left. Does the suspension of democratic process not cause this soft left any problems at all? Look at Sweden, at Belarus…no lockdown and no problem.

    It should be noted that there are a great many terrific doctors in the US. Dedicated and brilliant, often. But they are not the system. The system is run for profit.

    With about three-fourths of Americans under lockdown, the unintended consequences will be vast. There has been a notable decrease in the number of heart attack and stroke patients arriving at hospitals, presumably because they are afraid of catching the coronavirus or of not finding a hospital bed.

    As the economy spirals downward, we can also expect an increase in mental health crises, domestic violence and suicides. While lockdown supporters say that to have a functioning economy, we must have good public health, the reverse is also true: To have good public health, we must have a functioning economy.

    – Alex Berezow PhD (Geopolitical Futures, 2020)

    Alfred Willener wrote an interesting book in 1970, analysing May 68 in France. He analyses the answers students gave to various questionnaires they responded to. The section regarding science is worth quoting.

    ‘The scandalous fact is that, for all the means that science has put at our disposal, most people live not much better than in the Middle Ages’. The system benefits from science in the following way: through the atom bomb, through ‘the power of statistical research’, through computers, through the chemical industry being ‘in the hands of the state’, through space research.

    ‘In the end, you realize’, concludes one reasonably logical reply, ‘that technological progress, which makes economic growth possible, does not satisfy the fundamental needs of man and is used above all to maintain and strengthen the system’.

    Lastly, I should like to quote one quite unexpected reply, which forms the extreme point of pessimism: ‘ Everyone is oppressed by science.’

    – Alfred Willener (The Action-Image of Society on Cultural Politicization)

    I doubt seriously one would get such responses today in any European or North American country. The contemporary indoctrination regards science is acute. And the media abounds in junk science. Click bait science. And this is where most people have their opinions formed for them.

    There is a paper put out by one of the founders of the World Economic Forum, Klaus Schwab, called The Great Reset. The conclusion of the book reads…

    …at a global level, if viewed in terms of the global population affected, the corona crisis is (so far) one of the least deadly pandemics the world has experienced over the last 2000 years.”

    In other words, a mortality of .06% is simply not commensurate with the extreme measures the governments of the world (the West in particular) are taking.

    There is no question, none, that those measures, the lockdown, the masks, the distancing, and the attending *diseases of despair*, will kill more people by a factor of ten than the virus itself.

    This is not even to begin discussing the psychological harm done, in particular to children. And not just harm to children, but severe harm to the most vulnerable.

    What is being internalized by children is three fold. One, there is something inherently sick and contagious about ME. Two, everyone MIGHT be a threat to my health. And three, obey authority, because you don’t want to end up like those smelly homeless people were are trying to hard to avoid.

    Children take things personally. They tend to blame themselves. Even in the comparative sanity of Norway, where I reside, children are increasingly anxious about the world. How could they not be? All this for a health risk of .06%.

    But it is more than just the decimation of the economy in the US and UK. It is a dismantling of the culture. One in three museums closed because of Covid will not re-open. Ever. Where does all that art go?

    Just a guess but probably very wealthy collectors will gobble it up at wholesale prices.

    The predictable outcome of these lockdowns, certainly in the US, is a guaranteed minimum income. Very minimum. Restrictions on travel, all freedom of movement in fact, will not soon return to normal. Various forms of surveillance and tracking, as well as health certifications, are the goal of the state.

    Also, if this pandemic succeeded so well, with so little resistance, why not have another? And there is another aspect to the SWAT mask police, and that is that western society is becoming alarmingly hypochondriacal. Children are kept out of school for runny noses. If all kids with snotty noses were kept out of class, nobody would get an education.

    There is a dire future of two or three generations now developing and maturing with very weak immune systems. So that if a natural mutation takes place one day, from a Corona virus or any other, a genuinely serious pandemic could kill tens of millions.

    It is not a speculation that there are people who prosper and even benefit during an economic crisis—as smaller business owners struggle, large corporations and banks benefit from huge government subsidies, giving them more power to buy failing small businesses, for example. And it is a fact that many of those people have enormous economic power to shape the policies that can benefit themselves.

    It is not a speculation that they would appreciate having strict measures of control against the people by limiting their freedom of speech, freedom of assembly, and freedom to travel, or by installing means of surveillance, check points and official certifications for activities that might give freedom to the people beyond the capitalist framework.

    It is not a speculation that they would benefit from moving our social interactions to the digital realm, which can commodify our activities as marketable data for the advertising industry, insurance industry and any other moneyed social institutions Including education, political institution, legal institution, and financial institution.

    Such matters should be seen within the context of the western history being shaped by unelected capitalists with their enormous networks of social institutions.

    – Hiroyuki Hamada (Wrong Kind of Green, April 2020)

    The collapse of retail is accelerating. This is emerging as a monopolization of retail. Few shops will remain, in fact, except luxury stores in select gated areas. The rest will be online and probably rudimentary. The culture and the economy are being strip-mined and recreated for a select clientele. The collapse of the economy means the collapse of the bottom 90% or so.

    The very richest men and corporations on the planet are making huge profits.

    And yet, there are precious few voices of dissent to the master narrative in the US. In Norway, the lockdown was about five weeks. But its a sparsely populated country and one hardly noticed it save for the kids being home and not in school. But schools reopened and the Prime Minister actually made a speech apologizing, in effect, for an *unnecessary* lockdown. She had been frightened.

    But now, with a mild uptick in positive cases the country is considering stricter limitations on travel. Why?

    There is no uptick in deaths, only in positive test results. The fact remains the virus attacks the aged and the already sick. But this is very telling, I think. The Norwegian government doesn’t want to be seen as disobedient. They don’t want to not follow the grand plan provided by western agencies and experts. Even if they seemingly don’t really believe it.

    (The saddest aspect is the voice of Dr. Mads Gilbert, a known advocate for Palestinian rights, who has weighed in on the side of fear. Why? I have no idea. But it is worth noting his predictions from March 2020 were staggeringly wrong.)

    But clearly the groupthink pressure is powerful and small nations do not want to be singled out for bucking the *science*. There are economic coercions threatened, tacitly, as well. The pressure to conform is huge and it takes a Herculean effort — both individually and as a nation, to resist. And *experts* seem to have a hard time admitting they were wrong.

    The science has been consistently wrong from day one.

    As I say, this is now allegory. Or fable. There is nothing reasonable or rational in the lockdown measures of the US and UK and NZ. Or anywhere. And this is not even to touch upon the criminality of the Gates Foundation and Bill Gates buying public influence and visibility. Not trained in any medical discipline, Gates has somehow made himself one of the faces of the pandemic.

    And to deconstruct Gates’ language is to find a disturbing quality of authoritarian hubris. Gates utters declarations as if he were God speaking to his flock. All from a man who has done little save steal from his partners and exploit the poor of India and Africa. One of the most striking aspects of this whole last few months has been the enormous and coordinated effort the Gates machine has put into rehabilitating his image.

    If you google “Crimes of the Gates Foundation” for example, you will get ten different fact-checkers officially denying any crimes and another half dozen articles ridiculing those who question Gates motives, his profit from vaccines, or even his alignment with eugenicists (depopulation adherents)– all are derided as, yes, conspiracy theorists.

    If you dare to question the rushing of an untested vaccine you are called an anti-vaxxer.

    My children are vaccinated. I just don’t like the idea of a hurried untested vaccine produced for a virus that needs no vaccine. And one promoted by a creepy millionaire.

    But clearly the Gates charm offensive is in overdrive. The pastel cardigan is everywhere. And yet, his favorable rating in recent surveys is around 56%. That is actually not very high given the amount of self-promotion involved. It’s better than Mark Zuckerberg and Joe Biden, though. Gates is not likeable. No amount of spin can change that.

    The final factor to note is the Trump effect. Many liberals would literally rather see dead in the street if it meant discrediting Trump. It is no longer quite a zero sum game, though. But overall the hatred of Trump is now at a religious level, too.

    And behold, the opposition is Joe Biden and Kamala Harris. If you want a window in the black heart of Biden, watch and/or listen to his testimony around the Waco inferno. The inherent sadism and lack of humanity is glaringly apparent.

    As for Kamala Harris:

    As a San Francisco social worker, I sat on the school district committee that met with families of chronically truant students. Once, when we asked a student why he didn’t go to school, he said there was too much police tape and shootings at his school bus stop.

    Harris, as CA Attorney General, was putting parents/caregivers in jail if their child was chronically truant. Also as Attorney General, she denied a DNA test to Kevin Cooper, a very likely innocent man who came within hours of execution in 2004.

    – Riva Enteen (Counterpunch Aug. 2020)

    These are the servants of capital.

    The left should be emphasising the economic aspect of lockdown because it is the working class who are the principal victims of lockdown.”

    – Phil Shannon (Lockdown Skeptics, June 2020)

    A Downing street tweet today:

    We’re putting tougher measures in place to target serious breaches of coronavirus restrictions. Fines for not wearing a face-covering will double for repeat offences, up to £3,200.”

    This is a class-based assault. The wealthy will not be fined for not wearing a face-covering on their private beaches, or dinner parties at the yacht club.

  • Satellite Image Shows Chinese Submarine Entering 'Top Secret Cave' 
    Satellite Image Shows Chinese Submarine Entering ‘Top Secret Cave’ 

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 23:25

    The first-known and publicly released satellite photo of a Chinese submarine entering Yulin Naval Base in Hainan Island, one of the most important South China Sea military bases, was captured by Planet Labs and released on social media by Radio Free Asia. 

    Radio Free Asia, a U.S. government-funded broadcasting company, published the image Thursday of what appears to be a Shang-class nuclear-powered attack submarine entering “a not-so-secret, subterranean base at China’s southern Hainan island. Yulin Naval Base is home to subs of China’s South Sea Fleet and provides convenient access to the South China Sea.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Not much is known about the interior of the underground military base. The Drive raises an important question: Where are all the Chinese submarines? They say the “docks are completely empty. This also seems exceedingly rare based on our monitoring experience.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We can only speculate and say the subs are either hiding out in the underground base or on patrol following a surge in tensions between the U.S. 

    As for where all the other submarines are, we have no clue. Tensions are exceedingly high in the region and the U.S. has massively upped its presence there. Meanwhile, Taiwan has gone on elevated alert as China executes war games nearby. While some of those drills could and likely do involve submarines based at Yalin, it’s also possible that others have moved inside the mountain, as well. Why exactly remains unclear. – The Drive

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China is preparing itself for South China Sea domination (see: “Are China’s Naval Ambitions A Global Threat?”).

    The question remains: Where are China’s nuclear attack subs?

  • The CIA Versus The Kennedys
    The CIA Versus The Kennedys

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 23:05

    Authored by Jacob Hornberger via The Future of Freed Foundation,

    Former Congressman Ron Paul and his colleague Dan McAdams recently conducted a fascinating interview with Robert F. Kennedy Jr., which focused in part on the assassination of President John F. Kennedy, who was Kennedy Jr.’s uncle. The interview took place on their program the Ron Paul Liberty Report.

    Owing to the many federal records that have been released over the years relating to the Kennedy assassination, especially through the efforts of the Assassination Records Review Board in the 1990s, many Americans are now aware of the war that was being waged between President Kennedy and the CIA throughout his presidency. The details of this war are set forth in FFF’s book  JFK’s War with the National Security Establishment: Why Kennedy Was Assassinated by Douglas Horne.

    In the interview, Robert Kennedy Jr. revealed a fascinating aspect of this war with which I was unfamiliar. He stated that the deep animosity that the CIA had for the Kennedy family actually stretched back to something the family patriarch, Joseph P. Kennedy, did in the 1950s that incurred the wrath of Allen Dulles, the head of the CIA.

    Kennedy Jr. stated that his grandfather, Joseph P. Kennedy, had served on a commission that was charged with examining and analyzing CIA covert activities, or “dirty tricks” as Kennedy Jr. put them. As part of that commission, Kennedy Jr stated, Joseph Kennedy (John Kennedy and Bobby Kennedy’s father) had determined that the CIA had done bad things with its regime-change operations that were destroying democracies, such as in Iran and Guatemala.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Consequently, Joseph Kennedy recommended that the CIA’s power to engage in covert activities be terminated and that the CIA be strictly limited to collecting intelligence and empowered to do nothing else.

    According to Kennedy Jr.,

    “Allen Dulles never forgave him — never forgave my family — for that.”

    I wasn’t aware of that fact.

    I assumed that the war between President Kennedy and the CIA had begun with the CIA’s invasion at the Bay of Pigs in Cuba. The additional information added by Kennedy Jr. places things in a much more fascinating and revealing context.

    Upon doing a bit of research on the Internet, I found that the commission that Kennedy Jr. must have been referring to was the President’s Board of Consultants on Foreign Intelligence Activities, which President Eisenhower had established in 1956 through Executive Order 10656. Eisenhower appointed Joseph Kennedy to serve on that commission.

    That year was three years after the CIA’s 1953 regime change operation in Iran which destroyed that country’s democratic system. It was two years after the CIA’s regime-change operation in Guatemala that destroyed that country’s democratic system.

    Keep in mind that the ostensible reason that the CIA engaged in these regime-change operations was to protect “national security,” which over time has become the most important term in the American political lexicon. Although no one has ever come up with an objective definition for the term, the CIA’s power to address threats to “national security,” including through coups and assassinations, became omnipotent.

    Yet, here was Joseph P. Kennedy declaring that the CIA’s power to exercise such powers should be terminated and recommending that the CIA’s power be strictly limited to intelligence gathering.

    It is not difficult to imagine how livid CIA Director Dulles and his cohorts must have been at Kennedy. No bureaucrat likes to have his power limited. More important, for Dulles and his cohorts, it would have been clear that if Kennedy got his way, “national security” would be gravely threatened given the Cold War that the United States was engaged in with the Soviet Union, China, Cuba, North Korea, and other communist nations.

    Now consider what happened with the Bay of Pigs. The CIA’s plan for a regime-change invasion of Cuba, was conceived under President Eisenhower. Believing that Vice President Nixon would be elected president in 1960, the CIA was quite surprised that Kennedy was elected instead. To ensure that the invasion would go forth anyway, the CIA assured Kennedy that the invasion would succeed without U.S. air support. It was a lie. The CIA assumed that once the invasion was going to go down in defeat at the hands of the communists, Kennedy would have to provide the air support in order to “save face.”

    But Kennedy refused to be played by the CIA. When the CIA’s army of Cuban exiles was going down in defeat, the CIA requested the air support, convinced that their plan to manipulate the new president would work. It didn’t. Kennedy refused to provide the air support and the CIA’s invasion went down in defeat.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now consider what happened after the Bay of Pigs: Knowing that the CIA had played him and double-crossed him, John Kennedy fired Allen Dulles as CIA director, along with his chief deputy, Charles Cabell. He then put his younger brother Bobby Kennedy in charge of monitoring the CIA, which infuriated the CIA.

    Now jump ahead to the Cuban Missile Crisis, which Kennedy resolved by promising that the United States would not invade Cuba for a regime-change operation. That necessarily would leave a permanent communist regime in Cuba, something that the CIA steadfastly maintained was a grave threat to “national security”— a much bigger threat, in fact, than the threats supposedly posed by the regimes in Iran in 1953 and Guatemala in 1954.

    And then Kennedy did the unforgivable, at least insofar as the CIA was concerned. In his famous Peace Speech at American University in June 1963, he declared an end to the entire Cold War and announced that the United States was going to establish friendly and peaceful relations with the communist world.

    Kennedy had thrown the gauntlet down in front of the CIA. It was either going to be his way or the CIA’s way. There was no room for compromise, and both sides knew it.

    In the minds of former CIA Director Allen Dulles and the people still at the CIA, what Kennedy was doing was anathema and, even worse, the gravest threat to “national security” the United States had ever faced, a much bigger threat than even that posed by the democratic regimes in Iran and Guatemala. At that point, the CIA’s animosity toward President Kennedy far exceeded the animosity it had borne toward his father, Joseph P. Kennedy, several years before.

  • "White Flight Is Real" – Hollywood's Apocalypse Triggers Mass Exodus
    “White Flight Is Real” – Hollywood’s Apocalypse Triggers Mass Exodus

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 22:45

    “White flight is real. The elites and middle classes are leaving. People are taking losses on the sales of their homes to get out,” veteran publicist Ed Lozzi told the Daily Mail while referring to the socio-economic implosion of Los Angeles. 

    Lozzi said the Los Angeles Metropolitan Area was already “changing before coronavirus brought us to our knees. The homeless problem has been escalating for years, exacerbated by weak politicians making bad decisions.” 

    “Hollywood has always been the wokest of the woke, so politicians have done nothing to stop people sleeping on the streets. It’s not illegal and the weather’s nice, so they keep coming,” he said, adding that, “there is insufficient housing, inadequate mental health care. Add in Covid and it’s a perfect storm.”

    Lozzi remembers the days when Los Angeles “smelled of orange blossoms.” He said today’s scent is urine and feces with once beautiful parks now filled with homeless encampments and carpeted with drug needles.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The metro’s socio-economic implosion is forcing many homeowners in the downtown district to pack their bags and liquidate their homes at whatever the price to flee for suburbia. A combination of the virus pandemic and collapsing society has made the area unlivable for families. 

    Danny O’Brien, the owner of Watford Moving & Storage, said a mass exodus of folks from Hollywood is underway: 

    “And a lot of it is to do with politics.” 

    “August has already set records and we are only halfway through the month.”

    “People are getting out in droves. Last week I moved a prominent person in the music industry from a $6.5 million mansion above Sunset Boulevard to Nashville.” 

    “Liberal politics has destroyed this city,” he said. “The homeless encampments are legal and there’s nothing the police can do. White, affluent middle-class folk are getting out. People don’t feel safe any more.” 

    At least 66,000 people are sleeping on the streets of Los Angeles, up 12.5% YoY. The wealth gap continues to soar to alarming levels as the coronavirus pandemic has resulted in depressionary unemployment

    The socio-economic implosion of the city has allowed the woke Hollywood crowd to finally realize decades of liberal policies are, in fact, a failure. Now, the same elites who championed liberal policies are abandoning ship and moving to suburbia

    Joe Rogan and Elon Musk have been some of the recent high-profile figures to pack their bags and move elsewhere. 

    A source told the Daily Mail that Nicole Kidman and husband Keith Urban have homes in Los Angeles and Nashville. The couple has dedicated more time to Nashville since the pandemic began, the source said. 

    Producer Dana Brunetti, a business partner of Kevin Spacey, and resident of Los Angeles, recently acquired Italian citizenship to escape the US if more riots are seen. 

    The sudden migration of elites and white people from Los Angeles is similar to what happened in America after the civil rights movement of the 1950s and 1960s when white city dwellers fled to suburbia. 

    White/elite flight 2.0 is well underway and could last a couple of years

  • How We Could Wind Up Banned From Discussing 'An October Surprise' On Social Media This Election
    How We Could Wind Up Banned From Discussing ‘An October Surprise’ On Social Media This Election

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 22:25

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via Medium.com,

    In what it calls an effort to make itself “a more reliable source for election-related news and information,” YouTube has announced that it will be removing “content that contains hacked information, the disclosure of which may interfere with democratic processes, such as elections and censuses.”

    “For example, videos that contain hacked information about a political candidate shared with the intent to interfere in an election,” adds the Google-owned video sharing platform.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This by itself is an alarming assault on human communication and press freedom. If there is authentic information out there about either of the candidates who are up for the most powerful elected position on the planet, the world is entitled to know about it, regardless of how that information was acquired. Monopolistic tech oligarchs have no business barring us from learning about and discussing that information.

    Immensely powerful people should not be permitted to have secrets from the public anyway. The amount of power one has should be directly inverse to the amount of secrecy they are permitted to have. If you’re anywhere near the presidency of the United States of America, the secrecy you are entitled to should be zero.

    If a hacker is able to get ahold of accurate information about Donald Trump or Joe Biden, that information is ours. We’re entitled to it. Anyone who tries to obstruct our access to that information is stealing from us. It’s absolutely ridiculous that we have a society where people are permitted to both rule over us and keep secrets from us as it is without government-aligned tech plutocrats silencing our attempts to learn what those secrets might be.

    Moreover, no Youtube moderator will be in any position to definitively say whether most information that comes out is hacked. They’d only be able to do what the mass media did with the 2016 WikiLeaks drops and cite unproven assertions by opaque intelligence agencies who have a proven track record of lying, assertions which turned out to be far more dubious than most Americans realize. Documents or video could be leaked about a candidate and US intelligence agencies could just declare it a “hack” and have any Youtube videos about it immediately censored.

    As Alan MacLeod explains for MintPress News:

    “[T]he great majority of leaked information — the lifeblood of investigative journalism — is anonymous. Often, like in the cases of Edward Snowden, Chelsea Manning or Reality Winner, whistleblowers face serious consequences if their names become attached to documents exposing government or corporate malfeasance. But without a name to go with a document, the difference between leaked data and hacked data is impossible to define. Thus, powerful people and organizations could claim data was hacked, rather than leaked, and simply block all discussion of the matter on the platform.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    So this in and of itself is an outrage. But the way things are playing out it could wind up being a lot worse if damning information about a candidate surfaces prior to the November election.

    We already know from experience that social media giants tend to follow in each other’s footsteps whenever there’s a significant step in the direction of censorship, like their coordinated cross-platform removals of alternative media outletsaccounts from US-targeted nations, and people who have been labeled “conspiracy theorists”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So there’s already reason to be concerned that Youtube’s new attack on press freedoms will spread to social media outlets like Twitter and Facebook. Add in the fact that these platforms are openly coordinating with each other and with the US government to silence speech deemed “online meddling” and “election interference” and it looks a lot more likely.

    The New York Times published an article on Wednesday titled “Google, Facebook and Others Form Tech Coalition to Secure U.S. Election”, later changed to “Google, Facebook and Others Broaden Group to Secure U.S. Election”.

    “Facebook, Google and other major tech companies said on Wednesday that they had added new partners and met with government agencies in their efforts to secure the November election,” NYT reports.

    “The group, which is seeking to prevent the kind of online meddling and foreign interference that sullied the 2016 presidential election, previously consisted of some of the large social media firms, including Twitter and Microsoft in addition to Facebook and Google. Among the new participants is the Wikimedia Foundation.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    So if information emerges about a candidate in an “October surprise” in a way that can be credibly spun as a “hack” like the 2016 WikiLeaks drops were, it’s entirely likely that we will see some interference in people’s ability to communicate about it on not just one but multiple social media platforms. How much communication interference we’d be subjected to is unknown at this time, but it certainly looks like there are measures in place to at least implement some under certain circumstances.

    Imagine if documents or video footage were posted online somewhere and we’d get blocked from sharing its URLs on Facebook or suspended for posting screenshots of it on Twitter. The way iron-fisted censorship practices are already unfolding, it’s a possibility that looks not at all remote.

    Anyway, something to be on alert for.

    *  *  *

    Thanks for reading! The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for at my website or on Substack, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics on Twitter, throwing some money into my tip jar on Patreon or Paypal, purchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my books Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone and Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2

  • Used Vehicle Prices Explode To All Time Highs After Plunging Just Months Ago
    Used Vehicle Prices Explode To All Time Highs After Plunging Just Months Ago

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 22:05

    When you have the Central Bank back-stopping every industry in the United States, it’s incredible how quickly things can change over the course of less than a quarter. 

    Less than two months ago we were talking about the unprecedented crash in used car prices that had taken place as a result of the coronavirus pandemic slowing the economy. “Where’s the inflation?” everyone kept asking.

    We think we’ve found it. Today, according to new research from Manheim, those prices have exploded to hit new all time highs. The Manheim Used Vehicle Value index climbed to 163.4 in the first 15 days of August from 158.0 in July.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Prices rose another +3.4% sequentially in the first 15 days of August after rising +5.8% m/m in July,” a new note from J.P. Morgan highlights. It continues: “With the Manheim Index at 163.4 in early August (January 1995 = 100), used prices are now +13.9% higher vs. the then record level in February just prior to the pandemic and are +15.6% y/y.”

    J.P. Morgan notes that “Since April, the Manheim Used Vehicle Value index recovered +8.9% m/m in May, +9.0% m/m in June, +5.8% m/m in July, and is now +3.4% m/m in the first 15 days of August. Stronger prices suggest potential gains on sale of off-lease vehicles and higher collateral value, helping reduce loan losses.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The note predicts that prices should see some respite heading into the fall, as “pent up demand” as a result of the Covid-19 pandemic should subside. Most of this demand has already been satisfied, according to Manheim, and consumers are growing “increasingly frustrated” from the high prices. 

    It’s worth noting, however, that these same prognosticators were predicting a “sharp drop” in prices heading into the back end of the summer. That obviously didn’t materialize. Additionally, the same note says that consumers could be waiting for a second round of stimulus to purchase a vehicle. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Recall, it was just two months ago that we had put out a note highlighting where used car prices were crashing the most in the U.S. 

    Back in June, Manheim indicated that wholesale prices dropped as much as 11% in April, but also that this price drop hadn’t fully hit the retail market yet. The report predicted at the time that since “dealers have largely avoided purchasing new inventory in recent weeks, they aren’t in a rush to cut prices as a way to move their existing inventory.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It also predicted a sharp drop in retail prices in the coming weeks, stating that “a combination of record supply, damaged consumer confidence, and new car incentives will ultimately create a perfect storm causing retail prices to drop sharply in the coming weeks.”

    Between January and May, individual U.S. states experienced price drops ranging from 1% to 5%, the report showed.

    Those days now seem to be distant memories…

  • Pompeo Says Keeping Saudis From Nukes A Top US Priority Amid Reports Of Chinese Help
    Pompeo Says Keeping Saudis From Nukes A Top US Priority Amid Reports Of Chinese Help

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 21:45

    Authored by Jason Ditz via AntiWar.com,

    Following reports that this is a specific concern of Israel, Secretary of State Mike Pompeo says he believes it is a “real risk” that Saudi Arabia will get nukes, and that the US views it as a “top priority” to try to prevent the Saudis from getting such arms.

    Recent reports, all centering on the Israeli narrative, claim the Saudis are processing yellowcake uranium, and that they are getting secret help from China that could lead to the acquisition of nuclear arms in the future.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Image via Bold Business

    “We’re trying to take down risk of proliferation all across the world, whether that’s in Iran, Saudi Arabia, or North Korea, or Russia,” Pompeo told the NY Post, taking the unusual step of dropping the Saudi name alongside US enemies and so-called “rogue” regimes.

    “We’re certainly working with parties throughout the Middle East, sharing with them our concerns about the Chinese Community Party and the risk that’s created when the Chinese Communist Party shows up with a deal that looks too good to be true,” he added.

    This is an unusual place for the administration to be in, as they generally support arming the Saudis to the teeth, and Pompeo has repeatedly gone to bat for the idea that the Saudis need more arms for their “emergency” state. Those are US-made arms, of course.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The concern may be that getting arms from China will change the power structure of the Middle East, with Pompeo emphasizing China’s offer is “too good to be true.”

    It’s not clear what China offered, or if they offered anything at all, and Saudi interest in nuclear energy could easily explain away the uranium processing.

  • "I Have A Right To Make Sure That My Home Is Secure": Chicago Mayor Lightfoot Defends Ban On Protesters On Her Block
    “I Have A Right To Make Sure That My Home Is Secure”: Chicago Mayor Lightfoot Defends Ban On Protesters On Her Block

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 21:25

    In the aftermath of the George Floyd killing, protests erupted across dozens of cities in California with hundreds of thousands of people taking to the streets, and despite the raging coronavirus pandemic they were cheered on loudly by the state’s liberal elite with some of the most prominent Hollywood actors taking daily turns to voice their support for the protesters while condemning anyone who did not side with the BLM movement, even when so frequently it devolved into violent rioting and looting of innocent bystanders. All of that abruptly ended, however, when BLM invaded Beverly Hills chanting  “eat the rich.” That’s when the police quickly showed up and immediately cleared out all the protesters.

    But while such NIMBY hypocrisy has long been a fixture of the ultra-liberal Golden State, nothing compares to what just happened in Chicago whose Mayor Lori Lightfoot – best known for encouraging local BLM protests, going so far as saying that black lives are “more important that downtown corporations” after the unprecedented looting that took place last week – defended the Chicago Police Department’s ban on protesters being able to demonstrate on the block where she lives, telling reporters Thursday that she and her family at times require heightened security because of threats she receives daily.

    Yes, Mayor Lori is all about BLM protests… as long as they are literally not in her back yard.

    Lightfoot refused to elaborate on the specific threats according to the Chicago Tribune, but said she receives them daily against herself, her wife and her home. Lightfoot also told reporters that comparisons to how the Police Department has protected previous mayors’ homes, such as Rahm Emanuel’s Ravenswood residence, are unfair because “this is a different time like no other.”

    “I think that residents of this city, understanding the nature of the threats that we are receiving on a daily basis, on a daily basis, understand I have a right to make sure that my home is secure,” Lightfoot said, failing to grasp the simplest truth that all citizens of “her” devastated city also have a right to make sure that their home is secure although unlike Lightfoot they don’t have the local police to protect them. Because when it comes to outrageous liberal hypocrisy, things get complicated.

    Lightfoot and Chicago police Superintendent David Brown were asked at an unrelated news conference about a Tribune report noting police have banned protesters from demonstrating on her block in the Logan Square neighborhood, ordering officers to arrest anyone who refuses to leave. The directive surfaced in a July email from then-Shakespeare District Cmdr. Melvin Roman to officers under his command. It did not distinguish between the peaceful protesters Lightfoot regularly says she supports and those who might intend to be destructive, but ordered that after a warning is given to demonstrators, “It should be locked down.”

    Activists and police sources could not cite instances when the city repeatedly locked down her predecessor Emanuel’s block against protesters. The Kenwood block where former President Barack Obama lived with his family when his primary residence was in Chicago was shut down for access only by residents after his election.

    But Lightfoot said such comparisons “don’t make any sense,” after Brown referenced the ongoing coronavirus pandemic – which she has repeatedly overriden as a concern when BLM protests are to be held – as well as civil unrest that have flared since the George Floyd killing at the hands of Minneapolis police.

    “I’m not going to make any excuses for the fact that, given the threats I have personally received, given the threats to my home and my family, I’m going to do everything I can to make sure they’re protected,” Lightfoot said. “I make no apologies whatsoever for that.”

    It wasn’t clear if Lightfoot would apologize to all those millions of Chicago residents who – just like her – are trying to avoid threats against their own families by angry, violent looters; looters whose despicable actions Lightfoot has repeatedly turned her eyes away from in hopes of peak virtue signaling.

    According to the Chicago Tribune, since the order, and even for a time just prior to its writing, Chicago cops have repeatedly blocked protesters’ access to the block with groups of officers and barricades. Police have often kept protesters contained at the nearby corner of Kimball and Wrightwood avenues, though one standoff between activists and officers last month saw police go as far as bringing in an armored vehicle in case things got out of hand.

    Aside from the expanded police presence to block protesters from reaching her home, Lightfoot already receives 24/7 protection from cops including officers stationed at the residence. Worse, the aggressive overpolicing of the self-absorbed hypocrite mayor has often siphoned away resources from the area’s police district, some sources with knowledge of the situation told the Tribune, leading to quiet grumbling.

    Both Lightfoot and Brown noted there are laws on the books banning residential protests, but Brown acknowledged the Police Department does not always enforce them. Brown said the city tries to give “wiggle room” for protesters.

    Brown also cited instances where peaceful protests have been “hijacked” by agitators as reason for keeping demonstrators off Lightfoot’s block.

    “We have seen very peaceful First Amendment protests for the most part but embedded in each of those protests have been very violent people. And they’re embedded. They put up umbrellas. And they come for a fight,” Brown said. “So we have to prepare for what we’ve seen.”

    You certainly do, and so do all the other millions of Chicago residents and yet under Lightfoot’s directives it will be a miracle if Chicago has a police force this time next year… besides those cops of course stationed at Lightfoot’s house to protect the (soon to be former) mayor from the protesters she herself has repeatedly egged on.

  • Maine Governor Orders Restaurant Staff To Wear COVID-Visors Like Dog-Cones
    Maine Governor Orders Restaurant Staff To Wear COVID-Visors Like Dog-Cones

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 21:05

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    The Governor of Maine has ordered restaurant staff to wear anti-COVID visors upside down so they resemble dog cones in order to direct breath upwards.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yes, really.

    Governor Janet Mills’ decree states that “front-of-house staff in restaurants who choose to wear face shields must now wear them upside down so that they are attached at the collar instead of the forehead, so that their breath is directed up, not down,” reports Maine Public Radio.

    Given that air conditioning units can facilitate the spread of coronavirus, Mills’ order looks like another ridiculous and pointless measure.

    “As a symbol of submission, forcing us to obliterate our individuality by wearing masks was not explicit enough,” writes Dave Blount. “So they pushed the envelope even further. No one can miss the significance of making people wear dog cones.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Last week, the CDC announced that masks with valves, which millions of people around the world have been wearing for months, do “not prevent the person wearing the mask from transmitting COVID-19 to others.”

    As we highlighted earlier, Sweden’s top expert on the coronavirus, Anders Tengell, warned that encouraging people to wear face masks is “very dangerous” because it gives a false sense of security but does not effectively stem the spread of the virus.

    As we explain in the video below, the issue of masks has become both a logistical and political minefield.

    *  *  *

    In the age of mass Silicon Valley censorship It is crucial that we stay in touch. I need you to sign up for my free newsletter here. Also, I urgently need your financial support here.

  • Virtue Reversal: Goodyear Bends The Knee After Trump Sparks Boycott
    Virtue Reversal: Goodyear Bends The Knee After Trump Sparks Boycott

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 20:55

    After a ham-handed attempt at damage control with a non-apology over biased “diversity” training sparked outrage from President Trump – which in turn sparked a boycott by conservatives, Goodyear CEO Rich Kramer issued a direct apology on Thursday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To be clear, Goodyear does not endorse any political organization, party or candidate,” reads Kramer’s statement, which adds that the company “strongly supports our law enforcement partners and deeply appreciates all they do to put their lives on the line each and every day for their communities.”

    “We have clarified our policy to make it clear associates can express support for law enforcement through apparel at Goodyear facilities,” which means – no MAGA hats, but presumably means ‘Blue Lives Matter’ and ‘All Lives Matter’ attire is now acceptable.

    (Cue BLM boycott)..

    On Wednesday, President Trump tweeted “Don’t buy GOODYEAR TIRES” after a leaked photo of an external firm’s ‘diversity training’ slide appeared to show that the company considers “Blue Lives Matter,” “All Lives Matter” and “MAGA” attire “unacceptable,” while at the same time encouraging “Black Lives Matter” and “Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, Transgender Pride (LGBT)” attire. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Cancel all the things!

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • Watch Live: DNC Night 4 – "The Speech Joe Biden Has Been Preparing For His Entire Life"
    Watch Live: DNC Night 4 – “The Speech Joe Biden Has Been Preparing For His Entire Life”

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 20:45

    Here it is, the ‘Big One’.

    You have made it through Bernie’s “Trump is bad” speech, Michelle’s “Trump is bad” speech, Bill’s “Trump is bad” speech, Chuck’s “Trump is bad” speech, Nancy’s “Trump is bad” speech, AOC’s “Bernie is great” speech, Pelosi’s “Trump is bad” speech, Obama’s “Trump is bad” speech, and finally, Kamala’s “Trump is bad” speech; and now you get the payoff – Joe Biden delivers his “Trump is bad” speech.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Tonight’s festivities begin with Cory Booker, followed by Pete Buttigieg, Gavin Newsom, Andrew Yang, Mike Bloomberg, and (drum roll please), a late addition – none other than reclusive Hunter Biden.

    Watch Live here (prime-time stream starts around 2100ET):

    Luckily, we are saved as Matt Taibbi has created an Official Drinking Game, “The Speech Joe Biden Has Been Preparing For His Entire Life” Edition especially for tonight to ease the pain for you and your cats.

    The DNC drinking game Monday night was so painful (and Tuesday was worse), that I’ve decided to shorten the game tonight to cover Joe Biden’s acceptance speech only.

    I watched Biden speak probably a half-dozen times during the primary campaign, and perhaps a half-dozen times before. He has definite tendencies, and his stump speech hits the same six or seven notes every time, but convention addresses are different. Every line, every word, will be scripted. There shouldn’t be ad-libs, freak-outs at hecklers, etc.

    Guessing what an unscripted Joe Biden will do at any given moment is pretty interesting. Here we’re basically trying to guess what Biden and his handlers have decided to put on a teleprompter.

    Drink EVERY TIME:

    1. Biden says, “Folks.”

    2. Biden says, “The United States of America.” Double-shots for any multiple-America construction, e.g. “The best America is an America where Americans believe in the American dream.”

    3. Biden says, “Middle-class.”

    4. Biden says, “Get up!” as in, “Folks, you’ve got to get up! This is the United States of America!”

    5. Biden says, “You guys.”

    6. Biden says, “Barack” or references the “Obama-Biden administration.”

    7. Biden says, “Soul of America.”

    8. Biden points out a surprising percentage of something, e.g. “Look, folks, seventy-four percent of venture capital goes to four cities.”

    9. Biden says, “My Mom used to say” or mentions one of his father’s relatable jobs, e.g. “He sold a hell of a lot of cars!”

    10. Biden makes a self-deprecating joke about his age or his tendency to say puzzling things.

    11. Biden finishes a section of his speech with a rhetorical flourish, and he sounds angry, and you can’t tell why, because he’s talking about something non-angering.

    12. Biden tells a story about a rewarding interaction with an ordinary person, as in, “I walk over to the guy up in the bucket. And there’s seven guys around him, all with hard hats on. I yelled up and said, ‘Hey, man, thanks!’”

    13. Biden references a job you’ve never heard of, as in “Why is a sandwich maker being forced to sign a non-compete clause?”

    14. Biden says “systemic.”

    15. Biden tells us there’s nothing we can’t accomplish.

    Drink the FIRST TIME only:

    1. Biden begins a sentence with, “Look.”

    2. Biden mentions Scranton.

    3. Biden says something that sounds sort of inappropriate.

    You may FINISH THE BOTTLE or QUIT if Biden combines any four of the above in one sentence, e.g. “Look, folks, we’ve got to get up if we’re going to be the kind of America we know America can be.”

    “Malarkey,” as always, is an automatic drink.

    Again, apologies to Substack subscribers. Back to grownup content soon.

    Biden will be speaking sometime after 9 p.m. I will be live-streaming with Katie Halper

    Take small sips and hydrate. Good luck, America!

  • The Global Elite Have Far More Control Over Us Than Most People Would Dare To Imagine
    The Global Elite Have Far More Control Over Us Than Most People Would Dare To Imagine

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 20:25

    Authored by Michael Snyder via TheMostImportantNews.com,

    No matter where you fall on the political spectrum, you probably agree that the global elite have too much power and influence. 

    It has been said that “money is power”, and today that seems to be more true than ever.  Those at the very, very top of the pyramid dictate the rules of the game for the rest of us, and there isn’t too much that the rest of us can do about it.  When we talk about how the global elite dominate our lives, the focus tends to be on how they influence national governments, but the truth is that is one of the areas where the global elite have the least control.  I know that may sound strange, but I believe that things will become clearer by the end of this article.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I would submit that corporations are the primary vehicle that the elite use to control our lives.  In fact, many global corporations are now larger and more powerful than most national governments, and collectively the network of global corporations that dominates the planet is far larger and far more powerful than any single national government.

    A number of years ago, a remarkable study was conducted that closely examined the interconnecting relationships of major corporations all over the world.  That study discovered that a network of 1,318 enormous companies dominated the global economy, and it also found that 147 colossal corporations at the core of that web formed a “super-entity” that controlled 40 percent of the entire network…

    Each of the 1318 had ties to two or more other companies, and on average they were connected to 20. What’s more, although they represented 20 per cent of global operating revenues, the 1318 appeared to collectively own through their shares the majority of the world’s large blue chip and manufacturing firms – the “real” economy – representing a further 60 per cent of global revenues.

    When the team further untangled the web of ownership, it found much of it tracked back to a “super-entity” of 147 even more tightly knit companies – all of their ownership was held by other members of the super-entity – that controlled 40 per cent of the total wealth in the network. “In effect, less than 1 per cent of the companies were able to control 40 per cent of the entire network,” says Glattfelder. Most were financial institutions. The top 20 included Barclays Bank, JPMorgan Chase & Co, and The Goldman Sachs Group.

    Of course at the very top are the ultra-wealthy individuals that own and control the gigantic corporations that make up the “super-entity”.

    This is why our major corporations all seem to have the same values.  At the very top their ownerships are all interlinked, and so trying to fundamentally change the culture of these massive institutions is nearly impossible.

    Many have promoted the idea of refusing to economically engage this monster, but that has become nearly impossible.  Over the years, we have seen so many promising companies get gobbled up by this “super-entity”, and in many instances the customers of these companies don’t even realize that they are now owned by someone else.

    Because they have such a huge share of the market, the global elite essentially dictate what gets produced, what gets sold and what gets bought.

    And if you need a loan to buy a home or to make some other major purchase, you normally have to go through one of their financial institutions.

    But of course it doesn’t stop there.  Politicians love to talk about “job creation”, but the truth is that it is our major corporations that really hold the keys over who works where.

    When I was much younger, I made it very clear who I was and what I believed on my resume.  What a big mistake that was.  If you want to get hired by the elite, it has to look like you share their values and that you will be a good little cog in the machine.

    And the elite ensure that they will have an endless supply of “good little cogs” by completely and utterly dominating our system of higher education.  Colleges and universities that have done as the elite have wished have been absolutely showered with money, while others have been allowed to go by the wayside.

    At this point, a “college education” will pretty much look the same no matter where you go, and that is extremely unfortunate.

    Once we leave school, the elite continue to control what we think through their ownership of nearly all of the major media and entertainment companies.  Today, more than 90 percent of the “news” and “entertainment” that we get through our televisions is produced by their colossal media empires, and the average American spends approximately five hours a day in front of a television.

    If you allow anyone to feed propaganda into your mind for five hours a day, that is going to have an enormous impact on how you view the world.

    You can try flipping over to a different channel than you normally watch, but that won’t change much.

    Have you ever wondered why the news always sounds the same no matter which channel you are watching?

    Needless to say, that doesn’t happen by accident.

    In the early years, the Internet allowed alternative voices to compete with the giant media empires, but now that is rapidly changing.  Because giant corporations now control so much of the Internet, those corporations can silence dissenting voices by “deplatforming” them.  One by one, bright lights are going out all over the Internet, and eventually the only voices that will be left will be corporate-approved voices.

    The Constitution that governs our land is supposed to guarantee freedom of speech.  But the corporations that completely dominate our lives now control most of the online “public squares”, and they have made it abundantly clear that they are going to dictate what can be said and what cannot be said.

    So you can still go out in your backyard and say whatever you want, but at this point “freedom of speech” is dead in this country for all practical purposes.

    Are you starting to understand the power that they have?

    President Trump cannot control what you say, but the major corporations do it every day.

    And unlike our politicians, we cannot get rid of the corporations at the voting booth.

    No matter what happens in November, the global elite are going to continue to dominate our society, but if we stay on the road that they are leading us down our future is going to be exceedingly bleak.

    Voices such as mine will continue to try to wake people up, but when the other side has almost unlimited resources it is a very tough battle to fight.

    However, we can never give up, because as long as the corporations owned by the global elite completely dominate our society we will never truly be free.

  • Pompeo Blasts European Allies As "Siding With Ayatollahs" After Rejecting Iran 'Snapback Sanctions'
    Pompeo Blasts European Allies As “Siding With Ayatollahs” After Rejecting Iran ‘Snapback Sanctions’

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 20:05

    Apparently still reeling from last week’s United Nations Security Council vote where the door was forever shut on the US bid to indefinitely extend the UN arms embargo on Iran, Secretary of State Mike Pompeo in Thursday remarks blasted Washington’s European allies at a moment he’s attempting to trigger “snapback sanctions”.

    In a news conference from the United Nations Security Council (UNSC), he charged that Germany, France and the UK are hypocritical in supposedly expressing private support for the US position, while at the UN they publicly “chose to side with Ayatollahs” against the controversial procedure to uphold the punitive action rooted in the JCPOA.

    It should be recalled in last Friday’s initial vote which triggered what many see as but more Washington desperation while Europe largely stands by the terms of the Obama-era nuclear deal, only the tiny Dominican Republic voted “yes” to extend the weapons embargo alongside the US. What’s more, Europe is now vehemently opposing Pompeo’s controversial procedure to reimpose UN sanctions on Tehran.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pompeo at UN headquarters in New York, via AFP/Getty Images.

    He’s specifically responding to the latest actions of Britain, France and Germany, all who say 

    The US did not have the legal right to trigger the so-called “snapback” of sanctions because it withdrew from the Iranian nuclear accord in 2018.

    Ironically, Pompeo is claiming authority to initiate a procedure which is ultimately based on the US still being a participant in the 2015 nuclear deal (JCPOA) with Iran, but obviously the Trump administration withdrew in May 2018.

    Pompeo lashed out in response late Thursday, saying:  

    “No country but US has the courage and conviction to put forward a resolution. Instead, they chose to side with ayatollahs.”

    “The United States will never allow the world’s largest state sponsor of terrorism to freely buy and sell planes, tanks, missiles and other kinds of conventional weapons,” Pompeo asserted in New York. “We will never allow the Islamic Republic of Iran to have a nuclear weapon,” he emphasized during the UNSC address.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    He did however, praise the Arab Gulf nations of the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC) for being firm in calling for the extension of a weapons ban in a formal joint statement.

    Meanwhile, Iran is boasting of two new longer range missiles on Thursday – one named after the IRGC Quds Force chief killed this year by US drone strike:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    He further vowed that the US will do absolutely everything to ensure to enforce sanctions on Iran if they are violated, especially weapons, even on American allies.

    It should be noted that both China and Russia have also called out Washington for being in no legal position whatsoever to renew Iran sanctions related to the JCPOA. Russian Deputy Foreign Minister Sergei Ryabkov slammed Washington’s latest push as “absurd.”

    And China had this to say through its foreign ministry spokesman: “We have repeatedly said that the US has already withdrawn from the JCPOA and therefore has no right to request the restoration of the UN sanctions regime against Iran.”

    The reality remains that with the US formally withdrawn from the 2015 nuclear deal, it’s in a much more difficult position to force its will on the diplomatic front, which is why it’s reverted to increasingly confrontational and aggressive unilateral sanctions enforcement and threats, even lately going so far as seizing fuel-laden Iranian ships on the high seas.

  • Steve Bannon Pleads Not Guilty To Fraud Charges, Freed On $5 Million Bail
    Steve Bannon Pleads Not Guilty To Fraud Charges, Freed On $5 Million Bail

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 19:55

    Update (1620ET): Bannon pleaded not guilty this afternoon at a brief presentment before U.S. District Judge Analisa Torres in Manhattan, and was freed on $5 million bond which restricts his traveling. Bannon was arrested this morning on a Chinese billionaire’s yacht, and charged with fraud over a $25 million campaign to crowdfund a wall on the US southern border.

    Three other executives of the We Build the Wall charity were also charged Thursday with plotting to defraud the donors and launder their money into their own pockets. Bannon; U.S. Air Force veteran Brian Kolfage; venture capitalist Andy Badolato; and Timothy Shea each face conspiracy counts that could carry a maximum 40-year sentence.  

    “To induce donors to donate to the campaign, Kolfage and Bannon — each of whom, as detailed herein, exerted significant control over We Build the Wall — repeatedly and falsely assured the public that Kolfage would ‘not take a penny in salary or compensation’ and that ‘100% of the funds raised … will be used in the execution of our mission and purpose’ because, as Bannon publicly stated, ‘we’re a volunteer organization,’” according to the indictment filed in the Southern District of New York.

    “Those representations were false,” it continues.

    According to Courthouse News, acting U.S. Attorney Audrey Strauss said the men defrauded hundreds of thousands of donors in this scheme, with the founder treating himself to a boat, Range Rover and a salary on the pretense that every penny the charity raised would be spent on construction.  

    “While repeatedly assuring donors that Brian Kolfage, the founder and public face of We Build the Wall, would not be paid a cent, the defendants secretly schemed to pass hundreds of thousands of dollars to Kolfage, which he used to fund his lavish lifestyle,” said Strauss, who assumed the position of U.S. attorney earlier this summer after her predecessor Geoffrey Berman’s unexplained and unexpected ouster.  

    Officials from the U.S. Postal Inspection Service, the law enforcement arm of the politically embattled U.S. Postal Service, reportedly arrested Bannon on a 150-foot yacht off the Eastern coast of Connecticut owned by Chinese billionaire Guo Wengui.

     

    * * *

    Update (1430ET): Guo Wengui has released a statement on Bannon’s arrest. The former top White House advisor was aboard Guo’s yacht at the time of the arrest, according to media reports.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    * * *

    Update (1300ET): The Hartford Courant just reported that Steve Bannon was arrested by – who else? – agents of the Postal Service while aboard a $28 million yacht owned by exiled Chinese businessman Guo Wengui.

    Here’s more from the Courant’s Ed Mahoney:

    Stephen K. Bannon, former top advisor to President Donald Trump, was arrested while on a yacht off Westbrook early Thursday, law enforcement sources said.

    Bannon was arrested by inspectors from the U.S. Postal Service while cruising Long Island Sound near Westbrook in a $28 million mega yacht called Lady May.

    The yacht was seen anchored off West Beach in Westbrook early Thursday, local residents said.

    A company that both Guo and Bannon have ties to is reportedly being investigated by the FBI, though the fact that the two business partners were spending time together isn’t very scandalous all by itself.

    * * *

    Update (1150ET): In his first comments on Bannon’s arrest, President Trump recalled that he didn’t support the “We Build The Wall” project at the time, and added that he thought it looked like “showboating”. “This is a job for the government, not private people,” he said.

    Trump even tweeted his objections in July, as questions about the nonprofit and its work were being raised by watchdog groups and the press.

    However, he added that Bannon’s arrest “was a very bad thing”.

    “I didn’t like that project, I thought it was being done for showboating regions,” Trump said.

    When pressed about reporters about the “lawlessness” in Trump’s administration (because “it’s not just Steve Bannon – it’s Michael Flynn, it’s Roger Stone…”) Trump shot back that there was plenty of “lawlessness” in the Obama Administration.

    “They spied on my campaign,” he said.

    Meanwhile, Scaramucci, who was Bannon’s arch-nemesis during Mooch’s 11 days in the White House, couldn’t help himself.

    And neither could Paul Krugman.

    We suspect even Jared Kushner, who has no presence on social media and rarely speaks to the press (except recently after the UAE-Israel deal) probably cracked a smile when he heard the news), since the former chief strategist reportedly made several high-profile enemies within Trump’s circle during his time in the West Wing.

    * * *

    Update (1115ET): Beijing is already celebrating Bannon’s arrest.

    Another detail about Bannon’s arrest has slipped out. According to a local TV news station, Bannon was reportedly arrested Thursday while aboard a boat in Westbrook, Conn. The boat is not Bannon’s, the law enforcement source told NBC New York. The boat was reportedly 150 feet long, making it a pretty large yacht.

    * * *

    Former Trump advisor Steve Bannon has been arrested and indicted by the Manhattan US attorney for defrauding people in an online fundraising scheme.

    The arrest is tied to the “We Build The Wall” online fundraising scheme which invited Americans to donate to a campaign to build the wall with private funds. Bannon was arrested alongside Brian Kolfage, Andrew Badolato and Timothy Shea, all four of whom were involved in the online fundraising project (we reported on the fundraiser back in 2018). Prosecutors allege that after promising not to use “one cent” of the money raised in the GoFundMe page and other fundraising venues to pay themselves, the men – particularly Kolfage, the public face of the endeavor – broke this promise. In particular, Kolfage used much of the money to finance a “lavish lifestyle,” according to prosecutors (more information can be found in the press release below).

    According to the indictment, which was unsealed in Manhattan Federal Court on Thursday, Bannon and the three men willfully conned donors with their promise to build the wall with private money. Per the indictment, Bannon once described WBTW as a “volunteer organization”. Eventually “hundreds of thousands of dollars” were siphoned from the campaign, money supplied by donors, including some in the Southern District. Bannon allegedly collected more than $1 million even though little of the wall was ever built.

    Feds say Bannon is in federal custody, and Fox News flashed video of the Bannon “perp walk” shortly after news of his arrest hit. According to the AP, a call to the office of Bannon’s lawyer wasn’t answered Thursday morning, while a spokeswoman for Bannon didn’t immediately respond to a request for comment.

    Facing charges of 2 counts of conspiracy to commit money laundering and to commit wire fraud. Both of those charges carry a 20 year sentence.

    Notably, this is a separate issue from the FBI investigation into a media venture involving Bannon, an exiled Chinese businessman, and the son of Morgan Stanley’s co-founder.

    The arrest comes just hours before Joe Biden is set to accept the Democratic nomination. Bannon was indicted by Audrey Strauss, the successor (and former deputy head) to Geoffrey Berman, the US attorney in Manhattan who was messily pushed out by Bill Barr a few weeks ago.

    While these charges are the culmination of a separate investigation from the one that was leaked to the WSJ yesterday (and which we mentioned above), it’s seems to be part of the same wave of charges and aspersions being cast upon the former White House chief strategist. Aside from the investigation revealed yesterday, there have been multiple leaks about a “previously unpublicized” letter sent by the Senate Intel Committee to the DoJ asking that Bannon be investigated for allegedly lying in his testimony to the Committee. The letter, which was delivered to the DoJ last July when Richard Burr was still committee chairman, was a “bipartisan” effort.

    Read the DoJ press release explaining the charges below:

    Audrey Strauss, the Acting United States Attorney for the Southern District of New York, and Philip R. Bartlett, Inspector-in-Charge of the New York Field Office of the United States Postal Inspection Service (“USPIS”), announced the unsealing of an indictment charging BRIAN KOLFAGE, STEPHEN BANNON, ANDREW BADOLATO, and TIMOTHY SHEA for their roles in defrauding hundreds of thousands of donors in connection with an online crowdfunding campaign known as “We Build the Wall” that raised more than $25 million.  The defendants were arrested this morning.  KOLFAGE will be presented today before U.S. Magistrate Judge Hope T. Cannon in the Northern District of Florida.  BANNON will be presented today in the Southern District of New York.  BADOLATO will be presented today before U.S. Magistrate Judge Thomas Wilson in the Middle District of Florida.  SHEA will be presented today before U.S. Magistrate Judge Kristen L. Mix in the District of Colorado.  The case is assigned to U.S. District Judge Analisa Torres in the Southern District of New York.

    Acting U.S. Attorney Audrey Strauss said:  “As alleged, the defendants defrauded hundreds of thousands of donors, capitalizing on their interest in funding a border wall to raise millions of dollars, under the false pretense that all of that money would be spent on construction.  While repeatedly assuring donors that Brian Kolfage, the founder and public face of We Build the Wall, would not be paid a cent, the defendants secretly schemed to pass hundreds of thousands of dollars to Kolfage, which he used to fund his lavish lifestyle.  We thank the USPIS for their partnership in investigating this case, and we remain dedicated to rooting out and prosecuting fraud wherever we find it.”

    Inspector-in-Charge Philip R. Bartlett said:  “The defendants allegedly engaged in fraud when they misrepresented the true use of donated funds.  As alleged, not only did they lie to donors, they schemed to hide their misappropriation of funds by creating sham invoices and accounts to launder donations and cover up their crimes, showing no regard for the law or the truth.   This case should serve as a warning to other fraudsters that no one is above the law, not even a disabled war veteran or a millionaire political strategist.”

    According to the Indictment[1] unsealed today in Manhattan federal court:

    Starting in approximately December 2018, BRIAN KOLFAGE, STEPHEN BANNON, ANDREW BADOLATO, and TIMOTHY SHEA, and others, orchestrated a scheme to defraud hundreds of thousands of donors, including donors in the Southern District of New York, in connection with an online crowdfunding campaign ultimately known as “We Build The Wall” that raised more than $25 million to build a wall along the southern border of the United States.  In particular, to induce donors to donate to the campaign, KOLFAGE repeatedly and falsely assured the public that he would “not take a penny in salary or compensation” and that “100% of the funds raised . . . will be used in the execution of our mission and purpose” because, as BANNON publicly stated, “we’re a volunteer organization.”

    Those representations were false.  In truth, KOLFAGE, BANNON, BADOLATO, and SHEA received hundreds of thousands of dollars in donor funds from We Build the Wall, which they each used in a manner inconsistent with the organization’s public representations.  In particular, KOLFAGE covertly took for his personal use more than $350,000 in funds that donors had given to We Build the Wall, while BANNON, through a non-profit organization under his control (“Non-Profit-1”), received over $1 million from We Build the Wall, at least some of which BANNON used to cover hundreds of thousands of dollars in BANNON’s personal expenses.  To conceal the payments to KOLFAGE from We Build the Wall, KOLFAGE, BANNON, BADOLATO, and SHEA devised a scheme to route those payments from We Build the Wall to KOLFAGE indirectly through Non-Profit-1 and a shell company under SHEA’s control, among other avenues.  They did so by using fake invoices and sham “vendor” arrangements, among other ways, to ensure, as KOLFAGE noted in a text message to BADOLATO, that his pay arrangement remained “confidential” and kept on a “need to know” basis. 

    Read the indictment below:

    u.s. v. Brian Kolfage Stephen Bannon Et Al. Indictment 20-Cr-412 0 by Zerohedge on Scribd

    As TV commentators chew over what this means for the election, and whether the removal of Berman had anything to do with the Bannon case (even though Berman was handling a case involving Trump’s finances that hit much closer to home for Trump). Though Trump fired Bannon six months into his administration, speculation about whether Trump might step in to help his old friend will likely intensify, even though the case likely won’t have run its course before the start of the next presidential term. What’s more, as Jonathan Turley notes, Bannon is just the latest Trump world figure to be prosecuted under Bill Barr.

    Clearly the charges against Bannon suggest that the investigations have continyed in an independent fashion, despite all the warnings from Trump and Barr’s critics. Just like how Trump’s SCOTUS picks were supposed to destroy abortion rights.

    And if Bannon is being prosecuted for allegedly helping others exploit GoFundMe donations, will we see similar prosecutions of figures on the political left?

    Of course, the notion that Kolfage (the real target of the probe, though Bannon’s name is atop the marquee) & company defrauded unsuspecting rubes is undercut slightly by the fact that the GoFundMe page and “We Build The Wall” were almost immediately attacked by nonprofits like Charity Watch, and conservative media outlets like the Daily Caller, as having little to no accountability, just like plenty of other charities that legally operate in the US.

  • 'Morality Pill' A Cure For The Pandemic?
    ‘Morality Pill’ A Cure For The Pandemic?

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 19:45

    Authored by Eric Utter via AmericanThinker.com,

    Western Michigan University ethics professor Parker Crutchfield recently had an essay published in The Conversation in which he said psychoactive medications might be the most effective way to fight the spread of COVID-19.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He stated:

    To me, it seems the problem of coronavirus defectors could be solved by moral enhancement: like receiving a vaccine to beef up your immune system, people could take a substance to boost their cooperative, pro-social behavior. Could a psychoactive pill be the solution to the pandemic?

    He reiterated the idea later in the essay, saying:

    I believe society may be better off, both in the short term as well as the long, by boosting not the body’s ability to fight off disease but the brain’s ability to cooperate with others. What if researchers developed and delivered a moral enhancer rather than an immunity enhancer?

    Yes, that is precisely what we need most.  

    A “morality pill.”  What could go wrong with a government mandating the usage of a “morality enhancing” drug to make its citizens more “cooperative” and compliant?  Forcing people to comply with whatever the state mandates — by way of mind-altering drugs — sounds like a great idea!  People would never again take their masks off, never leave their abodes, always strictly comply with all social-distancing laws and regulations.  Follow Big Brother’s rules, and we can eliminate the coronavirus.  And free will, freedom, acts of conscience, and our souls.  Perhaps it would be best if we turned to God as our moral enhancer rather than science.

    The Nazis would have loved the idea of a pill to make the Jews more malleable and compliant.  It would have made the Holocaust easier.

    I’m sure China will run with Crutchfield’s idea.  It already grades its citizens on their social behavior and acquiescence to the government’s wishes.  Maybe everyone could get a perfect score!

    But let’s not be xenophobic.  Can you imagine if today’s Democratic Party had morality pills to dispense?  If they controlled all three branches of the federal government as they control most of America’s big cities, do you truly doubt they’d push the pills as the best possible way to “flatten the curve”?  Look at the actions of some of the country’s Democratic governors and mayors.  They have already mandated the use of face masks (even outdoors), arrested people for paddle-boarding or sunbathing, told people they cannot leave their homes for long stretches of time, and banned weddings and funeral attendance.  I wouldn’t put it past them to demand we all wear tweed jackets and clown shoes while mandating the taking of our daily morality pills.

    I can almost hear Big Brother (Nancy Pelosi?) saying, “And remember, citizens: vote a straight Democratic ticket this coming election.  It’s the right thing to do.”

  • San Francisco Bay Area Has The Worst Air Quality In The World As Wildfires Rage
    San Francisco Bay Area Has The Worst Air Quality In The World As Wildfires Rage

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 19:25

    Amid a record-breaking heatwave, air quality in the San Francisco Bay Area was the worst in the world, as smoke from wildfires blows over the region.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: PurpleAir

    As ABC7 reports, more than 10,800 lightning strikes started 367 new fires according to CAL FIRE division chief Jeremy Rahn.

    “Over the past 72 hours, California has experienced a historic lightning siege.”

    Three major wildfire complexes in the East Bay, North Bay and southern Peninsula continue to blow smoky air over nearly the entire region.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: ABC7

    “It’s going to get worse in a lot of areas,” said ABC7 News Meteorologist Mike Nicco Thursday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: PurpleAir

    San Francisco Mayor London Breed warned residents:

    “The best thing you can do is avoid exposure to outdoor air by staying indoors with the windows and doors closed.”

    And ironically, the ‘lockdown’ is being suggested as California Governor Gavin Newsom urges residnts to turn off A?C units to preserve electricity and the state also deals with rolling blackoust.

    Seems like another good reason to start considering joining the ‘mass exodus’.

  • Australians Are Hoarding Cash As Businesses Go Cashless
    Australians Are Hoarding Cash As Businesses Go Cashless

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 19:05

    Authored by Sophia Jiang via The Epoch Times,

    Australians are hoarding cash but using cashless transactions more than ever thanks to the effects of the CCP virus, two new reports have found.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The reports from electronic payment company Square shows that cash gave way to cards in daily transactions over the first half of the year while Australia’s central banking institution the Reserve Bank of Australia (RBA)revealed that the demand for banknotes had increased by 11 billion since February.

    More Businesses Turn to Cashless

    Square’s report (pdf) showed that over one in three Australian businesses— an estimated 36 percent—were effectively cashless during the lock-down peak in April, compared to seven percent pre-pandemic in January.  Square defined cashless as accepting 95% or more transactions through debit or credit cards.

    Data analysis also showed that cash payments declined by more than half between January and April, down from 35 percent to 15 percent of all transactions. But the payments levelled out in June to 18 percent.

    Square also noted some variances between states and industries.

    The ACT saw the most substantial cash payments plummeting,  from 42 percent of transactions in January to 14 percent in April. By June, 35.6 percent of businesses in the territory has turned cashless, over three times that of January at 9.8 percent.

    In Tasmania, Victoria, New South Wales and Queensland, cash payments also declined by more than half during the period from January to April, with the ratio of cashless businesses more than doubling to above 20 percent by June.

    By contrast, the Northern Territory remained the most committed to paying by cash, with cashless businesses ratio edging up only by 0.9 percent during the period from January to June, from 14.5 percent to 15.4 percent.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Professor Steve Worthington from Swinburne University Business School attributed the decline in cash payments to both safety concerns and the drop in the number of available ATMs. Adding that he believed the pandemic is only accelerating the digital shift that has been gaining momentum over the recent years.

    “For consumers, fears over social distancing and a preference to minimise contact with physical currency are likely to be top of mind,” he told Square’s blog.

    “What’s more, with banks closing branches, reducing operating hours and fewer ATMs available, there’s less cash in circulation. Combining that with the fact that many businesses favour digital payments for speed and security, there’s less incentive now for any of us to carry cash.”

    Latest figures from the self-regulatory payments body, the Australian Payments Network shows that the number of ATMs fell from 27,870 to 25,720—a drop of 2150—during the June quarter.

    Higher Demand for Cash

    Despite the increase in cashless transactions, The Reserve Bank has seen a rise in demand for banknotes in recent months, mainly by individuals with substantial deposit balances.

    In his August 14 speech to House of Representatives Standing Committee on Economics, RBA governor Philip Lowe noted keeping extra cash was some Australian’s responses to the pandemic.

    “While COVID-19 has accelerated the shift to electronic payments, there has, paradoxically, also been record demand for banknotes,” he said.

    “Some people seem to be wanting to keep some extra money at home. The result has been that the stock of banknotes on issue has increased from $83 billion in February to $94 billion today.”

    The elevated demand reflects concerns over financial stability amid the pandemic-induced economic recession.

    RBA has revealed in its Financial Stability Review report [pdf ] in April that over-the-counter withdrawals of cash from banks increased sharply over the second half of March as some customers with considerable balances sought to hold precautionary funds.

    “This included a small number of customers making very large withdrawals (more than $100,000, and in some cases into the millions of dollars),” the report said.

    RBA is confident that the Australian financial system will navigate the crisis because of the high capital levels and strong liquidity position of banks, as well as their high profitability and excellent asset performance.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 20th August 2020

  • World Trade Plunged To 'Lowest Levels' On Record In June
    World Trade Plunged To ‘Lowest Levels’ On Record In June

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 02:45

    Central banks expanded interventions to counteract the effects of the virus-induced global downturn have resulted in global equity prices, at, or, near record-high levels. These money wizards have printed trillions of dollars, plowing the money into financial markets to create an illusion that the worst global downturn on record is nothing more than a blip. 

    However, the World Trade Organization’s (WTO) Goods Trade Barometer registered a record low in June, confirming the decline in global merchandise trade in 2Q20 and suggests the recovery phase remains challenging: 

    “Additional indicators point to partial upticks in world trade and output in the third quarter, but the strength of any such recovery remains highly uncertain: an L-shaped, rather than V-shaped, the trajectory cannot be ruled out,” said the WTO.

    June’s Goods Trade Barometer reading is at 84.5, 15.5 points below the baseline of 100 and down 18.6 points year-on-year. The current reading is in line with WTO’s June trade forecast of an 18.5% drop in merchandise trade volumes in the second quarter. It also said the full-year decline would be “less pessimistic” of about -13%. 

    Nevertheless, the Goods Trade Barometer set a record low reading in June:

    “This reading – the lowest on record in data going back to 2007, and on par with the nadir of the 2008-09 financial crisis – is broadly consistent with WTO statistics issued in June, which estimated an 18.5% decline in merchandise trade in the second quarter of 2020 as compared to the same period last year,” the WTO said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    WTO said, “all the barometer’s component indices remain well below trend, with many registering record lows, but some have begun to stabilize. Indices for automotive products (71.8) and air freight (76.5) are by far the worst on record since 2007. Container shipping (86.9) also remains deeply depressed. Export orders (88.4) show signs of recovery as this index has turned upward. Meanwhile, indices for electronic components (92.8) and agricultural raw materials (92.5) have held up relatively well.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Breakdown of component indices: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Contrary to the official narrative of a “V-shaped” economic recovery seen around the world – the recovery in the US, China, and Europe is stalling.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Investor faith that central banks have effective monetary tools to produce a robust and timely recovery is merely an illusion of elevated asset prices.

  • Why Beijing's Wolf Warrior Diplomacy Suddenly Quieted Down
    Why Beijing’s Wolf Warrior Diplomacy Suddenly Quieted Down

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 02:00

    Authored by Huidong Zhang via The Epoch Times,

    Top-level Chinese officials have recently shifted away from the regime’s wolf warrior diplomacy tactic to a more toned-down approach. This turnaround can be interpreted as the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) not wanting to decouple from the United States nor shut out of the global economic order led by Washington.

    Yang Jiechi, a top member of the Politburo, wrote, “China is always open to dialogue and communication with the U.S.,” in an article dated Aug. 7. Cui Tiankai, Chinese ambassador to the United States, said the U.S.-China relationship should be “cooperation rather than confrontation” at the Aspen Security Forum on Aug. 4. Foreign Minister Wang Yi addressed the China-U.S. Think Tanks Media Forum on July 9, saying, “China can restore and restart the dialogue mechanisms at all levels and in all areas.”

    Although the above statements from the CCP officials reveal that Beijing is begging for a dialogue with Washington, the words carry no weight and may not lead to concrete actions.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Wolf Warrior Diplomacy Creates a Global Enemy

    For a long time, the CCP has regarded diplomacy to be a way of extending its tyranny. Its aggressive and offensive diplomacy is characterized by the goal of inciting national sentiment and brainwashing the Chinese people.

    For example, as former leader of the Communist Party, Mao Zedong’s revolutionary diplomacy was in line with his personal ambition—to become a leader of the world revolution. He classified nearly all nations as enemies. The United States and Western Europe became “imperialists,” the communist countries that abided by the Soviet Union were the “social imperialists,” and the remaining third world countries basically close to Europe and the United States were the “anti-China” faction. The few countries left were the “widespread poor friends” in Africa, which the regime could exploit using its foreign aid policy.

    In the 1969 Sino-Soviet border conflict, a very annoyed Soviet Union was preparing to carry out a “surgical nuclear strike” against China. A firm opposition from the United States spared the Chinese people from nuclear attack. Under the provocative “anti-imperialist” and “anti-revisionist” foreign policy of the regime, the Chinese people have suffered endlessly from an arrogant and isolated dictatorship.

    The subsequent leaders of the CCP realized that the time wasn’t right for the CCP to become a world leader; so they adopted former leader Deng Xiaoping’s “economic foreign policy with a strong nationalist diplomacy” to confuse the international community. During this period, the CCP organized various demonstrations in mainland China to threaten the international community, such as the 1999 students’ anti-American demonstration, the Chinese internet users’ boycott of French retail giant Carrefour in 2008, the 2012 anti-Japanese protest, and the anti-Korea demonstration in 2017. The wolf warrior diplomats, however, remained quiet.

    China’s economy developed rapidly after the United States helped it join the World Trade Organization (WTO). Its national strength also increased significantly, especially after it surpassed Japan to become the world’s second largest economy in 2010. Its capital strength seemed to prepare the CCP to achieve its ambition of changing the world order so it dominated the world. CCP hack writer Jin Canrong, a professor on Sino-U.S. relations at Renmin University of China, even declared the so-called “win-win” as China wins twice. The new superpower is now ready to launch its revolutionary diplomatic wars around the world.

    The global pandemic enabled the wolf warrior diplomats to launch a series of attacks in order to shirk accountability for the wide spread of the CCP virus, commonly known as the novel coronavirus. First, they inferred that the United States was the source of COVID-19, which provoked the China-U.S. conflict. Second, shamelessly demanding gratitude from the world for providing defective face masks. Third, the Chinese ambassador to Australia warned Australia to stop the international inquiry into the origin of the CCP virus. Fourth, the Chinese ambassador to Paris slandered staff in France’s nursing homes on his embassy’s website and sharply criticized the Western response to the outbreak for being laggardly. Fifth, the Chinese Embassy in Brazil tweeted that Eduardo Bolsonaro, the son of the President of Brazil, had been infected with a “mental virus” during a recent trip to the United States after he tweeted that the regime is a “dictatorship.” Sixth, the Chinese Embassy in Germany called local tabloid BILD “bad” when it claimed that China owes a debt to Germany because of the CCP virus pandemic. Seventh, the Chinese Embassy in Sweden posted on its website that think tank Frivärld’s claim that “China should apologize” is totally groundless, unjustified, and is a more terrifying virus.

    These diplomatic spats caused by the wolf warriors on the surface demonstrate the tough line of the regime, but also constantly brainwash the Chinese people. As the state-run media Global Times wrote, “The days of China getting bullied are gone.” The ultimate goal of such tactics is to trap the international community into the blame game and obfuscate the fundamental issue of the source of pandemic.

    However, this wolf warrior diplomacy has brought an obvious side effect, namely, “the big power diplomacy with Chinese characteristics” proposed by CCP leader Xi Jinping has deteriorated to distrust by all countries in the world, and to once again becoming the “human enemy.” A recent Pew Research Center survey showed “roughly two-thirds of Americans now have a negative opinion of China, the highest percentage recorded” since Pew began asking the question 15 years ago.

    Shifting to Dialogue Mode Buys Time

    Wolf warrior diplomacy has not only failed to elevate international power proposed by China’s foreign ministry, it has ruined the image of a worldly new power the CCP created through painstaking efforts.

    The relationship between the CCP and other countries in the world continues to deteriorate—especially U.S.-China relations. After U.S. Secretary of State Mike Pompeo stated that the freedom-loving nations of the world “must start by changing how our people and our partners perceive the Chinese Communist Party,” and (we) “can’t treat this incarnation of China as a normal country, just like any other,” the regime finally realized the change in U.S. foreign policy toward the CCP. In order to maintain the legitimacy of the regime, the CCP top officials had to beg for a dialogue with the United States.

    Yang Jiechi, a Politburo member and director of the Office of Foreign Affairs of the Communist Party of China wrote:

    “The two countries need to engage in dialogue and communication in all areas. China is always open to dialogue and communication with the U.S.”

    Obviously, Yang deliberately forgot what Pompeo said in his speech, “Yang’s promises, like so many the CCP made before him, were empty.” The dialogue will not occur because the United States has recognized, as Pompeo stated, “that the only way—the only way to truly change communist China is to act not on the basis of what Chinese leaders say, but how they behave.”

    The United States has said it clearly:

    “When it comes to the CCP … we must distrust and verify.”

    The CCP’s begging for a dialogue with the United States can be interpreted as a delaying tactic and pinning its hopes on the upcoming presidential election.

    “China prefers that President Trump—whom Beijing sees as unpredictable—does not win reelection,” according to a statement made by NCSC (U.S. National Counterintelligence and Security Center) Director William Evanina on Aug. 7.

    The CCP has never given up its ambitions of global hegemony. Therefore, the United States must be alert to the current behavior of the CCP, because what the CCP does has always threatened the security of the United States and the world.

    CCP Breaking Away From World Economic Order

    As we all know, from the cover-up of the coronavirus outbreak to the suppression of whistleblowers, the CCP’s actions, aided by the WHO director general’s misleading information, have led to a world pandemic that continues to erode the international community. It is inevitable for people around the world to demand compensation from the CCP for damages caused by the virus. Already, some countries in Africa have publicly asked the CCP to reduce or forgive their debts—this is compensation in disguise. Conflicts around the issue of claims will erupt after the pandemic is over. The CCP may have to leave the international economic order.

    Countries will not move their industrial supply chains to China, especially after seeing the threat of the CCP’s tyranny to the global economy and politics. Considering national security and the safety of people’s lives and health, countries will accelerate their decoupling with the regime. A tidal wave of decoupling from the CCP has already begun.

    Countries involved in cooperation projects and organizations led by the CCP’s investment-oriented “One Belt, One Road” (OBOR, also known as Belt and Road Initiative), Shanghai Cooperation Organization, and the BRICS, have had serious conflicts and disagreements with the CCP over the pandemic and diplomacy. India and Brazil, members of the BRICS, for instance, have shown deteriorating relations with the CCP.

    Through the pandemic, deterioration of relations between the CCP and other countries has accelerated. Once the industrial chain moves out of China, it will be difficult to get it back. The status of “world factory” will never return. The CCP’s perverse actions will only lead to its exclusion from the international community and the world economic order.

  • Australian Five- And Ten-Cent Coins To Disappear As Pandemic Ushers In 'Cashless Society
    Australian Five- And Ten-Cent Coins To Disappear As Pandemic Ushers In ‘Cashless Society

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 01:00

    Australia’s five and ten cent coins could bite the dust as the coronavirus pandemic has supercharged the decline of coin circulation. 

    Leading up to the pandemic, coin circulation in Australia experienced a sharp decline in the use of 5 and 10 cent coins. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Royal Australian Mint CEO Ross MacDiarmid told ABC News that he expects 5 and 10 cent coins to be phased out of circulation in the coming years, adding that the pandemic has likely shortened the natural life of coins.  

    “There’s no doubt there has been a significant decline in demand for circulating coin over the last five to six years,” MacDiarmid said. 

    “Decline in demand for coins (is) roughly 55 to 56 per cent,” he said. 

    The Reserve Bank of Australia (RBA) recently published data showing the rapid decline of physical currency used in transactions over the last half-decade. The RBA pointed out an unprecedented decline in the use of cash because of the virus pandemic forced people to transact online and use contactless payments. 

    “ATM withdrawals in April were down 30 per cent from the month before and over 40 per cent lower than 12 months earlier,” RBA Assistant Governor Michele Bullock said in June.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Rising inflation, coupled with the growth of online and contactless payments, are rendering the lowly silvers obsolete, despite their place as a mainstay in cafe tip jars, charity tins, and school canteens,” said ABC.

    MacDiarmid said the outgoing coins would be redeemable at banks and can still be used in shops. 

    He said the government has carefully taken a look at the 50 cent coin: 

    “We are monitoring its use in circulation to see whether there’s a need somewhere in the future for a different 50c piece to be produced,” MacDiarmid said. 

    “It’s not something we’ve necessarily raised with the Government but it’s something that perhaps could be raised in the future,” he added.

    MacDiarmid cited a figure, pointing to the steep decline of coins over the last five decades. He said there are only 4 billion coins in circulation, down from 15 billion in 1965. 

    The decline of physical money attributed to the virus pandemic has also been seen in the US over the last two months. A coin shortage has forced many businesses to only accept exact change and or only accept credit and debit cards. 

    The demise of the Australian 5 and 10 cent coins amid the rise of contactless payments, supercharged by the virus pandemic, along with the coin shortage in the US, forcing folks to use contactless payments as well, certainly suggests a cashless society is ahead. 

  • The Great Election Fraud: Will Our Freedoms Survive Another Vote?
    The Great Election Fraud: Will Our Freedoms Survive Another Vote?

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/20/2020 – 00:05

    Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “Never has our future been more unpredictable, never have we depended so much on political forces that cannot be trusted to follow the rules of common sense and self-interest—forces that look like sheer insanity, if judged by the standards of other centuries.”

    – Hannah Arendt, The Origins of Totalitarianism

    And so it begins again, the never-ending, semi-delusional, train-wreck of an election cycle in which the American people allow themselves to get worked up into a frenzy over the misguided belief that the future of this nation—nay, our very lives—depends on who we elect as president.

    For the next three months, Americans will be dope-fed billions of dollars’ worth of political propaganda aimed at keeping them glued to their television sets and persuading them that 1) their votes count and 2) electing the right candidate will fix everything that is wrong with this country.  

    Incredible, isn’t it, that in a country of more than 330 million people, we are given only two choices for president? How is it that in a country teeming with creative, intelligent, productive, responsible, moral people, our vote too often comes down to pulling the lever for the lesser of two evils?

    The system is rigged, of course.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It is a heavily scripted, tightly choreographed, star-studded, ratings-driven, mass-marketed, costly exercise in how to sell a product—in this case, a presidential candidate—to dazzled consumers who will choose image over substance almost every time.

    As author Noam Chomsky rightly observed, “It is important to bear in mind that political campaigns are designed by the same people who sell toothpaste and cars.”

    In other words, we’re being sold a carefully crafted product by a monied elite who are masters in the art of making the public believe that they need exactly what is being sold to them, whether it’s the latest high-tech gadget, the hottest toy, or the most charismatic politician.

    This year’s presidential election, much like every other election in recent years, is what historian Daniel Boorstin referred to as a “pseudo-event”: manufactured, contrived, confected and devoid of any intrinsic value save the value of being advertised.

    After all, who wants to talk about police shootings, SWAT team raids, asset forfeiture schemes, private prisons, school-to-prison pipelines, overcriminalization, censorship or any of the other evils that plague our nation when you can tune into a reality show carefully calibrated to appeal to the public’s need for bread and circuses, diversion and entertainment, and pomp and circumstance.

    But make no mistake: Americans only think they’re choosing the next president.

    In truth, however, they’re engaging in the illusion of participation culminating in the reassurance ritual of voting. It’s just another Blue Pill, a manufactured reality conjured up by the matrix in order to keep the populace compliant and convinced that their vote counts and that they still have some influence over the political process.

    It’s all an illusion.

    The nation is drowning in debt, crippled by a slowing economy, overrun by militarized police, swarming with surveillance, besieged by endless wars and a military industrial complex intent on starting new ones, and riddled with corrupt politicians at every level of government.

    All the while, we’re arguing over which corporate puppet will be given the honor of stealing our money, invading our privacy, abusing our trust, undermining our freedoms, and shackling us with debt and misery for years to come.

    Nothing taking place on Election Day will alleviate the suffering of the American people.

    Unless we do something more than vote, the government as we have come to know it—corrupt, bloated and controlled by big-money corporations, lobbyists and special interest groups—will remain unchanged. And “we the people”—overtaxed, overpoliced, overburdened by big government, underrepresented by those who should speak for us and blissfully ignorant of the prison walls closing in on us—will continue to trudge along a path of misery.

    With roughly 22 lobbyists per Congressman, corporate greed will continue to call the shots in the nation’s capital, while our so-called representatives will grow richer and the people poorer. And elections will continue to be driven by war chests and corporate benefactors rather than such values as honesty, integrity and public service.

    Just consider: while billions will be spent on the elections this year, not a dime of that money will actually help the average American in their day-to-day struggles to just get by.

    Conveniently, politicians only seem to remember their constituents in the months leading up to an election, and yet “we the people” continue to take the abuse, the neglect, the corruption and the lies. We make excuses for the shoddy treatment, we cover up for them when they cheat on us, and we keep hoping that if we just stick with them long enough, eventually they’ll treat us right.

    When a country spends billions of dollars to select what is, for all intents and purposes, a glorified homecoming king or queen to occupy the White House, while tens of millions of its people live in poverty, nearly 18 million Americans are out of work, and most of the country and its economy remain in a state of semi-lockdown due to COVID-19 restrictions, that’s a country whose priorities are out of step with the needs of its people.

    Then again, people get the government they deserve.

    No matter who wins the presidential election come November, it’s a sure bet that the losers will be the American people if all we’re prepared to do is vote.

    As political science professor Gene Sharp notes in starker terms, “Dictators are not in the business of allowing elections that could remove them from their thrones.”

    To put it another way, the Establishment—the shadow government and its corporate partners that really run the show, pull the strings and dictate the policies, no matter who occupies the Oval Office—are not going to allow anyone to take office who will unravel their power structures. Those who have attempted to do so in the past have been effectively put out of commission.

    So what is the solution to this blatant display of imperial elitism disguising itself as a populist exercise in representative government?

    Stop playing the game. Stop supporting the system. Stop defending the insanity. Just stop.

    Washington thrives on money, so stop giving them your money. Stop throwing your hard-earned dollars away on politicians and Super PACs who view you as nothing more than a means to an end. There are countless worthy grassroots organizations and nonprofits working in your community to address real needs like injustice, poverty, homelessness, etc. Support them and you’ll see change you really can believe in in your own backyard.

    Politicians depend on votes, so stop giving them your vote unless they have a proven track record of listening to their constituents, abiding by their wishes and working hard to earn and keep their trust.

    It’s comforting to believe that your vote matters, but Franklin Delano Roosevelt was right: “Presidents are selected, not elected.”

    Despite what is taught in school and the propaganda that is peddled by the media, a presidential election is not a populist election for a representative. Rather, it’s a gathering of shareholders to select the next CEO, a fact reinforced by the nation’s archaic electoral college system. In other words, your vote doesn’t elect a president. Despite the fact that there are 218 million eligible voters in this country (only half of whom actually vote), it is the electoral college, made up of 538 individuals handpicked by the candidates’ respective parties, that actually selects the next president.

    The only thing you’re accomplishing by taking part in the “reassurance ritual” of voting is sustaining the illusion that we have a democratic republic.

    In actuality, we are suffering from what political scientists Martin Gilens and Benjamin Page more accurately term an “economic élite domination” in which the economic elite (lobbyists, corporations, monied special interest groups) dominate and dictate national policy.

    No surprise there.

    As an in-depth Princeton University study confirms, democracy has been replaced by oligarchy, a system of government in which elected officials represent the interests of the rich and powerful rather than the average citizen.

    We did it to ourselves.

    We said nothing while our elections were turned into popularity contests populated by individuals better suited to be talk-show hosts rather than intelligent, reasoned debates on issues of domestic and foreign policy by individuals with solid experience, proven track records and tested integrity.

    We turned our backs on things like wisdom, sound judgment, morality and truth, shrugging them off as old-fashioned, only to find ourselves saddled with lying politicians incapable of making fair and impartial decisions.

    We let ourselves be persuaded that those yokels in Washington could do a better job of running this country than we could. It’s not a new problem. As former Senator Joseph S. Clark Jr. acknowledged in a 1955 article titled, “Wanted: Better Politicians”: “[W]e have too much mediocrity in the business of running the government of the country, and it troubles me that this should be so at a time of such complexity and crisis… Government by amateurs, semi-pros, and minor-leaguers will not meet the challenge of our times. We must realize that it takes great competence to run a country which, in spite of itself, has succeeded to world leadership in a time of deadly peril.”

    We indulged our craving for entertainment news at the expense of our need for balanced reporting by a news media committed to asking the hard questions of government officials. The result, as former congressman Jim Leach points out, leaves us at a grave disadvantage:

    “At a time when in-depth analysis of the issues of the day has never been more important, quality journalism has been jeopardized by financial considerations and undercut by purveyors of ideology who facilely design news, like clothes, to appeal to a market segment.”

    We bought into the fairytale that politicians are saviors, capable of fixing what’s wrong with our communities and our lives, when in fact, most politicians lead such sheltered lives that they have no clue about what their constituents must do to make ends meet. As political scientists Morris Fiorina and Samuel Abrams conclude, “In America today, there is a disconnect between an unrepresentative political class and the citizenry it purports to represent. The political process today not only is less representative than it was a generation ago and less supported by the citizenry, but the outcomes of that process are at a minimum no better.”

    We let ourselves be saddled with a two-party system and fooled into believing that there’s a difference between the Republicans and Democrats, when in fact, the two parties are exactly the same. As one commentator noted, both parties support endless war, engage in out-of-control spending, ignore the citizenry’s basic rights, have no respect for the rule of law, are bought and paid for by the corporate elite, care most about their own power, and have a long record of expanding government and shrinking liberty.

    Then, when faced with the prospect of voting for the lesser of two evils, many simply compromise their principles and overlook the fact that the lesser of two evils is still evil.

    Perhaps worst of all, we allowed the cynicism of our age and the cronyism and corruption of Washington, DC, to discourage us from believing that there was any hope for the American experiment in liberty.

    Granted, it’s easy to become discouraged about the state of our nation. We’re drowning under the weight of too much debt, too many wars, too much power in the hands of a centralized government, too many militarized police, too many laws, too many lobbyists, and generally too much bad news.

    It’s harder to believe that change is possible, that the system can be reformed, that politicians can be principled, that courts can be just, that good can overcome evil, and that freedom will prevail.

    Yet I truly believe that change is possible, that the system can be reformed, that politicians can be principled, that courts can be just, that good can overcome evil, and that freedom can prevail but it will take each and every one of us committed to doing the hard work of citizenship that extends beyond the act of voting.

    A healthy, representative government is hard work. It takes a citizenry that is informed about the issues, educated about how the government operates, and willing to make the sacrifices necessary to stay involved.

    Most of all, it takes a citizenry willing to do more than grouse and complain.

    The powers-that-be want us to believe that our job as citizens begins and ends on Election Day. They want us to believe that we have no right to complain about the state of the nation unless we’ve cast our vote one way or the other. They want us to remain divided over politics, hostile to those with whom we disagree politically, and intolerant of anyone or anything whose solutions to what ails this country differ from our own.

    What they don’t want us doing is presenting a united front in order to reject the pathetic excuse for government that is being fobbed off on us.

    So where does that leave us?

    We’d better stop hanging our hopes on a political savior to rescue us from the clutches of an imperial president.

    It’s possible that the next president might be better, but then again, he or she could be far worse.

    Remember, presidential elections merely serve to maintain the status quo. Once elected president, that person becomes part of the dictatorial continuum that is the American imperial presidency today.

    If we are to return to a constitutional presidency, “we the people” must recalibrate the balance of power.

    The first step is to start locally—in your own communities, in your schools, at your city council meetings, in newspaper editorials, at protests—by pushing back against laws that are unjust, police departments that overreach, politicians that don’t listen to their constituents, and a system of government that grows more tyrannical by the day.

    As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, the only thing that will save us now is a concerted, collective commitment to the Constitution’s principles of limited government, a system of checks and balances, and a recognition that they—the president, Congress, the courts, the military, the police, the technocrats and plutocrats and bureaucrats—answer to and are accountable to “we the people.”

    This will mean that Americans will have to stop letting their personal politics and party allegiances blind them to government misconduct and power grabs. It will mean holding all three branches of government accountable to the Constitution (i.e., vote them out of office if they abuse their powers). And it will mean calling on Congress to put an end to the use of presidential executive orders, decrees, memorandums, proclamations, national security directives and legislative signing statements as a means of getting around Congress and the courts.

    As historian Arthur Schlesinger Jr. concludes:

    I would argue that what the country needs today is a little serious disrespect for the office of the presidency; a refusal to give any more weight to a President’s words than the intelligence of the utterance, if spoken by anyone else, would command… If the nation wants to work its way back to a constitutional presidency, there is only one way to begin. That is by showing Presidents that, when their closest associates place themselves above the law and the Constitution, such transgressions will be not forgiven or forgotten for the sake of the presidency but exposed and punished for the sake of the presidency.”

    In other words, we’ve got to stop treating the president like a god and start making both the office of the president and the occupant play by the rules of the Constitution.

  • Party At Ground Zero: Wuhan Water Park Hosts Massive Concert With No Social Distancing Or Masks
    Party At Ground Zero: Wuhan Water Park Hosts Massive Concert With No Social Distancing Or Masks

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 23:45

    What was once ground zero for a pandemic still ravaging its way across the globe appears to simply be “over it”. 

    Thousands of concert-goers piled into the Wuhan Maya Beach Water Park last weekend to attend a massive electronic music concert – without social distancing measures and without masks, according to photos posted on CNN.com.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The scene would be considered “unthinkable” in many other parts of the world, yet in Wuhan – who had arguably the strictest lockdowns of any geographic location – life is starting to look like it did pre-pandemic. 

    The city hasn’t reported any new cases since mid-May, after lifting a 76 day draconian lockdown in early April.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Wuhan Maya Beach Water Park reopened late in June and crowds finally began to come out in August.

    Despite the turnout for this concert, the water park says it is only doing half the business it did the year prior. The park currently gets about 15,000 daily visitors during weekends and is trying to entice new business by offering half price discounts. 

    Wuhan was the original epicenter of the coronavirus and accounts for 60% of all cases in the country, according to China.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Whether or not China has been honest with its infection numbers remains to be seen; but maybe the world should take a cue from ground zero relaxing its lockdown measures in what is also likely a nod to the growing body of evidence that the virus may not be as devastating as the world once thought. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    At the same time, it is also worth noting that China has supposedly issued and granted the “first invention patent to a domestically developed COVID-19 vaccine candidate,” according to state-owned mouthpiece The Global Times

    The vaccine is “a recombinant adenovirus vaccine named Ad5-nCoV co-developed by Chinese biopharmaceutical firm CanSino Biologics Inc, one of the vaccine candidate’s co-developers, with the other being a team led by Chinese military infectious disease expert Chen Wei.”

    The Global Times hilariously claimed that the launch of the vaccine “would enhance the international market’s trust in Chinese-developed COVID-19 vaccines amid the US’ groundless accusations of Chinese hackers trying to steal novel coronavirus data on treatments and vaccine development from them.”

    Fox’s Laura Ingraham had a sharper take on the situation:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • The "Try-Hard" Club: Limp-Wristed Marxists Need Not Apply
    The “Try-Hard” Club: Limp-Wristed Marxists Need Not Apply

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 23:25

    Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com,

    Memes are a dominant force in popular culture today, and there is good reason for this; they allow people to inject an argument into discussion without having to actually compose that argument. In other words, by sharing a meme, everyone already knows what you are saying without an explanation. We all do this from time to time.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When I refer to a woman screaming at a man on the sidewalk for not wearing a mask as a “Karen”, most people immediately understand why this woman is a problem. She fits an archetypal mold, she has made herself into a walking, talking stereotype. The meme describes a thing everyone has experienced and is tired of dealing with. Memes make debate easier – They take on a life of their own.

    That said, problems arise when dishonest people try to hijack a meme for their own agenda.

    For example, how many times have you seen crazed leftists call a conservative a “snowflake” because he/she is criticizing crazy leftist behavior? The meme refers to people who let their emotions get in the way of reason and they have “meltdowns” when faced with facts that disagree with their feelings. It also refers to people who fear competition and discomfort so much that they are trying to reshape the world so that it is “more fair” and less threatening to their self esteem. It does not apply to people who are logically debunking terrible behavior and terrible arguments.

    To be fair, the term “snowflake” can be abused as a way to dismiss a younger person out of hand when they are expressing discontent with problems in the world. Memes can be misused by both sides of the political spectrum.

    By the same token, a “Karen” is grown adult (not always a woman) who is aggressively uppity and unreasonable and who throws temper tantrums when they don’t get their way. It’s a person who acts like a spoiled toddler, and they do this because it has worked many times in the past in our “customer is always right” retail world. No one has ever smacked them upside the head and taught them a lesson in humility.

    A “Karen” is NOT someone who is simply complaining or criticizing over a legitimate problem in a logical way. Yet, I have seen this meme misused as well to attack and shut down people who are doing exactly that.

    And what about the “Okay Boomer” meme? The idea being that older people are disconnected from the “changing times” and that they have nothing to contribute anymore to the discussion because the planet has left them behind. This is one of the few purely leftist memes I’ve seen in the past few years.  It’s a futurist meme which comforts children in their common false notion that they have the world all figured out and advice from “old people” is useless. It’s a way for people with zero life experience and zero success to dismiss people with decades of life experience along and an array of successes and failures to draw knowledge from.

    Being told you are a “newbie” is not always fun, but it’s sometimes necessary.  The Boomer meme is a tool for young people to feel better about themselves and their lack of wisdom or education.  These days, anyone who is over 30 years of age and disagrees with leftist politics or aspects of Zennial culture is called a “boomer” by default.

    Memes can be entertaining, but the fact that they are so easy to exploit also leaves them open to abuse by narcissists and sociopaths. Leftists in particular are guilty of hijacking memes and twisting them for their own ends. They see memes as part of a culture war they are desperate to win. For them, controlling the meaning of words is paramount.

    The newest meme trend I’m seeing these days is called the “try-hard” meme, i.e. “Stop acting like such a try-hard…” Now, this is another case where a phrase is being co-opted to fit a false narrative. Originally, a “try hard” was someone who takes recreational things much too seriously and turns fun into war. For example, a guy who plays a game of volleyball with his family and starts pummeling spikes down into their faces like he’s in a professional match. In other words, people who beat their chests and act overtly competitive in situations that don’t call for it.

    These days, I’m seeing the meme used to describe ANYONE who excels at anything. That’s right, if you push yourself to be the best, if you are competitive and win often, if you are focused on self improvement as an individual, then there’s something “wrong” with you.

    Leftists in particular have always had a problem with competition and it stems from the Marxist roots of their philosophy. There is this notion among lefties that the world is supposed to be “equal”. Now, there are different types of equality, and I think the majority of Americans agree with the idea of equal opportunity. Meaning, (at least in the West) we think every person regardless of their circumstances should be given the CHANCE to PROVE they can work hard and succeed. People should not be stopped from pursuing that chance merely because of who they are.

    However, leftists and Marxists think that equality of opportunity is not enough. They think that there should also be equality of outcome.

    This one delusion sits at the core of all Marxist thinking.

    Equality of outcome is impossible because not all people are born equal. Some people are, frankly, born superior to others. Some people are born smarter. Some people are born stronger, taller and faster. Some people are born with innate musical or artistic talent. Some people are born with innate mathematical understanding. Some people are born extroverted and are good at making friends. Some people are born introverted and are better at self reflection and awareness. Some people are born to be basketball players and some are born to be engineers.

    The psychological reality of mankind is that we are not born as blank slates; we are born with inherent qualities and the seeds of unique individual talents.  Marxists suffer from a complete mental disconnect with this concept.  If they were to admit that people are born with individual qualities and advantages and are not blank slates, then the foundation of their philosophy falls apart.  They rationalize their social engineering agenda under the premise that all people need to be “molded” into equal units.  They think people must be reeducated to reject bad beliefs and bad habits they were taught as blank slate children and learn to accept that everyone starts life out exactly the same.  Therefore, the majority of people who succeed are those that were given an unfair advantage, and success should be treated with disdain and suspicion.

    But if people have inherent psychological characteristics and inherent advantages, then their personalities and qualities cannot be reformed.  Those “bad beliefs and habits” might actually be completely natural and necessary.  You might be able to hold them back through force or fear, but you can’t change the core of who they are.  If our biological and genetic imperatives prevail, Marxists become obsolete and useless.

    The secret is to discover what your innate strengths are in life and take advantage of them to succeed. If you do not have innate talent, then you must at least have an innate ability to work hard. If you don’t have the ability and drive to work hard to become good at a thing, then you don’t deserve to get recognition for that thing.  You are not entitled to feel like a winner merely because you exist.  It’s really as simple as that.

    The try-hard meme is basically the equivalent of excellence-shaming; you are supposed to feel ashamed of being better than others at a certain task or talent. I’m not sure where this hatred for competition comes from, but I suspect it has something to do with leftists and their early childhoods. Many of them are “late bloomers” who did not have many experiences winning, or they were never pushed by their parents to mature and excel. They grew to despise the idea that winning and success are so elevated in our society, while at the same time they still crave that feeling of being the best at something.

    So, they adopt the Marxist creed, which tells them that yes, they are losers, but it’s not because they are lazy and they suck; no, they are losers because they are victims of a society that is holding them back from their true potential. Marxism tells them that the people who succeed were actually given special treatment because of their class or the color of their skin. The winners are actually very bad people who don’t deserve success. If only the system was forced to be more fair, then THEY would be the winners.  Thus, in order for losers to “win”, they must join a mob of other losers and gain power through collective control.  The successful people must be given an extreme handicap by the mob to “level the playing field”.

    I think the Marxist ideal is leading these kids down a path of brutal delusion, because they are never going to achieve the Utopian society that they seek. The world will never be “fair”, and the idea that you can force such conditions upon a culture without serious consequences is childish and mentally unstable. Make no mistake, we are entering an era in which the facade propping up limp-wristed and weak people is falling away. When it comes to economic strife, crisis and survival, there is no appeal to equality.  You’re in the jungle, baby, and if you have no merit, you’re gonna die.

    The people willing to work hard and the people who seek to self improve are going to do well. The people that want a trophy just for participating are not going to make it.

    By extension, trying to socially engineer our country to cater to the lowest common denominator would grind all progress to a standstill and make the crisis even worse. If “trying hard” becomes something to be ashamed of, or something that is punished, then there is no more incentive to improve or innovate or go beyond that which has already been accomplished. Our evolution ceases, and humanity stagnates.

    While human competition has its ugly moments in history, at the very least it must be encouraged among individuals. It must continue to be rewarded. For if we start rewarding mediocrity it will be the exact opposite of the biological drives that keep us alive. It will lead to self destruction of the entire species.

    *  *  *

    If you would like to support the work that Alt-Market does while also receiving content on advanced tactics for defeating the globalist agenda, subscribe to our exclusive newsletter The Wild Bunch Dispatch.  Learn more about it HERE.

  • Mauritius Arrests Captain Of Japanese Oil Tanker That Ran Aground, Causing Massive Oil Spill
    Mauritius Arrests Captain Of Japanese Oil Tanker That Ran Aground, Causing Massive Oil Spill

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 23:05

    The captain of a Japanese oil tanker that ran aground off the coast of Mauritius on July 25, causing a devastating oil spill in one of the world’s cleanest ocean environments, is now under arrest.

    Additionally, International Tankers Owners Pollution Federation Ltd and Le Floch Depollution will both begin cleaning 3 sites on the country’s shoreline that were affected, joining local efforts from fishermen, according to Reuters.

    The tanker, MV Wakashio struck coral reef off the coast of the Indian Ocean and began to spill oil on August 6. As a result, Mauritius announced a state of environmental emergency. The spill spread over a “vast area of endangered corals” according to the report. Some are calling it the country’s “worst ecological disaster”. 

    Inspector Siva Coothen said: 

    “We have arrested the captain of the vessel and another member of the crew. After having been heard by the court they have been denied bail and are still in detention.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The country’s coast guard had “repeatedly tried to reach the ship” in order to warn it about its dangerous course. They said they received no reply. 

    An official for Mauritius said:

    “The route set five days before the crash was wrong and the boat navigation system should have signalled that to the crew and it seems the crew ignored it. The boat did also fail to send out an SOS (when it ran aground), and did not respond to attempts by the coastguard to get in touch.”

    The crew had been questioned about whether or not they were having a birthday party on board but, so far, there have been no definitive answers. There were also scattered reports that the ship was moving closer to the shoreline to find a Wifi signal or a cell phone signal; those reports have also not been confirmed. 

    The deputy captain was also arrested. Emergency crews were able to remove most of the ship’s remaining oil before it split in two on Saturday. 

  • Melbourne Authorities To Use Surveillance Drones To Catch People Not Wearing Masks
    Melbourne Authorities To Use Surveillance Drones To Catch People Not Wearing Masks

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 22:45

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    Authorities in Melbourne, Australia will use high-tech surveillance drones to catch people outside not wearing masks as well as to scan for vehicles that are in violation of curfew by being more than 5km from home.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “High powered drones will be used to find people not wearing masks and cars too far from home,” according to a 7News Melbourne news report.

    The drones will also be used to ensure skate parks and playgrounds remain empty.

    The surveillance devices can be flown up to a distance of 7km and produce images so clear they can “read a vehicle’s number plate from 500 meters away.”

    Privacy advocates are concerned that there is no sunset clause on the use of such technology and the drones could continue to be used to spy on citizens after the pandemic ends.

    7News Melbourne spoke to two residents who said they weren’t worried because they were behaving and had “nothing to hide.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The measures are just the latest example of what represents one of the most draconian coronavirus lockdowns in the developed world after the state of Victoria announced a “state of disaster” in response to an uptick in COVID-19 cases.

    There have been several instances of police physically tackling people for not adhering to mask wearing rules, including one incident when a woman was placed in a chokehold by a male police officer.

    Police have also been given the power to enter people’s homes without a warrant and perform quarantine spot checks.

    Drivers are also being asked to show their papers at highway checkpoints simply to get to work.

    Anyone caught outside without a mask or violating the 8pm-5am curfew also risks being made to pay a massive fine.

    As the post below illustrates, the rules are also being enforced by Australian Defence Force troops patrolling parks and other outdoor areas.

    Police also fined a couple for allowing their child to play further than 5km from their home, while also executing a search warrant against and seizing computers belonging to two men who were planning an anti-lockdown protest.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *  *  *

    In the age of mass Silicon Valley censorship It is crucial that we stay in touch. I need you to sign up for my free newsletter here. Also, I urgently need your financial support here.

  • Over 100,000 Chinese Evacuated As Floods Continue Pressuring Three Gorges Dam
    Over 100,000 Chinese Evacuated As Floods Continue Pressuring Three Gorges Dam

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 22:25

    Since early summer, devastating floods have wreaked havoc in southern China due to torrential rains caused by the rainy season, with most of the flooding observed around the Yangtze basin and its tributaries.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Local officials are calling the latest flooding a “once in a century” event, with a typhoon making landfall Wednesday. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China’s largest river, the Yangtze, continues to rise to dangerous levels after another round of rainfall. More than 100,000 people on Tuesday, in the Sichuan province, were evacuated from their homes, reported Reuters.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China Central Television published video footage of a road collapse in southwest China, swallowing 21 vehicles on Wednesday. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>  

    The southwest and central regions of the Yangtze river basin have been hit with unusually high levels of rainfall in the last couple of months due to flood season. 

    The Ministry of Water Resources warned Monday that 38 tributaries along the upper part of the Yangtze were at critical levels.

    Some 63 million people have been affected by the floods, with economic damage totaling $26 billion. 

    A red alert was issued late Tuesday by the water commission, who said some monitoring stations along the river were expected to rise above flood protection levels. The ministry also warned about the Three Gorges Dam, indicating water inflow levels continued to increase, with water inflows registering 74,000 cubic meters per second on Wednesday, the highest ever.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The dam underwent a series of water discharges on Tuesday to “reduce flood control pressures,” the water ministry said.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As we’ve noted, there are serious concerns about the structural integrity of the dam following elevated water levels:

    The floods in the Yangtze River also struck the Leshan Giant Buddha statue in southwestern Sichuan province. Floodwaters crested over the toes of the Buddha, the first time since 1949.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Last week, China’s slower-than-expected rise in industrial production and a decline in retail sales suggested the Chinese Communist Party can now blame devastating summer floods on why the economic recovery is faltering. 

  • Green California Has The Nation's Worst Power-Grid
    Green California Has The Nation’s Worst Power-Grid

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 22:05

    Authored by Steve Goreham via Washington Examiner,

    More than a million Californians suffered power blackouts last Friday evening [and continue under the threat of more rolling black outs]. When high temperatures caused customer demand to exceed the power available, California electrical utilities used rotating outages to force a reduction in demand. The California grid is the worst in the nation, with green energy policies pursued by the state likely furthering reduced grid reliability.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At 6:30 pm on Friday, Pacific Gas and Electric, California’s biggest utility, began shutting off power in rolling outages to force a reduction in demand. Southern California Edison also denied power to homes, beginning just before 7 pm. Shutoffs impacted a rotating group of up to two million customers until 11 pm.

    The California Independent System Operator (CAISO) declared a Stage 3 Electrical Emergency, the first Stage 3 emergency since 2001. Spot power electricity prices soared to over $1,000 per megawatt-hour, more than 10 times the usual price.

    In 2018, 19 percent of California’s electricity came from roof-top and utility-scale solar installations, the highest percentage in the nation. But by 6:30 pm each day, that solar output approaches zero. The state lacks enough reliable electricity generation capacity to run the air conditioners during hot summer evenings.

    California has the least reliable electrical power system in the US. It isn’t even close. According to data by Eaton Corporation, the state leads the US in power outages every year, with more than double the outages of any other state over the last decade.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The causes of power outages can be divided into four major groups, which in order of importance are weather or downed trees, faulty equipment or human errors, unknowns, and vehicle accidents. California suffered the largest number of outages in each category in each year for 2014 through 2017.

    For more than a decade, California has been closing coal and nuclear power plants. Recently, the state also began closing natural gas-fired plants as part of a continuing effort to fight global warming.

    In 2006, Senate Bill 1368 established California’s Emissions Performance Standard, an effort to reduce state greenhouse gas emissions from power plants. Since 2007, 11 in-state, coal-fired plants have been closed as a result, with an additional 3 converted to biomass fuel. California also slashed imports of electricity generated from coal plants. The Argus Cogen plant in Trona is the last remaining coal plant.

    California nuclear plants, though not emitters of greenhouse gases, are also being phased out. The second and third units of the San Onofre nuclear generating plant near Los Angeles ceased operation in 2013. The Diablo Canyon plant, the last nuclear plant in California, is scheduled for closure in 2025.

    Driven by state efforts to reduce greenhouse gas emissions, gas-fired plants are also being shuttered. Natural gas generating capacity has fallen by more than 10 percent since 2013, with additional reductions planned.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Following the blackouts last Friday night, blackouts resumed at 6:30 pm on Saturday. Power officials blamed the loss of 1,000 megawatts of wind power when the wind subsided and the unexpected shutdown of a 470-megawatt power plant. It’s clear that the state does not have enough reliable baseload power as backup for intermittent wind and solar energy.

    The problem of California’s poor electric reliability will likely get worse. On September 10, 2018, then Governor Jerry Brown signed Senate Bill 100, committing California to obtain 100 percent of its electricity from “clean energy sources” by 2045. Replacement of coal, nuclear, and natural gas generators with wind and solar will continue erode grid reliability.

    As part of global warming efforts, officials want all citizens to switch their natural gas stoves and furnaces to electric models. More than 30 California cities have enacted bans on gas appliances, including the major cities of San Francisco and San Jose. Almost 10 percent of the state population now lives in an area covered by restrictions against gas appliances in new residential construction.

    California also wants residents to transition from gasoline- and diesel-powered cars and trucks to plug-in electric models. So, when those blackouts occur in the future, not only will your lights and air conditioners fail, but you won’t be able to cook your food or drive your car either.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    California sacrificed reliable electrical power on the altar of the fight against global warming. There is no evidence that state efforts will have the slightest effect on global temperatures, but they will be great for candle and flashlight sales.

    *  *  *

    Steve Goreham is a speaker on the environment, business, and public policy and author of the book Outside the Green Box: Rethinking Sustainable Development.

  • San Francisco's Cops Aren't Waiting Around To Be "Defunded": They're Leaving En Masse
    San Francisco’s Cops Aren’t Waiting Around To Be “Defunded”: They’re Leaving En Masse

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 21:45

    Police in San Francisco aren’t waiting around for pandering politicians to “defund” the city’s police department, which has already seen a mass exodus of officers following the passage of a state law called Prop 47, a statewide criminal-justice law passed back in 2014. It appears the pace of officer exits is picking up this year, and what’s even more interesting: The acceleration started before the murder of George Floyd.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to the San Francisco Chronicle, 23 officers resigned during the first six months of the year, with many resigning even before Floyd’s murder. Most expect that another wave of resignations spurred by the protests and widespread anti-police sentiment in the deep blue state will spur even more officers to leave.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of those, 19 took jobs at other law enforcement agencies, in and outside the state. By comparison, 26 officers resigned in 2019, and only 12 officers resigned in 2018.

    One critic of City Hall’s law enforcement policies blamed a “social experiment” whereby police were commanded to refuse to enforce all low-level crime for the city’s problems.

    “The members are upset that the social experiment being conducted in San Francisco is failing, and they would rather work someplace that values them,” said Montoya, a constant critic of City Hall’s calls for police reform, which after the killing of George Floyd by police in Minneapolis has taken the form of shifting money from the police budget to social causes.

    And this is only the beginning, according to the critic quoted above. At this pace, the number of officers leaving in 2020 could double the number from 2019, and nearly 4x the pace from 2018.

    “This is just the beginning. Dozens are actively in the hiring process with other agencies,” said Tony Montoya, president of the Police Officers Association.

    […]

    “Members have gone to places like the Sonoma County Sheriff’s Office, Pleasant Hill, Beverly Hills, Petaluma, Palm Springs, Placerville, Long Beach, Idaho, Texas, Arizona,” Montoya said.

    Long commutes are also a problem, since most cops can’t afford an apartment in the city where they work.

    Police Chief Bill Scott said there has been an “uptick” in officers leaving this year but that many of the applications to leave predated the national unrest after Floyd’s death.

    “It’s a tough job, and for many officers it’s also long commute to and from work,” Scott said in a recent interview. “If there are opportunities closer to home, people are going to take them.”

    One officer, who wasn’t named, but who said he quit the San Francisco Police Department and took another job at a department in Texas (ditching California like Elon Musk, Peter Thiel and Joe Rogan plan to do) summed up the department’s retention problem in a few sentences. It’d not just about the money, he said. It’s the money, combined with the long commutes combined with the fact that San Francisco NIMBYs (basically every homeowner in the city) are impossible to satisfy.

    “I was getting a great paycheck, but 20% went to taxes,” said one former San Francisco officer now working at a police department in Texas who asked not to be named for privacy concerns. “Here I got a bigger house, a more affordable lifestyle and a commute that went from two hours each way to 15 minutes.”

    “It’s also nice working at a place where everyone isn’t mad at you,” the officer said. “In San Francisco, everyone was mad. The homeowners would get mad because you didn’t move the homeless who were sleeping in front of their house. Then, when you tried to help the homeless, someone would start yelling about police brutality.”

    “And everyone had a cell phone camera on you,” he said.

    This is what happens when people who have no concept of the role law enforcement plays in deterring crime call for police to essentially just let most criminals run wild, only locking them up unless they seriously hurt or kill or rape somebody. Shoplift, smoke crack and sell your body all you want, in San Francisco, the most you’ll get is a quick trip to the station and a slap on the wrist.

    And never forget, when progressives say “abolish the police” – they literally mean, ‘abolish the police’.

    Too bad Cali’s governor doesn’t have the temerity to take steps to put the ultra-liberal mayors running America’s biggest cities in check, unlike Texas’ Gov Greg Abbott.

  • BofA Puts Cost Of Re-Shoring At $1 Trillion
    BofA Puts Cost Of Re-Shoring At $1 Trillion

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 21:25

    Submitted by Market Crumbs,

    Manufacturing has been moving to China from the U.S. and Europe for decades. As a result of the coronavirus pandemic, many companies are now looking for ways to bring manufacturing back home

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Research from Bank of America estimates that it could cost U.S. and European companies $1 trillion over five years to move manufacturing out of China. Bank of America argues that the cost of doing so would likely be beneficial to companies over the long term.

    Bank of America’s survey of global analysts from before the pandemic began found that companies were already starting to shift supply chains locally. The research cites trade disputes, national security concerns, climate change and the rise of automation as reasons companies had started to move away from globalization.

    The coronavirus caused 80% of global sectors to have supply chain issues, according to the report. 67% of respondents from Bank of America’s Global Fund Manager survey believe localizing or re-shoring supply chains is the most dominant structural shift going forward.

    “While Covid has acted as a catalyst to accelerate this change, the underlying reasons are grounded in a shift to ‘stakeholder capitalism,’ concluding relocation favors a broader community of shareholders, consumers, employees and the state,” Bank of America Head of Global Research Candace Browning said.

    The team behind the report believes policymakers and corporations will aggressively pursue re-shoring plans to offset higher operating costs.

    “We don’t expect a silver bullet, but we were struck by the universal declaration (in our survey) of intent to automate in future locations,” the report said.

    “Policymakers are also expected to help through tax breaks, low cost loans and other subsidies with recent announcements to that effect from the U.S., Japan, the EU, India and Taiwan (amongst others).”

    Bank of America believes the best way to invest in the unraveling of globalization is through stocks in engineering, machinery, automation and robotics, electronic equipment manufacturing and application software. They also see banks in North America, Europe and South Asia benefitting as a result of increased economic activity in these regions.

    This trend could easily accelerate in the years to come as companies may end up looking back on the coronavirus as a wake up call to have their supply chains insulated from the worst.

  • Scientists Capture First Male Murder Hornet, A Sign Washington Swarm Is Ready To Hunt
    Scientists Capture First Male Murder Hornet, A Sign Washington Swarm Is Ready To Hunt

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 21:05

    Though it’s still a little early in their hunting season, it appears a hive of “Murder Hornets” (the popular name for the Asian Giant Hornet, native to parts of Japan) has indeed taken root in Washington State. The live hornet was trapped near Custer, Washington on July 29 (then processed in the state Department of Agriculture’s entomology lab on Aug. 13). Now scientists are saying it’s official. One plausible theory is that the hornet was part of a team of ‘scouts’ sent out shortly before the hornet’s hunting season begins to try and get a read on where the food might be.

    We first introduced the concept of “Murder Bees” back in early May, when the New York Times published a story about their presence in Washington State. It’s believed they arrived late last year in cargo from Asia.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hunting season begins in late summer/early fall (typically in September), but it appears these hornets are getting to work early, perhaps because their numbers are still small, as the new colony takes root on American soil.

    “Trapping a male Asian giant hornet in July initially came as a surprise,” Sven Spichiger, the agency’s managing entomologist, said in a press release this week. “But further examination of the research and consultation with international experts confirmed that a few males can indeed emerge early in the season.”

    Suspicions about a potential Murder Hornet infestation first arose in May when a beekeeper reported the devastation of his hive by an unknown assailant to local wildlife authorities. Experts surmised Murder Hornets were probably to blame. A specimen was located in July – an unmated queen – and now this, the first living male specimen, only five months later.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To be sure, the Agriculture Department said that their initial catch back in July appeared to be an unmated queen, a promising sign that their makeshift traps might have succeeded in crippling the new colony.

    But apparently, the hornets are still coming out to hunt.

    We’ll see what things look like in a month.

  • Gold Pressures Empire
    Gold Pressures Empire

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 20:45

    Authored by Steve Brown via TheDuran.com,

    Ian Fleming wrote Goldfinger for good reason. The most important market in the world is gold. Not US stocks. Not shares in Amazon. Not bitcoin. Not Facebook. Sovereigns use gold – real gold – as the foundation for their most important deals.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now consider that 40% of the world’s physical gold trade passes through bin Zayed’s United Arab Emirates. The same United Arab Emirates that blundered Bush into the Dubai Ports World scandal. The same UAE that hosts one of the largest US airbases in the Middle East… and the very same al Nahayan plutocracy that touts Israel as its closest friend and ally, beside the former United States.

    But first, consider that the United States began weaponizing the US dollar as a matter of policy long before alleged ‘criminal’ Treasury Secretary Mnuchin announced it. Weaponization of the dollar is isolating the US in world trade, but as regime star Kushner noted, “you cannot turn a battleship around overnight.”

    The ‘battleship’ has been turning for fifty years since the disaster of the Nixon Shock, when the United States ‘temporarily’ abandoned the international gold standard thus heralding the ‘permanent’ era of central bank by-decree currency. Fifty years hence, a new perfect storm of events may prove that the consequence of August 15th, 1971 must now be confronted.

    During the Vietnam war the demand for US gold in exchange for US dollars could not be sustained. Nixon’s cowardly act in closing the US gold window enabled the imperial hegemon to survive as geopolitical bully on the basis of the US dollar being global reserve currency — but only temporarily.  Fifty years on, the piper must be paid.

    Once again, the world is demanding gold in exchange for US dollars. And the Federal Reserve’s primary dealers – some of which operate as bullion banks —  are unable to comply.  Briefly, when a commodity exchange is unable to settle gold contracts by delivering the product to a buyer, the exchange must then settle the paper contracts in US dollars.

    Historically the manipulators of the monetary metal played along happily, speculating on gold contracts as derivatives, where no actual delivery of the commodity was ever intended.  As result, trading gold contracts has been a speculative operation engaged in by the major bullion banks where delivery seldom occurred.

    But when the demand for gold is real, settling gold contracts in US dollars bears little relation to holding the metal itself. Contracts settled in dollars are worth less than the actual commodity. That’s because the published spot price for gold is lower than the price at which the physical metal actually trades. This is called contango and has amplified the demand for settlement in real gold called EFP, or Exchange for Physical.

    Before COVID and since the repo crisis of 2019 the stability and safety of the US financial system has increasingly come into focus. The US financial system has been forced to lower real interest rates to real negative territory, causing gold to look more attractive than holding increasingly worthless US dollars, since gold has intrinsic value when the US dollar has none.

    Instead of a classic store for inflationary dollars, the new demand for settlement in real bullion threatens the existence of the US gold exchange (COMEX) and threatens serious financial loss for the largest global players, including HSBC, JP Morgan, and UBS.  Even Goldman Sachs has warned of this threat.

    So… what has changed? It appears that some new element is at work. As explored in a prior article, the US regime’s new cold war versus China has caused that country to re-assess its relationship to US assets. China began divesting itself of US debt instruments in 2019. And, seldom reported in the west, China has recently escalated its effort to divest itself of US public debt (Treasury) holdings in 2020.

    In tandem with improved convertibility of the yuan (CNY) intel sources indicate that China may be the second largest holder of gold globally.  Likewise, China may be using gold as a medium of exchange to avoid the aforesaid weaponization of the US dollar so favored by the current US regime.  Even so, the foregoing does not fully explain the events we are seeing.

    Traditionally the Federal Reserve and their dealers have controlled gold to limit central bank losses and prevent gold from effectively competing with or displacing the US dollar as a primary trusted monetary medium.  But someone or some entity somewhere is now battling the US central bank for that control.

    Bottom line, monetary realists as observers still don’t understand why the historic central bank market manipulation of gold is presently failing.  The US Central Bank must suppress the price of gold or face catastrophic losses that will cause an escalating downward spiral in the standing of the US dollar.

    We can only return to the concept of flailing Empire. The United Arab Emirates trades in illegal gold from Africa and has used its influence via the gold carry trade and elsewhere as an essential tool to support the corrupt western banking empire that the United States and Israel represent.  Now the major media touts the visible association of the UAE, former United States, and Israel as elements of an aligned geopolitical bloc. The intention is to somehow portray these powers as moral and worthy of respect when in fact they are not.

    The United States, Israel and UAE present a divisive bloc removed from any real notion of an efficient global hegemon.  As we see, these powers are exposed and vulnerable to gold’s economic reality, the reality that no corrupt power favoring warfare and division can rule forever when its currency is severely devalued and global trade is impacted.

    Regardless, argue, ignore, or deny it… the golden rule, “He who hath the gold rules” is as true now as it has ever been. The problem arises when that being of real value is supplanted by illusion.  And it is only the illusion we have seen since August, 15th, 1971. 

    Fifty years on the reality has yet to play out.  But that which is of real value will always trump fakery in the long run, regardless of what paper traders and central bankers say.

  • Saudi Arabia Breaks Silence, Tentatively Embraces Israel-UAE Peace Deal
    Saudi Arabia Breaks Silence, Tentatively Embraces Israel-UAE Peace Deal

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 20:25

    As the steward of the two Muslim holy cities (Mecca & Medina) – cities where no non-Muslims are allowed – Saudi Arabia has an image to maintain as an ally in the regional struggle to support the Palestinians in their struggle against Israel. But in another sign of just how significant Jared Kushner’s accomplishment actually was, it appears the desert petro-kingdom is finally ready to make an important step toward publicly accepting Israel as a neighbor and friend.

    One of Prime Minister Binyamin Netanyahu’s greatest accomplishments during his record-setting tenure at the helm of the young Jewish state has been to parlay a mutual friendship with the US into a closet alliance with Saudi and the Saudi-aligned gulf puppet states (chief among them the UAE) in their eternal struggle to contain Iran, Israel’s sworn mortal foe. That accomplishment was finally crystalized with the Israeli-UAE peace deal, wherein Israel makes some critical concessions that could attract more support from its neighbors. If the trend continues, the Palestinians might be forced to the table, and a deal to end all sectarian hostilities might finally be reached, ending the blockade that’s suffocating the Gaza Strip.

    Though Saudi Arabia stopped short of full-blown acceptance, the kingdom’s Foreign Minister, Prince Faisal bin Farhan, cautiously welcomed the agreement in a statement released Wednesday, ending the kingdom’s conspicuous silence. As we explained in a post published two days ago, the deal calls for Israel to suspend declaring sovereignty over areas outlined in Netanyahu’s “Vision for Peace” in the Western Bank.

    Also, Tel Aviv will reportedly focus its efforts on “expanding ties with other countries in the Arab and Muslim world.” The agreement will also provide Muslims with greater access to the Al-Aqsa Mosque and other holy sites in the Old City of Jerusalem. It still remains in question how Israel will comply with its part of the deal as the annexation of Palestinian territories is the cornerstone of its regional policy.

    Offering what could be called “muted praise”, Farhan said the deal “could be viewed as positive,” but refrained from outright backing the move and stressed Saudi Arabia is open to establishing similar relations on condition that a peace agreement is reached between Israel and the Palestinians.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>
    His remarks came during a news conference with German Foreign Minister Heiko Maas.

    As we mentioned above, it marked the first comments by Saudi Arabia on Thursday’s surprise deal announcement, which Trump and his administration helped broker. Bahrain, Oman and Egypt issued official statements welcoming the agreement shortly after it was reached.

    Prince Faisal reiterated during the briefing that the kingdom supports the Arab Peace Initiative, sponsored by Saudi Arabia in 2002, which promises Israel full ties with Arab states in exchange for a peace deal with the Palestinians.

    “Once that is achieved, all things are possible,” Faisal said.

    More problematic, perhaps, Faisal also insisted that any future Palestinian state should include East Jerusalem as its capital.

  • Largest US Base In Syria Targeted In Rocket Attack Amid Soaring Tensions With Locals
    Largest US Base In Syria Targeted In Rocket Attack Amid Soaring Tensions With Locals

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 20:05

    Via AlMasdarNews.com,

    The largest U.S. base in Syria was targeted by a number of missiles in the eastern countryside of the Deir Ezzor Governorate on Tuesday.

    According to reports from eastern Syria, the U.S. base at the Conoco Oil Fields was targeted with a number of rockets fired by unknown group in the Deir Ezzor countryside.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, the U.S. Coalition said that at least three rockets were fired towards the base, but the projectiles did not manage to hit the installation.

    Despite no group claiming responsibility for the attack, the U.S. Coalition and their allies from the Syrian Democratic Forces (SDF) have been facing heavy opposition from the Arab tribes inside the Deir Ezzor Governorate.

    Most recently, the Syrian Democratic Forces and Al-Akidat Tribe clashed along the eastern bank of the Euphrates River, culminating in a series of events that led to a number of tribes getting involved in the hostilities.

    As geopolitical analysis site Moon of Alabama underscores, Trump’s ‘secure the oil’ plan is increasingly on shaky ground given it’s keeping American troops in the middle of a war zone on someone else sovereign territory and with unclear and confused objectives to boot:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Among the tribes involved in the clashes against the U.S. Coalition and SDF is the Al-Baggara Tribe, which claimed their forces expelled the Syrian Democratic Forces from the village of Jadeed Baggara in eastern Deir Ezzor last weekend.

  • The "Wolf Of Wall Street" Is Back To Pitching Penny Stocks
    The “Wolf Of Wall Street” Is Back To Pitching Penny Stocks

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 19:45

    Now that Robinhood has cut off the data feed that powered RobinTrack, we don’t have quite as much visibility into the activities of the army of newly minted day traders, inspired by the suddenly ill Dave “El Prez” Portnoy to try to parlay their free government checks into free money by following the aphorism “stocks only go up” (in their limited experience, that has proven mostly true).

    And unsurprisingly, it appears this surge in retail interest has prompted another wave of hucksters and ‘market gurus’ looking to con gullible mom-and-pop traders out of their hard-earned cash. And in what is perhaps the worst reflection on Jay Clayton’s America since the SEC let Elon Musk walk away with a slap on the wrist (allowing the Tesla founder to publicly humiliate the agency)  Jordan Belfort, the Stratton Oakmont founder better known as “The Wolf of Wall Street”, is once again pitching penny stocks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Jordan Belfort

    According to a report in Wedneday’s FT, Belfort has signed on with fast-growing “RagingBull.com”, a website that offers pricey “online courses” purporting to teach mom and pop traders how to make “millions” with penny stocks. According to a statement from RagingBull delivered to the FT, Belfort will “share his favourite trading sectors” with retail investors and teach them how to “learn from your mistakes” and “take advantage of opportunities” in a series of videos.

    The “Wolf of Wall Street” has signed up as a coach on RagingBull, a US stock-trading training platform that has drawn fire for its high-pressure sales tactics. Jordan Belfort earned the nickname by offloading worthless penny stocks to retail investors at Stratton Oakmont, the brokerage he ran in the 1990s, which was described as “a quintessential ‘boiler room'” by the Securities and Exchange Commission. He was sent to prison and barred from association with any broker, dealer, investment company or investment adviser. Now, he will “share his favourite trading sectors” with retail investors and teach them how to “learn from your mistakes” and “take advantage of opportunities” in a series of videos, RagingBull said on Wednesday. The company added that he would not be giving advice on specific stocks, companies or investment strategies.

    […]

    “The market has been flooded with new accounts and traders and a lot of them don’t know what they’re doing,” said Mr Belfort.

    But that’s precisely it. A lot of mom and pop traders are stepping up, and as usual, the ones looking to take the easy way out will fall prey to scams.

    Some of RagingBull’s classes run up to $14,000, which is perhaps why the business (founded in 2011 by two charlatans) has been widely derided as a scam. The Better Business Bureau says the company has more than 100 complaints (the company says most have been resolved) and former customers told the FT that the company continued to bill them after they cancelled their subscriptions, and when they requested a refund, the company asked them to sign an NDA as a condition of getting their money back.

    Keith Elliott, a retired construction worker in Angleton, a town in British Columbia, tried unsuccessfully 17 times to cancel the auto-renewal feature for one set of services that totalled $4,000. He has paid the company more than $14,000 for training over the past three years and said few services have proven useful. “I definitely did not make any money courtesy of RagingBull,” he told the Financial Times.

    Tom Steel, a retiree in Palm City, Florida, paid $199 to receive four trade ideas from Mr Bishop but received only two. His request for a refund was refused until he filed a complaint with the Better Business Bureau and the attorney-general of New Hampshire.

    “You’re constantly being bombarded with emails to sign up to other things that cost thousands of dollars,” Mr Steel said.

    The company’s marketing is “a well-oiled machine,” said Sydney Budina, a real estate broker in Miami who paid $2,999 in 2017 for tips to trade biotech stocks. The following year he was billed for the same amount again despite opting out of the programme. The company offered him a refund in exchange for signing a non-disclosure agreement, which he refused. He has since launched a website to highlight the grievances of RagingBull customers.

    Then again, if you buy a stock that Jordan Belfort is pitching, and you actually expect that you might turn a profit, well, that staggering lapse in judgment is on you.

  • Fear Is A Viral Monster
    Fear Is A Viral Monster

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 19:25

    Authored by Donald Boudreaux via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    Reading the late Hans Rosling’s 2018 book, Factfulness, during the summer of 2020 creates a sensation of surrealness that would have been absent had I read this volume in 2018 or 2019. On nearly every page of Factfulness Rosling busts the popular myth that we denizens of modernity face imminent calamities that will destroy us and the earth.

    Widespread fears – such as of overpopulation, of terrorism, and of the rich getting richer while the poor stagnate – are methodically revealed to be either completely unjustified or exorbitantly exaggerated.

    But today, in the midst of the ongoing lockdowns and with no end in sight to the hysteria over COVID, I’ve lost all of the natural optimism that has long resided within me and that would have otherwise been fortified by Rosling’s splendid work.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Sledgehammered

    The image that keeps coming into my head is of a sledgehammer. With brute force, a blunt and heavy instrument was swung down on society by the state. Sledgehammers crush. They demolish. That’s their only function. They do not build. And for as long as the dreadful weight of this particular sledgehammer – the massive mallet that is the COVID-19 lockdown – continues to press down on the rubble that it caused, there is very little opportunity for the human creativity and work effort unleashed by markets to bring about the kind of improvements that Rosling documents.

    Will humanity recover? Will we – when the sledgehammer is lifted – rise, dust ourselves off, and climb back on to the happy track that we were on before March 2020? Of course it’s possible. But there’s now a novel reality that makes a renewed continuation of pre-COVID progress much less likely: the sledgehammer itself.

    When this sledgehammer is lifted off of us, it won’t be lifted for long. We now know that this awful hammer is there, looming overhead. We have good reason to worry that government officials are likely to smash it down upon us when another communicable pathogen emerges and makes news – as such a pathogen inevitably will, for viral pathogens have been part of human existence from the start. How will entrepreneurship and investment be changed by this ever-present threat of a smashing sledgehammer? The creation, funding, and operation of venues in which individuals come into close physical contact with each other – either for recreation or for work – will surely be much less attractive.

    More generally, the newly demonstrated willingness of state officials to destroy, with just a few executive diktats, hundreds of billions of dollars of capital value cannot but push some entrepreneurs and investors into inactivity. Why build, or build grandly, when some pompous governor or mayor – someone whose only ‘skill’ and most intense itch is to exercise power over fellow human beings – can, with a mere signature, smash down a sledgehammer and turn to mush the fruits of years of hard work and sacrifice?

    And how will those in power – and those who seek power – be affected by the display by so many people of a sheepish willingness to be ordered by the state into house arrest? Did prime ministers, governors, and mayors know in mid-March just how easy it would be for them to herd millions of the rest of us away from the activities that we human beings have for generations enjoyed? Were these officials aware of their power to convince so many people under their command that each individual poses a poisonous threat to every other individual?

    To prosper, we human beings must cooperate in production – Adam Smith called it the division of labor – and trade extensively. Most of these activities require face-to-face contact among individuals who see each other as partners in cooperation and exchange rather than as threatening carriers of death. And to enjoy what we produce also requires face-to-face contact, for we are a social species.

    In possession of dictatorial power unknown just a few months ago, government officials – a group undeserving of much trust even in the best of times – will not shy away from wielding their newly discovered powers.

    The results will be ugly.

    Attentive to Fear

    Ironically, in his upbeat book Hans Rosling himself unintentionally offers justification for my pessimism. He does so in a chapter titled “The Fear Instinct.” Here’s a key passage:

    When we are afraid, we do not see clearly… Critical thinking is always difficult, but it’s almost impossible when we are scared. There’s no room for facts when our minds are occupied by fear.

    This undeniable reality means that a people in fear are a people who are unlikely to assess with much rationality the pros and cons of government policies. And the greater the fear, the less able people are to detect and resist government overreach.

    Who is so naïve as to deny that this reality gives to government officials strong incentives to stir up fear? People who seek positions of political power generally are people who, by this very seeking, reveal that they are especially keen on exercising power over fellow human beings. And so if more power for the state grows out of more fear in the people, state officials have every incentive to exaggerate real dangers and to concoct fake ones.

    The result is a vicious cycle. The possession of power includes a disproportionately great ability to stir up fear, and stirred-up fear creates more power.

    Further, Rosling’s insights about the media imply that they contribute to this vicious cycle. Here again is Rosling:

    [W]e have a shield, or attention filter, between the world and our brain. This attention filter protects us against the noise of the world: without it, we would constantly be bombarded with so much information we would be overloaded and paralyzed…. Most information doesn’t get through, but the holes [in our attention filter] do allow through information that appeals to our dramatic instincts. So we end up paying attention to information that fits our dramatic instincts, and ignoring information that does not.

    The media can’t waste time on stories that won’t pass our attention filters.

    Here are a couple of headlines that won’t get past a newspaper editor, because they are unlikely to get past our own filters: “MALARIA CONTINUES TO GRADUALLY DECLINE.” “METEOROLOGISTS CORRECTLY PREDICTED YESTERDAY THAT THERE WOULD BE MILD WEATHER IN LONDON TODAY.” Here are some topics that easily get through our filters: earthquakes, war, refugees, disease, fire, floods, shark attacks, terror attacks. The unusual events are more newsworthy than everyday ones.

    An invisible virus is the perfect troublemaker to portray as an existential monster. Like an evil spirit, it can live, usually silently, within the breast of each of us. And so if a large enough number of us can be convinced that an unseen, vile monster lurks in everyone else, the resulting widespread fear empowers government officials to do what government officials do best – and what they’ve done so horribly over the past five months: destroy.

  • Watch: Two US Drones In Fiery Crash Over Syria After Reportedly Colliding Mid-Air
    Watch: Two US Drones In Fiery Crash Over Syria After Reportedly Colliding Mid-Air

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 19:05

    Despite the Syria war long falling out of the headlines, here’s your weekly reminder that American forces are not only still occupying the northeast section of the country, but apparently flying so many aircraft overhead that they are colliding mid-air.

    “The U.S. lost two drones over Syria Tuesday after a midair collision, a defense official tells Military Times,” Military Times writes.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via Military Times: Defense official says two U.S. drones collided and crashed Syria. (image from Twitter purporting to be one of those aircraft).

    Images of burning aircraft crashing to the ground were posted on Twitter Tuesday. There was speculation that the aircraft were MQ-9 Reapers — a remotely piloted aircraft used predominately as an armed hunter-killer drone, but also capable of surveillance and intelligence collection — and were shot down,” the report continues.

    Initial social media video posts from eyewitnesses near where the drones had fallen in a fiery blaze of wreckage suggested Turkish forces had shot down at least one of them:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The drones reportedly went down over Idlib, which is still held by Syrian al-Qaeda and pro-Turkish factions.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    There had also been widespread speculation they were Russian drones, given the recent intensity of Russian operations over the region.

    However, American UAVs have also been in stepped up operations over the region the past days, and the drones were reportedly confirmed as of US origin by photos and eyewitnesses on the ground.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Drive also later reported it was the result of two US MQ-9 Reaper drones colliding, however, there hasn’t been official confirmation from the Pentagon, other than unnamed defense officials speaking to the media on the incident.

    As geopolitical analyst Mark Sleboda has observed, “There are obviously so many American drones illegally flying over Syria that they are running into each other.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The reports have still left the circumstances of the pair of drones crashing somewhat ambiguous: “Whether they were shot at afterwards – and whether that caused the crash – is unclear,” the Military Times report qualified.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 19th August 2020

  • "NATO Is At The Gates": Embattled Lukashenko Says He's Deployed 'Combat Ready' Troops To Western Border
    “NATO Is At The Gates”: Embattled Lukashenko Says He’s Deployed ‘Combat Ready’ Troops To Western Border

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 02:45

    There are unconfirmed breaking reports that Belarus’ embattled President Lukashenko has indicated he’s ordered troops deployed on the country’s western border with “full combat readiness”. This follows his provocatively telling supporters that “NATO is at the gates” while reaffirming that he wouldn’t let Belarus’ fate be dictated from the outside as both mass protests and widespread strikes threaten is continued rule after the contested Aug.9 election which many chrarge was “rigged”.

    “NATO troops are at our gates. Lithuania, Latvia, Poland and … Ukraine are ordering us to hold new elections,” he told supporters at a rally in Minsk on Sunday. He further alleged that NATO tanks and aircraft were deployed a mere 15 minutes from the Belarusian border, something which NATO has since denied.

    But NATO has rejected this, with Secretary-General Jens Stoltenberg on Monday asserting“NATO does not pose a threat to Belarus and has no military buildup in the region,” according to an official statement.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Prior file image of Belarus’ President Alexander Lukashenko in military fatigues, via AP.

    Lukashenko also again hinted that Russia stands ready to support him militarily amid an estimated 200,000 taking the streets in the capital demanding that he step down, or that at least a formal recount is conducted under international monitors.

    However, there’s growing consensus that the Kremlin is not wedded not wedded to Lukashenko and may be through with him, yet wants a transition in a way that does not create “another anti-Russian, NATO leaning bulwark on its borders”.

    Will we witness game-over for Lukashenko’s 26-year long rule this week?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    * * *

    Here’s RanSquawk’s primer on what’s at stake in Belarus:

    EU Response: The bloc, in a joint statement on the 10th August, condemned the improper conduct of the elections and the subsequent social unrest that followed. The EU “considers the results to have been falsified and therefore does not accept the results of the election,”, it said in a press release, “We will continue to closely follow the developments in order to assess how to further shape the EU’s response and relations with Belarus in view of the developing situation”, the statement said. Last Friday, EU Foreign Ministers agreed to commence work on sanctioning Belarusian officials responsible for the electoral results alongside those behind the violent crackdown on peaceful demonstrators. One EU diplomat noted that sanctions are unlikely to be agreed until the end of this week at the earliest. European Council President Michel called for an emergency summit for tomorrow, where a sanctions list is expected to be drawn up.

    US Response: A Senior Trump official noted that the mass protests make it clear that Lukashenko’s government can no longer ignore calls for democracy. President Trump called it a “terrible situations”, while senior admin officials said the US is closely watching the developments.

    Russia: The Kremlin said Russia is prepared to involve a joint defence treaty with Belarus, following multiple phone calls between the countries’ leaders. Russia said it was ready to help “solve the problems” that have arisen from “external pressure”. A transcript of the call between the leaders noted that Russia “reaffirmed its readiness to render the necessary assistance to resolve the challenges facing Belarus.” The show Russian support followed the Belarusian defence ministry announcing snap military exercises near the Lithuanian border after Lukashenko claimed that Poland, Lithuania and Latvia were conduction a “build up of military might” at the borders.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    China: The nation, in contrast to the EU, endorsed Lukashenko as the Belarusian President. Chinese President Xi said he was ready to work with the Belarusian leader to “jointly push forward China-Belarus comprehensive strategic partnership and expand mutually beneficial cooperation between the two countries in various fields”.
     

    COLLISION COURSE: The EU and US urged Russia not to intervene as protesters mounted over the weekend. In the fallout of the summit, EU leaders are also expected to send Russia a formal message to not interfere with matters in Belarus – “There should be no outside interference,” Council President Michel wrote. Furthermore, the EU is also keeping tabs on China’s meddling in what an EU official called “a European affair”, adding that “It would send a very troubling message to EU member states – who are united in the response on Belarus – if China continues to lend Lukashenko support.”

    Desks note that the threat of Russian interference could further rile up tensions with the EU; if Lukashenko survives in power, it will be due to heavy-handed crackdowns and repression, backed by the possibility of Russian intervention. Conversely, if the Belarusian leader is ousted, Russia could be strategically radicalised as witnessed in 2014 following the ousting of Ukrainan President Yanukovich. Analysts note that Russia’s strategic cooperation with China has also significantly intensified. “Russian radicalisation in the aftermath of Belarusian destabilisation could therefore paradoxically trigger an intensification of the stand-off between Beijing and pre-election Washington, and by extension between Beijing, Tokyo, Seoul and several Asean capitals – not to mention New Delhi, still smarting from this summer’s clashes,” SCMP writes.

  • UK Government Reverses Exam Results Decision Amid Algorithm "Anomalies"
    UK Government Reverses Exam Results Decision Amid Algorithm “Anomalies”

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/19/2020 – 02:00

    Authored by Mary Clark via The Epoch Times,

    Britain’s education secretary has reversed a decision over how to grade this year’s school exams in England, rejecting the grading system that had replaced the tests cancelled because of the ongoing CCP virus pandemic.

    On Monday, the government shelved a mathematical model used by exam regulator Ofqual to moderate and standardize the student grade predictions, called Centre Assessed Grades (CAGs), that were made and submitted to Ofqual by teachers.

    The government has now reverted to only using the CAGs submitted by teachers to award exam results.

    Algorithm

    Education Secretary Gavin Williamson said that the government had acted after realizing that exam results had been skewed by the “too many anomalies” behind the algorithm used in the Ofqual grading system.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ofqual had developed the contingency grading system to manage results when exams were canceled due to school and college closures in the lockdown triggered by the CCP (Chinese Communist Party) virus, commonly known as novel coronavirus.

    Announced in April, the grading system used an algorithm meant to produce fair grades that were overall in line with previous years’ results.

    The Ofqual model’s algorithm, however, had lowered results for almost 40 percent of students taking their main school-leaving exams.

    University places depend on the results, but many students found their grades had been downgraded by the algorithm, meaning many failed to meet their provisional offers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Students hold placards as they protest outside Codsall Community High School to demonstrate against the downgrading of A-level results near Wolverhampton, central England, on Aug.17, 2020. (Paul Ellis/AFP via Getty Images)

    The government reversal came after days of criticism of the algorithm from students, teachers, and lawmakers, and from Prime Minister Boris Johnson’s own ruling Conservative Party as well as from the opposition.

    “The Tories’ [Conservatives] handling of these results sums up their handling of this pandemic: incompetent,” opposition Labour Party leader Keir Starmer wrote on Twitter.

    Johnson and Williamson received further criticism in the British media on Tuesday after what the papers described as a “humiliating” U-turn, which days earlier the government had ruled out.

    Williamson told Sky News, however, that the government had done what was “the right thing to do.”

    “When it was clear that the system wasn’t delivering what we believed, and what we’d been assured that it would do, and the fairness that we all expect it to deliver … then further action had to be taken; that’s what I did,” he said.

    Ofqual Statement

    The government announcement parallels and comes on the same day as a statement from Ofqual Chair Roger Taylor.

    “The pandemic has created circumstances no one could have ever imagined or wished for,” he said.

    “We want to now take steps to remove as much stress and uncertainty for young people as possible—and to free up heads and teachers to work towards the important task of getting all schools open in two weeks.”

    Taylor also said he appreciated that “real anguish” had been caused, that public confidence in exam qualifications had been damaged, and that it was “incorrect” to have burdened teachers with appeals against lowered grades as the new September term loomed.

    “For all of that, we are extremely sorry,” he said.

    Williamson also apologized.

    “We worked with Ofqual to construct the fairest possible model, but it is clear that the process of allocating grades has resulted in more inconsistency and unfairness than can be reasonably resolved through an appeals process,” he said in a statement.

    “I am sorry for the distress this has caused young people and their parents but hope this announcement will now provide the certainty and reassurance they deserve.”

    A snap opinion poll published on Monday showed 75 percent of respondents thought the government had handled the situation badly and 40 percent thought Williamson should resign. He said he would not quit.

    Pressure on Universities

    The change, however, puts pressure on universities, as more students have obtained the grades needed to get into their first-choice institution.

    The government said they are setting a “clear expectation that they [universities] honor all offers made and met,” and Williamson said the government was working on how to boost their capacity.

    The government statement explained that grades awarded by the Ofqual grading system could still stand if they were higher than the CAG grade submitted by teachers, which the revised awards will reflect.

    “This will cause challenges at this late stage in the admissions process—capacity, staffing, placements, and facilities—particularly with the social distance measures in place,” Universities UK, the body which represents the sector, said.

    The government said it recognized the move to CAGs would have implications for students and universities and intends to “remove student number controls” in a bid to put student interests first and remove obstacles to their progress.

    Universities Minister Michelle Donelan will lead a new task force, working with education groups, “to ensure students can progress to the next stage of their education,” the government said.

    The government’s decision refers only to England. Scotland faced a similar situation and changed its policy last week, and Wales and Northern Ireland have also dropped the algorithm method, which factored in the past performance of the schools overall.

    Schools and colleges will receive the revised grades this week and they will be given to students next week.

  • Maund: Welcome To The Global Gulag…
    Maund: Welcome To The Global Gulag…

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 23:45

    Authored by Clive Maund via CliveMaund,com,

    In case you haven’t noticed, we now live under tyranny, and over the next several years, thanks to the unquestioning zombielike submission of the masses, it is set to get a whole lot worse.

    When this whole bizarre virus plandemic, or scamdemic, started to gather momentum I instinctively knew that something wasn’t right, that the official explanations didn’t add up, and that society at large was “being played” by those in power with an agenda. To anyone with even a modicum of real intelligence, the whole thing stinks of an elaborate plot.

    So, driven by natural curiosity, and being a person who would rather know the truth, however awful, than go around with blinders on, I embarked on a quest to find out what was really going on, what was really behind all this, and for what it’s worth I am going to share my findings with you today.

    Now I understand that there are those amongst you who are programmed by the system to label anyone who expresses views that deviate from what is portrayed as normal as a “conspiracy theorist”. If you are one of those you may want to click out now, but before you go, I want to point out to you that what I am writing about now, what we are living through, is not conspiracy theory, but conspiracy fact.

    Let’s start with the timing. Why was the virus, or bioweapon if that’s what it is, released when it was? The answer to that is simple; after years of exponentially increasing fiscal profligacy, debt across all levels of society had risen to wild unsustainable extremes so that the world economic system was teetering on the verge of collapse – witness the Fed’s emergency interventions in the repo markets last Fall. If the system was about to collapse those in power didn’t want to take the blame for it, so they needed a scapegoat, enter the virus – “Oh it wasn’t our mismanagement that caused the system to implode it was the virus”

    The old adage “Never let a good crisis go to waste” has been embraced with gusto by those in power. For decades, in our relatively free societies, they have had to content themselves with economic plunder – granting themselves inflated salaries and bonuses and stock options and positions on boards etc. but this virus scamdemic has presented them with the opportunity to wield what despots always crave which is raw, unbridled power over people – and the more of it they wield the happier they are. The scamdemic has presented them with the opportunity to implement a totalitarian regime and not just in one country or even a geographical region but for the first time ever over the entire world, and this will have one distinct advantage over all previous totalitarian regimes which is that there will be nobody left to fight back. The window of opportunity for the ordinary citizen to prevent this happening is already rapidly closing and if the current apathy, indifference and conformist stupidity of the masses continues, as it looks set to, then their fate will be sealed as they become entombed in a global gulag.

    So who or what are the immensely powerful plutocratic forces that are intent on bringing about this global technocratic totalitarian regime? The first thing to understand is that all of the widely accepted leaders of society such as celebrities, the clergy and politicians are all marionettes – puppets – if they do not speak and act in accordance with the aims of the true masters of society then they are marginalized or replaced. Special mention at this time must go to spokespersons for the medical profession, who must of course be pro-vaccine. Alright, so who are they? Ask yourself a simple question – who has the power to create unlimited wealth for themselves and their favored associates at the touch of a few keystrokes? – you’ve got it – the Central Banks, who pass on the tab for their profligacy to society at large by steadily eroding the purchasing power of money. Thanks to the dollar being the global reserve currency, the Federal Reserve is the King of them all and calls the shots – all other Central Banks are subservient to it – Greg Mannarino even goes so far as to say that the Federal Reserve was behind the virus, and it is certainly easy to see why this might be the case. The Central Banks and the leading largely faceless men within them are the true Masters of the world, the real shadow government, and it is they who are behind this drive towards a global totalitarian society.

    What are their goals? – they are already enormously wealthy so more money is not their primary objective. What they crave is more power – absolute power over people and their lives, that is what drives them. They are intent on creating a neo-feudal two-tier society, where they are the top tier – fabulously wealthy and wielding absolute power over everybody else who will exist – if they are permitted to – as an army of servants. This is of course a big reason for the lockdowns, to destroy the independent middle class and their businesses so that they then have to work for the large corporations owned by the elites and are thus more dependent on their Masters, as are those living on meager handouts. It is sad to witness businesses like restaurants struggling to survive doing things like spaced out tables or takeout in the brief interlude before more brutal lockdowns that are designed to finally wipe them out completely.

    How is it possible to paralyze with fear billions of people with fabricated and lurid stories about a killer pandemic into giving up their basic rights en masse and submitting to being treated like farm animals? Simple – you control their inputs via the mainstream media. Ordinary people are not called “the masses” for nothing – they are largely ignorant, stupid and gullible, that’s why, instead of seeking to educate themselves about what is really going on, they fritter their lives away watching soaps, video games and following the lives of celebrities etc. By owning and controlling their favorite media, you control their limited thought processes and they are susceptible to any propaganda. Basically, by the skillful use of propaganda you can get the masses, who are about 70% of the population, to do anything you want, and they can then exert peer group pressure on more thoughtful individuals to conform, a classic and glaring example being the wearing of face masks, which is State sanctioned collective paranoia, and if that doesn’t work they are forced to conform and wear them by means of fines or imprisonment. Here it is worth noting that the most powerful institutions in the world, especially the banks, media and Wall St are heavily peopled by “the race who cannot be criticized”.

    Virtually all media – newspapers, TV channels, radio stations, and now most websites are controlled by the same plutocratic forces, which is why you have to be careful what you say on Facebook and Twitter or they flick the switch and banish you. This is why, once the scamdemic started, the masses were bombarded with wall to wall 24-hour scare stories about the virus, involving lies exaggeration and distortions on an epic scale, with nonstop repetition drumming it into them. They foolishly and unquestioningly sucked it all up and submitted to being locked up in their houses for months, and now have to wear diapers on their faces to establish their credentials as dumbed down fearful submissive sheep.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When you confront them with this, they say “Oh, but people are dying!” (of the virus) to which the correct response is “So what? – people are dying all the time, of flu, old age and umpteen other illnesses” Then they try to quote alarming stats at you, if they remember them, not realizing that all these case numbers are gross exaggerations caused by phony test results and anybody who dies of anything being labeled as a Covid-19 death. On the television they quote death stats at you, intended to alarm, but when you do the basic math and compare the deaths, even if you take the grossly inflated figures at face value, and compare them to the total population of the country in question you realize that the percentage of people supposedly killed by the scamdemic is tiny, usually of the order of 0.5% maximum and usually much less, which is hardly the order of the Black Death, which killed 1 in 3. One tactic that they are currently using in the US is to do huge numbers of tests to bump the case numbers up in order to justify more lockdowns. These lockdowns are never justified in any case, because in a normal society you lock up the sick people, not the healthy people.

    All of the draconian measures put into place around the world that are purportedly employed to protect the population from the virus, are actually intended to damage the immune systems of people by design, in order to make them weaker and more susceptible to illness later – and don’t forget if they are admitted to hospital with the flu, it will be labeled as Covid-19 to ramp the stats. Thus we have enforced house arrests, the lockdowns, which are designed to stop people getting out and taking air and exercising and spending time in the sun, which is important for the immune system, the masks, which restrict respiration, the social isolation which is intended to make people anxious and fearful and damage the social fabric. Plain common sense dictates that the right way to deal with a virus epidemic, especially one that only kills a small percentage of the population is to carry on with normal life and let it do what it will. Those who catch the virus will mostly recover, especially the young, and will develop some immunity. Another reason for flexing their muscles with the curfews, the lockdown orders and the mandatory mask wearing is to have the population accustomed to getting down on their knees before the power of the State as a warm up to full Martial Law.

    There was and is absolutely no reason to deny people access to beaches or parks, as in this drone photo of Siesta Key in Florida on a sunny Summer day when the car park on the left is normally full. The reasons for doing so are malevolent – to damage the health and wellbeing of citizens and to demonstrate the power of the State…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This picture is a screen grab from the entertaining video Mavic Mini explores quarantined beach Siesta Key.

    One of the big reasons that the NWO (New World Order) is determined to isolate people is to stop them gathering in groups the better to prevent the interchange of ideas, which might result in large numbers of people gathering and deciding to overthrow their common enemy, namely the Central Banks and the government, especially when the implosion of the debt bubble and / or hyperinflation renders them destitute and desperate – the NWO are thinking ahead. The storming of the Bastille in Paris in 1789 could not have happened if crowds had been prevented from gathering.

    It’s very easy by selective editing and exclusion to control the minds of young people like this, whose literary education largely comes from Facebook and Twitter, many of whom don’t have a thought in their heads that wasn’t put there by someone else…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There are 3 key planks that the New World Order are going to use to impose their planned draconian totalitarian matrix on the peoples of the world:

    1. a cashless society,

    2. forced vaccination,

    3. and forced mask wearing and these plans are already well advanced and already being imposed in the case of the mask.

    The four main reasons that the NWO want to implement a cashless society are as follows.

    One is that the banks can take a cut even of the smallest transactions.

    Another is so that no-one can enter into financial transactions that are not subject to the scrutiny of the State and therefore they cannot escape the taxation dragnet.

    Still another is to prevent bank account holders from withdrawing cash and possibly triggering runs on banks,

    and the fourth big reason is that banks will be free to impose negative interest rates, which is a polite way of saying that they are going to plunder your accounts, and if they are in a really bad mood they can resort to bail-ins – outright theft from customers’ accounts.

    A cashless society therefore means that the banks have absolute financial power over you and your life. No wonder they want to introduce it!

    A big reason for imposing draconian restrictions on the population now and going forward is to coerce more people into accepting being vaccinated. The vaccination certificate will be presented as a passport to a relatively normal life. Initially it will be voluntary, and coercion will work with many people as they will not be able to do things like board planes and even eat at restaurants without the required certificate of compliance. Eventually, those who don’t comply who will wind up being a minority will be subjected to more extreme coercive measures bordering on being pinned down and given a jab. The propaganda machine is already going full bore using reverse psychology, by suggesting that initially there might not be enough vaccinations to go round, and that if you are “fortunate” you will get on the list to receive a shot. What the poor unfortunate fools lining up for these shots don’t realize is that these vaccinations will be full of all kinds of unpleasant gunk, some of which could be DNA altering, and they can at any time use these vaccinations to conduct selective culls – Bill Gates has made no secret of the fact that he wants to wipe out a large number of people. Another aspect of this vaccination scam that should be considered is that these vaccines are being fast tracked at such a rate that adequate safety checks cannot and will not be made and therefore they should be regarded as dangerous, and this of course may be due in part to the huge windfall profits in prospect for the companies involved.

    The mask is the supreme symbol of the triumph of the will of the NWO over the mass of the population. It is rich in symbolism. To start with it doesn’t work, because virus particles are so small they go straight through it. The purpose of the mask is to demonstrate that the iron will of the State prevails – it is at once a symbol of compliance, a symbol of conformity, a symbol of submission, a negation of individual personality, since people can’t see your face, and best of all, through impeding normal respiration it damages your immune system and makes you more susceptible to catching the virus! The few thinking people who try to refuse to go along with this insanity will in time come under increasing attack from the majority, and are already being subjected to fines. CNN is airing pro-mask propaganda which goes something along the lines of “not wearing a mask says something about the person not wearing it” which is clearly an incitement to discrimination and possible violence. Actually they are right in a way – it says that he or she is not a mindless submissive sheep.

    The 3 measures described above constitute a full frontal assault on the basis human rights of citizens.

    • The cashless society makes citizens automatic victims of userers – the banks,

    • forced vaccination makes them victims of Big Pharma racketeers and puts them at risk of death through eugenics programs,

    • and the mask is an attack on one of the most basic human rights of all – the ability to breathe freely.

    Taken together they should give you the clearest indication of what the gangsters behind this intricate and comprehensive plot have planned for humanity – and they are only just getting started.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I have told you on numerous occasions that democracy is an absurd self-defeating concept. The reason is simple – you cannot have a system where ignorant stupid people have the same vote as intelligent discriminating people, who they vastly outnumber. The result is mob rule and politicians getting voted into office not because they are conscientious individuals who will work for the betterment of the lives of their constituents, but because they kiss babies and promise the mob the Earth. The result is the current unsavory collection of shameless gangsters and opportunists who now run Western societies and who milk their constituents on the one hand while serving as compliant stooges for their NWO Masters on the other.

    Thus, true democracy can only be a temporary state of affairs and must cycle through to tyranny, which is what we are seeing now, and in a way the masses deserve their fate. Whilst it is certainly not true of everyone, a very large number of people these days are brainwashed, careless, cowardly, indulged, insouciant, ignorant of what really matters, physically soft, timid and vapid individuals. If they weren’t, the NWO could never have pulled off what they have so far this year. Their assessment of the masses as gormless sheep that you can do anything to have been proven correct – just walk down any street these days and you will see this. There was a demonstration in Germany a few weeks ago by a quite large number of people who saw through the plot, but this was of course downplayed by the media, and unfortunately not repeated elsewhere.

    In the United States, which is one of the countries that will be hardest hit by the economic meltdown, they are playing a very crafty game by pitting Left against Right and black against white. The name of the game is “divide and conquer” – the masses will be too busy hating and killing each other to go after their joint enemy. So the Left call for draconian State intervention to stop the spread of the virus and the Right call for draconian State intervention to stop the rioting, which was bankrolled by powerful forces.

    We thus appear to be entering a new Dark Age, and unlike tyrannies of the past there is unlikely to be an early end to it, because it is truly global in scope. As the walls close in and the Matrix solidifies, all sources of dissent will be snuffed out and where deemed necessary, forcibly eliminated.

    You might well think to yourself, or say, “Maund if you know all this why are you saying it?- there’s a risk of them coming after you, is there not?” While that is theoretically true, they are only really concerned by articles or reports of this nature that have a high circulation. Hardly anyone in comparative terms will read this and then it will disappear and be forgotten about. Of course, further down the road, when the Matrix really closes in, no dissent at all will be tolerated. The masses are so dumb that me writing this won’t make any real difference, it will only have an impact on the few that read it with whom it resonates. The masses are not going to watch a really important video like this by Greg Mannarino which has a relatively modest 31,800 hits when they can watch slush like this that has more than 642 million hits. It is this mindless obsession with trivia that is one reason why we are now falling into the abyss.

    There are few grounds for optimism – the ease with which the New World Order got the masses to voluntarily shut themselves in their homes and wear face diapers etc. without much dissent will embolden them to go full steam ahead with their draconian plans for more severe lockdowns, permanent diaper wearing, the elimination of cash, contact tracing and endless surveillance and forced vaccination. The freedoms so effortlessly being given up will be very hard if not impossible to recover. It is important not to underestimate the ruthlessness of the enemy – in the space of just 6 months in a rampage of unrestrained malevolence they have all but destroyed the airline industry, the catering and restaurant industry, the travel industry and have decimated 50% of small businesses in the US, leading to about 40 million job losses. They have imprisoned people in their homes for weeks and sometimes months on end, denied children schooling and the necessary company of other children and forced the population to wear oxygen stealing masks and permanently damaged the health of millions through this means and by denying them access to air and sunlight. It should thus be clear that they are capable of anything, up to and including the mass murder of millions, which they may achieve through the intentional disruption of food supplies or through tainted vaccinations and perhaps both. Ominously they have been emboldened by their successes up to this point and can now be expected to push on until they have achieved their objective of absolute power over and total control of the population who can look forward to being exploited ever more severely in a neo-feudal Master-servant type society – which will be the reward for their cowardice and docile stupidity of recent months.

    I don’t pretend to have all the answers on this. These are the pieces of the puzzle that I have been able to pull together over time, and fortunately we have enough here to see the big picture, and it isn’t pretty.

  • Close Call: Asteroid Unexpectedly Makes The Closest Pass Of Earth On Record
    Close Call: Asteroid Unexpectedly Makes The Closest Pass Of Earth On Record

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 23:25

    Asteroid 2020QG just made the closely pass-by of our planet on record. The most amazing part? Scientists didn’t even see it coming.

    The asteroid came as close as 4,778 miles from the center of the Earth, according to NASA’s database of near Earth objects and a new report by Forbes. At its lowest point, it could have been just 1,000 miles over our heads – lower than almost all artificial satellites that are currently orbiting the Earth.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The asteroid wasn’t spotted until after it passed the Earth, which is wild considering it is officially the closest call since we started following such passes nearly 100 years ago. 

    The asteroid had a diameter of about 10-20 feet, according to NASA, who also says that the asteroid likely didn’t pose a threat even if it had entered into the Earth’s atmosphere. It would have likely burned up in the atmosphere, NASA said.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A similar sized asteroid was spotted in 2018 and, after entry into the Earth’s atmosphere, “only the tiniest bits” made it to the ground. It caused no reported damage or injuries. 

    And because nothing involving science or outer space can be brought up without bringing up the world’s greatest faux-scientist, Elon Musk, Forbes commented that the object was “roughly the size of a Tesla Model 3, which makes you wonder for a second if the car Elon Musk famously launched towards Mars might have activated its autonomous boosters and attempted to make its way home.”

  • Will The Dam Break After Clinesmith's Plea?
    Will The Dam Break After Clinesmith’s Plea?

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 23:05

    Authored by Charles Lipson via RealClearPolitics.com,

    News reports have downplayed the significance of former FBI lawyer Kevin Clinesmith’s guilty plea, acknowledging he altered an official document in the government’s Trump-Russia collusion probe. There has been some coverage, mainly because it is so rare to see FBI agents charged with a felony and because it is the first tangible result of U.S. Attorney John Durham’s sprawling investigation of the investigators. But mainstream news outlets have minimized its importance. It’s only one count, they say, and it deals with a relatively minor crime by a mid-level figure.

    That’s spin, and it’s wrong. This plea is like finding water seeping from the base of a dam. The problem is not one muddy puddle. The problem is that it foreshadows the dam’s failure, releasing a torrent. That’s what the Clinesmith plea portends.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What Did Clinesmith Admit?

    Clinesmith acknowledges he altered an email from the CIA to the FBI, answering a question about Carter Page. Page is an American citizen and a Naval Academy graduate who spent considerable time in Russia. His time abroad raised a question for the FBI’s counter-intelligence division. Was Page a Russian agent? Or was he on our side, helping the U.S. gather intelligence about the Kremlin? The CIA would know.

    The answer mattered because the FBI and Department of Justice were preparing warrants to spy on Page as a hostile foreign agent. The CIA gave them a clear answer in August 2016, before the first warrant was issued: Page was working for us. That answer was given to a still-unnamed FBI case agent, and we don’t know what he did with it. Did he show it to those preparing the warrant applications? Why else would he even ask the CIA for the information?

    In 2017, after Clinesmith was tasked to the Mueller investigation, their team asked him to clarify Page’s relationship with U.S. intelligence. That’s when he took the CIA document and added a single word, “not.” The altered document said Carter Page was not a CIA asset. It was a deliberate lie.

    Clinesmith is pleading guilty to inserting that word and changing the document. That’s a felony. What made his crime more significant is that the altered document was then presented to the secret court overseeing actions taken under the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act. The special counsel included it in the fourth FISA application to spy on Page.

    All four were chock-full of deception and dishonesty, but misrepresented to the court as “verified.” All of them said there “was probable cause that [Carter Page] was a knowing agent” of Russia. He wasn’t, and the applications’ authors had plenty of reasons to know it.

    Why were they so determined to spy on a relatively minor figure like Carter Page? Because he was involved in Trump’s world and knew many others who were. James Comey’s FBI and Barack Obama’s White House wanted to know everything Trump was doing. Page was one window into that world. (Gen. Michael Flynn was an even better one, and we know he was exhaustively investigated.)

    The FISA applications were meant to give some legal cover to this domestic espionage. The FBI first tried to get a warrant on Page in summer 2016, but the judges said it lacked sufficient evidence. They fixed that by adding added the now-discredited Steele dossier and got the first warrant in late 2016. The FBI and DoJ never told the FISA judges that the crucial addition was funded by Hillary Clinton and the Democratic National Committee, filled with unverified allegations, and produced by a biased, partisan investigator. Clinesmith’s altered email was a later, and relatively minor, addition to this toxic mix.

    What really mattered was less the inclusion of Clinesmith’s false document than the omission of the CIA’s truthful one. The truth would have raised a bright red flag. The judges would likely ask, “If Page has worked closely with the CIA, how can you simply ignore that and say he is a Russian agent?” In other words, an accurate document might have killed the warrant renewal and called the previous three into question. The Mueller team wanted to avoid that, so they never let the FISA judges see the authentic document or know about it. Their omission was fateful and almost certainly criminal.

    The Bullet Points That Leave a Bloody Trail

    Clinesmith’s plea deal matters mostly because it sheds light on Durham’s broader investigation and the malfeasance he’s uncovering. To see that, let’s focus on the “bullet points,” which leave a bloody trail to larger crimes.

    • It was no surprise to learn last week that Kevin Clinesmith had altered an official document. Inspector General Michael Horowitz had already reported it, without naming the culprit. Durham had that information and could have indicted Clinesmith long ago. He didn’t because he was interviewing others about FISA abuses and didn’t want to give them any information from Clinesmith’s indictment. Releasing that information now shows Durham has completed his work on FISA fraud.

    • Other, more senior FBI officials must have been involved in these FISA abuses, though Durham hasn’t said so yet. Some committed abuse themselves. Others knew about it or should have known. Still others must have discovered the misrepresentations, but failed to report them to the FISA court, as they were required to do. Those failures are felonies.

    • Clinesmith has said he gave other FBI members the true document, not just the altered one. The 23rd paragraph of the charging information says Clinesmith “provided the unchanged C.I.A. email to Crossfire Hurricane agents and the Justice Department lawyer drafting the original wiretap application.” That’s a smoking bazooka.

    • How can Durham prove the CIA’s truthful information was circulated and then hidden? By thoroughly checking the FBI’s internal document system. It should record everyone who received Clinesmith’s accurate (unaltered) document and those they later passed it to. If the agents and lawyers merely discussed the falsification, then prosecutors will need several witnesses to substantiate it.

    • The real leader of the Mueller team, Andrew Weissmann, is still blowing smoke about these mounting legal problems. On Friday, he tweeted, “Clinesmith is charged with adding the words ‘not a source’ to an email about Carter Page, but nowhere does the charge say that is false, i.e. that Page was a source for the CIA.” Notice, Weissmann is not saying he knew nothing or that Page really was a Russian source. He simply saying that a 180-degree change in the document’s wording doesn’t mean what your lying eyes think it means.

    • Weissmann’s comment shows the Mueller team is sticking with their existing disclaimer. Their report says they won’t speculate on “whether the correction of any particular misstatement or omission, or some combination thereof, would have resulted in a different outcome.” In order words, “We don’t see something. We don’t say something. And we don’t know if it matters.”

    • Clinesmith actually worked on Robert Mueller’s team. He was tasked from the bureau to work with that team, which then submitted his falsified document to the FISA court. That’s crucially important. If attorneys on the special counsel team knew about his crime and did nothing to inform the court, if they continued to use a document they knew was fraudulent, they will face charges. That would implicate Mueller’s team for the first time in illegal activity to undermine the Trump presidency. That’s a much bigger matter than writing a biased report.

    • We know from other declassified documents that it wasn’t just Mueller’s FISA application that had false information. All four applications did. Indeed, they depended on it, especially on the Steele dossier. Then-Deputy FBI Director Andrew McCabe testified that, without Steele, the warrants would not have been granted. Yet none of the agents and prosecutors ever told the FISA court about fraud, misrepresentation, and bias from Steele, Clinesmith, or others.

    • The Mueller team must have known Clinesmith’s actions were a problem. They didn’t just get rid him, they tried to shift the blame. That’s the meaning of an opaque footnote in their report, which said that the bureau, not the Mueller team, supervised “an FBI attorney” who worked for the special counsel. Hey, it’s them, not us!

    • This CYA footnote, clever as it is, doesn’t mean the Mueller team was ignorant of Clinesmith’s fraud when they submitted the FISA warrant application. Nor does it absolve them of responsibility for failing to tell the court promptly when they suddenly “discovered” it was inaccurate.

    • Did Clinesmith act alone or did anyone tell him to alter the document? That’s a critical question, and Durham has not answered it yet. Nor has he said who knew what Clinesmith had done. Again, the key to proving that is either a paper trail or multiple cooperating witnesses. We should get Durham’s answers when he issues more indictments.

    Who Should Be Nervous?

    • Anyone who worked on Crossfire Hurricane with Clinesmith. You can bet he is telling Durham everything he knows. Any plea deal would require complete disclosure. Durham could have charged him with a more serious crime, requiring a longer prison sentence. Prosecutors don’t grant such leniency without getting something valuable in return (unless they are investigating Hillary Clinton, whose top aides received immunity for free). Durham is no such patsy. He would not go easy on Clinesmith unless he got useful information in return.

    • Real trouble looms for anybody on the Mueller team or elsewhere at the DoJ and FBI who knew that Clinesmith had altered the CIA email to change its meaning. There’s even worse trouble ahead for those who ordered him to commit a crime. To prove those charges, Durham needs documents or multiple eyewitnesses. Clinesmith can point prosecutors in the right direction, but his word alone won’t do.

    What Do We Still Need to Know About the FISA Investigation?

    • The main questions are “how wide is this corruption?” and “how high up does it go?” Those go well beyond Clinesmith’s altered document. They include all the other lies in the warrants.

    • Does Durham have enough evidence—and fortitude—to charge senior officials who signed false applications? They will say, as former-Deputy Attorney General Rod Rosenstein did to Congress, that they relied entirely on subordinates to give them complete, honest information. To rebut that, Durham needs hard evidence. He may also feel he needs evidence of intent. The higher up you go, the more evidence you need. We talk, rightly, about equality under the law, but, in practice, prosecutors want stronger, more unequivocal evidence to charge senior officials.

    • Were all the lies and misinformation a concerted effort, a true criminal conspiracy? That will be one of Durham’s toughest calls, and it would need approval from Attorney General William Barr. Such a charge would ignite a political firestorm, fueled by partisan media. But, then, so does everything these days.

    To return to the metaphor of the endangered dam… the Clinesmith indictment is a telling puddle where the ground should be dry. It’s a troubling omen for those who violated Carter Page’s rights, spied on the Trump campaign, and systematically abused the powerful tools of law enforcement. They are living downstream, and they should be worried.

  • President Xi Launches Historic Purge Against China's 'Deep State'
    President Xi Launches Historic Purge Against China’s ‘Deep State’

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 22:45

    Just days after Communist Party officials censored a prominent academic who dared to criticize the CCP and its glorious leader, Xi Jinping, more news of what appears to be a mounting purge of dissent in the aftermath of the coronavirus pandemic, as Beijing prepares a Russia-style vaccine rollout.

    WSJ reports that one of Xi’s most senior allies has called for a Maoist purge of China’s domestic-security apparatus, insisting last month that it is time to “turn the blade inwards and scrape the poison off the bone.”

    Within one week of the call, party “enforcers” launched investigations into at least 21 police and judicial officials. Dozens more have been taken down in the weeks since. So far, the most high-profile figure to face charges is the police chief of Shanghai.

    In essence, President Xi, who won plaudits for his handling of the COVID-19 pandemic but is nevertheless weakened due to China’s weakened economy and rising tensions with Washington, is launching his own assault on the deep state, mirroring President Trump’s animosity and distrust toward his own intelligence machine.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While it’s true that China’s political system suffers from “endemic corruption”, that’s not the real reason President Xi is doing this now, contrary to what some western media outlets have suggested.

    Instead, it appears President Xi is launching his own war against China’s “deep state” by launching a full-blown purge of the state security apparatus.

    The ultimate goal of the campaign is simple: create police, prosecutors and judges who are “absolutely loyal, absolutely pure and absolutely reliable”.

    During his 8 years in power, President Xi has made a big show of confronting corruption, but critics say he has barely made a dent. Rather, his efforts have had more of a redistributive effect: those who are loyal to the ruler can eat their full from the trough, but those who aren’t may see even a minor slip up cost them everything.

    Now that Xi has experienced first hand how unforeseen events can rattle even the authoritarian supreme leader of the CCP, he’s realizing that if he’s going to accomplish his goal of ruling until at least 2035, he’s going to need more leverage over the police and security apparatus, so that when he goes for a third term as Communist Party leader in 2022, nobody will raise a hackle, said Wu Qiang, a Chinese politics researcher and former lecturer at Beijing’s Tsinghua University.

    “Xi is especially reliant on this coercive state apparatus, yet also distrustful of it,” Wu told the Wall Street Journal.

    We really couldn’t have put it better ourselves.

  • Kim Jong-Un Reportedly Orders North Koreans To Hand Over Pet Dogs So They Can Be Eaten
    Kim Jong-Un Reportedly Orders North Koreans To Hand Over Pet Dogs So They Can Be Eaten

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 22:25

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    North Korean dictator Kim Jong-un has ordered citizens to hand over their pet dogs so they can be killed and eaten as a new famine threatens the country.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Heavy rain, widespread flooding and crop damages have left the country short of food supplies, leading the Stalinist regime to demand more wealthy North Koreans give up their dogs, which are considered “decadent” luxury and “a ‘tainted’ trend by bourgeois ideology,” according to South Korean news outlet Chosun Ilbo.

    “Authorities have identified households with pet dogs and are forcing them to give them up or forcefully confiscating them and putting them down,” a source told the newspaper.

    The pets are rounded up, with some of them being sent to zoos and others being sold directly to the restaurant trade.

    What’s next, cannibalism?

    Back in 2017, North Korean defector Gim Gyu Min claimed that the famine became so chronic in the late 90’s that he witnessed people being forced to eat each other, including a mother who was arrested for cooking her own son in a cauldron.

    “It was a common thing at the time. It was not surprising,” said Min.

    Yet another reminder that Communism, wherever it is tried, always leads to starvation and brutality.

    *  *  *

    In the age of mass Silicon Valley censorship It is crucial that we stay in touch. I need you to sign up for my free newsletter here. Also, I urgently need your financial support here.

  • Trump Campaign Has Deeper Pockets, Outpaces Biden Fundraising In July
    Trump Campaign Has Deeper Pockets, Outpaces Biden Fundraising In July

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 22:05

    While presumptive Democratic Party nominee for the 2020 presidential election, Joe Biden, has been a leader in the polls for quite some time now, the campaign of incumbent Donald Trump – as of Q2 2020 – still had deeper pockets.

    As Statista’s Katharina Buchholz details below, according to the Federal Election Commission, Trump’s campaign had collected almost $343 million and had spent $279 million.

    Infographic: Trump Campaign Has Deeper Pockets | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    Biden’s budget was almost 20 percent below that at $237 million, of which almost $170 million had been spent.

    While the next FEC filing deadline is still some weeks away, The New York Times reported that Trump also did better than Biden in July, raising $165 million compared to Biden’s $140 million.

  • The Road To Inflation In Post-COVID Times
    The Road To Inflation In Post-COVID Times

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 21:45

    Submitted by Christopher Dembik, head of Macro Analysis at Saxo Bank

    Summary: No theme is more important in the macroeconomic space than inflation right now. All the clients we are talking to share their worries about inflation risk and are looking for investment strategies to hedge against inflation. In recent weeks, we have seen a series of upside surprises in inflation data, that mostly reflect the big imbalances in the economy following the COVID recession and some data noise. However, we cannot rule out that we will experience in the recovery phase a prolonged period of high inflation due to a sudden change in regime shift characterized by rising protectionism and more redistributive policies to fight against inequalities. If I could give only one piece of advice to investors, read everything you can about inflation and especially stagflation.

    * * *

    There is a large consensus among economists that the initial COVID-19 shock is a massive disinflationary impulse. However, there is no consensus regarding what may come next, let’s say in two or three years. Some argue that the massive surge in money supply will continue to inflate asset bubbles in real estate and in the stock market, as it has been the case since the GFC, but will have little impact on the real economy as a whole due to the persistent decline of both the money multiplier (the amount of money that banks generate with each dollar of reserves) and money velocity (the rate at which money is exchanged in the economy). Others fear that in the long run the boom in money supply combined with a regime shift characterized by rising protectionism and more redistributive policies to fight against inequalities will create lasting inflationary pressures and push inflation above the 2% threshold on a sustainable basis. This view is reinforced by the fact that inflation has always been responsive to sudden regime shifts in the past.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Most economists consider that the most powerful leading indicator for inflation is M2 money supply. It is fair to say that we have never experienced in the past, not even during the 1970’s stagflation, money supply growth as high as it is today in COVID-times, skyrocketing at more than 20% YoY.

    We are not there yet. Recent upside surprises in inflation data, such as the surge in U.S. July CPI or the boom in U.S. unit labor cost in Q2, are not linked to the expected regime shift. To be fair, it mostly reflects data noise due to the strict lockdown and the following recession. If we dig into details, it appears that the strong CPI is the consequence of relative shifts in specific markets rather than a general increase in prices. In regards to the jump in unit labor cost by 12.2% in Q2, it is essentially the reflection of more job losses amongst low-wage workers, thus causing distorting measurements. For at least some period of time, we need to get used to inflation noise and refrain from drawing hasty conclusions regarding immediate change in inflation regime.

    It’s all relative. In a very insightful interview to MACROVoices (see here), Vincent Deluard, macro strategist for StoneX Group Inc., proposes another way to approach the inflation problem. He rightly argues that inflation has not disappeared from the real economy over the past years, it is still here, but it cannot be captured by CPI as it measures the average inflation in the economy. Actually, focusing on CPI results in masquering the generational inequality problem:

    The great moderation of inflation in the past two decades has been the result of two offsetting forces. On the one hand, the cost of medical insurance premia, college tuitions, rents in major urban areas, and childcare has exploded. On the other hand, the cost of most of the things which can be bought at Walmart (and are generally manufactured overseas) has collapsed.

    This had led to two very different experiences for inflation: retired boomers, who generally own their homes, live in the small towns and suburbs, shop at superstores and get their medical expenses paid by Medicare have experienced deflation (…). Conversely, new jobs openings for younger generations have been almost exclusively created in major urban areas where costs have exploded”.

    Deluard draws two main conclusions:

    • Generational inequality is prevalent in society.
    • The level of inflation strongly depends on which age group you belong to.

    Said differently, the young generations (Millennials and Gen-Z-ers), who contribute most to society based on productivity measure, pay more than anyone else and still face no access to capital to buy home and live properly.

    By sacrificing the young and poor to save the old and rich, the COVID-19 crisis has strongly exacerbated generational inequalities and millennial anger against Boomers. One way to solve this issue is for politicians to step in and implement redistributive policies and other popular stimulus programs that can take the form of UBI/Helicopter money. Now that governments and the U.S. Congress are critical players in driving money supply growth, it is likely they won’t give up anytime soon this new power.

    Inflation is always and everywhere a political phenomenon. Its evolution will mostly depend on future policy decisions that will be taken after the crisis. We think that redistributive policies and other stimulus programs will play a key role to create favorable conditions to an inflation episode once the recovery will start to materialize, let’s say in a 12-18 month horizon.

    If we combine redistributive policies with the emerging trend of supply chain relocation and rising protectionism, we have a almost perfect inflation narrative for 2022 and beyond that can (temporarily) overwhelms deflationary forces driven by demographics and technology.

  • After Nearly 150 Days Of Lockdown, Argentina's COVID-19 Outbreak Is Deadlier Than Ever
    After Nearly 150 Days Of Lockdown, Argentina’s COVID-19 Outbreak Is Deadlier Than Ever

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 21:25

    With the reform-minded business-friendly conservatives out, and the Peronistas back in power in Argentina, one of South America’s biggest and most troubled economies is struggling to get back on its feet, bolstered by the promise of more rope from the IMF and the country’s other creditors, despite arriving at its 3rd default in 20 years, and its 9th in history – the most of any country.

    This unfortunate reputation has led some to joke that only three things in life are certain: death, taxes and another Argentinian sovereign default.

    But as the country prepares for yet another refinancing thanks to the IMF, the government has revealed that the country’s already damaged economy has been absolutely hammered by one of the world’s longest, and strictest, lockdowns.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And even as new COVID cases have tapered off somewhat, Argentina’s death toll is quickly climbing the ranks of the deadliest outbreaks in the world.

    According to Bloomberg, in the past seven days, Argentina has reported 22.5 deaths per million people compared with 28.1 in Brazil and 23.4 in the US, the homes of the deadliest outbreaks in the world.

    Total deaths in Argentina have now surpassed 5,000 since the pandemic began.

    The deaths, and the weariness of the Argentina quarantine, which has crushed the country’s economy while doing little to stanch the virus’s spread, have spurred more protests in the country.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Even worse, concerns are mounting that Argentina is undercounting cases and deaths. The positivity rate across the country has been hovering around 40% for the past week, similar levels to Mexico, which suggests that testing levels are insufficient.

    But after 146 days of lockdowns, the government is facing pressure to reopen immediately.

    Buenos Aires remains the epicenter of the virus. The city had 64% of all cases as of Wednesday, though it is Argentina’s most populous province.

    The Argentine economy is expected to contract about 10% this year marking the third straight year of recession. The country’s leftist government will soon begin talks with the IMF over a new lending program to restructure some $65 billion of bonds, far more than Argentina will ever probably be able to repay.

    Fortunately, markets remain confident that a bigger fool for the Argentine century bond, issued in 2017, can still be found.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • A Brief History Of The Gold Standard
    A Brief History Of The Gold Standard

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 21:05

    This article is part of the Understanding Money Mechanics series, by Robert P. Murphy. The series will be published as a book in late 2020.

    To fully understand our current global monetary system, in which all of the major powers issue unbacked fiat money, it is helpful to learn how today’s system emerged from its earlier form. Before fiat money, all major currencies were tied (often with interruptions due to war or financial crises) to one or both of the precious metals, gold and silver. This international system of commodity-based money reached its zenith under the so-called classical gold standard, which characterized the global economy from the 1870s through the start of World War I in 1914.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Under a genuine gold standard, a nation’s monetary unit is defined as a specific weight of gold. There is “free” coinage of gold, meaning that anyone can present gold bullion to the government to be minted into gold coins of the appropriate denomination in unlimited quantities (perhaps with a small charge for the service). Going the other way, to the extent that there are paper notes or token coins issued by the government as official money, these can be presented by anyone for immediate redemption in full-bodied gold coins. Finally, under a genuine gold standard, there are no restrictions on the flow of gold into and out of the country, so that foreigners too can avail themselves of the options described above.

    To this day, arguments over the gold standard are not merely technical disagreements concerning economic analysis. Rather, the gold standard often serves as a proxy for “sound money,” which was a central element in the classical liberal tradition of limiting government’s ability to wreak havoc on society. As Ludwig von Mises explains:

    It is impossible to grasp the meaning of the idea of sound money if one does not realize that it was devised as an instrument for the protection of civil liberties against despotic inroads on the part of governments. Ideologically it belongs in the same class with political constitutions and bills of rights. The demand for constitutional guarantees and for bills of rights was a reaction against arbitrary rule and the nonobservance of old customs by kings. The postulate of sound money was first brought up as a response to the princely practice of debasing the coinage. It was later carefully elaborated and perfected in the age which—through the experience of the American continental currency, the paper money of the French Revolution and the British restriction period—had learned what a government can do to a nation’s currency system. (bold added)

    It should go without saying that in the present chapter, we are not offering a comprehensive history of the gold standard, even from the limited perspective of the United States. Rather, we merely attempt to explain its basic mechanics, and to highlight some of the major events in the world’s evolution from a global monetary system based on market-produced commodity money to our current framework, which rests on government-issued fiat monies.

    The Precious Metals: The Market’s Money

    In the previous chapter, we explained that money wasn’t planned or invented by a wise king, but rather emerged spontaneously from the actions of individuals. We also explained why historically people settled on the precious metals, gold and silver, as the preeminent examples of commodity money.

    In more recent times—specifically after 1971, as we will document later in this chapter—most people on Earth use unbacked fiat money, issued by various governments (or central banks acting on their behalf), which is not redeemable in any other commodity.

    Yet between these two extremes there was a long period when governments issued sovereign currencies that were defined as weights of gold and/or silver. In the US, coins stamped with certain numbers of dollars would actually contain the appropriate gold or silver content, such as a $20 Double Eagle gold coin containing 0.9675 troy ounces of gold. Furthermore, after the US government began the practice of issuing paper notes of various dollar denominations, anyone could present the paper for redemption in the corresponding full-bodied coins. Even during periods when specie redemption was suspended—as often happened during wars—the public generally assumed (correctly) that the government paper currencies would eventually be linked back to the precious metals, and this expectation helped anchor the value of the paper money.

    Explainer: “Fixed” Exchange Rate vs. Government Price-Fixing

    When multiple countries participate in a gold standard, it is typical to say their governments have adopted a regime of “fixed exchange rates,” where the various sovereign currencies trade against each other in constant ratios.

    In contrast, economists such as Milton Friedman have written persuasive essays3 making the case for flexible or “floating” exchange rates, in which governments don’t intervene in currency markets but rather let supply and demand determine how many pesos trade for a dollar. Part of Friedman’s argument is that when governments do try to “fix” the value of their currency—usually propping it above the market-clearing level—it leads to a glut of the domestic (overvalued) currency and shortages of (undervalued) foreign exchange. So if economists are opposed to price-fixing when it comes to the minimum wage and rent control, shouldn’t they also oppose it in the currency markets?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Although Friedman himself obviously understood the nuances, this type of reasoning might mislead the average reader. Under a gold standard, governments don’t use coercion to “fix” exchange rates between different currencies. So the policy here is nothing at all like governments setting minimum wages or maximum apartment rents, where the “fixing” is accomplished through fines and/or prison time levied on individuals who transact outside of the officially approved range of prices.

    Instead, under a gold standard, each government makes the standing offer to the world to redeem its own paper currency in a specified weight of gold. This offer is completely voluntary. No one in the community has to exchange currency notes for gold; people merely have the option of doing so.

    However, given that two different governments pledge to redeem their respective currencies in definite weights of gold, it is a simple calculation to determine the “fixed” exchange rate between those two currencies. For example, in the year 1913—near the end of the era of the classical gold standard—the British government stood ready to redeem its currency at the rate of £4.25 per ounce of gold, while the US government would redeem its currency at the rate of (approximately) $20.67 per ounce of gold. These respective policies implied—using simple arithmetic—that the exchange rate between the currencies was “fixed” at about $4.86 per British pound. Yet this ratio wasn’t maintained by coercion, and the actual market exchange rate of dollars for pounds did in fact deviate from the anchor point of $4.86. It’s just that if the market exchange rate moved too far in either direction, it would eventually become profitable for currency speculators to ship gold from one country to the other, in a series of trades that would push the market exchange rate back toward the “fixed” anchor point.

    To see how this works, suppose that the US government (back in 1913) began printing new dollars very rapidly. Other things equal, this would reduce the value of the dollar against the British pound. Suppose that when all of the new dollars flooded into the economy, rather than the usual $4.86 to “buy” a British pound,  the price had been bid up to $10.

    At this price, there would be an enormous arbitrage opportunity: specifically, a speculator could start out with $2,067 and present it to the US government, which would be obligated to hand over 100 ounces of gold. Then the speculator could ship the 100 ounces of gold across the ocean to London, where the gold could be exchanged with the British authorities for £425. Finally, the speculator could take his £425 to the foreign exchange market, where he could trade them for $4,250 (because in this example we supposed that the dollar price of a British pound had been bid up to $10 in the forex market). Thus, in this simple tale, our speculator started out with $2,067 and transformed it into $4,250, less the fees involved in shipping.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Besides reaping a large profit, the speculator’s actions in our tale would also have the following effects: (a) they would drain gold out of US government vaults, providing the American authorities with a motivation to stop with their reckless dollar printing, (b) they would add gold reserves to British government vaults, providing the British authorities with the ability to safely print more British pounds, and (c) they would tend to push the dollar price of British pounds down, moving it from $10 back toward the anchor price of $4.86.

    To be sure, I’ve exaggerated the numbers in this simple example to keep the arithmetic easier. In reality, as the dollar weakened against the British pound, it would hit the “gold export point” well before reaching $10. Through the arbitrage process we explained above, whenever the actual market exchange rate strayed too far above the $4.86 anchor, automatic forces would set in causing gold to flow out of US vaults and push the market exchange rate back toward the “fixed” rate. (This process would happen in reverse if the exchange rate fell too far below the $4.86 anchor and crossed the “gold import point”: gold would flow out of the United Kingdom and into American vaults, and set in motion processes that would push the exchange rate back up toward the anchor point.)

    We have spent considerable time on this mechanism to be sure the reader understands exactly what it means to say there were “fixed exchange rates” under the classical gold standard. To repeat, these were not based on government coercion, and did not constitute “price-fixing” by the government. No shortages of foreign exchange occur under a genuine gold standard, because exchange rates are always freely floating, market-clearing rates.

    It is difficult for us, growing up in a world of fiat money, to appreciate the fact, but historically people viewed gold (and silver) as the actual money, with sovereign currencies being defined as weights of the precious metals. As Rothbard explains:

    We might say that the “exchange rates” between the various countries [under the classical gold standard] were thereby fixed. But these were not so much exchange rates as they were various units of weight of gold, fixed ineluctably as soon as the respective definitions of weight were established. To say that the governments “arbitrarily fixed” the exchange rates of the various currencies is to say also that governments “arbitrarily” define 1 pound weight as equal to 16 ounces or 1 foot as equal to 12 inches, or “arbitrarily” define the dollar as composed of 10 dimes and 100 cents. Like all weights and measures, such definitions do not have to be imposed by government. They could, at least in theory, have been set by groups of scientists or by custom and commonly accepted by the general public.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In concluding this section, we can agree with Milton Friedman that in a world of governments issuing their respective fiat monies, coercive government ceilings or floors in the foreign exhange market—enforced through fines and/or prison sentences—will lead to the familiar problems characteristic of all price controls. As Rothbard conceded, “the only thing worse than fluctuating exchange rates is fixed exchange rates based on fiat money and international coordination.”

    However, the advocates of a genuine international gold standard stress that its underlying regime of (implied) fixed exchange rates would be even better, because it would effectively allow individuals around the world to benefit from the use of a common money. That is to say, for all the reasons that domestic commerce within the United States is fostered through the common use of dollars, commerce and especially long-term investment between countries will be enhanced when no one has to worry about fluctuating exchange rates on top of the other variables.

    Colonial Era through 1872: Gold and Silver “Bimetallism”

    Because the original thirteen American colonies were part of the British Empire, their official money was naturally that of Great Britain—pounds, shillings, and pence—which at the time was officially on a silver standard. (Indeed, the very term “pound sterling” harkens back to a weight of silver.) Yet the colonists imported and used coins from around the world, while those in rural areas even used tobacco and other commodities as money.6

    During the Revolutionary War, the Continental Congress issued unbacked paper money called Continental currency. The predictable price inflation gave rise to the expression “not worth a Continental.” (We will cover this episode in greater detail in chapter 9.)

    Among the foreign coins circulating among the American colonists, the most popular was the Spanish silver dollar. This made the term “dollar” common in the colonies, explaining why the Continental currency was denominated in “dollars” and why the US federal government—newly established under the US Constitution—would choose “dollar” as the country’s official unit of currency.7

    It is crucial for today’s readers to understand that from the inception of the modern (i.e., post-Constitution) United States in the late 1780s through the eve of the Civil War in 1861, the federal government issued currency only in the form of gold and silver coins. (The one borderline exception were the limited issues of Treasury Notes first used in the War of 1812, which were short-term debt instruments that earned interest and did not enjoy legal tender status, but of which the small denominations of the 1815 issues did serve as a form of paper quasi money among some Americans.8)

    In this early period, banks were allowed to issue their own paper notes that were redeemable in hard money and, to the extent that they were trusted, might circulate in the community along with full-bodied coins, but these banknotes were not the same thing, economically or legally, as gold or silver dollars. In summary, for the first seventy-odd years after the modern federal government’s creation, official US dollars consisted in actual gold and silver coins that regular people carried in their pockets and spent at the store. Indeed, so bad was the constitutional framers’ experience with the Continental currency, that they included in the Contract Clause the prohibition that “No State shall…make any Thing but gold and silver Coin a Tender in Payment of Debts.”

    In the Coinage Act of 1792, the US dollar was defined as either 371.25 grains of pure silver or 24.75 grains of pure gold, which officially established a gold-silver ratio of exactly 15 to 1. Part of the rationale for this policy of “bimetallism”—in which new coins (of various denominations of dollars) could be minted from either of the precious metals—was that silver coins were convenient for small denominations (including fractions such as a half dollar, quarter dollar, dime, etc.), while gold coins were preferable for larger denominations (such as $10 and $20 pieces). By providing “dollars” consisting of both small-value silver coins and high-value gold coins, the idea was that bimetallism would allow Americans to conduct all of their transactions in full-bodied coins (without resort to paper notes or token coinage).

    However, the problem with bimetallism is the phenomenon known as Gresham’s law, summarized in the aphorism “Bad money drives out good.” Specifically, when a government defines a currency in terms of both silver and gold, unless the implied value ratio of the two metals is close to the actual market exchange rate, one of the metals will necessarily be overvalued, while the other is undervalued. People then only spend the overvalued metal, while hoarding (or melting, or sending abroad) the undervalued metal.

    In the case of the United States, when it established the 15-to-1 ratio in 1792, this was actually close to the actual market exchange rate between gold and silver. However, increased silver production led to a gradual erosion of the world price of silver, moving the actual market ratio closer to 15½ to 1. (This familiar ratio was partly held in place by France’s own bimetallic policy following the French Revolution, maintained by the French government’s large reserves of both metals.9)

    As the world price of silver slipped relative to gold, the gap between market values and the US dollar’s definition eventually became so large that only silver was presented to the Mint for new coinage, while existing gold coins disappeared from commerce. As Rothbard reports: “From 1810 until 1834, only silver coin…circulated in the United States.”10 For a modern example of Gresham’s law in action, the reader can reflect that one would be a fool today to spend a pre-1964 quarter in commerce, since its silver content is worth far more than twenty-five cents.

    The Coinage Acts of 1834 and 1837 revised the (implied11) content of the gold dollar down to 23.22 grains of pure gold, while leaving the silver dollar at 371.25 grains. Because there are 480 grains in a troy ounce, these definitions of the metallic content of the dollar implied a gold price of (approximately) $20.67 per ounce, and an unchanged silver price of (approximately) $1.29.

    Thus the revised gold content of the dollar moved the gold/silver ratio to just under 16 to 1. This was now higher than the global price ratio of (roughly) 15½ to 1, meaning that the new definition favored gold and undervalued silver. Consequently, little silver was brought to the US Mint to be turned into new coinage—since the market value of the metal in a “silver dollar” coin was higher than $1—and the US, though still officially committed to a bimetallic standard, after 1834 flipped from a de facto silver standard to a de facto gold standard.

    When the United States fell into Civil War in 1861, both sides resorted to the printing press and suspended specie payment. The North famously issued inconvertible paper notes called “greenbacks,” which led to large-scale price inflation. (We will cover this and other famous episodes of inflation in greater detail in chapter 9.)

    US Participation in the Classical Gold Standard, 1873/1879–1914

    The classical gold standard refers to the period beginning in the late nineteenth century when a growing number of countries tied their currencies to gold. Because the process was gradual, it is difficult to state precisely when the period began: “In 1873 there were some nine countries on the gold standard; in 1890, 22 countries; in 1900, 29 countries; and in 1912, 49 countries.”12

    Recall from the previous section that going into the Civil War, the US dollar was defined in grains of the precious metals that implied a mint price of either $20.67 per troy ounce of gold, or of $1.29 per troy ounce of silver, for a gold-silver ratio of about 16 to 1. Because world prices of gold and silver were closer to 15½ to 1, there was little incentive to bring silver to the US Mint for conversion into coins.

    Consequently, there was little opposition in 1873 when Congress discontinued the “free coinage” of the standard silver dollar (free coinage of fractional dollar silver coins having ended in 1853),13 as there had been little demand for the option. However, later in the decade, when world silver prices dropped—partly as a result of silver discoveries and partly as a result of other countries demonetizing silver, particularly the German Empire—the change of policy would be viewed in a different light. Indeed, pro-silver interests eventually referred to the momentous event as “the Crime of ’73.”14

    The 1873 policy change, along with the growing limitations on the legal tender status of existing silver coins completed by 1874, officially ended the era of bimetallism in the United States:15 silver had been demonetized, rendering America a gold standard country. However, because the US remained in the “greenback” period left over from the Civil War, it actually was on neither metallic standard at the time, as it had suspended specie payment. Consequently, it can be argued that the US was not truly a participant in the classical gold standard until 1879, when the government resumed specie payment in gold (as required in the 1875 Specie Payment Resumption Act).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Artist’s conception of William Jennings Bryan after the Cross of Gold speech at the 1896 Democratic National Convention. McClure’s Magazine, April 1900

    There was much drama in the battle between silver and gold interests, most notably William Jennings Bryan’s famous “Cross of Gold” speech—which called for a return to bimetallism and the free coinage of silver as a method of helping indebted farmers at the expense of the Wall Street elites—delivered at the 1896 Democratic National Convention, where he was nominated for president. Yet Bryan lost the general election to the pro-gold Republican William McKinley, who signed the Gold Standard Act of 1900 into law. This legislation codified the definition of the gold dollar that had been established back in 1837, which (we recall) implied a dollar/gold price of about $20.67 per ounce. This was the dollar’s gold content throughout the classical gold standard period, and would prevail until FDR’s devaluation in 1933/1934, described later in this chapter.

    Although many modern economists scoff at the gold standard, in its “classical” heyday it was a quite remarkable achievement. Economic historian Carl Wiegand writes: “The decades preceding the First World War were characterized by a degree of economic and personal freedom rarely, if ever, experienced in the history of mankind.” He goes on to explain, “An essential part of this system was the gold standard.”

    To give a flavor of this unrivalled degree of freedom before the Great War, consider this description from the famous economist Oskar Morgenstern:

    [T]here was freedom of travel without passports, freedom of migration, and freedom from exchange control and other monetary restrictions. Citizenship was freely granted to immigrants…capital would move unsupervised in any direction….There were hardly any quantitative restrictions on international trade…[I]t was a world of which recently many…would have been inclined to assert that it could not be created because it could never work.

    Alas, among the casualties of the world war would be the classical gold standard and its associated freedoms.

    World War I and Its Aftermath

    If the beginning of the classical gold standard is up for scholarly dispute, everyone agrees that it ended with World War I. Indeed, the Great War was only possible because the major governments abandoned their commitment to gold. As Melchior Palyi explains:

    “This war cannot last longer than a few months” was a widely held conviction at the outset of World War I. All involved would go “bankrupt” shortly and be forced to come to terms, perhaps without a decision, on the battle fields. The belligerents would simply cease to be credit-worthy. Such was the frame of the European mind in 1914; the idea that credit and the printing press might be substituted for genuine savings was “unthinkable.” “Sound money” ruled supreme, supported by the logic of the free market. (bold added)18

    Many commentators use war or other emergencies as examples of the problem with a strict gold standard—it allegedly ties the hands of government to respond in a crisis. However, that is an odd way of framing the matter. After all, printing unbacked fiat money doesn’t actually give the government access to extra tanks, bombers, and artillery; those all come from real resources, the availability of which is not directly affected by the quantity of paper money.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To say that World War I would have been “unaffordable” on the classical gold standard really just means that the citizens of the countries involved wouldn’t have tolerated the huge increases in explicit taxation and/or regular debt issue to pay for the conflict. Instead, to finance such unprecedented expenditures, their governments had to resort to the hidden tax of inflation, where the transfer of purchasing power from their peoples would be cloaked in rising prices that could be blamed on speculators, trade unions, profiteers, and other villains, rather than the government’s profligacy. This is why Ludwig von Mises said that inflationary finance of a war was “essentially antidemocratic.”

    In light of these realities, when joining the war the major belligerents all broke from the gold standard, although the United States’s deviation consisted only in President Wilson embargoing the export of gold bullion and coin in 1917.20 After the war, the major powers made halfhearted attempts to restore some semblance of the international gold standard, but these were counterfeit versions (as we will detail below). The First World War thus dealt a mortal blow to the gold standard from which it never recovered.

    We should take a moment in our discussion to explain the role of central banks, which also saw a major break with the start of the war. Although central banks were not necessary for the administration of the classical gold standard—the Federal Reserve didn’t even exist until late 1913—those countries that had central banks expected them to be independent from narrow political matters. Although the central banks engaged in discretion in influencing interest rates and providing credit with the aim of—in our modern terminology—smoothing out the business cycle, they were ultimately bound by the “rules of the game” of the international gold standard and had to protect their gold reserves.

    Once war broke out, however, not only was the link to gold severed, but the role of the central bank changed as well. The central banks of the belligerent powers all became subservient to the fiscal needs of their respective governments. As American economist Benjamin Anderson described the wartime operations of the British and American central banks (and note that in later chapters we will elaborate on the mechanisms Anderson mentions):

    The [British] Government first borrowed from the Bank of England on Ways and Means Bills, and the Bank bought short term Treasury Bills also. This had the double purpose of giving the Government the cash it immediately needed, and of putting additional deposit balances with the Bank of England into the hands of the Joint Stock Banks….This increased the volume of reserve money for the banking community and made money easy, permitting an expansion of general bank credit which enabled the banks to buy Treasury Bills and Government bonds.…[T]he exigencies of war justified everything…

    Speedily, too, the British financial authorities learned the process of regulating outside money markets in which they wished to borrow…especially, the New York money market. If an issue of bonds of the Allies…was to be placed in our [US] market, it was preceded by the export of a large volume of gold, accurately timed, to increase surplus reserves in the New York banks and to facilitate an expansion of credit in the United States which would make it easy for us to absorb the foreign loan. (bold added)

    After the wartime experience, the “traditional gold standard had ceased to be ‘sacrosanct,’” in the words of Palyi. “Events proved, supposedly, that mankind could prosper without it.” After all, if the gold standard could be violated and central banks could use their discretionary powers to help with the war effort, why not do the same for other important social goals, like promoting economic growth and reducing inequality?

    Because of the severe wartime price inflation, after the 1918 armistice the major powers desired a return to gold. However, resuming specie payment at the prewar parities would have proven very painful, since their currencies had been inflated so much during the war. The United States, for its part, ended the embargo on gold export in 1919, but in order to staunch the resulting outflow of gold and maintain the prewar dollar-gold ratio, the Federal Reserve was forced to raise interest rates and massively contract credit, resulting in the Depression of 1920–21.

    At the 1922 Genoa Conference, a plan was hatched for a “gold exchange standard,” in which central banks around the world could hold financial claims on the Bank of England and Federal Reserve as their reserves, rather than physical gold. However, so long as the Bank of England and the Fed themselves stood ready to redeem sterling and dollar assets in gold, there was still some discipline imposed on the system.

    Yet even here, the redemption policy was only effective for large amounts and hence only relevant for large institutions, as opposed to the universal policy under the classical gold standard. As Selgin explains:

    A genuine gold standard must…provide for some actual gold coins if pa­per currency is to be readily converted into metal even by persons possessing relatively small quantities of the former. A genuine gold standard is therefore distinct from a gold “bullion” standard of the sort that several nations, including the United States, adopted between the World Wars. The Bank of England, for example, was then obliged to convert its notes into 400 fine ounce gold bars only, making the minimum conversion amount, in ca. 1929 units, £1,699, or $8,269. (bold added)

    The interwar gold exchange standard sought to “economize” on gold holdings: rather than storing physical gold in central bank vaults around the world, only the United States and Great Britain needed to redeem their currencies in the yellow metal, while the rest of the world could stockpile paper claims against the financial titans. Yet this system was very fragile, relying on cooperation among the central banks so as not to threaten the smaller gold reserves that were doing much more “work” than they had under the classical standard.

    As an example of the necessary coordination, when then chancellor of the Exchequer Winston Churchill in 1925 sought to resume specie payments at the prewar parity and restore the pound to its traditional value of $4.86, in order to avoid a massive deflation in British prices, the Federal Reserve (under the leadership of Benjamin Strong) agreed to an easy-credit policy, thus weakening the dollar in order to close some of the gap between the currencies. Economists of the Austrian school argue that the Fed’s loose policies of the 1920s helped fuel an unsustainable boom that led to the 1929 stock market crash.

    The Great Depression and Bretton Woods

    In the depths of the Great Depression, the newly inaugurated president Franklin D. Roosevelt euphemistically declared a “national bank holiday” on March 6, 1933, in response to a run on the gold reserves of the New York Fed. During the week-long closure, FDR ordered the banks to exchange their gold holdings for Federal Reserve notes, to cease fulfilling transactions in gold, and to provide lists of their customers who had withdrawn gold (or “gold certificates,” which were legal claims to gold for the bearer) since February of that year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    FDR would issue an even more draconian executive order on April 5, 1933, which required all citizens to turn in virtually all holdings of gold coin, bullion, and certificates in exchange for Federal Reserve notes, under penalty of a $10,000 fine and up to ten years in prison. Although US citizens couldn’t buy gold, foreigners still traded in the world market, and there the US dollar now fluctuated against the metal, the $20.67 anchor having been severed. The Roosevelt administration in 1934 officially devalued the currency some 41 percent by locking in a new definition of the dollar that implied a gold price of $35 per troy ounce. However, this redemption privilege was only offered to foreign central banks; American citizens were still barred from holding gold, and even from writing contracts using the international price of gold as a benchmark.

    As the Allied victory in World War II became more certain, the Western powers hammered out the postwar monetary arrangements in the famous Bretton Woods Conference, a nineteen-day affair held at a New Hampshire hotel which led to the creation of the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and World Bank. Following the war, the global financial system would rest on a refined gold exchange standard in which the US dollar—rather than physical gold—displaced sterling and became the sole reserve asset held by central banks around the world.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Under the Bretton Woods system, other countries could still hold gold reserves, but they typically defined their currencies with respect to the US dollar and dealt with trade imbalances by accumulating dollar assets, rather than draining gold from countries with overvalued currencies. In theory the Federal Reserve kept the whole system tied to gold by pledging to redeem for central banks dollars for gold at the new $35/ounce rate, but in practice even central banks were discouraged from invoking this option. Furthermore, governments only gradually lifted restrictions on international transactions following the war, so that the Bretton Woods gold exchange framework—tepid as it was—was really only fully operational by the late 1950s.

    The Nixon Shock and Fiat Money

    The US government relied on Federal Reserve monetary inflation to help finance the Vietnam War and the so-called War on Poverty. For a while other central banks were content to let their dollar reserves pile up, but French authorities eventually blinked in 1967, when they began to request the transfer of gold from New York and London to Paris. By 1968 the Americans had capitulated and let the unofficial market price of the dollar deviate from the official Bretton Woods value, relying on diplomatic pressure to dissuade other governments from exploiting the discrepancy and “running” on the Fed’s increasingly inadequate gold reserves.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Eventually the weight became too much to bear, and President Richard Nixon formally suspended the dollar’s convertibility on August 15, 1971. Along with other interventions in the economy (such as wage and price controls), this official closing of the gold window has been dubbed the “Nixon shock.”

    Although Nixon assured the public that the gold suspension would be temporary, and that his policy would stabilize the dollar, neither promise would be fulfilled. From this point forward, the US—and hence the rest of the world—would operate on a purely fiat monetary system.

  • DNC Night 2: Did Bill Clinton And AOC Salvage Night 1 Ratings Disaster?
    DNC Night 2: Did Bill Clinton And AOC Salvage Night 1 Ratings Disaster?

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 20:45

    Scroll down to watch live

    After Monday night’s kickoff of the Democratic National Convention was an abysmal ratings failure (and who doesn’t like a good three-hour, pretaped infomercial), Democrats are looking to kick it up a notch on Tuesday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Fresh out of the pages of today’s Daily Mail because of an ‘innocent’ 2002 neck-rub by an Epstein accuser is former President Bill Clinton, who was probably looking forward to four years without Hillary in the house back in 2016. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Also featured in tonight’s prerecorded parade of progressives will be squadmember Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez (D-NY), the plucky environmentalist who recently suggested a national tree-killing pen-pal campaign to support the US Postal Service.

    Apparently they’re slipping Colin Powell’s spiel in before Clinton.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Lastly, Cindy McCain will describe her late husband’s close friendship with Joe Biden, and is expected to offer her endorsement for the former VP.

    Not entirely surprising, all things considered

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Here’s the full roster for Tuesday night:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Watch Live:

    Hopefully their closer is just as interesting so we have something to talk about tomorrow…

  • Only 7 States Have Signed Up For $300 Unemployment Stimulus As Businesses Warn They Won't Participate In Payroll Tax Plan
    Only 7 States Have Signed Up For $300 Unemployment Stimulus As Businesses Warn They Won’t Participate In Payroll Tax Plan

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 20:25

    With Congress still deadlocked over Phase 4 of the fiscal stimulus – despite a report that Nancy Pelosi was getting closer to the Republican bid of $1 trillion as she was willing to cut the Democrat ask “in half” to reach a deal – according to an update from FEMA, only 7 states, Colorado, Missouri, Utah, Arizona, Iowa, Louisiana and New Mexico, have signed up with FEMA so far to access the additional $300 weekly stimulus for those receiving unemployment benefits under Trump’s Aug 8 Executive Order. Using initial claims data, this accounts for only 6% of Americans receiving unemployment insurance, which means that more than 90% are currently ineligible for the emergency stimulus.

    And while more states are expected to continue to sign up, the process will be lagged which will result in delayed payments.

    What is interesting, as Citi economists have speculated, is whether states that did not apply to FEMA will end up seeing their unemployment rates fall faster, in other words, will it turn out to be the case that unemployment rate is higher than it would be without the stimulus because some individuals are making more not working?

    That said, it is concerning that the single biggest boost to the US consumer which buoyed the economy for much of the past three months – federal stimulus for the unemployed…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … is being delayed both through FEMA but also through Congress not moving on Phase 4.

    Meanwhile, in another major setback for Trump’s attempt to single-handedly carry the economy through to the Nov 3 finish line without Congress, a coalition of big-name business groups warned that many employers won’t participate in President Trump’s payroll tax deferral plan.

    Calling it “unworkable,” they said in a letter Tuesday to Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin that it risks saddling their workers with large postponed tax bills they could have trouble paying back. According to the coalition, someone earning $35,000 would see their biweekly pay go up by $83 this year, the groups wrote, but would owe $751 next year. People earning $75,000 would see a $178-per-paycheck bump now, but would face a $1,609 tax bill next year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The coalition did has a proposal how to “fix” this: fully suspend the payroll tax so it is not due at some point in the future, to wit: “If this were a suspension of the payroll tax so that employees were not forced to pay it back later, implementation would be less challenging.”

    However since this is unlikely, the U.S. Chamber of Commerce, National Retail Federation, National Association of Realtors, and the National Association of Manufacturers, among others, all urged policymakers to instead to return to negotiating over a stalled coronavirus relief package in Congress.

    “Many of our members consider it unfair to employees to make a decision that would force a big tax bill on them next year,” they said. “It would also be unworkable to implement a system where employees make this decision.”

    “Therefore, many of our members will likely decline to implement deferral.”

    The letter came as the department races to fill in the details of Trump’s presidential memorandum, issued 10 days ago. As Politico notes, “frustrated with gridlock in Congress, and hoping to boost the economy before the November elections, the president postponed until next year the deadline for paying the workers’ half of the 12.4 percent Social Security tax. Trump doesn’t have the power to eliminate the levy — only Congress can do that — but he’s betting lawmakers will eventually step in and waive the tax bill.”

    However, many businesses are apprehensive about the plan, in part because it comes with some financial risk to them. They could potentially be on the hook for paying back deferred taxes for workers who later quit, for example. It would also likely be difficult to administer.

    “We hope Congress and the administration come together on a path that supports workers instead of burdening hardworking Americans with a large tax bill next year,” the business groups wrote.

    In other words, despite Trump’s victory lap over the reduced unemployment benefits and the payroll tax order, it now appears that neither of these approaches to stimulate the economy will have a tangible impact, leaving the ball once again squarely in Congress’ court, where Democrats will be happy to do nothing until Nov 3 if that means an economic trapdoor opens in the coming weeks, sparking a fresh wave of mass layoffs, and makes Trump’s re-election impossible.

  • TX Governor Proposal Would Financially Punish Cities That Defund Police
    TX Governor Proposal Would Financially Punish Cities That Defund Police

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 20:05

    Before ‘woke’ city councils in Texas vote to defund their local police amid a far-left movement to eliminate law enforcement, local officials may want to wait and see if a new proposal by Governor. Greg Abbott (R) to cap property taxes grows legs.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Under new legislation introduced by Abbott, municipalities which defund police departments will be unable to raise revenues by raising property taxes, according to CBS Dallas.

    “To maintain the safety that our communities deserve today we are announcing a legislative proposal that will discourage defunding law enforcement in Texas,” said the governor during an afternoon press conference. “Any city that defunds police departments will have its property tax revenue frozen at the current level. They will ever be able to increase property tax revenue again if they defund police.”

    Cities that endanger residents by reducing law enforcement should not then be able to turn around and go back and get more property tax dollars from those same residents whose lives the city just endangered,” added Abbott.

    The City of Austin voted to move some $21 million to fund local social services and community resources — including response to the coronavirus, mental health aid programs, violence prevention, victim services and food, housing and abortion access. Another $80 million is set to be redistributed to similar city services, and $49 million will be spent on the Austin Reimagine Safety Fund, which aims to provide alternative forms of public safety and community support besides policing.

    During the Fort Worth press conference Lt. Gov. Dan Patrick said, “When I think about what Austin has done… had any other mayor of any other city in Texas been as irresponsible as they have been they would have chaos and their citizens would be in danger. It is only because of our DPS force of state troopers, hundreds that came to the aid and recuse of APD, that Austin didn’t turn into a potential Seattle or Portland.” –CBS Dallas

    Unbelievable.

  • Students Claim 'Merit'-Criteria "Possess Inherent Bias"
    Students Claim ‘Merit’-Criteria “Possess Inherent Bias”

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 19:45

    Authored by Lacey Kestecher via Campus Reform,

    Students and recent graduates from colleges across the country collaborated to create a guide with “responses to 10 common criticisms of anti-racism action in STEM.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    STEM is an acronym used to refer to the fields of Science, Technology, Engineering, and Math.

    “While observing and participating in recent discussions about the racism that pervades institutions, departments, and scientific discourse, we (the coauthors) have noticed a set of standard arguments against anti-racism action within STEM,” the authors, none of whom identify as Black, stated.

    “Our goal is for this document to facilitate more productive conversations (and in turn, tangible systemic changes) toward addressing racial discrimination in STEM.”

    The essay refuted several statements, including “I only hire/award/cite based on merit; I do not need to consider race.”

    “Arguments that support the objective consideration of merit without the overarching context of external factors are often weaponized against diversity efforts,” they stated, citing “factors outside of one’s control, including race, ethnicity, class, and gender,” all of which they said, “add an extra barrier to their success.”

    When people say that they hire based on merit rather than race, the essay claimed that these employers are “upholding a nonexistent meritocracy” and “are perpetuating the discriminatory status quo by failing to acknowledge the systemic inequities facing BIPOC.”

    The authors stated that “the racial wealth gap prevents a truly meritocratic system in STEM from existing by placing disproportionate barriers on BIPOC.”

    The authors went on to say that “more broadly, the criteria that define ‘merit’ possess inherent bias.”

    They challenged the statement that “there is no evidence of racism in STEM,” claiming that in the STEM field “racial bias often manifests as microaggressions.” The authors stated that because “black scholars are underrepresented in nearly every field of STEM,” this is indicative of systemic racism. 

    They further claimed that “compliance perpetuates the system,” and that people need to become “actively anti-racist” because it is not enough to be “not racist.” By making references to Ibram X. Kendi’s How to Be an Antiracist, the authors claimed that diversity initiatives “in STEM are not a barrier to white scientists; rather, these programs are designed to partially remove a systemic barrier that has been placed on scientists.”

    They claimed that systemic racism is further perpetuated through education. 

    “Continued disparities in income mean that education cannot act as a remedy for the wage gap experienced by Black Americans,” they wrote, adding that people of color are unable to “escape pervasive discrimination by holding advanced degrees.”

    The authors wrote that those who say “I don’t agree with racist statements, but people should be allowed to express their opinions and have debates” come from a place of “privilege.” They claimed that free speech should not be absolute because white people can “debate racism as a detached scholarly exercise because they are not directly harmed by racism.”

    Comparing the existence and effects of racism to the negative implications of smoking, they argued that “there are dozens of studies that confirm the existence and severity of racism in STEM.” Therefore, they concluded, “people who deny the existence of racism are not entitled to equal time and consideration for an opinion that directly contradicts facts.”

    While the authors focused on confronting the “prevalent” anti-blackness in the STEM field, they claimed that it does not “overshadow nor compete with efforts to combat sexism, ableism, or discrimination against other underrepresented minorities.”

    Stating that “inequity” “limits scientific innovation,” the authors acknowledged their “moral responsibility to leverage our position of privilege and become actively anti-racist.”

    “We must hold ourselves, our colleagues, and our institutions accountable for promoting racial equity in concrete ways.

    The guide concluded with a list of actions the authors believe should be taken to rid the STEM field of racism. 

    Among the actions were to “hire more faculty of color” and “allocate funding at the institutional level toward diversity initiatives.”

  • "None Of It Was True" – YouTube Stars Who "Re-Homed" Adopted Son Say China Lied About Child's Health
    “None Of It Was True” – YouTube Stars Who “Re-Homed” Adopted Son Say China Lied About Child’s Health

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 19:25

    When we wrote about a couple of Instagram and YouTube “Family Influencers” who “re-homed” their adopted Chinese son after his severe autism and emotional disabilities proved too much for them to handle, we joked that the scandal appeared to be fodder for a great magazine story. Sure enough, NY Mag, the same salacious rag that brought us “Hustlers”, has proven up to the task. And they didn’t disappoint.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For those unfamiliar with the details, here’s a quick refresher. Back in June, we reported that brands were cutting ties with a popular Mommy YouTuber after she and her husband admitted they had “re-homed” their adopted son, Huxley, a 4-year-old Chinese-born baby suffering from a sensory disability and severe autism.

    ‘Adoption experts’ – many of whom are quoted in the NYMag story – were aghast, not because “re-homings” are an intrinsically disturbing concept, apparently, this is not all that ucommon, according to a stat quoted in the NY Mag article – but because such a public example of the process had been allowed to reienforce “harmful stereotypes” about wealthy white people adopting Chinese children from the two government-supported programs for special needs adoptions.

    Sharing information about a child’s adoption before he or she is in the home is frowned upon by adoption experts. “We don’t advise it. In fact, we ask them specifically not to do it,” says Susan Soonkeum Cox, vice-president of policy and external affairs for Holt International, the agency that has since merged with the World Association for Children and Parents, which the Stauffers said they used to adopt Huxley. Not only can publicizing an adoption jeopardize it, but it’s often seen as playing into the stereotype of white families swooping in to “save” foreign children. It “perpetuates the idea of lesser,” says Cox, who was adopted from Korea. That notion hasn’t stopped other influencers from documenting their process.

    But as the story attempts to tell the couple’s story, recounting how they came to the realization that their adopted child would require much more care than they realized.

    When confronted by the NYMag reporter, the husband in the pair of mommy-daddy influencers, claimed that the couple had been duped by the Chinese adoption agents, who blatantly lied to them about the child’s condition, including leaving out warnings about serious conditions like the child’s low IQ and other developmental issues that might constitute a rare disorder, according to the report.

    “You guys knew when we adopted Huxley from China, they told us that he had a brain tumor, and they said that his IQ was completely up to par – no delays and no issues. So when we get all of this news he doesn’t have a brain tumor, which is fantastic, but he does have several issues – ADHD, level-three autism, may live with you for the rest of your life, may never be potty trained. When we heard all of these things, it just hurt. It just hurt,” she said, adding that she’d trusted in God, and he had given her “a bit more than I knew what to do with.” (In China, toddlers are not routinely screened for autism the way they are in the US, says Martin. Even here, the average age of diagnosis is about 3 years and one month – older than Huxley was when he was adopted).

    James told viewers there were a lot of challenges they didn’t share on the vlog and that, in China, they’d been told Huxley knew the alphabet and said multiple words already in his native language. “None of that was true,” James said. (Holt International says it’s prohibited from speaking about the specifics of any adoption.) He added they’d “struggled to vlog” because of their son’s behaviors.

    During the fallout from Huxley’s “re-homing”, the couple were the subject of a complaint to the Sheriff’s department in their town in Ohio, which turned up nothing, mostly.

    The sheriff’s-office report later revealed the extent of the Stauffers’ struggles. It detailed how the couple had hired a full-time caregiver for Huxley — which was “very expensive” — to prevent what authorities say one of the Stauffers described as the child’s “severe aggression” toward their other children. They said they’d tried to get him additional support, including seven months of applied-behavior-analysis therapy, but that the behaviors — throwing toys, removing registers from the floors, and attempting to hit the other children with them — continued to escalate. Several people who had agreed to watch Huxley quit, one of the Stauffers told the investigator, and Huxley’s outbursts were traumatizing for the other kids.

    Before making the final decision on whether to “re-home” their adopted son, the couple took a vacation to Bali with only their infant son.

    By January of this year, Myka and James decided they needed a break and took a trip to Bali with just their infant son, which they documented on Instagram. In the pictures, they are the image influencers tend to strive for: well traveled, happy, #blessed. Since adopting Huxley, Myka and James’s online success had grown substantially. Total earnings are difficult to estimate, but the Stauffers earned from $4,100 to $66,700 from their three channels in April and May 2020, according to analytics site Social Blade, a number that does not include revenue from sponsorships. Myka had hired a manager to handle all the DMs from companies that wanted to work with her.

    But as the couple struggled on with their young child’s increasingly aggressive and obstinate behavior, which Huxley routinely directed at his siblings, some of the posts got kind of dark.

    Then, Google started squeezing the “Mommyfluencer” business amid revelations that pedophiles were leaving signals to each other in video comments.

    The new channel wasn’t necessarily surprising: Last year, Google began rolling out policy changes affecting family YouTubers, first by disabling comments on content featuring young children — which cut off a crucial line of communication with their audiences — after news outlets reported pedophiles were time-stamping scenes in videos as a virtual Bat-Signal to one another (a child swimming in a bathing suit, for example, or children in the bathtub). In September 2019, the company agreed to pay a $170 million settlement for allegedly violating the Children’s Online Privacy Protection Act — a 1998 law meant to protect children’s personal data online. In a complaint filed by the FTC and the New York State Attorney General’s Office, YouTube was accused of profiting from ads aimed at children under the age of 13 through the use of cookies without their parents’ consent. To comply with the law, YouTube limited the ads on channels and videos specifically aimed at kids. Earlier this year, YouTube deleted 1.4 million videos that violated its child-safety policies. Some family vloggers worried that their content would come under scrutiny next, if not legally, then at least in the eyes of their followers.

    Finally, the couple says one of the many professionals and therapists broached the notion of “re-homing” Huxley.

    Offline that spring, the Stauffers were talking with medical experts and therapists, conversations that would lead them to the possibility of finding a new home for their son. That was never part of the “journey” they had expected to experience, much less share. “There is a part of me that can’t imagine how bad it must have felt to lead to that initial conversation where one of them says to the other one, ‘Maybe it’s not meant to be us,’ ” says Kelly Raudenbush, who adopted her daughter with special needs from China in 2010 and has since co-founded the Sparrow Fund, an organization that supports adoptive and foster parents. “When do you have that conversation where one of you suggests, ‘Maybe we need to say “No more”?’ It’s got to be horrible.”

    It’s an interesting story, all told. But we noticed that at points, the ‘experts’ quoted by the Mag seemed strangely preoccupied with their image, like when one said they discourage influencers from posting about their experiences up to and during the adoption. When press ed why, NY Mag included a specious conclusion, before the expert acknowledged that the optics don’t look great.

    Sharing information about a child’s adoption before he or she is in the home is frowned upon by adoption experts. “We don’t advise it. In fact, we ask them specifically not to do it,” says Susan Soonkeum Cox, vice-president of policy and external affairs for Holt International, the agency that has since merged with the World Association for Children and Parents, which the Stauffers said they used to adopt Huxley. Not only can publicizing an adoption jeopardize it, but it’s often seen as playing into the stereotype of white families swooping in to “save” foreign children. It “perpetuates the idea of lesser,” says Cox, who was adopted from Korea. That notion hasn’t stopped other influencers from documenting their process.

    Kids are being used as props – but they’re worried about looking gauche in front of their peers?

  • They're Angry, Not Stupid! Why Trump Is Likely To Win Again
    They’re Angry, Not Stupid! Why Trump Is Likely To Win Again

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 19:05

    Authored by Thomas Greene via Medium.com,

    The Bronx of my childhood was a paradise. My street ran parallel to a section of the old Croton Aqueduct, by then long disused, which we kids called the Ackey. Along its banks grew trees and bushes and wild flowers forming a ribbon of thicket in which we played, and through which we “hiked.”

    We were always in the street. We learned our games and rhymes by word of mouth, from older to younger. We chose our adventures and settled disputes among ourselves. We played stick ball and ringolevio and skully, red rover and stoop ball, and a deliciously sadistic variety of Johnny on a pony. We raced about on noisy cheap skates with metal wheels.

    In this urban sanctuary I grew up safe, loved, happy, and unmistakably working class, yet somehow I slipped away. I was reared to become an ironworker or electrician, but I managed to pass through a posh New England liberal arts college and end up a tech journalist and author. I’ve worked unsupervised, chiefly from home, since the 1990s.

    Most of my relatives and old neighborhood friends hate people like me. And I don’t blame them. Most are lifelong Democrats, yet they voted for Donald Trump, and will again, and I can’t blame them for that, either. Let me explain.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    My career is the product of an economic revival engineered by the center-right New Democrats of the Clinton era and subsequent administrations. I’ve observed the tech industry for two decades; it’s a job, but it’s hardly work: I’m a nerd; I like science, technology, and medicine. Right now, I couldn’t be more comfortable in lockdown. Amazon supplies my dry goods while a friendly driver brings my groceries. My family and I are safe. No one comes near us without a mask. I control my environment; I choose the people in whose presence I’ll work, if any. I can smoke and drink on the job if I please. So long as I honor my deadlines and file clean copy, no one has anything to say about it. Tech’s been good to me.

    But the guy I was expected to become walks beside me like an imaginary friend I never outgrew. I think about him often — daily, if I’m honest. He commutes by bus, encountering irresponsible louts who refuse to mask up. He worries about it, too. His wife, who had earned a second income, is at home supervising their kids. He lives by the lunch buzzer and the punch clock. If there’s music where he works, it’s amplified by cheap, overdriven speakers and the genre will suit him only by chance. The temperature and ambient noise and lighting were calibrated by industrial psychologists. He can’t evade disagreeable co-workers. He’s paid far less than a family wage, but he’s got no health coverage or pension. He endures daily uncertainty about his family’s needs. Why should he not hate me? I would hate me if I were him.

    New and Improved

    He and millions of others failed to thrive in the tech economy, but that was a feature, not a bug. Blue-collar Americans were never going to adapt, despite the assurances of New Economy cheerleaders, many of whom were in government. Factories closed and data centers opened. Dotcom outfits traded on nothing more than an online presence, which somehow made sense to us. The New Democrats exalted capital both tangible and intellectual, and devalued labor, as if they’d been old-school Establishment Republicans. They fawned over Bill Gates and Eric Schmidt, Steve Jobs and Larry Ellison, Michael Dell and Andy Grove the way one imagines Calvin Coolidge gushing about Rockefellers and Morgans, Vanderbilts and Astors.

    A high-tech meritocracy would lead America in a better direction, and the need was urgent. The Old Economy was failing, undeniably. It was time to re-formulate it with a progressive veneer: no more dirty factories or pollution; NAFTA would ship that mess abroad. America would subsist on green energy, outsourcing, financial services, the sacrament of e-commerce, and high-tech gadgets: a middle-class Valhalla governed by upper-middle-class trustees from the best schools. There would be no need for troublesome relics like labor unions; the virtuous nature of technological progress would itself ensure quality jobs and dignity for workers. Plentiful consumer credit would replace the family wage and health-care benefits. Blue-collar America would suffer collateral damage, but too much was at stake; it would be a necessary sacrifice. And of course we’d be gentle; we were Democrats and nerds, after all.

    Big Tech was hardly the sole disruptor, but the New Democrats fell for, and amplified, Silicon Valley’s specific flavor of empty promises wrapped in technobabble. “Delivering the ____ of the future,” they said. We got e-this and i-that and smart everything else. It had a wholesome ring and implied that Richard Feynman and Carl Sagan were finally in charge. The progressive, sciency veneer gave cover to other mega-rackets with less compelling legends, enabling them to fleece their workers and consumers too. Soon everyone was delivering the ____ of the future.

    The Democratic Party divorced its industrial, unionized base and married its Silicon Valley mistress. It had once believed in collective bargaining. It had once believed that workers were an essential part of a healthy economy and worthy of respect. There was a time when a US president, like Harry Truman, might entertain a labor activist, like Walter Reuther, amiably in the Oval Office. But the Party had fallen hard for its tech darlings and began to dream of a meritocracy based on steadily-increasing knowledge, intelligence, and creativity that would lift us all toward self-realization as we bathed in the restorative glow of our screens. In other words, Democrats put their faith in social vaporware. Old-Economy workers would be “rehabilitated,” language implying that they might be more intellectually challenged than unlucky. “Euthanized” would be a more honest word. The former lower-middle and working classes would listen to two decades of meritocratic cant while their standards of living would fall steadily with no ground floor in sight. They were never a priority.

    Promises, Promises

    The candidate Barack Obama spoke to blue-collar America. He campaigned on change that would rejuvenate careers and restore dignity. Working Americans in the swing states doubted that Hillary Clinton even knew they existed. They saw Obama as a last hope and supported him enthusiastically in the 2008 primaries and later in the general election, but he soon proved to be a disappointment. He, too, fell in love with Silicon Valley and Wall Street and neglected the people who needed him most. And they punished him: he won fewer states in 2012 than he had in 2008. People like the alternate me felt cheated by a guy who rocked a Brooks Brothers suit and talked a great game, then gave the Tech and Finance sectors everything they wanted and more. Educated people from the best schools trusted Big Tech outfits because educated people from the best schools ran them. Elites imagine each other to be virtuous because they imagine themselves that way.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Wise and benevolent, surely; courtesy of Guillaume Paumier

    Technology giants were understood not as hardy sprouts but would be treated instead with princess-and-the-pea levels of delicacy, thanks to a superstitious fear that it might all be brought to grief by, say, forcing companies with hundreds of billions in share value to tolerate an employees’ union, offer a minimum wage adequate for a decent life, or pay tax proportional to their reliance on public goods.

    No one bears greater responsibility for the lack of empathy toward Old-Economy workers that led to Donald Trump’s victory than big-name Tech darlings and the New Democrats who coddled them, then openly ridiculed their own voter base: the people Hillary foolishly nicknamed “Deplorables;” that is, the millions of disappointed Obama voters who would happily have voted blue if they’d had confidence that the party would respect them, welcome them, and acknowledge their needs. But the New Economy is a gated community, shut firmly to them, whose most strenuous boosters have been the Clinton, Bush, and Obama Administrations. Old-school, working-class Democrats are unwelcome in the party they built. No one wants them tracking mud through the salon.

    Donald Trump defeated Hillary Clinton in the swing states the same way Barack Obama had: by characterizing her as disdainful toward blue-collar Americans. It was a potent message among those who once had seen decent wages in return for honest work, lately reduced to Walmart greeters and Uber drivers. Humiliated by a labor market in which they had nothing to trade, the former working class understood that they also had nothing to lose. Liberal democracy and its supporting institutions shed their veneer of sanctity when dead-end employees can aspire only to dead-end management gigs. Call them “associates” and “technicians” all you want; they know who they’ve become and what others think of them. They are why Trump won in the swing states; he was propelled to victory by disillusioned Obama voters. They gleefully chanted “lock her up” not because they thought Hillary was an actual criminal, but because they knew what her election would bring them: four or eight more years of economic and social stagnation to top off the twenty they’d already been through.

    Our Fiasco

    They elected Donald once and they will try to again. He is scornful and vicious. He despises openly. He snarls and barks. He will make a pig’s breakfast of everything he touches, but here’s the thing everyone misses: educated elites will feel the hardship he causes more acutely than the millions of workers who have already adapted to pittance wages, dead-end careers, and chronic disrespect. They’ve endured two decades of it; they can cope. They’re betting that liberal snowflakes like me can’t.

    Trump will not be defeated by educating voters, by exposing his many foibles and inadequacies. Highlighting what’s wrong with him is futile; his supporters didn’t elect him because they mistook him for a competent administrator or a decent man. They’re angry, not stupid. Trump is an agent of disruption — indeed, of revenge. Unfortunately, the coronavirus pandemic has positioned him as a tragic force-multiplier on a scale that few could have predicted, and the result is verging on catastrophic.

    Still, that might not be enough to prevent his re-election. Workers now sense that economic justice – a condition in which labor and capital recognize and value each other – is permanently out of reach; the class war is over and it was an absolute rout: insatiable parasites control everything now, and even drain us gratuitously, as if exacting reparations for the money and effort they spent taming us. The economy itself, and the institutions protecting it, must be attacked, and actually crippled, to get the attention of the smug patricians in charge. Two decades of appealing to justice, proportion, and common decency have yielded nothing. I’d rather not see four more years of Donald, but I understand the impulse to use him as a cat’s paw.

    Joe Biden is only moderately attractive to swing voters. He’s got longstanding ties to the financial and consumer-credit rackets, and many of his senior campaign people are former lobbyists, industry flacks, and banking alums. He’s a New Democrat at heart: too much like Hillary and too little like the Barack Obama we thought we were voting for in 2008. Elizabeth Warren and Bernie Sanders appeal to the Obama 2008 → Trump 2016 electorate, not Biden, and not the domesticated Obama of 2020 who will be campaigning for him.

    I doubt that Obama can draw enough of his old swing voters back to the Democratic Party. They were his constituency once, but he let them go and now his transformation into a New Economy aristocrat is complete. He could even be a liability to Biden, who seems more down to earth than today’s Obama.

    Let Them Eat Quinoa

    The New Democratic Party and the flashy economic colossus controlling it are a seductive pair. We saw this as Obama spoke on 30 July 2020, eulogizing the late US Representative John Lewis. The former president and Colombia University and Harvard Law School graduate promised us that one day, “when we do finish that long journey toward freedom; when we do form a more perfect union — whether it’s years from now, or decades, or even if it takes another two centuries — John Lewis will be a founding father of that fuller, fairer, better America.” Thus did our first black president signal that he might condone two more centuries of racial and social injustice so long as the meritocracy continues to treat him and his family right.

    He and other high-minded elites are thinking fine thoughts and beaming positive energy to ordinary Americans from the metaphorical gated community swaddling the rich, progressive class. No uniformed weasel will dare kneel on any of their necks, we can be certain. There will be no eviction notices, no local food pantries, no paltry unemployment checks for them. These people have no clue what’s going on in the workaday neighborhoods of American cities and in our towns and rural communities, and they’ll be pleased to keep it that way.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Courtesy of the Executive Office of the President

    Why should the victims of the New Economy not despise the system, and the people tending it, so intensely that they would vote Republican again? Why would they not hope that Donald will cause so much damage that America will be forced to make a fresh start? For them, stability equals stagnation while chaos might bring opportunities.

    Elections are decided in the swing states. We know how Massachusetts and Mississippi will vote. The battle will take place in Florida, Georgia, North Carolina, Virgina, Pennsylvania, Ohio, Michigan, Iowa, Wisconsin, and Colorado, and it will be decided by Obama-Trump voters. They haven’t forgotten that, during two decades’ time, Democrats exported their jobs and rewarded them with gigs. The question is, will their resentment overcome their reluctance? They might fear Donald’s destructive potential, but they’ll be inclined to vote for someone who has been wrecking the political and economic system that cut them down from working class to working poor with no hope of escape. Donald has a solid chance of winning.

    For Democrats, the only path forward is behind: the Party must welcome, and actually represent, employees whose lives and labor and services are valued as essential contributions to society. The former working class won’t be satisfied until they see Bill and Hillary, Barack and Joe enact an auto-da-fé through the streets of Washington accompanied by a dreary huddle of bankers, VCs, bond traders, and Tech CEOs in quest of a genuine catharsis in which the pain of their guilt and self loathing swells and burns and finally grows so unbearable that they literally curse themselves and beg to be forgiven.

    If candidates Biden and Harris, and the wider Democratic Party, fail to recognize and renounce the worst elements of the high-tech, financialized New Economy they’re in bondage to, and neglect to reach out to Obama-Trump swing voters with genuine understanding, compassion, and respect — not to mention actual, regulatory solutions — Donald might well be elected again, exactly as he was in 2016: by swing-state Democrats who have had enough.

  • 250,000 Las Vegans Face Eviction Next Month 
    250,000 Las Vegans Face Eviction Next Month 

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 18:45

    Las Vegas is expected to become one of the focal points of the eviction crisis as nearly a quarter-million people could be removed from their homes in the coming weeks, reported AP News

    The Las Vegas Review-Journal reports a perfect storm of factors in Clark County including high unemployment, a high percentage of renters, collapsed travel and tourism industry, expiration of the state’s eviction mortarium, and the end of federal unemployment benefits could result in an eviction wave beginning as early as next month. 

    Las Vegas research group Guinn Center and the COVID-19 Eviction Defense Project in Denver estimates about 250,000 people in Clark County, or approximately 10% of the population, are at risk of eviction in September. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Nancy Brune, Guinn Center executive director, called the situation “a bad confluence of events.” 

    Brune said the virus-induced downturn had severely damaged Las Vegas as fewer people are coming to gamble at casinos. Brune said 47% of households in the county are renters, of the renters, about 38% are currently unemployed. 

    The bust cycle of Las Vegas could linger for a couple of years as the city must shrink to survive. 

    Las Vegas economic analyst Jeremy Aguero recently warned, an economic recovery in the town could take upward of three years. 

    “Our economy is in recession,” Aguero said, warning that the velocity of job loss today was much higher than the economic crash a decade ago.

    We noted, in late April, certain casinos were transformed into food banks, with thousands of residents lined up outside. 

    As for the rest of the country, at least 40 million people are at risk of eviction, according to Aspen Institute think tank. President Trump signed an executive order a week ago to stop evictions, though that doesn’t appear to solve the looming crisis among renters at risk of losing their homes.

  • Notre Dame Moves To Virtual Classes; Texas COVID-19 Cases Bounce Back: Live Updates
    Notre Dame Moves To Virtual Classes; Texas COVID-19 Cases Bounce Back: Live Updates

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 18:25

    Summary:

    • Notre Dame moves classes online
    • Texas sees cases bounce back from yesterday’s low reading
    • Florida reports latest numbers
    • Chancellor rules out further reopening as German cases surge
    • WHO warns against “vaccine nationalism”
    • NYC’s de Blasio says hotels must collect contact info from visitors
    • COVID now No. 3 cause of death in US
    • Germany infections surge highest in 4 months
    • South Korea flareup continues
    • Hong Kong imposes 3rd round of restrictions
    • England & Wales celebrate lowest death numbers in 20 weeks

    * * *

    Update (1620ET): The University of Notre Dame just joined UNC by suspending in-person classes amid growing outcry from students and the community about the dangers of COVID-19. The university has reportedly seen a “steady increase” in tests positivity rates. The shift will last for at least the next 2 weeks.

    said it will suspend in-person classes and shift to remote learning for the next two weeks because of a “steady increase” in virus positivity rates.

    ND said 147 people have tested positive since Aug. 3, many of whom were seniors who lived off campus and spread the virus at gatherings, according to the university’s website.

    The move comes a day after UNC, one of the biggest colleges to attempt in-person learning, said it would shift to online classes because of a spike in cases.

    Meanwhile, in the states, Texas’s new-case count climbed by 7,282 on Tuesday to 550,232, according to state health department data.

    The increase was almost triple the day-earlier addition, though Monday tallies tend to be the smallest of the week because of a falloff in weekend testing.

    There were 216 new fatalities, bringing the cumulative total to 10,250.

    Coronavirus cases in the US increased 0.8% to 5.46 million compared with the same time a day earlier.

    * * *

    Update (1045ET): Florida has just reported its latest batch of COVID-19 cases, with 3,838 new cases reported, along with 219 new deaths and 501 new hospitalizations, bringing the state’s totals to 579,932 cases, 9,893 deaths and 34,695 hospital admissions.

    There are now 146,990 confirmed cases in Miami-Dade County, 67,193 cases in Broward, and 39,460, in Palm Beach.

    State officials tallied the positivity rate at roughly 8%.

    * * *

    Update (1022ET): We saw a few major pandemic-related headlines out of Europe Tuesday morning in the US (afternoon on the Continent). Perhaps the most important: As cases climb in a handful of hotspots across Germany, Chancellor Angela Merkel ruled out any further loosening of virus measures, claiming that a doubling in the number of daily cases in the last three weeks must be contained before Germany can move on with its slow transition back to normality (or whatever becomes ‘reality’ in the post-pandemic world).

    As we noted earlier, Europe’s largest economy recorded the largest tally of new infections in about 4 months on Tuesday, fueling fears about a resurgence across the continent.

    During a press briefing in Geneva, WHO Director General Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus warned that countries must avoid “vaccine nationalism”, a subtle rebuke of Western powers who have cast aspersions of Russia’s vaccine and China’s efforts.

    “As new diagnostics, medicines and vaccines come through the pipeline, it’s critical that countries don’t repeat the same mistakes,” Dr. Tedros. Tedros followed up his plea with a ‘request’ for member states to join the WHO’s Covax facility, which aims to “accelerate vaccine development and to guarantee fair and equitable access,” according to Bloomberg.

    Finland’s Prime Minister Sanna Marin moved to working from home on Tuesday and is getting tested for COVID-19 after experiencing mild respiratory symptoms. The 34-year-old leader told local media that she’d caught the cold from her young daughter who had recently returned to daycare.

    Meanwhile, as cases continue to decline across the country (they’re practically non-existent in NYC), Mayor de Blasio is continuing to ramp up restrictions on travelers visiting the state, and locals returning home, saying Tuesday that he would require hotels to collect contact info from visitors.

    Those who refuse to fork over their address and itinerary should be refused service and turned away.

    Circling back to Europe real quick – Austria is reportedly reevaluating its travel restrictions and border check protocols as new infections continue to rise, driven by  returning summer vacationers from regions including the former Yugoslavia.

    * * *

    After focusing on Europe, Southeast Asia and the Asia-Pacific region over the weekend and into Monday, our focus on Tuesday shifts back to the US, where the number of new infections falls across the Sun Belt, with Arizona, Texas, California and even Florida all seeing single-day tallies of new cases decline.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yesterday, the US reported roughly 40,000 new cases yesterday, the lowest number in weeks, even as deaths continued to climb at an aggressive pace after passing 170,000.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: NYT

    Even as deaths show some signs of declining, the US has arrived at its latest milestone in the pandemic: COVID-19 has become the third-worst cause of death in the US, according to the CDC.

    The pandemic has now surpassed accidents, injuries, lung disease, diabetes, Alzheimer’s and many other causes of deaths – even drug overdoses, which are surging again due to the outbreak.

    Elsewhere, Germany continued to report an elevated number of new cases, while an outbreak in Hong Kong showed signs of tapering off, though that didn’t stop Chief Executive Carrie Lam from imposing a third round of anti-COVID restrictions on Monday.

    In South Korea, a flareup continued to grow, with 246 more cases reported Tuesday, and the country banned large gatherings in and around Seoul.

    In the UK, England and Wales recorded the fewest fatalities in 20 weeks. Deaths in the week ended Aug. 7 fell 21% to 152 vs. the prior week.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While the UK celebrated its milestone of lower deaths, Germany on Tuesday recorded its highest number of new coronavirus infections in nearly four months, the latest in a string of signs that the country’s outbreak is expanding aggressively once again.

    There were 1,693 new infections in the 24 hours through Tuesday morning, the most since April 25, bringing Germany’s total to 226,700.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 18th August 2020

  • Soros Warns Europe: "Beware The Leaders Within"
    Soros Warns Europe: “Beware The Leaders Within”

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 02:45

    In a lengthy transcription of an interview with Italy’s La Repubblica, billionaire hedge fund manager, philanthropist, and – some might argue – puppet master to a new world order, expounded at length on Europe’s demise, financial market bubbles, and – the focus of this note – Europe’s imminent demise unless they follow his grand plan.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He begins on a rather ominous note:

    “We are in a crisis, the worst crisis in my lifetime since the Second World War. I would describe it as a revolutionary moment when the range of possibilities is much greater than in normal times. What is inconceivable in normal times becomes not only possible but actually happens. People are disoriented and scared. They do things that are bad for them and for the world.”

    Then escalates…

    Q) So how do you see the situation in Europe and the United States?

    A)  I think Europe is very vulnerable, much more so than the United States. The United States is one of the longest-lasting democracies in history. But even in the United States, a confidence trickster like Trump can be elected president and undermine democracy from within.

    But in the US you have a great tradition of checks and balances and established rules. And above all you have the Constitution. So I am confident that Trump will turn out to be a transitory phenomenon, hopefully ending in November. But he remains very dangerous, he’s fighting for his life and he will do anything to stay in power, because he has violated the Constitution in many different ways and if he loses the presidency he will be held accountable. 

    But the European Union is much more vulnerable because it is an incomplete union. And it has many enemies, both inside and outside.

    Q) Who are the enemies inside?

    A) There are many leaders and movements that are opposed to the values upon which the European Union was founded. In two countries they have actually captured the government, Viktor Orbán in Hungary and Jaroslaw Kaczyński in Poland. It so happens that Poland and Hungary are the largest recipients of the structural fund distributed by the EU. But actually my biggest concern is Italy. A very popular anti-European leader, Matteo Salvini, was gaining ground until he overestimated his success and broke up the government. That was a fatal mistake. His popularity is now declining. But he has actually been replaced by Giorgia Meloni of Fratelli d’Italia, who is even more of an extremist. The current government coalition is extremely weak.

    They are only held together to avoid an election in which the anti-European forces would win. And this is a country that used to be the most enthusiastic supporter of Europe. Because the people trusted the EU more than their own governments. But now public opinion research shows that the supporters of Europe are shrinking and the support for remaining a member of the eurozone is diminishing. But Italy is one of the biggest member, it is too important for Europe. I cannot imagine a EU without Italy. The big question is whether the EU will be able to provide enough support to Italy.

    Q) The European Union has just approved a €750B recovery fund…

    A)  That’s true. The EU took a very important positive step forward by committing itself to borrow money from the market on a much larger scale than ever before. But then several states, the so-called Frugal Five – the Netherlands, Austria, Sweden and Denmark and Finland – managed to make the actual agreement less effective. The tragedy is that they are basically pro-European, but they are very selfish. And they are very frugal. And, first, they led to a deal which will prove inadequate. The scale back of plans on climate change and defense policy is particularly disappointing. Secondly, they also want to make sure that the money is well spent. That creates problems for the southern states that were the hardest hit by the virus.

    Q) Do you still believe in a European perpetual bond?

    A) I haven’t given up on it, but I don’t think there is enough time for it to be accepted. Let me first explain what makes perpetual bonds so attractive and then explore why it is an impractical idea at the present time. As its name suggests the principal amount of a perpetual bond never has to be repaid; only the annual interest payments are due. Assuming an interest rate of 1%, which is quite generous at a time when Germany can sell thirty year bonds at a negative interest rate, a €1 trillion bond would cost €10 billion per year to service. This gives you an amazingly low cost/benefit ratio of 1:100. Moreover, the €1 trillion would be available immediately at a time when it is urgently needed, while the interest has to be paid over time and the longer out you go the smaller its discounted present value becomes. So what stands in the way of issuing them? The buyers of the bond need to be assured that the European Union will be able to service the interest. That would require that the EU be endowed with sufficient resources (i.e. taxing power) and the member states are very far from authorizing such taxes. The Frugal Four – the Netherlands, Austria, Denmark, Sweden (they are now five because they were joined by  Finland) –  stand in the way. The taxes would not even need to be imposed, it would be sufficient to authorize them. Simply put, this is what makes issuing perpetual bonds impossible.

    Q) Can’t Chancellor Merkel who is determined to make the German presidency a success do something about it?

    A) She is doing her best but she is up against a deeply engrained cultural opposition: the German word Schuld has a double meaning. It means debt and guilt. Those who incur a debt are guilty. This doesn’t recognize that the creditors can also be guilty.  It is a cultural issue that runs very, very deep in Germany. It has caused a conflict between being German and European at the same time. And it explains the recent decision of the German Supreme Court that is in conflict with the European Court of Justice.

    Q) Who are the enemies of Europe on the outside?

    A) They are numerous but they all share a common feature: they are opposed to the idea of an open society. I became an enthusiastic supporter of the EU because I considered it an embodiment of the open society on a European scale. Russia used to be the biggest enemy but recently China has overtaken Russia. Russia dominated China until President Nixon, understood that opening and building up China would weaken Communism not only but also in the Soviet Union. Yes, he was impeached, but he, together with Kissinger were great strategic thinkers. Their moves led to the great reforms of Deng Xiaoping.

    Today things are much different. China is a leader in artificial intelligence. Artificial intelligence produces instruments of control that are helpful for a closed society, and represent a mortal danger for an open society. It tilts the table in favor of closed societies. Today’s China is a much bigger threat to open societies than Russia. And in the US there is a bipartisan consensus that has declared China a strategic rival.

    Time to panic?

  • Belarus In The Firing Line For A Color Revolution
    Belarus In The Firing Line For A Color Revolution

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 02:00

    Authored by Kit Knightly via Off-Guardian.org,

    With his refusal to toe the coronavirus line Alexandr Lukashenko has outlived his usefulness, and is being shuffled of the grand chessboard…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Belarus had their presidential election last Sunday, and the incumbent Alexandr Lukashenko apparently won. This was evidently not supposed to happen, or in some other way counter to the Western world’s grand plan – because now we have a little colour revolution happening.

    You can always tell an Eastern European colour revolution, because Shaun Walker emerges from his burrow, dragging with him 3000 words of total speculation, unsourced anecdotal evidence and some partisan quotes from Western-backed NGOs. You know, like this.

    Another good indication is just how irate Simon Tisdall is, and judging by this column…he’s pretty irate. Granted it’s mostly about Erdogan and Turkey, but he has words for Lukashenko too, and they are not friendly. I wouldn’t be surprised if he broke the keys on his laptop, so furious is his typing.

    If you can’t be bothered to read it, I don’t blame you. To sum up: NATO needs to “do something”, or “take action” or “intervene”. He doesn’t use the word “coup”, because our side don’t do those, but he definitely means coup.

    The Economist is talking about the “right way to get rid of Lukashenko”, while Chatham House is insisting it’s time to “play hardball” in Belarus.

    Europe’s foreign minister, Josep Borrell, has gotten involved too, issuing a statement that Belarus’ elections were “neither free nor fair”, and that “the people of Belarus deserve better”.

    I have no idea if the vote was rigged or not. But I do know that none of the people claiming it was have provided any evidence to back that up, and I’m always suspicious when a fact is asserted without proof. Because you know if they had they would use it.

    It’s also perfectly true that Europe – and the Western world in general – don’t care in the slightest about elections being fair. Witness the total lack of rebuke for the corrupt mess that was the 2014 Ukrainian election.

    As for the police violence against protesters, Lukashenko and Belarus have received more harsh words in the Western press in the last two days, than Macron did during the 18 months of Gilets Jaunes protests, or the Spanish government ever did for their fascist destruction of the Catalan independence movement.

    History is very clear in this precedent: Corruption and/or violence would be no obstacle whatsoever to doing business with the West, were Lukashenko willing to be biddable and serve a NATO-backed Deep State agenda. Lukashenko’s coronavirus policy shows he is not, and so twenty-six years of being gently tolerated are over and it’s time for him to go.

    All the hallmarks of a narrative roll-out are there.

    The sudden widespread and uniform use of terminology (In this case “Europe’s last dictator”), protest placards helpfully being written in English, and the social media-spread accounts of “heroes” overcoming adversity (eg. the woman who can’t live steam the protests so weaves them into a quilt instead. Yes, seriously.)

    Making the marches in Minsk all women holding flowers and wearing white is a nice touch, a new spin. The question is what they’re going to call it. They absolutely can’t call it the “White Revolution”, for fairly obvious reasons.

    Maybe the Flower Revolution? The Petal Revolution?

    Their options are limited, but whatever they end up with can’t be any worse than “the snow revolution”.

  • Visualizing The Military Imbalance In The Taiwan Strait
    Visualizing The Military Imbalance In The Taiwan Strait

    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 08/18/2020 – 01:00

    U.S. Health and Human Services Secretary Alex Azar visited Taiwan for high level meetings last week in a move that angered Beijing. As Statista’s Niall McCarthy notes, Azar’s unprecedented trip prompted China to send J-10 and J-11 fighter jets into the Taiwan Strait where they briefly crossed the sensitive median line which unofficially separates airspace between the mainland and the island.

    China considers Taiwan a rogue province and maintains that reunification is inevitable, reserving its right to use all necessary measures, including military force.

    In recent years, political and military tensions between Beijing and Washington have escalated amid the Trump administration’s ongoing trade war with China as well as its decision to supply Taipei with advanced variants of the F-16 fighter jet, along with other items of modern military hardware. China’s controversial territorial claims in the South China Sea have also contributed to growing feelings of unease across the region and prompted Japan to cast aside its postwar pacifism.

    Even though the possibility of China taking Taiwan by force is low, the military balance in the Taiwan Strait is firmly in China’s favor. The infographic provides an overview of that imbalance and is based on an annual U.S. government report.

    Infographic: The Military Imbalance In The Taiwan Strait | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    China has never ruled out the possibility of invading Taiwan and it has continued acquiring the military capability to do so. In recent years, it has modernized its military, introducing the J-20, an indigenous 5th generation stealth fighter. It has also commissioned two aircraft carriers (although one is used for training and omitted from the infographic above) along with several modern amphibious transport dock/landing vessels.

  • The Scary War Game Over Taiwan That the U.S. Loses Again and Again
    The Scary War Game Over Taiwan That the U.S. Loses Again and Again

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 23:50

    By Richard Bernstein of RealClearInvestigations

    Around a large table with a map and icons representing ships, submarines, planes, missile batteries, land-based forces, space-based sensors, and other apparatuses of modern warfare, officials from the Pentagon and the Rand Corp. fight a thus far unimaginable conflict.

    The Red Team, composed of experts on the Chinese military, aims to use all available forces to capture Taiwan, the island 90 miles off the coast that China regards as a renegade province and that it has repeatedly vowed to retake, by force if necessary. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China’s strategy would be to get an invasion fleet across the Taiwan Strait before the U.S. could come to its tiny ally’s aid. “And once that happens we’d face an Iwo Jima situation,” says a defense analyst, referring to a costly campaign to dislodge occupying Japanese in World War II.

    The Blue Team, made up U.S. military personnel with operational experience — fighter pilots, cyber warriors, space experts, missile defense specialists – must try to defeat the Chinese invasion.

    It doesn’t generally go well for the Blue Team.

    “It’s had its ass handed to it for years,” David A. Ochmanek, a former deputy assistant secretary of defense for force development and now a defense analyst at Rand, told RealClearInvestigations. “For years the Blue Team has been in shock because they didn’t realize how badly off they were in a confrontation with China.”

    War game simulations are not the real world, of course, where an array of economic, diplomatic and cultural considerations inform a country’s military decisions and actions. And few experts on China seem to think that the country will actually go to war over Taiwan anytime soon.

    But as the U.S. seeks a closer alliance with Taiwan – illustrated by the visit of Health and Human Services Secretary Alex Azar there last week, the highest-level official U.S. delegation to the island in 40 years – the possibility of war between the two superpowers may be more than theoretical: A bill now before both houses of Congress, the Taiwan Defense Act, would end the long-held American policy of “strategic ambiguity” – which aims to keep China guessing as to the U.S. response to any attempt to take Taiwan by force – and require the U.S. “to delay, degrade, and ultimately defeat” an attempt by China “to use military force to seize control of Taiwan.”

    The proposed legislation reflects strong bipartisan support for Taiwan in Congress. But it’s hard to predict. whether public opinion, already tired of long American wars in Asia, would support the faraway island, where the U.S. maintains has no U.S. military presence now although it maintains forces in the region. Nonetheless, if passed the measure would be far more than a tough talk statement of belief – it would impose serious legal obligations that would demand action. This adds an urgency to the questions officials are now asking: What would happen if China launched an all-out military effort to seize Taiwan? Does the United States possess the wherewithal to meet the obligations of the Taiwan Defense Act?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    David Ochmanek, ex-Pentagon official and defense analyst: The American side in Taiwan war-game simulations has “had its ass handed to it for years.” 

    These questions are hotly debated among military specialists and within the Pentagon, but at a time of national preoccupations over COVID-19 and the looming presidential election, they have received scant notice in the mainstream press. And yet, given the rise of tensions with China, they are perhaps among the most important facing the country.

    Taiwan became a separate entity from Mainland China in 1949, when the defeated Nationalist forces retreated to the island, 90 miles off China’s southeast coast, and set up a rival government. Over the years, even as every major country has officially recognized Beijing as the rightful government of all of China, Taiwan has become a full-fledged democracy, with public opinion there overwhelmingly opposed to any formula that would reattach the island to the mainland and its authoritarian ways. 

    Despite China’s often warlike rhetoric and its continuous efforts to isolate Taiwan diplomatically – not allowing it, for example, to participate in World Health Organization meetings even during the coronavirus pandemic – most analysts think it does not want to use military force against Taiwan.

    In the short term China seems to be hoping that the Trump administration’s hard line is more a matter of electoral politics than a permanent American position. U.S. intelligence has also concluded that Beijing hopes Trump loses in November to former Vice President Joe Biden (who faces criticism over his son Hunter’s lucrative deals in China.)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Taiwanese amphibious troops in exercises this year to show determination to defend Taiwan from Chinese threats. 
    (AP Photo/Chiang Ying-ying)

    Still, China’s tense relations, not just with the U.S. but many Western nations, are not rooted in electoral politics. There is a more general alarm over aggressive Chinese policies, including the mass detention of Uighurs; its claims in the South China Sea; its crackdown on Hong Kong’s traditional freedoms; its cyberattacks against other governments; and fears that it is using high-tech products it exports to spy on citizens of other countries.  China shows no sign of moderating its policies, especially in areas that it regards as its “core interests,” and no core interest is more important to it than establishing its sovereignty over Taiwan.

    As China faces more criticism, there’s no question that achieving what Beijing calls the “reunification of the motherland” would be a crowning glory for the Chinese Communist Party and its authoritarian leader, Xi Jinping. Senior Chinese officials continually issue warnings that they are ready to use force if other means of achieving reunification fail, and that is the reason for China’s massive military buildup, which, as the Pentagon’s war games show, has created a new and unprecedented challenges for the United States.

    As several military analysts put it, the days of unfettered American military superiority in the Western Pacific are over. China has, the analysts say, achieved what’s called anti-access area denial, or A2/AD, which would prevent American forces from being able to penetrate anywhere near Taiwan once a war there started.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China staging large-scale war games in 2016 featuring mock beach landings, helicopter assaults and tank battles along its east coast facing Taiwan.

    Given this capability, China, with its 2-million-strong military, might directly attack Taiwan, with a standing force of 220,000, hoping that the U.S. would stay out of the conflict. But the U.S. would have powerful reasons for not allowing that to happen. Aside from the destruction of a friendly democracy, a Chinese seizure of Taiwan would enormously expand China’s power and position in Asia, especially if combined with its absorption of the entire South China Sea into its maritime territory.  This would be a major step forward for China, now clearly a strategic revival and an enemy of democracy, in its goal of replacing the U.S. as the dominant power in all of Asia.

    If China felt that the U.S. would intervene, military planners from the Pentagon and Rand who have gamed out scenarios believe a war over Taiwan would most likely begin with a massive attack by advanced Chinese missiles against three American targets: its bases on Okinawa and Guam, its ships in the Western Pacific, including aircraft carrier groups, and its air force squadrons in the region. 

    Military analysts predict the American side would initially counter with Patriot anti-missile missiles. But the sheer number of Chinese missiles would mean that hundreds of them would reach their targets. American submarines operating near Taiwan would be able to sink some Chinese ships, including amphibious landing craft bringing the Chinese invading force to Taiwan. But the number of submarines near enough to the battle zones at the time of the Chinese strike would, analysts say, be around 20 or 25, each armed with about 12 torpedoes and 10 or so Harpoon missiles, not nearly enough to overcome China’s flood-the-zone strategy. Military analysts seem to agree that in the first day or two, there would likely be thousands of American deaths and the loss of billions of dollars’ worth of materiel.

    “We’re playing an away game against China,” Rand’s Ochmanek said. “When bases are subjected to repeated attacks, it makes it exponentially more difficult to project power far away.”

    “The casualties that the Chinese could inflict on us could be staggering,” said Timothy Heath, a senior international defense researcher at Rand and formerly a China analyst at the U.S. Pacific Command headquarters in Hawaii. “Anti-ship cruise missiles could knock out U.S. carriers and warships; surface-to-air missiles could destroy our fighters and bombers.” 

    China would have its own challenges. At the same time as it worked to keep the U.S. out of the battle zone it would have to address the trickier and riskier part of the operation: getting an invasion force, consisting of tens of thousands of troops, across the 90 miles separating Taiwan from the Mainland.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Lyle Goldstein, U.S. Naval War College: “My appraisal is that Taiwan would fold in a week or two.”

    “They are giving off a lot of signals about how this campaign would unfold,” Lyle J. Goldstein, a China and Russia specialist at the Naval War College in Rhode Island, told RCI. “They’re talking a lot about airborne assault in two varieties, by parachute and by helicopters. It’s what’s called vertical envelopment. Amphibious assault is old school. It may be necessary but it’s not the main military effort.  The new school is to bring lead elements over by air, secure the terrain and then bring in more forces over the beach. The intensity and scale of training in the Chinese military now for airborne assault is, to me, shocking.

    “There would be 15, maybe 20 different landings on the island, east, west, north, and south, all at once, some frogmen, some purely airborne troops,” Goldstein continued, saying he was expressing his own views, not official assessments of the U.S. “The Chinese high command would watch these bridgeheads to see which of them is working, while the Taiwan command is looking at this amid decapitation attempts and massive rocket and air assaults. The Chinese would seize several beachheads and airports.  Their engineering prowess would come into play in deploying specialized floating dock apparatuses to ensure a steady flow of supplies and reinforcements—a key element. My appraisal is that Taiwan would fold in a week or two.”

    In short, China’s strategy would be to get an invasion fleet across the Taiwan Strait before the U.S. could come to its ally’s aid. “And once that happens we’d face an Iwo Jima situation,” Ochmanek said, referring to the small Japanese-held island in the Pacific that the U.S took in one of the most casualty-heavy battles of World War II. “Once Taiwan was occupied, the option of retaking it with an amphibious assault of our own would be very unattractive.”

    Goldstein has likened an American commitment to defend Taiwan, of the sort that would be required by the proposed Taiwan Defense Act, to be a kind of Cuban Missile Crisis in reverse, a reference to the 1962 confrontation between the U.S. and the Soviet Union, which ended when the Soviets backed away from its effort to put nuclear missiles on the island just 90 miles from Florida.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Taiwan’s military fired missiles from the air and the island’s shore facing China in a live-fire exercise to demonstrate its ability to defend against any Chinese invasion.

    The overwhelming American advantage on Cuba then mirrors what Goldstein sees as an overwhelming Chinese advantage on Taiwan today – “vast conventional superiority” in a region of the world far closer to it than to the U.S., combined with “the wide recognition that the island’s fate is a ‘core interest’ that united Chinese citizens behind the cause.”

    China also seems aware of the comparison. A typical statement earlier this month in Global Times, the nationalist mouthpiece of the Chinese Communist Party, put it this way: “The Mainland has many cards, including military cards, and it is very important that our will to play those cards at critical moments will be far better than Washington’s.”

    Other experts, however, believe that the situation is not quite as bleak as the war games would indicate, or at least that it can be remedied. They argue: 1) that the American deterrent even now is still strong enough to make China very hesitant to use force on Taiwan, and 2) that the U.S. can and should adapt to China’s capacity with new weapons and new tactics that would enable the country to prevail if it did come to an armed confrontation.

    According to most analysts, the key to defending Taiwan would require stopping China’s ability to transport a large occupying force the 90 miles across the Taiwan Strait. Chinese military publications are full of pictures of what such an assault would look like – hundreds of amphibious tanks landing on Taiwan’s beaches, troops arriving on new landing craft called 075 units (now being built), and thousands of troops parachuting into the country at night. They have also been heralding the use of helicopters flying below Taiwan’s radar to land advance troops.

    Some analysts say that the U.S. could counter that threat by shifting from a reliance on aircraft carriers and long-range bombers to weapons such as stand-off missiles – that is, missiles fired from beyond the range of any Chinese attack, especially a new generation of long-range anti-ship missiles, or LRASMs, that can be fired from ships as far as 600 miles away.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    American long-range anti-ship missiles, LRASMs, can be fired from ships as far as 600 miles away. Turning back invading Chinese in this way “comes down to sinking about 300 Chinese ships in about 48 hours,” Ochmanek said.

    A second component of a Taiwan defense would be space-based reconnaissance using artificial intelligence to locate enemy targets, which the LRASMs would hit; a third would be an American version of flooding the zone, with unmanned undersea drones that could fire torpedoes at Chinese landing craft.

    “All of these things are doable,” Ochmanek said. “There’s no magic here, no technological breakthroughs.” He estimates that the Defense Department could make the needed changes if it diverted about 5 percent of its budget— about $35 billion — a year.  Taiwan, he said, also needs to move away from the glamorous, showy weapons, like F-16 fighter planes, that it buys from the United States. “The F-16s are not going to get off the ground once the war starts,” Ochmanek said. “They need anti-ship cruise missiles, sea mines, mobile artillery, mobile air defenses, unmanned aerial vehicles.

    “It comes down to sinking about 300 Chinese ships in about 48 hours,” he said.

    Analysts believe Taiwan could spend more on defense than it does – currently about $13 billion a year, which is a small fraction of the estimated $225 billion to $260 billion that the mainland spends. But, they say, it already possesses sea mines and coastal missile defenses that could take a heavy toll on a Chinese invading force – assuming they aren’t wiped out in an initial Chinese missile attack. It could shoot down helicopters with Stinger missiles, which the U.S. has agreed to sell Taiwan.

    “What both sides can do is turn the sea and air space around Taiwan into a no-go zone,” Heath said. “China could do that, but we could make it very hard for any surface ship to survive near Taiwan, including Chinese transport vessels loaded with troops. That alone might stop an invasion.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Taiwanese forces could shoot down Chinese helicopters with Stinger missiles, which the U.S. has agreed to provide. AP Photo/Vadim Ghirda

    And if it doesn’t? China would face the risk of a larger war with the United States, which might involve nuclear weapons and an outcome Beijing could not guarantee. “The biggest threat to China is that a regional anti-China coalition forms,” Heath said. “And so if the United States can succeed in building its alliances in Asia, that would be a powerful deterrent, because China can’t afford to go to war with Asia.” 

    Others, like Goldstein, fully agree that China would be reluctant to go to war, but they argue also that if war should happen, it’s unrealistic — indeed, Goldstein says it’s dangerously self-deluding – to think that the combined forces of Taiwan and the U.S. would prevail.  

    “I don’t agree that all we’d have to do is sink 300 ships,” he said. “Chinese war planners would expect to lose a thousand ships. They would put 10,000 boats, ferries, barges and fishing craft into the water, with thousands of decoys, far more than there would be LRASMs or submarines to sink them.”

  • COVID-19 Mutation That's "10 Times More Infectious" Than The Original Discovered In Malaysia
    COVID-19 Mutation That’s “10 Times More Infectious” Than The Original Discovered In Malaysia

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 23:30

    The English-language press is generally no fan of Philippines’ pseudo-‘Strongman’ Rodrigo Duterte (half of the Americans who know who he is probably mistakenly believe him to be an autocrat due to the general tone of the coverage, although he was Democratically elected). Nonetheless, they’ve begrudgingly given him credit for his military-imposed lockdowns, and for reimposing the restrictive measures in and around Manila. Still, none of this has stopped Southeast Asia’s biggest outbreak from  clearly still has a long way to go to bring COVID-19 to heel.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And as South Korea is showing us right now, the virus can be surprisingly difficult to eradicate completely, just one more reason why the world needs to find a more sustainable way to live with COVID-19, rather than resorting to lockdowns as the only tool in the kit.

    But there’s one variable that could upend all of this thinking, and effectively force all vulnerable populations into strict lockdown mode: that would be a mutation that causes it to become even more deadly. As Dr. Fauci once warned, mutations could make the virus more virulent and more infectious, and there’s already some evidence that certain strains of the virus are much deadlier than others.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And as Bloomberg reported on Monday, Southeast Asia – Malaysia specifically – has seen evidence that a certain mutation is more infectious, just like other mutations catalogued in the UK, NY and elsewhere. They call the mutation “D614G”. It’s also the “predominant variation of the virus” seen in Europe and the US – meaning it’s the same “world-conquering” virus we reported on back in June.

    Southeast Asia is facing a strain of the new coronavirus that the Philippines, which faces the region’s largest outbreak, is studying to see whether the mutation makes it more infectious.

    The strain, earlier seen in other parts of the world and called D614G, was found in a Malaysian cluster of 45 cases that started from someone who returned from India and breached his 14-day home quarantine. The Philippines detected the strain among random Covid-19 samples in the largest city of its capital region.

    The mutation “is said to have a higher possibility of transmission or infectiousness, but we still don’t have enough solid evidence to say that that will happen,” Philippines’ Health Undersecretary Maria Rosario Vergeire said in a virtual briefing on Monday.

    And now, we can add ‘Southeast Asia’ to its list of conquered territory.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Though the often intransigent WHO has yet to fully acknowledge the mutation’s potential, it “is said to have a higher possibility of transmission or infectiousness, but we still don’t have enough solid evidence to say that that will happen,” Philippines’ Health Undersecretary Maria Rosario Vergeire told BBG.

    Keputusan terkini baru diterima dari makmal Institut Penyelidikan Perubatan (IMR): seperti disyaki mutasi jenis D614G…

    Posted by Noor Hisham Abdullah on Saturday, August 15, 2020

    Some argue the mutation won’t have an impact on vaccines being developed. But we can’t say any of this with 100% certainty, as much as some scientists would like to dismiss the risks out of hand.

    One HK University professor told BBG that the mutation “might be a little bit more contagious. We haven’t yet got enough evidence to evaluate that, but there’s no evidence that it’s a lot more contagious,” University of Hong Kong’s Cowling said.

    Others have claimed it’s “ten times more infectious” than the original.

    Still, as more evidence suggests that the variation is linked to higher levels of mortality, understanding its potential will be key to bringing the vicious pandemic to heel.

  • Gold… In Case AG Barr's 'Rule Of Law Rescue Plan' Fails
    Gold… In Case AG Barr’s ‘Rule Of Law Rescue Plan’ Fails

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 23:10

    Via DKAnalytics.com,

    AG Barr to the rule of law rescue?

    In a nutshell, don’t hold your breath.  Leading conservative/constitutionalist radio talk show host Mark Levin had a fine interview with Mr. Barr on his “Life, Liberty and Levin” TV show last weekend.  It was a pivotal discussion about how destructive, violent, anarchist, un-American, uncivil, and rogue the left has become in its efforts to fundamentally transform America.  That transformation is away from an erstwhile codified citadel of liberty to an increasingly Marxist nation featuring iron-fisted tyranny (for flavor, consider the Corona virus policy responses, especially in blue states, where prolonged lockdowns have led to serious and widespread behavioral issues).  This effort, of course, is being led by the party of slavery, the party of segregation, the party of re-segregation, the party of the KKK, the party of internment of Japanese Americans, the party opposed to civil rights, and the party that led to unbridled third world amnesty which fueled ever growing voter disenfranchisement, Balkanization, and stagnant US jobs (for Americans).  I’m talking, of course, about the  power-obsessed, “Constitution, Americans, and America-be-damned” Democratic party. 

    So far, so good.  It’s a great thing that Barr and his Department of Justice (DOJ) are at least calling the left out.  But there is a huge fly in the ointment, in my view.  It isn’t just about restoring law and order in America’s crime-infested, burning cities under racist/Marxist BLM and Antifa siege with local, state-level, and national Democratic power holders either approving or enabling rank lawlessness, and RINOs generally too intimidated to speak out against it.  

    It is also about going after the very lawless elected officials and bureaucrats that have made a mockery of the rule of law while the same cast of characters has often set the stage for the anarchy and destruction that law-abiding urban Americans have faced, and are currently facing in unprecedented terms, from coast to coast, especially in Democratically-run cities (the vast majority of them).  This prosecution of rogue of former and current public officials is precisely what isn’t happening.  That is the devastating fly in the ointment.

    I addressed this in an email with a friend of mine who who initially drew Barr’s interview on Mark Levin’s TV show to my attention. 

    Here is what I wrote my friend: 

    Got a chance to listen.  GREAT interview.  Barr nails it, as does obviously Mark.  Allow me a criticism or two; you may well consider it “majoring in minors,” but I think it goes to the heart of any honest system of government, and that starts with telling the truth. 

    Barr mentioned that Trump’s economy until recently saw virtually zero percent unemployment, and that this will recur.  This is disingenuous at best.  Trump himself called the unemployment rate fake as a candidate when it was around 5% (U3, or the most flattering measure).  Furthermore, Trump mentioned, as a candidate, that real world unemployment was likely north (if not well north) of 20%.  Translation: take the U3 measure, turn it into the U6 measure, and then add back all the discouraged workers that have been looking for a job for more than a year and were conveniently taken out of the job seeker category back in the Slick Willy (Clinton) administration, and you a get “real world” US unemployment rate of around 30%.  Today!

    One more point, arguably an even much, much  bigger one concerning honest government – a government run by people that are not above the law.  Here we are, some 3.5 years into the Trump administration.  Barr has (thankfully) been on board since February of 2019, or about 1.5 years.  We have mountains of evidence of treasonous and felonious acts by the heads/the top brass of former Obama and early Trump administration politicians and bureaucrats ranging from Hillary to the former Obama AGs to the top brass of the FBI and the CIA to the judges that recklessly (or worse!) issued warrants to spy on Americans, a clear Bill of Rights violation if there ever was one.  Former FBI head Comey, in the summer of 2016, not only still “toiled” as the top (bad) cop of America, but he also put on a judge’s hat and effectively told America, after reading a litany of indictable charges against Madam Clinton, that Hillary “didn’t really mean any harm,” but if the average American acted in such a manner, then the full force of the law would come down on him Comey even wagged his finger “at us” as he issued his stern warning for us little people.

    Have we seen ANYONE of at least a few handfuls of high level top brass bureaucratic and elected criminals even get indicted by the supposedly lawful, ethical DOJ that supposedly eminently capable, rule-of-law man Barr heads?  Should we wait until Biden assumes the presidency to finally indict these varied disgusting, oath-shredding, Constitution-curdling crooks??  What a freakin’ pathetic banana republic with above the law power brokers running free and making millions in the MSM and by giving speeches!  Yet everyday Americans get fined for not wearing masks, wanting to run their businesses only to find that they’re forced to shut down or that their power and water have been shut off (L.A.).  Yet everyday Americans get treated by the IRS like quasi criminals (or worse) if they fall short in terms of filing or declarations or payments.  And don’t try to defend your home in red state America; just accept the violence and destruction of often organized rioters and then call 911, but no one may answer because your police force is being defunded.

    Now I know a lot of the harassment, intimidation, and Bill of Rights violations are state-based affairs (I’d argue that the 14th Amendment should offer state like Bill of Rights protections), but I’m trying to make a bigger point: Mark Levin and AG Barr and others can talk the big talk, but until our governing elites are no longer above the law (the Constitution), all this is a bunch of talk with precious little “here’s the beef” walk as far as everyday Americans are concerned — and rightly so.  No wonder governmental institutions are often held in such low esteem.

    Are all these mega crooks that have abused their elected or appointed positions of power going to skate?  Are sorely needed indictments going to be pushed aside by all the sickening diversions the left is continuing to cook up for us from Russia Gate to Ukraine Gate to the virus policy scam to Marxists/anarchists tearing the crap out of the fabric of both our cities and society?  And will this BR style “looking askance policy” be thanks to neither Trump or Barr or the man from Connecticut having enough guts to finally go after these above the law creeps?  Or could it be that both sides of the aisle are so steeped in corruption and so eager to sustain their power, prestige, and crony/fascist advantages that this is just all a big, bad, throw us a bone of hope pretend game that we fall for until we realize we’ve been had again?

    I, for one, won’t be holding my breath.  Less talk, just walk, 3.5 years into the Trump admin, on this VITAL, no one is supposed to be above the law front.  And Barr definitely knows the ropes, so why hasn’t he had  the decency and guts to start the process of trying to show the country that DC ain’t above the law while he still has the chance?

    Here is how my friend responded:

    Of course, I agree completely that Barr is not the be all and end all, or even close, for the reasons you mention, and more. The biggest one to me, because it (not the unemployment rate) is squarely in his wheelhouse is the lack of any prosecutions of arguably the biggest political criminals in the country’s history – i.e., starting with Hillary, Comey, Brennan, McCabe and… yes, Obama, the messiah himself.

    That said, he is very refreshingly honest in a relative sense. Could and should he (and countless other bureaucrats, representatives and putative “leaders”) be 500% better? Absolutely. The closest one to that ideal that I can think of is probably Ted Cruz, but I have no doubt that if he were president, on the SCOTUS and/or AG, he’d disappoint as well.

    So I basically agree with your critique but as many have said, politics is the art of the possible. That is the framework within which he exists, and that inevitably skews and corrupts. Right now, he’s light years better than Sessions was, and Universes better than Holder or Lynch were. Am I 100% happy with him? No, not even close. But am I much happier with him than many/ most other currently available alternatives? Absolutely.

    To which I responded:

    Your first paragraph says it all, as far as I am concerned.  Politics is indeed the art of the possible.  Yet for a man of conscience (Barr), a man that self-identifies as a rule of law constitutionalist, a man who has had under his “wheelhouse belt” the “machinery” with which to prosecute “arguably the biggest criminals in the country’s history” for about 1.5 years yet has prosecuted no such person … — this speaks sobering volumes about his true dedication to a system in which no one is above the law, else you can’t have the rule of law. 

    To me, this is sadly less than politics being the art of the possible, and more about rank dereliction of duty, dereliction of the oath he took, and, perhaps most stunningly and destructively of all, sustaining the very “Department of Injustice” that he inherited from the mega crooks Holder and Lynch and the absolutely incompetent, scared crapless Jeff Sessions.

    Sure, Barr is 100x better than hapless Jeff and extremely crooked Holder and Lynch, but what good is that if he doesn’t take a potentially rapidly fleeting opportunity to at least attempt to yank America back from its B.R. status in which way too many elites are above the law crooks and way too many of us law-abiding citizens often get treated as if we were crooks by the an alphabet soup of un-elected, unrepresentative, untouchable federal and state bureaucrats that have long and unconstitutionally issued the vast majority of our de facto legislation, thousands upon thousands of often effectively cloaked regulations (how can anyone keep up with 72,561 Federal Register pages?) frequently featuring stout fines and even incarceration teeth?”

    President Trump, despite some of his beyond the pale assertions, especially as a candidate and early into his presidency, has often displayed the very uncanny knack for sharing “the resonating bottom line” with Americans that won him the 2016 election.  In this regard, here is what he recently said

    Attorney General William Barr could go down in history as “the greatest attorney general” or just as “an average guy,” but that will depend on what U.S. Attorney John Durham reveals from his investigation into the origins of the Russia probe, President Donald Trump said Thursday. 

    “Bill Barr and Durham have a chance to be — Bill Barr is great most of the time, but if he wants to be politically correct, he’ll be just another guy,” Trump said during an extensive interview with Fox Business’ Maria Bartiromo. He said he hopes Durham is “not going to be politically correct.”

    “I hope he’s doing a great job,” Trump said. “[President Barack] Obama knew everything. Vice President [Joe] Biden, as dumb as he may be, knew everything, and everybody else knew.”

    Trump added that former FBI Director James Comey, ex-CIA Director John Brennan, and former Director of National Intelligence James Clapper “were all terrible and they lied to Congress.”

    Is the first Ex-FBI lawyer pleading guilty for falsifying documents to investigate the Trump campaign a hopeful sign? 

    Or, is this just a token, “orchestrated prosecution” by the bigwigs in both parties to throw citizens a middle management bureaucratic “sacrifice” before the top echelon power brokers revert back to widespread, bi-partisan corruption, and cronyism, also called B.R. business as usual?

    A recent appeals court decision to overturn the Hillary Clinton deposition order that Judicial Watch won under the Freedom of Information Act suggests the heads of the above-the-law fish are as foul as ever.  Said differently, the jury is still out whether we will sustain an arbitrary, capricious, rapacious, despotic rule of man system over a rule of law system based on the US Constitution.  If only “the jury” got to decide such cases, for if it is ultimately principally up to leftist circuit (appeal) courts or to the Supreme Court of America, any remaining fidelity to our Constitution and the associated Bill of Rights won’t just be hanging by an ever thinner thread, but these seminal documents will have fallen deeply into a grave with dirt being rapidly heaped on top, quickly replacing daylight that was already rapidly dimming.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What if AG Barr falls short?

    As you can surmise, I think this is much more likely than not. 

    If we cannot bring back fidelity to the rule of law for our elitist politicians and bureaucrats, how can we expect to rein in increasingly “green-lighted” anarchy, racism, and destruction?  How can we address the highly destructive “cancel culture”* (OURS) and “virtue signalling“* that is increasingly making policy in the US for all of us if our leaders act lawlessly and destructively? 

    The short answer is, we can’t. 

    In such an unraveling world, how can we reconstitute free market capitalism, stouter property right protections, smaller government, balanced budgets, and sound money, the elixirs of invention, productivity enhancement, deflationary growth, and a wealth of nations trajectory lifting more boats and generating more happiness than any other system? 

    The short answer is, we can’t. 

    With our toxic public policy stew run, in essence, by lockdown fascists in bed with anarchistic and racist hoodlums, we threaten to careen further and further into stagflation, revisited — this time laced with with record debt, unmatched public sector and pension deficits, unparalleled financial repression, plummeting productivity (prior to an even stronger embrace of “not so green” energy), and an increasingly threatening loss of a functioning (civil) society.  Not exactly confidence-inspiring.  Not exactly a “wealth of nations” trajectory, shutting down supply and printing money like never before.  More like 1970s’ style stagflation on steroids laced with rising civil unrest and destruction.  

    In plain English, eventually our asset bubbles, especially in global bonds and US stocks, will be pierced, ending over four decades of bull markets as reversion beyond the mean gets really mean, and screaming buys proliferate.  This will not only reflect unheralded and expanding balance sheet weakness, a secular reduction in corporate earnings power stated in today’s currency terms, and hugely rising monetary inflation risks, but it will also reflect plummeting confidence in the currency in which those increasingly unsound, overvalued assets are based.   In short, we will have a stability-eviscerating and purchasing power-crushing fiat currency crisis led by the currency that has been abused the longest and the most flagrantly, the US dollar.  This is how the end of a financial system is spelled.

    In such a world, people and investors have always resorted to safe haven, purchasing power-protecting real money, which is physical gold and silver.  It won’t be different this time.  If the central bankers/central planners want to keep from being rendered fully academic (which history suggested would be wonderful), they will have to again back their currencies with a stout amount of gold — around 40%.  As so much fiat money has been printed, and gold (and silver) remain very limited, we could easily be looking at $11,500 gold per Troy ounce and over $230 silver per Troy ounce (history coupled with a bit of simple math as in “15:1” silver-to-gold ratio suggests silver could reach into the $700 range per Troy ounce).  Those precious metals dollar prices would be prior to even more money supply expansion both domestically and abroad.  In this regard, note that the US money supply has rising at a 42% annual rate in  M1 terms.  

    While an adequate allocation to physical precious metals in your own possession at current price levels will help to take the economic and financial edge off of what will likely prove tumultuous times ahead, they can’t address our increasingly dysfunctional political and societal systems.  But, as the saying goes, it’s better to be relatively well-off financially during hard times than poor.  Plus, someday, when Blue Chip crony plays will again be trading for a sub-10 P/E with a 6 – 8% dividend yield (a blast from the not too distant 1970s past), you will likely have the PM purchasing power to “back up the truck” to avail yourself of a possibly once-in-a-lifetime buying opportunity, i.e., if our current fascist system doesn’t morph into full-blown communism, where there is no more private property.

    But with rising gold and silver prices, don’t wait too long to get adequate precious metals diversification, especially not with Big Warren of Berkshire Hathaway wading into gold stock(s), which will make it suddenly acceptable for all the Wall Street lemmings to embrace the very gold the talking financial news heads have long been panning (together with Warren) as a barbarous relic earning not a dime of interest.   Well, with negative real interest rates abounding and with goods and services inflation on the rise, physical gold and silver in your own discreet possession don’t look so bad.  Meanwhile, precious metals stocks have tremendous operating and financial leverage to rising precious metals prices with which to fatten your dividend income. Pretty salivating, those barbarous relics …

    Conclusion: go for the PM “bar” instead of placing too much trust in Barr (and our heavily compromised system)

    Hope you found this post of interest!

    Greetings,

    Dan

    *- In case these psychobabble terms confuse you, let me cut to the chase: cancel culture and virtue signalling express what amounts to kindergarten bullies enforcing the alpha male’s tyranny, which they have voluntarily subjected themselves to and now insist that everyone else also has to abide by.  THAT is what is really going on.  Welcome back to kindergarten.  Where are the cops?

  • Same Narrative, Rotating 'Bad Guys': Iran Paid Off Taliban Insurgents To Kill Americans
    Same Narrative, Rotating ‘Bad Guys’: Iran Paid Off Taliban Insurgents To Kill Americans

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 22:50

    A little over a month ago we were told that Russian military intelligence was paying the Afghan Taliban to kill American troops. As many predicted, that “bombshell” – later admitted by some of the same sources that initially promoted it to be of “sketchy” intelligence origin – was very short-lived, grabbing headlines for a few days, only to be rapidly memory-holed akin to the fate of other Russiagate-related ‘anonymous sources say’ type stories.

    In the foreign-policy-think of the D.C. blob, the cast of “rogue” actors constantly threatening US national security seamlessly rotates, entering in and out of familiar narratives when convenient, and now CNN is out with the latest: “US intelligence agencies assessed that Iran offered bounties to Taliban fighters for targeting American and coalition troops in Afghanistan, identifying payments linked to at least six attacks carried out by the militant group just last year alone, including a suicide bombing at a US air base in December, CNN has learned.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Taliban file image

    Administration officials say it was US intelligence’s uncovering of the Iranian bounties plot which was decisive in convincing President Trump to assassinate IRGC Quds Force chief Qassem Soleimani on January 3rd. 

    The killing by drone of Soleimani came less than a month after a particularly devastating attack on Bagram Air Base which resulted in two civilian deaths, and injuries to four American personnel, among more than 60 others wounded. That attack was on December 11, 2019.

    CNN writes:

    “The name of the foreign government that made these payments remains classified but two sources familiar with the intelligence confirmed to CNN that it refers to Iran.”

    So there it is — the largely debunked ‘Russian bounties’ story lives on apparently, in new form, fed to the public by anonymous intelligence sources. The CNN story even links the two threads together, suggesting that two major American enemies, Russia and the Islamic Republic, are now essentially handing out vast amounts of cash to mujahideen to kill Americans in Central Asia.

    Specifically identified as Tehran’s alleged proxy mercenaries being paid off with Iranian money is the notorious Haqqani Network:

    While US intelligence officials acknowledge that the Haqqani Network would not necessarily require payment in exchange for targeting American troops, the internal Pentagon document reviewed by CNN notes that the funding linked to the December 11 attack at Bagram “probably incentivizes future high-profile attacks on US and Coalition forces.”

    But there are some immediate and obvious red flags to the story which should give serious pause and cause for skepticism. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For starters, the Haqqani Network and more broadly the Taliban considers Iran to be the worst among heretic and apostate regimes, given Iran is a Shia Republic at war with Sunni fundamentalism. The feelings are mutual, given Haqqani Network is basically the poster child for Sunni jihad and Takfirism which ultimately seeks to wipe out Shiism. Historically, the Taliban has been a near constant violent persecutor of Afghanistan’s own minority Shia community.

    And as CNN perhaps begrudgingly pointed out of its own story: the radical Sunni Haqqani organization has never needed monetary incentive to attack American forces and their allies.

    It’s crucial to remember that Sunni global jihad started with war against what early al-Qaeda propaganda speeches and documents dubbed the “near enemy” — that is, against secular regimes like Baathists and ‘heretics’ and ‘apostates’ like Shia, Alawites, and the popular “folk” Sufi movements of Mideast/North Africa which firebrand Saudi and Pakistani clerics have railed against for decades and even centuries (Haqqani has long found safe-haven in northwest Pakistan).

    This fault line remains the key driver of proxy war in the region, meaning these two sides are still at war, which it should be remembered is largely what the Syria conflict is all about (the Sunni Saudi axis & Western allies fighting jihad against the so-called ‘Shia axis’), and the continuing US-led ‘maximum pressure’ campaign against Iran (the latest Israeli-UAE deal is largely focused on cooperation in countering Iran as well).

    This is precisely why just after 9/11 very few authentic Middle East analysts with experience of the region believed the neocon lie that secular Baathist autocrat Saddam Hussein was in cahoots with Osama bin Laden and al-Qaeda to unleash WMD on the United States. Neocons have actually continued until now to push a narrative of “Iran was behind Sept. 11”.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Remember that in the days after Soleimani’s death Vice President Mike Pence actually tried to link the top Iranian commander to 9/11. This new ‘Iranian bounties’ story is cut from the same neocon cloth, and thus demands a high threshold of evidence presented publicly — not the mere usual anonymous intel sources and regurgitated paranoid headlines.

    While it’s true that “anything is possible” especially when it comes to competing ‘dirty wars’ where proxies are used of state actors for plausible deniability, any narrative which claims the world’s vanguard of hardline Shia Islam is working with the global vanguard of international Sunni jihad (and throwing around lots of cash at that!) should again be met with a high degree of skepticism. It should be noted that indeed over the past few years there’s been a growing number of Western think tanks linking Iranian intelligence and Taliban factions  born out of a pragmatic desire to create “managed instability” for occupying US forces in Afghanistan.

    But just like with the prior “Saddam and bin Laden working together” story, or the “Iran behind 9/11 attacks” theory advanced by Bush-era think tank policy wonks, the public is very unlikely to ever get anything in the way of hard evidence concerning this new “Iran bounties” story.

  • Minnesota Democrat Governor Quietly Reverses Course On Hydroxychloroquine
    Minnesota Democrat Governor Quietly Reverses Course On Hydroxychloroquine

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 22:30

    Authored by John Miltimore via RealClearPolitics.com,

    This past week Minnesota became the second state to reject regulations that effectively ban the controversial drug hydroxychloroquine for use by COVID-19 patients…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The decision, which comes two weeks after the Ohio Board of Pharmacy reversed an effective ban of its own, was rightfully praised by local health care advocates. 

    “We are pleased that Governor [Tim] Walz lifted his March 27 Executive Order 20-23 restrictions on chloroquine and hydroxychloroquine,” said Twila Brase, president of Citizens’ Council for Health Freedom.

    The reversal by Walz, a first-term Democrat, clears the way for doctors to prescribe hydroxychloroquine, a drug commonly used to treat malaria and other conditions but one the FDA has declined to recommend for COVID-19 treatment.

    The decision is the latest development in the weird saga of arguably the most divisive drug in modern history.

    The acrimony began in March after President Trump tweeted that hydroxychloroquine had the potential to be “one of the biggest game changers in the history of medicine” as a treatment for the coronavirus. 

    The tweet and similar statements provoked an avalanche of media criticism, with many claiming that the president was going to get people killed. Critics pointed out that medical evidence suggests the medication is linked to a fatal arrhythmia and some trials show no benefits in coronavirus treatments.

    Though his critics are likely loath to admit it, there’s reason to believe the president may have been on to something. In recent weeks a chorus of voices in the medical community has emerged to challenge the view that hydroxychloroquine is ineffective as a COVID treatment. Dr. Harvey A. Risch, a professor of epidemiology at the Yale School of Public Health, said a full analysis of the literature suggests hydroxychloroquine may be the key to defeating the coronavirus.

    “Physicians who have been using these medications in the face of widespread skepticism have been truly heroic,” Risch wrote in Newsweek, adding that a full review of the COVID literature on the drug shows “clear-cut and significant benefits.”

    Prescribing hydroxychloroquine in the early stages of the virus is key, Risch said, and others agree. Steven Hatfill, a veteran virologist and adjunct assistant professor at the George Washington University Medical Center, says the literature supporting hydroxychloroquine is overwhelming.

    “There are now 53 studies that show positive results of hydroxychloroquine in COVID infections,” Hatfill wrote in RealClearPolitics.

    “There are 14 global studies that show neutral or negative results — and 10 of them were of patients in very late stages of COVID-19, where no antiviral drug can be expected to have much effect.”

    One of the positive studies, published by Henry Ford Health System, was a large-scale retrospective of six hospitals. Analyzing 2,541 patients, it found that those treated with hydroxychloroquine alone died at about half the rate of patients not treated with it.

    It’s unclear if it was this research that prompted Walz to reverse his March ruling, which ordered the Board of Pharmacists to instruct pharmacists to not issue hydroxychloroquine prescriptions unless the diagnosis was “appropriate” — which halted any off-label prescription requests. 

    The reason it’s unclear is that Walz has been mum on why he rescinded his order. There’s been no announcement or new stories. Local lawmakers told me they had no idea Walz had reversed course.

    “There’s been absolutely no transparency here,” said Dr. Scott Jensen, a Republican state senator who criticized Walz’s approach. Jensen, who has practiced medicine for more than 30 years in Minnesota, told me pharmacists he’s worked with for years told him they could not fill a hydroxychloroquine prescription for COVID because of the March executive order.

    He agrees that hydroxychloroquine is terribly misunderstood by the public and said politicians need to take a step back.

    “Hydroxychloroquine is one of the most studied drugs in the history of mankind,” Jensen said. “My wife was on hydroxychloroquine for 15 years. It’s been on the World Health Organization’s list of essential medicines for decades. It’s been in play since 1955, the year after I was born.”

    Hydroxychloroquine might be politically controversial, but that hasn’t stopped some of its critics from taking advantage of the drug. In a May interview, former presidential hopeful Sen. Amy Klobuchar admitted her husband was successfully treated with hydroxychloroquine, a medication she had mocked on Twitter.

    The politics of hydroxychloroquine are unlikely to cool before November’s presidential election.  Yet, if Walz’s decision is any indication, at least some leaders are starting to recognize the ethical dilemma of using the long arm of government to stand between suffering patients and a drug that may have the potential to save them.

  • Cake Lives Matter: Protesters Descend On New York Bakery For Making MAGA-Hat-Shaped Cake
    Cake Lives Matter: Protesters Descend On New York Bakery For Making MAGA-Hat-Shaped Cake

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 22:10

    “Cake lives matter” was actually written on a sign of one of the protesters who showed up outside Coccadotts Cake Shop in New York, just outside of Albany. The bakery drew huge protests over the last couple of days for doing what a bakery does: baking a cake.

    But, of course, this wasn’t just any cake. This was a cake with feelings: a super-racist, super-homophobic capitalist cake. And the protesters knew that because it was made in the shape of a red hat that said “Make America Great Again” on it. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The bakery’s owner, Rachel Dott, had posted images of the cake on social media in late July, which catalyzed the protests. 

    But supporters of the bakery also showed up. According to the Times Union:

    The Black Lives Matter protesters, who also alleged a member of the Cocca family was sympathetic to the right-wing group known as the Proud Boys, were equipped with bullhorns but they were greatly outnumbered by anti-protesters who waved American flags and encouraged passing vehicles to honk in support. 

    Colonie police officers stood between the two groups keeping them separated as much as possible. State Police troopers and Albany County Sheriff’s deputies also were on the scene.

    The two groups got “face-to-face” and were “yelling at each other”, the article says. “Hey, hey, ho, ho, racism has got to go,” the BLM group was shouting (reminder: still about a cake).

    One protester said: “They’re able to feel what they feel about their politics. We have issues when it comes to social injustice as in firing someone because they’re gay, wearing ‘All Lives Matter’ masks.”

    None of those things were reported to have happened at the bakery they chose to protest at. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dennis O’Kane of Delmar showed up in support of the bakery, telling reporters he was there to “support America”. “I’ve known these people for 30 years. These people are really nice,” O’Kane said about the bakery owners.

    You can view video of the protest below. As the first YouTube comment says so succinctly: “Imagine living in a world where people are triggered over a cake.”

  • What Difference Does It Make?
    What Difference Does It Make?

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 21:50

    Authored by Jim Quinn via The Burning Platform blog,

    During questioning by Senator Ron Johnson in 2013 about the false narrative of a Prophet Muhammed video spurring a spontaneous demonstration, presented by National Security Advisor Susan Rice and Secretary of State Hillary Clinton, regarding the Benghazi attack that killed Ambassador Christopher Stevens and three other Americans, Clinton angrily responded with her now famous quote.

    “With all due respect, the fact is, we had four dead Americans. Was it because of a protest or because of guys out for a walk one night who decide to kill some Americans, what difference at this point does it make?”

     – Hillary Clinton

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I’ve lately found myself saying “what difference does it make” regarding the outrages being inflicted upon myself and my fellow citizens on a daily basis.

    I’ve been railing for years against out of control government spending; undeclared never-ending wars across the globe provoked by the military industrial complex; un-Constitutional surveillance of Americans by our Deep State government overseers; the extreme greed and criminality exhibited by Wall Street bankers as they pillage the national treasure; corrupt politicians of both parties paid off to do the bidding of their corporate sponsors; propaganda spewing fake news media corporations; the Deep State running things behind the curtain; and the destroyer of worlds – the Federal Reserve – debasing our currency as they enrich the few at the expense of the many.

    I naively thought back in 2008 when I started writing articles, I could be part of a movement to change the course of the country. I went to Ron Paul rallies, got involved with the Concord Coalition, participated in the financial crisis documentary Generation Zero, convinced senior administration at Wharton to play David Walker’s documentary I.O.U.S.A. for the MBA students, did radio interviews, and spent most of my free time writing article after article about what needed to be done to reverse our downward spiral as a nation.

    When I was censored on sites like Seeking Alpha and Financial Sense because they had sold out to the Wall Street cabal, I stumbled into blogging, with partner dust-ups, server issues, denial of service attacks and ad company censorship along the way. But I’m still slogging and blogging away twelve years later, through presidential coup attempts, market crashes, the Federal Reserve rescuing the .1% once again, the most overhyped flu in the history of mankind used as a means to destroy our last vestiges of liberty and freedom, and the evil oligarchs attempting to seize complete and final control over all the economic, social, political and military levers of our society.

    I’m convinced there will be no consensus regarding an agreed upon presidential victor on November 4th, or possibly weeks after, or possibly ever. The amount of incompetence in handling mail-in-ballots by the USPO and those tasked with counting them will be off the charts. The level of fraud in attempting to win this election will be on a level never seen before, making Daley’s shenanigans to get Kennedy the necessary votes in 1960 seem like child’s play.

    When a system is specifically designed in such a way that cheating is easy, there will be a significant amount of cheating. The stakes in this election have never been higher. The future path of the nation will be set in motion by the outcome of this election. But the truth is, no matter the outcome, the losers will not accept the verdict. That is when this Fourth Turning moves into its truly violent stage, making these urban riots in Democrat stronghold cities seem like minor league play acting.

    I thought the situation in this country was dire in 2007 when David Walker, then Comptroller General of the U.S., made this declaration:

    “The US government is on a “burning platform” of unsustainable policies and practices with fiscal deficits, chronic healthcare underfunding, immigration and overseas military commitments threatening a crisis if action is not taken soon.

    There are striking similarities between America’s current situation and the factors that brought down Rome, including declining moral values and political civility at home, an over-confident and over-extended military in foreign lands and fiscal irresponsibility by the central government. The fiscal imbalance meant the US was on a path toward an explosion of debt.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With the looming retirement of baby boomers, spiraling healthcare costs, plummeting savings rates and increasing reliance on foreign lenders, we face unprecedented fiscal risks. Current US policy on education, energy, the environment, immigration and Iraq also are on an unsustainable path. Our very prosperity is placing greater demands on our physical infrastructure. Billions of dollars will be needed to modernize everything from highways and airports to water and sewage systems.” 

     David Walker – 2007

    Hence, the name for my blog was ordained, as I concurred with Walker’s assessment and decided the purpose of my blogging would be to warn others about the unsustainability of our path in an effort to avert a disastrous outcome. It’s almost comical I thought our fiscal situation was dreadful in 2007, when the national debt stood at $9 trillion after 218 years as a nation, and our annual deficit was $161 billion. With the national debt currently totaling $26.5 trillion, our feckless politicians have added $17.5 trillion of debt in 13 years. Our current deficit is on pace to reach $4 trillion.

    That is $11 billion per day. We are generating a deficit on par with 2007 every two weeks. If you told someone in 2007, when they were earning 5% on their Vanguard money market fund, thirteen years later they would be earning .06% on that same money market fund, unemployment would be over 10%, the country had averaged annual budget deficits exceeding $1 trillion per year, and GDP had averaged less than 2% per year, but the stock market was up 125% to all-time highs, they would have committed you to the loony bin.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The only way politicians could possibly get away with this outrageous level of debt spending is with the encouragement and collaboration of the Wall Street owned and controlled Federal Reserve.

    When reckless, greed driven, myopic, sociopath politicians are allowed to implement “solutions” geared towards benefiting their corporate masters and getting themselves re-elected, with no immediate adverse consequences for their actions because a bunch of spineless toady academics employed by the oligarchs will drop interest rates to zero and bailout badly run companies and governments by electronically producing $7.6 million PER MINUTE to cover these ultimately fatal “solutions”, the fate of the country is sealed.

    It’s not a matter of if this empire built on debt implodes, it’s just a matter of when. And the “when” appears to be approaching rapidly, based upon the desperate measures being taken by the powers that be since the cracks in the system appeared in September 2019 , with repo market disfunction.

    Any critical thinking, rational, peace-loving, law-abiding, golden-rule-following citizen of this country must be baffled, disillusioned, angry and depressed by the path being forced upon us by elected and unelected tyrants as they attempt to implement their formerly hidden agenda. The agenda of sociopathic, egomaniacal, billionaire oligarchs has always been the same – accumulating more wealth, power and control, using whatever means necessary to accomplish this mission in life.

    We are allotted maybe 80 or so years on this planet to try and make a difference. Most normal people just want to find someone to love, raise a family, work at a job they don’t hate, be left alone by the government, find some enjoyment on a daily basis, and live according to the cultural norms which have proven to keep a society running peacefully and productively for centuries.

    But, there are a very small minority who want to rule over others, accumulate the maximum amount of wealth possible using whatever means necessary, stop at nothing to gain control over all the levers of power in society, treat others as pawns, vassals and sheep in their game of brinkmanship with the other .1%ers, and willingly destroy a culture of shared sacrifice for future generations by inflicting a culture of greed, consumerism, selfishness, hate, and mistrust of others in it’s place.

    This is how an invisible government (Deep State) is able to mold the minds of millions through government school indoctrination and incessant propaganda emanating from fake news corporate media mouthpieces for the oligarchy. They have slowly but surely gained control over the financial system through the capture of the Federal Reserve, control the media through capture of the six major news corporations, censor anyone and anything propagating truth through social media that conflicts with the approved oligarch narrative, use the military industrial complex to wage never ending wars of profit, surveille everything you post or say, and funnel billions to the corporate pharmaceutical sickcare complex.

    To paraphrase George Carlin, they’re a small club and you’re not in it. But they need you to be willfully ignorant, believing the current fear narrative and distracted by your igadgets, instagram, facebook and twitter accounts, to successfully implement their plan of total control and enrichment at our expense.

    It’s enough to make the average, decent, thoughtful, moral person say “what difference does it make” what I do at this point.

    • What difference does it make that a Deep State does exist and its sole purpose is to enrich itself through the manipulation and control of the financial, social, military, and cultural levers of society?

    • What difference does it make that the FBI, CIA, Congress and DOJ colluded with the outgoing president of the United States and national left-wing media corporations to conduct a coup against the incoming duly elected president of the United States, with no consequences as of yet?

    • What difference does it make that Julian Assange rots in a UK prison for the crime of revealing the treachery of the U.S. surveillance state and uncovering the DNC plot to steal the election for Hillary, while Edward Snowden is a fugitive in Russia for illuminating the deceitful un-Constitutional surveillance of every American by the Deep State operatives?

    • What difference does it make that an oligopoly of a several left-wing corporate media networks and a few Silicon Valley social media titans pretend to be journalists and proponents of free speech while colluding with one political party to spread misinformation, false narratives, and fake news, while suppressing and censoring factual truths which go against their narrative?

    • What difference does it make that the Greenspan/Bernanke/Yellen/Powell Put is real, giving the green light to Too Big to Trust Wall Street banks, hedge funds, billionaire speculators and now unemployed millennial Portnoy patrons day trading on Robinhood with their $600 weekly government handout, to take excessive risk on margin, knowing they will be bailed out again and again.

    • What difference does it make that the Federal government and the Federal Reserve created a combined $6 trillion out of thin air since March to supposedly help the average family, which equates to about $46,000 for every household in the country, but the average household received maybe $2,000 to $3,000 depending on their situation? A curious person might wonder where the other $5 trillion went. How about Wall Street banks, hedge funds, connected mega-corporations, and billionaire oligarchs as the recipients.

    • What difference does it make that our so-called leaders are actively promoting multi-trillion dollar deficits, driving our national debt towards $30 trillion at a breakneck pace, insuring a financial crisis of epic proportions when the money printing ultimately produces inflation outside the stock market and the Fed gets trapped in their own web of deceit? Our debt saturated society implodes if short-term interest rates exceed 2%.

    • What difference does it make that the Federal Reserve used this pandemic as the excuse for bailing out their owners once again, as the gears of this debt-based Ponzi scheme were already seizing up before the pandemic? The Fed didn’t let a good manufactured crisis go to waste, allowing zombie banks, hedge funds and connected corporations to survive, while sentencing hundreds of thousands of small businesses to death.

    • What difference does it make that a flu which will not kill 99.97% of Americans, but has killed 80,000 seniors in long-term care facilities because tyrannical Democrat governors purposely put infected patients into the nursing homes, is being used to herd the barely sentient indoctrinated sheep into their pens as a trial run for eliminating all of our freedoms and liberty?

    • What difference does it make that a therapy (HCQ + Zinc + Zpack) which has been proven to be safe and highly effective in treating Covid-19, and only costs about $10, has been ridiculed and scorned by the corporate media, Fauci and Gates because they have a vested financial interest in Big Pharma $2,500 treatments and worldwide vaccination profits?

    • What difference does it make that scientific “experts” used faulty models to predict millions of deaths from this over-hyped flu, resulting in the greatest self-inflicted economic calamity in history, and have continued to fear monger the American public into never ending sheltering despite the factual evidence proving this China flu is only slightly more lethal than the yearly flu, but less lethal to young people than the normal flu?

    • What difference does it make that we pretend 30% of all mortgages aren’t in default, 30% of rent payments are not being made to landlords, students without jobs will ultimately pay their trillions in loans, bankrupt retailers and small business owners will make their rent payments, unemployed homeowners will pay their property taxes to local governments, and this will all work itself out with no negative financial consequences for anyone?

    • What difference does it make that the stock market sits at all-time highs, with valuations exceeding the 2000 dot-com bubble, corporate profits crashing, day trading newbie millennials buying bankrupt companies based on the advice of a sports betting self- promoting blowhard, with the savvy grey-haired veterans of the market exiting stage left? Those believing this folly can continue unabated are going to get it good and hard.

    • What difference does it make that Democratic mayors and governors have allowed their cities to be looted and burned based upon the false narrative of systematic institutional racism and the death of a drugged up black man at the hands of one bad white cop, as some sort of warped effort to pin these disasters on Trump? BLM and ANTIFA are nothing more than domestic terrorists, funded by Soros and his ilk, in an effort to undermine our society and implement their communist new world order agenda.

    • What difference does it make that Democrat governors continue to lockdown their states and not allow students to go to school in the Fall in an effort to keep the economy in a deep recession, so they can defeat Trump in November?

    • What difference does it make that Americans are denied their freedom to worship in church and send their children to school because it is too dangerous, but abortion clinics and liquor stores are allowed to operate, and massive protests and riots are encouraged by the same tyrants denying religious freedoms?

    • What difference does it make that not only do Democrats not want voter ID, but they now are using this over-hyped flu as an excuse to flood the nation with mail-in ballots in order to fraudulently steal the election in November? With a senile gaffe machine as their candidate, they will need every devious means to achieve victory.

    I can openly admit that a curtain-like depression has engulfed me over the last few months. I see no reasonable solution or escape from the predicament our leaders have created. I work in my basement office, participating in a half dozen zoom meetings per day, as I try to help my employer navigate through the land mines placed by our government overlords. There has been very little enjoyment in our existence since this unnecessary national lockdown was executed. That seems to be the point.

    They want us at each other’s throats over race, mask wearing, social distancing, and following the orders of tyrannical pea brained sociopath governors and mayors enjoying their roles as dictator. When the supposed conspiracy theorists, like myself, are the ones with unequivocal factual evidence to support our views, and the establishment depends upon false narratives and censorship, you know time is growing short and a violent clash is imminent.

    We are in the midst of a Fourth Turning Crisis. Strauss & Howe succinctly captured the coming societal implosion and distrust which would engulf the nation.

    “In the pre-Crisis years, fears about the flimsiness of the social contract will have been subliminal but rising. As the Crisis catalyzes, these fears will rush to the surface, jagged and exposed. Distrustful of some things, individuals will feel that their survival requires them to distrust more things. This behavior could cascade into a sudden downward spiral, an implosion of societal trust. If so, this implosion will strike financial markets—and, with that, the economy.

     But as the Crisis mood congeals, people will come to the jarring realization that they have grown helplessly dependent on a teetering edifice of anonymous transactions and paper guarantees. Many Americans won’t know where their savings are, who their employer is, what their pension is, or how their government works. The era will have left the financial world arbitraged and tentacled: Debtors won’t know who holds their notes, homeowners who owns their mortgages, and shareholders who runs their equities—and vice versa.”

    – Strauss & Howe

    I firmly believe the next five months will determine the long-term viability of our nation in its current configuration. A myriad of possibilities are conceivable and almost all of them are bad. I can guarantee there will be no compromises or negotiated treaties. Even if Biden remains the nominee until November, there will be no winner declared on November 4. Accusations of fraud will be hurled by both sides, with the left-wing media doing their utmost to declare Biden/whoever the winner.

    I believe this is when both sides take to the streets and minor clashes erupt into nationwide civil chaos. Since the government factions are already at odds, there will be no consistent approach to the chaos, and things will get out of hand rapidly. There are a number of unknown factors which will determine how things develop thereafter. Who will the military obey? How will Russia and China take advantage of our situation? What happens if the stock market crashes before or after the election? Could there be a real coup or assassination against Trump?

    I’m under no false belief there is anything I can do to reverse the course which has been set by decisions made and not made by those wielding the reins of power over the last few decades. We will all be buffeted and set adrift in the tumultuous flood waters which will sweep away the last vestiges of a dying empire. We will need to depend upon our own guile, courage and intelligence to survive the approaching storms. Connecting with like minded people who you can depend upon will be essential. Lone wolfs will face a difficult road.

    Having built a community through my website has mentally sustained many of us, but the ability to shutdown electronic communities will be easy for those in power. Neighbors and family will likely be your only options when things go south. Future generations will depend on us to make a difference. George Washington warned us about the type of men who would traitorously usurp and destroy the nation. Let’s pray we can defeat these evil men and set our country back on a path of liberty and freedom.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “However [political parties] may now and then answer popular ends, they are likely in the course of time and things, to become potent engines, by which cunning, ambitious, and unprincipled men will be enabled to subvert the power of the people and to usurp for themselves the reins of government, destroying afterwards the very engines which have lifted them to unjust dominion.”

    – George Washington

    *  *  *
    The corrupt establishment will do anything to suppress sites like the Burning Platform from revealing the truth. The corporate media does this by demonetizing sites like mine by blackballing the site from advertising revenue. If you get value from this site, please keep it running with a donation. [Jim Quinn – PO Box 1520 Kulpsville, PA 19443] or Paypal.

  • Beijing Touts Major COVID Vaccine Milestone As China Plays 'Catch-Up' With Russia
    Beijing Touts Major COVID Vaccine Milestone As China Plays ‘Catch-Up’ With Russia

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 21:30

    As the Philippines, Brazil, India and dozens of other countries struggling under the economic strain of COVID-19 outbreaks turn to Russia as their new savior thanks to the Putin-approved (one of his daughters was allegedly “part of the experiment”) vaccine, which, technically, won’t be widely available until January.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But roughly two dozen countries are already queuing up, striking multimillion-dollar deals (much of which, we suspect, will be settled in rubles) and kissing the ring, granting Putin a popularity boost as he seeks to play up his government’s progress in fighting the virus.

    To be sure, Russia is still clocking more than 5,000 newly confirmed cases every day, though the rate at which new deaths are being reported has slowed (some have pointed to some kind of an official cover-up). The vaccine and its association with the respected Gamaleya Institute helped bolster Putin’s credibility, and even bolstered the market’s appetite for risk, providing a solid day’s worth of grist for the market’s insatiable appetite for vaccine-related headlines.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Apparently, Putin’s showboating has inflamed President Xi’s thirst for a similar victory to display before the world. Which brings us to a headline from today’s “Global Times”. Patent Affirms Efficacy Of Vaccine Developed By China.

    The story, detailing the granting of the first patent for a domestically-developed COVID vaccine in China, claimed Chinese authorities had granted the first patent to one of the many candidates vying for approval in China (and doing so with the benefit of generous government subsidies, not unlike the US with “Project Warp Speed”).

    Chinese authorities have granted the first invention patent to a domestically developed COVID-19 vaccine candidate, which experts said demonstrates the vaccine’s originality and creativity, and would enhance the international market’s trust in Chinese-developed COVID-19 vaccines amid the US’ groundless accusations of Chinese hackers trying to steal novel coronavirus data on treatments and vaccine development from them.

    The vaccine is a recombinant adenovirus vaccine named Ad5-nCoV co-developed by Chinese biopharmaceutical firm CanSino Biologics Inc, one of the vaccine candidate’s co-developers, with the other being a team led by Chinese military infectious disease expert Chen Wei.

    The grant of the patent further confirmed the vaccine’s efficacy and safety, and convincingly demonstrated the ownership of its intellectual property rights (IPR), CanSino said in a statement sent to the Global Times on Sunday.

    Xu Xinming, a Beijing-based lawyer specializing in intellectual property rights, told the Global Times on Sunday that China has a comparatively strict and complete patent examination system, requiring a technology or product to be fundamentally different from existing similar technologies and products all over the world to be granted the patent.

    “The grant of the patent demonstrates the vaccine’s originality and creativity,” Xu said, noting that CanSino is also probably applying for a patent with foreign authorities to protect its IPR during international cooperation.

    An employee with the CanSino public relations department denied claims to the Global Times on Sunday that the grant of the patent had any relationship with the authorities’ marketing process of the vaccine, noting that the two issues are under the supervision of two different systems.

    As we’ve noted before, CanSino’s vaccine is using an adenovirus vector similar to the Russian vaccine, and the Oxford/AstraZeneca candidate. Perhaps the most interesting aspect of the report was a section entitled ‘Market confidence’ offering some details from the patent application (which, of course, is in mandarin).

    Read the excerpt below:

    The patent clarified 14 claims for CanSino’s IPR over the vaccine, including its nucleotide sequence, application purpose, preparation forms and methods, according to CanSino’s statement.

    According to CanSino, they applied for a patent with the National Intellectual Property Administration on March 18, three days after they launched phase one clinical trials on the candidate and received approval on August 11.

    The phase III trial on the vaccine which will be conducted overseas is progressing smoothly, the company noted. 

    Results of the phase one and two trials were revealed as of July 20, showing a good safety profile and high levels of humoral and cellular immune responses.

    CanSino has signed deals with Mexico to conduct late-stage clinical trials for COVID-19 vaccines, the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Mexico said last week.

    Saudi Arabian health officials also announced on August 9 to cooperate with phase III clinical trials on the vaccine, recruiting around 5,000 participants.

    CanSino has also reportedly been in talks with Russia, Brazil and Chile to launch a Phase III trial on Ad5-nCOV.

    Cooperation against vaccine nationalism

    Amid media hype, the COVID-19 pandemic has created a risk of “vaccine nationalism,” however global cooperation around vaccine R&D to solve the COVID-19 conundrum has not stopped.

    All five types of COVID-19 vaccines in China are being developed under international cooperation with a list of countries including the UAE, Brazil, the UK, the US and Germany, media reported.

    China and Russia have planned to collaborate on COVID-19 vaccine clinical trials, said Chinese top respiratory scientist Zhong Nanshan, a leading figure in the fight against COVID-19, at a recent academic exchange conference on China-Russia cooperation against the coronavirus held in South China’s Guangdong Province.

    Signs of cooperation seem to have emerged as early as January, media reported, as the Russian consulate in China’s Guangzhou revealed in a statement on its website that “Russian and Chinese experts have begun developing a vaccine” and Beijing has handed over the genome of the virus to Moscow.

    Experts said the move is part of China’s promise to pitch into the global fight against the virus, adding that China and Russia have a clear basis for vaccine cooperation in resource sharing and mass production.

    China and Russia can exchange data and techniques around vaccine R&D, given the second dose of Russia’s newly approved world’s first COVID-19 vaccine has almost the same mechanism with that of the China-developed adenovirus vector COVID-19 vaccine, Ad5-nCoV, according to Tao.

    China may also be able to help Russia with mass production for its second dose of the vaccine if needed, considering China has relatively ample capacity for mass production, Tao said.

    “The genetic sequence of viruses are very crucial in the development of vaccines, and sometimes can be even regarded as an intellectual property right,” Yang Zhanqiu, deputy director of the pathogen biology department at Wuhan University, told the Global Times on Sunday. “The sharing and openness of gene sequences reflects China’s willingness and confidence to work with others against the virus.”

    Potential cooperation between China and Russia would be a win-win one, and it will also help China develop a vaccine that can be adapted to a wider range of viral strains, said Yang.

    US and Chinese medical institutions have been working together on vaccine development since the beginning of the year, a US vaccine scientist told the Xinhua News Agency on January 22.

    Peter Hotez, professor and dean of the National School of Tropical Medicine at Baylor College of Medicine (BCM) in Houston, Texas, said his group is working with the Virology Center at Fudan University in Shanghai, China.

    Hotez praised China’s efforts in dealing with the epidemic, saying Chinese scientists have done an amazing job so far figuring out the transmission and working out quickly the isolation and sequencing of the virus, Xinhua reported.

    Collaboration between US company Inovio Pharmaceuticals, Inc. and Beijing Advaccine Biotechnology Co. was approved in July to work jointly on advancement of the INO-4800 vaccine against coronavirus, and late-stage clinical trials have been ongoing, media reported. It is the world’s first COVID-19 vaccine to be tested simultaneously in the US and China.

    British multinational pharmaceutical company GlaxoSmithKline (GSK) is working with China’s Xiamen Innovex on a recombinant protein-based coronavirus vaccine candidate to protect people from the novel coronavirus. GSK is eyeing boosting production of the candidate to a billion doses by 2021, according to media report.

    Putin has already started his countdown clock, with an expected date of January for widespread availability of the Russian vaccine. We imagine similar announcements from CanSino, which has now apparently cemented its status as the most promising candidate in China.

  • "Stop Panicking About The Post Office!"
    “Stop Panicking About The Post Office!”

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 21:10

    Authored by Nick Harper via Medium.com,

    A lot of fear and misinformation has been spreading throughout social media the past few days about the post office. People seem to think the sky is falling. But they’re missing a lot of important context.

    I am here to tell you that yes, you should be concerned about the future of the United States Postal Service (USPS), but the whole sky isn’t falling quite yet.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So, stop panicking! Being concerned and taking specific, practical action is good; panicking on social media is bad.

    Let’s check some facts, shall we? I know this is long, but please stay with me.

    The U.S. Constitution creates the post office and requires Congress to fund it.

    False.

    Several people seem to be under the belief that the Constitution mandates the existence or funding of the United States Postal Service. The U.S. Constitution does mention the postal system in a sense, but doesn’t create the post office or require its funding. Article I, section 8, clause 7 of the Constitution gives Congress “the Power […] To establish Post Offices and Post Roads.”

    It requires nothing; it merely permits Congress to act, if Congress so chooses. The clause gives Congress the ability to create post offices and the implied authority to create and provide services through the United States Postal Service. And Congress has.

    USPS relies on Congress for funding.

    False.

    USPS is an independent agency that is almost exclusively self-funded since 1971. It may receive some small appropriations for “public service costs” and “revenue forgone.”

    Public service costs are “reimbursement to the Postal Service for public service costs incurred by it in providing a maximum degree of effective and regular postal service nationwide, in communities where post offices may not be deemed self-sustaining.” 39 U.S.C. 2401. USPS may request an appropriation for public service costs for up to $460 million annually. However, USPS has not requested or received this reimbursement since 1982.

    Revenue forgone is funding providing to subsidize the mailing costs of groups such as the blind and overseas absentee voters. Under the Revenue Forgone Reform Act of 1993, USPS was supposed to receive about $29 million in appropriations every year from 1994 through 2035, but for most years, that funding has not actually been appropriated.

    For context, USPS’s revenue for the fiscal year ending in 2019 was $71.1 billion. So these payments would make up less than 7% of USPS revenues even if the agency did receive the payments.

    But USPS has asked this year for an emergency appropriation from Congress. Read the next bit on that.

    USPS is in financial distress and will be insolvent before the November 2020 election.

    True about the distress; insolvency is off by 10 months.

    USPS is in a financial bind. The agency has had a net loss for most of the last several years. This is because the demand for shipping letters and flats (large envelopes, newsletters, magazines) has declined steadily for over two decades. Costs for shipping letters and flats, however, have not declined as much. Less revenue with the same costs has resulted in USPS taking financial losses.

    COVID-19 has exacerbated these issues even further. Mail volume dropped, while expenses, like for PPE, increased. So much so that USPS sought a $50 billion emergency funding and the authority to borrow another $25 billion from the Treasury. This was contemplated for the CARES Act that addresses so many other COVID-19-induced financial crises. USPS estimated in the spring that they would have an estimated $13 billion budget shortfall (compared to a $9 billion shortfall in fiscal year 2019).

    But we now know that USPS will survive at least a little longer. While their income is still not what it needs to be, the increase in online shopping during COVID-19 has helped it stay above water. And the Treasury made a $10 billion loan available.

    In its fiscal quarter report filed June 30, 2020, USPS indicated that it has “sufficient liquidity to continue operating through at least August 2021.”

    So USPS is in a critical condition, but it does not appear that it will shut down before the November election.

    USPS is in distress because it is required to pre-fund retiree pensions and health benefits.

    Mostly true, but that’s not the only reason.

    This is a pervasive half-truth. The Postal Accountability and Enhancement Act of 2006 required USPS to pre-fund future retiree health benefits (not pensions though). Previously, like most agencies, it funded these benefits on a pay as you go basis: the benefit is claimed, then they pay the bill. Instead, USPS was supposed to pay $5–6 billion per year from 2007 until 2017 into a retiree health benefit fund (RHBF) that is supposed to cover retiree health benefits for over 50 years. The idea is that pre-funding these benefits ensures that the benefits get paid even if USPS does go into crisis.

    The problem is that USPS hasn’t been paying into the fund since 2012, and didn’t even make full payments in every year before that. It was supposed to have completely funded the RHBF by 2017, yet less than 44% is actually funded. It has become clear the current RHBF requirement is not sustainable and is harming USPS’s financial survival.

    But despite the dour situation surrounding the RHBF, the payments are not the sole cause of USPS’s net losses. Remember, the payments were less than $6 billion each year, and payments were supposed to stop in 2017. A table from the Task Force on the United States Postal System — a group put together by an executive order of President Trump — can help us uncover the truth.

    USPS Revenue and Expenditures table, FY 2010 through FY 2018

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The third row of the table demonstrates what USPS’s net income or loss would have been without the RHBF. USPS would have only reported losses in 2010–2012, but would have not lost money through 2018. Payments for RHBF have stopped, but USPS is still accruing new costs of $3–4 billion per year. On the other hand, USPS had a loss of $8.8 billion for fiscal year 2019, and will likely have at least an $11 billion shortfall for fiscal year 2020. These losses are greater than the annual accrual for the RHBF. So without the RBHF, USPS would have still had losses for 2010, 2011, 2012, 2019, and 2020–five of the last ten years.

    This means that while a significant portion of the financial trouble can be attributed to the RHBF, USPS is still incurring other losses that would result in a net loss in some fiscal years even if the RHBF mandate did not exist.

    Buying stamps or other merchandise from the USPS gift store will save the post office.

    Probably false. Sorry.

    Don’t get me wrong. Definitely shop at the USPS gift store. There’s some cool stuff in there (like this crop top, which is currently sold out, but maybe your dog needs a postal carrier costume).

    But the billions of dollars USPS needs to become financially stable is probably not going to come from profits on USPS merchandise, assuming there’s even enough stock of that merchandise to begin with.

    And buying stamps is nice. But unless you’re throwing those stamps away and buying new stamps when you actually need them, you’re not actually increasing USPS’s revenue. You’re just shifting when they receive the money. Rather than pay for a stamp when you need it in the future, you’ve paid for it now. So USPS has more income now, but less later.

    I know this one’s a real Debbie Downer, but it’s good to be realistic about what actually will help and what won’t.

    The new Postmaster General is a big donor and partisan operative, Louis DeJoy.

    True.

    Louis DeJoy is a large donor to President Trump and the Republican National Committee. But Trump is not the first president to put a large donor in a key position. It is also worth noting that DeJoy is the first postmaster general in two decades who has not risen through the ranks of USPS in some other capacity before being appointed to the position. To DeJoy’s credit, he does have a long career in logistics and operations, which is the key area of expertise needed for managing the expansive, complex network of our mailing system.

    The appointment of DeJoy was entirely Trump’s choice alone without any checks or balances.

    False.

    The Postmaster General is selected by the Board of Governors. The Board of Governors is appointed by the president with advice and consent of the senate. No more than 5 of the 10 Governors may be from the same party. There are currently multiple vacancies on the board. At the time that DeJoy was appointed, three were Republican and one was Democrat. DeJoy was unanimously selected by that board. DeJoy was appointed in early May, and did not fully transition into his position until June. An additional Democrat and an additional Republican have been appointed since then.

    USPS just started having these problems since Dejoy started.

    Half-true.

    USPS has definitely been experiencing some problems with service lately. And below I get into some specific allegations. But USPS’s service woes cannot be entirely attributed to DeJoy and his policies.

    Many communities, for example, experienced significant delays and even some non-deliveries during their primary elections this year, long before DeJoy took his role. Issues have ranged from changing operations to avoid COVID-19 spread, workforce shortage due to COVID-19 quarantines and illness, working out kinks of handling mail voting where it’s new or increased substantially, and managing the influx of packages due to increased online shopping.

    There also have been some changes to delivery policies since July that have slowed service. These changes were put into place by DeJoy. However, they generally fall into a few categories:

    • Stay on schedule

    • No overtime

    • No errors

    • No duplicate work

    Those elements aren’t a recipe for disaster; to the contrary, they’re the main ingredients to staying organized and cost-efficient. And while people are panicking because the document suggests mail will be left to sit, the document is clear:

    One aspect of these changes that may be difficult for employees is that — temporarily — we may see mail left behind[], which is not typical. We will address root causes of these delay and adjust the very next day. Any mail left behind must be properly reported, and employees should ensure this action is taken with integrity and action.

    The key word being temporarily. The context of the document supports that mail is not intended to sit for days. A piece of mail may be left behind on one day merely because it missed the boat, so to speak, but it will be delivered the next day.

    DeJoy fired the whole leadership team of USPS in a Friday Night Massacre.

    False.

    This is in reference to the Saturday Night Massacre, when Nixon fired several high level staffers or forced them to resign in an attempt to cover up the Watergate Scandal. DeJoy did make some changes to the leadership of USPS when he became Postmaster General. But leadership changes when there’s a new Postmaster General is not unusual. In fact, the previous Postmaster General, Megan Brennan, made her own leadership changes when she took the position in 2015 and made leadership changes again in January 2019.

    “The announcement on Friday set forth a change to organizational structure only,” USPS spokesman David Partenheimer told Motherboard. “The announcement did not include any terminations or layoffs and very specifically stated that the changes did not initiate a reduction in force and there were no immediate impacts to USPS employees.”

    Source.

    In fact when you compare the organizational charts from before and after the announcement, you can see that most of the changes are actually promotions of existing staff in a slightly different organizational structure. So it would be misleading to liken the situation to a Saturday Night Massacre.

    DeJoy is making illegal or unethical investments in competitors of USPS.

    To be determined.

    DeJoy and his wife own stock in companies that have a stake in the package delivery business. $30 million is in his former company, XPO Logistics, and he recently bought stock options on Amazon.

    Former director of the Office of Government Ethics, Walter Shaub, says the situation “doesn’t pass the smell test.” The law prohibits officers of independent agencies like USPS from having financial interests in companies that intersect with their official duties, which has been interpreted to include possession or transactions of stocks. 18 U.S.C. 208.

    But Peter Schweizer, president of the Government Accountability Institute, told USA TODAY, “The postmaster general is not required to divest of all of his assets in these kinds of investments. However, he needs to steer clear of decisions that would materially benefit the companies he is invested in.”

    The Inspector General for the USPS — the watchdog who ensures there’s no waste, fraud, or corruption — is already opening an investigation and will make the final determination.

    USPS is (re)moving blue mail collection boxes.

    True, but for cost-efficiency reasons, and they almost immediately stopped.

    A wild panic spread through social media on Friday, August 14, because people were sharing photographs of piles of blue mail collection boxes being hauled away. USPS admitted that it was removing some mail collection boxes, and transferring some to other locations.

    First, some of the images floating around social media are misleading or have false captions. (False information on social media? Shocker!) So don’t believe everything you see on social media; stop sharing unless you can verify.

    Second, USPS has already paused removal and transfer of collection boxes until after the election. It realized they were causing a panic, and will delay its actions until a later date when people are less paranoid.

    Next, let’s discuss the rationale. People panicked because they assumed this was a tyrannical attempt to prevent mail voting. But there are costs associated with a low-use collect box, and there may come a time when the collection box become too much of a cost burden. It costs money to travel to and check a collection box that sits empty or collects very few envelopes. And collection boxes are moved all the time to adjust to the ebb and flow of mail volume. Given USPS’s financial crisis, it seems reasonable to believe that these changes were to increase efficiency.

    However, a local news station in Montana checked on what collection boxes had been removed. Despite the justification that these mail collection boxes were rarely used, the boxes were in high traffic areas: outside a grocery story, next to a University, in downtown Missoula, etc.

    In Morristown, New Jersey, there was similar panic. But it turns out that those collection boxes were replaced the next day with new collection boxes that are more secure to prevent “fishing” (dropping a string with an adhesive into the box to pull out the mail already deposited inside of it).

    So hopefully DeJoy will have some sort of public statement to explain how he has determined which collection boxes should be moved.

    USPS was destroying mail-sorting machines used to sort mail-in ballots.

    True, but likely for cost-efficiency reasons.

    So, yes, USPS is deactivating mail-sorting machines that sort some types of mail, including mail ballots. Some of these are being relocated, but there does appear to be an outright reduction going on with the remainder being dismantled. But despite the phrasing by Vice that the documentation shows “plans to hobble mail sorting,” the intention does not appear to be to slow the sorting of mail.

    Vice does have the good sense to note that the plan to reorganize and rightsize the sorting machines is dated May 15, a month before DeJoy took office and less than a week after the Board of Governors announced his selection. Not only that, but the document shows that earlier deadlines were missed and gives extended deadlines, which implies that this plan had already been around for quite some time.

    And other facts back the reasoning of the plan. The type of mail these machines sort are decreasing in volume, including down more than 15% just this year compared to last year.

    In other words, DBCSs have less mail to sort than they ever have before and it’s far from clear how much of that mail is ever coming back. So it stands to reason the USPS might not need as many of them.

    The necessity and prior existence of this plan is further enforced by the Inspector General’s September 2019 report on processing network optimization. The report describes how USPS has been trying, and failing, to consolidate processing and rightsize infrastructure in order to reduce costs. In fact, the issue has been researched since as early as 2012 by the Government Accountability Office, and the volume of mail has only declined further since then.

    This action also aligns with the five-year strategic plan that was published before DeJoy was even selected: “Continuously optimize location of network processing operations and equipment as mail volumes decline and parcel volumes increase.”

    Postal workers argue that USPS should keep the machines, but not use them, in the off chance that they’re needed or parts can be used to fix ones that are being used. I see the reasoning in that, so I would like to hear more from DeJoy on this as well.

    USPS told election officials that voters’ ballots won’t arrive in time to be counted.

    True, but not in the way you think.

    This one is mostly a miscommunication issue. USPS has warned 46 states about how it can handle election mail. But the letters are an attempt to preserve the election, rather than undermine it.

    When local election officials distribute pre-paid postage envelopes with absentee ballots, they have two options: use First Class Mail or use Marketing Mail. First Class Mail is more expensive but faster (2–5), whereas Marketing Mail is cheaper but slower (3–10 days).

    Apparently, USPS has informally treated both types of election mail the same, expediting both whenever possible. So local election officials have been opting for Marketing Mail in order to save on costs. (Side bar: elections are funded at the local level and chronically underfunded.)

    But USPS cannot do that anymore, because it’s costly. And therefore, election mail will be treated as its paid category. This means some election officials may be advising voters to return ballots on timelines that wouldn’t actually meet the state law’s deadlines. For example, many election officials are saying to return mail ballots a week ahead of time; but seven days might not be enough time for some Marketing Mail, which could take up to ten.

    So, again, the letter from USPS was an attempt to warn election officials and preserve the election, rather undermine it. If DeJoy had wanted to undermine the election, he simply could have chosen not to warn the election officials at all.

    These changes are motivated entirely by partisan attempts to shut down mail voting during COVID-19 and rig the election.

    I can see why you would think that, but I don’t think so. Trump claims a lot of stupid things, and some of these changes were contemplated long before DeJoy, or even Trump.

    This is the part I’ve been building up to.

    Let’s start with Trump. People have claimed that Trump wants to slow down mail delivery through DeJoy in order to rig the election. Trump, being who he is, proved them right by admitting it in public. He stated that he didn’t want to give USPS money because it would enable them to deliver mail ballots more efficiently. Trump is a malicious, authoritarian jerk; I’m not denying that. But Trump says a lot of stupid things, like Mexico will pay for walls and COVID-19 will be over in a month. And he technically has no control over DeJoy; only the Board of Governors does.

    The $25 billion under negotiation for the post office isn’t actually for mail ballots, but for forgone revenues due to COVID-19. And mail ballots will still get delivered through November. Multiple election experts, including Secretaries of State like Minnesota’s Steve Simon state that they believe USPS will be able to handle the volume of election mail this year, despite the increased amount and COVID-19. As Kevin Kosar argues, “USPS delivers 2.8 billion mail pieces per week. Even if 275 million individuals cast ballots by mail the USPS could handle it.” (Currently, approximately 209 million individuals could theoretically do so, so Kosar is being generous.)

    Postal Service spokesman David Partenheimer told FactCheck.org in late June that “the current financial condition is not going to impact [USPS’s] ability to deliver election and political mail this year.” And DeJoy made a similar statement to the Board of Governors earlier this month:

    [L]et me be clear that with regard to Election Mail, the Postal Service and I are fully committed to fulfilling our role in the electoral process. If public policy makers choose to utilize the mail as a part of their election system, we will do everything we can to deliver Election Mail in a timely manner consistent with our operational standards. We do ask election officials and voters to be mindful of the time that it takes for us to deliver ballots, whether it is a blank ballot going to a voter or a completed ballot going back to election officials. We have delivery standards that have been in place for many years. These standards have not changed, and despite any assertions to the contrary, we are not slowing down Election Mail or any other mail. Instead, we continue to employ a robust and proven process to ensure proper handling of all Election Mail.

    So mail is not being intentionally slowed. Rather, the USPS now has a Postmaster General who is very serious about making cost-efficiency savings, and is in an environment where it has to do it as soon as possible. It’s a perfect storm. There are changes happening to our postal system because it’s been needed for a long time, and USPS cannot wait any longer to make cost-saving changes without becoming insolvent within a year. USPS has needed reforms, and several have been contemplated. The Government Accountability Office noted in 2017 that no cost savings initiatives had been planned, but were likely necessary to ensure financial sustainability of USPS.

    Good, fast, cheap. Choose two.

    But without legislative action to save USPS, and with no chance of increasing revenues enough due to COVID-19, DeJoy’s only choice is to cut costs. And DeJoy’s other actions match that his intentions are only to do what he can to save USPS, not anything malicious. For example, in July he issued a statement that USPS would need to better adhere to its operations plans to keep costs low, and he asked Congress for legislative relief. Last week, he restructured the organization to be more efficient, and has made an additional public statement on the need for Congress to “enact reform legislation that addresses our unaffordable payments” to the RHBF. Just yesterday DeJoy issued a temporary price increase on non-retail commercial packages in order to increase revenue.

    Maybe this all is a pretext hiding a massive conspiracy that managed to fool the two democratic Governors of USPS. That seems unlikely though. It seems more likely to me that we have a president who shoots off his mouth and a logistics expert in charge of a postal agency in financial crisis.

    USPS is an essential public service. It should not have to fund itself or earn a profit. Congress should fund it instead.

    This is an opinion, not a fact check, but since you brought it up: Yes and No.

    Let’s assume that USPS is an essential public service. This is a relatively safe assumption since Americans think it’s the most important role in our current COVID-19 world. 91% of Democrats and 91% of Republicans favorably view the agency. And USPS is heavily relied upon by business, including Amazon, UPS, and Fed Ex, to carry their package the last mile to residences and rural businesses that aren’t served by other parcel carriers.

    Should Congress fund it? I think that’s a double edged sword. I think it’s smart to keep such a crucial, independent agency sufficient with its own funding. I would hate to see USPS slowed or shut down due to severe budget cuts or a government shutdown. On the other hand, one time emergency funding wouldn’t be a bad idea.

    Regardless, DeJoy doesn’t have control over that. His job is to balance the budget. Only Congress can decide whether and how to provide USPS any funding.

    Long Story Short: What if Postmaster General Louis DeJoy is the good guy?

    What’s happening is likely innocent but controversial actions happening at a very bad time. It is possible that some people, like President Trump, have malicious intentions. But so far, DeJoy only appears to only be executing plans that have long been recommended and responding to a budgetary crisis exacerbated by COVID-19.

    Because if he doesn’t take action now, it substantially increases the likelihood that our future elections will be compromised and that we stop receiving important mailed items like stimulus checks, tax refunds, medicines, and more.

    A lack of communication and understanding by the public, combined with a volatile political atmosphere, has made people panic that there is some kind of authoritarian seizure happening. We should be worried about the financial future of USPS, but not panicking as if there is an imminent crisis.

    There are many, manymany things to be worried about right now. Don’t burn yourself out by panicking over this. Keep your fire lit for another fight.

    The House Oversight Committee has announced that it will hold a hearing on mail delays on August 24. It has invited Postmaster General DeJoy to testify, as well as the Chair of the Board of Governors. I hope that people’s questions get answered. Additionally, the House plans to take a vote on the Delivering for America Act.

    What you can actually do to help

    1. Ask your Senator to provide short-term emergency funding, as well as long-term solutions to ensure USPS’s financial stability. A one-time appropriation is not enough. Some examples of how to do this includes some ideas from this opinion article. Many people are supporting H.R.2382, the USPS Fairness Act, which the House has already passed. But as explained above, this Act would not solve all of USPS’s financial woes. Additional financial issues would still need to be addressed, either by continuing cost-efficiency changes or through additional sources of revenues, like Congressional funding. You may also wish to express support for the Delivering for America Act, though that Act will not provide any funding to USPS (emergency or sustaining).

    2. Do not let the Senate say “no” to emergency funding for USPS.

    3. Also ask your U.S. Representative and Senator, as well as President Trump, to ask the Postmaster General to pause any further efficiency changes until after the November election. Also ask that Postmaster General DeJoy be fully transparent about what changes will happen when and the rationale behind each change. Communication with elected officials, election officials, and the public should be frequent.

    4. If you encounter significant postal service interruptions (e.g., more delay than just a day or so), contact your local post office. If they are unresponsive, contact state and federal legislators to let them know you’re worried. State legislators have no power over USPS, but might be good conduits to help you be heard by federal legislators. Also consider contacting your local press.

    5. Request your absentee ballot ASAP and return it at least ten days before Election Day, preferably sooner if you can. Learn about mail voting in your state and important dates.

    6. If you are willing and able, become a poll worker. Election officials are going through a crisis due to a lack of poll workers. In the past, poll workers often have been older and retired Americans, who now are unable or unwilling to be poll workers due to risks associated with COVID-19.

    7. If you’re still worried about your absentee ballot not arriving in time to be counted this fall, you can also drop it off in person. The location varies, but it’s usually with a city or county official. Contact your local elections office to check where to hand deliver it. If you don’t know your local elections office, contact your state elections office for help. However, if many voters return their ballot this way in the last week before the election, there likely will be large numbers of people consolidated and traveling through local election offices, defeating the purpose of using mail voting to avoid the spread of COVID-19. I encourage folks to watch how things develop over the next few weeks to see if their confidence in USPS is restored.

    Thank you to Kevin Kosar for his tweets sharing his perspective on the situation and willingness to help point me to sources providing much of the information and context in this post.

  • "No One Gets Out Of This Thing Sober" – Watch Night 1 Of The Democratic National Convention Live
    “No One Gets Out Of This Thing Sober” – Watch Night 1 Of The Democratic National Convention Live

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 20:50

    It’s that time again. The Democratic National Convention will be almost entirely virtual this year, though the campaign press corps has descended on Milwaukee, along with reams of party functionaries and hangers-on, the city’s businesses aren’t expecting the economic windfall typically associated with big conventions like this.

    Overshadowed by the coronavirus, campaign aides have clearly tried to stir up “buzz” by telling the press (off the record, of course) that Biden might make a “surprise” in-person appearance despite committing to deliver his keynote virtually.

    As we await the endless parade of canned, boilerplate speeches, it seems like the most exciting thing about the convention – at least, as far as we can tell – will be seeing whether Biden can pull off a repeat of the Harris VP announcement. Unfortunately, Biden won’t be speaking until Thursday.

    Tonight’s agenda is capped by Bernie and Michelle Obama who, as we have already been told this evening, will explain that Joe – who forgot how many grandkids he had today – will “beat the pandemic and rescue the economy”…

    Watch Live here…

    To help spice things up between now and then, journalist and author Matt Taibbi has devised “the Official 2020 Democratic National Convention Drinking Game.”

    As Taibbi explains, the only succor from an endless stream of sanctimonious speeches decrying the “existential threat” President Trump poses to the future of the Republic is alcohol. And in keeping with a tradition to which Taibbi contributed during his time as an editor at Rolling Stone, we hope you’re ready to start drinking early.

    To be sure, the Democrats will give us plenty of material to work with. Taibbi’s first rule is to drink every time a convention speaker says the word ‘historic’.

    Turn on your TV to CNN or MSNBC right now. The odds aren’t bad – I’d put them at 7-2 – that the word “historic” is in the chyron. You will hear this word five thousand times, at minimum, per day of convention coverage. Out of respect for human life, you’ll therefore be asked to drink to “history” or “historic” only when uttered by actual convention speakers. I hope readers understand, without it being included on the list, that any mention of “Malarkey” is an automatic drink.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Without further ado, drink EVERY TIME to:

    1. “Post office,” or any variation thereof (i.e. “postal service” or “mailbox”).

    2. “Soul of America.”

    3. “History” or “Historic.” Drink only when uttered by a convention speaker.

    4. “Existential threat.”

    5. “This president.”

    6. “Let me be clear.” Double shot if what comes after is not clear.

    7. “Access,” as in “access to affordable health care” or “access to a good education.” You may drink twice if this comes in conjunction with an argument about “opportunity.”

    8. “Systemic,” “systematic,” “structural,” “fundamental,” or “fundamentally.” Double-shot if the words are uttered by someone who has never voted for or supported a systemic reform.

    9. Someone speaks positively of a Clinton (h/t to @percandidate).

    10. “This is not who we are.”

    11. “Above the law.”

    12. (Something something) Mitch McConnell, (something something) is a human right.

    13. “Trump is (rehearsed witticism).” Also, “golf.”

    14. Russia.

    15. Birther.

    16. (Attempts to speak Spanish)

    17. Unity/civility.

    18. “Uncharted waters.” Drunk rum if you have it here, and yell “Aargh” like a pirate (h/t to @C00LDad77).

    19. “Democracy itself.”

    Drink ONCE PER HOUR to:

    1. “Racist,” or “Black Lives.”

    2. “Lies.”

    BONUS RULE: Drink every time someone blames Trump for coronavirus deaths. Make your own group judgment as to whether or not the blame is deserved.

    WOKE MAD LIBS EXCEPTION: If an MSNBC commentator or a speaker uses any of the following terms, you may stop drinking for an hour to “reclaim” your sobriety: performative, white-adjacent, Latinx, decolonize, invisibilize, solidarity, interrogate, normalize, privilege (as a verb), dismantle, erase, lived experience, (anything)-splaining, heteronormative, habitus, cultural appropriation, essentialist, or trigger.

    Genderfuck or melanated ends the game.  

    And for those who prefer the “Bingo” format.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Finally, now that we got the important stuff out of the way, here’s the schedule for tonight, with the first speaker, Amy Klobuchar, slated to kick things off at 9pmET. Former First Lady Michelle Obama will wrap things up as Monday night’s headliner.

    • Sen. Amy Klobuchar
    • Sen. Catherine Cortez Masto
    • Governor Andrew Cuomo
    • Governor Gretchen Whitmer
    • Representative Jim Clyburn
    • Convention Chairman Bennie Thompson
    • Representative Gwen Moore
    • Senator Doug Jones
    • Performance by Maggie Rogers
    • Performance by Leon Bridges
    • Senator Bernie Sanders
    • Former First Lady Michelle Obama

  • "A Mistake" – Stanford Slammed For Scrapping Admission Tests For Medical Students
    “A Mistake” – Stanford Slammed For Scrapping Admission Tests For Medical Students

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 20:30

    Authored b Ben Zeisloft via Campus Reform,

    Several of Stanford University’s graduate programs, which rank among the best in the United States, removed or revised their admissions requirements in response to difficulties presented by the COVID-19 pandemic.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Most notably, Stanford’s School of Medicine will not require students to take the Medical College Admission Test (MCAT), the standardized test for medical degree candidates. Stanford Medicine said that applications can be submitted without the MCAT through September 30, 2020 “in fairness to all applicants.”

    The school said that with the exception of the MCAT, all other admissions requirements will remain the same.

    U.S. News and World Report ranked Stanford Medicine as the fourth-best medical school for research in the United States, falling only behind Harvard University, Johns Hopkins University, and the University of Pennsylvania. Stanford tied with New York University for the No. 4 spot.

    Meanwhile, Stanford’s physics department will not have to submit scores for the Graduate Record Examinations (GRE) or the GRE subject test in physics. In 2018, Stanford tied with the Massachusetts Institute of Technology for the best graduate school for physics in the country.

    Sean Hartnoll, director of graduate studies at the physics department, told the Stanford Daily that there were too many obstacles to take the GRE due to COVID-19.

    “The faculty felt that, this year in particular, that the additional obstacles that the GRE presents due to COVID…combined with the other reasons for being skeptical about the usefulness of the GRE warranted removing the GRE as a requirement for this year’s applicants, to be revisited later,” Hartnoll said.

    Stanford’s Graduate School of Business will accept scores for online versions of standardized exams.

    Kirsten Moss, assistant dean and Director of M.B.A. Admissions and Financial Aid at the Graduate School of Business, told applicants that there is “much” out of the applicant’s control.

    “We understand that due to the COVID-19 pandemic, so much is changing, and so fast,” said Moss. “There is much that may be out of an applicant’s control. Rest assured that we understand this, and will evaluate every applicant’s candidacy with this in mind.”

    The Stanford College Republicans said in a statement to Campus Reform that it disagrees with the move.

    “The move by Stanford’s medical school to drop the MCAT is a mistake. America needs her future doctors to be the most knowledgeable and well trained in the world. Out of Stanford medical school come many of the doctors and researchers on the front lines of working to combat the China Virus,” the group said, adding that “it’d be a shame if unqualified applicants come to Stanford as a result of this policy and we suffer the consequences in the coming decades.”

    National Association of Scholars Communications Coordinator Chance Layton also expressed concern regarding Stanford’s move.

    Layton explained that even during the COVID-19 pandemic, there still needs to be a baseline standard for admission.

    “All college programs should have some baseline for a standardized assessment of applicants. The GRE and MCAT provide that,” Layton told Campus Reform. “They are expensive, and I am sure test dates have been moved and canceled repeatedly throughout the year due to COVID.”

    Layton said he isn’t necessarily concerned that the schools are being too “generous to the extraordinary circumstances some students face,” but rather that they are “scratching to eliminate the use of standardized tests entirely in applications.”

    “This will, for one, make admissions even less transparent,” Layton said.

    Layton pointed to a particular quote by Hartnoll from the Stanford Daily’s article: “Combined with the other reasons for being skeptical about the usefulness of the GRE warranted removing the GRE as a requirement for this year’s applicants, to be revisited later.”

    Layton said that this mentality “would erode the quality of higher education.”

    Though other indicators of intellect and potential success exist, “none are as easily quantifiable as standardized test scores.”

    “Many schools are likely using this opportunity as an easy workaround for developing what they call a more ‘holistic’ approach to applicants,” Layton continued.

    “Don’t believe it for a second. This gives schools free rein to discriminate without barriers between intellectually diverse and successful students, and those they really want on campus.”

  • Viral Videos Show Huge 'Back To Campus' College Parties Despite COVID-19 Bans In Effect
    Viral Videos Show Huge ‘Back To Campus’ College Parties Despite COVID-19 Bans In Effect

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 20:10

    Students are returning to their newly re-opened college campuses across the nation this week (though many others have gone online-only for Fall), and already the parties are in full swing, despite administrators warning against violating new strict social distancing guidelines. 

    As we earlier detailed, “no parties, no trips” COVID-19 rules are in effect for a number of universities in order to ensure in-person classes can resume, but also as predicted — there’s simply no way this can ultimately be enforced, as The Hill now reports: 

    Local officials have condemned viral videos of returning students attending parties without masks or physical distancing on university campuses around the country.

    The videos were taking at such colleges as Oklahoma State and the University of North Georgia.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Welcome back to school America: college towns are getting flooded with… restless and ready to let loose college students, as one might fully expect. 

    As videos showing massive parties and packed-out bars go viral, they’re coming under condemnation from mayors and town councils and county health officials amid fears that ‘back to school’ will only exponentially grow and further the pandemic.

    Here’s the mayor of Tuscaloosa, Alabama voicing his frustration:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Also perhaps to be expected among carefree young revelers, there’s not a mask in sight in the series of videos making the rounds.

    And here’s another viral video showing that though university campuses can roll out with all the stringent social distancing protocol they want, there’s nothing they can do in terms of what takes place far off campus:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This is reportedly putting more pressure on city and country police departments to enforce civic measures in place, such as mask codes and limitations on gatherings.

    Last week the Associated Press detailed the dilemma facing colleges as follows:

    “As they struggle to salvage some semblance of a campus experience this fall, U.S. colleges are requiring promises from students to help contain the coronavirus — no keg parties, no long road trips and no outside guests on campus.”

    The report added: “No kidding. Administrators warn that failure to wear masks, practice social distancing and avoid mass gatherings could bring serious consequences, including getting booted from school.”

    Perhaps administrators are even now preparing to pour over social media videos seeking to identify the defiant no-party rule breakers. But judging by the large numbers, with off-campus parties attracting students in the hundreds or even thousands, schools are clearly facing an uphill battle on the rules-enforcement front.

    * * *

  • "Gosh Almighty": Democrats Call To End Durham Investigation Despite Proven Criminal Conduct
    “Gosh Almighty”: Democrats Call To End Durham Investigation Despite Proven Criminal Conduct

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 19:50

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    Below is my column in the Hill on the announced criminal plea by former FBI lawyer Kevin Clinesmith and the continued calls by Democratic leaders to end the John Durham investigation. This week I discussed the call of Andrew Weissmann, one of the top prosecutors with Special Counsel Robert Mueller, for DOJ lawyers to refuse to help in the investigation despite his own conflict of interest. When the Clinesmith plea was announced, Weissmann proceeded to deride the charge and make spurious legal and factual claims about its basis.  The Weissmann call for DOJ lawyers to hinder this investigation is unprofessional and unwarranted but hardly uncommon in this rage-filled environment.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here is the column:

    “Gosh almighty.”

    Those words from former Vice President Joe Biden sum up plenty about the announced criminal plea by former FBI lawyer Kevin Clinesmith. Of course, Biden was not referring to the implications of the FBI lawyer who lied to the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act court for the efforts to continue the surveillance of an adviser to the campaign of Donald Trump. Nor was he referring to growing evidence that the Russia investigation was launched based on false and flawed evidence.

    Biden was referring to the federal investigation by United States Attorney John Durham that led to the criminal plea by Clinesmith. Like most other Democrats, Biden previously denounced the investigation and the effort to look into criminality. Now that criminality has been found, Democrats and commentators still insist there are no reasons to continue it.

    From the start, Democrats overwhelmingly condemned the investigation despite admitting Durham is a respected prosecutor. Leaders like House Intelligence Committee Chairman Adam Schiff deemed the investigation “tainted” and “political.” Biden mocked the very idea of an “investigation of the investigators” and added, “Give me a break. Gosh almighty.”

    These are the same figures who repeatedly cited plea agreements in the special counsel investigation by Robert Mueller as proof that real crimes were waiting to be found. When the plea by former White House national security adviser Michael Flynn was announced, it was seen as the critical development even though FBI agents said they did not believe Flynn had intentionally lied about his conversations with Russian diplomats.

    Many in the media cited the plea by Flynn to disprove the insistence by Trump that the Mueller investigation was a hoax. But they are not citing the plea by Clinesmith to disprove the statement by Biden. Indeed, they have barely covered it. It does not appear to matter that Clinesmith said “viva la resistance” after the 2016 election or that, after claiming he was devastated by the victory of Trump, he lamented that “my god damned name was all over those legal documents investigating his staff.”

    But several Democrats and commentators maintained there was never a targeting of the campaign before the special counsel appointment. That was untrue. Declassified documents show that an agent was used with a national security briefing of Trump and his aides during the campaign to gather information for the Russia investigation. Who did the agent report to? Clinesmith and Peter Strzok at the FBI, who infamously referred to his own “insurance” with the chance that Trump might be elected.

    This is a plea agreement so it is not known what information Clinesmith may have shared. Moreover, this is just the first public move by Durham, just as Flynn was the early salvo for Mueller. But the date of this criminal false statement is key. In September 2016, administration officials leaked the existence of the classified investigation in the midst of the campaign and suggested Trump adviser Carter Page was a Russian agent.

    This secret surveillance started the next month, based on that allegation against Page, when he was in fact an American asset. The FISA court was never told that information in the surveillance application was derived in part from the dossier, or that it was paid for by the opposition campaign. Nor was it told that at the time, FBI agents challenged both the bias and credibility for the dossier author and past British spy Christopher Steele, who was known to have given interviews for the media and claimed that he was trying to defeat Trump and assist the Clinton campaign.

    In January 2017, Trump was inaugurated and FBI agents had sought to end their investigation of Flynn, citing no evidence of a crime. However, Strzok evidently wanted the collusion investigation to remain open and, later that month, Clinesmith also sought to renew that surveillance order over Page. His FISA application expressly cited the Steele dossier and described it as credible, despite knowing the different findings by FBI agents.

    In February 2017, there were more leaks about alleged collusion by Trump officials with the Russians, a claim that even Strzok said was unsupported. The FBI was finding no evidence of collusion, while there was pressure to end the investigation. In June 2017, Clinesmith falsified an email in a third FISA application. What he was able to hide from the court was incredible. The court was told that Page might be a Russian asset for a conspiracy to influence the election as Clinesmith was told that Page was an American asset who was working by meeting with Russians. Clinesmith altered one critical email to state otherwise and extend the investigation.

    When Clinesmith took this criminal action, the Russia collusion theory had already fallen apart. Both former Deputy Attorney General Rod Rosenstein and former Acting Attorney General Sally Yates declared they would never have signed off on all the surveillance applications if they knew then what they know today. Rosenstein called for the Durham investigation to finish, while Yates called for accountability for all of the misconduct.

    With news of the criminal plea by Clinesmith, one might expect the media and our members of Congress to demand the same vigorous investigation from Durham as they did from Mueller. The collusion allegations that were noted to launch the Russia investigation were after all ultimately rejected. Durham is by contrast investigating the bias and misconduct.

    So we have a collusion investigation that was shown to be based on false or unreliable information. It was launched and maintained by officials who were accused by an inspector general of misconduct, false statements, or procedural errors. Today we have the actual criminal guilty plea. However, many voices in Washington continue to insist that there are no reasons for Durham to continue digging.

    As Biden says, “Gosh almighty.”

  • Delinquent FHA Mortgages Soar By Record 60% To All Time High, As Homeowner Budgets Implode
    Delinquent FHA Mortgages Soar By Record 60% To All Time High, As Homeowner Budgets Implode

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 19:30

    Last month we quoted from Wolf Richter to remind readers of something we discussed several months ago when we went over the details of the forbearance process and why so many banks have chosen to use it instead of rushing to admit their balance sheets are hammered with a record surge in delinquencies and defaults. As a reminder, “mortgages that are in forbearance and have not missed a payment before going into forbearance don’t count as delinquent. They’re reported as “current.” And 8.2% of all mortgages in the US, some 4.1 million loans, are currently in forbearance according to the Mortgage Bankers Association. But if they did not miss a payment before entering forbearance, they don’t count in the suddenly spiking delinquency data.”

    Everything changed in April when there was a sudden onslaught of delinquencies according to CoreLogic, which came after 27 months in a row of declining delinquency rates. These delinquency rates move in stages – and the early stages are now getting hit, with the Transition from “Current” to 30-days past due suddenly soaring.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To wit, in April, the share of all mortgages that were past due, but less than 30 days, soared to 3.4% of all mortgages, the highest in the data going back to 1999. This was up from 0.7% in April last year. During the Housing Bust, this rate peaked in November 2008 at 2% (chart via CoreLogic):

    Fast forward to today, when the dam of pent up mortgage delinquencies cracked some more, with the Federal Housing Administration reporting that its mortgages which represent the affordable path to homeownership for many first-time buyers, minorities and low-income Americans, now have the highest delinquency rate in at least four decades.

    The share of delinquent FHA loans rose to 15.7% in the second quarter, up a whopping 60% from about 9.7% in the previous three months and the highest level in records dating back to 1979, the Mortgage Bankers Association said Monday. The delinquency rate for conventional loans, by comparison, was 6.7%.

    With million of Americans losing their jobs due to the covid shutdowns, they have become reliant on government stimulus checks which continue thanks to Trump’s executive orders but were notably slashed. It is those Americans on the lower end of the income scale are most likely to have FHA loans, which allow borrowers with shaky credit to buy homes with small down payments.

    Still, despite their inability to pay, most remain protected from foreclosure by the federal forbearance program, in which borrowers with pandemic-related hardships can delay payments for as much as a year without penalty. What happens when the program ends finally ends and when several months of payments (or more) are due at once is a world which few want to even imagine.

    According to Bloomberg, New Jersey had the highest FHA delinquency rate, at 20%.

    The state also had the biggest increase in the overall late-payment rate, jumping to 11% in the second quarter from 4.7%. Following were Nevada, New York, Florida and Hawaii — all states with a high proportion of leisure and hospitality jobs that were especially hard-hit by the pandemic, the MBA said.

    At the same time, the delinquency rate for all mortgage loans on one-to-four-unit residential properties soared to 8.22% of all loans outstanding at the end of the second quarter of 2020, according to the Mortgage Bankers Association’s National Delinquency Survey.

    The delinquency rate increased nearly 4%, or 386 basis points, from the first quarter of 2020 and was up 369 basis points from one year ago. For the purposes of the survey, MBA asks servicers to report loans in forbearance as delinquent if the payment was not made based on the original terms of the mortgage.

    “The COVID-19 pandemic’s effects on some homeowners’ ability to make their mortgage payments could not be more apparent. The nearly 4 percentage point jump in the delinquency rate was the biggest quarterly rise in the history of MBA’s survey,” said Marina Walsh, MBA’s Vice President of Industry Analysis. “The second quarter results also mark the highest overall delinquency rate in nine years, and a survey-high delinquency rate for FHA loans.”

    What’s even more ominous is that while millions of “forbeared” loans remain delayed from entering the delinquency pipeline,  Walsh said that “there was also a movement of loans to later stages of delinquency, with the 60-day delinquency rate reaching a new survey-high, and the 90+-day delinquency rate climbing to its highest level since the third quarter of 2010.

  • States To Sue Trump Over USPS Cuts As Pelosi Cancels Vacation For $25B Emergency Infusion
    States To Sue Trump Over USPS Cuts As Pelosi Cancels Vacation For $25B Emergency Infusion

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 19:10

    Over a dozen states are expected to sue the Trump administration as early as this week over cuts at the US Postal Service they claim could delay mail-in ballots for the November elections, according to Maryland Attorney General Brian Frosh.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “We are talking with other AG offices and expecting to take action soon,” he said, telling Reuters that he expects between 15 to 20 Democratic attorneys general will join in one – or possibly several lawsuits after exploring legal options.

    Last week President Trump voiced his opposition to Democratic efforts to shoehorn funds for the Postal Service and election infrastructure into the next coronavirus relief package, while devoting a considerable amount of time on the theory that mail-in voting during the pandemic would lead to widespread voting fraud.

    Earlier this month, Postmanster General Louis Dejoy announced ‘sweeping overhaul’ which Democrats have suggested could hinder mail-in voting and benefit President Trump.

    Democrats have cited reductions in overtime, restrictions on extra mail transportation trips and new mail sorting and delivery policies as changes that threaten to slow mail delivery of ballots and other critical mail such as medicines. –Reuters

    On Monday, Trump denied accusations that he was attempting to interfere with the USPS’s ability to handle the massive influx of mail-in ballots expected due to the coronavirus.

    “No, we’re not tampering,” Trump told Fox News in a Monday interview. “We want to make it run for less money, much better, always taking care of our postal workers.”

    Ohio Attorney General Dave Yost, a Republican, has asked Trump to postpone the operational changes until after the Nov. 3 elections. The post office is a “perennial drain on the Treasury,” he said in a letter. “But making the radical changes only weeks before early voting begins – however fiscally well founded – would place the solvency of the Post Office above the legitimacy of the government itself.” –Reuters

    Meanwhile, House Speaker Nancy Pelosi (D-CA) put down the ice cream and called on the House to return early from August recess in order to vote on an emergency package for the $25 billion House Democrats included in their coronavirus bill in May – along with an additional $3.6 billion to fund election security.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “The Postal Service is a pillar of our democracy, enshrined in the Constitution and essential for providing critical services: delivering prescriptions, Social Security checks, paychecks, tax returns and absentee ballots to millions of Americans, including in our most remote communities,” Pelosi wrote in a Sunday statement announcing the early return from vacation.

    “Alarmingly, across the nation, we see the devastating effects of the President’s campaign to sabotage the election by manipulating the Postal Service to disenfranchise voters,” the note continues.

    Pelosi has called on other House members to join her in a Day of Action – appearing at their districts’ post offices to protest the planned overhaul, according to Business Insider.

    Senate Minority Leader Chuck Schumer (D-NY) has similarly called on Majority Leader Mitch McConnell (R-KY) to reconvene the Senate as well.

    “I call on Leader McConnell to bring the Senate back into session to quickly act on the House’s legislation that will undo the extensive damage Mr. DeJoy has done at the Postal Service so that people can get their paychecks, medicines, and other necessities delivered on time, and to ensure our elections will remain completely free and fair,” reads a statement from Schumer.

    Perhaps Democrats can simply organize BLM rallies at polling stations this November?

  • Twitter 'Accidentally' Suspends Babylon Bee
    Twitter ‘Accidentally’ Suspends Babylon Bee

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 19:05

    Twitter briefly suspended the account of popular satire website Babylon Bee on Monday in what the company now claims was an error.

    On Monday afternoon, Editor-in-Chief Kyle Mann posted a screenshot from Twitter to his personal account, which states that their account was suspended for “violating our rules against platform manipulation and spam.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    After the collective outrage over the suspension sent the Bee trending, they were back about an hour later – with Twitter having apologized for having flagged their account as spam ‘by mistake.’

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jsWhy does this keep happening to conservative accounts?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, the Bee hasn’t skipped a beat…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 17th August 2020

  • Countries On The UK's "High Risk" Travel List
    Countries On The UK’s “High Risk” Travel List

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 02:45

    In a blow for many UK holidaymakers, France was added to the list of ‘high risk’ countries from 4am on Saturday 15 August. The announcement, made late last week, means that all but essential travel is now advised against and returning travellers will have to quarantine for 14 days.

    As Statista’s Martin Armstrong notes, France had previously been on the UK’s list of ‘travel corridors’, allowing unrestricted travel, but is now joined by the Netherlands, Malta, Monaco, the Turks & Caicos islands, and Aruba as one of the latest places to have this exemption removed.

    Infographic: Countries on the UK's 'high risk' travel list | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    After Spain, France is the second-most popular international destination for UK residents, over ten million of which visited the country in 2019.

    With quarantine awaiting from the early hours of Saturday, there are reports of a scramble to return home before the new rules come into place.

    In response on Friday, France’s secretary of state for European affairs tweeted:

    “A British decision which we regret and which will lead to reciprocal measures, hoping for a return to normality as soon as possible.”

  • Israeli-UAE Peace Deal Marks Tectonic Shift In Middle Eastern Balance Of Power
    Israeli-UAE Peace Deal Marks Tectonic Shift In Middle Eastern Balance Of Power

    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 08/17/2020 – 02:00

    By SouthFront,

    The Middle East is on the brink of the new tectonic shift in the regional balance of power. The previous years were marked by the growth of the Iranian and Hezbollah influence and the decrease of the US grip on the region. The January 2020 started with the new Iranian-US confrontation that had all chances to turn into an open war. August 202 appeared to mark the first peace agreement between an Arab state and Israel in more than 25 years.

    Israel and the United Arab Emirates have reached a historical peace agreement. US President Donald Trump announced the breakthrough agreement on August 13, calling Israel and the UAE “great friends” of his country. In a joint statement, Israel, the UAE and the U.S. said the agreement will advance peace in the Middle East. The statement praised the “bold diplomacy” and “vision” of the three country’s leaders.

    Delegations from Israel and the UAE are expected to meet within a few weeks to sign bilateral agreements regarding investment, tourism, direct flights, security, telecommunications, technology, energy, healthcare, culture, the environment, the establishment of reciprocal embassies, and other areas of mutual benefit.

    In the framework of the peace agreement, Israel will suspend declaring sovereignty over areas outlined in Netanyahu’s “Vision for Peace” in the Western Bank. Also, Tel Aviv will reportedly focus its efforts on “expanding ties with other countries in the Arab and Muslim world.” The agreement will also provide Muslims with greater access to the Al-Aqsa Mosque and other holy sites in the Old City of Jerusalem. It still remains in question how Israel will comply with its part of the deal as the annexation of Palestinian territories is the cornerstone of its regional policy.

    In the near future, the United States will likely work to motivate other Gulf states to follow the UAE’s footsteps. In particular, another US regional ally, Saudi Arabia, is already widely known for keeping close ties with Israel in the field of security and military cooperation. Both states are allies of Washington and are engaged in a regional standoff against the Iranian-led coalition of Shiite forces.

    The support of the UAE-Israeli agreement is also a logical step for the Trump administration’s regional policy, which is based on the two main cornerstones: the unconditional support of Israel and the confrontation with Iran. Through such moves, Washington may hope to create a broader Israeli-Arab coalition through which it will try to consolidate the shirking influence and contain the ongoing Iranian expansion in the region. At the same time, the overtures with Israel, which has undertaken wide and successful efforts to destabilize neighboring Arab states, could cause a public backlash among the Arab population and contribute to its further dissatisfaction with the course of its leadership. All these developments, together with the consisted Iranian policy aimed at the defense of Palestinians, will increase the popularity of Iran as not only defender of Shiites across the Middle East, but all Muslims in general. Tehran has been seeking to achieve this goal for years and achieved a particular progress in the field. The US-Israeli aggressive policy in the region also played an important role in fact promoting the popularity of the so-called Axis of Resistance. Now, the Iranian soft power in Arab states will become even more noticeable and create additional threats to Gulf states involved in a direct confrontation with it.

    The Saudi Kingdom, as the main candidate for the next peace deal, will find itself in an especially shaky position. It is already involved in the long, bloody, and unsuccessful intervention in Yemen, with Yemen’s Houthis regularly conducting cross-border raids into Saudi Arabia and even striking its capital, Riyadh. Also, the Saudi leadership has a long-standing problem with the oppressed Shia minority, protests of which are regularly and violently suppressed by Saudi forces. Other factors are the apparent economic and social problems, not least due to Riyadh’s own adventures on the oil market and the coronavirus crisis. Therefore, at some moment the Saudi regime may easily find itself on the brink of collapse under the weight of its own social, political and economic mistakes, and controversial policies on the international arena. And it’s highly unlikely that the friends in Tel Aviv or Washington will decide to undertake any extraordinary steps to rescue the current political regime in the Saudi kingdom.

  • The Evolution Of Fiat Money (Part 3): Where Is This All Going? (Spoiler Alert – Nowhere Good!)
    The Evolution Of Fiat Money (Part 3): Where Is This All Going? (Spoiler Alert – Nowhere Good!)

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 23:30

    Authored by ‘ICE-9’ via The Burning Platform blog,

    Read Part 1 of 3 “Physical Money & The Limits Of War” here…

    Read Part 2 of 3 “The Victory Of Fiat Money, Endless Wars, & The Coming Age of Subjugation” here…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Where Is This All Going?

    Like any confidence game or Ponzi scheme, endless “growth” using any form of money cannot be sustained indefinitely, and the creditor / political class knows this and are preparing to unleash the inevitable crash that plunges the globe into an economic dark ages from which they shall rule absolutely and where what amenities remain shall be monopolized to themselves.  We see our expectations for the future being managed downwards, promises of opportunity replaced with visions of “safety”, individualism and self-sufficiency publically scorned as “we are all in this together”, and the inchoate beginnings of the ecological peasant religion of “Climate Change”.  Some review of the philosophical history that got us to this point will suffice.

    One reason the 19th and early 20th century German state was such an implacable foe to the creditor class and their privately owned central banks was its embrace of the End of History as formulated by Georg Hegel and adopted by the Prussian state and later the German Emperors.  Hegel saw history as a progression of wars with history being the documentation of political struggles between people of different states, and people within states.  Wars and rebellions arose because people existed in states operating without what Hegel termed “objectivity, truth, and ethical life”.  Once the free and noble state emerged and, through its rightful conquest of neighboring states and assimilation of their peoples into this “objectivity, truth, and ethical life”, happiness and human fulfilment would abound, the need for conflict cease, war would no longer be waged, and the documentation of wars and struggles that Hegel defined as history would end, and so the End of History would descend as universal peace and freedom.  Thus Hegel’s version of the End of History placed all societal institutions – including central banks – subsumed to the state, and that precluded a privately owned central bank in a German Empire as this would only serve its owners.  And all Germanic peoples were targeted for eventual assimilation into “objectivity, truth, and ethical life” – Germanic peoples where privately owned central banks already existed.

    To combat the German Empire’s vision of “objectivity, truth, and ethical life” a competing version of Hegel’s End of History was formulated by Karl Marx and spread as communism among the German working class and western European intelligentsia.  This co-opted version replaced politics with economics, and cast history as the documentation not of political struggles, but of economic struggles between owners of the means of production, the states that protected their privileges, and the alienated proletariat.  All societal institutions were again to be subsumed to the communist state but this time happiness and human fulfilment would abound and the need for conflict cease et cetera when private ownership of property was abolished and economic equality of outcome was established.

    By the end of WWII the privately owned central banks, with their powers to issue or withhold credit and set interest rates, had become the de facto controllers of state, and with the threat of “objectivity, truth, and ethical life” finally eliminated, and communism accepted as a necessary menace to promote the spread of “democracy” and US Dollar financing, the creditor class began to rework both Hegel and Marx.  Thus in the late 1930s, at the University of Chicago and funded by “philanthropic” money from John D. Rockefeller, began the theoretical amalgamation of both Hegel and Marx into a revised “End of History” where most of the world’s inhabitants would fight to the death to establish the suzerainty of the “Philosopher Kings” – i.e., the highest echelon of the creditor class – as the global nobility and the “End of History” would descend when both economic poverty and political subjugation were established equally among men.  So in this new version of the “End of History”, happiness and human fulfilment would abound when there is a complete absence of wealth and total political disenfranchisement among the vast hordes of humanity that somehow managed to survive the catastrophic wars needed to achieve their universal destitution. 

    This is what is publicly known and overtly referred to today in Neoconservative circles as the “New World Order” – it is the creditor / political class blueprint for their end game – the “End of History” and total world domination with Plato’s versions of a completely static society and “Justice” thrown in.

    Key to these machinations of the creditor / political class for their implementation of this revised “End of History” is the elimination of sovereign nations through war, their insolvency resulting from prosecution of endless-endless war, and citizen disenfranchisement via “democracy”.  The endless-endless wars will eventually bankrupt all nations and as they are beholden to their privately owned central banks for their operating funds, these banks can either withhold the issuance of credit or raise interest rates to unsustainable levels that trigger hyper-deflation, social instability, and total economic and national security collapse.  A nation that can no longer fund itself can no longer exist among other nations and will devolve into a failed state and this is how the “New World Order” will progress, one bankrupt nation and IMF / World Bank bailout loan at a time.  The endless-endless wars also have the added benefit of killing a large portion of the young, fighting fit men in a society and thereby eliminate the major threat of opposition and rebellion on the home front.  And the imposition of “democracy”, where maximum participation in “voting” is promoted by enfranchising the likes of illegal aliens, teenagers, the mentally retarded, dementia sufferers, antisocial felons, and all manner of peoples that have no business deciding anything, will eventually result not in increased participation, but in large segments of the population giving up on the political process entirely as their influence is diluted to the point of an exercise in futility.  Thus out of the economic and social chaos of protracted war and national bankruptcy these new voices added to “democracy” will eventually be presented with the “choice” of giving up national sovereignty to the extra-governmental political and financial organizations in exchange for the “stability”, “safety”, and a guaranteed “living wage” provided by these same global extra-governmental organizations that the creditor / political class has been so meticulous to cultivate over these last 60 years.  With sovereignty “suspended” over an apathetic, reactionary, and uneducated public, there will effectively be no more “citizenship” and thus no challenge to the new rule of the “Philosopher Kings”.  Thus we get not only the “End of History”, but the death of citizenship and a return to the subjugation of the medieval period – the “Neo-feudalism” so often mention in current writings.

    Plato plays a central role in the imposition of the “End of History”.  Where Hegel and Marx were the “why”, Plato is the “how”.  The core tenant in Platonic thought is his concept of “Justice”, being no more than the natural way of things – e.g., the strong rule over the weak, and the ultimate strength in the Platonic system is logic.  Thus a small group of “Philosopher Kings” represent the highest order of society and rule devoid of empathy and make all decisions based on logic alone, empower decision delivery to the next class level consisting of “enforcers” trained in the martial arts and music that ensure absolute compliance to the decisions of the “Philosopher Kings” by the mass of everyone else that decides nothing.  As this societal structure represents perfect “Justice”, it is immutable and thus the “End of History” ushers in a completely static social; hierarchy from which no one can escape.  The creditor / political class in its role as “Philosopher Kings” is thereby ensured its eternal position of rule over the entirety of humanity and is what is represented as the All Seeing Eye, which has nothing to do with omniscience or vigilance, hovering above the base of the pyramid that represents the mass of everyone else under the tyrannical rule of empathy-free logic, universal poverty, and absolute political disenfranchisement.

    We are presently nearing the end of a 450 year phase in the motives behind what has become the greatest power in the world – the power to conjure armies out of thin air using credit, the ability to elevate or destroy nations and peoples by the setting of interest rates in one direction or the other, and the ability to vanquish armies by the provision or withholding of credit.  In a fiat system all political decisions not related to the creation and cost of credit are secondary.  But as pure fiat money is now wholly divorced from labor inputs, it is wholly worthless and so profits derived from pure fiat money are illusory as they have no base unit value determinant.  The future of continual fiat debasement is secured not through budget deficits but through the advancement of “efficiency” and increasing prevalence of automation and declining labor inputs into the production of goods and services.  We see “efficiency” now reduce labor inputs to that of building and maintaining robots for manufacture and transport of goods, and when robots build other robots and artificial intelligence makes decisions, labor inputs are removed entirely and the jig is up for money.  What we presently hear about “de-industrialization” is all just fancy talk to describe ever increasing industrial efficiency through automation.  Thus the end of growth and the end of money approaches nearer with each incremental “efficiency” gain, and growth cannot be sustain by profitable endeavors not backed by labor inputs.  Instead, we have the increasing illusion of profit created by continually removing labor inputs until zero labor input is reached and all produced things become truly valueless.

    At the point where money represents zero labor input and has no intrinsic value, it is transformed into a purely political tool, backed now by “enforcers” to ensure it is the only medium of exchange and thus, the coercion of human behavior becomes the new form of “value” in the “New World Order”.  At the “End of History” when technology triumphs and human inputs are no longer required to produce goods and services, the ability to control human action by the distribution or withholding of money becomes the unit measure of “value”.  Thus we see the groundwork being laid for digital “money”, “social credit scores”, the “surveillance state”, and “universal basic income” as the nascent means of coercing mass human behavior as “technology” will be the only thing remaining that possesses some human input and therefore, intrinsic “value”, whether behavior is focused or unfocused.  Here it becomes possible to create a trillion dollar business based solely upon the persuasion and harvesting of human inputs in the form of mouse clicks.

    So at the “End of History”, labor is unnecessary, and as universal “peace” has descended after the conclusion of endless-endless war and total bankruptcy of the fiat system, the “citizen soldier” and “citizen laborer” too become unnecessary.  Thus the “End of History” will bring about both the “End of Citizenship” and the “End of Work”, transform the bulk of humanity into obsolescence, and leave the logical and devoid of empathy “Philosopher Kings” no choice but initiate mass depopulation programs as not doing so would risk the “peace” and potentially start the revival of history.

    So when money has no value, generates only illusory profits, and is disbursed by edict to those who are increasingly unnecessary, money has then transformed from the “means to power” to “power in of its self”.  Society then devolves into one where many are not only alienated from the means of production, but now are alienated from not only the means to experiencing a fulfilling existence, but from the means of existence itself.  Endeavors related to the pursuit of profit are removed from the power equation, and with profit motive gone much of human endeavor formerly occupied by tradecraft and commerce becomes meaningless.  At this point there is no more need for the “Philosopher Kings” to stand on pretense, as “power in of itself” becomes their human motivation backed by the perfectly “just” and entirely static societal structure.  When “peace” descends over the “End of History”, the veneer of past civil society that kept some form of balance in check is permanently effaced. 

    Thus the “End of History” and rise of the “Philosopher Kings” shall usher in an age of unparalleled violence, barbarism, and human meaninglessness that the ever declining numbers of people under empathy-free logical rule will yearn for a return to the days of history and an end to the “End of History”.

    So What Is to Be Done?

    Do I think the creditor / political class will achieve their “End of History”?  No. 

    Do I think the creditor / political class will destroy everyone and everything in their attempt to achieve their “End of History”?  Yes, most definitely. 

    It all begins to make sense once one accepts that the sole purpose now for the existence of the United States is the never ending global accumulation of US Dollar fiat debt across every sector of every society of every nation so to initiate the simultaneous financial, cultural, and spiritual destruction of all people’s collective will to exist separately as nations.

    We have had the synthesis wrong for far too long because we view synthesis from our own biased perspective towards self.  Once we realize that there really is a small and incredibly powerful and psychopathic group out there that wants to entirely destroy and enslave us, the “End of History” can become synthesis – but it’s their synthesis – and only then can the seeming disconnect between thesis (the world is violent and chaotic) and antithesis (the world is peace and predictable) arising from our bias of self-perspective be joined through their synthesis.  Thus then can what initially appear as stochastic insanity be finally recognized as perfectly logical and purposeful objective.  The siren song of “Globalism” is the creditor / political classes’ first call for initiates willing to embrace their servitude in the “End of History” and help gather up the easily persuaded and put them to work during the next call, which will not be persuasive and will not be aimed at those so willing.  The final call will be for all those who remain uncommitted to get in the boxcars.

    The transition from physical money representing a true store of value to that of paper money divorced from labor inputs that represents nothing and is used as a political tool has not made mankind more refined or evolved.  It has instead enabled the ruling creditor / political class to now endlessly wage endless wars of no advantage to its combatants and at zero financial and personal risk to the instigators. 

    There is no coincidence that “World Wars” began one year after the creation of the Federal Reserve System, and “World Wars” will continue in the form of endless-endless wars so long as the Federal Reserve System or any other global fiat money system exists to conjure armies out of thin air.  Fiat money has enabled endless research into the methods and efficiency of waging war which is at its base level the science of how to kill more and more people using fewer and fewer resources, and this science, when combined with finance, psychology, and biology is more and more successful with every passing year. 

    Fiat money has reduced citizenship to the levels of unpaid mercenary and tax slave in the pursuit of maximizing global accumulation of US Dollar debt financing.  And, as fiat money is now a political tool, it has corrupted every facet of society leading to the moral collapse of nearly every state and societal institution and, most significantly and by design, declines in the collective will of peoples to exist as separate nations.  Thus it is fiat money that is the barbarous invention, and the gold and silver coinage of old the noble relic.  And most importantly, the creditor / political class that controls the issuance and price of fiat money is the greatest single menace to the people of the world today.

    Thus with this realization it becomes clear what needs to be done.  And what needs to be done will not be accomplished peacefully – there is just no other way, for the creditor / political class is like a weed that will not go away until it is pulled out by its roots, burned into ashes, and the soil from whence it grew salted for eternity…

  • Air Force Uses Reconnaissance Microrobots For Base Security Missions 
    Air Force Uses Reconnaissance Microrobots For Base Security Missions 

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 23:00

    The Air Force has added throwable reconnaissance microrobots to their arsenal for base security missions, read a military press release.

    Airman of the 96th Security Forces Squadron (96th SFS), at Eglin Air Force Base, located in western Florida, were supplied with Throwbots, a football-sized robot that remotely transmits video and audio to the operator, to help them clear buildings, locate and identify suspects, and confirm the layout of a room during hostage situations. The robot will also be used for vehicle inspections at base checkpoints and random anti-terrorism missions. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “It took five minutes for me to learn how to use it,” said Leon Gray, from the 96th SFS, after examining the device at a defense trade show. 

    Gray said, “it quickly became apparent how our security personnel could utilize this tool in our operations.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Task & Purpose noted Throwbot has already been spotted in the popular video game Tom Clancy’s Rainbow Six Siege. 

    “If this gadget sounds familiar, it should. In the first-person shooter Rainbow Six Siege, players use wheeled drones to scout outbuildings, scan for enemy players, and even serve as stationary cameras,” Task & Purpose said. 

    The Throwbot is rugged, can survive a 30 feet fall and travel on uneven terrain. Airman can even tow up to 4 pounds of gear with the robot. A camera on the front allows the operator to remotely control the device with a handheld joystick. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Add Throwbot to the long list of robots the military is quickly adopting in the last couple of years as trillions of dollars have been spent to modernize forces

  • The Most Revealing Poll Of All: Gun Sales
    The Most Revealing Poll Of All: Gun Sales

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 22:30

    Authored by Patricia McCarthy via AmericanThinker.com,

    For decades, the Democratic party has wanted to abrogate the Second Amendment, to ban the sale of guns of any and all calibers, sizes, shapes and potential uses.  They have long sought to limit the amount of ammo per gun and were just foiled again on that score.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The left has yet to realize the obvious, that criminals do not obey laws of any kind, least of all gun laws.  So deluded are the gun-banning Democrats, they do not believe that Americans have the right to defend themselves against said criminals.  These Democrats who want to run our lives all have armed security themselves, but we peons are, in their warped view, are to be forever denied the rights they bestow upon themselves.  

    Like the imbecilic Beto O’Rourke before her, Kamala Harris advocates gun confiscation; she wants the tyrannical government she and Joe are promoting to go into our homes and seize our legally-obtained weapons of self-defense.  

    Like Hitler, Stalin and Mao, seizing the firearms of the citizenry is the first step toward despotism.  But the left misjudges the spirit of Americans who have escaped being indoctrinated by the anti-American, anti-constitutionalism that the left in academia and the media have been pushing for decades.  Most of us take the Constitution and its accompanying Bill of Rights very seriously.  Both have served this nation well for two-hundred and forty-four years.  No self-righteous, virtue-signaling political lefty elitist is going to convince Americans who support the Constitution that the government has the right to confiscate their guns.  

    Well before Biden’s selection of Harris as his running mate, in the first half of 2020, gun sales have increased by 95%, (ten million guns), ammunition sales are up by 139%.  

    The numbers eclipse all of 2019.  The highest increase is among black men and women, 58.2%.  

    Can you blame them?  

    The wanton violence that has plagued Democrat-run cities like Minneapolis, Portland, Chicago (homicides up 139%),  New York (13% increase in shooting incidents, 23% increase in homicides), Seattle, D.C., Los Angeles, Atlanta, etc. over the past several months with the blessings of the Democrat governors and mayors that run them has taught law-abiding blacks that the police are being driven from these cities, betrayed by the elected leaders charged with enforcing the law.  Violent crime has spiked in all those places.  And to this day, no Democrat has spoken out against Antifa or Black Lives Matter, or the catastrophic damage they have wrought upon those communities, apparently in the mistaken belief that a majority of Americans are sympathetic to the specious causes of the vandals.  The massive increase in gun sales would seem to belie that tenet.  

    While it has long been mostly republicans who support gun rights and the NRA, the enormous expansion of gun ownership most certainly includes former Democrats who will not likely vote for Biden/Harris, both of whom favor confiscation like the rest of the left.  For that reason and for her other past prosecutorial policies, not all blacks support Harris.  So it is safe to conclude that the colossal increase in gun sales is perhaps the most telling poll of all.  Guns and ammo are expensive and these numbers represent legal sales and do not account for the illegal acquisitions of guns.  Bottom line?  People no longer  feel safe in their own communities and they are seeing the police they respect and rely upon be demeaned, defunded and directed to stand down while rioters and looters destroy their small businesses and downtowns.  And through all this monstrous violence,  the democrats insist on calling the vandals “peaceful protesters.” They are anything but peaceful.  They are well-funded fascist groups who mean to destroy the United States as founded. The death of George Floyd was the spark that lit the fires, covid19 the gift that has kept on giving to those working hard to sabotage our great nation

    The rise in gun ownership has spiked more than any previous time period and is the highest since the FBI began recording the statistics 22 years ago.  

    The alleged lead by Biden in the polls most likely does not account for the huge number of Americans who may have voted Democrat in the past but are not going to vote Democrat again if it means being stripped of the guns they’ve only recently purchased and now feel they need for self-defense.  And all the while, the left has promoted and blessed the violence.  They have actually encouraged it, they’ve emboldened the rioters by refusing to call what they do by its name:  brutal insurrection.

    From day one of the violence in Seattle and Portland, President Trump offered federal help but those cities’ mayors and each of the others whose cities were being ravaged declined his offer.  As a result, half of all black-owned businesses in the affected cities have been destroyed by the rioting or lost to the lockdown.  It is hard to take seriously the mantra that “black lives matter” when in fact they have become a mere political tool of the left.  Most of the media failed to report on the cold-blooded murder of a five-year-old boy by his adult neighbor.  Why?  The child was white, the murderer black which does not fit the left’s narrative of the day.  Mayors Bill de Blasio of New York and Muriel Bowser of Washington, D.C. are all hat, no cattle, when it comes to actually caring about the lives being devastated by the disorder they have willingly allowed.  As President Trump said last week, “this election will determine the future of private gun ownership in the United States.”   

    Biden is clearly lost in a fog of confusion due to his mental decline and will say anything his handlers put on the teleprompter but Kamala Harris is as far left a candidate who has ever run for high office; she is Bernie Sanders in a dress.  She and her fellow “progressives”  mean what they say;  they mean to effect a defenseless society.  

    Will a majority of Americans choose to be disarmed like the Germans under Hitler, the Russians under Stalin and the Chinese under Mao or will they vote to preserve their constitutional right to bear arms?  The astronomical surge in gun ownership these past months tells us that no, they will not vote to lose their Second Amendment right.  Self-defense is a human right.  

    “The right of self-defense never ceases.  It is among the most sacred, and alike necessary to nations and to individuals.“ –James Monroe  

    The left, thoroughly deranged by Trump’s 2016 victory, will gladly see our once civil society destroyed if its destruction will see Trump defeated.  Their plan is doomed to failure.   If gun sales translate to votes, it will ensure his re-election.

  • Unpacking Fact From Fiction Behind The USPS Drama
    Unpacking Fact From Fiction Behind The USPS Drama

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 22:00

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    With the left in a collective fit over a conspiracy theory that President Trump is about to steal the election by crippling the US Postal Service, Twitter user @AGHamilton29 has provided a cogent analysis unpacking the latest leftist miasma dominating the news cycle.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The thread continues… (emphasis ours)

    1) Dems are pushing for universal mail-in election. Republicans oppose this and say it creates a possibility for fraud. There is a reasonable compromise, such as what is planned in KY, that would allow absentee ballots for all who want one, early voting, & election day voting.

    2) The USPS has been in terrible financial shape for years. It is consistently losing money. Dems want to bail it out. Republicans want it reformed. There is not an immediate fiscal danger as current funding is sufficient through 2021.

    2A) The treasury has offered the USPS an additional 10 Billion loan as of the end of July if needed. That loan does come with some strings for reforms, but it does not look like it is needed for immediate operation until late in 2021.

    3) Trump did go on tv and say he opposes the bailout of USPS, and specifically cited his opposition to universal mail voting (which he says helps Dems) as the reason. As pointed out in 2, This has been used to suggest he is using USPS to undermine the election.

    3A) However, as pointed out in 2, there is no immediate funding issue that would hinder the USPS from supporting the election.

    Funding is not the problem with a massive wave of mail-based voting, deadlines and timing are.

    4) The USPS has done a bunch of regular actions that are now being cited as irregular by people who don’t know better. One example is the removal and moving of pick-up mailboxes from low-traffic areas. USPS has agreed to pause it anyways to avoid the controversy now.

    5) As the USPS is an organization with serious fiscal issues and due to COVID-19 impact, they are undergoing delays in shipping and structural changes/cuts in response. The union/activists oppose these and thus are trying to tie them to the election.

    5A) Many of these actions have occurred before (replacing/eliminating sorting machines outside hubs). Every agency/group is taking cuts and reduced hours right now. There is no evidence those changes have anything to do with or would affect the election.

    6) The real problem with the election is the regular deadlines are impossible to ensure with USPS shipping times. Some states allow ballot requests 4 days before the election! That’s why USPS sent out letters to states warning them of need for changes in timing to protect votes.

    In conclusion, this is going to be one of the most logistically difficult elections in history.

    Mail-in voting creates real problems and concerns. There are solutions that require compromise.

    None of that supports the partisan conspiracy mentioned at the beginning.

    Meanwhile…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • 49 People Shot In Last 72 Hours In New York As City Hits Its "Expiration Date"
    49 People Shot In Last 72 Hours In New York As City Hits Its “Expiration Date”

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 21:31

    The gentrified New York City that made the Big Apple the envy of billionaires, oligarchs, child molesters and money laundering criminals from around the world is no more, and in its place is the hellish New York from the 1970s.

    According to Gothamist, between Thursday and Saturday, 49 people were shot in the largest city in the United States, as the uptick in gun violence continues this summer and is rushing to catch up with that other progressive paradise, Chicago.

    Putting the surge in context, the number of people shot over the three days is five times more than the eight who were shot during the same days last year according to the Washington Examiner. While most of the shooting victims were merely wounded, at least six people were killed by gunshot wounds over the 3-day interval, compared to three homicides that took place during the same time last year.

    Year to date, there have been 1,087 shooting victims so far in 888 different incidents throughout the city, roughly double the crime observed in 2019. Last year at this time, there had been 577 shooting victims in 488 incidents in New York City.

    Among those murdered was an off-duty corrections officer who worked at Rikers Island. John Jeff, 28, had just left a party in Queens at 3 a.m. on Saturday morning when he was shot in the head and chest.

    “Early this morning, the Correction Officers’ Benevolent Association was notified that New York City Correction Officer John Jeff, assigned to the Anna M. Kross Center on Rikers Island, was found dead in South Jamaica Queens. He sustained multiple gunshot wounds. He was 28 years old and was on the job for just over two years with his whole life and career ahead of him. He was well-liked and highly regarded by his fellow officers,” Correction Officers Benevolent Association President Benny Boscio Jr. said in a statement.

    Neighbors reported hearing multiple gunshots outside their homes, and sources told ABC 7 the killing appeared to be planned.

    “I heard nine shots,” resident Raymond Leslie said. “You really don’t want to come out on these streets at night because it’s getting increasingly dangerous.”

    Mayor Bill de Blasio, whose actions – or lack thereof – have been blamed by many for triggering a historic exodus among New York residents, denounced the shooting tweeting, “This is a tragedy.”

    “Chirlane and I are keeping this young man’s family, loved ones and brothers and sisters in @CorrectionNYC in our hearts today. An investigation into this cowardly attack is ongoing. If you have any information please contact the NYPD,” the mayor tweeted.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The scale of New York’s shooting problem becomes apparent when one considers that just the start of this month marked more shootings in New York City so far this year than in all of 2019, a continuation of the violent protests, rioting and looting that was unleashed in New York in recent months.

    As the Washington Examiner notes, “protests, riots, and vandalism sparked by the death of George Floyd have increased the anti-police sentiment in the city at a time when de Blasio has pledged to strip $1 billion from the city’s police budget and disbanded the plainclothes anti-crime unit. Hundreds of police officers have filed their retirement papers in recent weeks as tensions between the force and the public become more strained by the increase in crime.

    Meanwhile, as we reported last week, Thousands of New Yorkers have been fleeing the city in recent weeks, citing the uptick in violence as well as coronavirus restrictions.

    “We reached our New York expiration date,” one New York City mother recently told the New York Post. “Things weren’t heading in the right direction. What we’re seeing now isn’t at all surprising.”

    Meanwhile, as people packed their bags one last time for New Jersey, the Hamptons, and other local areas, Democratic Gov. Andrew Cuomo pleaded that they return to the city, even offering to cook them dinner.

    “I literally talk to people all day long who are now in their Hamptons house who also lived here, or in their Hudson Valley house or in their Connecticut weekend house, and I say, ‘You got to come back, when are you coming back?’” Cuomo said earlier this month. “‘We’ll go to dinner, I’ll buy you a drink, come over, I’ll cook.’”

    Unfortunately, since he can no longer even assure them that they won’t be murdered in broad daylight, we doubt anyone will care much for Cuomo’s desperate platitudes.

  • Three Things We Learned Last Week
    Three Things We Learned Last Week

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 21:30

    By Ye Xie, Bloomberg macro commentator

    Three things we learned last week:

    1. Bond bulls’ faith is being challenged by data and vaccine hopes.

    Yields on 10-year Treasuries rose above 70 bps for the first time in more than a month, and gold suffered one of the biggest single-day slumps of the past two decades. While heavy bond supply contributed to the selloff in Treasuries, it also appears to be a repricing of the global economy to the upside following better-than-expected economic and inflation data.

    The bond yield is also tracking the relative performance of Covid-hit stocks, suggesting optimism toward a vaccine. This is a chart comparing bond yields with the ratio between the MSCI World Hotels Restaurants & Leisure Index and the Nasdaq 100 Index.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So far the yield increase has had a limited impact on risky assets. The assumption is that the Fed needs to cap yields to help the economy heal. But what if there’s a vaccine available in the next three months? How much of a yield increase will the Fed tolerate? The minutes of the central bank’s July policy meeting will be released Aug. 19 and may shed some light on the discussion about forward guidance. In any case, everyone’s favorite the 5y30 curve steepener trade is working again.

    2. China’s uneven recovery slows with the PBOC staying put.

    Data last week showed weaker-than-expected industrial production, retail sales, and credit growth, suggesting China’s economic recovery is losing some momentum. The PBOC is expected to keep the one-year prime loan rate steady this week, maintaining its neutral stance. Expect a range-bound bond market. BTW, the central bank’s balance sheet data apparently show it hasn’t secretly bought government bonds, as some speculated.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    3. IPOs of Chinese companies in the U.S. are booming even amid scrutiny.

    Despite the crackdown on TikTok and WeChat, Chinese companies haven’t abandoned the U.S. capital markets for fund-raising. Housing transaction firm KE Holdings surged 87% on its debut, marking the biggest first-day pop on record among mega Chinese IPOs in the U.S. Eleven Chinese companies, including KE, Li Auto and Kingsoft Cloud, raised at least $100 million in IPOs this year. The IPOs total about $5.7 billion, already double the amount for all of 2019.

    Meanwhile, the scrutiny toward Chinese companies continues to increase. On Friday, streaming company Iqiyi tumbled after disclosing that the SEC is investigating and seeking documents cited by short sellers.

  • "Short Dollar" Is Now The World's Most Consensus Trade… So It's Time To Go Long
    “Short Dollar” Is Now The World’s Most Consensus Trade… So It’s Time To Go Long

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 21:03

    It’s official: as of this past week, the number of futures contracts amid the speculator community that were net short the DXY (via other FX pairs) was tied for the highest on record going back to the late 1990s.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But one doesn’t need to look at the weekly CFTC data to know that the currency, which until just three months ago was exploding to record highs, has become the worst most popular short: according to Bank of America “short USD” has extended its lead as the most popular trade in 2020 according to the bank’s latest FX and Rates sentiment survey.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, as discussed previously, the surge in dollar shorts is not so much a secular bet on the dollar decline as a bullish view on its two key pairs, the Euro and the Yen.

    As per the BofA survey, the EU Recovery Fund seems to be the main driver of positivity on EUR (Chart 2), with almost a third of investors telling the bank in June they considered it a game changer, while USD bearishness can at least partly be explained by expectations of some erosion of the hegemony of USD as a reserve currency.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Still, as BofA notes, in the current backdrop, risks – both known and unknown – abound and could be a threat to seemingly stretched positions. It is worth bearing in mind however that if the more structural nature of investor views play out – ‘game changing’ recovery fund, changes in reserve and portfolio flows – current positioning could be less of a constraint as benchmarks themselves adjust.

    Of course, after last month’s dramatic move, what happens next may seem largely moot.As a reminder, in July, the trade-weighted Dollar saw the largest monthly decline in two and half years, with DXY seeing the steepest drop in a decade.

    And, in a world where momentum other trend-following investors have had a dismal year, any trade that has as much continuity as the dollar drop was sure to attract the momentum chasers, and sure enough as Goldman’s Karen Fishman writes on Friday, the DXY move has “renewed focus on momentum-based investors (e.g., Commodity Trading Advisors or CTAs, also known as pattern-chasing robots) and their potential participation in the Dollar sell-off.”

    Some background from the Goldman strategist:

    Momentum-based trading systems have been popular for decades, given their low correlation with traditional benchmark returns and, therefore, their potential for generating alpha. The strategies tend to have common components, including set rules for entering and exiting positions. Although there are a variety of methods employed to produce a trade signal, many rely on simple moving averages—such that a buy (sell) is triggered if spot moves above (falls below) a specified moving average. Other popular methods include “crossover strategies,” where a trader goes long (short) if a faster-moving average exceeds (breaks below) a slower-moving average, and “breakouts,” where a trader buys (sells) an asset if spot surpasses (undershoots) the prior high (low) over a certain time horizon. For example, the “Turtle Experiment” of 1983 relied primarily on a breakout-based system, according to Faith (2013). Despite the different methodologies, CTAs tend to see similar returns, especially during periods of large market moves (Exhibit 1). In fact, according to Clenow (2013), most of the variation in returns between funds comes from factors such as asset composition, risk level, and position size, rather than the specific trade signal.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So what does Goldman conclude based on inferred CTA positioning? As the bank explains, it finds “a fairly clear message to short the Dollar against G10 currencies, with slightly more mixed signals for high-beta EM crosses” and adds that “even though CTAs are probably already short Dollars, we see scope for further weakness as (i) fresh shorts could be triggered soon and (ii) longer-term investors start to participate as well, particularly in the Euro and other European assets.”

    Furthermore, Goldman also claims that the typical August illiquidity could provide further impetus for trend-following strategies, which argue for holding on to Dollar shorts (primarily versus G10 currencies) and adding AUD/NZD longs.

    Bottom line: with everyone – literally – on Wall Street now short the dollar, as observed by either CFTC net specs or various sellside surveys, and with Goldman resorting to “inferring” the future of the DXY based on recent momentum (something which even 5 year old Robin Hood trading veterans can do on their own), the only possible real conclusion is that there is virtually nobody else left who can add to dollar shorts, which means that absent some unexpected socio-economic disaster in the US, the only possible move for the dollar at this point is higher.

  • Mueller Aide Weissmann Urges DOJ Attorneys 'Not' To Help On Investigations
    Mueller Aide Weissmann Urges DOJ Attorneys ‘Not’ To Help On Investigations

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 20:30

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    recently wrote a column discussing how Democratic leaders, including Vice President Joe Biden, have argued against continuing the investigation by U.S. Attorney John Durham despite growing evidence of misconduct by Justice Department officials and now the first guilty plea by former FBI lawyer Kevin Clinesmith.

    Now, Andrew Weissmann, one of the top prosecutors with Special Counsel Robert Mueller, has derided the Clinesmith plea while actually calling on Justice Department attorneys to refuse to help on ongoing investigations that could implicate aspects of his own prior work.

    I was among those who expressed concern when Mueller selected Weissmann due to his history of controversial prosecutorial decisions, including a pattern of prosecutorial overreach in the Enron litigation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Weissmann’s recent statements (made before the release of his new book on the Russian investigation) have only served to reaffirm those concerns.

    Recently, Weissmann wrote an extraordinary and disturbing New York Times op-ed (with former Defense Department special counsel Ryan Goodman). In the column, he appeared to call on Justice Department lawyers to undermine the Durham investigation as well as the investigation by U.S. Attorney John Bash’s investigation into the “unmasking” requests by Obama administration officials. They wrote “Justice Department employees in meeting their ethical and legal obligations, should be well advised not to participate in any such effort.”

    Consider that line for a moment…

    Weissmann is openly calling on attorneys to refuse to help on investigations that could raise questions about his own decisions.  Durham is looking at a pattern errors, false statements, bias, and now criminal conduct in the Russian investigation. There is obviously overlap with the Mueller investigation which discussed many of the same underlying documents and relied on work by some of the same individuals.  The failure to address misconduct, bias, or criminal conduct by such individuals would be embarrassing to both Weissmann and Mueller. Despite that obvious conflict of interest, Weissmann is calling on attorneys to stand down.

    It is the same troubling position that was once taken by Sally Yates, who told an entire federal agency not to assist the President in his travel ban.

    After Weissmann called on Justice Department attorneys not to assist investigations by the Justice Department, Durham disclosed that the first guilty plea would be entered by Clinesmith. That would ordinarily cause embarrassment for someone who was calling for DOJ lawyers to effectively hinder the investigation.  Not Weissmann.  He has now attacked the criminal plea.

    Weissmann mocked Attorney General Bill Barr to explain the difference between the Flynn plea and the Clinesmith plea.

    Weissmann tweeted:

    “Question for Barr: how are Flynn’s confessed lies to the FBI (repeated to the VP) not a crime, but Clinesmith changing an email (the full version of which he also sent to DOJ) is?

    Clinesmith is charged with adding the words ‘not a source’ to an email about Carter Page, but no where does the charge say that is false, i.e. that Page was a source for the CIA. Without that, how is the addition ‘materially’ false?”

    Here is Durham theory: even though Clinesmith gave the complete and accurate email to DOJ to use in the Page FISA, when asked by an FBI agent if the CIA had represented IN WRITING that Page was not a source, Clinesmith said yes, when CIA had not said so explicitly in writing. no where is it alleged that Page was in fact a CIA source or, if so, that Clinesmith knew that. How is any of this false or material to the Page FISA, using Barr’s new Flynn materiality standard. It’s not. Two systems of justice at play.”

    “Clear from Durham charge that the FBI supervisor wanted to know if CIA confirmed “in writing” that Page was not a source because of distrust of CIA — but whether in writing or not, no allegation that Clinesmith lied about the fact Page was not a source. That’s a federal crime?”

    The tweets reveal more about Weissmann than Clinesmith or this guilty plea.

    First, Weissmann is completely distorting both the law and the facts to disregard the significance of this guilty plea. The fact that Page was a source for the CIA is not disputed. The Horowitz investigation and various congressional investigations have confirmed that the CIA made clear to Clinesmith that Page was working for United States intelligence, a fact that critically undermined the basis for the original application for secret surveillance. The statement that “no where does the charge say that is false, i.e. that Page was a source for the CIA” is bizarre. The charge is that Clinesmith made this false statement to the court and there is a wealth of evidence to support that charge. It was clearly enough to prompt Clinesmith to take a plea and enter into what appears a cooperative agreement with prosecutors.

    Second, the claim that “Clinesmith gave the complete and accurate email to DOJ” would not negate the charge. It was the false information that he gave to the court that mattered. Prosecutorial misconduct often involves telling courts something different from what is known or discussed by prosecutors.  Moreover, the implications of such a contrast adds to the need for the investigation that Weissmann has sought to hinder.  If other DOJ attorneys and investigators knew that the court was being given false material information, the concerns are magnified not reduced for the Durham investigation.  Indeed, it means that this investigation dragged on for many months despite other attorneys knowing that the original claims of Page being a Russian assets were directly contradicted by American intelligence and never disclosed to the Court.

    What is astonishing is that the FISA court itself as well as Horowitz have flagged this as a serious matter of false or misleading information. Weissmann however is actively seeking to convince Justice Department lawyers to refuse to help on the investigation.

    Weissmann also misrepresents the law and the position of the Justice Department in Flynn.  I have been one of the most vocal critics of the plea.  It is true that Flynn gave false answers to the investigators.  However, he fought the allegations until the Mueller team drained him of his savings and threatened to prosecute his son.

    Keep in mind that Flynn was the incoming National Security Adviser and held entirely lawful discussions with Russian diplomats. Even James Comey told President Obama that the discussions were “legit.” Moreover, in December 2016, investigators had found no evidence of any crime by Flynn. They wanted to shut down the investigation; they were overruled by superiors, including FBI special agent Peter Strzok, Deputy Director Andrew McCabe and Director James Comey. Strzok told the investigators to keep the case alive, and McCabe is described as “cutting off” another high-ranking official who questioned the basis for continuing to investigate Flynn. All three officials were later fired, and all three were later found by career officials to have engaged in serious misconduct as part of the Russia investigation. Recently disclosed material indicate that Obama, Biden, and other discussed the use of the Logan Act as a pretense for a criminal charge. The Logan Act criminalizes private negotiations with foreign governments. The Logan Act is widely viewed as unconstitutional and has never been used successfully against any U.S. citizen since the earliest days of the Republic.

    Then, in February 2017, Comey circumvented long-standing protocols and ordered an interview with Flynn. Comey later bragged that he “probably wouldn’t have … gotten away with it” in other administrations, but he sent “a couple guys over” to question Flynn, who was settling into his new office as national security adviser. Indeed, Yates recently agreed that Comey “went rogue” on the Flynn matter.

    This history is what was detailed to the court in the Flynn motion to dismiss the charge. The materiality point reflected the governing law that indictments require more than mere “relevance” or relatedness but rather a statement that is “reasonably likely to influence the tribunal in making a determination required to be made.” United States v. Weinstock, 231 F.2d 699, 701 (D.C. Cir. 1956) (emphasis added). The distinction with Clinesmith is obvious. Clinesmith lied to the Court in an investigation to influence a “determination required to be made” by the court.

    Imagine if this were not the rule. It would mean that any prosecutor could intentionally lie to a court to secure warrants or other actions without the risk of a criminal charge.  Yet, Weissmann is mocking the very notion that Clinesmith could be charged while insisting that his office was correct in prosecuting Flynn despite the absence of an ongoing federal case and the fact that the agents themselves did not believe Flynn intentionally lied. There is no question the Clinesmith lied and that the lie was critical to the court’s consideration of the FISA application.

    Weissmann’s public effort to derail the Durham investigation and his distortion of the Clinesmith guilty plea only reinforces the view of many of us that the Durham investigation must be completed and made public. Despite saying that I did not believe that Mueller would find crimes of collusion or conspiracy with the Russians, I supported the Special Counsel investigation. I also supported the Horowitz investigation and the Durham investigation. The reason is the same. I believe that the public needs to have a full and transparent account of what happened in the Russian investigation on both sides. Like many, Weissmann would like transparency on only one side and to shutdown the Durham investigation despite Horowitz referring matters for criminal investigation and finding a host of false statements, errs, and professional misconduct.  Even the addition of a criminal plea has not stopped Weissmann from denouncing this investigation.

    For years, I have criticized Weissmann’s record of dubious prosecutorial judgment, bias, and overreach. However, that case against Weissmann is not nearly as powerful as the case he is making against himself.

  • Billionaire Novogratz Warns "Frenzied Market Bubble" Will Pop If Biden Wins
    Billionaire Novogratz Warns “Frenzied Market Bubble” Will Pop If Biden Wins

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 20:00

    Just days after bond king Jeffery Gundlach steamrolled over the widespread consensus that Biden will defeat Trump in the upcoming presidential election, doubling down on his contrarian bet that Trump will win a second term on November 3 (as he correctly predicted would happen in 2016 over the chorus of an army of so-called experts, all of whom were certain that Hillary would crush Trump), another billionaire made a non-consensus forecast on Friday when former hedge fund icon and cryptocurrency investor Michael Novogratz – a big fan of Democrats – said the relentless rally in the stock market could end if Joe Biden wins the U.S. presidency.

    “Electing Biden and Harris, as much as it’s gonna be great for the country, is not going to be great for the market,” Novogratz said Friday in a Bloomberg TV interview.

    According to Novogratz, founder of Galaxy Investment Partners and an outspoken cheerleader for cryptocurrencies, the stock market was in a “liquidity-driven frenzy,” fueled by stocks like Amazon and Tesla. Should Democrats take control in November, Wall Street can expect higher corporate and capital gain taxes, as well as increased rates for the wealthy, he said echoing an identical warning from Goldman (which despite still expecting higher taxes just hiked its S&P year-end forecast to 3,600 in what can only be seen as an attempt to encourage its clients to buy anything… that Goldman has to sell).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Everything is trading literally like bitcoin in 2017 into a speculative frenzy. Those frenzied bubbles normally end with policy response,” said Novogratz, who has described his politics as center-left. “Usually it’s the Fed’s action, but action on raising taxes could end this froth. I mean Amazon’s an amazing company, it’s doing amazing through Covid, but it’s trading a hundred times earnings on a gigantic multiple.”

    That said, Novogratz does not expect the Fed to in any way get in the way of the market, and expects the Fed to be “even more dovish” at its next meeting, which could drive stocks higher, push gold to $2,500 to $3,000 an ounce and send cryptocurrencies to all time high, especially now that it is becoming particularly clear that the Fed is working on its own “digital currency” which it will use to deposit funds directly into the accounts of Americans during the next crisis in a last-ditch effort to spark an inflationary inferno and “inflate away” the insurmountable US debtload.

    Yet even though he sees a market crash, like many Wall Street Democrats Novogratz said Biden and Kamala Harris would be “good overall for financial firms” which is odd as it would require far higher interest rates, which in turn would lead to an even greater wipeout for tech stocks and any security with duration exposure. As Bloomberg notes, in an earlier interview, he described Harris, a U.S. senator from California, as someone who “brings star power to the ticket.”

    Nobogratz also touched on several other topics including:

    • Bitcoin – He said he thought the cryptocurrency, which has surged in value in recent weeks, had “crossed the Rubicon” on the question of whether it’s a good store of value, and said he considers it a better investment than gold at the moment. About 25% of his money is tied up in crytpocurrencies, he said.
    • New York’s future – “New York taxes are certainly as high as they can go and we’re seeing that outflow of human capital. Services are gonna go down and so it’s gonna be a very tough run for city.” As for those who left because of coronavirus, he expects it could be six months to a year after the “all-clear sign” before many of them return.

    Excerpts from the Novogratz interview below:

  • As Stealing Fuel Becomes More Difficult, Mexican Thieves Turn To Train Robbery
    As Stealing Fuel Becomes More Difficult, Mexican Thieves Turn To Train Robbery

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 19:29

    By Mexican News Daily,

    With the government having clamped down on fuel theft, criminals in Guanajuato and Querétaro are increasingly turning to freight trains. Last year an average of two railcars were robbed each week, but in the first six months of 2020 that number has increased to three per day, the newspaper Reforma reports. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Train robbers at work

     

    The shift in targets is likely due to the pressure inflicted on the Santa Rosa de Lima Cartel, notorious for fuel theft in the area. Its leader, José Antonio Yépez Ortiz, alias El Marro, was arrested on August 2 on charges of kidnapping, organized crime and fuel theft after an 18-month manhunt.

    Freight companies and cargo transportation experts have identified hot spots for train robberies in Mexico’s Bajío central lowlands region: El Ahorcado in Querétaro and Empalme Escobedo and Apaseo El Alto and Apaseo El Grande in Guanajuato. 

    The exact number of train robberies that have occurred is unknown, as many go unreported, said security expert Marcos Solórzano Cataño, and the problem is not likely to go away anytime soon. Fuel thieves have the infrastructure and the protection of local residents already in place, making the transition from gas to cargo relatively easy.

    Solórzano said thieves mainly target train cars carrying auto parts, grains, seeds, consumer goods and construction material. 

    Nationally, the number of train robberies has been declining. In 2016, 9,042 train robberies were reported whereas the first three months of 2020 have seen just 1,306. The majority of train robberies occur in Puebla, Veracruz and Tlaxcala, government officials say. 

  • New York Has Rejected $1 Billion In Fraudulent Unemployment Claims Since The Beginning Of The Pandemic
    New York Has Rejected $1 Billion In Fraudulent Unemployment Claims Since The Beginning Of The Pandemic

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 19:05

    Everybody knew that once the government trough was replete with newly-printed Fed money that it was only a matter of time until the pigs would line up.

    Such appears to be in the case in New York. According to Bloomberg, The New York State Department of Labor has now rejected more than $1 billion in fraudulent unemployment insurance claims dating back to the beginning of the coronavirus outbreak. 

    The agency has paid out an estimated $40 billion in benefits, the report says. And we’d be willing to bet that more than a couple of those aren’t exactly legitimate, either.

    More than 42,200 fraudulent claims for unemployment have been identified since mid-March, leading to New York to refer more “more unemployment fraud cases to federal prosecutors than it has in the last 10 years combined”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    State Labor Commissioner Roberta Reardon said: “Unfortunately, we have to fight unemployment fraud every day—not just during pandemics—but attempting to defraud the government during a global public health emergency when millions are filing legitimate claims for benefits is particularly shameful.”

    More than 3.4 million claims have been filed in NY since the start of the pandemic and there were 52,642 claims filed just last week, Bloomberg notes.

    You can color us not surprised. Such is the case when the government attempts to “help” its people by creating more newly printed fiat than it can possible watch over and regulate. In addition to increasing the stresses of inflation on the lower class, the government enables those with means to fraudulently obtain funds they don’t need, further skewing an already uneven playing field. 

    And people wonder why libertarians want less government and claim that politicians aren’t good capital allocators…

  • Education Funds Would Follow Each Student Under Proposed Rand Paul Bill
    Education Funds Would Follow Each Student Under Proposed Rand Paul Bill

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 18:48

    Submitted by Sovereign Man

    Education funds would follow each student under proposed bill

    What happened:

    Currently, federal education funds are distributed to state governments, which then distribute those to local schools. But under legislation proposed by Senator Rand Paul, called the Support Children Having Open Opportunities for Learning (or SCHOOL) Act, those funds would actually follow each individual student.

    It would be up to the parents if they would like to spend the money sending their child to public school, or if they would rather use the money for a private school, charter school, or even homeschool supplies. For instance, the money could go towards homeschool curriculum materials, technology necessary for learning, tutoring, and even certain extracurriculars.

    “As the impact of the ongoing pandemic and the government response efforts continue to place parents in situations requiring greater flexibility in balancing working and providing for their families’ critical needs, especially when educating their children at home, my SCHOOL Act grants them that flexibility by empowering them to use their own tax dollars to find the option that best fits their family’s needs and allowing them to reclaim a bit of stability in uncertain times,” said Dr. Paul.

    What this means:

    More choice is always a good thing.

    If the federal government is going to be in the business of spending money on education, this at least gives the recipient more control to direct their tax dollars where they see fit.

    It’s a small step towards defunding something you disagree with, if you aren’t happy with local schools. Plus it will give more options to low income people, who could use these resources to divorce themselves from a failing and dangerous school system.

    This sort of proposal would usually be dead on arrival. But in the times of Covid-19, with more parents than ever considering homeschooling, this might actually get the consideration it deserves.

    * * *

    South Dakotans forced to sue after Health Department guts food freedom law

    What happened:

    In 2017, South Dakota passed one of the best food freedom laws in the country. It allowed small-scale food produced in a home kitchen to be sold to the public. This was especially helpful to small farmers, and rural or lower income people looking for a side income. Not to mention that it introduced high-quality food products like pickles, pies, bread, canned goods, homemade meals, jams, and even fresh entrees into far flung, underserved markets across the state.

    And literally no one became sick from consuming products from this cottage food industry.

    But then at the start of 2020, South Dakota Health Department regulations went into effect, which essentially gutted the law, and heavily restricted what could be sold.

    Cottage foodies sued, challenging the regulations’ legality. The Health Department responded by attempting to have the lawsuit dismissed, and force the food producers to appeal to the Health Department.

    Luckily, the courts refused to dismiss the lawsuit.

    What this means:

    So it’s great that these people’s rights weren’t entirely trampled by the court. But they now have to waste valuable time and resources just to fight the state to be able to exercise basic freedoms. Freedoms which were codified into law, no less.

    But a handful of unelected bureaucrats have the power to change laws.

    Seriously, who are these psycho bureaucrats with the energy to harass homemakers who just want to earn a living or a side income? It’s really pathetic when you think about it. So many people are lurking out there, just waiting to step in and tell two adults that it is illegal to sell food to one another.

    * * *

    2 million people impersonated in comments on Net Neutrality rulemaking

    What happened:

    Remember when the repeal of net neutrality got everyone fired up, believing the end of a free and open internet was nigh?

    When a government agency changes regulations, they allow the public to comment. And no Federal Communications Commission rulemaking got the public more riled up than the repeal of net neutrality.

    But it turns out, of the 23 million people who commented on the regulation– for or against– 2 million of those people were not who they said they were. These comments came from stolen identities, some of them from dead people.

    What this means:

    This is an important lesson in the age of Twitter rule. Even in official government rulemaking, the mob isn’t necessarily real.

    So as businesses and governments bow to the Twitter mobsters, it makes you wonder, who exactly is pulling the strings behind the scenes?

    * * *

    How about attempted murder charges for not wearing a mask?

    What happened:

    By now, plenty of cities and states have threatened possible jail time for not wearing masks in public. But a city councilwoman from Nashville, Tennessee wants to take it further.

    Not wearing a mask, she suggested at a recent virtual council meeting, should perhaps carry attempted murder charges.

    What this means:

    As another councillor responded, the city does not have the power to pass criminal laws, thankfully. But just the fact that elected officials seriously suggest this is pretty scary.

    Sadly, it’s not a far cry from the other draconian measures that have swept across the nation, in the same of safety.

  • Here's Every Presidential Candidate's Running-Mate Since WWII
    Here’s Every Presidential Candidate’s Running-Mate Since WWII

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 18:15

    Since the U.S. Constitution was first instituted, there have been 48 vice presidents. They’ve supported presidents in seeing the country through wars, economic expansions and contractions, a global pandemic – and much more.

    A president’s success depends on the strength of their team, so it’s only natural that as second-in-command, the pick for a VP carries significant weight; and, as Visual Capitalist’s Iman Ghosh notes, in some cases, they can even make or break the race to secure a spot in the White House.

    In this graphic, we take a look at the hand-picked running mates of presidential hopefuls since 1940, including the upcoming November 2020 elections.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Running More Than Once

    The graphic highlights 33 running mates, out of which nine have ran for VP more than once. Here’s how their number of terms compare, and who continued on to become an eventual presidential candidate:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of the running mates since WWII, Republicans Richard Nixon and George H. W. Bush are the only two to have served as president after being vice presidents for two previous terms—unless Joe Biden wins in November 2020.

    Prior Gigs

    What career paths did aspiring VPs take before running on the big ticket?

    Interestingly, 2 of 3 running mates profiled in today’s graphic had a prior background as a lawyer before choosing to enter politics.

    A curious exception to the typical career path is that of former professional football player Jack Kemp, who was chosen as the running mate for Bob Dole’s unsuccessful presidential bid in 1996.

    At the President’s Right Hand

    The vice president is the first in line of succession for the Oval Office, in the event that the sitting president dies, resigns, or is removed from office. Throughout history, nine VPs have ascended to presidency this way, of which three occurred since 1940.

    • After Franklin D. Roosevelt’s death in 1945, Harry S. Truman ascended to the presidency.

    • Lyndon B. Johnson became the President upon John F. Kennedy’s assassination in 1963.

    • Following evidence of political corruption, Spiro Agnew resigned in 1973. He was replaced by Gerald Ford, who then became President after Nixon’s post-Watergate resignation in 1974.

    Richard Nixon, Bill Clinton, and Donald Trump are three Presidents who have been through the impeachment process, but were later acquitted by the Senate. Otherwise, the list of VPs ending up as the commander-in-chief might look much more different.

    The Youngest and Oldest Running Mates

    Based on the first time they ran on the ticket, the average running mate is 54 years old. In contrast, the average presidential candidate is 58 years old.

    Comparing the age difference between presidential candidates and their running mates paints a unique picture. The biggest age gaps both occurred in 2008:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There was a 28-year difference between older candidate John McCain (72) and younger VP pick Sarah Palin (44) on the Republican ticket. On the Democratic side, younger candidate Barack Obama (47) and older VP pick Joe Biden (66) saw a 19-year gap.

    Harry S. Truman’s historic win in 1948 was considered a surprising political longshot. His running mate, Alben W. Barkley was the oldest running mate ever picked, 71 years at the time.

    Meanwhile, Richard Nixon was one of the youngest running mates to be chosen, 39 years in 1956—second only to John C. Breckinridge (36 years old in 1856). Finally, at age 92 years in 2020, Walter Mondale is the oldest living former VP.

    Cracking the Glass Ceiling

    Last but not least, there have only been three women selected as VP running mates to date.

    • Geraldine Ferraro became the first woman VP nominee for the Democratic Party in 1984.
    • Although she had only two years of political experience as governor of Alaska, Sarah Palin was the first female Republican VP nominee in 2008.
    • Kamala Harris, a former prosecutor with almost four years of experience as a Senator, is the first woman of color to be nominated on any major party’s ticket in 2020.

    Palin herself shared a few words of wisdom for Harris across the aisle:

    Congrats to the democrat VP pick  Climb upon Geraldine Ferraro’s and my shoulders, and from the most amazing view in your life consider lessons we learned…

    – Sarah Palin (via Instagram)

    Could Harris become the first ever right-hand woman? We’ll find out in a few months.

     

  • Conservative Journalist Arrested & Jailed Ahead Of 'ShadowGate' Documentary Release
    Conservative Journalist Arrested & Jailed Ahead Of ‘ShadowGate’ Documentary Release

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 18:06

    Update: While weaver’s arrest appears to be for unrelated charges according to the Daily Dot

    When speaking to the Daily Dot via phone Saturday morning, a Portage County Jail administrator said that Weaver is being charged with alleged “robbery, tampering with evidence, obstruction justice, and domestic violence.”

    When asked about the claim that Weaver was arrested for exposing the deep state, the administrator laughed. Conspiracy theorists believe a type of shadow government exists and is working to undermine President Donald Trump and his agenda.

    Meaww also reports Weaver’s husband was arrested. 

    …we still can’t help but wonder about the curious timing?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Peter Bary Chowka detailed earlier at AmericanThinker.com, Millie Weaver, widely known as Millennial Millie, a 29-year old conservative new media video and print journalist with a large following online, was arrested at her home in Ohio on Friday morning. Police officers apparently from a local SWAT team took Weaver to the Portage County Jail in Ravenna, Ohio where she is being held without bail until at least Monday for a “tentative status hearing.”short video captured on her cell phone as she was being taken away was posted online.

    The news of Weaver’s arrest was immediately taken note of on social media as the Twitter hashtags #freemillie and #freemillieweaver quickly trended. Talk show host and licensed investigator Doug Hagmann, on whose program Weaver was a guest on July 3, obtained a copy of Weaver’s custody record, which is public information, with additional background from his sources which he cited in an article:

    According to the information I obtained through my investigative inquiries (and partially detailed in the video of her arrest), she was indicted by a grand jury seated in Ohio. The indictment was sealed until served. The nature of her alleged offenses appears to be “process crimes” (e.g. Obstruction of Justice, Tampering with Evidence). [emphasis original]

    In an article Friday at activist post, Spiro Skouras wrote that he also “contacted the Portage County Sheriff’s Office and they confirmed Millie Weaver is in their custody. They also confirmed that she was served a secret indictment. “]

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The plot, if not the confusion, in this case thickens in light of the fact that Weaver was set to release an 82-minute independent documentary, Shadow Gate, which, as they say, is ripped from the headlines. The two-minute trailer, which Weaver tweeted a link to on August 11, teases the film’s relevance to current events:

    The ObamaGate scandal only scratches the surface. . . Both parties are equally guilty in what should turn out to be an even bigger scandal. Shadow Gate the tactical and operational role the shadow government played behind the scenes carrying out the coup against President Trump.

    On the page at her Website with the film’s trailer, Weave wrote:

    The material presented in this documentary should concern people of all political affiliations given elected officials are not the shadow government. This is about real players [whose] names never come up but should. Corrupt carrier politicians are definitely part of the beltway swamp, even aspects of the deep state, but they are not the shadow government. Two whistleblowers, who worked extensively within the Shadow Government as contractors have come forward with revelations that may be the biggest whistleblowing event to date.

    One of the whistleblower sources in the film, who uses the name Tore, uploaded a full copy of the documentary following Weaver’s arrest on Friday. In its first 14 hours online, the film had over 468,000 views. As of this writing, it is still on YouTube and is propagating virally elsewhere on the Internet.

    After viewing the complete documentary one time on Friday evening, I can attest to its compelling – and complex – content. It is a professional piece of film making, with state of the art production values.  The interlocking documents among Deep State players both known and obscure are riveting. Several viewings (a transcript would help) would be required to fully absorb and confirm the myriad details in the incredibly fast-moving presentation.

    Weaver, originally from California, is married with two children, ages four and nine months. Some reports have said that her husband has also been taken into custody. Weaver started her journalistic career in 2012 at Infowars, where she quickly became one of the channel’s most popular reporters. Recently, she has gone out on her own as an independent journalist while continuing to contribute articles and video reports to Infowars. Weaver’s own YouTube channel has over 420,00 subscribers and her Twitter account has 180,00 followers.

  • Is COVID Coming For Your Job?
    Is COVID Coming For Your Job?

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 17:50

    Authored by Adam Taggart via PeakProsperity.com,

    How safe is your job?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Because despite the “Everything is Awesome!” mirage the financial markets are desperate to project, the real economy — you know, where people actually live their lives — is telling us a far darker story.

    Tens of millions of US workers have lost their jobs since covid-19 arrived on America’s shores. Over 28 million people right now are currently filing to receive state & federal unemployment benefits:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And despite extraordinary measures to aid these impacted households, many are slipping into hardship as the prospects only grow dimmer.

    The $2.2 trillion CARES Act created the Federal Pandemic Unemployment Compensation program which added an additional $600 per week to those receiving unemployment benefits. It also sent a tax credit check of up to $1,200 ($2,400 for joint filers) to households making under a certain income threshold.

    But the extra $600 payments have now expired, and Congress is deadlocked on what will follow. The current proposal is to re-start the extra benefit payment at the reduced sum of $400/week, with $300 paid out of the federal government’s Disaster Relief Fund and the rest funded by the individual states. Another $1,200 payment seems likely, as well.

    This plan has it challenges, though. At $300/week, the Disaster Relief Fund will be drained after 5 weeks. And many states are claiming they can’t afford to foot the $100/week bill they’re being asked to.

    So it’s little wonder, with tens of millions of jobs lost and over 3,500 businesses declaring Chapter 11 bankruptcy so far this year, Americans are increasingly worried for the future:

    POLL-Three of ten Americans laid off in coronavirus crisis worried about food, shelter (Reuters)

    Three of 10 Americans who lost work during the coronavirus pandemic said they may have trouble paying for food or housing after a $600-per-week enhanced unemployment payment expired last month, according to a Reuters/Ipsos poll released on Wednesday(…)

    (…) Three out of 10 people surveyed by Reuters/Ipsos reported that they will have “a very difficult time meeting basic needs,” which includes paying for rent or buying groceries. Half said they are under some stress “but we will be able to meet our basic needs.”

    And it’s only going to get harder for these folks from here.

    The unemployment rate is currently reported at 10.2%, which is high — but still under-emphasizes the reality of today’s job seeker.

    Applying for a job in the post-covid world is a real challenge. Companies are busy trying to figure out how to manage the staff they have as they adapt to a remote workforce. And many are downsizing or closing shop completely.

    Simply put: there are many less jobs. And a LOT more people competing for them now.

    This imbalance will worsen as the extraordinary government benefits dry up, as they are highly likely to do after the November presidential election. Sure, politicians will try to curry votes by being as generous as they can leading up to it. But everyone knows there’s no way the country can sustain what it’s spending now, so expect the pursestrings to snap shut once the results are in.

    And, if the markets should experience another major correction, as they are definitely due for — then Katie, bar the-door. If the flotilla of zombie US companies currently kept afloat by Federal Reserve stimulus are allowed to sink, then the unemployment rate will go bonkers as tens of millions more workers lose their jobs.

    In Servitude To The Top 1%

    Speaking of the markets, for years we’ve been loudly warning that the price bubble in financial assets blown by the Federal Reserve has resulted in tremendously unfair wealth disparity between the already-rich and everyone else:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This is resulting in a neo-feudal economy, where increasingly companies target and tailor their services to the elites who have all of the money. The rest of us are increasingly becoming cogs in that machine, worker drones toiling away to keep a few queen bees fat and happy.

    Here’s a perfect example. This is an actual current job listing on CareerBuilder.com offering a staggering salary and benefits to serve as a ‘life coach’ to this Apen couple’s three children, who are all under the age of six:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So, this is basically a gussied-up nanny job for an insanely ambitious power couple with money to burn.

    Given the precarious state of millions of US households right now, I expect thousands will apply for this single position. The compensation package is just too sweet, and there are just too many laid off workers in need.

    And so we should expect to see much more of the economy head in this sad direction; more and more of the masses competing for the chance to be a servant to America’s aristocracy.

    But hopefully, that doesn’t have to be you.

    What To Do If Covid Threatens Your Job

    If you’ve already been laid off due to the pandemic, or fear that you could be, are there important steps you should be taking now?

    Absolutely.

    We published The Layoff Survival Handbook not long before the coronavirus hit, and it is absolutely more relevant than ever in today’s environment.

    The bankruptcy wave has just started. And if the stock market bubble pops, as history tells us is inevitable? Both promise more layoffs AND fewer jobs in the foreseeable future.

    So take smart action now to increase your odds of maintaining an income.

    In Part 2: The Layoff Survival Handbook, we detail out the steps to take now to reduce your vulnerability to a layoff, and the critical steps to take should you become laid off.

    Many of these will enhance your career trajectory and satisfaction even if a pink slip never arrives. But should one do, you’ll be far better off for having taken them.

    The stakes are simply too high now to leave your future to chance.

    Click here to read Part 2 of this report (free executive summary, enrollment required for full access).

  • California Set To Pass The Nation's First Wealth Tax Targeting The Ultra Rich
    California Set To Pass The Nation’s First Wealth Tax Targeting The Ultra Rich

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 17:25

    It was about about nine years ago when consulting company BCG first suggested that in a time of out of control spending and soaring debt loads, the only fiscally sustainable “solution” was to implement a wealth tax (see “There May Be Only Painful Ways Out Of The Crisis“).

    While the idea was well ahead of its time in 2011, and was quickly shut down in the court of public opinion, several years later none other than the IMF resurrected the idea of a wealth tax, which has only gained momentum in recent months, and despite widespread grassroots pushback, the concept of a “wealth tax” has moved front and center and most recently the chairman of Capital Economics, Roger Bootle, said that the world’s wealthiest could be subjected to higher tax rates as governments scramble to fund spending and repair their economies amid the coronavirus crisis.

    Fast forward to today when the ultra-liberal state of California is now ready to take this “socialist” idea from concept to the implementation phase, with the SF Chronicle reporting that a group of CA state lawmakers on Thursday proposed a first-in-the-nation state wealth tax that would hit about 30,400 California residents and raise an estimated $7.5 billion for the general fund.

    The proposed tax rate would be 0.4% of net worth (most likely ended up far higher), excluding directly held real estate, that exceeds $30 million for single and joint filers and $15 million for married filing separately.

    Oakland Democrat Rob Bonta, who is the lead author of the wealth tax proposal AB2008, justified the wealth expropriation by saying that California is facing a big budget deficit because of the health and economic crisis brought on by the coronavirus, and “we can’t simply rely on austerity measures,” to close it. It wasn’t immediately clear why austerity doesn’t work considering that California has never actually tried it, but in any case the Democrat’s proposal was clear: “We must consider revenue generation.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    California State assembly member Rob Bonta, D-Oakland, is the lead author of AB 2088, which would create a first-in-the-nation wealth tax

    And in doing that, California will trigger an exodus of billionaires who will be the first to realize which way the wind is blowing, and end up hurting the state far more than helping it as hundreds of ultra wealthy taxpayers leave for places like Florida or – for that matter – any other place in the world.

    Bonta said that the union-sponsored bill will not be heard before the Legislature adjourns Aug. 31, but “it can be reintroduced on day one of the next session.”

    Now what most normal Americans (i.e. those not living in California) may not know, is that this would be the second wealth tax set to pass in California. Bonta said he would like to see a wealth tax passed in addition to the “millionaires tax” proposed in a bill introduced in late July. AB1253 would add surcharges of 1% to incomes (joint or single) between roughly $1 million and $2 million, 3% on income between $2 million and $5 million, and 3.5% on income greater than $5 million, bringing the top rate to 16.8%.

    California’s top rate today, at 13.3%, is already the highest in the nation, and it’s only going higher.

    The millionaires (and soon to be hundred thousandaires, then ten-thousandaires and so on) subject to the wealth tax would report it to the Franchise Tax Board along with their income taxes. They would have to report all assets including stock in publicly and privately traded corporations; interests in partnerships, private equity or hedge funds; cash, bonds and savings accounts; mutual funds, futures and options; art and collectibles; offshore financial assets, pension funds, non-mortgage debt, real property and mortgage debt. Which of course is idiotic because some of that wealth is extremely illiquid and evaluating it will not only take material time and effort, but also result in drastic costs. Furthermore, just how will the government confirm that whatever wealth is reported represents reality. But such is life in a half-baked socialist utopia where every idea is for lack of a better word, idiotic.

    There was some good news: “Directly held real property, and mortgages and other liabilities secured by directly held real property,” must be reported, but would not be considered in calculating the taxpayer’s worldwide net worth, the bill said. How wonderful… oh wait, someone realized that this would simply be double taxing the same assets: “Real estate would be exempt from the wealth tax because it’s already subject to property tax, at a higher rate”, Bonta said.

    Among those handful of rational voices who call out this sheer idiocy for what it is was Jared Walczak, a vice president with the Tax Foundation, a think tank, who said that “it is far easier to call for a state-level wealth tax than it is to actually design an enforceable one.” Maybe that’s why no state has imposed one.

    However now that California is on the verge of passing a wealth tax, every other insolvent state will follow suit, staring with New York.

    “Some New York legislators are floating the idea, but Governor Cuomo has poured cold water on the notion, rightly concerned that it would lead to an exodus of high net worth individuals from the state,” Walczak said via email. Somehow California believes it is exempt from such an exodus. Spoiler alert: it isn’t, and the state’s wealthiest residents won’t think twice to up root and move their tax residence to a state which treats their wealth with respect.

    There is of course the possibility that this idiotic idea will somehow die before it is enacted. Walczak said that implementing a wealth tax at the state level “would be extremely complex, with questions of how to value illiquid assets and whether residents’ out-of-state wealth — including their investment holdings — can be taxed.” He added that “any tax that is actually effective at taxing wealth, however, would be equally effective at driving wealth out of state.”

    Emmanuel Saez, a UC Berkeley economics professor, i.e., a socialist, said income tax is not an effective way to tax the ultra-wealthy, because they can avoid the income tax as long as they don’t cash in their investments. Facebook CEO Mark Zuckerberg could avoid the income tax as long as he doesn’t sell his Facebook stock, and if he moved to Florida before realizing his gains, he may never owe tax to California, Saez said during a call announcing the bill.

    Saez, like any other socialist who has a terminal inability of grasping who the world really works and that every idiotic action by the state will have an appropriate reaction by the population, said the bill would not deter startups because it would let entrepreneurs defer the wealth tax for a period of time. Brilliant.

    “Liquidity-constrained taxpayers with ownership interests in hard-to-value assets and business entities, such as startup businesses, shall be able to elect for an unliquidated and deferred tax liability to be attached to these assets instead of the net value of these assets being assessed at the end of a tax year.” The taxpayer would have to sign a contract with the state specifying when the tax would be paid.

    Well, Emmanuel, instead of signing a “contract” with the state when the tax will be paid, all those entrepreneurs that keep the state afloat will simply… leave. And guess what happens to the already dismal tax collections then.

    None of this matters to the Berkeley socialist, and instead he pointed to a paper he co-authored, saying that California has 12% of the U.S. population but 17% of all U.S. millionaires and 25% of its billionaires. In 2011, California had only 15.5% of the nation’s millionaires and 21% of billionaires. The wealth tax, he said, would hit about 0.15% of California tax filers.

    We can’t wait for the paper’s second edition published in 2025 when the “professor” finds that California has none of the US’ billionaires.

    Until then, the rare voices of reason such as that of Robert Gutierres, president of the California Taxpayers Association, will become increasingly rare:

    “The state approved $9.2 billion in business tax increases in the new budget, but Sacramento politicians and special interests continue to seek income tax increases, property tax increases, a ‘headcount tax’ on in-state employees, and this new annual tax on money that was left over after all the other taxes were paid,” Gutierrez said, adding that “a very small number of Californians pay the vast majority of state income taxes. When the constant drumbeat for outrageous tax hikes drives them away, who will pick up the tab?”

    Why, the Fed of course.

  • Morgan Stanley: The Market Stakes Are Now Even Higher For Congress To Reach A Stimulus Deal
    Morgan Stanley: The Market Stakes Are Now Even Higher For Congress To Reach A Stimulus Deal

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 17:00

    By Michael Zezas, chief political strategist at Morgan Stanley

    The benign market reaction last week might lead you to believe that the failure to reach a deal on another round of fiscal stimulus in the US means more aid isn’t required to keep markets and the economy on their V-shaped recovery path. On the contrary, it remains crucial, and the stakes are now even higher.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Consider the following:

    • The risks to stimulus action have risen, but so has its size if enacted: The lead-up and subsequent reaction to the stalled negotiation by Republicans and Democrats delivered two important insights. The first is that the size of a deal, if it comes together, is likely higher than we and many investors expected. That’s because there’s bipartisan agreement on another round of stimulus checks to households, which we estimate has a price tag of US$300-600 billion. Additionally, we’d assumed Democrats would settle for US$250 billion of state and local aid, a number in the zone of what Republicans have already offered per various media reports. That a deal hasn’t materialized suggests that Democrats are holding out for more. Taken together, the price tag for stimulus appears more in the US$1.5-2 trillion range, rather than our initial US$1 trillion estimate. The second is that risks to the deal have risen. The president’s executive orders attempting to extend supplemental unemployment benefits, temporary payroll tax relief, and eviction moratoriums have likely created an incentive for both parties to watch and wait for how public opinion is shaped by them. Hence, it would not be surprising if negotiations remained stalled into September, given the passage of many of the catalysts for action (expiry of unemployment benefits, moratoriums, etc.). As anyone who prices options knows, time equals uncertainty.
    • The V-shaped recovery is under way, but a lack of stimulus could interrupt that progress: As our global economics team points out, there has been a solid V-shaped rebound so far and the US economy has already made up a lot of lost ground. However, prolonged delays in stimulus could weigh on household consumption and prompt state and local austerity, where we estimate that, without aid, states are facing US$180-375 billion of revenue shortfalls through FY21.
    • The sharp rally in risk markets leaves less obvious upside: At current levels, we’re near price targets in key asset classes, like US equities and credit, which our colleagues set on the assumption of a V-shaped recovery. Accordingly, the easy gains of reopening the economy may be largely priced in, and the uncertainty about whether economic growth can continue apace without fiscal support may not be.

    Hence, another round of stimulus is the difference between ensuring that the economic recovery continues uninterrupted and a meaningful short-term pullback in growth. It may also be the difference between a confident 6-12- month view on a variety of risk assets and a meaningful near-term correction.

    From our perch, we expect Congress to hammer out a deal in time, and hence maintain confidence in the V-shaped recovery. This is largely because of the executive orders issued last weekend. We detail our arguments here, but in short, the mechanics of the orders raise significant questions about how quickly unemployment benefits can be delivered and in what size. They also raise questions about if payroll tax benefits can be delivered at all. Hence, we expect building political pressure to address these deficiencies to bring Congress back to the negotiating table.

    What would make us change our view and flag a more cautious market outlook? Time and money. If talks remain stalled deep into September, and reports are that Republicans and Democrats remain far apart on top-line numbers for the deal, it may be too close to the election to get it done. The policy disagreements on stimulus may have hardened and politicians may be eager to get on the campaign trail and away from DC ahead of the November election.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 16th August 2020

  • CIA Behind Guccifer & Russiagate – A Plausible Scenario
    CIA Behind Guccifer & Russiagate – A Plausible Scenario

    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 08/16/2020 – 00:00

    Via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    William Binney is the former technical director of the U.S. National Security Agency who worked at the agency for 30 years. He is a respected independent critic of how American intelligence services abuse their powers to illegally spy on private communications of U.S. citizens and around the globe.

    Given his expert inside knowledge, it is worth paying attention to what Binney says.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In a media interview this week, he dismissed the so-called Russiagate scandal as a “fabrication” orchestrated by the American Central Intelligence Agency. Many other observers have come to the same conclusion about allegations that Russia interfered in the 2016 U.S. elections with the objective of helping Donald Trump get elected.

    But what is particularly valuable about Binney’s judgment is that he cites technical analysis disproving the Russiagate narrative. That narrative remains dominant among U.S. intelligence officials, politicians and pundits, especially those affiliated with the Democrat party, as well as large sections of Western media. The premise of the narrative is the allegation that a Russian state-backed cyber operation hacked into the database and emails of the Democrat party back in 2016. The information perceived as damaging to presidential candidate Hillary Clinton was subsequently disseminated to the Wikileaks whistleblower site and other U.S. media outlets.

    A mysterious cyber persona known as “Guccifer 2.0” claimed to be the alleged hacker. U.S. intelligence and news media have attributed Guccifer as a front for Russian cyber operations.

    Notably, however, the Russian government has always categorically denied any involvement in alleged hacking or other interference in the 2016 U.S. election, or elections thereafter.

    William Binney and other independent former U.S. intelligence experts say they can prove the Russiagate narrative is bogus. The proof relies on their forensic analysis of the data released by Guccifer. The analysis of timestamps demonstrates that the download of voluminous data could not have been physically possible based on known standard internet speeds. These independent experts conclude that the data from the Democrat party could not have been hacked, as Guccifer and Russiagaters claim. It could only have been obtained by a leak from inside the party, perhaps by a disgruntled staffer who downloaded the information on to a disc. That is the only feasible way such a huge amount of data could have been released. That means the “Russian hacker” claims are baseless.

    Wikileaks, whose founder Julian Assange is currently imprisoned in Britain pending an extradition trial to the U.S. to face espionage charges, has consistently maintained that their source of files was not a hacker, nor did they collude with Russian intelligence. As a matter of principle, Wikileaks does not disclose the identity of its sources, but the organization has indicated it was an insider leak which provided the information on senior Democrat party corruption.

    William Binney says forensic analysis of the files released by Guccifer shows that the mystery hacker deliberately inserted digital “fingerprints” in order to give the impression that the files came from Russian sources. It is known from information later disclosed by former NSA whistleblower Edward Snowden that the CIA has a secretive program – Vault 7 – which is dedicated to false incrimination of cyber attacks to other actors. It seems that the purpose of Guccifer was to create the perception of a connection between Wikileaks and Russian intelligence in order to beef up the Russiagate narrative.

    “So that suggested [to] us all the evidence was pointing back to CIA as the originator [of] Guccifer 2.0. And that Guccifer 2.0 was inside CIA… I’m pointing to that group as the group that was probably the originator of Guccifer 2.0 and also this fabrication of the entire story of Russiagate,” concludes Binney in his interview with Sputnik news outlet.

    This is not the first time that the Russiagate yarn has been debunked. But it is crucially important to make Binney’s expert views more widely appreciated especially as the U.S. presidential election looms on November 3. As that date approaches, U.S. intelligence and media seem to be intensifying claims about Russian interference and cyber operations. Such wild and unsubstantiated “reports” always refer to the alleged 2016 “hack” of the Democrat party by “Guccifer 2.0” as if it were indisputable evidence of Russian interference and the “original sin” of supposed Kremlin malign activity. The unsubstantiated 2016 “hack” is continually cited as the “precedent” and “provenance” of more recent “reports” that purport to claim Russian interference.

    Given the torrent of Russiagate derivatives expected in this U.S. election cycle, which is damaging U.S.-Russia bilateral relations and recklessly winding up geopolitical tensions, it is thus of paramount importance to listen to the conclusions of honorable experts like William Binney.

    The American public are being played by their own intelligence agencies and corporate media with covert agendas that are deeply anti-democratic.

  • Turkey Hit By Bank Runs, Currency Panic As Locals Sell Their Cars And Houses To Buy Gold While Lira Implodes
    Turkey Hit By Bank Runs, Currency Panic As Locals Sell Their Cars And Houses To Buy Gold While Lira Implodes

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 23:30

    It has been an miserable five years for Turkish citizens who have seen their purchasing power slashed by more than half, and it’s only getting worse.

    The Turkish lira has cratered against the dollar and most developed currencies, plunging from 3 TRY per dollar, to a record low 7.37 last week after a brief and valiant attempt at imposing shadow capital control by Erdogan (who is now de facto head of the Turkish central bank) failed miserably at the end of July, and not even a draconian hike in overnight funding rates above 1000%  last week (to crush the shorts) was able to prevent a plunge in the Lira to new all time lows.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As their currency implodes (in a nation that is becoming increasingly more “banana” with each passing day as Erdogan solidifies his takeover of every government institution, in the process turning off any potential foreign investors) Turks are discouraged from material purchases of dollars to hedge the collapse in their native currency due to some of the strictest capital controls on the planet, which has left them with just one option.

    As Reuters reports, Hasan Ayhan followed his wife’s instructions last week and took their savings to buy gold at Istanbul’s Grand Bazaar as Turks scooped up bullion worth $7 billion in a just a fortnight while their currency went up in flames.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Goldsmith at the Grand Bazaar in Istanbul, Turkey. Photo: Reuters

    The retired police officer, hit by vivid memories of the 2018 currency crisis which saw the Lira lose 30% of its value virtually overnight, was among those playing it safe as he queued in the city’s sprawling covered market, where a screen showed the gold price rise by one Turkish lira ($0.1366) in just 10 minutes.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What’s more, it now appears that locals are choosing gold over the dollar, perhaps because the dollar has also been tumbling against gold in recent weeks due to the Fed’s overt attempts to debase the greenback.

    “I think it is the best investment right now so I converted my dollars to buy gold,” the 57-year-old said, adding: “I might withdraw my lira and buy gold with it too, but I am scared to go to the bank right now because of coronavirus.” 

    Well, Hasan, for people in Turkey it is the best investment, but there is a rather high chance that Erdo pulls an FDR and makes it illegal for anyone in Turkey to own gold so you and your fellow countrymen may want to have a series of unfortunate boating accidents in the coming weeks.

    In any case, the day after Ayhan bought his gold on Aug 6, the lira hit a historic low and has continued to slide, laying bare concerns that Turkey’s reserves have been depleted by market interventions, which are showing signs of fizzling out, even as the central bank and president flood the local airwaves with fake news about monetary stability and urge locals to keep their money in lira.

    Only this time it’s not working: turks have traditionally used gold as savings and there may be as much as 5,000 tonnes of it “under mattresses”, with more added after the recent buying spree, Mehmet Ali Yildirimturk, deputy head of an Istanbul gold shops association, said.

    And although gold has never been more expensive – in either lira or dollar terms – vendors at Istanbul’s Grand Bazaar said almost no one is coming to sell their gold jewellery. There are only buyers.

    “I’ve been chatting with hundreds of people who are thinking about selling their cars or houses to invest in gold,” said Gunay Gunes, whose busy booth is near the market’s entrance.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gold dealer Gunay Gunes selling gold for Turkish lira: Photo: Reuters

    Putting the recent gold-buying frenzy in context, in just the last three weeks, as selling gripped the lira local holdings of hard assets such as dollars and gold jumped $15 billion to a record of nearly $220 billion, making a mockery of the central bank’s attempts to halt the currency slide.

    The good news is that, according to Reuters, so far there is no evidence suggesting people are about to pull savings from banks, and this week the lira has hovered around 7.3 versus the dollar, although it remains among the worst emerging-market performers this year. Demand has eased since Turks withdrew some $2 billion in hard foreign cash from their banks during a March-May period in which a lockdown was imposed and the lira hit its last low, according to central bank banknote data.

    But that will surely change should the freefalllin the lira accelerate. Indeed, analysts say that if Ankara cannot boost confidence in the currency, which has fallen almost 20% this year, import-heavy Turkey risks inflation and even a balance of payments crisis that will worsen fallout from the coronavirus crisis. It also guarantees even more weakness for the lira, and even more buying of gold.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gold dealer Gunay Gunes talks to Reuters during an interview at the Grand Bazaar in Istanbul. Photo: Reuters.

    Meanwhile, with foreign investors now having only a small stake in Turkish assets after the government’s authoritarian approach has spooked many of them away, it is critical for President Tayyip Erdogan to convince Turks and local businesses to stop turning to the perceived stability of dollars and gold. One look at the chart above suggest that’s not working.

    Meanwhile, Finance Minister Berat Albayrak – who just happens to be Erdogan’s son-in-law – said on Wednesday the lira’s competitiveness is more important than exchange rate volatility. The central bank has effectively borrowed on local dollar liquidity to fuel its foreign exchange market interventions, which are meant to stabilize the lira, according to data and the calculations of traders and economists.

    Through Turkish state banks, which together are “short” foreign exchange by $12 billion, the central bank has sold more than $110 billion since last year, Reuters data show. In turn, the bank’s gross FX buffer has fallen by nearly half this year to below $47 billion, its lowest in 14 years.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While the CBRT has downplayed the plunge in reserves, saying the “fluctuate” in stressful periods with the Treasury chiming in to say say the bank intervenes at times to stabilize the currency, ratings agencies and investors say Ankara should take decisive steps such as an interest rate hike to rebuild reserves and restore confidence. Otherwise, rising current account deficits and a possible debt default could tarnish the country’s formerly solid reputation for meeting foreign obligations.

    And, as Reuters notes, these debt repayments are set to rise in October, but the local aren’t waiting the 2 months to see how the current crisis plays out.

    “Locals don’t want to keep Turkish lira, they’ve been dollarizing and buying gold. Turks have hardly ever done that historically,” said Shamaila Khan, New York-based head of EM debt strategy at AllianceBernstein. “That is why you need proactive policies because if you get to that stage where locals are unwilling to keep their money in the bank then you’re heading to a balance of payments crisis. That’s when the alarm bells will start ringing.”

    To halt the bank runs, some banks imposed fees on withdrawals this week, while the central bank has curbed cheap credit channels it had opened to ease the coronavirus fallout. Yet while lira deposits now earn more than the 8.25% policy rate their real return is negative with inflation at 11.8%.

    Perhaps Erdoganomics, whereby the president mandated to “fight” high inflation with lower rates in contravention of all norms and rules of economics, will ultimately end up destroying Turkey just as so many expected.

    Or maybe not: traders say backdoor tightening needs to reach 11.25% to stabilize the lira, which has nearly halved in value since early 2018, sowing anxiety over diminished living standards in a country accustomed to free trade and travel; still Erdogan is firmly against higher rates claiming they slow down the economy, so instead the result has been currency destruction, because at the end of the day one can’t simply “order” economic prosperity.

    Meanwhile, Erdogan shows no sign of budging, and on Monday he said he hoped market rates would fall further “god willing.”

    But firms such as System Denim, which imports some materials and makes clothes for foreign companies like Zara and Diesel, are feeling the pinch from rising investment costs. Owner Seref Fayat said he recently converted his 4% euro-denominated loans to lira at 10%.

    “No need to take on additional FX risk,” he said. “Now I pay a higher rate, but at least I can see ahead.”

  • Are China's Naval Ambitions A Global Threat?
    Are China's Naval Ambitions A Global Threat?

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 23:00

    Update: Adding fuel to the foire that Coughlin describes below, Global Times Editor Hu Xijin tweeted the following earlier today:

    The more US aircraft carriers come to the South China Sea and exert pressure on China, the more it will prompt the PLA to develop complete and reliable methods against them. Once a war begins, these aircraft carriers are more likely to become vulnerable targets.

    *  *  *

    Authored by Con Coughlin via The Gatestone Institute,

    China’s decision to launch a fresh round of military exercises close to the disputed territory of Taiwan demonstrates that Beijing’s communist rulers have little intention of backing down in their increasingly provocative confrontation with America and its allies.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Despite the widespread international criticism China has received in recent weeks over its brutal suppression of pro-democracy activists in Hong Kong, there is little sign that Beijing is prepared to adopt a more conciliatory tone.

    The arrest earlier this week of Hong Kong’s local media mogul Jimmy Lai Chee-ying, the founder of the territory’s Apple Daily newspaper, prompted a fresh round of international condemnation, with US Vice President Mike Pence criticizing the arrest.

    In a comment posted on Twitter, Mr Pence wrote that Mr Lai’s arrest is “deeply offensive & an affront to freedom loving people around the world.” Mr Pence continued that he was inspired by Mr Lai’s “stand for democracy & the rights & autonomy that were promised to the people of Hong Kong by Beijing”.

    The intense criticism Beijing has attracted over its heavy-handed treatment of Hong Kong appears, though, to have made little impression of Chinese President Xi Jingping and the rest of the ruling Chinese Communist Party (CCP).

    On the contrary, the adverse global reaction to Beijing’s policies seems only to have encouraged China to adopt an even more aggressive attitude, such as launching a new wave of military exercises close to Taiwan.

    Announcing the commencement of the exercises on Thursday, the Chinese military sought to justify their action by claiming that they were being undertaken “to safeguard national sovereignty.”

    Beijing indicated the exercises were being conducted in response to a recent upsurge in US diplomatic exchanges with Taipei, and were launched the day after Alex Azar, the US health secretary, became the most senior Washington cabinet official to visit Taiwan since 1979, a move designed to demonstrate the Trump administration’s unstinting support for Taiwan in its increasingly acrimonious dispute with Beijing.

    In a rare comment seeking to justify China’s military activity in the area, Colonel Zhang Chunhui, the spokesman of the People’s Liberation Army’s Eastern Theatre Command, said Beijing had been provoked into launching the exercises. In a threatening reference to the US, he said:

    “Certain large countries are incessantly making negative moves regarding the Taiwan issue and sending wrong signals to the ‘Taiwan independence’ forces, seriously threatening peace and stability in the Taiwan Strait.”

    Amid growing tensions between Washington and Beijing, the US last month dispatched two aircraft carriers and four warships to the South China Sea to deter any further acts of aggression by the Chinese military, especially in the contested waters of the South China Sea.

    The deployment followed a series of incidents in the region where the Chinese military was accused of using bullying tactics against a number of neighbouring Asian states such as Vietnam, Malaysia and the Philippines.

    In addition, China has been accused of indulging in aggressive conduct in the East China Sea, where Beijing continues to press its claim to sovereignty over the Japan-administered Senkaku Islands. In the most recent incident, Japanese Coast Guard officials reported last month that Chinese patrol ships had entered the 12-nautical-mile territorial waters around the disputed island, and had remained there for “an extended time.”

    Nor is China’s unwelcome activity in international waters confined to its immediate vicinity. Earlier this month officials in Ecuador complained about the presence of an enormous Chinese flagged fishing fleet that was operating in international waters close to the Galapagos Islands, claiming the fleets’ massive fishing operation posed a threat to the islands’ delicate marine ecosystem. The Galapagos Islands were designated a world heritage site by UNESCO in 1978.

    All of which suggests that, far from being embarrassed by the recent criticism it has endured, Beijing remains determined to establish its naval presence around the world.

  • President Trump's Younger Brother Dies Of Unspecified Illness
    President Trump's Younger Brother Dies Of Unspecified Illness

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 22:41

    President Trump’s younger brother, Robert Trump, has died of an unspecified illness at the age of 72.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “It is with heavy heart I share that my wonderful brother, Robert, peacefully passed away tonight,” Trump wrote in a Saturday night memo, adding “He was not just my brother, he was my best friend. He will be greatly missed, but we will meet again. His memory will live on in my heart forever. Robert, I love you. Rest in peace.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Robert was hospitalized on Friday in New York and was reportedly “very ill.” In June, he spent over a week in intensive care at Mount Sinai Hospital in Manhattan. He was the youngest of five children, and unlike his famous brother, lived a quiet life in upstate Dutchess County, NY, where he was known for supporting a number of local charities.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He was also a trustee of the nonprofit Angels of Light, as well as a horse rescue group, according to Town and Country.

    “He’s not flamboyant,” one local said of Robert.

    Previously, he served as a top executive with the Trump organization – describing himself to Page Six in January of 2016 as “gainfully retired.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Robert Trump and his father Fred attend the opening of the restored Wollman Rink in Central Park on November 5, 1987 in New York City.
    Rita BarrosGetty Images

    Meanwhile, the Washington Post ladies and gentlemen. Stay classy.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • "The Concept Of A Bar Is Completely Changing" – How Automation Is Crushing Servers' Labor Market Hopes  
    "The Concept Of A Bar Is Completely Changing" – How Automation Is Crushing Servers' Labor Market Hopes  

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 22:30

    The virus pandemic is profoundly altering America’s restaurant industry, ushering in, what we believe, could be an era of automation and artificial intelligence in storefronts. 

    The entire restaurant industry was crushed under the weight of lockdowns, and many eateries were deemed nonessential, forcing some to shutter operations forever. The lucky ones to survive are dealing with ultra-low foot traffic as consumers stay home and eat or use smartphone apps to order curbside pickup. Consumers are still not comfortable with dining inside commercial spaces with human food preppers or other consumers around them. 

    The restaurant industry is at significant crossroads: Surviving eateries are figuring out creative ways to instill confidence among consumers that restaurants and or bars are safe from the virus. One way to do so is through the adoption of robots and AI. 

    “The concept of a bar is completely changing now, and the concept of nightclubs and public events,” Alan Adojaan, chief executive officer of Tallinn, an Estonia-based robotics company, told Bloomberg.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Adojaan said while humans are needed to maintain the backend part of the bar, the actual bartender can be automated. He said his prototype robot bartender is gaining significant traction from airports, casinos, and hotels. 

    Readers may recall, over the years, we noted from Vegas to Dubai to major cities in Asia, automation was slowly being added to restaurants and bars, and many other service type businesses. 

    Replacing humans on the restaurant or bar floor will increasingly become popular in the early 2020s as a way to bring back customers. 

    Not too long ago, fast-food chain Kentucky Fried Chicken (KFC) debuted its “restaurant of the future,” one where automation dominates the storefront, and little to no interaction is seen between customers and employees. 

    The trend to automate restaurants and bars was inevitable, as we’ve highlighted from a few years back: 

    However, there’s a problem, the tradeoff of automating restaurants and bars will be absolutely devastating to the labor market. Before the virus pandemic, 13.5 million people worked in the industry. Post-pandemic, tens of thousands of eateries have closed permanently with hundreds of thousands, if not millions of job losses. Then factor in additional job loss due to automation, and what this all suggests is that millions of restaurant jobs will be lost forever.

  • Doctors Pen Open Letter To Fauci Regarding The Use Of Hydroxychloroquine for Treating COVID-19
    Doctors Pen Open Letter To Fauci Regarding The Use Of Hydroxychloroquine for Treating COVID-19

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 22:00

    Authored by George C. Fareed, MD Brawley, California Michael M. Jacobs, MD, MPH Pensacola, Florida Donald C. Pompan, MD Salinas, California,

    August 12, 2020

    Anthony Fauci, MD
    National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases
    Washington, D.C.

    Dear Dr. Fauci:

    You were placed into the most high-profile role regarding America’s response to the Coronavirus pandemic. Americans have relied on your medical expertise concerning the wearing of masks, resuming employment, returning to school, and of course medical treatment.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    You are largely unchallenged in terms of your medical opinions. You are the de facto “COVID-19 Czar”. This is unusual in the medical profession in which doctors’ opinions are challenged by other physicians in the form of exchanges between doctors at hospitals, medical conferences, as well as debate in medical journals. You render your opinions unchallenged, without formal public opposition from physicians who passionately disagree with you. It is incontestable that the public is best served when opinions and policy are based on the prevailing evidence and science, and able to withstand the scrutiny of medical professionals.

    As experience accrued in treating COVID-19 infections, physicians worldwide discovered that high-risk patients can be treated successfully as an outpatient, within the first 5 to 7 days of the onset of symptoms, with a “cocktail” consisting of hydroxychloroquine, zinc, and azithromycin (or doxycycline). Multiple scholarly contributions to the literature detail the efficacy of the hydroxychloroquine-based combination treatment.

    Dr. Harvey Risch, the renowned Yale epidemiologist, published an article in May 2020 in the American Journal of Epidemiology titled “Early Outpatient Treatment of Symptomatic, High-Risk COVID-19 Patients that Should be Ramped-Up Immediately as Key to Pandemic Crisis”. He further published an article in Newsweek in July 2020 for the general public expressing the same conclusions and opinions. Dr. Risch is an expert at evaluating research data and study designs, publishing over 300 articles. Dr Risch’s assessment is that there is unequivocal evidence for the early and safe use of the “HCQ cocktail.” If there are Q-T interval concerns, doxycycline can be substituted for azithromycin as it has activity against RNA viruses without any cardiac effects.

    Yet, you continue to reject the use of hydroxychloroquine, except in a hospital setting in the form of clinical trials, repeatedly emphasizing the lack of evidence supporting its use. Hydroxychloroquine, despite 65 years of use for malaria, and over 40 years for lupus and rheumatoid arthritis, with a well-established safety profile, has been deemed by you and the FDA as unsafe for use in the treatment of symptomatic COVID-19 infections. Your opinions have influenced the thinking of physicians and their patients, medical boards, state and federal agencies, pharmacists, hospitals, and just about everyone involved in medical decision making.

    Indeed, your opinions impacted the health of Americans, and many aspects of our day-to-day lives including employment and school. Those of us who prescribe hydroxychloroquine, zinc, and azithromycin/doxycycline believe fervently that early outpatient use would save tens of thousands of lives and enable our country to dramatically alter the response to COVID-19. We advocate for an approach that will reduce fear and allow Americans to get their lives back.

    We hope that our questions compel you to reconsider your current approach to COVID-19 infection.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Questions regarding early outpatient treatment

    1. There are generally two stages of COVID-19 symptomatic infection; initial flu like symptoms with progression to cytokine storm and respiratory failure, correct?

    2. When people are admitted to a hospital, they generally are in worse condition, correct?

    3. There are no specific medications currently recommended for early outpatient treatment of symptomatic COVID-19 infection, correct?

    4. Remdesivir and Dexamethasone are used for hospitalized patients, correct?

    5. There is currently no recommended pharmacologic early outpatient treatment for individuals in the flu stage of the illness, correct?

    6. It is true that COVID-19 is much more lethal than the flu for high-risk individuals such as older patients and those with significant comorbidities, correct?

    7. Individuals with signs of early COVID-19 infection typically have a runny nose, fever, cough, shortness of breath, loss of smell, etc., and physicians send them home to rest, eat chicken soup etc., but offer no specific, targeted medications, correct?

    8. These high-risk individuals are at high risk of death, on the order of 15% or higher, correct?

    9. So just so we are clear—the current standard of care now is to send clinically stable symptomatic patients home, “with a wait and see” approach?

    10. Are you aware that physicians are successfully using Hydroxychloroquine combined with Zinc and Azithromycin as a “cocktail” for early outpatient treatment of symptomatic, high-risk, individuals?

    11. Have you heard of the “Zelenko Protocol,” for treating high-risk patients with COVID 19 as an outpatient?

    12. Have you read Dr. Risch’s article in the American Journal of Epidemiology of the early outpatient treatment of COVID-19?

    13. Are you aware that physicians using the medication combination or “cocktail” recommend use within the first 5 to 7 days of the onset of symptoms, before the illness impacts the lungs, or cytokine storm evolves?

    14. Again, to be clear, your recommendation is no pharmacologic treatment as an outpatient for the flu—like symptoms in patients that are stable, regardless of their risk factors, correct?

    15. Would you advocate for early pharmacologic outpatient treatment of symptomatic COVID-19 patients if you were confident that it was beneficial?

    16. Are you aware that there are hundreds of physicians in the United States and thousands across the globe who have had dramatic success treating high-risk individuals as outpatients with this “cocktail?”

    17. Are you aware that there are at least 10 studies demonstrating the efficacy of early outpatient treatment with the Hydroxychloroquine cocktail for high-risk patients — so this is beyond anecdotal, correct?

    18. If one of your loved ones had diabetes or asthma, or any potentially complicating comorbidity, and tested positive for COVID-19, would you recommend “wait and see how they do” and go to the hospital if symptoms progress?

    19. Even with multiple studies documenting remarkable outpatient efficacy and safety of the Hydroxychloroquine “cocktail,” you believe the risks of the medication combination outweigh the benefits?

    20. Is it true that with regard to Hydroxychloroquine and treatment of COVID-19 infection, you have said repeatedly that “The Overwhelming Evidence of Properly Conducted Randomized Clinical Trials Indicate No Therapeutic Efficacy of Hydroxychloroquine (HCQ)?”

    21. But NONE of the randomized controlled trials to which you refer were done in the first 5 to 7 days after the onset of symptoms- correct?

    22. All of the randomized controlled trials to which you refer were done on hospitalized patients, correct?

    23. Hospitalized patients are typically sicker that outpatients, correct?

    24. None of the randomized controlled trials to which you refer used the full cocktail consisting of Hydroxychloroquine, Zinc, and Azithromycin, correct?

    25. While the University of Minnesota study is referred to as disproving the cocktail, the meds were not given within the first 5 to 7 days of illness, the test group was not high risk (death rates were 3%), and no zinc was given, correct?

    26. Again, for clarity, the trials upon which you base your opinion regarding the efficacy of Hydroxychloroquine, assessed neither the full cocktail (to include Zinc + Azithromycin or doxycycline) nor administered treatment within the first 5 to 7 days of symptoms, nor focused on the high-risk group, correct?

    27. Therefore, you have no basis to conclude that the Hydroxychloroquine cocktail when used early in the outpatient setting, within the first 5 to 7 days of symptoms, in high risk patients, is not effective, correct?

    28. It is thus false and misleading to say that the effective and safe use of Hydroxychloroquine, Zinc, and Azithromycin has been “debunked,” correct? How could it be “debunked” if there is not a single study that contradicts its use?

    29. Should it not be an absolute priority for the NIH and CDC to look at ways to treat Americans with symptomatic COVID-19 infections early to prevent disease progression?

    30. The SARS-CoV-2/COVID-19 virus is an RNA virus. It is well-established that Zinc interferes with RNA viral replication, correct?

    31. Moreover, is it not true that hydroxychloroquine facilitates the entry of zinc into the cell, is a “ionophore,” correct?

    32. Isn’t also it true that Azithromycin has established anti-viral properties?

    33. Are you aware of the paper from Baylor by Dr. McCullough et. al. describing established mechanisms by which the components of the “HCQ cocktail” exert anti-viral effects?

    34. So- the use of hydroxychloroquine, azithromycin (or doxycycline) and zinc, the “HCQ cocktail,” is based on science, correct?

    Questions regarding safety

    1. The FDA writes the following: “in light of on-going serious cardiac adverse events and their serious side effects, the known and potential benefits of CQ and HCQ no longer outweigh the known and potential risks for authorized use.”So not only is the FDA saying that Hydroxychloroquine doesn’t work, they are also saying that it is a very dangerous drug. Yet, is it not true the drug has been used as an anti-malarial drug for over 65 years?

    2. Isn’t true that the drug has been used for lupus and rheumatoid arthritis for many years at similar doses?

    3. Do you know of even a single study prior to COVID -19 that has provided definitive evidence against the use of the drug based on safety concerns?

    4. Are you aware that chloroquine or hydroxychloroquine has many approved uses for hydroxychloroquine including steroid-dependent asthma (1988 study), Advanced pulmonary sarcoidosis (1988 study), sensitizing breast cancer cells for chemotherapy (2012 study), the attenuation of renal ischemia (2018 study), lupus nephritis (2006 study), epithelial ovarian cancer (2020 study, just to name a few)? Where are the cardiotoxicity concerns ever mentioned?

    5. Risch estimates the risk of cardiac death from hydroxychloroquine to be 9/100,000 using the data provided by the FDA. That does not seem to be a high risk, considering the risk of death in an older patient with co-morbidities can be 15% or more. Do you consider 9/100,000 to be a high risk when weighed against the risk of death in older patient with co-morbidities?

    6. To put this in perspective, the drug is used for 65 years, without warnings (aside for the need for periodic retinal checks), but the FDA somehow feels the need to send out an alert on June 15, 2020 that the drug is dangerous. Does that make any logical sense to you Dr. Fauci based on “science”?

    7. Moreover, consider that the protocols for usage in early treatment are for 5 to 7 days at relatively low doses of hydroxychloroquine similar to what is being given in other diseases (RA, SLE) over many years- does it make any sense to you logically that a 5 to 7 day dose of hydroxychloroquine when not given in high doses could be considered dangerous?

    8. You are also aware that articles published in the New England Journal of Medicine and Lancet, one out of Harvard University, regarding the dangers of hydroxychloroquine had to be retracted based on the fact that the data was fabricated. Are you aware of that?

    9. If there was such good data on the risks of hydroxychloroquine, one would not have to use fake data, correct?

    10. After all, 65 years is a long-time to determine whether or not a drug is safe, do you agree?

    11. In the clinical trials that you have referenced (e.g., the Minnesota and the Brazil studies), there was not a single death attributed directly to hydroxychloroquine, correct?

    12. According to Dr. Risch, there is no evidence based on the data to conclude that hydroxychloroquine is a dangerous drug. Are you aware of any published report that rebuts Dr. Risch’s findings?

    13. Are you aware that the FDA ruling along with your statements have led to Governors in a number of states to restrict the use of hydroxychloroquine?

    14. Are you aware that pharmacies are not filling prescriptions for this medication based on your and the FDA’s restrictions?

    15. Are you aware that doctors are being punished by state medical boards for prescribing the medication based on your comments as well as the FDA’s?

    16. Are you aware that people who want the medication sometimes need to call physicians in other states pleading for it?

    17. And yet you opined in March that while people were dying at the rate of 10,000 patient a week, hydroxychloroquine could only be used in an inpatient setting as part of a clinical trial- correct?

    18. So, people who want to be treated in that critical 5-to-7-day period and avoid being hospitalized are basically out of luck in your view, correct?

    19. So, again, for clarity, without a shred of evidence that the Hydroxychloroquine/HCQ cocktail is dangerous in the doses currently recommend for early outpatient treatment, you and the FDA have made it very difficult if not impossible in some cases to get this treatment, correct?

    Questions regarding methodology

    The Key to Defeating COVID-19 Already Exists. We Need to Start Using It

    1. In regards to the use of hydroxychloroquine, you have repeatedly made the same statement: “The Overwhelming Evidence from Properly Conducted Randomized Clinical Trials Indicate no Therapeutic Efficacy of Hydroxychloroquine.” Is that correct?

    2. In Dr. Risch’s article regarding the early use of hydroxychloroquine, he disputes your opinion. He scientifically evaluated the data from the studies to support his opinions. Have you published any articles to support your opinions?

    3. You repeatedly state that randomized clinical trials are needed to make conclusions regarding treatments, correct?

    4. The FDA has approved many medications (especially in the area of cancer treatment) without randomized clinical trials, correct?

    5. Are you aware that Dr. Thomas Frieden, the previous head of the CDC wrote an article in the New England Journal of Medicine in 2017 called “Evidence for Health Decision Making – Beyond Randomized Clinical Trials (RCT)”? Have you read that article?

    6. In it Dr. Frieden states that “many data sources can provide valid evidence for clinical and public health action, including “analysis of aggregate clinical or epidemiological data”-do you disagree with that?

    7. Frieden discusses “practiced-based evidence” as being essential in many discoveries, such SIDS (Sudden Infant Death Syndrome)-do you disagree with that?

    8. Frieden writes the following: “Current evidence-grading systems are biased toward randomized clinical trials, which may lead to inadequate consideration of non-RCT data.” Dr. Fauci, have you considered all the non-RCT data in coming to your opinions?

    9. Risch, who is a leading world authority in the analysis of aggregate clinical data, has done a rigorous analysis that he published regarding the early treatment of COVID 19 with hydroxychloroquine, zinc, and azithromycin. He cites 5 or 6 studies, and in an updated article there are 5 or 6 more-a total of 10 to 12 clinical studies with formally collected data specifically regarding the early treatment of COVID. Have you analyzed the aggregate data regarding early treatment of high-risk patients with hydroxychloroquine, zinc, and azithromycin?

    10. Is there any document that you can produce for the American people of your analysis of the aggregate data that would rebut Dr. Risch’s analysis?

    11. Yet, despite what Dr. Risch believes is overwhelming evidence in support of the early use of hydroxychloroquine, you dismiss the treatment insisting on randomized controlled trials even in the midst of a pandemic?

    12. Would you want a loved one with high-risk comorbidities placed in the control group of a randomized clinical trial when a number of studies demonstrate safety and dramatic efficacy of the early use of the Hydroxychloroquine “cocktail?”

    13. Are you aware that the FDA approved a number of cancer chemotherapy drugs without randomized control trials based solely on epidemiological evidence. The trials came later as confirmation. Are you aware of that?

    14. You are well aware that there were no randomized clinical trials in the case of penicillin that saved thousands of lives in World War II? Was not this in the best interest of our soldiers?

    15. You would agree that many lives were saved with the use of cancer drugs and penicillin that were used before any randomized clinical trials–correct?

    16. You have referred to evidence for hydroxychloroquine as “anecdotal”- which is defined as “evidence collected in a casual or informal manner and relying heavily or entirely on personal testimony”- correct?

    17. But there are many studies supporting the use of hydroxychloroquine in which evidence was collected formally and not on personal testimony, has there not been?

    18. So it would be false to conclude that the evidence supporting the early use of hydroxychloroquine is anecdotal, correct?

    Comparison between the US and other countries regarding case fatality rate

    (It would be very helpful to have the graphs comparing our case fatality rates to other countries)

    1. Are you aware that countries like Senegal and Nigeria that use Hydroxychloroquine have much lower case-fatality rates than the United States?

    2. Have you pondered the relationship between the use of Hydroxychloroquine by a given country and their case mortality rate and why there is a strong correlation between the use of HCQ and the reduction of the case mortality rate.?

    3. Have you considered consulting with a country such as India that has had great success treating COVID-19 prophylactically?

    4. Why shouldn’t our first responders and front-line workers who are at high risk at least have an option of HCQ/zinc prophylaxis?

    5. We should all agree that countries with far inferior healthcare delivery systems should not have lower case fatality rates. Reducing our case fatality rate from near 5% to 2.5%, in line with many countries who use HCQ early would have cut our total number of deaths in half, correct?

    6. Why not consult with countries who have lower case-fatality rates, even without expensive medicines such as remdesivir and far less advanced intensive care capabilities?

    Giving Americans the option to use HCQ for COVID-19

    1. Harvey Risch, the pre-eminent Epidemiologist from Yale, wrote a Newsweek Article titled: “The key to defeating COVID-19 already exists. We need to start using it.” Did you read the article?

    2. Are you aware that the cost of the Hydroxychloroquine “cocktail” including the Z-pack and zinc is about $50?

    3. You are aware the cost of Remdesivir is about $3,200?

    4. So that’s about 60 doses of HCQ “cocktail,” correct?

    5. In fact, President Trump had the foresight to amass 60 million doses of hydroxychloroquine, and yet you continue to stand in the way of doctors who want to use that medication for their infected patients, correct?

    6. Those are a lot of doses of medication that potentially could be used to treat our poor, especially our minority populations and people of color that have a difficult time accessing healthcare. They die more frequently of COVID-19, do they not?

    7. But because of your obstinance blocking the use of HCQ, this stockpile has remained largely unused, correct?

    8. Would you acknowledge that your strategy of telling Americans to restrict their behavior, wear masks, and distance, and put their lives on hold indefinitely until there is a vaccine is not working?

    9. So, 160,000 deaths later, an economy in shambles, kids out of school, suicides and drug overdoses at a record high, people neglecting and dying from other medical conditions, and America reacting to every outbreak with another lockdown- is it not time to re-think your strategy that is fully dependent on an effective vaccine?

    10. Why not consider a strategy that protects the most vulnerable and allows Americans back to living their lives and not wait for a vaccine panacea that may never come?

    11. Why not consider the approach that thousands of doctors around the world are using, supported by a number of studies in the literature, with early outpatient treatment of high-risk patients for typically one week with HCQ + Zinc + Azithromycin?

    12. You don’t see a problem with the fact that the government, due to your position, in some cases interferes with the choice of using HCQ. Should not that be a choice between the doctor and the patient?

    13. While some doctors may not want to use the drug, should not doctors who believe that it is indicated be able to offer it to their patients?

    14. Are you aware that doctors who are publicly advocating for such a strategy with the early use of the HCQ cocktail are being silenced with removal of content on the internet and even censorship in the medical community?

    15. You are aware of the 20 or so physicians who came to the Supreme Court steps advocating for the early use of the Hydroxychloroquine cocktail.In fact, you said these were “a bunch of people spouting out something that isn’t true.”Dr. Fauci, these are not just “people”- these are doctors who actually treat patients, unlike you, correct?

    16. Do you know that the video they made went viral with 17 million views in just a few hours, and was then removed from the internet?

    17. Are you aware that their website, American Frontline Doctors, was taken down the next day?

    18. Did you see the way that Nigerian immigrant physician, Dr. Stella Immanuel, was mocked in the media for her religious views and called a “witch doctor”?

    19. Are you aware that Dr. Simone Gold, the leader of the group, was fired from her job as an Emergency Room physician the following day?

    20. Are you aware that physicians advocating for this treatment that has by now probably saved millions of lives around the globe are harassed by local health departments, state agencies and medical boards, and even at their own hospitals? Are you aware of that?

    21. Don’t you think doctors should have the right to speak out on behalf of their patients without the threat of retribution?

    22. Are you aware that videos and other educational information are removed off the internet and labeled, in the words of Mark Zuckerberg, as “misinformation.”?

    23. Is it not misinformation to characterize Hydroxychloroquine, in the doses used for early outpatient treatment of COVID-19 infections, as a dangerous drug?

    24. Is it not misleading for you to repeatedly state to the American public that randomized clinical trials are the sole source of information to confirm the efficacy of a treatment?

    25. Was it not misinformation when on CNN you cited the Lancet study based on false data from Surgisphere as evidence of the lack of efficacy of hydroxychloroquine?

    26. Is it not misinformation as is repeated in the MSM as a result of your comments that a randomized clinical trial is required by the FDA for a drug approval?

    27. Don’t you realize how much damage this falsehood perpetuates?

    28. How is it not misinformation for you and the FDA to keep telling the American public that hydroxychloroquine is dangerous when you know that there is nothing more than anecdotal evidence of that?

    29. Fauci, if you or a loved one were infected with COVID-19, and had flu-like symptoms, and you knew as you do now that there is a safe and effective cocktail that you could take to prevent worsening and the possibility of hospitalization, can you honestly tell us that you would refuse the medication?

    30. Why not give our healthcare workers and first responders, who even with the necessary PPE are contracting the virus at a 3 to 4 times greater rate than the general public, the right to choose along with their doctor if they want use the medicine prophylactically?

    31. Why is the government inserting itself in a way that is unprecedented in regard to a historically safe medication and not allowing patients the right to choose along with their doctor?

    32. Why not give the American people the right to decide along with their physician whether or not they want outpatient treatment in the first 5 to 7 days of the disease with a cocktail that is safe and costs around $50?

    Final questions

    1. Fauci, please explain how a randomized clinical trial, to which you repeatedly make reference, for testing the HCQ cocktail (hydroxychloroquine, azithromycin and zinc) administered within 5-7 days of the onset of symptoms is even possible now given the declining case numbers in so many states?

    2. For example, if the NIH were now to direct a study to begin September 15, where would such a study be done?

    3. Please explain how a randomized study on the early treatment (within the first 5 to 7 days of symptoms) of high-risk, symptomatic COVID-19 infections could be done during the influenza season and be valid?

    4. Please explain how multiple observational studies arrive at the same outcomes using the same formulation of hydroxychloroquine + Azithromycin + Zinc given in the same time frame for the same study population (high risk patients) is not evidence that the cocktail works?

    5. In fact, how is it not significant evidence, during a pandemic, for hundreds of non-academic private practice physicians to achieve the same outcomes with the early use of the HCQ cocktail?

    6. What is your recommendation for the medical management of a 75-year-old diabetic with fever, cough, and loss of smell, but not yet hypoxic, who Emergency Room providers do not feel warrants admission? We know that hundreds of U.S. physicians (and thousands more around the world) would manage this case with the HCQ cocktail with predictable success.

    7. If you were in charge in 1940, would you have advised the mass production of penicillin based primarily on lab evidence and one case series on 5 patients in England or would you have stated that a randomized clinical trial was needed?

    8. Why would any physician put their medical license, professional reputation, and job on the line to recommend the HCQ cocktail (that does not make them any money) unless they knew the treatment could significantly help their patient?

    9. Why would a physician take the medication themselves and prescribe it to family members (for treatment or prophylaxis) unless they felt strongly that the medication was beneficial?

    10. How is it informed and ethical medical practice to allow a COVID-19 patient to deteriorate in the early stages of the infection when there is inexpensive, safe, and dramatically effective treatment with the HCQ cocktail, which the science indicates interferes with coronavirus replication?

    11. How is your approach to “wait and see” in the early stages of COVID-19 infection, especially in high-risk patients, following the science?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While previous questions are related to hydroxychloroquine-based treatment, we have two questions addressing masks.

    1. As you recall, you stated on March 8th, just a few weeks before the devastation in the Northeast, that masks weren’t needed. You later said that you made this statement to prevent a hoarding of masks that would disrupt availability to healthcare workers. Why did you not make a recommendation for people to wear any face covering to protect themselves, as we are doing now?

    2. Rather, you issued no such warning and people were riding in subways and visiting their relatives in nursing homes without any face covering. Currently, your position is that face coverings are essential. Please explain whether or not you made a mistake in early March, and how would you go about it differently now.

    Conclusion

    Since the start of the pandemic, physicians have used hydroxychloroquine to treat symptomatic COVID-19 infections, as well as for prophylaxis. Initial results were mixed as indications and doses were explored to maximize outcomes and minimize risks. What emerged was that hydroxychloroquine appeared to work best when coupled with azithromycin. In fact, it was the President of the United States who recommended to you publicly at the beginning of the pandemic, in early March, that you should consider early treatment with hydroxychloroquine and a “Z-Pack.” Additional studies showed that patients did not seem to benefit when COVID-19 infections were treated with hydroxychloroquine late in the course of the illness, typically in a hospital setting, but treatment was consistently effective, even in high-risk patients, when hydroxychloroquine was given in a “cocktail” with azithromycin and, critically, zinc in the first 5 to 7 days after the onset of symptoms. The outcomes are, in fact, dramatic.

    As clearly presented in the McCullough article from Baylor, and described by Dr. Vladimir Zelenko, the efficacy of the HCQ cocktail is based on the pharmacology of the hydroxychloroquine ionophore acting as the “gun” and zinc as the “bullet,” while azithromycin potentiates the anti-viral effect. Undeniably, the hydroxychloroquine combination treatment is supported by science. Yet, you continue to ignore the “science” behind the disease. Viral replication occurs rapidly in the first 5 to 7 days of symptoms and can be treated at that point with the HCQ cocktail. Rather, your actions have denied patients treatment in that early stage. Without such treatment, some patients, especially those at high risk with co-morbidities, deteriorate and require hospitalization for evolving cytokine storm resulting in pneumonia, respiratory failure, and intubation with 50% mortality. Dismissal of the science results in bad medicine, and the outcome is over 160,000 dead Americans. Countries that have followed the science and treated the disease in the early stages have far better results, a fact that has been concealed from the American Public.

    Despite mounting evidence and impassioned pleas from hundreds of frontline physicians, your position was and continues to be that randomized controlled trials (RCTs) have not shown there to be benefit. However, not a single randomized control trial has tested what is being recommended: use of the full cocktail (especially zinc), in high-risk patients, initiated within the first 5 to 7 days of the onset of symptoms. Using hydroxychloroquine and azithromycin late in the disease process, with or without zinc, does not produce the same, unequivocally positive results.

    Dr. Thomas Frieden, in a 2017 New England Journal of Medicine article regarding randomized clinical trials, emphasized there are situations in which it is entirely appropriate to use other forms of evidence to scientifically validate a treatment. Such is the case during a pandemic that moves like a brushfire jumping to different parts of the country. Insisting on randomized clinical trials in the midst of a pandemic is simply foolish. Dr. Harvey Risch, a world-renowned Yale epidemiologist, analyzed all the data regarding the use of the hydroxychloroquine/HCQ cocktail and concluded that the evidence of its efficacy when used early in COVID-19 infection is unequivocal.

    Curiously, despite a 65+ years safety record, the FDA suddenly deemed hydroxychloroquine a dangerous drug, especially with regard to cardiotoxicity. Dr. Risch analyzed data provided by the FDA and concluded that the risk of a significant cardiac event from hydroxychloroquine is extremely low, especially when compared to the mortality rate of COVID-19 patients with high-risk co-morbidities. How do you reconcile that for forty years rheumatoid arthritis and lupus patients have been treated over long periods, often for years, with hydroxychloroquine and now there are suddenly concerns about a 5 to 7-day course of hydroxychloroquine at similar or slightly increased doses? The FDA statement regarding hydroxychloroquine and cardiac risk is patently false and alarmingly misleading to physicians, pharmacists, patients, and other health professionals. The benefits of the early use of hydroxychloroquine to prevent hospitalization in high-risk patients with COVID-19 infection far outweigh the risks. Physicians are not able to obtain the medication for their patients, and in some cases are restricted by their state from prescribing hydroxychloroquine. The government’s obstruction of the early treatment of symptomatic high-risk COVID-19 patients with hydroxychloroquine, a medication used extensively and safely for so long, is unprecedented.

    It is essential that you tell the truth to the American public regarding the safety and efficacy of the hydroxychloroquine/HCQ cocktail. The government must protect and facilitate the sacred and revered physician-patient relationship by permitting physicians to treat their patients. Governmental obfuscation and obstruction are as lethal as cytokine storm.

    Americans must not continue to die unnecessarily. Adults must resume employment and our youth return to school. Locking down America while awaiting an imperfect vaccine has done far more damage to Americans than the coronavirus. We are confident that thousands of lives would be saved with early treatment of high-risk individuals with a cocktail of hydroxychloroquine, zinc, and azithromycin. Americans must not live in fear. As Dr. Harvey Risch’s Newsweek article declares, “The key to defeating COVID-19 already exists. We need to start using it.”

    Very Respectfully,

    George C. Fareed, MD, Brawley, California

    Michael M. Jacobs, MD, MPH, Pensacola, Florida

    Donald C. Pompan, MD, Salinas, California

  • China To Begin Major Expansion Of Digital Currency Testing    
    China To Begin Major Expansion Of Digital Currency Testing    

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 21:30

    China’s Commerce Ministry released new details Friday of a pilot program for the country’s central bank digital currency (CBDC) to be expanded to several metropolitan areas, including Guangdong-Hong Kong-Macao Greater Bay Area, Beijing-Tianjin-Hebei region, and Yangtze River Delta region. 

    The Commerce Ministry is currently running pilot tests in four cities: Xiong’an New Area, Shenzhen, Suzhou, and Chengdu. The People’s Bank of China (PBoC), the country’s central bank, is supervising the rollout of the CBDC pilot program on a city by city basis. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China’s CBDC is also known as a digital currency electronic payment (DCEP) and could become the first national digital currency. In April, the PBoC tested DCEP among government workers in Suzhou. Major state banks have also been administering large scale tests of digital wallets designed for a digital currency, or as the world will eventually find out: the digital yuan.

    Beijing owned China Global Television Network (CGTN) said test subjects would be able to “withdraw money, make payments, and transfer money after registering with their mobile phone number. The banks are also testing a scenario where users can transfer money without the internet.” 

    Last week, the PBoC said it would “actively and steadily promote the research and development of the state digital currency” during the second half of the year.

    The Commerce Ministry provided no details on when the extended pilot programs would begin. The ministry said the policy design of the digital currency would be achieved by the end of the year.

    Readers may recall, this summer, we’ve kept a watchful eye on country’s announcing their plans for CBDCs:

    As for CBDCs, Steven Guinness, an independent UK economic and geopolitical analyst, provides his take on the subject

    “The ideological agenda of central banks to digitise the entirety of the world’s financial system and to maintain their power base is being spearheaded by the Bank for International Settlements through their Innovation Hub. Unless people begin to recognise where the manipulation and growth in the CBDC narrative is coming from, and how there is a targeted agenda to guide the world into a cashless society, global planners will in the years to come get their way,” Guinness said. 

    Under the guise of a virus pandemic, the push to digitize money is quickly emerging. 

  • The Evolution Of Fiat Money, Endless War, & The End Of Citizenship (Part 2)
    The Evolution Of Fiat Money, Endless War, & The End Of Citizenship (Part 2)

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 21:00

    Authored by ‘ICE-9’ via The Burning Platform blog,

    Read Part 1 here…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Victory of Fiat Money, Endless War, and the Rise of the “Citizen Soldier”

    The stage was now set for the victory of fiat money after the series of bloody religious wars that plagued Europe over the 16th and 17th centuries.  For the first time some combatants would, at least initially, fight for religious “ideals” rather than pay or feudal obligation and this marks the beginning of the end of the Classical phase of European warfare.  This phase of endless war was funded by ever increasing amounts of silver borrowed on credit which, together with an endless series of tax decrees, initiated severe price inflation, economic depressions, and peasant revolts that became larger and more expensive to quell (on credit).  With both political and economic chaos spreading across Europe, it was at this time its intelligentsia began to espouse the “Universal Rights of Man” which, for its time, was nothing short of extreme radicalism as it demanded an end to the centuries old divine rights of the sovereign over his increasingly taxed subjects.

    These tenets of the “Universal Rights of Man” were quickly adopted and championed by the Bourgeoisie / Burghers / Borghese, skilled craftsmen, and lesser nobility as a means to not only elevate their social status, but also to break free from their centuries old and ever increasing taxation and military funding obligations to the sovereign.  The Reformation and subsequent religious wars proved that rebellion could, albeit at an extreme loss of (peasant) life, extricate a people from its taxation obligation to the Papal Empire.  By the latter half of the 18th century, simmering peasant rebellions began to flare into outright revolution as the “Social Contract” between the sovereign and subject disintegrated, prices for basic necessities skyrocketed due to the increasing taxation and coin debasement needed to fund wars and extreme opulence.  Sovereign default became state policy as by sovereign right, and the creditor class began to suffer heavy losses as the wars had no effect other than spawn new wars and drive the state further into debt, upon which it would eventually default, all while the state court played parlor games and gambled (on credit).

    Mounting losses by the creditor class presented an existential threat to this now highly powerful group and put at risk the profitable flow of credit to the merchant class, so near the end of the 18th century these groups vowed to depose the debtor sovereigns and assume outright control of the nascent central banks and operate the state for the sole purpose of generating profits to themselves through the monopoly of state credit issuance.  But the millennial old condition of raising an army funded with silver was an impossibility, as this not only presented a high probability of suffering staggering losses, but the sovereign, by his rights, could simply decree the provision of credit to rebels as treason and enforce punishment by death.  The answer to the creditors’ monetary dilemma lie in extending these “Universal Rights of Man” to the peasants, and thus framing the obtainment of these “rights” contingent upon successful “revolution” and overthrow of the sovereign.  Therefore, an army could be raised composed primarily of irregular foot soldiers that would fight for “ideals”, not silver, and thereby free up what silver could be raised for the purchase of munitions, the logistics of battle, and professional mercenary officers.  And to create the fervor required to sustain the “revolution” and replace the continual loss of foot soldiers, these “Universal Rights of Man” were elevated to the status of quasi-religion – “Liberté, Égalité, Fraternité”, et cetera.  So what we witness during this period of glorified history is not the emancipation of the people from the chains of sovereign prerogative, but the secret usurpation by the creditor class of the means of operating the state via proxy revolts against the insolvent creditor state and thus, the creditor class gain control of the state through the monopoly issuance or withholding of credit to the state. 

    This or is important as described below.

    It is no coincidence that the establishment of privately owned central banks during the 19th and 20th centuries followed after the fall of sovereigns, and it was this creditor class that financed the overthrow of each sovereign.  History’s interpretation of this period is wrong – the primary driver behind these revolutionary centuries was not the rise of the people against the sovereign, but instead was the secret overthrow and usurpation of the sovereign by the creditor class using the people as their proxy army.  The seminal moment where incorporation of a privately owned central bank followed a successful people’s “revolution” was the rise and financing of the professional mercenary officer Napoleon and his establishment of the Bank of France in 1800.  Now for the first time in Europe, we see two rival empires – Great Britain and France – whose privately owned central banks share an overlapping ownership within the great families of European finance – e.g., the Rothschild’s of Paris and London – and share common ownership between those royals sharing lineage on both sides of the English Channel that got out of agricultural feudalism and became creditors.  This overlapping ownership was a great bonanza to the private central banks as nations could now be pitted against one other, war bonds issued by both sides of a conflict, and the price of these bonds manipulated during the prosecution of war by altering its outcome through the issuance or withholding of credit to one side or the other.

    For example, Country A and Country B’s war bonds are issued from each respective private central bank, sold to investors including themselves, and at the beginning of the war are of equal value.  Then Country A is given advantage through the issuance of additional credit, and Country A’s war bonds increase in value as it accumulates victories on the battlefield where Country B’s war bonds decrease in value with every setback.  It is at Country B’s nadir that these same private central banks buy up its war bonds at huge discounts, sell their Country A war bonds at high prices, and then begin to withhold further credit to Country A while issuing large amounts of additional credit to Country B.  The tide of battle eventually turns as the reversed credit flow takes effect, and now Country B’s war bonds, acquired at great discount, begin to appreciate where Country A’s war bonds, sold at high prices, begin to depreciate.  Thus the progression and outcome of war can be controlled by the issuance or withholding of credit and tremendous profits extracted by the shared ownership of both country’s central banks regardless of which country wins or loses.  Thus the early 19th century now saw incredibly expensive wars of attrition prosecuted not for the purpose of empire building, but instead for the profits derived from the issuance of and trade in war bonds.

    It didn’t take long for the peasants to realize that the promised “Universal Rights of Man” delivered nothing more than conscription, subsistence wages from the growing number of industrialized factories, and yes, taxes.  Some new “ideal” was needed to motivate these peasants and make them a part of “something larger than themselves”, and the answers were found in “democratic” revolution and the labor union movement.  Now, the central banks had an endless pool of young men that would fight for the “ideals” of “democratic enfranchisement” embodied in “citizenship” and these newly minted aspiring “citizen soldiers” would accept fiat money offered in exchange for combat.  Thus, for the first time in history, not only could money be conjured out of thin air, but so too an army that would fight under this notion of “democracy”.  This quasi-religion surrounding the “Universal Rights of Man” matured into full religious zealotry under the banner of “democracy”, and like all religions this “democracy” had to be spread to the infidels through war.  But why?  Because the promise of the “Universal Rights of Man” failed to establish a privately owned central banks within Europe’s key empire – Germany.

    The rise of Marxism and the labor union movement in the mid-19th century were put to work by the creditor class to operate where the democratic “citizen soldier” armies proved ineffective against the powerful Prussian professional army.  These “democracy” foot soldiers were not deployed to the rural battlefields but instead to the streets of major industrial cities with the objective to ferment political agitation and societal discord in order to weaken the German state from within prior to “democratic” invasion from without.  The German Wars of Unification and later founding of the state controlled Reichsbank (1876) starts a 70 year interval where the primary objective of western European history is the destruction and overthrow of the powerful and efficient German state with its state controlled central bank, the imposition of “democracy”, and “empowering” the German people to replace the state controlled Reichsbank with a privately owned central bank having similar overlapping ownership structure to those already established.  Thus at the onset of the 20th century we observe the establishment of truly endless war, funded entirely by fiat money, waged by “citizen soldiers”, and fought on the basis of political “ideology” that has attained the status of religion.

    But the German state proved to be an implacable foe.  Through a combination of strategic offensive wars, prudent foreign policy, sound finances, liberal labor reform concessions to the working class, and unparalleled martial ability of its professional army, Germany managed not only to fend off the assault of “democracy” but also to expand its territory and influence and negate the influence of its communist agitators.  And German leadership had a true philosophical vision – the End of History starting with the consolidation of all Germanic peoples under the single rule of the German Emperor.  This meant eventual state control over the privately owned central banks in Great Britain, France, Scandinavia, and the Low Countries and stood as a direct threat to the creditor class’ own growing vision of the “End of History”.

    For the creditor class, the solution to this existential crisis was to first establish a reliable overseas creditor of significant means that was not directly threatened by German land based military power and had the ability to create and adsorb large quantities of fiat money.  This financial act of “guarding the rear” resulted in the 1913 Federal Reserve Act in the United States and its transfer of both monetary issuance and policy from the Corporation of the United States to the privately owned Federal Reserve System.  Thus with the Federal Reserve System established and in private ownership hands the flow of credit to the anti-German combatants could be guaranteed despite any opposition of the (primarily) German-American people.  Concurrent with this effort was the consolidation of a nexus of inescapable mutual defense pacts between European countries both with and without private ownership control over their central banks.  This nexus would draw both sides of the central banking ownership split into a war, weaken all countries equally, and leave no major power remaining to contest the outcome.  Thus any “victory” to the Western European creditor class became contingent upon mutually assured destruction of all combatants, but only the privately owned central bank side would be back-stopped by credit issued from the United States to rebuild military capability after hostilities ended. 

    With both an independent credit supply and mutual defense nexus secured, the final act was to goad Germany via false flag into a super war of attrition – the war to begin all endless war – that would not only completely defeat and enervate the German state, but generate tremendous profits to the New York and London client banks via their financing of hostilities, supply of armaments, and provision of logistic services.  And last, coalition member states that did not yet operate under control of privately owned central banks would be weakened to the point where the communist insurgents could be effective in prosecuting street level “revolutions”, at little cost, and these “revolutions” used to construct an existential threat to “democracy” occupying the position of Anti-Christ within this new politico-religious ideology and require never ending debt financing of military armaments and the excuse needed to conscript large standing armies.

    World War I went according to plan with Germany defeated, the last viable Goldmark extracted, economic collapse across the Weimar Republic, and no state owned Reichsbank to thwart the eastward expansion of private central banks.  With martial victory complete but only a bankrupt and worthless now privately owned Reichsbank left to show for their efforts, the creditor class set to devise a second round of wartime wealth “creation” and transfer via Germany through financing the rise and succession of the Nazis, as one could not build a Wehrmacht from stolen wedding rings and extracted gold teeth alone.  Client banks in New York, London, and Stockholm – cities in countries never invaded by the Nazis – showered the new Thousand Year Reich with the international credit facilities needed to buy the massive amounts of steel, copper, lead, zinc, tin, rubber, fuel, et cetera that it did not possess within its own territories, and buy these commodities primarily from countries it would soon face in battle.  From out of both the physical and financial ashes of World War I, between 1933 and 1939 the greatest military power Europe had ever assembled was conjured out of thin air by international fiat money that itself was conjured out of thin air.  Like WWI, this second phase of endless war ended with Germany’s total defeat and absolute destruction, its financial system under complete submission to the victors, huge private profits created and transferred to New York and London, and a new major player on the world stage – the US Dollar.

    The end of World War II marked the unequivocal victory of fiat money.  The most significant post-WWII finance shifts were the creditor class giving up on private ownership of the German central bank and the nationalization of both the Bank of England and Bank of France.  The BoE and BoF were insolvent due to their ownership of huge quantities of war bonds that would never be repaid so these losses were dumped onto the British and French taxpayers.  Thus with the BoE and BoF off their hands these same central bankers could focus their attention towards their ownership in the Federal Reserve System and use the United States as their proxy army for the global spread of US Dollar financing.  With the Soviet Empire left battered but intact, the post-WWII world was not only split along political systems and ideology, but was also split along competing fiat money systems – the “Free World” Dollar versus the “Red Menace” Ruble.  The antagonism between these two systems played into the hands of both sides, as each gave the other the excuse to commit vast quantities of national resources towards their respective militaries, expand their international political and intelligence operations, terrorize unaligned countries into both compliance with one system or noncompliance with the other, and commit all manner of atrocity in their politico-religious campaigns to force all countries of the world into one fiat system or the other.  Thus descended upon the world an endless series of overt and covert international wars and coup d’états and rigged elections to progress the urgent spread of “democracy”, denominated in US Dollars, against the spread of the “Red Menace”, denominated in Rubles.  In its simplest analysis, this was the essence of the Cold War – the fight between competing fiat systems for world domination.

    The primary post-WWII profit motive for the creditor class came now not so much from the usurpation of state owned central banks but instead from the relentless spread of “democracy” via coercion, subterfuge, and military force throughout the non- and semi-industrialized nations with the installation of pliant and reliable “growth” friendly juntas and regimes.  With international “growth” came accelerated US Dollar financing for the purchase of military hardware and civil infrastructure projects and ever increasing profits from the accompanying “skim” taken in fees, interest, and contract awards to controlled entities.  As these new US Dollar converted countries had no power to issue fiat money of influence and could not print their way out of economic trouble, and as “growth” rarely followed within their own borders but corruption and waste did, mechanisms were established to cover potential losses to the creditor class by expanding the mission of post-WWII extra-governmental financing institutions (IMF, World Bank, Asian Development Bank) to include the “international community” and back-stop all losses with “contributions” from “Free World” taxpayers.  War now was waged not for the profits generated from war bond issuance and trade, but for this zero risk “skim” taken from the spread of “democracy” and facilitation of international “growth” financing.  “Citizen Soldiers” were now not only tasked with risking their lives to impose “democracy”, but also for footing the bill when “democracy” couldn’t pay its tab.

    The number one recipient of this international “growth” was the United States itself.  As the holder of the world’s international reserve currency it was insulated from inflationary pressure due to the massive issuance of US Dollar denominated fiat relative to the combined value of its national resources and productive output.  This insulation was effected when the amount of fiat increased, the “value” via inflation of the underlying national resources and productive output denominated in US Dollars also increased and provided an additional layer of “growth” in the United States to be taxed via capital gains and skimmed through mortgage financing.  And as inflation raised this underlying “value” of goods and services, it also raised the “value” of labor inputs to these same goods and services, so wages increased as inflation progressed as money and labor inputs were not yet divorced.  For 25 years post-WWII the United States “citizen” actually saw purchasing power increase with the increasing issuance of fiat money around the world, as inflation was exported to non-US Dollar economies and US Dollars returned to the home country to be re-invested in growing US exports.  This insulation from inflation and increasing purchasing power was, in a sense, the “rights of the victor” granted to the United States “citizen soldier” and was the “carrot before the rod” that secured the blasé indifference to the prosecution of the endless overt and covert wars on foreign soil need to secure US Dollar financing hegemony.  And it all worked until August, 1971.

    During the mid- to late 1960s, oil producing countries along with other producers of US Dollar denominated commodities began to return their excess US Dollars and demand their conversion into gold.  Gold outflows from the United States via the US Treasury’s Gold Window soared and became a major problem for US Dollar hegemony as it was this promised gold convertibility – but never expected to be exercised convertibility – that gave the US Dollar its illusory “value”.  As US gold supplies depleted, the US Dollar began to depreciate in purchasing power at home and the domestic standard of living stagnated, as did profits generated by international “growth” to the creditor class.  Thus the late 1960s and early 1970s saw a period of stagnant domestic “growth” via reduced exports combined with domestic inflation fueled by the conversion of US Dollars into gold – stagflation – and the limits of US Dollar denominated international “growth” within the post-WWII model had been reached.  So in response to the cessation of international “growth” in financial profits, the creditor class devised a way out that would generate even greater profits to themselves, but was also the financial self-destruct mechanism that would eventually end US Dollar hegemony and money itself. 

    This new profit model entirely eliminated gold convertibility and moved the history of money from the fractional reserve fiat system to true fiat – money backed by nothing more than political coercion, military force, and outright fraud.  And this new system would tolerate no opposition – i.e., the Soviet model – as its extreme instability, utter worthlessness, and complete absence of underlying natural economic laws made it highly susceptible to failure.  Thus the competing fiat system – the Soviet system – had to be destroyed and all nations of the world brought under the unipolar suzerainty of the US Dollar.  Welcome to the modern age – the age of endless-endless war waged by the United States in the service of unipolar “Globalism”.

    The End of Money, Endless-Endless War, and the Coming Age of Subjugation

    The conversion to pure fiat money in August, 1971 was money’s defining moment since it first appeared as electrum coins in 7th century BC Lydia as this divorced money from any representation of, and true measure of, value.  During its existence, money had gone from value in of its self in the form of coins, to the (progressively fading) representation of value during its fractional reserve paper money phase, to a completely abstract replacement for “value” backed only by future taxation and additional US Dollars “hypothecated” from ever increasing issuance of Treasury bills.  Thus its journey from “barbarous relic” to “refined abstraction” was complete.

    Taxation is the fiat “value”, but future Treasury bill issuance is its hedge since future purchases cannot be guaranteed and may not materialize, and when they don’t materialize that triggers either massive tax increases, national default, or both.  Thus the system either “works” when nations buy Treasury bills, or it implodes spectacularly when they don’t.  To ensure the system “worked”, nations captured by the US Dollar fiat system were “persuaded” to “invest” their US Dollars not in gold but in US Treasury bills through this newly re-routed “virtuous cycle”.  Thus the prosecution of endless-endless war was the failsafe continuously operating to ensure the fiat system “worked” and that nations did not stray to gold or other fiat and thus trigger systemic US Dollar collapse.  War, regime change, US Dollar fiat imposition – lather, rinse repeat.

    Adoption of this new purely fiat money mandated that United States federal debt continually increase ad infinitum as debt was required to maintain operation of the fiat system through ad infinitum issuance of new Treasury bills – i.e., the repatriated US Dollars that went to new Treasury bill issuance always had to exceed the sum of Treasury bill interest and redemption payments.  Any budget surplus now was an indicator that either the tax take was too low or not enough Treasury bills were issued, and if budget surplus arose the system would revert to either higher tax take or new wars to impose more nations under US Dollar fiat.  To safeguard these continually increasing budget deficits through Treasury bill issuance and preservation of the global US Dollar fiat system, in the mid-1970s the United States embarked on a policy of de-industrialization using a combination of regulatory excess and high interest rates that discouraged new capital investments in production at home and drove up the domestic cost base until the laws of economics forced productive capabilities to cheap overseas destinations with little regulatory oversight. 

    This de-industrialization ensured that when US Dollars arrived home from overseas via the “virtuous cycle”, these dollars, if they did not go to purchase military hardware, went to purchase US Treasury bills instead of US manufactured goods and services.  Therefore de-industrialization ensured no federal budget surplus would ever arise, removed the inflationary cushion that US Dollar fiat provided during the 1950s and 1960s export boom, and guaranteed ever increasing budget deficits would follow in the wake of never ending Treasury bill issuance.  It is this purposeful redirection of US Dollar inflows away from the purchase of manufactured goods and services towards the purchase of Treasury bills that is the core nature of what is today termed “financialization”, as a high volume of these US “virtuous cycle” Dollars returning to purchase manufactured goods and services would starve the US Treasury market and implode the US Dollar fiat system.  Thus the US Dollar fiat system demands the destruction of the US manufacturing export base because Treasury bills, on which fiat survives, cannot tolerate competition from the purchase of US exports no more than it can tolerate competition with another fiat system abroad.

    With the removal of the inflation cushion and the imposition of forced de-industrialization, American domestic purchasing power was now locked into a permanent and inescapable downward spiral.  This was driven partly by the fiat system’s hedge component that necessitated ever expanding quantities of federal debt to create the Treasury bill issuance that funded the growing amounts of future interest payments and redemptions.  The other driver was with the removal of a large portion of the US industrial export market, labor began to produce goods of lower value and drifted more towards services whereby wages began to stagnate as they contributed less and less to the combined “value” of underlying US goods and services and wages began to be eclipsed by “financial profits”.

    During frequent periods of economic downturn US Dollars start to purchase gold and threaten the fiat system as gold begins to operate as a transparent and true indicator of value that does not exist in a fiat system and therefore, gold prices rise in all comparisons – e.g., the amount in tons of gold required to purchase the total stock market capitalization, et ceteraSo gold price fixing and outright bailouts when tax confiscation declines as unemployment rises and trade collapses become the norm as lack of value transparency drives underlying systemic instability to the surface.  So at this phase of fiat, bailouts are in reality an extreme measure to suppress the price of gold in US Dollars and thus keep hidden the absence of fiat’s worthlessness as a transparent and true indicator of underlying “value” in anything.

    Karl Marx defined money as the “abstraction of undifferentiated social labor” – by this, he saw money as the representation of some unit labor input into goods and services, and thus the price in money for goods and services was equal to the sum of these unit labor inputs along the entire value chain that created and distributed them.  What gave gold its value was the large amounts of labor input to discover, mine, process, and smelt that gold.  Paper money was the mere representation of this value inherent in gold held in reserve, and was a promissory note for its convertibility into gold – a true measure of labor input value.  When money became no longer convertible into gold, labor inputs were removed and it no longer had bearing on the price in money for anything.  Thus the price in paper money for goods and services – e.g., gold and labor – could now be entirely manipulated for the benefit of the creditor class at the expense of the working class and divorce money from any natural laws of economics.  Money had now transformed from its ancient representation of value in of its self into an almost zero cost tool (in unit labor inputs) of potential infinite quantity used to grant political and social privilege and thus, money was transformed from a finance instrument into a political instrument controlled by a new power amalgamation between the creditor and political classes.  Thus it is no surprise that wages measured in constant dollars have not risen since 1973, and when measured relative to a realistic CPI have declined substantially.  This is a direct effect of the creditor / political class, using this newly weaponized money, revoking all privileges formerly granted to the working class and handing these privileges to the corporate class, as the corporate class were now responsible for more and more of the rise in debt financing and tax take needed to support interest payments and redemptions on a never ending deluge of Treasury bill issuance.

    To ensure success and control of this new highly unstable form of worthless money, one of the two competing fiat systems first had to be destroyed and a unipolar fiat “world order” imposed on the entirety of the globe.  And like after Bretton Woods, the creditor class turned again to the United States as its proxy army for the prosecution of now endless-endless war in pursuit of infinite “growth” via “nation building” funded with US Dollar fiat money of no underlying value.  To set the groundwork for this phase and the eventual consolidation of political power after fiat collapse, in the 1960s many of the noble families of finance and their high level operatives “magnanimously” answered the call to enter into the unelected realms of politics through funding and ascension into the upper echelons of global extra-governmental agencies and policy formulation think tanks.  These globally focused organizations, after these key placements were effected, began to wield greater political influence on the US Dollar fiat denominated world transacted under the gateway guise of lofty aspirations like “universal peace” and “shared prosperity”, but with the malevolent end objective of eventually usurping the governing power of nations and transferring that power to this newly amalgamated creditor / political class.  This influence was spread internationally using bribes in the form of “foreign aid packages”, “humanitarian aid”, and lucrative extra-governmental sinecures to key second and third world figures so to establish a chain of US military bases across the globe.  Thus through extra-governmental policy “recommendations”, the United States was granted the “moral authority” to prosecute endless-endless global war against the Soviet fiat system and establish and maintain this coming single fiat “world order”, all under the appearance of some kind of reputable extra-governmental “global consensus”.  At the same time, the think tanks and their allies in academia began to ferment social discord in the United States to dilute and discourage political participation by the white working class and foster indifference to creeping extra-governmental influence at home through such things like the manufacture of counter culture, the promotion of drug use and homosexuality, feminism and women’s liberation, the Civil Rights movement, and the concept of “diversity”.

    With the American people dazed and confused during the 1970s after hit with everything from a 24/7 televised humiliating retreat from Vietnam to a quintuple in energy prices to Watergate to the introduction of the metric system and rise of disco, the creditor / political class effected a silent transition from the old profit motives embodied in the Korean / Vietnam Wars to the new war motives embodied in the ascendency of the Neo-Conservatives – the “End of History” and total subjugation of humanity. 

    But rather than cultivate acceptance of a new religious zealotry in support of endless-endless war, the creditor / political class instead formulated a temporary phase of debt based material “success” and exhalation of hedonism that facilitated its plans through mass public indifference to these plans.  While America partied like it was 1999, the US military machine was greatly expanded during “peacetime” and prosecuted multiple overt and covert proxy wars on all continents simultaneously, each of which warranted an equally expensive response from the competing Soviet fiat system.  It was the “moral equivalent of our founding fathers” versus the “Evil Empire” until one side or the other ran out of credibility to its fiat system. 

    The Soviets succumbed first and suddenly half the world became the political and fiat vacuum necessary for the Neo-Conservative prosecution of the “New World Order”.

  • Belarus President Moves Air Assault Brigade To Western Border In Response To NATO Drills; Says Russia Will Provide Security Assistance
    Belarus President Moves Air Assault Brigade To Western Border In Response To NATO Drills; Says Russia Will Provide Security Assistance

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 20:53

    Belarusian president Alexander Lukashenko said that an air assault brigade would move to Belarus’ Western border in response to NATO exercises in neighboring nations, even as the country reels from massive anti-government protests which Lukashenko has dubbed a “color revolution” orchestrated by foreign agents. Lukashenko also said that Russian President Vladimir Putin promised him to help securing safety of Belarus if needed, state news agency Belta reported.

    Speaking on state TV,  Lukashenko said he was “worried” that NATO was carrying out military exercises in Poland and Lithuania, which he views as an arms build-up on Belarus’ borders. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “I am more worried about the situation that is unfolding on the territory of our neighboring states – Poland and Lithuania. As you know, military exercises of NATO troops are taking place there. That would have been fine, but there is an escalation and a build-up of the armed component in these territories. Naturally we cannot turn a blind eye to it, we cannot observe this calmly. And when early in the morning I was listening to the report of the Chief of the General Staff, I noticed: our military is also worried about this problem,” Lukashenko said.

    In response to the drills, the Belarus president said that he has ordered the transfer of an airborne brigade from Vitebsk to Grodno.

    Lukashenko also slammed foreign countries which he said were attempting to act as “mediators” in the country’s problems, urging them to “put their own business in order” before dictating to Minsk.

    Earlier, Lukashenko said Russian President Vladimir Putin had promised to help him secure his country’s safety, if necessary RT and Tass reported. According to Lukashenko, the agreement was reached during a telephone conversation with his Putin on Saturday. “We have agreed – at our first request, comprehensive assistance will be provided to ensure the security of the Republic of Belarus,”he said.

    “When it comes to the military component, we have an agreement with the Russian Federation within the framework of the Union State and the Collective Security Treaty Organization,”Lukashenko explained. “These moments fit this agreement. Therefore, today I had a long, detailed conversation with the Russian president about the situation. I must say, I was even somewhat surprised – [Putin] is absolutely aware of what is happening,”he added.

    Lukashenko’s re-election for a sixth term last weekend was marred by massive protests, as thousands took to the streets over their belief that the election had been rigged. The Belarusian presidential elections were held on August 9, and according to the final official results provided by the Belarusian Central Election Commission on August 14, incumbent Lukashenko received 80.1% of the vote. Svetlana Tikhanovskaya, who was considered his main opponent, came in second with 10.12%.

    After exit poll results were announced on the evening of August 9, protests erupted in downtown Minsk and other regions of the country, leading to clashes between protesters and law enforcement. The protests continued over the following days.

    The European Union has said it does not believe the election results were legitimate and is readying itself to impose sanctions on Minsk in response to the bloody police crackdown, which has already seen two protesters killed.

    Workers at major state-run industrial plants were also hit with demonstrations and strikes during the week. In response, Lukashenko said workers at state-run companies should be fired if they go on strike, suggesting they were colluding with foreign actors, according to BelTa.

    Meanwhile, on a visit to Poland on Saturday, US Secretary of State Mike Pompeo said Washington was monitoring the situation in Belarus.

  • COVID Has Transformed America Into The 'Drive-In' Nation 
    COVID Has Transformed America Into The 'Drive-In' Nation 

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 20:30

    From drive-in strip clubs to drive-in movies to drive-in concerts, to now, drive-in raves, the pandemic has transformed America’s parking lots into the most lively areas as folks avoid indoor commercial spaces. 

    Early in the pandemic, we noted how a strip club in Las Vegas, hurting for cash, opened up a drive-thru peep show in its parking lot.

    Then, movie theater screens were quickly erected in parking lots of shopping malls across the country, and concerts were being held at stadium parking lots as people jammed out in their automobiles.

    Now, CBS Orlando is reporting “a drive-in style rave” will be hosted in downtown Orlando this weekend.

    The music event is called “Tail Break Rave” and will host a handful of DJs. The parking lot has enough space for 80 cars. All attendees will be screened for COVID-19 via temperature checks. Everyone will be required to rave with a face mask, and vehicles will be parked six feet apart. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Event organizers told the local media outlet that raving is permitted, but occupants of the cars can only dance around their vehicle. 

    The virus pandemic appears to have set America back to the era of the 1950s when the popularity of the drive-ins surged after World War II. 

    What’s next, drive-in restaurants? 

  • Israel Not Giving Up On Annexing West Bank, Netanyahu Says, After Historic UAE Deal
    Israel Not Giving Up On Annexing West Bank, Netanyahu Says, After Historic UAE Deal

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 20:00

    Via AlMasdarNews.com,

    Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu has said that he has not agreed to remove the issue of the extension of Israeli sovereignty over lands in the West Bank and will not relinquish it.

    Netanyahu said during a speech on Thursday evening, “The American president asked me to wait on the extension of Israeli sovereignty over more lands.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu (L) and Abu Dhabi’s Crown Prince Mohammed bin Zayed. Source: Barron’s

    He pointed out that “the plan of annexation and the extension of Israeli sovereignty over the territories of the West Bank is the most realistic plan.”

    “There is no change to my plan to extend sovereignty, our sovereignty in Judea and Samaria, in full coordination with the United States,” he said.

    He stressed that “Israel will have comprehensive peace agreements with other Arab countries without returning to the 1967 borders.”

    He explained that “the normalization agreement with the Emirates includes reciprocal tourism and direct flights from Tel Aviv to Abu Dhabi.”

    He stated further that “Abu Dhabi will make huge investments in Israel.”

    The Trump announced on Thursday, the reaching a historic peace agreement between Israel and the United Arab Emirates to become the first Gulf state to start relations with Israel and the third Arab country after Jordan and Egypt.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    He explained that the agreement would be called “Abraham”, calling on Arab and Islamic countries to follow the example of the Emirates and normalize relations with Israel, and said, “We may see other countries do that.”

    For his part, Crown Prince Abu Dhabi Mohammed bin Zayed emphasized that “it was agreed to stop Israel’s annexation of the Palestinian lands.”

  • Courageous Australian Surfer Saves Wife From Great White Shark Attack
    Courageous Australian Surfer Saves Wife From Great White Shark Attack

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 19:30

    In one of the most heroic displays of courage we’ve ever seen, an Australian surfer saved his wife from an aggressive Great White Shark who tried to chomp her down. The surfer,

    Australian media reported that a man named Mark Rapley rescued his wife Chantelle Doyle, 35, who was surfing off Shelly Beach at Port Macquarie, New South Wales, when the shark decided to attack.

    Fortunately, Doyle’s quick thinking husband punched the shark in the nose until it released its grip on his wife, then he helped carrying her back to shore, where she received urgent medical attention after being airlifted to hospital with serious injuries to her right leg.

    Experts quoted by the Port Macquarie News believed the juvenile great white shark that attacked Doyle was up to 3 meter long.

    Surf Life Saving NSW chief executive Steven Pearce praised the husband, named by media as, for his quick action.

    “This fella paddled over and jumped off his board on to the shark and hit it to get it to release her and then assisted her back into the beach…[p]retty full on, really heroic.”

    Watch the video below:

  • New Sound Money Caucus Launched On Capitol Hill
    New Sound Money Caucus Launched On Capitol Hill

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 19:05

    Authored by JP Cortez via SoundMoneyDefense.org,

    As the political and central banking establishment in Washington continues to bail out the economy and markets by creating trillions of unbacked pieces of paper and electronic digits, a handful of Congressmen hope to shine a new spotlight on the devastating effects of this runaway financial profligacy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Congressman Warren Davidson (R-OH) recently announced the creation of the Congressional Sound Money Caucus.  According to Congressman Davidson’s office, the caucus exists to promote sound fiscal and monetary policy in the United States with the goal of preserving the purchasing power of the U.S. Federal Reserve Note.

    Monetary policy, especially since the 2008 financial crisis, coupled with the recent federal fiscal response to coronavirus has re-inflated nominal asset prices and contributed to the wealth gap, while weakening the Federal Reserve Note in relation to the world’s other fiat currencies.

    Reps. Alex Mooney (R-WV), Andy Barr (R-KY), Kevin Brady (R-TX), Ted Budd (R-NC), and Lee Zeldin (R-NY) also joined the caucus.

    For several years, Congressman Mooney has been a leader on the sound money issue, hammering away at manipulation in the gold market and counterfeiting — and Mooney has introduced several pending bills to audit America’s gold reservesremove income tax on the monetary metals, and resume some form of gold backing to our currency.

    Congressman Davidson introduced the Sound Money Caucus on the floor of the House by saying:

    “We already have a great core group of members who are leaders in this area, who understand how important it is for the U.S. dollar to be an enduring store of value and an efficient means of exchange. I look forward to hashing out policy solutions to address the economic distortions of monetary inflation, so that monetary and fiscal policy can help rebuild the middle class, restart the American economy, and get us on a path for sustainable growth.”

    In an era where even so-called “conservatives” are adding trillions to the federal deficit, sound money is more important than ever. Sound money is the linchpin of a prosperous society because it protects capital and creates stability.

    Individuals and civilizations thrive under a sound money regime because uncertainty is reduced, and savings are respected and preserved. People can plan, save, and invest for the future without the fear of their money being manipulated and weaponized for political purposes.

    Further, sound money acts as a bulwark against Big Government and runaway levels of debt. Unfortunately, the United States government has proven that they can’t be trusted with an unchecked monetary monopoly. It’s no surprise that severing the tie between the U.S. Dollar and gold has resulted in frivolous, debt-funded spending by the political left and the right, depleting the value and general confidence in the U.S. Federal Reserve Note.

    After being driven out of the public conciousness over the past century, sound money is an idea whose time has come (again). Americans and even Fed-bugs are grappling with the immutable truth that governments can’t print society into prosperity.

  • China's Landlords Hit With First Rent Price Slump As Economy Falters 
    China's Landlords Hit With First Rent Price Slump As Economy Falters 

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 18:40

    Middle-class households in China are facing the first rental income slump ever, sparked by the virus-induced downturn, pressuring the private-property market. 

    Rents are declining in many metropolitan areas, mainly due to jobless tenants leaving town. A glut of empty apartments is becoming a major headache for landlords, as rent discounts have been introduced to entice tenants to remain in leases.

    Reuters spoke with Li, who declined to give her full name, said she was scaling up the social ladder with the ownership of two apartments that were used for a steady rental income stream before the virus pandemic. 

    Li now said she’s “almost halved the rent at one of her apartments between February and May to hang on to a tenant, while her own salary was slashed 25% as her employer made coronavirus cutbacks.”

    “I must pay the rent of my room in Beijing, and monthly mortgages for the two apartments,” she said.

    She is among the millions of middle-class landlords in China who have been devastated by the downturn. Many of these folks are experiencing the first period of rental income declines, as some are highly leveraged.   

    Housing data provider Zhuge House Hunter said rents in 20 major cities fell 2.33% in July YoY, the fourth consecutive month of declines. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Rental woes in China reveal housing market froth that is at risk of imploding if the overall economy remains downward sloping. 

    Demand for short-term rentals is also another problem for landlords, stripping any alternatives for generating income on their properties. 

    “Two groups … suffer the most,” said Yuan Chengjian, vice president of Zhuge House Hunter. “One is long-term rental firms … the other is investors who buy properties through high leverage financing because they pay off part of their mortgages with rent.”

    Reuters also spoke with Luo Shuzhen, a landlord with two buildings totaling 80 rooms for sublet, said she must postpone updates on her buildings because tenant numbers have dropped 30% this year.

    “It’s hard to say how long the epidemic would last, so I’m not sure whether I can maintain the rental business in the second half,” said Luo, who runs a convenience store.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The next big problem for landlords is the stalling recovery. China’s retail sales slipped in July, dashing hopes for a robust “V-shaped” recovery. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With mortgage defaults low, the non-performing loan ratio in the country stands around 2.1% at the end of June. 

    Tracy Wan, senior director of Asia-Pacific structured finance at Fitch Rating, said:

    “Half of the transactions in the securitization market use 90 days as the definition for default, while the other half use 180 days. For those who use 180 days, you’d have a longer time to recognize defaults, and that number is still going up.”

    And while landlords in China are pressured by plunging rental income, a similar story is playing out in New York City

  • 'Black Lives Matter'-Mob Demands White People Give Up Their Homes
    'Black Lives Matter'-Mob Demands White People Give Up Their Homes

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 18:15

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    A video out of Seattle shows a mob of Black Lives Matter agitators harassing a homeowner and demanding that they give up their property in order to fix racism.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The clip shows a male demonstrator singling out one home and lecturing those inside about how they’re “living in a historically black neighborhood.”

    He then accuses whites of buying land and homes from black people for below its market value and kicking out African-Americans.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Do you know that? Because if you don’t, now you fucking do, now do something about it,” he adds, to which another protester responds by saying, “Open your wallet!”

    He then accuses the homeowners of being complicit in “racist gentrification” while demanding they do something to fix the problem.

    A masked female BLM agitator with a bullhorn then continues the tirade.

    “Give us your house, give black people back their homes, you’re sitting there comfortably…I used to live in this neighborhood and my family was pushed out and you’re sitting up there having a good time with your other white friends.”

    “Now we’re bringing it to your front door, so what the fuck do you plan to do about it?” asks the male protester as the mob continues to harass the homeowner.

    The video ends with the homeowner apparently turning the lights off in a bid to avoid any further escalation.

    The seizure of white-owned property has long been a primary goal of the Black Lives Matter movement.

    Back in 2017, BLM leader Chanelle Helm issued a list of demands, one of which was that white people will their property to black people in order to prove they’re not racist.

    “White [people] if you don’t have any descendants, will your property to a Black or Brown family,” she wrote.

    “Preferably one that lives in generational poverty. … White [people] if you can afford to downsize give up the home you own to a Black or Brown family. Preferably a family from generational poverty. … White [people], re-budget your monthly so you can donate to Black funds for land purchasing.”

    *  *  *

    My voice is being silenced by free speech-hating Silicon Valley behemoths who want me disappeared forever. It is CRUCIAL that you support me. Please sign up for the free newsletter here. Donate to me on SubscribeStar here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown.

  • California Man Receives $860,000 In Fraudulent PPP Loans And Then Flees The Country
    California Man Receives $860,000 In Fraudulent PPP Loans And Then Flees The Country

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 17:50

    Today in “the efficient government hypothesis” news, a California man fraudulently obtained $860,000 in Paycheck Protection Program loans and promptly fled the United States, according to a report by NBC.

    San Fernando Valley resident Arman Manukyan is said to have fled the U.S. after boarding a flight “from Mexico City inbound to Paris with a final destination of Minsk, Belarus”. He is now being charged with one count of bank fraud and one count of aggravated identity theft and could face up to 32 years in federal prison – if he is caught. 

    The criminal complaint against Manukyan says that he submitted applications for PPP loans to Bank of America in June for $1.7 million on behalf of two shell companies registered in his name. 

    He claimed one company was in the sewing business with 73 employees and falsified tax documents showing wages and taxes for the company. It listed a virtual office address in Beverly Hills. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The government approved it for $867,187 in loans. 

    After receiving the money, Manukyan allegedly transferred most of it to his personal bank accounts, one of which was frozen for “suspicious activity”. Manukyan told a bank investigator he was going to use the money to start a limousine business, contradicting what he put on his application for his loan.

    Manukyan also submitted an application for $884,748 for a second business with a Glendale address. The SBA rejected this application, claiming it had either been submitted after the deadline or that PPP loans had run out. In July, a warrant was executed on Manukyan’s bank accounts, recovering $866,019, according to NBC. 

    A search warrant was executed at his home on July 22 that turned up “multiple debit cards” used for unemployment benefits from the California Employment Development Department that were in the names of different people. Another $118,474 was recovered from debit cards linked to Manukyan after the investigation. 

    We’re sure California governor Gavin Newsom would tell us this is just a one-off example and that the state’s taxes need to be hiked even higher so that government can prevent such fraud from taking place in the future…

  • YouTube To End Election "Interference"… By Interfering With The Free Press
    YouTube To End Election "Interference"… By Interfering With The Free Press

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 17:25

    Authored by Monica Showalter via AmericanThinker.com,

    Ever heard of destroying something in order to save it? Check out the latest genius move in the name of virtue-signaling from YouTube.

    The world’s largest video platform, with more than 2 billion users a month, will ban videos containing information that was obtained through hacking and could meddle with elections or censuses. That would include material like hacked campaign emails with details about a candidate. The update follows the announcement of a similar rule that Google, which owns YouTube, unveiled earlier this month banning ads that contain hacked information. Google will start enforcing that policy Sept. 1. 

    Which is preposterous. If some kind of news from some kind of hack is hot, all that matters is whether it’s true or not, not whether it changes public perceptions. YouTube is focused on those ‘perceptions’ though and has changed its policy to make sure there is no change of perceptions. Status quo, anyone? They’re very fond of the status quo. It’s a stupid idea because we all know what this is about – the 2016 hacked John Podesta emails and all the interesting news about what Democrats say to each other away from the cameras and public relations spin operations. It was mostly inside baseball, and didn’t affect the election, but the Democrats, bitter about Hillary Clinton’s election loss, and still not admitting the problem was their bad candidate who refused to go to Wisconsin, continue to say it did.

    This YouTube move accommodates their looney logic, which is a partisan political statement right there.

    It’s also a useless move because hackers are going to hack and if they’ve got something hot, people will get such news from some place else besides YouTube. QAnon is already an example of people getting news and information away from the traditional filters. YouTube will change nothing with this censorship policy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What’s perhaps most disgusting about this all the problems this kind of move presents for a free press.

    1. First, reporters report stuff all the time that’s hacked, provided it makes a Republican look bad. Is YouTube saying that only the New York Times (for we know they will never censor the New York Times) can used hacked information, nobody else can? Only the NYT can see the hacks and print only the ones that help Democrats? For YouTube and its favorite media, one hand washes the other.

    2. Second, how many times have politicians claimed, in the wake of scandalous news, that their accounts have been hacked? Anthony Weiner pioneered this kind of political claim after news that he was sending photos of his privates to underage girls on Twitter got out and he claimed it was a hack. With this new YouTube policy, any pol who’s the subject of any scandalous news now has a license to cover it all up, all for claiming it was a hac. Call this the Democrats’ YouTube protection guarantee.

    3. Third, there’s a fine line between hacks and leaks, the bread and butter of journalists’ output. Leaks are just as illegal as hacks, and lots of people have gone to jail for them, same as those caught illegally hacking have. Politicians have always complained about leaks, just as they have always complained about hacks. But among these hacks and leaks, many of which are reasonably jailable offenses, there’s also the category of whistleblower, the person who calls out wrongdoing against a vast establishment doing something contrary to the public interest or its mission. The Democrats have managed to corrupt the term with their planned-out impeachment scam, but real whistleblowers exist, and YouTube is there to stomp them out.

    The whole thing is badly thought out and clearly the work of some coordination with Democrats. For the professional hacker community, foreign or otherwise, that’s a dinner triangle, suggesting that they’ve now got something to hide.

    For Republicans, it’s also a dinner triangle – the one that says these budding censors are now ready to be regulated like an edited platform, responsible for every last thing that goes out on their sites. It’s time to get cracking on that, and getting loud about it if their Democratic partners persist. It’s hard to understand why nothing so far has been done. 

    Here’s the irony of it: It’s profoundly anti-democratic. This great move undertaken to ‘save’ democracy from the machinations of hackers comes at the expense of why we have democracy at all, which is freedom. You don’t save democracy by destroying a free press, pals.

  • Taiwan Signs Deal For Large Batch Of US F-16 Jets As China Tensions On Brink
    Taiwan Signs Deal For Large Batch Of US F-16 Jets As China Tensions On Brink

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 17:00

    For the first time in nearly three decades Taiwan has signed a deal to purchase F-16 fighter jets from Lockheed Martin, in a formal agreement which has been in the works for much of the past year, adding to spiraling relations between Beijing and Washington.

    The new contract will be for an initial delivery of 66 jets added to the self-ruled island’s existing fleet of F-16s, the Pentagon indicated. Completion is expected by the end of 2026, though we should note that it’ll be interesting to see whether China in the US have entered military conflict by then, something looking increasingly very possible.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via World Tribune

    The new jets will have major upgrades over and against the older F-16A/B variant which Taiwan’s Air Force currently operates, especially with advances in radar and electronic scanning capabilities.

    DefPost estimates of the Lockheed contract announcement: “The total value for the initial delivery order under this contract is $4.9 billion for 90 aircraft.”

    “Out of the 90 jet ordered, 66 are for the Taiwan’s Republic of China Air Force (ROCAF) while the remaining 24 F-16s jets are reportedly destined for the Royal Moroccan Air Force (RMAF),” it continues.

    China is sure to see it as yet more chipping away at the decades-old ‘One China’ official policy which has preserved the status quo in Taiwan, after warning for years against US military sales to Taiwan. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    President Tsai Ing-wen (right) meeting with U.S. Health and Human Services Secretary Alex Azar (left) at the Presidential Office Aug. 10 in Taipei City. Source: PO/Taiwan Today

    Add to this the fact it comes a mere two days after the highest level American delegation since met with leaders in Taipei since 1979 in a major symbolic move.

    Since the deal was first introduced last year in the US, China’s Foreign Ministry demanded that the US “refrain” from selling the “fighter jets to Taiwan and stop arms sales to and military contact with Taiwan. Otherwise, the Chinese side will surely make strong reactions, and the U.S. will have to bear all the consequences.”

    Just last week the first ever transfer of US military drones to the island was also announced. Tensions have also ratcheted due to competing military drills and a Chinese PLA build-up across the Taiwan Strait.

  • Hezbollah "Will Not Remain Silent": Nasrallah Suggests Israeli Involvement In Beirut Port Blast
    Hezbollah "Will Not Remain Silent": Nasrallah Suggests Israeli Involvement In Beirut Port Blast

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 16:35

    Via AlMasdarNews.com,

    Secretary-General of Hezbollah Hassan Nasrallah said on Friday that his organization “will not remain silent on the crime of bombing the Port of Beirut if it is proven that Israel is behind it.”

    In his speech on the occasion of the “victory on July 14” in 2006, Nasrallah said, “Hezbollah has no information about the Beirut Port explosion.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He mused that there are simply two possible explanations as to the causes of the Beirut Port explosion, namely that it was either accidental or sabotage.

    He continued, “If it is proven that the cause of the Beirut Port explosion is a sabotage, the negligence must be held accountable, but we must start an investigation about those behind it.”

    He explained that if Israel is linked to the explosion at the port, the truth will not be reached in light of the FBI’s participation in the ongoing investigation.

    The Secretary-General of Hezbollah emphasized that “the most dangerous thing is that facing a national calamity of this magnitude, there was a project to bring down the Lebanese state, I want it to push the country into civil war.”

    He added, “Hezbollah is concerned with the direct security of the resistance, and we are not able to assume full responsibility for national security with its internal dimension.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, Nasrallah was not the first highly visible public figure in Lebanon to suggest Israeli involvement. 

    Days prior, ex-Interior Minister Nohad Machnouk alleged, “This op was clearly & explicitly carried out by Israel,” echoing the suspicions of segments of the Lebanese citizenry.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 15th August 2020

  • Escobar On Battleground Beirut: Western Colony Or Back To The East?
    Escobar On Battleground Beirut: Western Colony Or Back To The East?

    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 08/15/2020 – 00:00

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Asia Times,

    Post-blast Lebanon has everything to gain from rejecting the West’s neoliberal demands and embracing China’s Belt and Road…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As much as Covid-19 has been instrumentalized by the 0.001% to social engineer a Great Reset, the Beirut tragedy is already being instrumentalized by the usual suspects to keep Lebanon enslaved.

    Facing oh so timely color revolution-style “protests”, the current Lebanese government led by Prime Minister Diab has already resigned. Even before the port tragedy, Beirut had requested a $10 billion line of credit from the IMF – denied as long as trademark, neoliberal Washington consensus “reforms” were not implemented: radical slashing of public expenses, mass layoffs, across the board privatization.

    Post-tragedy, President Emmanuel Macron – who’s not even capable of establishing a dialogue with the Gilets Jaunes/Yellow Vests in France – has opportunistically jumped in full neocolonial mode to pose as “savior” of Lebanon, as long as the same “reforms”, of course, are implemented.

    On Sunday, France and the UN organized a videoconference to coordinate donor response – in conjunction with the European Commission (EC), the IMF and the World Bank. The result was not exactly brilliant: a paltry 252 million euros were pledged – once again conditioned by “institutional reforms”.

    France came up with 30 million euros, Kuwait with 40 million, Qatar with 50 million and the EC with 68 million. Crucially, neither Russia nor Iran were among the donors. The US – which is harshly sanctioning Lebanon – and GCC allies Saudi Arabia and UAE pledged nothing. China had just a pro forma presence.

    In parallel, Maronite Christians in Brazil – a very powerful community – are sending funds for the color revolution protests. Former President Michel Temer and industrialist tycoon Paulo Skaf even flew to Beirut. Former Lebanese President Amin Gemayel (1982-1988) maintained a lot of businesses in Brazil with funds he skimmed when in power.

    All of the above points to neoliberalism taking no prisoners when it comes to keeping its deadly grip on Lebanon.

    The Hariri model

    Lebanon’s profound economic crisis, now aggravated by the Beirut port blast, has nothing to do with Covid-19 or the US proxy war on Syria – which brought a million refugees to the nation. It’s all about proverbial neoliberal shock and awe, conducted non-stop by the Hariri clan: former Prime Ministers Rafiq, assassinated in 2011, and Saad, chased out of power last January.

    The Hariri model was focused on real estate speculation and financialization. The Solidere group, controlled by Arab investors and a few Lebanese, Hariri included, destroyed Beirut’s historical downtown and rebuilt it with luxury real estate. That’s the classical rentier neoliberalism model that always profits a tiny elite.

    In parallel, the Bank of Lebanon was attracting funds from the tony Lebanese diaspora and assorted Arab investors by practicing very generous interest rates. Lebanon suddenly had an artificially strong currency.

    A small middle class sort of flourished throughout the 2000s, comprising import-export traders, the tourism sector and financial market operators. Yet, overall, inequality was the name of the game. According to the World Inequality Database, half of Lebanon’s population now holds less wealth that the top 0.1%.

    The bubble finally burst in September last year, when I happened to be in Beirut. With no US dollars in circulation, the Lebanese pound started to collapse in the black market. The Bank of Lebanon went berserk. When the Hariri racket imposed a “Whatsapp tax” over calls, that led to massive protests in October. Capital embarked on free flight and the currency collapsed for good.

    There’s absolutely no evidence the IMF, the World Bank and assorted Western/Arab “donors” will extricate a now devastated Lebanon from the neoliberal logic that plunged it into a systemic crisis in the first place.

    The way out would be to focus in productive investments, away from finance and geared towards the practical necessities of an austerity-battered and completely impoverished population.

    Yet Macron, the IMF and their “partners” are only interested in keeping monetary “stability”; seduce speculative foreign capital; make sure that the rapacious, Western-connected Lebanese oligarchy will get away with murder; and on top of it buy scores of Lebanese assets for peanuts.

    BRI or bust

    In stark contrast with the exploitative perpetuation of the Western neoliberal model, China is offering Lebanon the chance to Go East, and be part of the New Silk Roads.

    In 2017, Lebanon signed to join the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI).

    In 2018, Lebanon became the 87th member of the Asia Infrastructure Investment Bank (AIIB).

    Over the past few years, Lebanon was already taking part in the internationalization of the yuan, offering bank accounts in yuan and increasing bilateral trade in yuan.

    Beijing was already engaged in discussions revolving around the upgrading of Lebanese infrastructure – including the expansion of Beirut harbor.

    This means that now Beijing may be in the position of offering a renewed, joint rebuilding/security deal for Beirut port – just as it was about to clinch a smaller agreement with Diab’s government, focused only on expansion and renovation.

    The bottom line is that China has an actual Plan A to extricate Lebanon from its current financial dead end.

    And that’s exactly what was, and remains, total anathema to US, NATO and Israel’s interests.

    The Trump administration recently went no holds barred to prevent Israel from having China develop the port of Haifa.

    The same “offer you can’t refuse” tactics will be applied with full force on whoever leads the new Lebanese government.

    Beirut is an absolutely key node in BRI’s geopolitical/geoeconomic connectivity of the Eastern Mediterranean. With Haifa temporarily out of the picture, Beirut grows in importance as a gateway to the EU, complementing the role of Pireus and Italian ports in the Adriatic.

    It’s crucial to note that the port itself was not destroyed. The enormous crater on site replaces only a section quayside – and the rest is on water. The buildings destroyed can be rebuilt in record time. Reconstruction of the port is estimated at $15 billion – pocket money for an experienced company such as China Harbor.

    Meanwhile, naval traffic is being redirected to Tripoli port, 80 km north of Beirut and only 30 km away from the Lebanon-Syria border. Its director, Ahmed Tamer, confirms “the port has witnessed during the past years the expansion work by Chinese companies, and it has received the largest ships from China, carrying a big number of containers”.

    Add to it the fact that Tripoli port will also be essential in the process of Syria reconstruction – to which China is totally committed.

    BRI’s Southwest Asia connectivity network is a maze including Iran, Iraq, Syria and Lebanon.

    China is already planning to invest in highway and railroads, further to be developed into high-speed rail. That will connect BRI’s central China-Iran corridor – fresh from the $400 billion, 25-year strategic partnership deal soon to be signed – with the Eastern Mediterranean.

    Add to it the role of the port of Tartus in Syria – bearing a strong Russian naval presence. Beijing will inevitably invest in the expansion of Tartus – which is crucially linked by highway to Lebanon. The Russia-China strategic partnership will be involved in the protection of Tartus with S-300 and S-400 missile systems.

    Historically, in a larger axis that went from Samarkand to Cordoba, with strong nodes such as Baghdad and Damascus, what slowly evolved in this part of Eurasia was a syncretic civilization superimposed over an ancestral regional, rural and nomad background. The internal cohesion of the Muslim world was forged from the 7th century to the 11th century: that was the key factor that shaped the lineaments of a coherent Eurasia.

    Apart from Islam, Arabic – the language of religion, administration, trade and culture – was an essential unifying factor. This evolving Muslim world was configured as a vast economic and cultural domain whose roots connected to Greek, Semitic, Persian, Indian and Arab thought. It was a marvelous synthesis that formed a unique civilization out of elements of different origin – Persian, Mesopotamian, Byzantine.

    The Middle East and the Eastern Mediterranean were of course part of it, totally open towards the Indian Ocean, the Caspian routes, Central Asia and China.

    Now, centuries later, Lebanon should have everything to gain by ditching the “Paris of the Orient” mythology and looking East – again, thus positioning itself on the right side of History.

  • From Bean To Brew: Visualizing The Coffee Supply Chain
    From Bean To Brew: Visualizing The Coffee Supply Chain

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 23:40

    What Does The Coffee Supply Chain Look Like?

    There’s a good chance your day started with a cappuccino, or a cold brew, and you aren’t alone. In fact, coffee is one of the most consumed drinks on the planet, and it’s also one of the most traded commodities.

    According to the National Coffee Association, more than 150 million people drink coffee on a daily basis in the U.S. alone. Globally, consumption is estimated at over 2.25 billion cups per day.

    But, as Visual Capitalist’s Omri Wallach points out, before it gets to your morning cup, coffee beans travel through a complex global supply chain. Today’s illustration from Dan Zettwoch breaks down this journey into 10 distinct steps.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Coffee From Plant to Factory

    There are two types of tropical plants that produce coffee, both preferring high altitudes and with production primarily based in South America, Asia, and Africa.

    • Coffea arabica is the more plentiful bean, with a more complex flavor and less caffeine. It’s used in most specialty and “high quality” drinks as Arabica coffee.

    • Coffea canephora, meanwhile, has stronger and more bitter flavors. It’s also easier to grow, and is most frequently used in espressos and instant blends as Robusta coffee.

    However, both types of beans undergo the same journey:

    1. Growing
      Plants take anywhere from 4-7 years to produce their first harvest, and grow fruit for around 25 years.

    2. Picking
      The fruit of the coffea plant is the coffee berry, containing two beans within. Ripened berries are harvested either by hand or machine.

    3. Processing
      Coffee berries are then processed either in a traditional “dry” method using the sun or “wet” method using water and machinery. This removes the outer fruit encasing the sought-after green beans.

    4. Milling
      The green coffee beans are hulled, cleaned, sorted, and (optionally) graded.

    From Factory to Transport

    Once the coffee berry is stripped down to green beans, it’s shipped from producing countries through a global supply network.

    Green coffee beans are exported and shipped around the world. In 2018 alone, 7.2 million tonnes of green coffee beans were exported, valued at $19.2 billion.

    Arriving primarily in the U.S. and Europe, the beans are now prepared for consumption:

    1. Roasting
      Green beans are industrially roasted, becoming darker, oilier, and tasty. Different temperatures and heat duration impact the final color and flavor, with some preferring light roasts to dark roasts.

    2. Packaging
      Any imperfect or somehow ruined beans are discarded, and the remaining roasted beans are packaged together by type.

    3. Shipping
      Roasted beans are shipped both domestically and internationally. Bulk shipments go to retailers, coffee shops, and in some cases, direct to consumer.

    Straight to Your Cup

    Roasted coffee beans are almost ready for consumption, and by this stage the remaining steps can happen anywhere.

    For example, many factories don’t ship roasted beans until they grind it themselves. Meanwhile, cafes will grind their own beans on-site before preparing drinks. The rapid growth of coffee chains made Starbucks the second-highest-earning U.S. fast food venue.

    Regardless of where it happens, the final steps bring coffee straight to your cup:

    1. Grinding
      Roasted beans are ground up in order to better extract their flavors, either by machine or by hand. The preferred fineness depends on the darkness of the roast and the brewing method.

    2. Brewing
      Water is added to the coffee grounds in a variety of methods. Some involve water being passed or pressured through the grounds (espresso, drip) while others mix the water and grounds (French press, Turkish coffee).

    3. Drinking
      Liquid coffee is ready to be enjoyed! One average cup takes 70 roasted beans to make.

    The world’s choice of caffeine pick-me-up is made possible by this structured and complex supply chain. Coffee isn’t just a drink, after all, it’s a business.

  • The Evolution Of Fiat Money, Endless War, & The End Of Citizenship (Part 1)
    The Evolution Of Fiat Money, Endless War, & The End Of Citizenship (Part 1)

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 23:20

    Authored by ‘ICE-9’ via The Burning Platform blog,

    Part one of a two-part series.

    One topic missing from historians’ analysis of the West’s transition from a physical gold and silver based money system to a fiat money system is the defining events that facilitated and enabled this transition.  One can find no detailed and critical political / historical assessment of this transition, and it would be not for lack of effort.  The transition is always presented as if it is prima facie the refined and evolved state of things that warrants no investigation other than superficial praise followed with dogmatic platitudes.  But has this transition away from the “barbarous relic” money system actually made mankind more refined and evolved, or has it instead plunged mankind into an even more heightened and efficient state of barbarism?

    One encounters additional blank pages when searching for any attempt at correlating the evolution and spread of fiat money to the prevalence and severity of war.  A collective learned silence descends when attempting to identify why it is, as money evolves, that war become more ideological, destructive, widespread, and prolonged.  We are all familiar with the endless adulations describing the global spread of “democracy”, but why is it so many are unwilling converts and it became imperative to spread “democracy” via war and regime change?  And closer to home, as our own nation “evolves” from a Constitutional Republic into pure “democracy”, how is it we as “citizens” feel more and more disenfranchised rather than empowered despite even greater doses of “democracy” at home?

    This essay attempts to identify the defining events that facilitated and enabled the West’s transition to a fiat based money system, examines cause and effect between the evolution of money and the prevalence and severity of war, and binds together money evolution with the history of warfare by demonstrating cause and effect between money’s evolution, the rise and necessity of endless war, and the inevitable transition from “citizens” to subjects.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Physical Money, the Limits of War, and the Ancient World

    For centuries following the Dorian Invasion, the Greek peninsula in the context of contemporaneous civilizations was of minor influence.  Limited wars between city states, the rise and fall of tyrants within these city states, a Lawgiver here and there, and a steady outflow of residents to the Mediterranean and Black Sea colonies were the main stories for 600 years until a rich silver deposit was discovered in southern Attica.  The wealth derived from these mines was initially distributed to the citizens and used for the great public building projects we see still standing today.  The flow of silver was also used to not only hold the Persians at bay and confine them to Ionia – and thus preserve Western Civilization as we know it today – but to also purchase slaves to work the silver mines, purchase imported goods, produce manufactured wares for export, commission triremes to transport manufactured wares, and hire highly paid rowers to man the triremes.  Trade and prosperity flourished and the Greek world rose quickly in the context of comparative global civilizations, all due to the abundant supply and liberal distribution of silver.

    Then in 483 BC, soon after the discovery of a particularly rich silver deposit, the Athenian archon Themistocles convinced his fellow citizens to commission 200 triremes to fight the Persians and in 479 BC the Greek confederacy defeated Persia once and for all at the Battle of Plataea.  Rid of the Persian menace, fresh off defeating the world’s most formidable military force, and armed with 200 triremes with nothing to do, that silver now went more and more into Athenian empire building throughout the Aegean.  The cycle of conquest funded with silver was set – newly mined silver went into funding expeditions of conquest, tribute was extracted from the vanquished and flowed into Athens, and the combined silver from mined and tribute went to defending the city against jealous rivals and towards mounting even larger expeditions of conquest to extort even more tribute.  That is, until the reliable source of silver from the mines began to run out.

    Just as silver mining output went into decline, and the tribute became harder and more expensive to extract, in 415 BC the Athenians made the disastrous decision to invade Syracuse at an eventual loss of 10,000 hoplites, 30,000 oarsmen, and over 100 triremes.  Thousands of captured Athenians held as prisoners of war were ransomed by the Syracusians at great expense to their families and effectively drained nearly all Attica’s surplus financial resources.  Most poor Athenians, unable to raise a ransom, permanently lost heads of household to enslavement and death in the Syracusian quarries.  Revolts from tribute paying vassals immediately followed and tribute dried up, and in 404 BC these accumulating losses saw Athenian empire and Aegean hegemony ceded to Sparta.  Thus when the silver ran low, the empire was lost as limited resources were concentrated more and more on defending against Attica’s immediate neighbors.  And that is the main point– when a nation in the ancient world could no longer fund wars of empire with physical money, it could no longer prosecute wars of empire and thus some form of peace attempted to descend.  It is as if a law of economics was at work and in a sense, the exhaustion of silver supplies was ancient empire’s built-in self-destruct mechanism.

    We also learn from ancient Attica between the victories over Persia, to the rise and loss of empire, to its eventual defeat by Philip II and incorporation into the Hellenic League, that as the wealth of Attica rose and then declined, the reason its citizens fought wars changed.  Although the Greek city states are referred to by historians as democracies, of practicality only Greek men of means could participate in government to the extent they could afford the time required to build influence.  The average Greek man had to work and earn a living and had no time for civics until a tyrant needed overthrow or war threatened from outside aggressors.  What we observe before the Persian Wars is a nation of modest means and substantial freedom where citizens fight for kinfolk, land, and shared history with their alternatives being death, confiscation, and enslavement.  This is the nature of defensive war, embodied in that which the Athenian / Spartan coalition fought to defeat the Persians.  As Attica increased silver production and extracted more tribute via empire, we see a change in the reason for fighting war, with war then assuming a mercenary objective for many of its citizens.  Citizens were now incentivized to fight wars of conquest with high pay when there was no immediate threat from outside aggressors and instead of citizen soldiers defending kinfolk, land, and shared history, citizens became hired rowers and hoplite combatants.  Thus, as war transitioned from defensive to offensive as wealth increased, a citizen’s motivation for participating in war transitioned from patriot at the start of empire, to mercenary by choice at peak empire, to mercenary by necessity after the collapse of empire.

    Ancient defensive wars continued until the threat was eliminated, the food supplies or health of the combatants were exhausted, or one side was vanquished.  Ancient mercenary war, on the other hand, generally continued so long as there was ample silver.  It was as if silver could conjure armies and armaments at will until it ran out, and then in that instant these same armies and armaments dissolved away.  For a powerful ancient nation that had not been subject to invasion for some time, the mercenary incentive became the primary reason citizens fought wars, as all wars, absent any outside threat, became wars of conquest.  As Attica’s wealth and influence waned between the end of the Peloponnesian War and its defeat at the hands of Macedon, more and more of its citizens turned to mercenary expeditions commanded by whomever was paying.  Eventually many formerly powerful cities were depleted of its fighting fit men and lay open to conquest from outside aggressors and tyrants within.  Combined with sustained decline in silver production and its resulting decline in foreign influence, after the final conquest at the hands of Macedon we find Attica’s transition complete – nearly all wars were henceforth fought by mercenaries on campaigns unrelated to Attica as the resulting collapse in trade due to depleted silver resources left few other means for young men to earn a living.

    When there is total collapse of resources, and then influence, the citizens then become nothing more than mercenaries, and it was these legions that made up the entirety of Alexander’s forces.  But as mercenaries, they fought for pay, in physical money, and maybe for a bit of glory thrown in – but they did not fight for ideals.

    Rome’s history initially followed a similar path to that of Attica regarding why its citizens waged war in its early days – immediate enemies necessitated over 450 years of continuous defensive war and civil uprisings to fend off or overthrow foreign rule.  The small state of Latium despite all odds managed to eventually defeat its surrounding aggressors, and when it realized it was a truly formidable fighting force it decided to put an end to outside aggression once and for all.  Thus began a protracted series of conquering wars throughout the Italian peninsula.  But Latium had no silver mines and their system of physical money extraction from the vanquished differed from the Greek system of tribute.  Rome instead integrated its vanquished states and, with the exception of Carthage, granted select families Roman citizenship, contracted many of these families as magistrates to maintain internal order on behalf of Rome, and enacted a system of tax farming on the provincial non-citizens.  It was this system of taxation that played the same role as the silver mines of Attica, and the more territory Rome conquered the more taxes it could collect to embark on further wars of conquest.

    Once Roman territorial expansion had engulfed both Iberia and Anatolia, it controlled the only sources of gold and the richest silver mines in the Mediterranean.  From about 200 BC to 230 AD, this gold and silver, together with ever increasing tax collection from its expanded portfolio of conquered and integrated provinces, funded a standing professional army with career soldiers paid in silver.  Rome had entered its period of “endless war”, funded by supplies of gold and silver obtained from mining, conquest, and taxes.  However, the immense size of the Roman standing army – about 450,000 troops under Severus in 211 AD – and the tremendous cost of endless war guaranteed expenses always exceeded income to the imperial treasury.  So starting around 60 AD the Romans embarked on a policy of currency debasement and pay raises for soldiers that triggered severe price inflation for basic goods and plunged much of the populace into poverty but did not slow the pace of endless war.  The inflation suffered by the people financed the continuous prosecution of endless military campaigns as the only wages that increased in step with Roman inflation were those paid to soldiers.  It was empire regardless of cost at this point.  Mutinies, civil wars, border incursions, and insurrections were now added to the expense of wars of conquest and endless war didn’t end until 410 AD when the Visigoth king Alaric sacked a nearly bankrupt Rome.  But by that time the empire’s boundaries and tax base and mine holdings had shrunk so considerably that Rome could not finance a defense against the German invaders, and thus we see again another example of ancient empire’s self-destruct mechanism at work – the process of building empire depletes the resources of the nation, and the depleted resources preclude securing that empire indefinitely.  Thus all ancient wars of conquest were ultimately futile.

    Unlike the early days of Roman conquest, during their period of endless war Rome dropped the property ownership requirement for military service and the ranks were opened up to landless peasants.  We observe in this period a shift in the allegiance of the soldiers away from the state – whereby the state represents the combination of kinfolk, land, and shared history – towards allegiance to the generals who commanded and paid their respective legions.  But as professional soldiers, they fought for pay, in physical silver, held allegiance to the general who paid them, and maybe received a bit of glory thrown in here and there – but they too did not fight for ideals.

    Transition to Fiat Money, Constant War, and the Rise of the Freemen

    After the wave of German invasions subsided and with their annexation of the Western Roman Empire complete, the conquering Teutonic armies continued the core Roman system of allegiance to the generals.  The state, as embodied in the king and his noble lieutenants, now existed as the means of extorting revenue to wage war so to secure territorial boundaries and prerogative for the ruling class from a wholly disenfranchised populace.

    One major German difference to the deposed Roman system was the elimination of citizenship and the establishment of military service obligations upon a class of peasants who were permanently disenfranchised through heredity.  With citizenship eliminated by the advent of serfdom, nearly all Western Europe’s inhabitants were subjugated and entirely without rights.  These serfs owned little or no property and gained no benefit from existence of the state yet owed taxes and military service to the state.  Thus in early medieval Europe the citizen soldier of the ancient Mediterranean was transformed into a servant soldier, who defended only royal prerogative, by the coercion of military obligation and elimination of property ownership inherent within serfdom.  With no allegiance to this wholly extractive and inimical state, we observe the medieval rise in peasant allegiance to the Catholic Church, replacing the former allegiance to kinfolk, land, and shared history embodied in citizenship with a surrogate “citizenship” comprised of the “righteous” in the “Kingdom of Heaven”.  This marks the beginning of the transition from an outward allegiance to physical things (e.g., kinfolk, land, and shared history) to an inward allegiance towards abstract ideals (e.g., belief, righteousness, piety) and thus lays the collective psychological groundwork for the coming Wars of Ideals in the 18th through 20th centuries.

    This new relationship between absolute rulers and abject subjects, together with the collapse of intra-European trade, the loss of gold and silver mines, and the cessation of upward mobility significantly reduced the amounts of physical money going into the royal Germanic treasuries across Western Europe.  Although war continued unabated, its scale and severity never reached the intensity and wide distribution of the Roman Empire and these reduced scale conflicts prevented the establishment of vast, lasting empire by the various Germanic sovereigns.  Thus Europe entered a phase of “Balkanization” into petty fiefdoms connected through confederations of language and culture, held loosely together by the descendants of the invading Germanic tribes and the machinations of the new Papal Empire.

    But not all was plague, malnutrition, and misery.  The European medieval period saw great technological advances in agricultural production – e.g., three field crop rotation system, ridge and furrow, horse replace ox, the horse collar, iron ploughs and horseshoes, et cetera.  Over the centuries after western Roman collapse, as these improved farming methods spread, a reliable crop surplus was produced and slowly, trade throughout Western Europe revived.  It was this trade revival that underpinned the eventual rise of the class of freemen within the Third Estate, and it was these freemen that built cities throughout formerly rural Western Europe that provided central hubs for the practice of trades, crafts, and commerce.  Fewer serfs were needed to produce agricultural surplus so people began to fill these cities, and we see some freemen transition into rentiers and creditors whereby the physical money derived from rents could support a new form of pseudo-money in the form of credit “produced” independently from the sovereign.

    Along with increasing prosperity of the growing class of Bourgeoisie / Burghers / Borghese and craftsmen rose the increase in the tax base, not only for the state but for the Catholic Church which by the 13th century had established itself as Europe’s first Federal state as it held taxation jurisdiction via tithes over the entirety of Roman Catholic Europe.  For the first time we observe a multi-tiered taxation system where paying taxes to the state keeps the mortal physical body from going to jail, and paying tithes to the Church keeps the immortal spiritual soul from going to purgatory.  Thus the physical / spiritual duality of rule in Europe is established for future exploitation by the proponents of 19th and 20th century ideal based “revolution”.

    It is no coincidence that this period of increased population, trade, and tax take saw the reformation of powerful super-states – Spain, France, Britain, Sweden, and Papal – as the revived flow of taxes in physical gold and silver could once again pay soldiers to fund wars of conquest, put down rebellion, and for the first time since the fall of the Roman Empire, fund the commission of Navies.  Colonial conquest and wealth extraction consolidated this growth and wealth of super-states.

    As the wealth generated from proto-industrialization and colonialization grew, the rentier, creditor, and now merchant classes grew to be the wealthiest freemen in Europe, and this class together with other nobles were the core providers of credit to the sovereign needed to fund its wars and growing opulence.  As the sovereign grew to rely more heavily on credit to prosecute these projects of ego, it commissioned proto- central banks within its administration serving to facilitate its credit needs and its needs alone.  Some in this new creditor class began to serve full time as “executives” to the crown forming the genesis of the modern “central banker”.  Royal defaults on its domestic creditors were common, as it was royal prerogative to default, so these nascent central banks had to turn more and more to cross border lending agreements with the nascent central banks of other countries.  Thus by the end of the 18th century, Europe had “evolved” into another phase of endless “Classical” war but this time, funded not by silver but by credit provided by cross border proto-central banks managed by a nascent “central banker” class drawn from the increasingly wealthy and powerful rentier / creditor / merchant pool that grew to maturity out of the freemen of the medieval period.

    It did not take long for these nascent central bankers to realize the power that the extension or withholding of credit and setting of interest rates granted to those in control of credit.  But if it weren’t for the intervening sovereign, the power this credit held would be tantamount to the power to choose winners and losers in war and opulent society.  The prime example before these nascent central bankers was the conquest, subjugation, and material strip mining of entire overseas civilizations using almost nothing but credit.  So if this model of conquest by credit could work in faraway foreign lands, it could also work on European soil and creditors could, potentially, usurp the sovereign.  But a direct assault on the sovereign would require a large professional army paid in silver, and these nascent central bankers did not yet fully control the royal treasuries.  They needed to create their own army that was paid in credit, and to do that they needed the assistance of the only group that would accept payment in credit – the peasants.

    Some description here is warranted regarding the evolution of professional armies in Europe during the transition from medieval to Classical periods.  The ancient mercenary Greek hoplite and Roman centurion were close quarter fighters requiring great strength, training, and endurance.   One’s rank and pay level was directly contingent upon these qualities.  For the most part, this relation between physical strength and pay rate carried into the medieval period up to the advent of cannon – physically fit peasants of fighting age were hired and provisioned as substitutes to fight in place of the wealthy freemen.  As the technology of the instruments of war advanced, many military occupations transitioned into technicians who were increasingly responsible for the maintenance, transport, and operation of cannon, muskets, and siege engines.  Physical strength played less of a factor as weapons technology advanced.  Thus the professional armies of the Classical period were “democratized” and peasants with no special physical attributes comprised the bulk of military campaigns.  And still, these mercenary substitutes held allegiance to the paymaster, and were paid in silver as were their predecessors in antiquity.

    This traditional payment in silver was a great obstacle to the nascent central bankers who had eyes on usurping the sovereign.  But as they did not command the amounts of silver required to mount a successful revolt, some other form of payment had to be devised and a new class of soldier created that would fight against his sovereign for this new form of payment.  The democratization of Classical armies left no scarcity of supply of soldiers, but their demands for payment in physical silver did.  Thus enter the series of religious and later, democratic wars that would sweep across Europe as cover for the usurpation of the sovereign by these nascent central bankers…

    *  *  *

    In Part 2 we discuss the “victory of fiat money” in enabling “endless wars”, “Where is this all going?” and “What is to be done?”…

  • Could This Be America's Most Expensive Combat Drone Ever? 
    Could This Be America’s Most Expensive Combat Drone Ever? 

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 23:00

    The US has spent trillions and trillions of dollars under the Trump administration to modernize the military, ahead of what could be a stealth war with either China and or Russia. The Pentagon has been upgrading the Lockheed Martin F-35 Lightning II, an all-weather stealth multirole combat aircraft, with advanced technologies, enabling it to conduct a wide range of intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance (ISR) missions.

    The National Interest suggests all this new technology packed into the F-35, that being an advanced suite of long-range sensors and targeting systems, could allow it to become a “long-range drone.”  

    The idea would be to leverage its advanced suite of long-range sensors and targeting technologies. In fact, it would not be a stretch to say that the F-35 can function as a long-range drone, aerial relay node, missile tracker or surveillance plane. – The National Interest

    The F-35 costs between $94 million (F-35A) and $122 million (F-35B) per plane. The entire program is expected to cost $1.5 trillion over its 55-year lifespan. There are no figures publicly available that shed light on how much it would cost taxpayers to transform one of these stealth jets into fully a fully autonomous aircraft. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While not much is known about the full capabilities of the F-35 potentially operating in autonomous mode, it certainly suggests these planes are double the price of the General Atomics MQ-9 Reaper ($64 million per unit). 

    The National Interest lists some of the technologies embedded in the F-35 that would allow it to conduct a wide range of missions: 

    Its 360-degree surround cameras, called the Distributed Aperture System, and its long-range Electro-Optical infrared targeting technologies were initially conceived as a way to inform pilots about far away enemy aircraft and provide navigational information to empower its multirole attack mission set.

    Its 360-degree surround cameras, called the Distributed Aperture System, and its long-range Electro-Optical infrared targeting technologies were initially conceived as a way to inform pilots about far away enemy aircraft and provide navigational information to empower its multirole attack mission set.

    While all of this is still true and quite relevant, the Pentagon has increasingly been discovering new uses for the F-35 when it comes to an ability to function as an “aerial node” performing ISR and datalink missions. With a fleet-wide data link and growing “threat library,” the F-35s can network to one another at great distances, enabling an ability to establish a continuous track on traveling threats moving from one field of view to another.

    Moreover, the Pentagon recently utilized the F-35 in a host of multi-domain combat attack missions, including networking threat information from incoming air attacks with maritime, air and ground assets. Ultimately, would involve an integrated mesh of sensors and radar called Integrated Air and Missile Defense Battle Command System (IBCS). Alongside connecting with IBCS, an F-35 was also able to connect with a U-2 spy plane to form an “airborne relay” using Lockheed’s Airborne Sensor Adaptation Kit. – The National Interest 

    With a stealth war looming, manned, and potentially unmanned F-35s, could be deployed onto the frontlines of the modern battlefield to combat China’s Chengdu J-20 stealth jet and Russia’s Sukhoi Su-57 stealth bomber. 

  • Sellin: Unless True Origin Of COVID-19 Is Identified, Another Chinese Pandemic Is Assured
    Sellin: Unless True Origin Of COVID-19 Is Identified, Another Chinese Pandemic Is Assured

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 22:40

    Authored by Lawrence Sellin via WION.com,

    To date, no one has stated the urgent universal need to aggressively investigate the true origin of SARS-CoV-2, the coronavirus responsible for COVID-19, better than Karl and Dan Sirotkin in their August 12, 2020 article “Might SARS‐CoV‐2 Have Arisen via Serial Passage through an Animal Host or Cell Culture?”

    “Despite claims from prominent scientists that SARS‐CoV‐2 indubitably emerged naturally, the etiology of this novel coronavirus remains a pressing and open question: Without knowing the true nature of a disease, it is impossible for clinicians to appropriately shape their care, for policy‐makers to correctly gauge the nature and extent of the threat, and for the public to appropriately modify their behaviour.

    As the authors correctly note, serial passage, that is, the repeated re-infection within an animal or human population allows a virus to specifically adapt to the infected species.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That process occurs naturally in the wild, but it can be greatly accelerated in the laboratory by deliberate serial passaging of viruses in cell culture systems or animals, potentially leaving few or no traces as to whether the adapted viruses are naturally-occurring or laboratory-manipulated.

    That type of “gain of function” experimentation can become particularly dangerous if viruses are adapted for human infection by serial passaging them through cell cultures and animal models that have been genetically-modified to express human receptors.

    There are numerous scientific publications describing serial passaging of coronaviruses through “humanised” cell cultures and animal models, thus potentially creating a new coronavirus “pre-adapted” for human infection.

    At present, the scientific consensus is that SARS-CoV-2 came from bats, but how it evolved to infect humans remains unknown.

    China has claimed that a bat coronavirus named RaTG13 is the closest relative to SARS-CoV-2, but RaTG13 is not actually a virus because no biological samples exist. It is only a genomic sequence of a virus for which there are now serious questions about its accuracy.

    In contrast, Dr Li-Meng Yan, a Chinese virologist and whistleblower, has implied that RaTG13 may have been used to divert the world’s attention away from the true source of the COVID-19 pandemic, a novel coronavirus that originated in military laboratories overseen by China’s People’s Liberation Army and created by the manipulation of Zhoushan coronaviruses ZC45 and/or ZXC21.

    SARS-CoV-2 has signs of serial passaging and the direct genetic insertion of novel amino acids sequences for which no natural evolutionary pathway has been identified.

    Although SARS-CoV-2 appears to have the “backbone” of bat coronaviruses, its spike protein, which is responsible for binding to the human cell and its membrane fusion-driven entry, has sections that do not appear in any closely-related bat coronaviruses.

    SARS-CoV-2’s receptor binding domain, the specific element that binds to the human cell, has a ten times greater binding affinity than the first SARS virus that caused the 2002-2003 pandemic.

    Furthermore, SARS-CoV-2 appears to be “pre-adapted” for human infection and has not undergone a similar natural mutation process within the human population that was observed during the 2002-2003 SARS outbreak.

    Those observations plus the inexplicable genetic distance between SARS-CoV-2 and any of its potential bat predecessors suggest an accelerated evolutionary process obtained by laboratory-based serial passaging through genetically-engineered mouse models containing humanised receptors previously developed by China.

    The other unique feature of SARS-CoV-2 is a furin polybasic cleavage site that facilitates membrane fusion between the virus and the human cell and widely known for its ability to enhance pathogenicity and transmissibility, but also is not present in any closely related bat coronaviruses.

    There are no readily-available animal models to produce a unique furin polybasic cleavage site by serial passaging, but techniques for the artificial insertion of such furin polybasic cleavage sites by genetic engineering have been used for over ten years.

    To paraphrase Karl and Dan Sirotkin, unless the zoonotic hosts necessary for completing a natural jump from animals to humans are identified, the dual‐use gain‐of‐function research practice of viral serial passage and the artificial insertion of unique viral features should be considered viable routes by which SARS-CoV-2 arose and the COVID-19 pandemic was initiated.

    *  *  *

    Lawrence Sellin, PhD is a retired US Army Reserve colonel. He has previously worked at the US Army Medical Research Institute of Infectious Diseases and conducted basic and clinical research in the pharmaceutical industry.

  • Americans Are Now Renting Private Swimming Pools 
    Americans Are Now Renting Private Swimming Pools 

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 22:20

    The virus pandemic has led to the closure of many public pools across the country. The latest surge in COVID-19 cases and deaths across Sun Belt states sealed the deal in postponing the reopening of pools. With only a month left of the swimming season, Americans have resorted to an Airbnb-style app that allows them to rent private residential pools. 

    Readers living or visiting the Mid-Atlantic or Northeast area have been scorched this summer by absolutely brutal June and July temperatures. Going to the beach has been met with many challenges, especially strict social distancing, and most oceanside restaurants are only open for carryout. The point about going to the beach is being with family and enjoying a delicious meal while watching the sunset. Not this year… 

    So given the truly remarkable will of the consumer to shift habits, that is, with beaches under strict social distancing rules, public pools closed and traveling on airplanes to resort towns out of the question, there’s been a massive surge in activity in people not just staying at home but are renting private pools from homeowners using an app described as Airbnb for swimming pools, called Swimply

    CNBC said the 2-year-old app saw a 2,000% jump in growth this summer, according to its founder.

    The process in reserving a pool works on a smartphone app is a  contactless way to rent a pool from residential homeowners on a per hour basis. Prices range from $15 to $300 per hour, all dependent on the pool size, location, and additional amenities. 

    Swimply makes money by facilitating the booking and then takes a 15% finders fee. 

    “We’ve seen demand skyrocket. We simply cannot keep up,” said Asher Weinberger, co-founder of Swimply.

    Weinberger said, “There are people who are now desperate to get out of their homes. They’re working from home. There’s no school. There’s no camp. What are parents supposed to do with their kids?” 

    He said some hosts “are making $30,000 to $40,000 in the summer. This is not just — rent out your home for $200 bucks a night — you can make $1,000, $2,000 a day, and that’s real money that’s not just paying for your pool’s upkeep but it’s even paying for your whole mortgage.”

    Here are some of the examples of pools for rent on the app: 

    Pools in the Miami area ranged from $45 to $60 per hour. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pools in San Diego ranged from $45 to $60 per hour.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pools in Vegas ranged from $15 to $60 per hour.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Swimply’s appears to be launching a new platform called “JoySpace,” where users of the app can rent or share “all kind of unique private spaces from tennis and basketball courts to home gyms and decked out backyard.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With much of the country having paused or taken steps to reverse reopenings, Americans have found creative ways to still have fun during a pandemic, even if that means renting a stranger’s pool while public ones are closed. 

  • Trump Versus Pavlov: A Social Experiment
    Trump Versus Pavlov: A Social Experiment

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 22:00

    Authored by Raul Ilargi Meijer via The Automatic Earth blog,

    Might as well call it a social experiment. Any other name, like “coup” or “fishing expedition” or “hookers peeing on a bed” or “justice being done” would just inflame “passions” and lead away from what should be the actual topic.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Whatever you call it, the fact remains that Donald Trump has been the first US president to be under continued investigation for the entire 4 years of his first term, and for about a year before it as well. And that should be a cause for alarm for anyone who cares even a little bit about the American political system, including those who abhor Trump.

    Because once you do that, it’s no longer about just one president, it’s about all who will follow him, and inevitably about the integrity and validity of the system as a whole.

    In principle, there should be no investigations of a sitting president, and not even of a presidential candidate, because this risks endangering 1) the entire electoral process, and 2) the Office of the President (not for once, but for ever). In principle. If there must be an investigation, it must be based on solid evidence available beforehand, it must be short, and the President must be removed. If all of these three things are not guaranteed, no investigation is warranted, and the accusing parties should be “liberated” from the positions they held when they initiated the investigation regardless. Skin in the game.

    It gets increasingly harder to write about American politics, or express an opinion in any other way, without being dumped into one of two camps, never to be heard from again in the other (except for ridicule or slander). There is no such thing as a neutral or objective viewpoint anymore. You’re either with us or you’re against us – or them.

    Seeing -and projecting- the world in black and white is a tempting proposal for anyone afraid of being confused; it should, however, never be an excuse for the media to not present its viewers and readers with a full color palette. But we can see every single day how that went. Black and white it is. And in that environment, too claustrophobic to be put in a box, I might as well paint the picture as I see it. Yes, in color.

    The “social experiment” I see progressing has two parts:

    1) can a political party, aided and abetted by the media and intelligence services, unseat an elected president it has just lost an election to?

    2) can a presidential candidate be elected while shunning the media, debates, etc., and only appear at times and in forms that have been pre-selected by her/his handlers for maximum effect, while hiding his/her weaknesses?

    As for no. 1, it has evidently not succeeded, but that is certainly not for lack of trying. One investigation has followed the other non-stop since 2016, in public and behind the scenes, and they have all come up empty. Of course one side would contest that and still say there was lots of evidence, but if so, it obviously wasn’t very strong, or Trump would have been gone.

    People may also claim that the mandate of the Mueller investigation was too narrow, but really, go back and watch the man’s pathetic (sorry, but it was) testimony in Congress after the fact, that should be enough. Adam Schiff and Jerry Nadler and others have promised solid and inconvertible evidence many times, but we never saw any. Rest assured, whatever Trump may have done wrong, you would have heard about it by now.

    Or to put it another way: he probably did many things wrong, but not the things he was accused of. In fact, the entire Putin puppet narrative is so idiotic it’s impossible not to ponder from time to time that it was designed from the get-go to support Trump, not hurt him.

    As for no. 2, that looks even more experimental. The approach is helped along “wonderfully” by the pandemic, which provides plenty excuses to keep Biden hidden, but it goes against everything presidential campaigns have been built upon throughout American history: contact with voters. That very few people would believe Biden is his own man, and not a sock puppet, can’t help.

    But there is more at stake. Presidential campaigns are one element of a much bigger process, and you can’t separate the two. Both parts of the “social experiment” seem to run afoul of the respect that bigger process, and ultimately the entire political system, necessarily demands from all participants, from an individual voter to a President. And that is much more important than either candidate. You can’t temporarily switch off that respect if and when that might suit your purpose, because you risk for it never to be switched on again.

    You may dislike a presidential candidate, perhaps even intensely so, but that should never make you lose sight of the integrity, if not the sacredness, of the election process, of the political system, of the institutions, of the Constitution, and certainly not of the Office of the President of the United States. Because once you do that, you open the door for everyone to do the same in the future. And no, you can’t blame that on the candidate you don’t like, you do it.

    When a candidate is selected through the primaries of his/her party, you must respect that, because if you don’t respect the process, you are lost, the system is lost, and there’s no telling when you’ll see it back, if ever. If that candidate is then elected President, a lot of doors that before allowed you to question and criticize him/her, should be closed. The country at that point has either a new President, or a second-term one. A different phase of the political process starts.

    The House and the Senate become the critics, empowered by the system to hold the President accountable. But only the House and the Senate. Not the media, whose role it is, other than in the occasional opinion piece, to report on decisions made; not intelligence services, whose role it is to serve the country, and the new President it just elected; and not the opposition party, whose role it is to prepare for the next election, and to provide a degree of counterbalance, depending on how bad their loss was, on Capitol Hill.

    The entire picture is crystal clear. So is everybody’s role in it. But now and then people -try to- refuse to accept their roles, obviously believing that they are more important than the integrity of the political system, and ignoring that in doing so they put the whole system at risk.

    What was happening first became apparent in late 2015 – early 2016, when the New York Times began running multiple stories every day directed against Donald Trump. Mostly small bits, based on innuendo about his past, with a whiff of truth perhaps, but not more. The word “gratuitous” comes to mind. At a certain point, they did a dozen per day of the stories, it became assembly line work for the writers and editors..

    The Washington Post chimed in, and so did CNN, MSNBC and others, including international press. It turned into a feeding frenzy, with all of them completely losing sight, voluntarily or not, of their roles as news providers. They all shape-shifted into opinion-only-makers, confident that their audience would not notice the difference, at least not at first. At that point it became a very Pavlovian thing.

    Which is why I was initially going to name this essay “Trump vs Pavlov”. 100+ years ago, Ivan Pavlov “found” that if he rang a bell in front of a dog, and then gave her food, she would start to associate the two. When he increased the time-lapse between first, the bell, and then, the food, the dog would salivate in expectation of food at just the sound of the bell. In the end, all he had to do was ring the bell, with no food around, and the dog would salivate. So he had nothing to offer, no food, no substance, but the reaction was the same.

    That is a very accurate description of what a large part of the US media have done -and become-. All they have to do at this point is mention Trump, or just show his picture, and their public will react the same every single time: Orange Man Bad. There doesn’t have to be any substance, any factual journalistic reports of wrongdoing. The “conditioned reflex” as Pavlov described it, has set in.

    And their readers and viewers have become addicted to this. How could they not? They’ve been bombarded with 1000s of these bells ringing, and the substance may not be there, but the expectation of it is. If you’re a regular viewer of Rachel Maddow, what are the odds that your opinion is still your own after hearing RussiaRussia a million times? The only way it could be yours is if you switch her off.

    I’ve written before that I don’t even think they really set out to do this. Initially, there were probably just some CEOs and owners and editors who didn’t like Trump and/or were affiliated in one way or another with the other party -and later candidate-. Who was counted on to win big anyway, so why not (well, because of the integrity of the political system!).

    It was only later that they found out 24/7 anti-Trump “reporting” was a great business model for them. CNN was dying in early 2016, the New York Times was nor far behind, and all of a sudden numbers of viewers and readers and subscribers went through the roof.

    Their problem is that if they succeed in making Trump lose in November, they will be back to where they came from before he appeared on the political scene. All of their “reporting” on US politics has devolved into a scheme based on ringing a bell, and on the scandal and anger their non-stop salivating audience have become addicted to, and mistake for substance.

    If Joe Biden should win, that scheme is dead. They may hope to last a bit longer on the angry scandal of a possible persecution of Trump if he leaves office, but that would be it, and that’s not a business model. They can’t very well now turn on Biden and his puppeteers.

    New York Times writer and editor Bari Weiss said it very well when she left the paper a few weeks ago, she summarized the essence of the MSM problem in just a few words:

    “[..] the lessons that ought to have followed the election – lessons about the importance of understanding other Americans, the necessity of resisting tribalism, and the centrality of the free exchange of ideas to a democratic society—have not been learned. Instead, a new consensus has emerged in the press, but perhaps especially at this paper: that truth isn’t a process of collective discovery, but an orthodoxy already known to an enlightened few whose job is to inform everyone else”.

    Why edit something challenging to our readers, or write something bold only to go through the numbing process of making it ideologically kosher, when we can assure ourselves of job security (and clicks) by publishing our 4000th op-ed arguing that Donald Trump is a unique danger to the country and the world?

    That’s the media.

    Second in line is US intelligence.

    Which, there’s no other way to put it, conspired against a presidential candidate and, when he was elected, a sitting president. The Strzok-Page “insurance policy”, the Obama Oval Office conversations where Comey, Brennan, Clapper, Susan Rice were present, plus 1,000 other things, the overall picture doesn’t exactly point to that famous seamless transition, and US Intel played a pivotal, because accommodating, role in that.

    The best way to show this is perhaps that US intelligence themselves did not (could not) come up with a report on alleged links between the -prospective- president’s team and Russia, but took a dossier paid for by the president’s opposition and used it to discredit and persecute him and people in his team. The dossier was written by a two-bit MI6 hustler who hadn’t set foot in Russia in at least a decade, and whose main ‘Russian source’ wasn’t there either, but sitting in an office in the US.

    That source in turn had contacts with a group of Russians whose very business model it was to make up and embellish whatever stories the highest bidder required, while failing to deal with their own severe drinking problems. That dossier was the entire foundation (or 99% of it) behind Rod Rosenstein appointing Bob Mueller as a Special Counsel. The appointment would never have been made, never have been possible, without the Steele dossier.

    How was the dossier vetted by US intelligence, if at all? It’s very clear now what was wrong with it, but the all knowing and very clever intelligence people could not have figured that out 4 years ago, and instead cleared it for Mueller, for further FBI use, for FISA applications? How about their treatment of Michael Flynn, who they had already cleared only to resurrect the dead corpse of their investigation into his talks with Russian ambassador Kislyak? How would you, personally, spell “in good faith”?

    We will see in the near future what the Durham investigation into all Russiagate players will come to. Apparently, Durham has just another three weeks to present at least something, because there is a two-month “no-go-zone” before the election, during which he would be accused of tampering with the election. And the premise for the Democrats and their sympathizers is that if Biden wins, all slates will be wiped clean.

    They won’t, by the way. America still has a justice system, even if it is oftentimes crippled and grinding(ly) slow. Just watch Michael Flynn attorney Sidney Powell and her team. They have vowed to not only have their client be exonerated, but to fully clear his name, which according to their view has been besmirched by everyone up to and including Joe Biden and Barack Obama.

    The third leg of the “creature” is the Democratic party. Who have stepped so far over their boundaries, nobody recognizes anymore that there were any. Or that the political system they are an integral part of, dictates that there are things they cannot do, lest they corrupt that system to the core.

    Once you lose a presidential election, you prepare for the next one. You don’t use the next 4 years to try and frustrate the president you just lost to with all you got. The system should not allow it and can not tolerate it. There should be skin in the game for opposition politicians, who when they come with accusations of gross misconduct serious enough to remove a president, should be forced to step down when the accusations don’t lead to the intended result.

    It should never be a free for all, in which you can simply try again the next morning. Because the system cannot work if that is possible. It can’t be that if you win a midterm election and get a majority in the House, you can then use that majority to make it impossible for a president to work on the agenda that made millions vote for him/her. That would cause the system to grind to a halt, and the system must always be more important than its temporary participants (even those who “sit” for 40-50 years).

    When you look at the speaker’s list for the Democrat -non- convention next week where Joe Biden will be confirmed as their -virtual- candidate, you see that other than AOC, it’s just a long list of the same old people who were already there when they lost in 2016, and co-losers Hillary and Obama still have a very tight grip on the power and the purse strings.

    Why they stick with Joe Biden, g-d only knows, and the same goes for whichever highly unpopular black woman they pick as VP who could soon be president. And sorry, but they all are. Kamala Harris was among the first to step down during the primaries because she didn’t get any votes. Susan Rice is not exactly “loved by the people” either, and the rest are no-names, except for Warren, but she’s both too left and much too white.

    So you’re thinking: what’s going on there? That’s really the best you can do? But it does seem to be, likely because Barackillary have a small group of confidantes to choose from who they themselves are confident will be willing to cede all actual power to them once elected. And if Harris and Rice don’t get picked as VP, they’ll still exert a lot of power.

    As will Pelosi, Schiff, Nadler, there’s more new blood at Madame Tussaud’s than at the upper echelons of the Democratic party. Yes, AOC can come in to represent the squad in a cynical move (no power but brings in lots of votes), but that’s it. For the rest it’s still just the broken left wing of the war party. But you’re right, they’re none of them, Trump. And that at the same time is the sole identity they possess.

    Anti-Trumpism has become a political religion.

    Because Trump is the only topic that attracts clickbait and viewers. The only topic that rings a bell. Joe Biden rings no bells whatsoever. A while back Donald Trump jr tweeted:

    Trump is really running against the media, Silicon Valley, the establishment, the swamp, Hollywood and maybe Joe Biden.

    While investor GreekFire23 did even better:

    Trump is running against himself in this election. The vote will come down to those who love him vs those who hate him. Biden is totally irrelevant and not even campaigning. Biden has no platform, no slogan, no stickers, no signs, no rallies, no followers. It’s Trump vs Trump.

    What can still sink Trump is obvious: it’s the economy and the pandemic. America’s problem is that no matter who wins, those will still be its main problems by January 2021. And another problem has been added in the course of 2020: protests and violence in the streets.

    Update: I thought I could leave it at that for now, step out for a moment, have a glass of wine, let it all sink in, and write a closing paragraph. But then I was sitting outside in gorgeous Athens and this popped up, which I very obviously can’t leave out:

    Senate Chairman Subpoenas FBI Director Wray For Russiagate Records; Puts Bidens On Notice

    FBI Director Christopher Wray has been subpoenaed by the Senate Committee on Homeland Security and Governmental Affairs to produce “all documents related to the Crossfire Hurricane Investigation,” which includes “all records provided or made available to the Inspector General” regarding the FISA probe, as well as documents regarding the 2016-2017 presidential transition..

    [..] The subpoena was issued by Sen. Ron Johnson (R-WI) as part of his investigation into the origins of Russiagate. It gives Wray until 5 p.m. on Aug. 20 to produce the documents. Johnson also released a lengthy letter on Monday in which he defended his Committee’s investigation and accused Democrats of initiating “a coordinated disinformation campaign and effort to personally attack” himself and Sen. Chuck Grassley (R-IA) in order to distract from evidence his committee has gathered on Joe and Hunter Biden’s Ukraine dealings.

    [..] Johnson’s committee has secured testimony from at least one State Department official who worked in Ukraine, and says the Bidens’ conduct created the appearance of a conflict of interest. “The appearance of family profiteering off of Vice President Biden’s official responsibilities is not unique to the circumstances involving Ukraine and Burisma,” wrote Johnson. “Public reporting has also shown Hunter Biden following his father into China and coincidentally landing lucrative business deals and investments there.

    “Additionally, the former vice president’s brothers and sister-in-law, Frank, James and Sara Biden, also are reported to have benefited financially from his work as well.

    I can’t let that go because it addresses exactly what my closing paragraph would have been about. Which is the risk of the giant divide that has developed in US society, getting even wider, and potentially leading to utter mayhem. Actually, it’s not even ‘potentially’ anymore, there already has been a lot of violence.

    The Democrats think they will win easily on November 3, and then push through all of their their policies, after dumping on Trump for 4 years with their media and intelligence friends, but the 63 million Americans who voted for Trump, and most of their family and friends with them, don’t think so. That’s not a threat, it’s an observation.

    They feel cheated out of their 2016 victory. They realize (or should I say “suspect”) that Russiagate and the Mueller probe and the Zelensky-linked impeachment “hearings” were empty vessels directed against the election outcome that they won fair and square, and I guarantee you they won’t take it sitting down.

    Which means that no matter who wins, polarization will reach levels America has never seen, and, frankly, should never wish to. Because all of the people involved, bar just a precious few, will have to live together in the same country, and share the same society, streets, highways, stores and resources.

    And sometimes I wonder: how are they going to do that?

    If Trump should win, how will the entire so-called left react, from the Democrats through the MSM to BLM? Will they just increase the protests and the violence in the streets?

    Alternatively, if Joe Biden wins, how will the Conservative side of America react? Will they all go home and wait for what the DNC has in store for them, or will their reaction be pro-active? I know which reaction I would see them lean towards.

    You have these two sides in society who appear further apart than even Moses could have hoped to bring back together again, you have the media who thrive on widening that divide even further, it’s a scary picture.

    And in the meantime, while everyone’s busy blaming each other, who’s going to take care of the country?

    *  *  *

    We try to run the Automatic Earth on donations. Since ad revenue has collapsed, your support is now an integral part of the publishing process. Which seems only fair and just.

  • Lake Tahoe Real Estate Booms 'Like Never Before' 
    Lake Tahoe Real Estate Booms ‘Like Never Before’ 

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 21:40

    Readers may recall our earlier notes identifying the mass exodus of folks abandoning US metro areas, fleeing to suburbia and or rural communities, first due to the virus pandemic, then social unrest.

    City dwellers began the journey out of metros in late March/early April, at the start of the virus pandemic lockdowns. When late May/early June rolled around, just as the social unrest erupted across major metros, the second exodus round was seen. 

    For more color on this evolving trend, and the importance of understanding the exodus, could, at some point, correct metro home prices, Coast to Coast Network, a real estate team of agents affiliated with Compass, is reporting a massive “boom” in the second home real estate market. 

    Nicole Blair from the Compass Tahoe team said Bay Area folks are quickly exiting the metro area for Lake Tahoe as they now have the ability to work remotely, reported Tahoe Daily Tribune

    Blair said this has led to a massive demand surge for the rural area located in the Sierra Nevada Mountains. 

    “The Lake Tahoe market has never seen activity like this,” said Blair. “Bay Area residents are flocking to the area as they realize they can work from home and they also want more space around them.”

    She said, “for example, in the month of July, our Multiple Listing Service has gone up 4% in new listings, up 60% in sold listings, down 28% in average days on the market, and up 30% on average listing price which is now equated to $1,140,000.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Lake Tahoe real estate

    “The biggest problem realtors are facing right now is too many buyers with not enough inventory,” Blair added. “We would have never predicted this outcome back in March.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Lake Tahoe real estate

    On the East Coast, Joan Witter of Witter & Witter Boston Cape Cod Connection at Compass said the real estate market is on fire:

    “The Cape Cod Market is bustling, I have been selling real estate in this market for over 26 years and have never seen anything like this,” said Witter.

    And the question every reader has to ask: How long will this exodus from cities last? 

    We might have found the answer in our latest piece titled “Real Estate Expert Warns’ Exodus’ From Cities Will Last Two Years.” 

  • Once We Have An Approved COVID-19 Vaccine, Then What?
    Once We Have An Approved COVID-19 Vaccine, Then What?

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 21:20

    Authored by Andrew I. Fillat and Henry I. Miller via HumanEvents.com,

    It’s not as simple as snapping your fingers and getting herd immunity…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s a thought experiment: after the RMS Titanic collided with an iceberg, it became necessary to allocate seats on the lifeboats; there were only about 700 places for the 2208 passengers. What if seats had been auctioned, with the price determined by supply and demand—i.e., by market forces? Clearly, the wealthiest would have crowded out the others. Instead, the Captain decided that women and children should take precedence. Of course, children had the most life to lose, but why women over men? Chivalry? We will likely never know.

    A contemporary example of the limitations of purely free-market distribution models is quickly approaching, as one or more vaccines to prevent infection by the SARS-CoV-2 virus, which causes COVID-19, come to market.

    The situation is exceedingly complex in many ways, and the “solution” will inevitably involve elements of medicine, science, ethics, and politics.

    The clinical results from the testing of different vaccines, which have been created using a variety of platforms, will inevitably vary in ways that we cannot foresee, and that will raise many questions. For example, how effective will the vaccines be for different demographic groups—particularly the elderly, who are most vulnerable to severe illness and death, but who mount a less vigorous immune response?

    One thing seems clear, however: we have seen no enthusiasm from any quarter for allowing the price of the vaccine (i.e., market forces) to determine who should get priority in obtaining protection from COVID-19. But that still leaves many possible strategies to allocate what will inevitably be a scarce resource for some time—despite attempts to anticipate the conundrum and produce many millions of doses, beginning large-scale production even before safety and effectiveness have been demonstrated to a level acceptable to regulators. 

    In several cases, this early production is being subsidized by the U.S. government. Its Operation Warp Speed aims to begin delivery of 300 million doses of an FDA-authorized, safe and effective vaccine for COVID-19 by the end of the year (an admirable but probably overly ambitious goal). As part of that initiative, the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) and Department of Defense (DoD) jointly announced on July 7th a $1.6 billion agreement with Maryland-based Novavax Inc., to demonstrate commercial-scale manufacturing of the company’s COVID-19 investigational vaccine. By funding this manufacturing effort, the federal government will own the 100 million doses of investigational vaccine expected to result from those demonstration projects. On July 22nd, the feds announced a $1.95 billion deal with U.S.-based Pfizer Inc. and BioNTech for large-scale production and delivery of 100 million doses of an FDA-approved COVID-19 vaccine. Additional federal funding of COVID-19 vaccine development has gone to Massachusetts-based Moderna (almost half a billion dollars) and to British drugmaker AstraZeneca (more than $1 billion).

    These and other similar initiatives are some of the U.S. government’s wisest “corporate welfare” subsidies within memory. They accelerate the realization of remedies to a societal calamity, without which progress would be much slower. Unfortunately, although they might mitigate some of the most difficult vaccine allocation choices, others will remain.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    WHO IS “ESSENTIAL” AND WHO IS “MOST VULNERABLE?”

    Triaging vaccine distribution raises many possible options concerning whom to prioritize and why.

    One obvious priority would be to vaccinate the “most vulnerable” populations.

    But how do we define vulnerability? By age and comorbidities, or, perhaps, by occupation or living situation (such as residents of nursing homes, or to people working in tight quarters like meatpacking plants).

    Or should “value to society in mitigating the pandemic” trump other considerations, with front-line medical personnel and staff at long-term care facilities going to the head of the line? Those whose work is both essential and hazardous? And how about those involved in keeping the food supply chain intact, such as farmworkers, truck drivers, and food-store workers? (The head of our line is starting to get pretty crowded.)

    Still, another question is to what extent the results of clinical trials should affect our priority-setting.

    For example, if a trial revealed that subjects with blood type A obtain the greatest benefit, should they get priority for that vaccine? What about various racial, ethnic, or gender groups that have a statistically higher incidence of mortality from COVID-19? For example, should Blacks be considered a higher priority for vaccination because they are dying from COVID-19 at a rate 2.5 times higher than whites? And what about the political considerations: should Americans automatically receive higher priority, simply because our government subsidized the development of the vaccine?

    The allocation criteria could theoretically become a complex algorithm, perhaps something analogous to the National Association of EMS physicians SALT Mass Casualty Triage Algorithm, which sorts patients into three categories based on the severity of their condition and determines the interventions they should get and in what order. In the case of vaccination, on the basis of the variables mentioned above, individuals could be placed in a category of the appropriate category, and within the category, would then receive vaccine in random lottery order. Of course, such an approach would not eliminate value judgments or squelch controversy.

    We hope that, to the extent possible, these decisions will be made based on medical evidence and plausible rationales rather than political interests. To return to our analogy, imagine if only members of one political party or British citizens were permitted on the Titanic’s lifeboats. (It was a British ship, after all.)

    In today’s hyper-partisan times, nothing seems too implausible or cynical.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    SCIENCE, NOT PARTISAN PERFORMANCE, SHOULD DETERMINE VACCINE ALLOCATION DECISIONS

    In order to muddle through (“resolve” would be too optimistic) these conundrums, the feds will receive formal advice from at least two sources. National Institutes of Health Director Francis Collins has asked the National Academy of Medicine to develop guidelines for who should get priority for the first doses of a coronavirus vaccine.

    A second panel, the Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices (ACIP), which advises the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention on vaccine issues, has also been tasked to formulate guidelines. Last month, the ACIP convened a meeting electronically to discuss “who counts as an essential worker, where teachers should fall in the priority list, vaccinations for pregnant women and whether race and ethnicity should factor into priority considerations.”

    It remains to be seen how and who in the administration will reconcile two independently crafted sets of recommendations, and to what extent other parties will be allowed to participate in the process. In the end, the FDA could specify which groups get priority if it grants an emergency use authorization for a vaccine. That would be similar to the FDA’s having directed that Gilead Sciences remdesivir, a COVID-19 drug treatment, be used exclusively for “patients hospitalized with severe disease,” when regulators granted an emergency use authorization.

    Questions will also arise about the cost of vaccines to consumers—and the posturing and virtue-signaling by politicians have already begun. In early June, before a vaccine was even on the horizon, Sen. Elizabeth Warren (D-MA) said in a statement,

    “We can’t allow American families—who are already struggling to make ends meet during this public health emergency—to be squeezed even further by companies out to make a quick buck.”

    And Sen. Patty Murray (D-WA) echoed her comrade, “We need to have confidence that no one is making billions in a back room somewhere.” These gratuitous broadsides are part of their ongoing disparagement of one of the nation’s most innovative and successful industries. (Thankfully, the major vaccine manufacturers seem to have accepted that the pandemic is not a time for profiteering. The deals vaccine makers have struck with the feds suggest the cost will be modest, in the range of $4-$37 per dose.)

    Several things are certain, however.

    First, no allocation scheme will please everyone, and despite all the attempts at rational analysis and planning, there will be unintended consequences.

    Second, the vaccine debate will re-inflame the passions about drug pricing and drug companies’ profits.

    Finally, we can be sure the companies that are working furiously on therapies and vaccines to rescue the world from the throes of the worst pandemic in a century won’t receive any gratitude from progressive politicians.

    The bottom line: insofar as it’s possible, the scientific and medical evidence should inform the allocation process.

  • After Trump Called It A Hoax, Pompeo Warns Russians Against Offering Bounties To Kill US Troops
    After Trump Called It A Hoax, Pompeo Warns Russians Against Offering Bounties To Kill US Troops

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 21:00

    The late June ‘Russian bounties in Afghanistan’ story lasted no longer than a mere week given that some of the very publications pushing it were forced to walk it back based on not only key claims not bearing out, but a slew of top intel officials and Pentagon generals saying it was baseless. 

    And then like many other ‘Russiagate’-inspired narratives (in this case Trump was accused of essentially ‘looking the other way’ while Russians supposedly paid the Taliban to kill US troops), it was memory-holed. 

    But this apparently hasn’t stopped the State Department or the Pentagon from using it as leverage while talking to the Russians. Secretary of State Mike Pompeo warned his counterpart, Foreign Minister Sergei Lavrov, that “there will be an enormous price to pay” if the Kremlin did indeed pay Afghan fighters to attack Americans or other Westerners

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pompeo revealed the warning in an interview with Radio Free Europe on Wednesday:

    “That’s what I shared with Foreign Minister [Sergey] Lavrov,” Pompeo said. “I know our military has talked to their senior leaders as well. We won’t brook that; we won’t tolerate that.”

    Russia has of course, denied involvement in any such operation, which many analysts have pointed out would carry major risk of stoking military conflict with the United States but with little positive gain in the region.

    Pompeo also said in the interview: “We will do everything we need to do to protect and defend every American soldier and, for that matter, every soldier from the Czech Republic or any other country that’s part of the Resolute Support Mission to make sure that they’re safe.”

    Importantly, it marks the first time any US official has broached the Russian bounties story with a Kremlin officials.

    But again, it’s somewhat strange given the US administration (and multiple US intelligence agencies) has repeatedly denied that it has any merit. Trump has gone so far as to all it a “hoax”. Thus Pompeo’s message to the Russians appears a pure tactic for achieving leverage.

    Or alternately, it could be that Pompeo is just plain undermining Trump on this one.

  • Why Socialism Is The Pursuit Of Unhappiness
    Why Socialism Is The Pursuit Of Unhappiness

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 20:40

    Authored by Noel Williams via AmericanThinker.com,

    Where are the happy socialists?  The socialists I spot are either snarling with anger or shrieking with hubris.  In fact, they seem intent on pursuing unhappiness as their misguided dictums controvert nature — human and physical.  It’s simply hard to be sanguine when going against nature.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For sure, socialism attracts a “fair number of cranks.”  Indubitably, it shackles the human spirit and foments misery So what is it about this desperate ideology that’s so disparate to nature, and so antithetical to happiness — besides the fact it creates nothing except poverty?  

    There is much wisdom behind the notion that happiness is a journey, not a destination, so enjoy the ride.  An analogy is a ship sailing the seas, seeking temporary refuge in port before embarking on another exciting expedition.  There’s brief allowance for reveling upon attaining a goal, but then there’s another…and another, so don’t get too complacent in port. 

    If we obsess about outcomes, about reaching port, satisfaction and lasting happiness remain elusive.  Yet that’s what socialists demand — equality of outcomes.  Rather than embracing the journey by equipping explorers with equality of opportunity, they’re fixated on reaching the port of communism before mutiny festers.  Once there, everyone except the dictator’s sycophants finds equality, all right — all become equally impoverished.  Turns out so-called “equality” is just not everything it’s cracked up to be as the proletariat are dictated to — not in some salubrious transition on the way to utopia, but an indefinite dictatorship in dystopia.  Rather than an abundance mindset, which grows the pie for all thanks to technological advances, it presumes a zero-sum scarcity reminiscent of the dark ages.

    While we seek some cooperation as civil society emerges from an unforgiving state of nature, equally powerful are our competitive instincts and our natural desire to excel in exceptional America.  But in addition to human nature, physical nature itself contravenes socialist orthodoxy, which breeds a kind of morass.  In his article “Physics can explain human innovation and enlightenment,” Ephrat Livni points out that “[h]uman ingenuity is simply our way of partaking in a natural flow of life[.]”  But ingenuity sustains in the broad, sunlit uplands of free-market capitalism, not in the squalor of sullied socialism.  For socialists, necessity isn’t the mother of invention; it’s the requirement to hack, spy, and steal intellectual and physical property.

    Concocting quotas and oppressive regulations oblivious to market-driven forces, they are like busy-body beavers clogging up the natural flow of things, but not nearly as endearing.  This unhappy state of affairs is not conducive to the flourishing flow of ideas which cascade and splash around in a vibrant, free-market society leading to new products, jobs, and markets.  New wealth begets more wealth as the river of ideas nourishes the plains. 

    By contrast, collectivism subdues our essential essence; our very consciousness is quelled.  It destroys human creativity, which is necessary to wrestle prosperity from a state of nature.  You see, individuals thrive when we are free — free — to enjoy the fruits of our labor; governments thrive when baleful bureaucrats coalesce power in order to institute centralized planning.

    Socialism is clearly a state of unhappiness floundering in its futile resistance to the imperatives of physical and human nature.  By subjugating the human spirit to the will of the organic state, it also restricts the flow of thoughts in our neuronal networks.  No ingenuity, minimal invention — mostly theft.  Synapses remain dormant, and cortical connections are tenuous and ambiguous; rather than pulses of energy transmitting every which way, socialist brains go dark.  Where socialism prevails, human consciousness is literally repressed, and enlightenment is futile.  Quite simply, the scourge of socialism surely ensures a dark-age mentality.  No wonder all the socialists I know are so dour and dark: socialism, after all, is the pursuit of unhappiness. 

  • American Airlines Slated To Drop Dozens Of Flights To Smaller Cities As Government Aid Dries Up
    American Airlines Slated To Drop Dozens Of Flights To Smaller Cities As Government Aid Dries Up

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 20:20

    With the government set to stop subsidizing the industry, airlines are <gasp> actually going to have to make operational changes to effectively deal with the lack of demand. Oh, the horror of free market forces actually forcing companies to make business changes!

    This starts with American Airlines, who is reportedly preparing to drop two dozen small and medium city flights as federal coronavirus aid is set to end. The aid had previously mandated that airlines were not allowed to cut service approaches. 

    Carriers were previously required to maintain minimum levels of service through September 30 as part of a $25 billion aid package, according to CNBC. They were also prohibited from making layoffs. Under the aid package, American Airlines received $5.8 billion.

    The purpose of the deal was to provide both payroll assistance and continued air service around the country despite the fact that planes didn’t have any passengers. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    American’s forthcoming cancellations could start showing up in fall schedules that are set to begin next week, the report said. Changes still have not been finalized and the list of cities that could be cut has not been released. Both airlines and their respective unions have continued to push Congress for another $25 billion in support to keep paying workers through the end of next March, when hopefully demand can recover.

    Both the Democrats and Republicans seemed to be in favor of such a deal weeks ago, but negotiations have stalled in Congress for the time being. As a result, the Department of Transportation had informed American Airlines that a planned extension of the benefits was not going to happen for the time being.

    A DOT spokesperson commented: “The Department did not propose to extend the obligations, but will use the authority in the CARES Act to monitor ongoing access by the traveling public to the national air transportation system. The Department is also prepared to implement any new provisions of law in this area if enacted by Congress.”

    United and Delta have not announced changes to their schedule yet. However, one source told CNBC, the “situation is fluid”. 

  • 9/11 NYC Tribute Canceled Over COVID Concerns Despite De Blasio Allowing BLM Mural Without A Permit
    9/11 NYC Tribute Canceled Over COVID Concerns Despite De Blasio Allowing BLM Mural Without A Permit

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 20:00

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    The iconic memorial display in NYC that features two beams of light to honor the victims of 9/11 has been canceled over coronavirus concerns just weeks after Mayor Bill de Blasio allowed a Black Lives Matter mural to be painted outside Trump Tower.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The “Tribute in Light beam won’t shine for the first time in 18 years because health risks posed to the large crew required to oversee it “were far too great,” according to the 9/11 Memorial and Museum.

    The same concerns were completely absent when a similarly large crew was on hand to paint the giant Black Lives Matter mural, a process which De Blasio himself took part in for a photo-op.

    The mural was also painted without permission from the city, with de Blasio allowing activists to skip the permit process.

    As we previously highlighted, at a time when NYC is experiencing soaring shootings and violent crimes (partly thanks to de Blasio emptying the prisons), the BLM mural also required 27 cops working in shifts to protect it.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The 9/11 Memorial and Museum also scrapped the in-person reading of 9/11 victims’ names at the annual Ground Zero ceremony over coronavirus concerns.

    Similar concerns were not expressed when tens of thousands of Black Lives Matter protesters repeatedly marched through New York City in close proximity.

    Twitter respondents expressed their disgust at the double standard.

    “This is a slap in the face to America,” said one.

    “No permit but yet arrest people for “vandalizing” what they vandalized in the first place!” added another.

    “Remember you can’t get corona at a #BLM event but you can at a light show,” said another.

    “Could we just call it the George Floyd Lightshow or something? There’s gotta be a way around this,” joked another.

    *  *  *

    My voice is being silenced by free speech-hating Silicon Valley behemoths who want me disappeared forever. It is CRUCIAL that you support me. Please sign up for the free newsletter here. Donate to me on SubscribeStar here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown.

  • Nearly A Third Of Americans Had Unpaid Housing Bills In August 
    Nearly A Third Of Americans Had Unpaid Housing Bills In August 

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 19:40

    Nearly a third of Americans for the fourth consecutive month failed to pay rent or mortgage payments in full. Personal finances of millions of folks have quickly deteriorated through summer. Unpaid housing bills are mounting as the virus-induced downturn continues to unleash the worst employment crisis since the Great Depression of the 1930s.

    A new survey via Apartment List, an online rental platform, found 32% of renters (and homeowners) entered August with unpaid housing bills. At least 20% of respondents owed more than $1,000. Among renters with back rent due, 49% have renegotiated lease agreements with their landlords or are doing so. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s the percentage of renters and homeowners with unpaid housing bills. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Renters and landlords are renegotiating lease agreements over unpaid rent obligations. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “As the pandemic rages on, missed housing payments are continuing to pile up. For the fourth straight month, we found that roughly one-in-three Americans failed to make their full rent or mortgage payment in the first week of the month,” Apartment List said. 

    The website added, “many of the protections and benefits put in place at the outset of the pandemic are now expiring, and the prospects for another round of stimulus remain uncertain. As unpaid housing debt builds, concerns around eviction and foreclosure are mounting. Although landlords and lenders are showing a willingness to negotiate, housing security is currently in jeopardy for an unprecedented number of Americans.” 

    The survey (of about 4,000 people) sheds more light on the finances of the average American has rapidly deteriorated over the summer with deep economic scarring realized as depressionary unemployment levels risks derailing the economic recovery. 

    Even before the virus-induced recession, the bottom 90% of Americans had insurmountable debts and limited savings. As soon as the mass layoffs hit in late March, tens of millions of folks saw their incomes quickly evaporate, unable to service bills, buy food, or like we’re focusing on this piece, pay rent, or mortgage payments. 

    The Trump administration quickly responded to this distress by handing out $600 per week stimulus checks, imposing an eviction moratorium, and allowing homeowners to defer mortgage payments in a forbearance program. 

    At the moment, a quarter of all household income is derived from the government. 

    So when stimulus checks stopped on July 31, and the eviction moratorium expired a couple of weeks ago, this means millions of Americans are greatly suffering in August. 

    With no timeline on the next round of stimulus, and or even if the rent eviction moratorium will be reimposed, the poor financial health of Americans doesn’t lend credibility a V-shaped recovery will be seen this year. 

  • School In The 'New COVID Normal': Plastic Bubbles, 8-Year-Old Arrests, & Woke Math
    School In The ‘New COVID Normal’: Plastic Bubbles, 8-Year-Old Arrests, & Woke Math

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 19:20

    Authored by Simon Black via SovereignMan.com,

    Are you ready for this week’s absurdity? Here’s our Friday roll-up of the most ridiculous stories from around the world that are threats to your liberty, risks to your prosperity… and on occasion, inspiring poetic justice.

    NASA to rename insensitive cosmic objects

    You may think NASA’s mission is to take humanity to Mars and beyond.

    But remember, we no longer live in a society which prioritizes actual advancement.

    Far more important is making sure no one is offended.

    So we may not make it to Mars, but at least the Innuit people will not be offended.

    NASA announced that it will rename the “Eskimo Nebula” as well as the “Siamese Twins Galaxy” because they include racially insensitive terms, apparently rooted in colonialism.

    But what about the constellation Orion– named after a Greek mythological hunter god who is alleged to have raped the Princess Merope.

    Or the constellation Gemini– named after Green twins Castor and Pollus, who were part of that Argonaut band of capitalist swine who terrorized ancient civilizations in search of the Golden Fleece. . .

    And isn’t the name Mars also offensive– because it celebrates the patriarchal, heteronormative violent God of War?

    What about Jupiter– a notorious rapist who slept with his children?

    In fact, every planet named after a Roman god should be considered offensive– Rome was the biggest colonizer of its day and routinely enslaved captives and lower class Romans.

    Luckily the Visogoths held a ‘peaceful protest’ in Rome in the year 410 which resulted in much more equality– everyone was equally impoverished and defeated.

    Click here to read the full story.

    *  *  *

    California to raise income taxes RETROACTIVELY

    California just doesn’t seem to understand.

    The rich continue to flee the state in droves. Companies like Tesla are out. Moving companies are overwhelmed.

    And what does the state legislature do? Raise taxes on the rich. Retroactively.

    A bill passed the Assembly that proposes increasing tax rates on high income Californians by up to 3.5%.

    And if the bill passes, it will be effective retroactively to January 1, 2020.

    California already had the highest income tax rate of any state in the US by far. But this tax hike will bring the top rate for those earning more than $5.9 million to 16.8%.

    On top of that, yesterday several state lawmakers introduced a wealth tax– which would take a slice of someone’s net worth, instead of just their annual income.

    Most of the people who are subject to paying these taxes are already working from home and incredibly mobile. They can easily leave the state, which will result in a tax LOSS for California. Another victory for socialism!

    Click here to read the full story.

    *  *  *

    Kindergarteners in Thailand sealed in plexiglass cubicles

    Thai kindergarteners’ days are so structured now because of Covid, that any semblance of free play and exploration is gone.

    Take a look at the pictures from one elementary school, and you will think you’re looking into a dystopian future– maybe that’s where we are.

    Children are separated by plexiglass barriers at desks, and isolated in plastic cubicles to play. They stand where they’re told and wear masks and face shields all day long.

    This is not an education– it is indoctrination.

    But in Thailand, just like in the US, homeschooling is legal– no one has to put up with this.

    Especially when the psychological factors may be worse than the disease.

    Click here to read the full story.

    Cop can’t fit handcuffs on 8 year old arrested in school

    Body camera footage has been released from an incident in December 2018 where a police officer arrested, fingerprinted, mugshotted, and charged an 8 year old boy with battery.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It took nine months in court before it reached a rational adult– a judge who dismissed the case.

    To be clear, this is a different incident from others we have discussed, like the cop who arrested a six year old girl in school, and a cop who handcuffed an 8 year old autistic boy.

    But the similarity in every case is that no one stepped in to say, “hey maybe we shouldn’t be arresting children for basic childhood misbehavior.”

    In this case, the boy wasn’t sitting properly at lunch, whatever that means.

    A teacher thought it was appropriate to intervene physically, upon which the boy yelled, “don’t put your hands on me!” and punched the teacher in the chest.

    She wasn’t injured because this is a tiny eight year old we are talking about.

    Still, that was enough for police to respond, and attempt to handcuff the boy– but the boy’s wrists were too small.

    Then the officer pats down the crying boy, putting his hands all over him, and escorts him to a police car. Meanwhile the cop seems to delight in telling the boy that “this is very serious” and “you’re going to jail.”

    Apparently there was no sane adult to be found anywhere in this school or police department.

    Click here to read the full story.

    “Kindergarten Cop” cancelled

    We thought the 1990 Schwarzenegger movie Kindergarten Cop would be cancelled at some point for insensitivity to non-conforming-gender identity.

    At one point in the film, as Schwartzenegger teaches, a boy exclaims, “boys have a penis, girls have vaginas.”

    But no, that’s not why Kindergarten Cop is being cancelled.

    A planned 30th anniversary drive-in showing of the film was cancelled because it apparently glorifies police officers.

    The sentence was passed, you guessed it, in a Tweet from an angry local author:

    “What’s so funny about School-to-Prison pipeline . . . in which African American, Latinx and other kids of color are criminalized rather than educated. Five- and 6-year-olds are handcuffed and hauled off to jail routinely in this country.”

    As the last story shows, we also recognize the problem with overzealous cops in schools. (Not that it should matter, but the boy from the last story was White.)

    We’re just not sure censoring a playful Schwarzenegger film is going to deliver the revolutionary change required to tackle the problem.

    But homeschooling might.

    Click here to read the full story.

    Math “reeks of white supremacist patriarchy”

    First it was a PhD student studying mathematics who Tweeted that 2+2=4 is “because of western imperialism/colonization. . .” (we wrote about this last month.)

    But this idea is catching on.

    Math professors and PhD candidates from various academic institutions eagerly agreed on Twitter–

    One professor who teaches math education at Brooklyn College said: “um, ya’ll must know that the idea that math is objective or neutral IS A MYTH.”

    The professor also claimed that math “reeks of white supremacist patriarchy. . .” (nevermind that many early advances in arithmetic were from Persian, Arabic, Indian, and Chinese mathematicians.)

    This was met with agreement from a professor of Sociopolitical Perspectives on Mathematics and Science Education at the University of Illinois; a Harvard University PhD student; and others.

    In line with everything we have been saying this week, the actual objective reality that 2+2=4 takes a back seat to the “woke” belief that math is yet another racist tool of oppression.

    Click here to read the full story.

    San Francisco Covid relief includes funding meth lab

    San Francisco has put up 2,500 homeless people in hotel rooms as part of an effort to help them social distance during Covid lockdowns.

    That provided the opportunity to, for instance, start a meth lab in a tax funded hotel room.

    Run a business during Covid? No.

    Start a meth lab with taxpayer funds? Yes.

    Click here to read the full story.

    *  *  *

    On another note… We think gold could DOUBLE and silver could increase by up to 5 TIMES in the next few years. That’s why we published a new, 50-page long Ultimate Guide on Gold & Silver that you can download here.

  • Hillary Clinton Willing To Serve In Biden Administration
    Hillary Clinton Willing To Serve In Biden Administration

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 19:00

    Former Secretary of State Hillary Clinton is ‘ready to help’ the Biden administration ‘in any way I can.’

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Speaking from ‘The 19th Represents Summit,’ on Thursday, Clinton told Biden: “I think this will be a moment where every American — I don’t care what party you are, I don’t care what age, race, gender, I don’t care — every American should want to fix our country … So if you’re asked to serve, you should certainly consider that,” said the twice-failed presidential candidate who enabled her husband’s sexual addiction and allegedly worked to intimidate and discredit his accusers.

    Just don’t put her in charge of rapid response when American consulates are under attack.

    Earlier in the week, Clinton offered her support for Biden’s running mate, Kamala Harris.

    “I’m thrilled to welcome @KamalaHarris to a historic Democratic ticket. She’s already proven herself to be an incredible public servant and leader. And I know she’ll be a strong partner to @JoeBiden. Please join me in having her back and getting her elected.”

    Hillary previously served alongside Joe Biden in the Obama administration – drawing sharp criticism over he handling of the 2012 terrorist attack on the US consulate in Benghazi, as well as her private email server – from which she deleted over 30,000 emails which were the subject of a subpoena. 

    “I want to add my voice to the many who have endorsed you to be our president,” Clinton said of Biden earlier this year, adding “Just think of what a difference it would make right now if we had a president who not only listened to the science, put fact over fiction, but brought us together, showed the kind of compassion and caring that we need from our president and which Joe Biden has been exemplifying throughout his entire life.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • As Ethereum Surges, Futures Open Interest Hits A Record $1.5 Billion
    As Ethereum Surges, Futures Open Interest Hits A Record $1.5 Billion

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 18:40

    By Liam Frost of Decrypt

    • The total value of outstanding Ethereum futures contracts reached a new high of $1.5 billion.

    • This was spurred by ETH’s price finally breaking above $400.

    • The value of open Ethereum futures grew twice as fast as Bitcoin’s since February.

    The total value of outstanding Ethereum (ETH) futures contracts has reached an all-time high of $1.5 billion today, according to crypto analytics platform Skew.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Also known as open interest, this figure reflects the current total value of Ethereum futures that have not been settled yet. Futures are a form of financial derivatives where parties agree to sell/buy an asset at a specific price on a set date. Unlike options contracts, where buyers might choose to not purchase the asset, futures are contractually binding and must be settled on the expiration date.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The overall growth of the futures volume combined with the rising price of ETH, which is currently up roughly 9% on the day and trading at around $428, signifies a strong market amid an upward trend, said Bobby Ong, a co-founder of crypto metrics platform CoinGecko.

    Ether finally broke past the $400 resistance level today. It has been trying to break past the $400 level unsuccessfully since the start of August. The successful breakout led traders using technical indicators to view this as a bullish indicator and traders started leveraging long on the futures market leading to it reaching its all-time high of $1.5 billion today,” Ong told Decrypt.

    Nicholas Pelecanos, the head of trading at NEM Venture Fund, also cited the break above $400 as the main catalyst for the latest Ethereum futures all-time high.

    “Since [2017] the $400 range has acted as a key level in ETH’s price history. The break of this level technically is very bullish and is likely the cause of the large volume on ETH futures,” Pelecanos told Decrypt.

    Yet, he also noted that there is currently friction within the Ethereum community caused by continuing debates about supply and transaction fees.  Researchers at Santiment wrote:

    On Tuesday, #Ethereum fees reached all-time high values in both $USD and $ETH. Since this record breaking statistic was hit, the #2 ranked market cap #crypto asset has risen +13% and sentiment has remained positive. This is an indication that although traders obviously prefer fees to be lower, the ramifications on people’s willingness to transact via an asset they believe in (at least in the short-term) are fairly minimal.”

    Pelecanos added that such disconnects “between the hype around the technology and what it can do can lead to bubbles,” but also simultaneously could result in an even more bullish market if these issues to be resolved.

    Outpacing Bitcoin

    In the last six months, the ratio of Ethereum to Bitcoin has increased significantly (to its highest since January 2019).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Additionally, the open interest of Ethereum futures grew twice as fast compared to Bitcoin (BTC), noted Larry Cermak, director of research at The Block.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Bitcoin’s futures OI was 8 times higher than ETH’s in February. Only 6 months later, it’s now about 4 times higher. OI of ETH grew relatively twice faster than BTC,” Cermak tweeted.

    This somewhat mirrors the two currencies’ increase in prices since February. Six months ago, BTC was trading at roughly $10,233 while ETH’s price hovered around $268. Since then, Bitcoin and Ethereum have gained roughly 15% and 45%, respectively, with the latter outperforming BTC by around 200%.

    “Ethereum has been on fire lately. The industry of tokenization and new-wave finance seems to be in a sort of consolidation around this network and continue to build a vast majority of new crypto-fanlged projects on the Ethereum blockchain,” summarized Mati Greenspan, a popular analyst and the founder of Quantum Economics, speaking to Decrypt.

  • Empty Apartments in Manhattan Hit Record High As Two Year Crisis Begins  
    Empty Apartments in Manhattan Hit Record High As Two Year Crisis Begins  

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 18:20

    New York City’s rental market, the largest in the US, has fallen under severe pressure over the last four months as city-dwellers make a run for the exit. The outbound migration flow has resulted in a record number of empty apartments. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Douglas Elliman and Miller Samuel published a new report this week (seen by CNBC) outlines how New York City has a whopping 13,000 empty apartments as landlords struggle to find tenants. The amount of vacant apartments supersedes the financial crisis a decade ago, which many landlords and multifamily operators are in for a rude awakening as their rental income streams evaporate.

    The number of apartments for rent, or listing inventory, more than doubled over last year and set a record for the 14 years since data started being collected, according to a report from Douglas Elliman and Miller Samuel. As the number of apartments listed for rent hit 13,117, the number of new leases signed fell by 23%.

    July also saw the largest fall in rental rates in nearly a decade, dropping 10%. Landlords are now offering an average of 1.7 months of free rent to try to lure tenants, according to the report, which is also a recent high.

    While hundreds of thousands of residents left the city in March and April in the beginning of the coronavirus pandemic, brokers and landlords hoped many would start returning in July and August, as the city’s lockdown eased and brokers could start showing apartments again. July and August are usually the busiest rental months of the year, as families get ready for school. But July’s weakness, and what brokers say is already a slow August, suggests that Manhattan’s real estate and economic troubles could extend well into the fall or beyond. – CNBC said, citing the report

    Manhattan rents are slumping this summer and are expected to keep declining well into 2021. The average rental price of a two-bedroom apartment is about $4,620. 

    The surge in empty apartments was widespread across the borough. Declines in new leases were seen across the board, from the high to low end segments. The report said the Upper East Side was hit the hardest, saw a 39% decline in new leases over the month. 

    A record number of empty apartments in Manhattan will have ripple effects industrywide and on indirect industries. 

    Miller warned: “This could be a difficult couple of years for landlords.” 

    With landlord rental streams quickly evaporating, many will have trouble paying their mortgages and could result in a wave of selling over the next couple of years, sending real estate prices citywide into a possible correction. 

  • What You Will Find When You Follow The Money
    What You Will Find When You Follow The Money

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 18:00

    Authored by MN Gordon via EconomicPrism.com,

    It has been a rough go for California Governor Gavin Newsom.  Late last week it was revealed that the state Department of Public Health had tickled the poodle on its COVID-19 record keeping.  Somehow the bureaucrats in Sacramento undercounted new coronavirus cases by as many as 300,000.

    Perhaps this oversight prompted Newsom to imbibe in a little meditation and reflection.  At his Wednesday coronavirus news conference, shortly after quoting Voltaire, Newsom offered the following epiphany:

    “Businesses can’t thrive in a world that’s failing.”

    Often the simplest insights into reality are the most essential.  We’ll give Newsom that.  Yet, this is hardly an insight.  Rather, it’s readily obvious…even to a numskull.

    The world that’s failing, where businesses can’t thrive, is a direct consequence of government lockdown orders.  And Newsom, more than any other public official, has his fingerprints all over the offense.  If you recall, California, under Newsom’s command, was the first state to order lockdowns.  It’s a shame he didn’t pause for meditation before committing the state to ruin.

    The dynamics of what would follow Newsom’s lockdown orders were predictable.  When government decrees froze the economy, bills were still due.  Yet many people’s incomes, in the form of paychecks, disappeared.

    For businesses, outstanding accounts payable were still due.  Though accounts receivable quickly became overdue.  In short, the flow of cash, as delivered by an open economy of give and take, broke down.

    Certainly, Newsom thought he was doing the right thing.  He had to keep everyone in the Golden State safe by locking them down.  Many governors followed Newsom’s lead, having the same disastrous results.

    But that was just the beginning.  Soon the uplifters in Washington swung into action…

    Printing Press Money

    The opportunity to face the economic depression honestly – through bankruptcies, write downs, and a broad financial purge – came and went with the rollout of massive fiscal and monetary stimulus programs.  Crackpot schemes like the CARES Act, the PPP, the PMCCF, and the SMCCF, among others.

    The general objective of these programs was to replace the personal and business cash flows that the lockdown orders destroyed.  The intentions may have been good.  But they paved the road to hell, nonetheless.

    Zealous efforts to paper over the drop off in what people and businesses earn and what they owe, could never be covered for long.  What’s more, these programs were flawed from the get go.  Because they relied on printing press money – credit conjured from thin air – to make them work.

    This, no doubt, is a serious flaw.  Printing press money may appear to work, in the short term.  But it’s not without consequences.  First, it destroys money that has been earned and saved.  Second, it turns the stock market into a barometer for the expansion of the money supply.

    Yet the relationships between printing press money and the financial and economic distortions it causes are increasingly perilous.  The stock market may be the barometer for the expansion of the money supply today.  But tomorrow, the stock market could crash, and consumer price inflation could assume the role of money supply expansion barometer.

    The consequences of mass money debasement are impossible to undo.  Once fake printing press money has mixed with the money that’s been earned and saved, it cannot be backed out.  The veracity of all dollars becomes questionable.  The value of all dollars becomes suspect.

    What’s next?

    What You Will Find When You Follow the Money

    Well, what’s next is an extension of what came before.  And what comes next can be summed up with one word: “More”.

    More monetary stimulus.  More fiscal stimulus.  More spending programs.  More federal unemployment checks.  More bailouts.  More government subsidized loans.  More money supply.  More Fed purchases of corporate bonds.  More debts.  More deficits.

    More of this.  More of that.  All of which will be paid for with more printing press money.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course, more printing press money means more distortions.  Which means more asset bubbles.  Which means more inflation.  Which means more wealth inequality.  Which means more protests.  Which means more riots.  Which means more chaos. 

    Which means much, Much More – of More.

    We always knew this day would come.  But we thought it would be much more sensational when it arrived.  We watched the Fed, through willful cleverness, paint itself into a corner over the course of several decades.  There’s no escape.

    So the Fed will keep doing more of what it does.  More money printing.  More dollar debasement.  More economic destruction.

    Finally, more and more people are catching on.  They’ve suspected there’s been something wrong.  That things don’t quite add up.  However, for many years, political and class divisions served as a great distraction to channel their discontents.

    Slowly, that is changing.  More and more people are following the money back to its genesis.  And what they’re finding is something so utterly crude, grotesque, and revolting that, like the devil, it hardly seems real.

    But it is…and it’s a catastrophe.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 14th August 2020

  • Seven Million Jobs At Risk As European Airline Industry Could See "Further Declines" 
    Seven Million Jobs At Risk As European Airline Industry Could See “Further Declines” 

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 02:45

    The International Air Transport Association (IATA) published a new report Thursday that warns the virus-induced downturn will continue to pressure air passenger numbers, employment and economies across Europe.

    IATA said passenger flights are expected to decline by 60% in 2020, resulting in millions of job losses in the aviation and tourism industries.

    IATA issued a similar warning of what has been announced by airlines, of which, complete recovery in passenger demand might not be seen until 2024. 

    The near-term outlook for recovery in Europe remains highly uncertain with respect to the second wave of the pandemic and the broader global economic impact it could have. Passenger demand in Europe is expected to recover gradually and will not reach 2019 levels until 2024. –IATA

    IATA’s job loss estimate was increased by 17% from its June report, from 6 million to 7 million, mostly because the highly anticipated V-shaped recovery has failed to materialize.

    “It is desperately worrying to see a further decline in prospects for air travel this year, and the knock-on impact for employment and prosperity. said Rafael Schvartzman, IATA’s Regional Vice President for Europe.

    Schvartzman said, “It shows once again the terrible effect that is being felt by families across Europe as border restrictions and quarantine continue. It is vital that governments and industry work together to create a harmonized plan for reopening borders.”

    IATA’s full-year estimate of jobs supported by aviation (including tourism) at risk in mid-June 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If another wave of the virus were to hit Europe, justifying nationwide lockdowns, it could intensify the recession

    Though the German tabloid newspaper Bild has said: “There will be no second hard lockdown in Europe because that would lead to a monster recession that would not be accepted by the population.”

  • China Uses "Friendship Groups" To Infiltrate And Divide Europe
    China Uses “Friendship Groups” To Infiltrate And Divide Europe

    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 08/14/2020 – 02:00

    Via The Epoch Times,

    In a recent report published by the Center for Strategic and Budgetary Assessment, the CCP was said to have co-opted European political and business elites using “friendship groups”.

    These “friendship groups” seem to assist in educational and cultural exchanges between Europe and China, but they are in fact the mouthpieces and intermediaries that CCP proxies use to help with the CCP’s united front to divide Europe.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On July 1, the Center for Strategic and Budgetary Assessment (CSBA) released a publication called “Uncovering China’s Influence In Europe: How Friendship Groups Coopt European Elites”. The report pointed out that “friendship groups” serve as mouthpieces and intermediaries for advancing Beijing’s domestic priorities and foreign policy goals.

    These groups consist of local politicians and business elites who, through various public events, help get rid of any negative rhetoric about the CCP and support European policies that are favorable to the CCP.

    *  *  *

    Full Report below:

  • Lockdown Restrictions Are A Test To See How Much Tyranny Americans Will Accept
    Lockdown Restrictions Are A Test To See How Much Tyranny Americans Will Accept

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 23:55

    Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com,

    The pandemic lockdowns are a complicated issue, and that is absolutely deliberate. The point of 4th Generation psychological warfare is to present the target individual or population with a hard choice – a no-win scenario. You are damned if you do and damned if you don’t. I often equate this to the key moves in a difficult chess game; your primary goal is to create a dual threat and force your opponent to sacrifice one piece over another in order to escape with the least amount of damage. Do this a few times and you have won the long game.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There are multiple aspects to the global pandemic which seem engineered to push our society to make “sacrificial decisions”. We can choose to sacrifice the lives of those that are susceptible to the virus, sacrifice our economy, or sacrifice many of our freedoms with the promise that the economy and lives will be protected. The easiest choice is always to give away a little more freedom. We’ll get it all back eventually…right?

    Of course, we don’t actually get to “choose” anything when we play along with this game. 4th Gen warfare is meant to eventually take IT ALL from the target population while making people think it was their choice to give those things away.

    To be clear, it’s not only the pandemic being exploited as leverage to conjure these situations. The leftist riots are another example of a bought and paid for crisis that is being used in an attempt to convince half of Americans that breaking constitutional principles and instituting unprecedented government power is somehow an acceptable sacrifice. The riots and the virus response work hand-in-hand; one is created to get leftists to demand totalitarianism in the name of public safety, the other is created to get conservatives to demand totalitarianism in the name of public safety.

    The solution always ends up being totalitarian government.

    There are those that would have you believe that this is the only way. The new propaganda meme out there is:

    Silly libertarians live in a fantasy world where freedom is valued over security in times of crisis. We don’t have the luxury of freedom when communist terrorists/deadly virus threaten to destroy the fabric of our society…”

    Sound familiar? Yes, this nonsense narrative is everywhere on forums and message boards these days, almost as if someone was paying people to inject it into everyday discussion. The problem is, I’ve seen this all before. Right after the events of 9/11, America went insane for at least a few years, hyperfocused on the threat of terrorists while ignoring the greater root danger of all powerful government. The number of constitutional protections being violated in the name of “beating the terrorists” was staggering, and the number of mostly conservative citizens cheering for this at the time was immense.

    Today’s calls for overreaching government power in the name of “beating coronavirus” or “beating the extreme left” are no different. In the wake of widespread fear, people suffer from fits of temporary madness that allows them rationalize moral relativism and unnecessary sacrifices.

    I’ve never really understood that aspect of behavior among certain groups. I’ve never been so fearful of losing my life that I was willing to hand over anything including my freedom and my future on the mere chance that I could stay alive just a little longer. But for some, that fear dominates their every waking moment.

    To me, this would be a torturous and empty existence. What do these people have to live for anyway? Obviously they don’t care about their children because they are willing to give away their children’s future just so they can feel safer today. Do they have some kind of epic contribution for the good of humanity and they feel they must do anything to survive long enough to make it happen? Are they working on the cure for cancer or a path to world peace? I doubt it.

    More likely they work in an office building or a McDonalds or teach kindergarten at a public school. They aren’t contributing all that much, but they are perfectly willing to trade their freedom and everyone’s freedom for a little more time on this Earth. I’ve seen 85-year-old men that can’t move around without a walker raging about people who “don’t wear masks” and how they should be “thrown in jail”.

    Buddy, you have lived your life fully. You had your fun. Yet, you are still clinging so desperately to existence that you are demanding the draconian destruction of our society’s core principles just so you can eek out a couple more years of grumbling in misery and eating soft foods?

    I’m not saying I contribute much more in comparison, but I also have no interest in controlling the destinies of other people. I’m just trying to live my life as free as possible while helping to ensure others can do the same. And if I die from a virus, then I die, but at least I never aided in the enslavement of future generations.  There are plenty of Americans of all ages that feel the same way as I do; but there are many others that seem to be missing that ability to control their fear.

    The question I almost never see asked in the mainstream when it comes to the pandemic is this – Is it really all worth it?

    Is it worth it to shut down large swaths of the US economy, threatening millions of jobs, sending millions of people into poverty, risking speedy financial collapse and degrading our fundamental freedoms just to save .03% of the population? What if it was 1% of the population? Would it be worth it then? What about 3%?

    The reality is, it’s NEVER worth it.

    Recently a voting member of the Federal Reserve, Neel Kashkari, argued that the US needs renewed hard lockdowns, meaning most Americans stay stuck at home for at least 6 weeks with little access to the economy. His rationale? The US savings rate has spiked, therefore more Americans are saving, therefore they can financially handle another lockdown.

    Now, either Kashkari is very stupid or very evil. I’m going to go with evil. This is just more proof that supports my position that the Fed is a suicide bomber seeking the deliberate destruction of the US in the name of an ideological cult (globalism).

    • First, the savings rate does not necessarily represent the majority of Americans. The savings rate can increase dramatically due to a small subsection of the population, such as the upper middle class or the 1%, setting large amounts of money aside, yet the statistics treat this as if it represents the whole population. The Personal Savings Rate also includes stocks and bonds as “savings”, which helps to skew the numbers as well.

    • Secondly, with 30 million more Americans added to the unemployment rolls after the last lockdown, how can we take the recent increase in the savings rate seriously? How many average middle class or poverty stricken Americans are included in that stat?

    • Thirdly, even if the Fed stat was accurate and most Americans were saving more, how is this an excuse to enforce even harsher lockdowns? People generally save in order to prepare for the worst case scenario. So, because they are saving for the worst case scenario, Kashkari wants to punish them with the worst case scenario, thereby wiping out their savings? Again, he’s either stupid or evil; take your pick.

    All no-win scenarios are constructed on lies and false narratives. They require you to believe certain fallacies before you can feel trapped by the decision that is imposed on you.

    Kashkari will claim that his strategy will be better for the country in the long run, but he knows full well that the economy was crashing well before the coronavirus arrived on the scene. In fact, the Federal Reserve built the framework for the crash by addicting the system to easy debt through stimulus measures and low interest rates, then they took away the punch bowl triggering a bubble implosion, and now they are the world with punch until everyone drowns in the inflation.

    The US economy was broken even without the pandemic lockdowns so there is no point in giving up your freedom or economic access to save the system.

    Another lie is that we can somehow avoid or escape the virus. Eventually, almost everyone is going to get it, it’s just a matter of time. Hope that a working vaccine can be developed in less than a year is deluded, and given the terrible results of previous attempts by governments to rush vaccines into production, I think I would rather take my chances with Covid. Even medical tyrant Dr. Fauci himself admits that a vaccine will not be fully effective and that the virus may be around for many years to come.

    So, why are we beating around the bush? Why are we shutting down the economy? Why are we giving up our everyday freedoms? Who are we saving? No one. The people that are going to die from coronavirus are going to die from it sooner or later. If we are going to get into a discussion on the so-called “greater good”, then let’s really be logical about it.  The decision is not all that hard when you set aside the propaganda and think about it.

    Dragging the pandemic out over years with lockdowns hurts the majority of people. It expedites an economic crash that was already in motion and it will lead to massive poverty levels in the US as well as a supply chain breakdown. It may even lead to full-on collapse.

    To be clear, I respect the private property rights of businesses that want customers to wear masks or take other precautions in their establishments.  I have the right to not shop at those businesses if I don’t like it.  The problems arise when government officials try to FORCE businesses to institute pandemic restrictions or to close down completely.  An even bigger problem arises when governments try to force pandemic restrictions onto individuals in their everyday lives.  This is simply unacceptable.

    Government edicts forcing people to social distance or wear masks or deny them the right to free assembly, once instituted, will probably never go away. Once government has the power to dictate your movements and behavior as if your moment-by-moment decisions are a threat to “public health”, they have total power to do anything they wish.

    Many of these orders are also being made at the executive level. No state governor, no mayor, no president has the right to unilaterally create laws and assert unchecked authority. It is the job of legislatures to pass laws that affect the common public, and often these laws must be voted on by the citizenry through ballot initiatives. The governor has no more power to force me to wear a mask than some lunatic leftist Karen on the street.

    It’s not that I don’t care about the people that are susceptible to the virus, it’s just that I’m not willing to play a rigged game of sacrifice for those people. No, they aren’t worth it, and I include myself in that statement in the event that I am susceptible to the virus. Why should over 99% of people be treated like prisoners so less than 1% of the population can feel safer?  If you are really at risk then STAY HOME, shop online and let the rest of us get on with our lives.

    I would never ask the majority of people to sacrifice their liberties for my personal comfort. Anyone who does is a coward.

    *  *  *

    If you would like to support the work that Alt-Market does while also receiving content on advanced tactics for defeating the globalist agenda, subscribe to our exclusive newsletter The Wild Bunch Dispatch.  Learn more about it HERE.

  • "They Won't Get What They're Expecting" – Why Wall Street's Star Traders Are Going To Get 'Shafted' Come Bonus Season
    “They Won’t Get What They’re Expecting” – Why Wall Street’s Star Traders Are Going To Get ‘Shafted’ Come Bonus Season

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 23:35

    The S&P 500 has officially fought its way back to the record highs, but all those investment bankers and traders who got a taste of what it was like during the pre-crisis days earlier this year, when global banks’ sales and trading operations suddenly became profit centers, likely won’t be getting as big of a “taste” as they probably expect when the Holiday bonus season arrives.

    As BBG points out in a new story, just because they saved the firm’s bottom line last quarter, doesn’t mean they’ll be getting the personal windfall they feel they deserve (a 30%-50% higher than last year’s paltry comp). 

    Citing commentary from a handful of Wall Street vets, Bloomberg reported a sad fact of life that this generation of traders is about to learn the hard way. And that is: when S&T hit it out of the park during a “good” year, traders are rewarded. But outperforming in a bad year gets you jack squat.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What’s worse, traders who have been working since shortly after the crisis have never before seen results like this, since centrally planned, Fed-backed markets have robbed brokers of much of the volatility that typically accompanies the traditional process of price discovery. But in an era when asset prices are hopelessly distorted, assets really only move one way.

    For the stars, hedge funds will be waiting in the wings, ready to scoop up the best talent.

    Bank traders who saved their firms’ bottom lines in the first half of 2020 are facing a reality of the pandemic: Record revenue won’t mean record bonuses, with most businesses facing declines of 10% or more. Even bond traders are likely to find year-end rewards don’t line up with the cash they generated, as firms face loan losses and pressure on costs.

    “If your division hits the ball out of the park for the year – you’re probably better off when that happens in a good year for the overall firm,” said Bonnie Schindler, principal at Compensation Advisory Partners. “Fixed-income traders may feel a bit unlucky having that great performance this year.”

    That message has been percolating in recent weeks – visible in fresh projections by Wall Street compensation consultants such as Schindler. They see traders who slogged through years of sedate markets now facing the prospect of having their big payoff tempered by tough times in other parts of the business. Deal advisory and lending operations are struggling. Banks are trying to avoid firings and dividend cuts.

    It’s enough to frustrate star traders, leaving them vulnerable to poaching by hedge funds willing to pay more.

    Everybody else is likely bound to be disappointed…

    “People who have taken compensation hits over the years are not going to see the increase they’re expecting,” said Michael Karp, chief executive officer of recruiter Options Group, who predicts more defections by managing directors who run teams. “That’s where there will be a lot of discontent.”

    …especially after last year’s bonuses were lean across the street, as banks were hammered by the return to zero interest rates. While the bonuses will certainly be an improvement, as the chart below shows.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Thanks to the new Fed credit facilities and the central bank’s decision to buy up corporate bonds, fixed income trading contributed the biggest increase to last year’s profits.

    But while most fixed income traders probably hope to see bonuses of up to 50% or more, most will probably only see 30% or so, according to one well-regarded consultant.

    Equities traders at major U.S banks largely succeeded in navigating the most tumultuous markets in a generation as the pandemic triggered lockdowns in March and sent stocks swooning, only to later rebound. But that performance was soon overshadowed by fixed-income trading. Federal Reserve intervention in credit markets helped banks arrange a slew of fundraisings for desperate companies, giving those traders ample chances to buy and sell newly issued bonds.

    In the second quarter, traders at three top fixed-income trading houses – JPMorgan Chase & Co., Citigroup Inc. and Goldman Sachs Group Inc. – generated about $10 billion in additional revenue. The windfall helped keep JPMorgan and Citigroup profitable despite massive loan-loss provisions.

    Fixed-income traders may see their year-end bonuses jump 25% to 30%, according to Alan Johnson, founder of compensation consultant Johnson Associates. Yet those traders are likely to expect increases of 50% or more, he said.

    “They’re going to be paid somewhat less than their results on an isolated basis,” Johnson said. “They will be disgruntled.”

    Already, some top fixed-income people have made the jump to the hedge fund world. Most funds generally underperform, and the market chaos of the last six months was responsible for its fair share of fund blowups, but the biggest and best-performing funds have their pick of the litter.

    Yet by early July, billionaire Steve Cohen’s Point72 Asset Management poached Goldman’s repo trading chief, Alex Blanchard, and the head of the bank’s U.S. government bond trading team, Andrew DiMaria.

    Traders who jump to hedge funds can pocket compensation more proportional to their outsize profits. While many hedge funds have struggled to outperform the markets this year, some – including Citadel, Balyasny Asset Management and Millennium Management – are widely seen as having the strength to make targeted hires of rainmakers.

    Are Wall Street’s “star traders” really getting screwed here? While many might be tempted to complain about “carrying the firm on their backs”, they should probably think twice, or at least keep quiet: since more often than not over the past decade, that shoe has been on the other foot.

    Plus, with the Fed pumping an endless flood of liquidity into markets, it’s not like these traders had to really work that hard for their money. Anybody who disagrees can try throwing in an application at DDTG.

  • Real-Time Card Spending Data Suggests A Sizable Miss In Tomorrow's Retail Sales Report
    Real-Time Card Spending Data Suggests A Sizable Miss In Tomorrow’s Retail Sales Report

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 23:09

    With the retail sales report on deck tomorrow morning, traders will be curious to see if consumer spending indeed fizzled in July just as the fiscal cliff discussed earlier hit, and as consumers in impacted states hunkered down.

    Conveniently, Bank of America provided its monthly card spending update earlier to give a glimpse into not only consumer behavior in the first week of August but also all of July. According to the bank, total card spending, as measured by aggregated BAC credit and debit cards, increased 2.1% yoy for the 7-day period ending August 8th which is an improvement from the -3.0% yoy pace last week. One explanation posited by BofA’s economists is that “the timing of the pay period likely held back spending last week and created a boost this week. Smoothing through, the story remains the same: card spending is moving sideways in a choppy fashion.”

    Below are some key observations:

    1. Unemployment insurance (UI): The extended benefits from the CARES Act expired on July 31st, leaving UI recipients with a reduction in income. BofA examined spending trends of the population of card holders who receive UI through ACH (direct deposit) and compare to those that do not, broken down by income cohort. In general, and as one would expect, the YOY rate of growth for UI recipients declined but it increased for the broader population. The differential was the largest for the lower income cohort.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    * * *

    2. Back-to-school (or not): The back-to-school (BTS) shopping season is meaningfully different this year with many students not returning to school in person. To gauge the impact of such, BofA created a composite of retailers that are most highly correlated to the August BTS and examine the trends this year vs. last. Data is also shown on a regional basis given the varying timelines of school openings across the country. There is a clear turning point in mid-July where the BTS composite diverged relative to last year. The BTS composite has shown no growth since early June this year vs. a 20% increase between early July and August last year. That said, interestingly, there is a meaningful increase in online department store spending over the most recent period, which could reflect BTS shopping.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    * *  *

    3. Monthly data for July: The BofA census retail sales forecast is based on the BAC data which showed that retail sales ex-autos improved a modest 0.3% mom SA in July, bringing the 3-month moving average to 5.4%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The bank forecasts retail sales ex-auto from Census Bureau to also increase by just 0.3% mom, which would bring the Census 3-month moving average in line with that of BAC card data, and would also be a material miss to consensus expectations of a 1.3% increase.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, BofA cautions that the risk is to the upside given that grocery stores spending, which dropped 1% mom, has a bigger share in BAC retail spending than in the Census retail report.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The charts below show the “big picture” in daily card spending by major category.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Spending on a regional basis shows that most cities that continue to have shutdowns or are otherwise affected by ongoing riots, continue to lag.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Broken down between online and “brick and mortar”, the spending winner is all too clear:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And, as observed previously, the spending recovery continues to be led by the lower income (those earnings <$50K cohort which is most dependent on government benefits):

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • Kindergartners To Learn About White Supremacy In PA School District
    Kindergartners To Learn About White Supremacy In PA School District

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 22:55

    Elementary school children attending a wealthy Pennsylvania school district this fall will be required to learn that white people who sympathize with police officers, or decline to watch the news, are complicit in racism, according to the Washington Free Beacon.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gladwyne Elementary School—located in Lower Merion School District, one of the richest in the nation—will require fourth and fifth graders to read Not My Idea: A Book About Whiteness, which claims that white people who relate to police officers or decline to watch the news are complicit in racism. The curriculum also assigns A Kid’s Book About Racism to kindergarten and first graders.

    The books are raising eyebrows among some parents, who take issue with their political focus. Elana Yaron Fishbein, a mother of two boys and a doctor of social work, penned a letter to the district’s superintendent, board members, and the school’s principal demanding the school remove its new “cultural proficiency” curriculum. –Washington Free Beacon

    The book teaches kids not only to defy parents but to hate themselves,” Fishbein told the Beacon, adding “To hate their parents also because they are white. By default, [the kids] are white, and they’re privileged, and they’re bad. [The school] is teaching this to little kids.”

    The move comes as several school districts across the country have altered their curriculum amid national protests in the wake of the death of George Floyd, a black suspect who died after a Minneapolis police officer knelt on his neck for more than eight minutes.

    Virginia’s Loudon County School District – America’s richest by median income, is collaborating with Teaching Tolerance, a left-wing education group, which will be developing a new kindergarten curriculum revolving around slavery. According to the Beacon, proposed lesson plans will recommend restructuring history and social studies classes to emphasize slavery as fundamental to American society.

    Cultural proficiency lessons at Gladwyne were announced in an email to parents on June 9. The email claims that despite offering four other lessons on equity and race, the school’s “Cultural Proficiency Committee” believes those lessons are insufficient and created a fifth lesson focused explicitly on anti-racism.

    Generally, each class also engages in a cultural proficiency lesson; however, we realize that this is not enough,” Gladwyne principal Veronica Ellers wrote in an email obtained by the Free Beacon. “We plan to continue designing lessons that promote anti-racist actions in the upcoming 20-21 school year and beyond.”

    A Kid’s Book About Racism has an exhaustive list of actions it deems harmful and racist. The book claims asking questions can be racist and issues a call to action for five- to seven-year-olds to call out and identify racism.

    [Racism] happens all the time,” the book reads. “Sometimes it shows up in small ways. Like a look, a comment, a question, a thought, a joke, a word, or a belief…. If you see someone being treated badly, made fun of, excluded from playing, or looked down on because of their skin color call it racism.” –Washington Free Beacon

    Meanwhile, parents questioning the new curriculum are afraid of being called racists. According to Fishbein, other parents are private messaging her with their disapproval of the cultural proficiency plans, but won’t speak out publicly.

    “If you say anything that’s racist according to the school or parent’s definition of racism, you’re out,” she said, adding “You’re called a racist. No wonder the parents don’t talk.”

  • Beyond The (Benefits) Cliff: The Wile E. Coyote Moment For The US Consumer
    Beyond The (Benefits) Cliff: The Wile E. Coyote Moment For The US Consumer

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 22:42

    Just over a month ago, we argued that rapid and record fiscal stimulus had been a critical driver of the initial V-shaped recovery in consumer spending and therefore that several benefits cliffs could endanger this momentum if government support was removed prematurely (see: “Look Out Below”: Why The Economy Is About To Fly Off A Fiscal Cliff”). The first of those cliffs was hit at the end of July, with the failure to pass additional legislation leading to the expiration of the Federal Pandemic Unemployment Compensation (FPUC) benefits, which have provided qualifying unemployed individuals an additional $600 per week.

    And although President Trump signed an executive order to renew these benefits at $400 per week – $300 supplied by reallocating unused funds from elsewhere in the CARES Act and $100 from states – legal, administrative and fiscal uncertainty remains about how and when these checks will hit the pockets of the unemployed.

    As Deutsche Bank’s Matthew Luzzetti writes this week, the evaporation of these benefits highlights near-term downside risks to consumer spending, particularly for lower income households, which have been a critical engine of the recovery despite being disproportionately more likely to lose a job during the pandemic – a testament to the effectiveness of the income supplement.
    As we noted two months ago, and again as seen in Figure 2, consumer spending by lower-income households has significantly outpaced middle and higher income. In fact, by mid-June spending by lower-income households had already completely normalized. However, around the end of July, consumer spending fell more for lower-income households, no doubt impacted by the sharp decline in unemployment benefits that occurred during this time (Figure 3).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Separately, and consistent with the idea that the expiration of unemployment benefits is likely to impair consumer spending negatively, particularly for lower-income households, Google mobility data also indicates that since the end of July foot traffic around retail has underperformed in states that were more likely to be impacted negatively by the expiration of these benefits. This can be seen in Figure 4, where there is a clearly negative relationship between the insured unemployment rate in a state – with states with a higher insured unemployment rate more sensitive to changes in benefits – and the change in mobility around retail outlets.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Luzzetti summarizes, while it is too early to reach concrete conclusions about the aggregate implications of the expiration of these benefits, this real-time data reaffirms findings from recent academic research, which found that consumer spending was likely to experience a material hit if expanded unemployment benefits were cut sharply.

  • The Attempted COVID Coup Of 2020
    The Attempted COVID Coup Of 2020

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 22:35

    Authored by Angelo Codevilla via RealClearPolitics.com,

    What history will record as the great COVID coup of 2020 is based on lies and fear manufactured by America’s ruling class – led by the Democratic Party and aided by the complaisance of most Republican politicians.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In March, the World Health Organization (WHO) and the U.S. Centers for Disease Control (CDC) presented the coronavirus to the Western world as a danger equivalent to the plague. But China’s experience, which its government obfuscated, had already shown that COVID-19 was much less like the plague and more like the flu. All that has happened since followed from falsifying this basic truth.

    Americans were led to believe that the virus was unusually contagious, and that it would kill up to one in 20 persons it infected—a 5 percent infection/fatality rate (IFR). Today, we still lack definitive, direct knowledge of COVID-19’s true lethality. The absence of that knowledge allows bureaucrats to continue fearmongering.

    By May, a  host of studies in the U.S. and around the world showing that the vast majority of COVID cases cause mild symptoms or none, and showing the IFR to be equal to or lower than that for most flus, forced the CDC to conclude that the lethality rate, far from being 5 percent, was 0.26%––double that of a typical flu. Instead of amending their recommendations in the face of this reality, the CDC and the U.S. government tried to hide it by manipulating the definition and number of COVID “cases.”

    Federal officials defined “cases” as people sick enough to be hospitalized who also tested positive for the virus—this represented the “curve” that we were urged to sacrifice so much to “flatten,” lest a wave of hospitalizations overwhelm our health-care system. That wave never came. The CDC and feds began labeling mere infections as “cases” and stopped reporting “cases” together with the number of deaths. They did this to frighten the inattentive public about “spiking COVID cases.” They also inflated the number of deaths attributed to COVID by including illnesses such as pneumonia and influenza and others into the death figures.

    In reality, those who died with or of COVID-19 nearly always suffered from other diseases as well, such as Type 2 diabetes, high blood pressure, and compromised lungs, in addition to being elderly and infirm. COVID-19’s effect on ordinary healthy persons is considerably milder than those of ordinary respiratory diseases.

    COVID-19 is not America’s plague. There was never the slightest evidence that the virus could produce mass casualties; all evidence pointed in the opposite direction. Instead, the ruling class took this opportunity to extort the general public’s compliance with its agendas. Their claim to speak on behalf of “science” is an attempt to avoid being held accountable for the enormous harm that they are doing. They continue doing it because they want to hold on to the power the panic has brought them.

    In sum, the lockdowns have been inflicted and perpetuated by people who care more about your subjugation than your health. They want to wreck the U.S. economy and increase the Democratic Party’s chances in the 2020 election. And they might succeed.

    The 2016 election raised the possibility that the presidency’s enormous powers might be used to dismantle the ruling class’s network of prestige and privileges. In response, elites launched what has amounted to a “full court press” against the Trump administration, treating anything and everything about the administration as illegitimate. Despite their best efforts, the U.S. economy boomed. Trump’s approval ratings rose. As 2020 dawned and Trump seemed a cinch for reelection, the political left and its allies grasped for ways of damaging him.

    COVID-19 was the perfect chance to produce, stoke, and maintain fear in pursuit of power. In short, the ruling class used the coronavirus to collapse American life. We are living through a coup d’état based on the oldest of ploys: declaring emergencies, suspending law and rights, and issuing arbitrary rules of behavior to excuse taking “full powers.”

    Truth and clarity about the 2020 COVID coup are necessary for the United States to overcome its effects. Americans are anxious for truth about what happened—and what is still happening. The lies upon which this scam has been based are so substantively thin, and the resources for establishing the truth so abundant, that a few courageous leaders in key places may suffice.

    For example, nothing is stopping the Senate from functioning as a truth commission regarding the COVID coup. Since the virus scam is based on lies and misrepresentations by persons of considerable power and prestige, expert questioning under oath before television cameras can let Americans judge for themselves why “medical experts” stigmatized those going to the beach and church – while not objecting, later, to the even greater numbers of Americans rioting in the streets.

    State governors, as well, can provide practical leadership to motivate, guide, and legitimize life independent of our dysfunctional ruling class. Several U.S. states never shut down, while others reduced activities far less than the likes of California and New York. Like Sweden’s government, these states’ officials didn’t believe that COVID-19 was the plague and saw individual responsibility as the surest guarantee of safety for all. Indeed, the public would benefit from seeing these states’ governors defend their widely different perspectives on the COVID pandemic—and the results of their policies and decisions.

    An honest reckoning, if we can get one, will reveal that the COVID-19 experience in America has only tangentially been about health. It has been, predominantly, a political campaign based on the pretense of health but dedicated to the maintenance of elite control—and it has done far more damage and caused more misery than the coronavirus itself.

  • Chinese Econ Data Dump Unexpectedly Bombs As Industrial Production, Retail Sales Miss
    Chinese Econ Data Dump Unexpectedly Bombs As Industrial Production, Retail Sales Miss

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 22:18

    Was that it for China’s miraculous recovery? While China’s economic releases long ago lost any “data” significance and simply represent whatever the politburo wants it to represent, moments ago we had the traditional monthly data dump and it was extremely ugly, with the key items missing badly, and making one wonder if Beijing is no longer eager to convince the world of just how solid the post-covid recovery is but instead is transitioning into a phase that actually reflect the devastating reality.

    Here are the highlights:

    • Industrial output missed at 4.8%, Exp. 5.2%
    • Retail sales not only missed in July but shrank for the 5th months, printing -1.1% Y/Y; vs the Est. 0.1%, failing to recover into the green for the first time since the pandemic began
    • Fixed investment came in line, shrinking by -1.6%, same as the -1.6% expected.
    • Unemployment came in at 5.7%, unchanged from last month and a completely arbitrary number which captures only whatever Beijing wants it to capture.

    Visually:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Some additional metrics for the YTD period:

    • Jan.-July Retail Sales -9.9% Y/Y; Est. -9.8%
    • Jan.-July Industrial Output -0.4% Y/Y; Est. -0.4%
    • Jan.-July Property Dev. Investment Rises 3.4% Y/Y
    • End-July Surveyed Jobless Rate Stands at 5.7%

    And some commodity metrics:

    • China July Crude Oil Output 16.46M Tons, +0.6% Y/Y
    • China July Natural Gas Output 14.2BCM, +4.8% Y/Y
    • China July Coal Output 317.94M Tons, -3.7% Y/Y

    A quick scroll through the various retail sales categories indicate that restaurant and catering fell 11% (actually a slower pace of decline compared to previous months) and there are also falls in clothing, furniture, household electronics and petroleum. One notable observation from Bloomberg’s Ailing Tan: the 12.3% increase in retail sales of automobiles didn’t prop up the headline number, which means that autos are not a good gauge of China’s economic pulse. They have become steadily less correlated to overall economic spending.

    As for the “stellar” 5.7% unemployment rates,  BofA reminds us that it leaves out about half the workforce, and we know anecdotally that joblessness among migrant laborers is high and likely dragging down consumption.

    The data clearly is on the soft soft side with 2 out of 3 metrics missing at a time when China’s PMIs suggest a new Golden Age has been unleashed (and thus discredit themselves) while the slide in retail sales is the biggest worry as it indicates that either the Chinese consumer is tapped out or that Beijing wants to indicate to the world that the Chinese consumer is tapped out. Whatever the right explanation, it means confidence isn’t there yet, and that the virus may not be under control after all so Beijing is giving itself some leeway when things turn ugly again.

    In response to the disappointing earnings, Chinese stocks eased back although “China’s Nasdaq”. the tech-heavy ChiNext is holding onto some of its morning gains, trading up 1%. Why? Same as in the US, investors will think that any mildly disappointing news will prompt policy makers to provide liquidity to the financial system, as Bloomberg cheerfully notes. Indeed, Chinese government bonds are rising for a third day, another sign that investors may be expecting this data to inspire policy makers to provide some liquidity to keep the economy on track (or to continue the stealth QE we noted yesterday). The yield on notes due in a decade is down 1 basis point at 2.952%, the lowest in more than a week.  

  • Satellite Images Reveal North Korean Nuclear Reactor Site "Vulnerable" To "Extreme Weather Events"
    Satellite Images Reveal North Korean Nuclear Reactor Site “Vulnerable” To “Extreme Weather Events”

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 22:15

    Geopolitical analysts at 38 North, a website that tracks developments along the 38th parallel that separates North and South Korea, published a new report that sheds light on a potentially dangerous situation in North Korea, one where recent rising floodwaters threatened a nuclear reactor site.

    Satellite imagery from August 6-11 shows water levels along the Kuryong River may have damaged pump houses at the Yongbyon Nuclear Scientific Research Center. 

    Despite ongoing efforts to improve the embankment along the river against annual flooding, they failed to meet the challenge of this year’s rising waters, which reached the pump houses. More importantly, the flooding exposed how vulnerable the nuclear reactors’ cooling systems are to extreme weather events, in this case, for the potential for damage to the pumps and their power systems, or for clogging of piping systems that draw water from the river. – 38 North

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The five-megawatt reactor at the nuclear facility didn’t appear to be operating at the time the images were taken. It’s been rumored this is the facility that the rogue country produces weapons-grade plutonium. 

    Satellite imagery taken earlier this week appears to show floodwaters didn’t breach any part of the Yongbyon facility’s Uranium Enrichment Plant (UEP), located downstream. There’s also an indication the water level has receded in recent days. 

    Partial coverage of the area from August 8 and 11 shows the waters have retreated, suggesting that the major facilities within the complex, such as the Uranium Enrichment Plant (UEP), have been spared. -38 North

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When comparing satellite imagery from August 6 versus July 22, it becomes clear the water level of the Kuryong River has risen dramatically alongside the nuclear complex. 

    Although the security wall around the reactor complex was not breached, the water had reached the two pump houses that service the reactors and completely submerged their respective bases. The overfall dam that was built to ensure a constant reservoir of water and is available for cooling the reactors was also fully underwater. -38 North

    North Korea’s state media has stayed quiet on the subject. There’s no official report if the pump houses or piping were damaged. If so, this would present significant challenges for cooling the reactor. 

    In China, record flooding from unprecedented rainstorms has resulted in structural issues within the Three Gorges Dam. Beijing admitted weeks ago that the world’s largest hydroelectric gravity dam on the Yangtze River in Hubei province “deformed slightly.” 

     

  • Man Charged With First-Degree Murder In Killing Of 5-Year-Old Boy On Bicycle
    Man Charged With First-Degree Murder In Killing Of 5-Year-Old Boy On Bicycle

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 21:55

    Authored by Zachary Stieber via the Epoch Times (emphasis ours)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Darius Sessoms of North Carolina was arrested and charged with the murder of Cannon Hinnant, a 5-year-old boy. (Wilson Police Department)

    A 25-year-old North Carolina man was charged with first-degree murder on Wednesday for the killing of 5-year-old Cannon Hinnant in front of his home in Wilson.

    Cannon was found suffering from a gunshot wound on Archers Road on Sunday night and lifesaving efforts failed.

    Police officers identified Darius Sessoms as the suspect and issued an arrest warrant.

    Sessoms was arrested on Monday after a joint operation involving the Wilson Police Department, the U.S. Marshals Service, and other law enforcement agencies. He was found inside a house in Goldsboro.

    Sessoms was charged with first-degree murder on Wednesday, a day before Cannon’s funeral, the police department announced. The suspect is being held without bond.

    According to witnesses, Sessoms walked up to Cannon while the boy was riding his bicycle and shot him.

    “I just don’t understand why he did it. How can you walk up to a little boy, point blank, and put a gun to his head and just shoot him? How could anyone do that?” Charlene Walburn, a neighbor, told ABC 11.

    “For a second, I thought, ‘That couldn’t happen.’ People don’t run across the street and kill kids,” Doris Lybrand, another neighbor, told WRAL.

    Sessoms lives next door to Austin Hinnant, Cannon’s father.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Cannon Hinnant in an undated photograph. (#JusticeForCannon/GoFundMe)

    Cannon’s two sisters, aged 7 and 8, reportedly saw the shooting.

    Christina Prezioso identified herself as a cousin of Austin Hinnant.

    In a GoFundMe fundraiser launched for the family, Prezioso called the shooting “a senseless act.”

    “One minute he is enjoying his life, the next it all ends because he rode into his neighbor’s yard,” she wrote.

    The cousin described Sessoms as a “coward” and said she hoped justice would be done.

    It wasn’t clear whether Sessoms had an attorney. During a court hearing Tuesday, he told the court he planned on hiring his own lawyer and rejected efforts to appoint one, WRAL reported.

    A funeral is being held on Sunday at the Shingleton Funeral Home. Rev. Darrell High will hold the funeral.

    In an obituary, family members said Cannon leaves behind his parents, three grandparents, several great-grandparents, sisters, and brothers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    People writing on the website said they hope for justice.

    “May God hold this family in his loving hands as I know he is sweet Cannon. And comfort their broken hearts as only he can. And bring justice to the evil demon that did this,” one wrote.

    The sadness I feel for this little man and his rights to life being taken away are just awful and disturbing. For the life of me why would anyone want to do this to an innocent little boy just trying to have some fun outdoors with his sibling. There are some sick people in this world that are so evil they should not be allowed to even exist,” another said.

    A candlelight vigil outside the Wilson courthouse is planned for Friday night.

    Follow Zachary on Twitter: @zackstieber

  • Saliva Test For COVID-19 With "Less Than 1 Second" Results Enters Trial Phase In Israel
    Saliva Test For COVID-19 With “Less Than 1 Second” Results Enters Trial Phase In Israel

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 21:35

    Sure to be welcomed as good news for people returning to offices, factories, and schools this fall who will be subject to regular COVID-19 testing: an Israeli hospital is hosting clinical trials for a new “instant” test which utilizes saliva, instead of the more invasive and uncomfortable deep nasal swab.

    The new test method is currently undergoing clinical trials involving hundreds of people at the Center for Geographic Medicine and Tropical Diseases at Sheba Medical Center outside Tel Aviv. It’s purported to show whether someone is positive or negative in less than a second and utilizes artificial intelligence.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Getty Images

    Hailed as a much cheaper and more convenient testing method especially useful when large groups of people must be quickly tested, it’s so far said to be able to detect the virus at a 95% success rate.

    As described in Reuters, it apparently doesn’t even require a swab or direct contact:

    Patients rinse their mouth with a saline wash and spit into a vial. This is then examined by a small spectral device that, in simple terms, shines light on the specimen and analyzes the reaction to see if it is consistent with COVID-19.

    With machine learning it gets more accurate over time.

    Sheba hospital is partnering with the new technology’s developer, the Israel-based firm Newsight Imaging, to bring it to market. It could indeed be a game-changer, also given the projected price-tag of 25 cents for each single test, and $200 for the scanning machine itself. 

    Reuters/VOA video purports to show how quick and easy the test is:

    Some US colleges last month announced that for students to come back to campus, they have to agree to one or possibly up to two COVID-19 tests per week.

    We expect a number of private businesses which can’t opt for a remote work option will follow suit.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The current most common test, file image.

    As Boston Magazine quipped in a recent article the current deep cavity swab method is extremely uncomfortable to many, especially if required on a weekly bases – for example at Tufts University and others: “Oh, and by the way, twice a week someone has to jam a cotton swab into your brain,” the article commented

    A cheap and easy saliva test available globally would most definitely be welcomed in such routine testing environments, and could actually help combat the disease more effectively, given how fast people with exposure could be isolated. 

  • Bridgewater Backs Chinese Assets In Polarized World
    Bridgewater Backs Chinese Assets In Polarized World

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 21:15

    By Ye Xie, Bloomberg macro commentator

    There is some uneasiness seeping into the bond market.

    Yields on 30-year Treasuries rose to the highest in five weeks after an auction disappointed. Higher yields are also consistent with the recent better-than-expected data, including the jobless claims and CPI. While the Fed will need to keep yields low to support the economy, there may be air pockets occasionally for rates to rise amid heavy bond supply and when data points to a cyclical recovery. If Friday’s retail sales exceed expectations again, it may add further pressure to the bond market.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In a sense, central banks are implicitly guaranteeing low rates for governments to borrow. This monetary-fiscal coordination is required because “printed money can make it into the hands of those who need it through the fiscal package,” Karen Karniol-Tambour, head of investment research at Bridgewater Associates, said in a Bloomberg TV interview.

    In this new era of near-zero rates and quasi-monetization of debt, nominal bonds are a lot less useful in one’s portfolio, while gold and inflation-linked bonds have added value. Another feature of the current investment environment is that a more segmented world adds a sense of urgency for asset diversification. She said:

    “When you are having a lot of pressure around fragmentation, pressure on companies to have their production be more localized, pressure to think through whether you will be allowed to move things across borders, and something that could turn into outright conflict, it is not a sensible time to say ‘let me have my investments in just one of the three poles’” of the U.S., Europe or China.

    Chinese policy makers seem to be responding to both paradigm shifts – zero rates and fragmentation – a move that would encourage capital inflows to the nation’s markets. First,

    • China has repeatedly pledged not to follow the developed world and pursue unconventional policies. Its 10-year bond yield, at close to 3%, stands tall for an A+ rated country.
    • Second, President Xi Jinping has made a strategic shift to a so-called “dual circulation” strategy, emphasizing self-sufficiency in supply and demand. Already, Chinese defense, consumer and satellite stocks have outperformed lately.

    The investment conclusion is easy: “I would recommend building the best portfolio you can with China bonds, because the rates are higher, and whatever collection of Chinese stocks you can put together to best reflect what that economy is like, including some national and local brands,” Karniol-Tamboursaid.

  • US Sends B-2 Stealth Bombers To 'Warn' China As PLA Expands Live-Fire Drills Off Taiwan
    US Sends B-2 Stealth Bombers To ‘Warn’ China As PLA Expands Live-Fire Drills Off Taiwan

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 20:55

    This week just as major Chinese live-firing naval drills were being conducted north of Taiwan, the US flew three of B-2 stealth bombers to its Diego Garcia base in the Indian Ocean.

    British daily The Times describes that the American bomber movements were to address the growing Chinese threat over Taiwan on the very eve the PLA drill kicked off: “It is the first time the nuclear-capable strategic bombers have been sent to the remote island since 2016, in an indication of the growing concern about China’s intentions towards Taiwan,” according to a report Thursday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    US B-2 Stealth Bomber, U.S. Air Force photo

    China’s People’s Liberation Army (PLA) held a series of multi-branch drills in the Taiwan Strait and northern areas this week. According to a PLA statement it’s in response to external countries sending the “wrong” signals to Taiwan’s pro-independence forces – clearly directed at Washington given the high level American delegation currently visiting Taipei – which Beijing says is a threat to peace and stability.

    Washington is sending its own counter-message in its stepped up presence in the Indo-Pacific, as The Times continues: “The bombers flew across the Pacific from Whiteman air force base in Missouri to land at Diego Garcia, part of the British Indian Ocean Territory. With their advanced stealth technology, the B-2s can penetrate enemy territory without alerting air-defence radars.”

    This also comes days after New Zealand and Australian based defense sources accused the PLA of building up amphibious assault units along the coast just opposite Taiwan. Satellite images which circulated were presented as depicting additional marine amphibious craft activity near the self-ruled island.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Newsweek and other publications emphasized the drills are significant and aggressive, meant to send a clear signal:

    Chinese military-tied media aired footage Monday of troops conducting large-scale air defense drills in southeast Guangdong province, which lies across the Taiwan Strait from the self-ruling island still claimed by the central government in Beijing and borders semi-autonomous Hong Kong, also the subject of international tensions. The exercises involved advanced systems such as the double 35-millimeter-barreled PGZ-09 and the quadruple 25-millimeter-barreled PGZ-95.

    Diego Garcia remains a key remote outpost from which the US can deploy rapidly in places ranging from the Middle East to Southeast Asia.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, state-backed Global Times Editor Hu Xijin tweeted that the ongoing PLA drills off Taiwan underscore it “is capable of launching a full-scale attack and capturing the island within hours, leaving US military no time to react. It’s a clear warning to Taiwan”. 

    Official PLA military images show expansive drills around Taiwan, including air, naval, and ground forces:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And alarming for the potential for conflict, whether unintentioned or otherwise, the Nimitz-class aircraft carrier USS Ronald Reagan has been seen “circling near Taiwan” since the weekend.

    Earlier in the week Taiwan’s defense ministry described that “Chinese fighters’ deliberate harassment has ruined the current cross-strait status and has seriously damaged the safety of the region.” However, this has become a somewhat ‘routine’ occurrence, but now all the more dangerous given the increasing US naval and aerial presence in the area.

  • America Desperately Needs A Second Opinion
    America Desperately Needs A Second Opinion

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 20:35

    Authored by Jeff Harris via The Ron Paul Institute for Peace & Prosperity,

    Doctors are human and subject to human mistakes. Even doctors with exceptional “expert” credentials are still human and like all humans fallible.

    That’s why patients often seek a second or even third opinion from other expert physicians BEFORE implementing a treatment program. That’s especially true if said treatment is potentially life threatening or subject to severe side effects that may be as deadly as the illness itself.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Mayo Clinic published a study three years ago with the headline, “Three Reasons Why Getting a Second Opinion is Worth it.” It said in part:

    The study has found that more than 1 in 5 patients referred for a second opinion-for many different conditions-may have been incorrectly diagnosed by their health providers.

    Dr. James Naessens, SC. D. of Mayo Clinic’s campus in Rochester, led the study that looked at medical records for 286 patients whose healthcare provider referred them to Mayo Clinic for a second opinion. Dr. Naessens found that 21% of the time the final diagnosis was completely different from the original diagnosis!

    But the Mayo Clinic is not alone in their recommendation of second opinions. Here’s what the Cleveland Clinic has to say about second opinions:

    When your health-and perhaps even your life-is at stake, we want to make sure you are making the most informed decision about your diagnosis and treatment plan. . . 

    Here’s what Johns Hopkins says about second opinions:

    An accurate diagnosis is essential to ensure that the correct and most effective treatment is given. Getting a second opinion on a diagnosis can reverse a diagnosis or alter the treatment plan.

    So the Mayo Clinic, the Cleveland Clinic and Johns Hopkins, some of the most highly respected, prestigious medical facilities in the world unanimously recommend second medical opinions.

    Medical Malpractice

    Somehow, the best medical advice from the nation’s most respected medical institutions recommending a second opinion was completely ignored when Covid-19 showed up.

    Instead, a handful of alleged government medical “experts” advised the political class to use illegal, unconstitutional powers to lockdown the nation, with the threat that millions would die if we didn’t obey their dictates.

    So why did the political class, those elected by the people to represent the people’s interest, not insist on a second opinion?

    Why were they willing, some even eager, to ignore the peoples guaranteed Constitutional rights to life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness?

    Why were they willing to ignore the best medical advice to seek a second opinion BEFORE destroying the livelihoods of millions of hardworking American’s?

    It’s not like there were no independent medical experts sounding the alarm about the Covid fraud and the ridiculous mass hysteria being whipped up by the politicians and the media.

    Literally hundreds of highly credentialed medical experts across the globe are on record as to the absurdity of the actions recommended by government medical “experts”. One of those experts, Dr. John Ioannidis of Stanford University assembled a group of like-minded medical experts this past March to offer a second opinion to President Trump. They wanted him to know their professional assessment of Covid-19 was that yes it was a flu bug but locking down the nation was a ridiculously unnecessary move that could cause more harm than good.

    Dr. Ioannidis said it was like an elephant being attacked by a house cat. Apparently President Trump gave in to his political advisors and ignored the second opinion advice of Dr. Ioannidis and his associates.

    Instead President Trump should immediately convene a blue ribbon panel of independent medical experts with no ties to direct government funding or pharmaceutical control for a genuine second opinion. Then, act on their recommendations regardless of the hue and cry from the political class and their media enablers.

    America needs a second opinion on Covid-19, and we need it acted on now!

  • CentCom Says Iran Is 'Top Priority' As Sabotaged Natanz Facility Set To Boost Nuclear Fuel Production
    CentCom Says Iran Is ‘Top Priority’ As Sabotaged Natanz Facility Set To Boost Nuclear Fuel Production

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 20:15

    This week CENTCOM chief Gen. Kenneth McKenzie said that Iran is the “top priority” for American forces deployed across the Middle East.

    “As I look at the theater, we remain focused on Iran as our central problem. This headquarters focuses on Iran, executing deterrence activities against Iran, and doing those things,” McKenzie said Wednesday at a think tank hosted defense conference.

    Despite the Islamic State long being driven underground, though the Pentagon has lately claimed the terror group is making a comeback, McKenzie went so far as to blame Iran for any resurgent ISIS activity: “The threat against our forces from Shiite militant groups has caused us to put resources that we would otherwise use against ISIS to provide for our own defense and that has lowered our ability to work effectively against them,” the CENTCOM commander said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Getty Images: Technicians work in a uranium conversion facility near Tehran.

    Recall that the administration has long argued ISIS is the main reason for a continued US troops presence in northeast Syria. Despite Trump’s “secure the oil” statements, the Pentagon’s official reason for being there is to counter ISIS and ensure it can’t regain a foothold. Across the border in Iraq, there’s growing pressure for all US bases and deployments to exit amid tensions with Iran-backed Iraqi Shia militias.

    Meanwhile, following last month’s headline-grabbing fire and explosion at Iran’s Natanz nuclear plant, widely seen as most likely an act of sabotage, Iran is actually moving to boost production of nuclear fuel at the damaged site.

    Bloomberg details in a new report that Iranian authorities are transfering new generations of advanced centrifuges used to enrich uranium — the heavy metal needed for nuclear power and weapons — from a pilot facility into a new hall at its primary fuel plant in Natanz, according to a one-page restricted International Atomic Energy Agency document seen by Bloomberg.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Natanz facility aftermath to the July 2 incident.

    If the July 2 incident was indeed an act of Israeli or US sabotage, it apparently didn’t do the job of derailing potential uranium enrichment capabilities at the site. There is consensus at this point that it was a covert attack, possibly via cyber operations.

    Bloomberg concludes: “The addition of advanced centrifuges to Hall B of the Natanz Fuel Enrichment Plant — another technical violation of its 2015 agreement with world powers — suggests that last month’s attack at a nearby machine shop didn’t have the intended effect of disrupting production.”

  • Trump Admin Designates Confucius Institute As Communist China Foreign Mission
    Trump Admin Designates Confucius Institute As Communist China Foreign Mission

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 19:55

    Authored by Ben Wilson via SaraACarter.com,

    The United States announced Thursday it is requiring the center that manages the Communist China funded Confucius Institute in the United States to register as a foreign mission. Secretary of State Mike Pompeo said the institute is “an entity advancing Beijing’s global propaganda and malign influence campaign on U.S. campuses and K-12 classrooms.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Workers with the Institute in America will not be kicked out but top U.S. diplomat for East Asia David Stilwell said universities should take a “hard look at the activities they are engaging in on campuses,” as reported by WKZO.

    Designation of the Confucius Institute U.S. Center as a Foreign Mission of the PRC Foreign Mission of the PRC

    The Trump Administration has made it a priority to seek fair and reciprocal treatment from the People’s Republicof China. For more than four decades, Beijing has of China. For more than four decades, Beijing has enjoyed free and open access to U.S. society, while denying that same access to Americans and other foreigners in China. Furthermore, the PRC has taken advantage of America’s openness to undertake large scaleand well-funded propaganda efforts and influence and well-funded propaganda efforts and influence operations in this country.

    Today, the Department of State designated the Confucius Institute U.S. Center as a foreign mission of the PRC, recognizing CIUS for what it is: an entity advancing Beijing’s global propaganda and malign influence campaign on U.S. campuses and K-12 classrooms. Confucius Institutes are funded by the PRC and part of the Chinese Communist Party’s global influence and propaganda apparatus.

    The goal of these actions is simple: to ensure that American educators and school administrators can make informed choices about whether these CCP-backed programs should be allowed to continue, and if so, in what fashion. Universities around the country and around the world are examining the Confucius Institutes’ curriculum and the scope of Beijing’s influence in their education systems.

    The United States wants to ensure education systems. The United States wants to ensure that students on U.S. campuses have access to Chinese language and cultural offerings free from the manipulation of the Chinese Communist Party and its proxies.

    Pompeo’s agency details the issues being the curriculum and influence the Institute is having in the education system across the nation.

    Stilwell noted that there were about 500 Confucius classrooms in the United States affiliated with a university-based Confucius Institute.

    According to the U.S. non-profit organization, the National Association of Scholars, there were 75 Confucius Institutes in the United States as of June, including 66 at colleges and universities.

    The association contends that the institutes compromise academic freedom, defy Western norms of transparency, and are inappropriate on campuses.

    China rejects that criticism, calling it politicized and baseless.

    This follows previous measures taken by the State Department to label media outlets funded by the Communist China Party as foreign missions.

  • As Shares Soar, SoftBank Pumps Another $1.1BN Into WeWork
    As Shares Soar, SoftBank Pumps Another $1.1BN Into WeWork

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 19:35

    Somehow, thanks to the global crush of liquidity and a broad-based rally in tech SoftBank Group’s shares are riding high, making Paul Singer and Elliott look like activist geniuses once again.

    Thanks to the global crush of liquidity and a broad-based rally in tech shares (with some programmatic buybacks thrown in the mix, as upping SoftBank’s buybacks was critical to Singer’s plan), SoftBank is finding itself back in investors’ good graces, and Masayoshi Son is claiming vindication.

    And what better way to telegraph Masa’s great comeback than by doubling down on one of SoftBank’s biggest blunders: WeWork. SoftBank is plowing $1.1 billion into WeWork to help it weather the coronavirus pandemic, Bloomberg reports, citing an internal staff memo.

    The decision isn’t exactly a huge surprise. It certainly fits with the theme of SoftBank’s latest quarterly earnings release, whereby the firm saw its earnings bounce back from record lows, posting a $12 billion profit, compared with a $13 billion loss during the same period from a year prior. In reality, much of this boost is due to SoftBank shedding its shares in its US subsidiary Sprint and T-Mobile US.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Per BBG, the new SoftBank money is “another sign of SoftBank’s continued support for our business,” boosts WeWork’s cash on hand to $4.1 billion, according to a memo from SoftBank Chief Financial Officer Kimberly Ross.

    Will that be enough to allow the now dramatically-downsized WeWork to hang on until the pandemic lifts, when there might be an opportunity – in theory, at least – to profit from changing work habits?

    That’s a big if.

    Of course, the BBG story didn’t say anything about an ongoing lawsuit against SoftBank filed by WeWork’s co-founder and former CEO Adam Neumann, who attacked SoftBank for renegging on some $3 billion promised to Neumann and a group of other early shareholders, mostly VC funds.

    At the time, SoftBank said it would funnel that money back into WeWork. We guess this is them making good on that promise, for better or worse.

  • Fake ID Seizures, Mostly From China, On the Rise
    Fake ID Seizures, Mostly From China, On the Rise

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 19:15

    Authored by Petr Svab via the Epoch Times (emphasis ours),

    U.S. Customs and Border Protection (CBP) has been seizing an increasing number of fake IDs, including driver’s licenses, in recent years. Most come from China and are good enough to fool an average person, an agency official said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Fake IDs seized by U.S. Customs and Border Protection. (CBP)

    In 2019, CBP seized more than 78,000 fake documents, an increase from almost 57,000 a year earlier, and some 26,000 in 2015. This year, the agency is on pace to intercept even more, with nearly 55,000 documents seized as of Aug. 10, according to data provided by CBP to The Epoch Times.

    The vast majority of fake IDs we seize are coming from China,” said CBP Memphis Port Director Michael Neipert in an emailed response. “Our CBP officers are highly effective in detecting fraudulent documents, so for us, these are obvious fakes. I do consider these to be high-quality fake IDs because they can definitely fool the average person.”

    The majority “are of an age range that indicate that they are using these IDs to drink underage,” he said.

    “Of greater concern are the fake IDs that do not fall into this category. We do seize some fake IDs that are clearly not intended for underage drinking. Obviously, fake IDs could be used for a wide range of nefarious activities. This is why we make it a priority to intercept these licenses and work with our investigative partners to ensure these offenses are prosecuted.”

    At Chicago’s O’Hare International Airport, CBP seized nearly 20,000 fake driver’s licenses through June 30.

    Take a look at these IDs—same person, different bio info,” CBP Chicago wrote on Twitter.

    The IDs arrived from China, Hong Kong, the United Kingdom, and South Korea and were, in the majority of cases, headed for neighboring states, mainly for “college-age students,” the CBP stated.

    One concern is that the bar code attached to the Michigan licenses actually worked.

    The fraudulent identity documents can lead to identity theft and other issues, including fraud linked to immigration-related crimes such as human smuggling and human trafficking, the agency stated.

    Fake IDs can also be used by individuals associated with terrorism “to minimize scrutiny from travel screening measures.”

    In November 2019, the CBP said it intercepted more than 5,000 fake IDs, or the blank cards used to make them, in Louisville, Kentucky, sent from China. They were headed to various states nationwide, including New York.

    One of the IDs was headed to a convicted child rapist located in New York. According to authorities, the individual “entices minors with alcohol and counterfeit IDs before engaging in illicit activity.”

    Timothy Lemaux, CBP port director for Dallas-Fort Worth, warned people against seeking to obtain fraudulent identity documents overseas, as counterfeiters will access their personal information.

    What is most disconcerting about these interceptions, besides the volume in which we are experiencing, is the ease in which so many young people freely share their personal information with counterfeiters abroad,” Lemaux said in a statement, Fox News reported.

    “We’ll continue to collaborate with local law enforcement to educate the public, and anyone who is contemplating purchasing a counterfeit ID online, on the potential dangers of sharing your personal, identifiable information with a criminal element.”

    Follow Petr on Twitter: @petrsvab

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 13th August 2020

  • Assad Nearly Passes Out During Speech Amid Feared COVID-19 Explosion In Syria
    Assad Nearly Passes Out During Speech Amid Feared COVID-19 Explosion In Syria

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 02:45

    On Wednesday Syria’s President Bashar al-Assad was delivering a televised speech before a newly inaugurated parliament when he appeared to nearly pass out.

    Shortly before the unusual incident which caused him to unsteadily and slowly walk away from the podium mid-speech, he was seen wiping his brow and briefly appeared in physical distress.

    State-run SANA, citing the office of the Syrian presidency, said it was due to a sudden drop in blood pressure.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    He caught government ministers off-guard when be lurched back wearily, saying, “I need to sit down for just one minute… just a minute.”

    An official statement described: “The speech paused for a few minutes due to a slight pressure drop that afflicted the president before returning to resume the speech normally.” The pause reportedly lasted a few minutes.

    Indeed the 54-year-old ruler of Syria was later seen returning to the podium and the address resumed. But it comes amid what’s widely suspected to be an explosion of coronavirus cases inside Syria, especially the densely-packed capital of Damascus, given an influx of millions of internally displaced refugees after nine years of war.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    International monitors have complained that it’s been hard if not impossible to gauge true case numbers in the war-torn country, with weeks ago NPR alleging coronavirus has “overwhelmed” government areas while the Assad government conceals the true extent of the outbreak.

    Officially reported numbers stand only at 1,255 cases, including 52 deaths – but some Syria watchers have posited that as many as 100,000 in Damascus alone may be infected. 

    Assad later returned to the podium amid supporting chants from parliamentarians:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This produced widespread speculation following Assad’s near fainting incident that he could have coronavirus, however, other well-known Syria analysts have pointed out the gaunt leader is known not to eat very much and has been under immense stress, given the smashed post-war economy and sweeping US-led sanctions.

    Before the speech ran on TV, regional media throughout the day said it might be postponed due to president having fallen “ill”. 

  • New Report Reveals US Special Forces Active In 22 African Countries
    New Report Reveals US Special Forces Active In 22 African Countries

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 02:00

    Authored by Alan Macleod via Mint Press News,

    The US has roughly 6,000 military personnel scattered throughout the continent with military attachés outnumbering diplomats in many embassies across Africa.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    new report published in South African newspaper The Mail and Guardian has shed light on the opaque world of the American military presence in Africa. Last year, elite U.S. Special Operations forces were active in 22 African countries. This accounts for 14 percent of all American commandos deployed overseas, the largest number for any region besides the Middle East. American troops had also seen combat in 13 African nations.

    The U.S. is not formally at war with an African nation, and the continent is barely discussed in reference to American exploits around the globe. Therefore, when U.S. operatives die in Africa, as happened in NigerMali, and Somalia in 2018, the response from the public, and even from the media is often “why are American soldiers there in the first place?”

    The presence of the U.S. military, especially commandos, is rarely publicly acknowledged, either by Washington or by African governments. What they are doing remains even more opaque. U.S. Africa Command (AFRICOM) generally claims that special forces go no further than so-called “AAA” (advise, assist and accompany) missions. Yet in combat, the role between observer and participant can become distinctly blurry.

    The United States has roughly 6,000 military personnel scattered throughout the continent, with military attachés outnumbering diplomats in many embassies across Africa. Earlier this year, The Intercept reported that the military operates 29 bases on the continent. One of these is a huge drone hub in Niger, something The Hill called “the largest U.S. Air Force-led construction project of all time.” The construction cost alone was over $100 million, with total operating costs expected to top $280 billion by 2024. Equipped with Reaper drones, the U.S. can now conduct cross border bombing raids all over the North and West of Africa.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Washington claims that the military’s primary role in the region is to combat the rise of extremist forces. In recent years, a number of Jihadist groups have arisen, including Al-Shabaab, Boko Haram, and other al-Qaeda affiliated groups. However, much of the reason for their rise can be traced back to previous American actions, including the destabilization of Yemen, Somalia, and the overthrow of Colonel Gaddafi in Libya.

    It is also clear that the United States plays a key role in training many nations’ soldiers and security forces. For example, the U.S. pays Bancroft International, a private military contractor, to train elite Somali units who are at the forefront of the fighting in the country’s internal conflicts. According to The Mail and Guardian, these Somali fighters are likely also funded by the U.S. taxpayer.

    While training foreign armed forces in basic tactics might sound like a bland, unremarkable activity, the U.S. government also spent decades instructing tens of thousands of Latin American military and police in what they called “internal security” at the notorious School of the Americas at Fort Benning, GA (now rebranded as the Western Hemisphere Institute for Security). Recruits in the twentieth century were instructed on internal repression and told that a communist menace lied around every corner, meting out brutal repression on their own populations once returning. Likewise, with counter-terrorism training, the line between “terrorist” “militant” and “protester” can often be debatable.

    The U.S. military also occupies the island of Diego Garcia in the Indian Ocean, claimed by the African island nation of Mauritius. In the 1960s and 1970s, the British government expelled the entire local population, dumping them in slums in Mauritius, where most still live. The United States uses the island as a military base and a nuclear weapons station. The island was critical to American military activities during both Iraq Wars and continues to be a major threat, casting a nuclear shadow over the Middle East, East Africa, and South Asia.

    While there is much talk, (or more accurately, condemnation) in Western media of China’s imperialist motives in Africa, there is less discussion of the U.S.’ continuing role. While China operates one base in the Horn of Africa and has greatly increased its economic role on the continent, the thousands of American troops operating in dozens of countries are overlooked. The amazing thing about the American Empire is it is invisible to so many who serve it.

  • New Zealand Takes A Page Out Of China's Book, Blames Latest Outbreak On Imported Goods
    New Zealand Takes A Page Out Of China’s Book, Blames Latest Outbreak On Imported Goods

    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 08/13/2020 – 01:00

    Remember when local CCP officials and top party health officials in Beijing tried to blame multiple COVID-19 outbreaks on imported shrimp (then later, salmon)? Well, looks like New Zealand – which arrogantly declared “victory” over COVID-19 in June before flinging its borders wide open, only to detect 4 new cases tied to the same Auckland family yesterday – is trying a similar approach.

    New Zealand Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern responded to the new cases by ordering a 3-day lockdown, and now New Zealand officials – eager to find a scapegoat – are investigating the possibility that the virus was “imported” via freight.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, as Reuters pointed out, this line of investigation is something of a last resort, as the outbreak has “baffled” health officials, which suggests the only explanation is probably that it has been spreading slowly, and asymptomatically, this whole time. After all, NZ’s outbreak was never very large, and there are only 26 active cases in the whole country. Most cases detected recently involved travelers screened while entering the country. Of course, there’s always the possibility that some of them slipped through.

    But somehow, despite all this, investigators have apparently traced the outbreak to a “questionable” refrigerated container owned by Americold Corp, a multinational that’s big in the shipping business. Apparently, one of the infected patients worked for the company.

    Here’s more from Reuters:

    The source of the outbreak has baffled health officials, who said they were confident there was no local transmission of the virus in New Zealand for 102 days.

    “We are working hard to put together pieces of the puzzle on how this family got infected,” said Director General of Health Ashley Bloomfield.

    Investigations were zeroing in on the potential the virus was imported by freight. Bloomfield said surface testing was underway at an Auckland cool store where a man from the infected family worked.

    “We know the virus can survive within refrigerated environments for quite some time,” Bloomfield said during a televised media conference.

    The New Zealand unit of Atlanta, U.S.-based, Americold Realty Trust, a refrigerated storage specialist with operations in the United States, Canada, Argentina and Australia as well as New Zealand, identified itself as the owner of the cool store.

    Americold NZ Managing Director Richard Winnall told the NZ Herald newspaper the infected man had been on sick leave for several days and all employees had been sent home for tests.

    At noon on Wednesday, New Zealand began a three-day period of alert level 2, with Auckland at the higher Level 3. The country has been at Level 1 since June 9, which had mostly allowed life to return to normal.

    Under Level 3 restrictions, most businesses and schools in Auckland are closed, and bars and restaurants may only offer takeout.  Interestingly, despite the fact that COVID-19 is almost non-existent in New Zealand, Ardern on Wednesday delayed a critical step that should have kicked off New Zealand’s campaign season ahead of a Sept. 19 general election. She suspended the dissolution of Parliament, which usually marks the start of campaigning. A decision on whether she plans to actually delay the vote will arrive before Monday, she said.

    To sum up: New Zealand is potentially scape-goating an American company for “reintroducing” the virus in Auckland, while the PM orders extremely harsh lockdowns – almost certainly overkill while many kiwis are only just getting back on their feet financially – and plans to delay an upcoming election.

    Residents of Auckland, home to around 1.7 million people, were given just hours to prepare for the return to level 3 restrictions on Wednesday, requiring people to stay at home unless for essential trips.

    “Going hard, going early with lockdown is still the best response,” Ardern said. “Our response to the virus so far has worked … we know how to beat this.”

    The rest of the country was placed back into slightly looser level 2 restrictions. The restrictions will initially remain in place until Friday.

    Police set up roadblocks to discourage a mass exodus from Auckland, while supermarkets rationed the sale of some staple products amid a rush to the shelves. Long queues formed at COVID-19 testing centres in the city.

    Ardern said her cabinet will decide on Friday on the next steps with regards to restrictions.

    Now, imagine if Trump did all that.

  • This Is Amerika: Where Fascism, Totalitarianism And Militarism Go Hand-In-Hand
    This Is Amerika: Where Fascism, Totalitarianism And Militarism Go Hand-In-Hand

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 23:45

    Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “In this present crisis, government is not the solution to our problem, government IS the problem.”

    – Ronald Reagan

    There’s a pattern emerging if you pay close enough attention.

    Civil discontent leads to civil unrest, which leads to protests and counterprotests.

    Without fail, what should be an exercise in how to peacefully disagree turns ugly the moment looting, vandalism, violence, intimidation tactics and rioting are introduced into the equation. Instead of restoring order, local police stand down.

    Tensions rise, violence escalates, and federal armies move in.

    Coincidence? I think not.

    This was the blueprint used three years ago in Charlottesville, Va., in 2017, when the city regularly cited as being one of the happiest places in America, became ground zero for a heated war of words—and actions—over racism, “sanitizing history,” extremism (both right and left), political correctness, hate speech, partisan politics, and a growing fear that violent words will end in violent actions.

    It was a setup: local police deliberately engineered a situation in which protesters would confront each other, tensions would bubble over, and things would turn just violent enough to call in the bigger guns.

    It is the blueprint being used right now.

    In Charlottesville, as in so many parts of the country right now, the conflict was over how to reconcile the nation’s checkered past, particularly as it relates to slavery, with the push to sanitize the environment of anything—words and images—that might cause offense, especially if it’s a Confederate flag or monument.

    That fear of offense prompted the Charlottesville City Council to get rid of a statue of Confederate General Robert E. Lee that had graced one of its public parks for 82 years.

    That’s when everything went haywire.

    In attempting to pacify one particularly vocal and righteously offended group while railroading over the concerns of those with alternate viewpoints, Charlottesville attracted the unwanted attention of the Ku Klux Klan, neo-Nazis and the alt-Right, all of whom descended on the little college town with the intention of exercising their First Amendment right to be disagreeable, to assemble, and to protest.

    When put to the test, Charlottesville did not handle things well at all.

    On August 12, 2017, what should have been an exercise in free speech quickly became a brawl that left one dead and dozens more injured.

    As the New York Times reported, “Protesters began to mace one another, throwing water bottles and urine-filled balloons — some of which hit reporters — and beating each other with flagpoles, clubs and makeshift weapons. Before long, the downtown area was a melee. People were ducking and covering with a constant stream of projectiles whizzing by our faces, and the air was filled with the sounds of fists and sticks against flesh.”

    And then there was the police, who were supposed to uphold the law and prevent violence.

    They failed to do either.

    Indeed, a 220-page post-mortem of the protests and the Charlottesville government’s response by former U.S. attorney Timothy J. Heaphy merely corroborates our worst fears about what drives the government at all levels: power, money, ego, politics and ambition.

    When presented with a situation in which the government and its agents were tasked with protecting free speech and safety, Heaphy concluded that “the City of Charlottesville protected neither free expression nor public safety.”

    Heaphy continues:

    “The City was unable to protect the right of free expression and facilitate the permit holder’s offensive speech. This represents a failure of one of government’s core functions—the protection of fundamental rights. Law enforcement also failed to maintain order and protect citizens from harm, injury, and death. Charlottesville preserved neither of those principles on August 12, which has led to deep distrust of government within this community.”

    In other words, the government failed to uphold its constitutional mandates. The police failed to carry out their duties as peace officers. And the citizens found themselves unable to trust either the police or the government to do its job in respecting their rights and ensuring their safety.

    Despite the fact that 1,000 first responders (including 300 state police troopers and members of the National Guard)—many of whom had been preparing for the downtown rally for months—had been called on to work the event, despite the fact that police in riot gear surrounded Emancipation Park on three sides, and despite the fact that Charlottesville had had what reporter David Graham referred to as “a dress rehearsal of sorts” a month earlier when 30 members of the Ku Klux Klan were confronted by 1000 counterprotesters, police failed to do their jobs.

    In fact, as the Washington Post reports, police “seemed to watch as groups beat each other with sticks and bludgeoned one another with shields… At one point, police appeared to retreat and then watch the beatings before eventually moving in to end the free-for-all, make arrests and tend to the injured.”

    Police Stood By As Mayhem Mounted in Charlottesville,” reported ProPublica.

    Instead of establishing clear boundaries—buffer zones—between the warring groups and protecting the First Amendment rights of the protesters, police established two entrances into the permit areas of the park and created barriers “guiding rallygoers single-file into the park” past lines of white nationalists and antifa counterprotesters.

    Incredibly, when the first signs of open violence broke out, Heaphy reports that the police chief allegedly instructed his staff to “let them fight, it will make it easier to declare an unlawful assembly.”

    This is not much different from what is happening on the present-day national scene.

    Commissioned by the City of Charlottesville, this Heaphy report was intended to be an independent investigation of what went right and what went wrong in the government’s handling of the protests.

    Heaphy found very little to commend.

    What went right on Aug. 12 according to Heaphy:

    1) Despite the presence of firearms, including members of the militia, and angry confrontations between protesters and counterprotesters, no person was shot and no significant property damage occurred;

    2) Emergency personnel did their jobs effectively and treated a large number of people in a short period of time; and

    3) Police intelligence gathering was thorough (that’s the best he had to say about police).

    Now for what went wrong, according to the report:

    1. Police failed to get input from other law enforcement agencies experienced in handling large protests.

    2. Police failed to adequately train their officers in advance of the protest.

    3. City officials failed to request assistance from outside agencies.

    4. The City Council unduly interfered by ignoring legal advice, attempting to move the protesters elsewhere, and ignoring the concerns of law enforcement.

    5. The city government failed to inform the public about their plans.

    6. City officials were misguided in allowing weapons at the protest.

    7. The police implemented a flawed operational plan that failed to protect public safety.

    8. While police were provided with riot gear, they were never trained in how to use it, nor were they provided with any meaningful field training in how to deal with or de-escalate anticipated violence on the part of protesters.

    9. Despite the input and advice of outside counsel, including The Rutherford Institute, the police failed to employ de-escalation tactics or establish clear barriers between warring factions of protesters.

    10. Government officials and police leadership opted to advance their own agendas at the expense of constitutional rights and public safety.

    11. For all intents and purposes, police abided by a stand down order that endangered the community and paved the way for massive civil unrest.

    12. In failing to protect public safety, police and government officials undermined public faith in the government.

    The Heaphy report focused on the events that took place in Charlottesville, Virginia, but it applies to almost every branch of government that fails to serve “we the people.”

    As the Pew Research Center revealed, public trust in the government remains near historic lows and with good reason, too.

    This isn’t America, land of the free, where the government is “of the people, by the people [and] for the people.”

    Rather, this is Amerika, where fascism, totalitarianism and militarism go hand in hand.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What you smell is the stench of a dying republic. Our dying republic.

    The American experiment in freedom is failing fast.

    Through every fault of our own—our apathy, our ignorance, our intolerance, our disinclination to do the hard work of holding government leaders accountable to the rule of law, our inclination to let politics trump longstanding constitutional principles—we have been reduced to this sorry state in which we are little more than shackled inmates in a prison operated for the profit of a corporate elite.

    We have been saddled with the wreckage of a government at all levels that no longer represents the citizenry, serves the citizenry, or is accountable to the citizenry.

    “We the people” are not the masters anymore.

    It doesn’t matter whether you’re talking about the federal government, state governments, or local governing bodies: at all ends of the spectrum and every point in between, a shift has taken place.

    “We the people” are not being seen, heard or valued.

    We no longer count for much of anything beyond an occasional electoral vote and as a source of income for the government’s ever-burgeoning financial needs.

    Everything happening at the national level is playing out at the local level, as well: the violence, the militarization, the intolerance, the lopsided governance, and an uneasy awareness that the citizenry have no say in how their communities are being governed.

    As I have warned repeatedly, the architects of the police state have every intention of manipulating this outrage for their own purposes.

    Predictably, the police state is allowing these protests, riots and looting to devolve into a situation where enough of the voting populace is so desperate for a return to law and order that they will gladly relinquish some of their freedoms to achieve it. And that’s how the police state will win, no matter which candidate gets elected to the White House, and “we the people” will continue to lose.

    So what’s the answer?

    As always, it must start with “we the people.”

    I’ve always advised people to think nationally, but act locally.

    Yet as Charlottesville made clear, it’s hard to make a difference locally when the local government is as deaf, dumb and blind to the needs of its constituents as the national government.

    Charlottesville much like the rest of the nation has had its fair share of government leaders who are tone-deaf, focused on their own aggrandizement, and incapable of prioritizing the needs of their constituents over their own personal and political agendas; law enforcement officials for whom personal safety, heavy-handed militarized tactics, and power plays trump their duty to serve and protect; polarized citizens incapable of finding common ground, respecting each other’s rights, or agreeing to disagree; and a community held hostage by political correctness, divisive rhetoric and a growing intolerance for any views that may be unpopular or at odds with the mainstream.

    It was a perfect storm just waiting for the right conditions to wreak havoc, a precursor of the rage, frustration and fear that is erupting all over the country.

    No matter what forces are manipulating these present riots and violent uprisings, however—and there are definitely such forces at play here—none of this would be happening without the government having laid the groundwork.

    Clearly, it’s time to clean house at all levels of government.

    Stop tolerating corruption, graft, intolerance, greed, incompetence, ineptitude, militarism, lawlessness, ignorance, brutality, deceit, collusion, corpulence, bureaucracy, immorality, depravity, censorship, cruelty, violence, mediocrity, and tyranny. These are the hallmarks of an institution that is rotten through and through.

    Stop holding your nose in order to block out the stench of a rotting institution.

    Stop letting the government and its agents treat you like a servant or a slave.

    You’ve got rights. We’ve all got rights. This is our country. This is our government. No one can take it away from us unless we make it easy for them.

    You’ve got a better chance of making your displeasure seen and felt and heard within your own community. But it will take perseverance and unity and a commitment to finding common ground with your fellow citizens.

    Right now, as I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, we’re making it way too easy for the police state to take over.

    Stop being an accessory to the murder of the American republic.

  • Australian Millennial Charged Over Supply Of 3D-Printed Firearms 
    Australian Millennial Charged Over Supply Of 3D-Printed Firearms 

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 23:25

    A 29-year-old Australian man was charged with supplying 3D-printed pistols across Sydney after police raided his home. 

    The Government of New South Wales (NSW) released a statement on Tuesday (Aug. 11) of a man arrested at his St Marys home charged with supplying unregistered pistols and parts to unauthorized people across Sydney. 

    Criminal Groups Squad detectives seized five 3D-printed pistols and parts in an early Tuesday morning raid.

    “Following extensive inquiries, Strike Force Raptor detectives, with assistance from Strike Force Raptor Operations Support Group (OSG), executed a search warrant at home at St Mary’s from 6 am today (Tuesday, Aug. 11, 2020),” the statement read. 

    The man was charged with “two counts of supply unregistered firearm (pistol), four counts of unauthorized supply of firearm part, three counts of supply/give ammunition to a person not authorized and unlawfully sell firearm parts three times or more within one year,” the release said.

    NSW Police Force posted a picture of the raid on Twitter, of what appears to be the man in custody, along with three other photos of the 3D-printed pistols and parts. 

    Police Raid

    3D-Printed Gun

    3D-Printed Guns

    3D-Printed Gun Parts

    It’s not entirely clear how 3D-printed firearms will change government policies in Australia, nevertheless, across the world, but one thing is already certain that gun control is becoming a dead issue. The rise of Defense Distributed has terrified the US government. 

  • China To Expand Its Influence In The Middle East With Major Oil Deal
    China To Expand Its Influence In The Middle East With Major Oil Deal

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 23:05

    Authored by Simon Watkins via OilPrice.com,

    China continues to expand its influence in the Middle East through oil and infrastructure deals, and the latest deal with ADNOC is a great example of how Beijing looks to grow its presence in the offshore oil business.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It is little surprise to see that China – again – figures in yet another concessions award in the Middle East, this time relating to the Abu Dhabi National Oil Company (ADNOC). In the aftermath of Saudi Arabia’s second disastrous oil price war against the U.S. shale sector, virtually all major Middle Eastern state-owned oil firms are looking to plug varyingly significant operational deficits, as are their governments.

    In the absence of a sudden major spike in oil prices, economic survival in practical terms now comes down to one of two broad options.

    • The first is to sell off chunks of state assets in initial public offerings (IPOs) or stakes in ongoing oil and gas projects, which ADNOC recently did with the sale of a 49 per cent stake in its gas pipelines for just over US$10 billion to international investors.

    • The second is to sell-off the same assets to companies from countries for which the immediate economic shortfall inherent in such deals pales into insignificance compared to the longer-term geopolitical and financial advantages.

    In this latter regard, Russia has its own financial constraints to deal with but China does not.

    Specifically, ADNOC has announced the transfer of ownership rights in its Lower Zakum, and Umm Shaif and Nasr offshore concessions from the existing holding of the China National Petroleum Corporation (CNPC) to China National Offshore Oil Corporation’s (CNOOC) subsidiary, CNOOC Limited. This will be done by CNOOC acquiring a 40 per cent interest in CNPC’s majority-owned subsidiary PetroChina Investment Overseas (Middle East) Ltd (PetroChina) through its holding company, CNOOC Hong Kong Holding Limited (CNOOC HK). After the proposal has been approved by Abu Dhabi’s Supreme Petroleum Council (SPC) – a rubber-stamping affair – CNOOC will join the principal operating consortium in the Lower Zakum concession, comprising India’s ONGC Videsh (10 per cent stake), Japan’s INPEX Corporation (10 per cent), China’s CNPC (6 per cent), Italy’s Eni (5 per cent), and France’s Total (5 per cent). CNOOC will also join the principal operating consortium in the Umm Shaif and Nasr concession, comprising Total (20 per cent), Eni (10 per cent), and CNPC (6 percent). ADNOC will retain a 60 per cent majority ownership interest in both concessions.

    Significantly, aside from the broader relentless expansion of China into the Middle East, in line with its multi-generational ‘One Belt, One Road’ programme, this deal marks the first time a dedicated Chinese offshore oil and gas company has joined in any ADNOC concession. These points did not go unnoticed by the chairman of CNOOC, Wang Dongjin, who said: “CNOOC will leverage our extensive expertise in the offshore sector and be dedicated to value creation in these concessions for our mutual benefit.”

    In this context, this latest deal follows the signing on 22 July 2019 of a comprehensive framework agreement between ADNOC and CNOOC to ‘explore new opportunities for collaboration’ in the upstream, midstream, and downstream oil sectors as well as in liquefied natural gas (LNG). Described at the time by ADNOC chief executive officer, Ahmed Al Jaber as “far-reaching”, the deal is such a significant move by China into the core oil and gas interests of one of the U.S.’s few remaining vocal allies in the Middle East – the UAE – that the deal signing ceremony was attended in person by China’s President, Xi Jinping.

    Although couched in the usual platitudes expected in such deals, even the official guidance on its contents highlighted its vast scope and scale. For example, ADNOC and CNOOC, according to the official published notes on the agreement, will ‘share knowledge, best practices and technologies in ultra-sour gas development to improve operational efficiency in gas processing and treatment, deliver efficiency, performance and reliability for drilling operations and develop field and reservoir development plans’. As an adjunct to this, China’s Offshore Oil Engineering Company (COOEC) would be in prime position for associated engineering, procurement and construction opportunities, as would China Oilfield Services Ltd (COSL) for the supply of oilfield services and to explore collaboration opportunities in offshore oil and gas field assets in Abu Dhabi.

    Also according to the July 2019 agreement, ADNOC and CNOOC would jointly explore LNG sales and purchase opportunities, share knowledge and expertise in LNG markets, and evaluate partnerships and joint investment opportunities in the LNG value chain. Finally, in the downstream sector, the two companies would collaborate in new integrated refining and petrochemical assets in China, co-operate in CNOOC’s refining assets, and jointly partner and invest in the refining and petrochemical value chain.

    One of these early, albeit indirect, China investments may well be into an investment platform to fund local chemicals projects, as part of an overall push to invest US$45 billion in downstream activities in Abu Dhabi, according to a senior oil and gas industry source familiar with the project. The investment platform is to be run as a joint project between ADNOC and the Abu Dhabi state-owned holding company, ADQ (formerly known as the Abu Dhabi Developmental Holding Company) and will oversee the development of projects in the planned Ruwais Derivatives Park. Although ADNOC has not made public the breakdown of where all of the funding is to come from, ADNOC and ADQ together will hold a 60 stake in the project.

    That the ADQ has any money at all for such an investment, or indeed for anything at all, is surprising, given that less than two months ago it was in urgent talks to raise a loan of “at least US$3 billion”, according to various reports. “ADQ’s attempts to put together a syndicate of banks did not go well and yet here it is with investment funding, at a time when the broader deal with China is moving forward,” he said. “There are no public statements that China is involved in the funding, of course, but it is fair to say that if ADQ or ADNOC had asked China for funding for the investment platform then China would have given it,” he concluded.

  • Despite The Diplomatic Bluster, China's State-Run Banks Are Quietly Complying With Trump's Hong Kong Sanctions
    Despite The Diplomatic Bluster, China’s State-Run Banks Are Quietly Complying With Trump’s Hong Kong Sanctions

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 22:45

    On the surface, there is a non-stop tide of daily diplomatic drama and escalating jawboning between the US and China which – quite theatrically – will be at each other’s throat at least until the conclusion of the Nov 3 election. However, behind the scenes, one can discern just who has the upper hand.

    According to Bloomberg, China’s largest state-run banks operating in Hong Kong have taken “tentative steps” to comply with US sanctions imposed on officials in the city, seeking to safeguard their access to crucial dollar funding and overseas networks, and putting their financial future above their patriotic duty to defend questionable Hong Kongers who have fallen in the crossfire. As a reminder, last week Trump sanctioned Chinese and Hong Kong officials including Hong Kong Chief Executive Carrie Lam, Xia Baolong, director of the Hong Kong and Macau Affairs Office of China’s State Council, and Chris Tang, commissioner of the city’s police for their role in implementing a security law in Hong Kong. The officials will have property and assets in the U.S. frozen; they also will be increasingly frozen by their own financial institutions.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hong Kong Chief Executive Carrie Lam

    China’s bank giants, most of which have operations in the U.S. including Bank of China, China Construction Bank, and China Merchants Bank have turned cautious on opening new accounts for the 11 recently sanctioned HK officials, including Lam, and at least one bank has suspended such activity. To avoid Trump’s ire, at some banks transactions via the U.S. are banned, while compliance must now review and sign off on others that would previously have been immediately processed, Bloomberg sources said.

    At the same time, foreign banks operating in Hong Kong such as Citigroup have already taken aggressive steps to suspend accounts or are increasing scrutiny of Hong Kong clients.

    The quick capitulation by China’s biggest lenders once again underscores how Trump has weaponized the greenback and the ability of the U.S. to use the dollar’s dominance in international transactions as a critical pressure point in the standoff with China. And since China’s state-owned lenders need to preserve their access to global financial markets – with the Yuan years if not decades from even thinking about thinking about becoming a global reserve currency – they have quietly bent the knee to Trump to preserve dollar access at a time when Beijing has leaned on them to prop up the economy from the fallout of the coronavirus.

    The bottom line is that China’s “big four” banks had $1.1 trillion in dollar funding at the end of 2019; it is that $1.1 trillion that gives Trump virtually unlimited scope to extract any concessions he wishes, and despite Beijing’s angry and belligerent rhetoric, China has no choice but to fall in place.

    Not that any of this is a surprise to China: as we reported last week, Yu Yongding, a former adviser to the nation’s central bank, said at a forum this week that China faces a series of threat from a potential financial war with the US, including sanctions on banks, financial ransom, freezing of Chinese assets offshore and a push for a capital flight. Yu recalled when Washington  sanctioned Bank of Kunlun in 2012 for its oil financing dealing with Iran, cutting the small Chinese lender off from the greenback payment system and suffocating its cross-border business.

    To save face diplomatically, China on Monday retaliated by sanctioning 11 individuals including U.S. senators Marco Rubio and Ted Cruz, but the retaliation was seen as a paper tiger as Beijing stopped short of putting any senior American government officials on its list. Its top diplomat, Yang Jiechi, on Friday said the door for talks with the U.S. remains open. It didn’t clarify the potential implications for any financial institutions that keep doing businesses with those named.

    “China’s position on the U.S. sanctions is clear and consistent,” Foreign Ministry spokesman Zhao Lijian told reporters in Beijing on Wednesday in response to a question about the banks’ move to comply. “The U.S. sanctions are irrational and groundless. They are unanimously opposed and condemned by all Chinese people, including our residents in Hong Kong.”

    Sure they are, but none of that matters because the US has the world’s reserve currency and China doesn’t. The rest is just political theater, full of sound and fury, signifying nothing.

    In an attempt to ease tensions, on Saturday the Hong Kong Monetary Authority, i.e., the city’s de facto central bank, said lenders in the city have no obligation to follow U.S. sanctions under local law, urging banks to treat customers fairly in assessing whether to continue to providing services. However, as the Bloomberg report suggest, none of the lenders decided it was prudent to test Trump’s resolve.

    Indeed, despite the HKMA’s announcement, “banks that have U.S. operations or conduct dollar businesses may still need to consider their U.S. compliance obligations,” JPMorgan wrote in a note. “Risks for listed China banks are relatively muted, in our view, as the four China officials on the list may obtain banking services with local unlisted Chinese banks that do not have dollar or U.S. businesses.”

  • Letters From Melbourne: A "Ghost Town Police State" Under Brutal COVID Lockdown
    Letters From Melbourne: A “Ghost Town Police State” Under Brutal COVID Lockdown

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 22:25

    Authored by Robert Bridge via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    The citizens of Australia’s second most populous city are suffering under the harshest lockdown conditions of all Western democracies. Their voices need to be heard.

    In the last several weeks, Melbourne has introduced shockingly draconian anti-Covid measures, imposed on the metropolis of some 5 million souls. What tragedy was responsible for spurring officials to leap into action? To blame was a fractional uptick in the number of coronavirus deaths – seven to be exact, and all involving citizens above the age of 70 years old.

    The media jumped on the “new single-day record in Victoria,” which brought the state death toll to 56. I repeat, 56, and the overwhelming majority of those cases involved elderly people in nursing facilities, some of which are under investigation for their handling of patients. While it goes without saying that elderly lives matter, do seven elderly deaths really warrant the shutdown of one of Australia’s busiest cities?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Despite the extremely low death rate, Melbourne residents – or shall we call them what they really are, prisoners – must adhere to the following rules:

    • No traveling more than 5 kilometers (3.1 miles) from their homes;

    • No traveling to other states inside of the country;

    • Those under house arrest are permitted to leave home for just one hour each day for exercise;

    • Only one person is permitted to go shopping per family each day; shopping is to be done within 5 kilometers from home;

    • Unlike traditional prisons, visitations are not permitted to house arrestees;

    • All school activities are to be conducted online;

    • All businesses, services and construction cancelled;

    • Organized sport, forget it;

    • In the case of funerals, try and delay your demise if at all possible, otherwise, expect just 10 guests;

    • Ditto for weddings;

    • Curfew in effect between 8 pm and 5 am.

    These restrictions will be in place for (at least) six weeks.

    Meanwhile, as to be expected, the authorities have been enthusiastic about meting out their street justice on people who allegedly violate the regime’s rules. And not just on the street. The police have been authorized to enter private residences without a warrant.

    Shane Patton, Police Chief Commissioner of Victoria, told reporters that “there are consequences” for not going along with the lockdown.

    “In the last week, we’ve seen a trend, an emergence, if you like, of groups of people, small groups, but nonetheless concerning groups, who classify themselves as ‘sovereign citizens,’ whatever that might mean, people who don’t think the law applies to them,” Patton, wearing all black attire for the occasion, explained.

    “We’ve seen them at checkpoints…not providing a name and address. And at least on three or four occasions in the last week, we’ve had to smash the windows of people in cars and pull them out of there…”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Needless to say, there have been other examples of people losing their patience with the lockdown conditions. Local media reported that an unidentified 38-year-old Melbourne woman was arrested after “repeatedly bashing a 26-year-old female police officer’s head against a concrete sidewalk.” The police officer was reportedly attacked for asking the woman why she wasn’t wearing a mask.

    In the same week, a mother was fined $1,652 for breaking with regulations after she was tackled to the ground and handcuffed by three cops. Her daughter filmed the incident, while begging the police, “get off my mum, she’s in pain.”

    An American acquaintance, who requested to remain anonymous, sent me the following message from Melbourne where he lives with his family:

    All three of my working kids are in enforced idleness – mandatory masks and, as you might expect in a place with its fair share of inadequate people, mask nazis are the new danger for sane citizens. I was in Argentina in the 70s during the Dirty War and this is the closest I have felt to that kind of experience since those days. Dark days indeed – and did I mention the press? They are specializing in singling out people who voice opposition and shaming them in really vile terms.”

    Anika Stojkovski, a corporate compliance and governance consultant based in Melbourne, also offered her personal impressions on the situation.

    “I sensed there was something very wrong with all this and predicted what is happening now,” Stojkovski told me via email. “I could tell they were lying.”

    “I really think there is more to it and it is all about total control and heading towards the agenda for us all to be vaccinated… [Victorian Premier Dan] Andrews says he wants every man, woman and child vaccinated. There is no vaccine!! So will we be kept in isolation till when?”

    Speaking on the medical situation in the city, Stojkovski was struck by the fact that “all consulting rooms in hospitals are closed, and all appointments are conducted by specialists by phone.”

    This still doesn’t add up … they are not admitting to hospital for Covid unless severely ill with life threatening symptoms, while most people cannot be tested for the virus without traveling beyond the 5-kilometer point.”

    When I inquired if there was anything happening out of the ordinary in Australia aside from the pandemic, Stojkovski mentioned that the Australian federal government [Canberra] was “not happy with the contracts our Victorian State Premier was making with China. Our prime minster [Scott Morrison] said they were not in the national interest.”

    In terms of geopolitical significance, this is huge. Victoria is the only Australian state to formally sign on to the People Republic of China’s major foreign-policy initiative, the Belt and Road Initiative. This contradicts the position of the federal government to not join the BRI as it raised serious geostrategic concerns. According to a report by the Australian Institute of International Affairs, the BRI Framework Agreement “places Victoria in an awkward position as Australia has formally signed onto the ‘Blue Dot Network’ with the US to assist in developing infrastructure in the Indo-Pacific region to counter the BRI.”

    At the very least, the timing of an agreement between Victoria and communist China, happening just months before the economic shutdown of Melbourne over a minuscule increase in Covid deaths, which will halt, possibly indefinitely, China’s spread into a major Western economy, is astonishing. Although it would be hard to prove cause and effect, future historians would certainly find the connection – involving as it does the momentous geopolitical battle between Beijing and Washington – worth examining in greater detail. To that end, the media is already busy portraying anyone who questions the logic of the lockdowns with its favorite conversation stopping term, “conspiracy theorist.”

    Whatever the case may be, the alleged ‘super spread’ of Covid in Melbourne is already causing political fractures between Canberra and Victoria, in much the same way it is in the United States between the Democrats and the Republicans. Meanwhile, the residents of Melbourne continue to suffer under a lockdown that appears more tenuous with each passing day.

  • CEO Behind 'Sputnik V' Says US Waging "Major Information Warfare" Against Russian Vaccine
    CEO Behind ‘Sputnik V’ Says US Waging “Major Information Warfare” Against Russian Vaccine

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 22:05

    The global race among multiple nations to be the first to produce a coronavirus vaccine – especially the US, China, and Russia – has sparked not just competition to see who’ll be first, but an information war in the wake of Moscow’s announced breakthrough COVID-19 vaccine this week.

    The announcement of Russia’s Sputnik V vaccine, developed by Moscow’s Gamaleya research institute with help from the Russian defense ministry and expected to be available to the Russian public by October almost immediately drew widespread scorn and mockery in the West based on allegations Russia is skipping large-scale clinical trials.

    One Russian official told CNBC this week the US is waging “major information warfare” against the possibility of a successful Russia-produced vaccine.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Image: EFI/CNN/Shutterstock 

    Kirill Dmitriev, the CEO of the Russian Direct Investment Fund – which is backing the Sputnik V vaccine – said in comments Wednesday, “It really divided the world into those countries that think it’s great news … and some of the U.S. media and some U.S. people who actually wage major information warfare on the Russian vaccine.”

    “We were not expecting anything else, we are not trying to convince the U.S. Our point to the world is that we have this technology, it can be available in your country in November/December if that works with your regulator … [while] people who are very skeptical will not have this vaccine and we wish them good luck in developing theirs,” he added.

    Dmitriev claimed further that Russia does plan on sharing its data from the vaccine with the rest of the world, also at a moment World Health Organization officals said they wil move to review the COVID-19 vaccine candidate approved by Russian regulators on Tuesday. The WHO said it will require “a rigorous safety data review” before being available for use among citizens.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Kirill Dmitriev, head of Russia’s sovereign wealth fund, speaking with President Putin. Image source: Sputnik/Reuters

    “We agree that nothing in detail has been published yet, we are just sending some information to some of our partners today on the results of the first phases of the clinical trials and it will all be published in August,” Dmitriev said.

    Currently, a total of 165 candidate vaccines are being tested around the world, according to a WHO tally. 139 of these are still in pre-clinical evaluation, while 26 have progressed to various phases of human testing. The 6 market leaders have already reached Phase 3.

  • Portland Prosecutor Likely To Drop Charges Against Rioters Who Injure Cops, Citing "Instinctive Reaction" To Police
    Portland Prosecutor Likely To Drop Charges Against Rioters Who Injure Cops, Citing “Instinctive Reaction” To Police

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 21:45

    Authored by Victoria Taft via PJMedia.ocm,

    Well, we’ve heard it all now. Rioters have been given what is tantamount to carte blanche in Portland. It’s open season on Portlanders, open season on cops, and open season on the rule of law.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Scores of the 500 people who were arrested during the nearly 75 days of violent Portland riots will have their charges dropped by the new Black Lives Matter-approved district attorney.

    Multnomah County District Attorney Mike Schmidt announced that his default position is not to prosecute and that most crimes by rioters will be forgiven and forgotten.

    That list of crimes includes interfering with a police officer, disorderly conduct, and rioting.

    • interfering with a police officer

    • disorderly conduct

    • criminal trespass

    • harassment

    • escape in the 3rd degree

    • riot (sometimes in some circumstances)

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Attacks on police officers and resisting arrest will be scrutinized based on whether – and we’re not making this up – police caused rioters to react because they used tear gas or other crowd-control measures causing rioters to “instinctively lash out.”

    …the instinctive reaction of people who have been gassed repeatedly, who have been struck with kinetic projectile weapons, and who have seen other protestors arrested in ways they deeply disapprove of.

    He told Oregon Public Broadcasting that “his attorneys will scrutinize every case to determine if the person’s intent was to resist arrest or injure a police officer.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    That’s right. Schmidt basically said that if an assault on a police officer or resisting arrest occurred when police were clearing an area with tear gas, for example, that he would consider dropping those charges.

    [We’ll take] a particularly hard look at resisting arrest and assault of a public safety officer if those cases occurred when an individual was being tear gassed or otherwise exposed to a use of force at the time of the resistance.

    His staff plans to determine the intent with which the rioter used violence to determine whether he or she is worthy of prosecution or “restorative justice.

    He told the local taxpayer-funded radio station that “the presumption on a lot of these cases that are listed out there is that we won’t prosecute… But if there are egregious circumstances or something about the case that stands out, we can always choose to prosecute.”

    Schmidt told reporters at a news conference today that being caught up by police while simply protesting will not be prosecuted.

    … [I]f you are a person who is out there demonstrating and you get caught up in the melee and you get arrested … those are the kind of cases we’re talking.

    Violating curfew during civil unrest will no longer be prosecuted.

    Good luck, Portland. The city is at 75 days of riots and now most of the rioters won’t see the inside of a courtroom much less the inside of a jail cell. That means there will be almost no disincentive to rioting. It’s open season on Portland.

  • China's Central Bank Has Quietly Launched Its Own QE
    China’s Central Bank Has Quietly Launched Its Own QE

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 21:25

    Earlier this week we discussed the striking difference between virtually every western central bank balance sheet – of which the Fed’s is a prime example – all of which have grown at a staggering pace over the past decades and especially since the covid crisis as central banks acquired various securities most notably Treasurys and MBS to ease monetary conditions…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … and that of the PBOC which has been surprisingly steady because – as we explained before – China has been gradually transitioning from a quantity-based monetary policy framework to a price-based one, whereby monetary policy is primarily adjusted via quantity-based instruments such as RRR cuts.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The difference in how policies are conducted – QE purchases for the Fed and RRR cuts for the PBOC – is fundamentally the reason why we haven’t seen PBOC balance sheet behave in the same way as Fed balance sheet during the recent easing cycle.

    However, the PBOC’s reluctance to engage in open and explicit QE may now be over, because according to a new report, the People’s Bank of China may have quietly bought government bonds from domestic banks in July, which as Bloomberg puts it, is a rare move that has analysts puzzling over the monetary authority’s policy intentions amid a record amount of government debt issuance.

    While there has been no overt change to the PBOC’s policy, tracking sovereign bonds held by “other” investors – a category that includes central banks and clearing houses – showed an increase of 196.5 billion yuan to 1.78 trillion yuan ($256 billion) last month, based on data by China Central Depository & Clearing Co.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The increase, the biggest since Bloomberg data started in late 2018, prompted analysts from Citic Securities to Nomura Holdings and GF Securities to speculate the central bank might have bought some government debt in the month.

    If confirmed that the PBOC has finally joined western banks in purchasing bonds in the open market, this would be dramatic reversal to years of convention: in the past, Chinese policy makers have frequently said in the past they do not intend to enact the kind of bond-market purchases seen in developed markets and have restricted stimulus measures throughout the coronavirus crisis to moderate trimming of market interest rates and a more generous liquidity policy. But they have flagged a willingness to support the government’s fiscal policy.

    Ironically, just this past May, Ma Jun, a member of the PBOC’s monetary policy committee, wrote in a newspaper article that any proposals that the PBOC should buy government debt directly would, in essence, be asking the central bank to “print money” to finance fiscal deficit.

    Monetary financing “will have long-term impact on the macro economy, fiscal sustainability and financial stability,” Ma wrote in the central bank’s Financial News newspaper. Doing so would mean “giving up the last line of defense on government fiscal behavior.”

    Monetary financing could cause hyperinflation, asset bubbles, currency weakening, over-borrowing and lower productivity, Ma said.

    And while Ma was absolutely correct, in the end China appears to have succumbed for the temptation of CTRL-P, the same as most other central banks.

    “There’s a possibility that the central bank has bought sovereign bonds,” Ming Ming, head of fixed-income research at Citic Securities in Beijing, wrote in a note, though he cited the possibility of other factors being behind the rise. The move is more likely to be an effort to “directly finance the real economy” rather than quantitative easing, with the PBOC buying anti-virus bonds that invest in projects with a steady return, he said.

    Call it whatever you want Ming, at the end of the day it’s all about words and the narrative, because just like the Fed, the PBOC is forbidden by the nation’s central bank law from purchasing government debt in the primary market. That however hasn’t stopped the US central bank from monetizing $7 trillion worth of US deficits.

    Researchers affiliated with China’s Ministry of Finance had previously suggested the central bank should buy some government debt this year, a step which could help reduce the impact on markets as the government plans a record amount of sales to mitigate growth risks.

    None of this should come as a surprise: as Rabobank’s Michael Every sarcastically notes, “it’s not as if the Chinese state does not play a vast role in the economy and markets, is it? The consolidated fiscal deficit was already in double digits even before the virus struck according to the IMF: take a guess as to where it is now – and don’t think the PBOC isn’t ultimately backstopping this, because it is.”

  • $15 Billion In Federal Funding Flows Into Just Five Major U.S. Cities Where Civil Unrest Looms & Police Stand Down
    $15 Billion In Federal Funding Flows Into Just Five Major U.S. Cities Where Civil Unrest Looms & Police Stand Down

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 21:05

    Submitted by Adam Andrzejewski,

    After the George Floyd protests broke out across major U.S. cities, some mayors and police chiefs were accused of issuing stand-down orders to their police officers. Nightly news streamed video footage of the looting, rioting, and general mayhem that ensued in the absence of a civil order.

    “Autonomous zones” sprung up in progressive cities and were described as part of a “summer of love.” Mayors pushed to defund local police departments. Center-right politicians called these cities “lawless” for refusing to protect the life, liberty, and property of its residents.

    In Seattle, the highly compensated city council voted to defund their police department. In Congress, an effort led by U.S. Sens Ted Cruz (R-TX) and Joni Ernst (R-IA) pushed to defund these cities of their federal aid.

    President Donald Trump indicated a willingness to review the situation. However, nobody knew exactly how much federal funding was “at stake.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Auditors at OpenTheBooks.com quantified $14.8 billion in federal contracts and grants flowing into five major cities where civil unrest looms and policing is restrained: Seattle, Portland, New York, Washington, D.C., and San Francisco.

    We mapped the flow of federal funds during fiscal year 2019 to all units of government based within the city location. Here’s how it breaks down:

    Portland, Oregon (Federal awards: $252.5 million | pop. 653,115) A family of four, on average, received $1,548 in federal subsidies ($387 per person). The City of Portland (Mayor Ted Wheeler) received $34 million with the police department only getting $37,000. The public schools received $4.9 million and the housing authority another $26.4 million.

    Other governments receiving aid included the Port of Portland ($33.5 million) and $143.9 million into higher education: the local community college ($53 million), and Portland State University ($90.9 million).  Since FY2016, federal funding into Portland-based governments increased from $173.7 million to $252.5 million (FY2019), up 45.4-percent.

    Wheeler, who also doubles as the police commissioner, has always denied giving stand-down orders to the police. However, since 2016, prominent critics have alleged a hands-off police presence in the face of violent protests and riots.

    Seattle, Washington (Federal awards: $365.1 million | pop. 744,955) A family of four, on average, received $1,960 in federal subsidies ($490 per person). The City of Seattle (Mayor Jenny Durkan) received $97.5 million. The public schools received $42.5 million. The housing authority received $203 million in federal aid.

    Other governments receiving aid included City Light – a city-owned utility ($3.8 million), and the Port of Seattle ($17 million). Seattle colleges received $1.1 million in grant funding. Since FY2016, federal funding into Seattle-based governments increased from $283.6 million to $365.1 million (FY2019), up 28.7-percent.

    In June, Durkan called the “police-free” Capitol Hill Autonomous Zone (CHAZ) within Seattle’s East Precinct a “block party” and police boarded up their precinct and let the protesters have free reign.

    San Francisco, California (Federal awards: $516 million | pop. 883,305) A family of four, on average, received $2,337 in federal subsidies ($584 per person). San Francisco city hall (Mayor London Breed) received $279.2 million – dwarfed by the $309 million into the housing authority. The fire department received $1.4 million.

    The city also received nearly $1 million of surplus military equipment under Program 1033. Since 2013, the city procured 320 items including 136 infrared illuminators, 100 night vision scopes, 49 reflex and thermal sights, 2 night vision sniper scopes, and a remote ordinance neutralization robot ($185,493). Transportation districts received nearly $140 million including the the city transportation authority ($7.1 million), Golden Gate Bridge district ($64 million), and Metropolitan Transportation Commission ($68 million).

    Other government receiving aid included the Coastal Commission ($2.9 million) and Judicial Commission of California ($4 million).

    Since FY2016, federal funding into San Francisco-based governments increased from $509 million to $584 million (FY2019), up 14.7-percent. In June, Breed announced that the police would no longer respond to a host of de-criminalized activities; and in July, the mayor announced a defunding of the police with the dollars re-directed toward the black community.

    San Fran was already the national leader in pretty crimes that critics say was the result of lack of police law enforcement.

    Washington, D.C. (Federal awards: $3.3 billion | pop. 705,000) A family of four, on average, received the equivalent of $18,723 in federal subsidies ($4,680 per person).

    In Washington, D.C. (Mayor Muriel Bowser), we found 33 separate city agencies receiving federal funds: the district government ($2 billion), the Metropolitan Police Department ($3.8 million), the fire department ($5.7 million), emergency management ($18.5 million), the DC university ($76.4 million), housing authority ($125.6 million), and public schools ($996.4 million).

    Other DC units of government receiving federal money included human services ($54.3 million), employment services ($35.9 million), health department ($24.3 million), energy and environment ($7.3 million), consumer & regulatory affairs ($3 million), and the commission on the arts ($1.8 million).

    Since FY2016, federal funding into Washington, D.C. increased from $2.2 billion to $3.3 billion (FY2019), up 50-percent. (This comparison between the years does not account for a $4.5 billion in funding from the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services to an entity listed in the federal data as “Dist. of Col.” in FY2019.)

    In June, President Trump criticized Bowser of “not locking down the city” as protests turned violent. The mayor defended the actions of the unified command of local and federal law enforcement. However, she called for the removal of all “extraordinary federal law enforcement and military” from the city.

    New York, New York (Federal awards: $5.6 billion | pop. 8.4 million) A family of four, on average, received the equivalent of $2,667 in federal subsidies ($667 per person). We found 52 units of government based in New York City (Mayor Bill de Blasio) receiving federal funds: the city government ($2.4 billion), housing authority ($2.3 billion), and the social services department ($875.3 million). The Port Authority of New York and New Jersey received $61 million and the city university received $616 million. Other city agencies receiving federal funds included homeless services ($2.4 million), the medical examiner ($1.5 million), and library ($322,966).

    In 2016 and 2017, the city police used Program 1033 to procure two mine-resistant vehicles. These military MRAPs, with a value of $1.5 million, were loaned at no charge by the Department of Defense. Because of inconsistent federal disclosures, a comparison between FY2016 and FY2019 can not be calculated. In June, the police union accused de Blasio of a stand down order. CNN reported $1 billion in budget cuts to the police department.

    As the above analysis shows, cutting the flow of federal funding into cities is a difficult proposition. However, the federal government could begin moving facilities out of unsafe cities. Officials and department secretaries could move federal buildings, agencies, and bureaucracies into safe environments. Doing so would have a substantial negative economic impact on cities.

    It just may cause mayors and police chiefs to re-prioritize the civil order.

    Note: we requested comment from the five city mayors and the Office of the President, Office of Management & Budget and will update the piece with responses, if any.

  • Attention Broke Millennials: Roundtrip Airfare Has Never Been Lower
    Attention Broke Millennials: Roundtrip Airfare Has Never Been Lower

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 20:45

    Airline shares have erupted in August after federal data showed a bump in air travel volumes is now at five-month highs. 

    The latest data via Transportation Security Administration (TSA) checkpoints at U.S. airports has surged in the last ten days, now at the highest levels since mid-March. However, TSA’s total traveler throughput data for the same weekday one year ago (Monday, August 10) is still down nearly 70%. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    U.S. Global Jets ETF has risen more than 20% in August as air travel volumes increase.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For the broke millennials, whom many are unemployed, and set to receive another stimulus check, here are some unbelievable roundtrip deals later this month (should be around the time when the next checks arrive):

    • New York City to Miami for $27 
    • New York City to Atlanta for $27
    • New York City to New Orleans for $58
    • New York City to Dallas for $27
    • New York City to Los Angeles $51

    Travel map for roundtrip flights in the US (Friday, Agust 28 – Monday, August 31): 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There’s just one problem: you might catch the virus while on an airplane… 

  • Indian Government To Launch Mandatory Digital Health Card On Bill Gates Concept
    Indian Government To Launch Mandatory Digital Health Card On Bill Gates Concept

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 20:25

    Submitted by GreatGameIndia

    The Indian government is planning to launch a mandatory digital health card modeled on Bill Gates’ concept. Under the ‘One Nation One Health Card’ scheme, a person’s medical history records, including all the treatments and tests that the person has undergone, will be digitally saved in this card. Hospitals, clinics, and doctors will all be linked to a central server. The move is aimed at mapping the health records of every citizen of the country in a digital format.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Indian Govt To Launch Mandatory Digital Health Card On Bill Gates Concept

    One Nation One Health Card

    After the ‘One Nation One Ration Card’ scheme, the Government is now preparing to bring ‘One Nation One Health Card’ scheme. Prime Minister Narendra Modi is likely to make the announcement on August 15, during the Independence Day celebrations, reported DNA.

    Under the ‘One Nation One Health Card’ scheme, a person’s medical history records, including all the treatments and tests that the person has undergone, will be digitally saved in this card.

    Hospitals, clinics, and doctors will all be linked to a central server. The move is aimed at mapping the health records of every citizen of the country in a digital format. Although it is being claimed that “it is completely up to hospitals and citizens, whether they want to opt for the ‘One Nation One Health Card’ scheme or not”.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A unique ID will be issued to every citizen who opts for this card, through which he/she will be able to log in to the system. Health Card will be made on the lines of Aaadhar Card, reported DNA.

    The scheme will be implemented in a phase-wise manner. A budget of Rs 500 crore has been allotted for the first phase of the plan. According to DNA, “the scope of the ‘One Nation One Health Card’ scheme will be gradually extended so that not only clinics and hospitals, but medical stores and medical insurance companies can remain connected on the server through this scheme”.

    National Digital Health Blueprint

    Although the DNA report did not disclose more details about the project, the ‘blueprint’ of the plan to set up a health data empire in India was released by the central govt last year. Minister for Health and Family Welfare, Dr Harsh Vardhan, unveiled the ‘National Digital Health Blueprint’, saying that he was ‘taking an oath to achieve a new dream’ – of a digitised healthcare ecosystem.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The main foundation of the blueprint is a unique health ID for citizens, with Aadhaar as a key identifier. A 2018 proposal of the NITI Aayog, the NHS has been developed in consultation with iSPIRT – an organisation of private sector ‘volunteers’, some of whom have also been involved in building the Aadhaar infrastructure and running operations that leverage it.

    While the government has moved ahead with sale of vehicle registration data of millions, released a tender for a nationwide facial recognition system and also passed Aadhaar amendment, the DNA Technology Bill and now the Digital Health Card, it is yet to table the data protection bill.

    Lobby Group iSPIRT

    Data researchers and activists, however, have expressed concerns about the development of this policy, which proposes a health data set-up on a foundation of India Stack – a bouquet of privately-owned proprietary software applications.

    “The health stack was proposed by the lobby group iSPIRT,” told Srinivas Kodali, an independent researcher to The Quint.

    IndiaStack is a set of APIs that allows governments, businesses, startups and developers to utilise the Aadhaar infrastructure for businesses like eKYC and UPI digital payments.

    “In fact it was found that NITI Aayog was emailing all consultation documents to iSPIRT while they did not place them in public domain. The Blueprint appears to give more legitimacy to stacks, which have been under criticism,” added Kodali.

    Simultaneously, the World Health Organisation (WHO) has initiated a COVID-19 Surveillance Project in India in partnership with the Ministry of Health and Family Welfare. The data gathered through full-scale surveillance will be used to make future Indian strategies for containment in India.

    Although, what “future strategies for containment” will be implemented by WHO’s pointman in India were not revealed, similar projects by the agency and related organisations implemented elsewhere give us a clear idea of where India is heading.

    Vaccination based Digital Identity

    A vaccination based digital identity program Trust Stamp funded by Bill Gates and implemented by Mastercard and GAVI, will soon link your biometric digital identity to your vaccination records. The program said to “evolve as you evolve” is part of the Global War on Cash and has the potential dual use for the purposes of surveillance and “predictive policing” based on your vaccination history. Those who may not wish to be vaccinated may be locked out of the system based on their trust score.

    This Wellness Program involving GAVI, Mastercard, and Trust Stamp is soon going to be tested in West Africa. Similar program was also launched in the UK. The UK government is rolling out COVI PASS – Biometric RFID enabled Coronavirus Digital Health Passports to monitor nearly every aspect of citizens’ lives in the name of strengthening public health management through a military grade tech.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    There is tremendous pressure on sovereign governments to implement such policies dictated by global agencies. Recently Belarus exposed the conditions laid by these agencies for loans being provided for COVID-19. The President of Belarus revealed that the World Bank coronavirus aid comes with conditions for imposing extreme lockdown measures, to model their coronavirus response on that of Italy and even changes in the economic policies which he refused as being “unacceptable”.

  • Real Estate Collapse: In Q2, A Record 44 NYC Neighborhoods Closed Fewer Than Five Deals
    Real Estate Collapse: In Q2, A Record 44 NYC Neighborhoods Closed Fewer Than Five Deals

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 20:11

    By Eliza Theiss of Property Shark

    Marked by strict lockdowns, the halt of economic activity and the loss and suffering brought on by COVID-19, New York City’s real estate market was bound to present a decidedly different picture in the second quarter both year-over-year (Y-o-Y) and quarter-over-quarter (Q-o-Q).

    First, it’s important to note that, during the last quarter, a record 44 NYC neighborhoods closed fewer than five deals — a metric we consider to be the lowest minimum threshold for calculating a neighborhood’s median sale price. As a result, these neighborhoods are not represented in our findings. In total, we analyzed the second quarter’s median sale price and sales activity changes in 157 NYC neighborhoods.

    Next, the most notable change was brought on by Brooklyn, which — for the first time ever — had more neighborhoods among the city’s most expensive than Manhattan. Specifically, of the 52 neighborhoods that were ranked as the city’s 50 most expensive (due to two ties), Brooklyn claimed 23 entries versus Manhattan’s 21 neighborhoods, while Queens was represented by eight areas.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pandemic-Depressed Market Slashes Manhattan Sales in Half, Brooklyn Sales Only by a Third

    Overall, the median sale price for the four boroughs contracted 2% Y-o-Y in Q2 and gained 4% Q-o-Q, stabilizing at $675,178. But, while the overall median of the four boroughs remained largely unchanged, sales activity plummeted — down 36% Q-o-Q and down 43% Y-o-Y. In particular, Manhattan was hit the hardest of the four boroughs. Its sales activity was halved, and the median sale price dropped 22% Y-o-Y from $1.27 million to $990,000.

    That significant drop was brought on by two major factors: a change in the ratio of property types sold and sale prices sliding under the influence of the new economic and public health crisis. And, while condo units represented half of all sales in Q2 2019, that share dropped to 44% in Q2 2020. Moreover, the median sale price of condo units traded in Q2 contracted 7% Y-o-Y from $1.745 million in 2019 to $1.625 million in 2020.

    At the same time, the number of co-ops traded dropped at a less dramatic rate and, as a result, co-ops made up a larger share of Manhattan residential sales: 55% this year compared to 49% last year. However, the median sale price of co-ops contracted at a sharper rate than condos, dropping 10% Y-o-Y — from $830,000 in Q2 2019 to $750,000 in Q2 2020.

    Brooklyn led in terms of sales activity, with the number of transactions recorded here in Q2 dropping only 32%, while its median sale price slid 2% to $702,000. Although sales activity decreased across all asset types — down 29% Y-o-Y for co-ops, 30% for condos and 41% for single-family homes — the median sale price presented conflicting trends across different property types. As a result, Brooklyn’s Q2 2020 residential market presented a fractured image.

    Condo and co-op sales took up a larger share of Brooklyn’s residential sales in Q2 2020 compared to Q2 2019 — to the detriment of single-family home sales. In particular, houses represented 22% of all second-quarter sales in 2020, as opposed to 25% in 2019. Meanwhile, co-op units represented 28% compared to 27% a year ago, and condo unit sales increased from 48% to 50% of all sales.

    Notably, the median sale price of single-family homes increased 7% Y-o-Y to $773,000 and the co-op median gained 9% Y-o-Y to reach $462,000. However, the drop in the median sale price of Brooklyn condos paired with their increased share of total sales deflated the entire borough’s Q2 median this year. Specifically, Brooklyn condos registered a 4% Y-o-Y drop, going from last year’s $863,000 to $825,000 in Q2 2020.

    Bronx Single-Family Sales Surge, While Queens Condos Heat Up Borough Pricing

    The Bronx and Queens showed similar trends, both in terms of pricing and sales activity evolution across all residential property types. Queens fared well in terms of price growth, with its median rising 12.3% Y-o-Y from $463,000 to $520,000, although transactional activity shrank 42% Y-o-Y. Meanwhile, Bronx prices actually rose at a slightly sharper rate of 12.5% Y-o-Y, but sales activity plunged 46% here.

    In particular, price growth in the Bronx was fueled by the significant increase in the share of sales of single-family homes. While condos made up 23% of all second-quarter sales in 2019 and single-family homes 34%, in 2020, the share of condo sales dropped to 18% of the borough’s total residential sales, while single-family homes made up 40%.

    And, because the median sale price of single-family homes ($525,000 in Q2 2020) is significantly higher than that of condos ($225,000 in Q2 2020), the Bronx’s overall median sale price grew, as well, going from $289,000 a year ago to $325,000 in Q2 of this year.

    Queens, a borough dominated by single-family homes, saw its sales activity drop at the sharpest rate for this property type. At the same time, condos outperformed every other residential property type, both in terms of pricing and number of sales.

    More precisely, Queens condo sales declined a mere 4% Y-o-Y, while their median sale price rose 13% Y-o-Y to reach $644,000 in Q2 2020. Likewise, condos also constituted a larger share of all sales in 2020, representing 22% of all Q2 transactions this year, as opposed to 13% in 2019.

    However, as condos still madk up a relatively small percentage of all Queens sales, the borough’s second-quarter sales activity dropped 42% Y-o-Y, fueled by the 47% decline in co-op sales and 48% decrease in single-family home sales. As a result, co-ops represented 37% of all Q2 sales in Queens and single-family homes made up 41%, down from last year’s 40% and 47%, respectively.

    Although sales activity decreased across the board, the borough’s 13% price increase was sustained by a 7% Y-o-Y increase in the median sale price of both co-ops ($320,000 in Q2 2020) and single-family homes ($644,000), and boosted by the 13% Y-o-Y hike for condos.

    Kingsbridge Median Surges 147% Y-o-Y, Gowanus Sales Activity Heats Up 230%

    At the neighborhood level, the Bronx’s Kingsbridge led in terms of pricing gains with its 147% Y-o-Y surge. Specifically, it went from $230,000 in Q2 2019 to $568,000 in Q2 2020 due to the change in types of properties sold. For instance, while the seven sales recorded in Q2 2019 were all co-ops, Q2 2020 saw six sales — three of which were single-family homes.

    Kingsbridge’s pricing surge was followed by Williamsbridge’s 100% Y-o-Y boom, which brought the Bronx neighborhood’s median sale price up to $478,000. That jump was also the result of an increase in the number of single-family homes sold. While single-family homes made up half of Williamsbridge sales in Q2 2019 and had a median sale price of $462,000, in Q2 2020, single-family homes represented 67% of the neighborhood’s sales at a noticeably higher median sale price of $512,000.

    At the other end of the spectrum stood Prospect Park South, which experienced the sharpest decline — down 54% Y-o-Y. It went from a median sale price of $1.23 million a year ago to $568,000 in Q2 2020. Once again, that change was brought on by a change in the mix of property types sold and their lower price points.

    Specifically, in Q2 2019, Prospect Park South’s residential sales were comprised of 57% co-op units and 43% single-family homes. However, this year, single-family homes represented just 17% of sales, while co-ops took 33% and condos made up 50%. That was a significant change, as Q2’s condo sales had a median sale price of $560,000.

    Nearby, the median sale price of Hunter’s Point co-ops decreased 23% Y-o-Y from $778,000 to $592,000. Additionally, while the three single-family homes sold in Q2 2019 had a median of $2.215 million, only two homes were sold in Q2 2020, and those averaged $959,000.

    In terms of sales activity, Brooklyn’s Gowanus witnessed the sharpest growth rate at a whopping 230% Y-o-Y. However, it must be noted that, in terms of actual transactions, that figure represents an increase from 10 deals registered in Q2 2019 to 33 transactions registered in Q2 2020. That surge was fueled by sales in new developments in the neighborhood, such as Luna at 229 9th Street., which originated 12 condo sales in Q2 2020 and none in Q2 2019.

    Meanwhile, Brooklyn neighborhood Greenwood Heights and Queens’ Hunters Point experienced the next-sharpest gains in transactional activity, both recording 123% more sales than in Q2 2019. All in all, only 15 of the 157 NYC neighborhoods included in this report registered year-over-year increases in transactional activity.

    On the opposite end of the spectrum was Brooklyn’s Greenpoint. Its 83% Y-o-Y drop was the sharpest rate of decrease in sales activity among all neighborhoods that had at least five sales. In particular, only 14 deals closed in Greenpoint in Q2 2020, as opposed to the 80 that were registered here in the same timeframe last year, fueled by the sale of 48 luxury condos at the then-new mixed-use development The Greenpoint. As a result, the neighborhood’s median sale price also contracted, dropping 22% Y-o-Y from $1.36 million in Q2 2019 to $1.06 million in Q2 2020.

    Brooklyn Overtakes Manhattan for First Time, Lands More Neighborhoods in Top 50 Priciest

    Among the neighborhoods omitted from our analysis due to insufficient sales activity were high-profile names like Hudson Yards, Malba and the Columbia Street Waterfront District, which ranked as the #1, #7 and #9 most expensive NYC neighborhoods in Q1 2020. Consequently, TriBeCa reclaimed the title of #1 most expensive neighborhood in NYC, despite a 14% Y-o-Y price drop that brought its median sale price down to $3.73 million. At the same time, sales activity plummeted 52% Y-o-Y.

    The city’s #2 most expensive neighborhood was Little Italy at $2.75 million. Its median sale price registered a mild 3% Y-o-Y uptick, paired with a 4% gain Q-o-Q. But, its sales activity dropped 22% Y-o-Y, closing only seven deals in Q2 2020.

    Similarly, SoHo’s $2.425 million median sale price earned it the title of NYC’s #3 most expensive neighborhood, despite its 8% median sale price contraction. However, its drop in transactional activity was more dramatic — down 67% — closing only 15 sales compared to 46 registered in Q2 2019.

    Overall, Manhattan supplied six of the city’s 10 most expensive neighborhoods and Brooklyn four. However, when looking at the 50 most expensive neighborhoods, Brooklyn had a heavier presence than Manhattan — a historic first. Specifically, of the 52 neighborhoods that had the 50 highest median sale prices of Q2, 23 were in Brooklyn versus Manhattan’s 21 neighborhoods. Queens was represented by eight.

    Manhattan Snapshot: TriBeCa Retakes Top Spot, Inwood Has Lowest Median at $405K

    As is most often the case, Manhattan’s three most expensive neighborhoods were also NYC’s three priciest: TriBeCa, Little Italy and SoHo. But, its competitively priced neighborhoods are often what incite the most interest here in what is, historically, the city’s priciest borough.

    With a median sale price of $405,000, Inwood was Manhattan’s #1 most affordable neighborhood, following a 5% Y-o-Y drop. However, Inwood’s sales activity was halved, as was Tudor City’s, Manhattan’s #2 most affordable area. The latter posted a median sale price of $455,000 following a 10% Y-o-Y hike, which was the only year-over-year pricing gain among Manhattan’s five lowest-priced neighborhoods.

    At the same time, Washington Heights underwent an 18% Y-o-Y price crunch that cemented its $468,000 median as the borough’s #3 lowest.

    Brooklyn Snapshot: Sales Activity Drops Only 32% Y-o-Y, DUMBO Becomes #4 Priciest NYC Neighborhood

    Three of Brooklyn’s priciest neighborhoods were among the city’s top 10 most expensive. Brooklyn’s median sale price leader, DUMBO, landed at #4 with a $2.075 million median. That came as a result of a noticeable 38% Y-o-Y increase spurred by the sale of three units at 100 Jay Street with a median of $2.45 million. At the same time, DUMBO’s sales activity was halved.

    Carroll Gardens was right on DUMBO’s heels as Brooklyn’s #2 most expensive neighborhood and the city’s #5 priciest. Its median was on the rise, as well, gaining 42% Y-o-Y. However, sales activity in Carroll Gardens dropped at an even sharper rate than in DUMBO, coming in at 65% below Q2 2019.

    Hitting a median sale price of $1.46 million following a 38% Y-o-Y drop, Cobble Hill was Brooklyn’s #3 priciest neighborhood in Q2 20201 and #8 city-wide. This was after a somewhat artificially inflated median in Q2 2019, elevated by the 17 sales registered at The Cobble Hill House, where the median sale price was $2.32 million.

    On the other end of the borough’s pricing spectrum stood Gerritsen Beach, Coney Island and Midwood, which logged the lowest median sale prices. In particular, Gerritsen Beach was Brooklyn’s #1 most affordable neighborhood at $402,000, following a 7% Y-o-Y slide. Sales activity here dropped a mere 5% Y-o-Y, while Coney Island dropped 39% Y-o-Y.

    However, Coney Island’s median gained 6% to become Brooklyn’s #2 lowest median. Meanwhile, Midwood’s 32% Y-o-Y drop pulled its median sale price down from last year’s $650,000 to $441,000 in Q2 2020, and transactional activity was slashed by 43% Y-o-Y.

    All in all, the borough’s median sale price dipped 2% Y-o-Y, closing Q2 at $702,000. Notably, Brooklyn’s sales activity dropped only 32%, representing the lowest decline in transactional activity among the four boroughs.

    Queens Snapshot: 34% Y-o-Y Drop Makes Briarwood Borough’s Lowest-Priced Neighborhood

    In Queens, eight neighborhoods were among the city’s 50 most expensive. Nonetheless, the borough navigated a tumultuous second quarter with sales activity dropping 42% Y-o-Y. It registered only 1,365 sales, as opposed to 2,340 in Q2 2019. Queens’ median sale price, however, rose 12.3% Y-o-Y, reaching $520,000 in Q2 2020.

    Fresh Meadows was its #1 most expensive neighborhood at a median sale price of $930,000, following a 9% Y-o-Y uptick. While that growth rate was lower than the borough’s 12.3% Y-o-Y gain, Fresh Meadows’s median was upheld by the type of properties that changed hands. In fact, in Q2 2020, only single-family homes were sold here, all of which sold for more than $800,000. As a result, Fresh Meadows’ $930,000 median also made it the #27 most expensive neighborhood in NYC.

    Queensboro Hill was Queens’ #2 priciest neighborhood with an $893,000 median sale price. That number tied it with Manhattan’s Gramercy Park to secure the city’s #32 priciest neighborhood. While Queensboro Hill’s sales activity plummeted 60% Y-o-Y, Hunters Point saw sales surge 123%. The borough’s #3 priciest neighborhood at $890,000, Hunters Point tied Brooklyn’s Greenwood Heights for the NYC neighborhood with the second-highest gain in transactional activity.  

    Queens’ #1 lowest-priced neighborhood was Briarwood at $213,000, following a 34% Y-o-Y reduction in its median sale price. Both here and in the borough’s #2 most affordable neighborhood of Corona, sales activity was halved.

    Likewise, Corona’s median was also on the downswing, dropping 32% Y-o-Y to $260,000. In the meantime, Lindenwood — Queens’ #3 best-priced neighborhood — bucked the trend with a 7% Y-o-Y increase to reach $270,000 in Q2.

    Bronx Snapshot: Up 13% Y-o-Y, Spencer Estates Becomes Most Expensive Neighborhood in the Bronx

    As usual, the Bronx didn’t manage to make its way among the city’s 50 priciest neighborhoods.  However, it did register the sharpest pricing gain among the four boroughs, climbing 12.5% to a median sale price of $325,000, although sales activity fell 46% Y-o-Y. Its #1 most expensive neighborhood was Spencer Estates, which logged a $619,000 median after a 26% Y-o-Y price expansion. As such, it ranked as the #67 priciest NYC neighborhood.

    NYC’s #74 priciest neighborhood and the Bronx’s #2 highest, Morris Park just made the cut with five sales at a $585,000 median sale price. And, with an 8% Y-o-Y pricing gain, Pelham Gardens was the #3 priciest Bronx neighborhood at $572,500, while its sales activity dipped 8%.

    Tied at a median sale price of $162,500, High Bridge and Fordham became the lowest-priced neighborhoods in the Bronx. Specifically, High Bridge’s median ticked up 3% Y-o-Y with transactional activity unchanged, while Fordham’s sales were halved, and its median dropped 34% Y-o-Y.

    Meanwhile, following a 16% Y-o-Y appreciation, Kingsbridge Heights became the #2 most affordable Bronx neighborhood at $185,000, while Parkchester’s 8% Y-o-Y bump gave it the #3 lowest median sale price in the Bronx at $188,750.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • "Disastrous Economic Situation" – Small Firm Bust Goes Unnoticed As Economy Flounders  
    “Disastrous Economic Situation” – Small Firm Bust Goes Unnoticed As Economy Flounders  

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 20:05

    The virus-induced recession has resulted in deep economic scarring that will be seen for years. Tens of millions of Americans remain unemployed, broke, and hungry. US bankruptcies of large companies are on pace to hit a 10-year high, with even more devastation seen among smaller firms.

    The collapse of small business is absolutely shocking, considering firms with under 500 employees account for about 44% of US economic activity. 

    Bloomberg notes a “wave of silent failures goes uncounted in part because real-time data on small business is notoriously scarce, and because owners of small firms often have no debt, and thus no need for bankruptcy court.” 

    “Probably all you need to do is call the utilities and tell them to turn them off and close your door,” said William Dunkelberg, chief economist for the National Federation of Independent Business. 

    Dunkelberg warned: Small business closures “are going to be well above normal because we’re in a disastrous economic situation.”

    Yelp’s latest data on business activity shows more than 80,000 companies permanently shuttered operations from March 1 to July 25. What’s concerning is that 60,000 of these closings were small firms. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We recently pointed out small restaurants across the country have listed their eateries for sale on Facebook Marketplace. The number of listings is stunning, a clear indication the bust cycle is far from over. Another round of closures could be seen later this year, or into next, as the recovery reverses and fears of a double-dip recession materialize. 

    A July report from the US Chamber of Commerce survey showed 58% of small business owners are worried about permanently closing. The problem today is that the economic recovery stalled in June and has started to reverse, a fiscal cliff has been festering underneath the surface in August, which could result in lower consumption among tens of millions of Americans that would pressure businesses sales. 

    A combination of firms going bust and depressionary unemployment levels have tremendous spillover effects in the mostly dominated consumer-driven economy.

    President Trump’s orders to provide more direct transfer payments to broke Americans have tremendous consequences; first, a quarter of all US income is derived from the government, and second, this transfer of wealth creates unsustainable artificial growth. 

    We outlined, in late July, how a decline or ending helicopter drops via President Trump’s stimulus checks will have more significant fiscal cliff impacts on small towns with a lower standard of living than large metro areas.

    With small businesses going bust at breakneck speeds and a quarter of all US income derived from the government, it just makes you wonder if this was all planned…

  • Grim College COVID-19 Rules
    Grim College COVID-19 Rules

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 19:45

    Authored by Adam Dick via The Ron Paul Institute for Peace & Prosperity,

    College ain’t what it used to be…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Supposedly because of a virus that for most college students is less of a threat to their lives than riding in a car, students at college campuses this fall will be subjected to dystopian controls from required mask wearing and “social distancing” to surveillance via contact tracing and health monitoring.

    Many prospective and set to return students will see this as an undesirable situation. College enrollment in America has been dropping over the last ten or so years. Make college dreary enough and there can be a big additional drop as this year’s fall semester begins.

    For an example of the kind of restrictions and surveillance being imposed on students at many university campuses, consider these requirements in the Duke Compact that Duke University is imposing and even wants all students to sign:

    To comply with requirements from Duke University, and state and local authorities, I will:

    • Wear a mask or face covering in all public spaces.

    • Maintain appropriate physical distance.

    • Wash my hands often.

    • Monitor and report my symptoms through the SymMon app, or approved alternatives, before coming to campus.

    • Avoid large gatherings.

    • Stay home when I feel ill.

    • Know and follow safety plans and additional guidance that are specific to my group, workplace or activity.

    • Keep confidential all health information I know or learn about others.

    To protect myself and the people around me, I will:

    • Participate in required COVID-19 testing, contact tracing and health monitoring.

    • If instructed, self-isolate for the required duration.

    • Get the flu shot and other required vaccinations by designated deadlines.

    Adhere to all travel conditions and restrictions.

    • Consent to the use of institutional data to identify others who have been in proximity or close contact.

    • Accept the benefits and consequences for the conditions of this compact.

    • Speak up to share suggestions or concerns by calling 800.826.8109 or completing an online form.

    Yikes.

    Making it clear that these requirements are not just advisory or aspirational statements, the Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) section following the Duke Compact includes these entries:

    What are the consequences for violating terms of the Duke Compact?

    While some minor violations will result in reminders and educational engagement, other flagrant and repeated violations may result in restricting your access to Duke facilities, employment actions or removal from campus. Consult your student, faculty or staff handbooks for further information…

    …Can I still be enrolled as a student, even if I don’t sign the Duke Compact?

    We expect all members of the Duke community to be united in protecting ourselves, each other and the community that depends upon us. A signature is required to have access to the campus, and, based on the expectations and requirements of your academic field, refusal to sign and comply with the provisions may impact your student status.

    Further, while one may see ambiguity in portions of the Duke Compact that leaves room for some freedom and privacy, the FAQ shuts much of this down. Here are some examples.

    The “public spaces” where a mask must be worn is an expansive area including everywhere on campus except where a person is “alone in a confined room such as an office or dorm room,” “alone in a vehicle, if the vehicle is not regularly shared with others,” eating or drinking “while following safety guidance,” or in “open outdoor areas where social distancing is easily maintained and areas where individuals are not likely to pass in close proximity.”

    The requirement to report symptoms is a requirement to do so daily; fail to do so and “your access to buildings may be temporarily suspended, or revoked.”

    The “large gatherings” that must be avoided can include gatherings of as few as 11 people. The requirement to participate in “required COVID-19 testing” includes being tested “upon arrival” at the Duke campus as well as potentially anytime “based on symptom reporting, contact tracing information or as part of periodic sample testing of our residential population.”

    Adhering to “all travel conditions and restrictions” means students “living in Duke-provided residences” are not to travel beyond the city of Durham “for the duration of the semester” unless doing so is “necessary” and the student receives permission from Duke University, takes “reasonable precautions,” and follows “Student Health instructions upon return.”

    “Institutional data” that may be used in contact tracing include “symptom monitoring survey responses, door control access points, wi-fi access points, geofence technologies, housing assignments and class schedules.”

    In addition to all the restrictions and surveillance imposed directly on students by Duke University, the FAQ indicates Duke may also go after students for failure to comply, even when the students are not on campus, with whatever coronavirus mandates may be imposed by the state and local governments. From the FAQ: “Duke expects all members of our community to adhere to state/local public health orders both on- and off- campus.”

    Other universities are similarly using “compacts” and other sorts of edicts to weigh students down with many new rules in the name of countering coronavirus.

    It used to be that going to college was an opportunity to escape from strict rules imposed by parents, gain more privacy, take new risks, and learn the self-responsibility helpful for adulthood. Now, many more students reading college requirements like those in the Duke Compact will see college as more restrictive and stifling than mom and dad.

    Since the second half of the last century, attending college after high school has been for a large portion of the American population the default course. The imposing of over-the-top dictates like those in the Duke Compact challenges that situation. Confronted with such dictates, a significant number of potential freshmen, as well as of set to return students, will have a “Why bother?” epiphany.

    There are options besides college. Make college grim enough in the name of countering coronavirus and many more people will choose to engage in those other options instead.

    Duke University itself may not suffer much in reduced enrollment, though it could see a big change in the makeup of its student body. Duke is one of the selective universities that rejects many applicants. It can, to maintain enrollment numbers, start admitting students it previously would have rejected.

    Less select universities will really face trouble due to fewer people choosing to pursue higher education. Some of these universities can be expected to disappear as they become economically unviable.

  • "Copper Is Way Ahead Of The Fundamentals," Warns Commerzbank
    “Copper Is Way Ahead Of The Fundamentals,” Warns Commerzbank

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 19:25

    “Copper is way ahead of the fundamentals,” Eugen Weinberg, head of commodities research at Commerzbank, told Reuters, adding that waning demand and oversupply conditions should pressure prices well into a correction (10-15%) from current levels. 

    After a 17 week meteoric rise in COMEX copper futures, resistance has formed around the $3-handle in the last 22 trading sessions. Noted below are Fibonacci retracement levels.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Weinberg’s view is that the +50% bounce in copper prices from mid-March to present is unsustainable. Some of the price gains have been built on central banks unleashing trillions of dollars of monetary policy to stabilize the crashed global economy.  On top of that, China was pulling forward copper demand. Now the global recovery is stalled, copper prices could be setting up for a pullback. 

    BMO commodity analyst Colin Hamilton pointed out in late July that copper prices are bound for a correction given the recent melt-up. 

    “I’ll be expecting copper higher at the end of the year. We are playing the stimulus recovery,” Hamilton said. 

    He Tianyu, an analyst with CRU, said China’s surging copper imports this summer “was mainly due to the spread between London and Shanghai copper prices, which made it cheaper to buy metal from overseas, and purchases pushed back at the height of the coronavirus inside the country.” 

    Now with the arbitrage window shut, Tianyu warned third-quarter Chinese copper demand could slump. 

    Are copper prices a little too optimistic about world trade recovery? 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A decline in copper prices is bad news for world stocks. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Keep an eye on declining copper prices, it could be a lead on what comes next for world stocks.

  • Andrew Kimbrell On The Origins of COVID-19
    Andrew Kimbrell On The Origins of COVID-19

    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 08/12/2020 – 19:05

    Via Corporate Crime Reporter (emphasis ours),

    What are the origins of the COVID-19 virus?

    Did it come from nature?

    Or did it leak from a lab in Wuhan, China?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The International Center for Technology Assessment is placing its bets on a leak from a lab in Wuhan.

    “After considerable research, including a thorough review of the selected research materials and discussions with experts in the field, we have come to agree with the view that the virus causing COVID-19 did not evolve naturally but rather is the product of one of the high-security bio-medical laboratories in Wuhan, China,” the group said in a statement issued last month.  “We believe that there is a preponderance of circumstantial and scientific evidence demonstrating that the ‘laboratory virus’ hypothesis is not only possible but probable. By contrast, recent refutation of the hypothesis that the virus originated at a Wuhan wet market and new findings that the virus has not been found in nature despite significant effort to do so, makes the view that the virus evolved naturally unlikely.” 

    “No dispositive finding on the virus’ origin can be made without a full review of the records and logs of the Wuhan high security laboratories involved, which the current stance of the government of China makes improbable. Nevertheless, in coming to a conclusion as to the probability of its laboratory origin, ICTA understands that it is critical that any analysis of the origin of this catastrophic contagion be apolitical and constructive. ICTA’s work in this area is not intended to blame individual scientists or any country,  but rather to help provide the insight, and encourage the action needed to spare humanity from a series of future man-made pandemics that could surpass the current one in transmissibility and lethality.”

    Andrew Kimbrell is executive director of the International Center for Technology Assessment. 

    Let’s start with the probability – more likely than not – that the COVID-19 virus is a lab created virus – from one of the two labs in Wuhan China,” Kimbrell told Corporate Crime Reporter in an interview last month. 

    “Let’s take a look at the virus itself.” 

    “Is there anything about the virus that would indicate one way or another? The other four categories are more circumstantial. Circumstantial evidence is fine in a court of law.” 

    “One is – location. Where did it happen?”

    “Two – precedent. Has anything like this ever happened before?”

    “Three – warnings. Did anybody warn that this might happen?”

    “And four – cover-up. Did the labs and the Chinese government try to cover it up?”

    “Those are the five categories that I would ask your friends and skeptics to go through carefully before they use words like conspiracy or baloney. And later on I will go through why some of them are using those terms. We will get into the corporate support for these people and why you are getting this misinformation.”

    Let’s go through it. It is undisputed that this is a chimeric virus that has never been seen before. It’s a hybrid virus.“

    “The bat coronaviruses that are closest to COVID-19 are lacking two incredibly important things that COVID-19 has that make it so dangerous. One is the proteins that spike the cell – the spike proteins. The spike proteins that are on COVID-19 are completely different than those on the bat coronaviruses that are closest to it otherwise. Then there is the furin cleavage site. This is something that allows the virus to get inside the cell and have the cell mechanism reproduce it. That does not exist in this group of bat coronaviruses.” 

    You have a basic bat coronavirus and you have two things that have been added to it. The spike protein is closest to an animal called the pangolin. We do know that somehow this bat virus was infected by at least two other animals and then went into a human host. And for that virus to be the way it is, it had to happen simultaneously.”

    “We have a hybrid virus never seen before in nature, it had to have been infected simultaneously with these other elements that make it more dangerous – make it more infective and more transmissible.”

    “There is no theory about how they got in there. They used to think it was the wet market. That has been completely debunked, including by the Chinese government. No one believes that anymore. That explanation was a smoke screen put up by the Chinese and Americans who want to support that idea.”

    What are the chances it happened naturally?

    “Someone will have to come up with a scenario. It sounds almost like a joke. A horseshoe bat, a pangolin and some other creature met in a bar in Wuhan and somehow simultaneously infected them.”  

    “I haven’t seen any scenario of how that happened or where that happened. But we know that had to happen. It happened somewhere. It either happened in nature or it happened in the Wuhan Institute of Virology or it happened at the CDC lab in Wuhan.” 

    “That is undisputed. Then at the end of May, Nickolai Petrovsky and his team in Australia said – let’s see if we can find a creature that might have an affinity for this. That way we might find the animals that might have come together to create this virus. Their conclusion was that they could not find it anywhere else in nature. These are objective researchers. They are not Trump supporters. That study made it even more difficult to accept the natural theory.

    “Meanwhile, we know that this was exactly the kind of work that was going on at one or both of the Wuhan labs. They call it gain of function research. I call it gain of threat research. They were taking NIH money, through the EcoHealth Alliance to do exactly this. And they did exactly this. They added different kinds of protein spikes. They mixed and matched various viruses. They genetically engineered them. They infected a number of animals. They put them into human cell cultures to increase the threat.”

    Why were they doing this research?

    The point of the research was to collect all of these bat viruses from 1,000 miles away from Wuhan and bring them back into their labs. The bat coronavirus was also the basis for the first SARS outbreak. They collected the bat viruses and brought them back to the labs. And then we are going to see what it would take for them to become really dangerous. What would it take? The idea was – if we can show what it takes in a laboratory for them to become incredibly dangerous then maybe we can predict that happening in nature. And then maybe we could have vaccines or interventions and be ready for the next pandemic.”

    It was a way to develop vaccines?

    “No. It was a way to develop a potential pandemic virus that might have occurred in nature at some point in the future. By having it, they would be able to think about what intervention strategies might work against this virus, which is now only in the lab, not in nature.”

    “They would say – we’re trying to not have the next pandemic. And there are a couple of problems with that argument. I sent you an article by Marc Lipsitch at Harvard and Tom Inglesby at Johns Hopkins. They pretty much demolished this argument. They say – there are hundreds of combinations of coronaviruses that could happen in nature. The idea that you can pick one or two and that is going to be the one that nature comes up with is like winning the lottery. And then to create a vaccine for a non existent virus – except in your laboratory – no one is going to do that. They are going to wait to see what happens in nature.” 

    “This whole gain of threat research, there are many reputable scientists now saying – it gives you no information, it’s not useful for vaccines, it’s not useful for anything except for the curiosity and interest of this small group of scientists who do this research.”

    “Meanwhile they are creating novel pandemic viruses.

    “Let’s get back to the list.”

    “Location. Why did this happen in Wuhan? Of all the cities in China. Of all the areas where bats are – and they are nowhere near Wuhan, they are 1,000 miles away. Of all of the cities it could have happened in, of all the small towns it could have happened in, why did it happen in Wuhan? What are the odds of this happening in Wuhan naturally versus happening in Wuhan because researchers there were doing exactly the kind of research that would create it? What are the odds of that? If I was in court, I would say that’s a very strong indicator that it happened in the labs. And in the interview with Shi Zhengli, she was so surprised. Why would this happen in Wuhan? And that’s why she got so nervous. Check that in favor of the lab theory.”

    “Two is precedent. Was there any precedent? Yes. In 2003 and 2004, the original SARS virus was leaked four times from Chinese laboratories. It was reported in Science magazine. So, we’ve already had a leak of SARS 1. And a couple of people who worked in that laboratory died in 2004. We have a precedent with the SARS virus.” 

    “What about warnings? There were numerous warnings. UPMC Center for Health Security looked at ten nations including China. In 2016, they found inadequate training and inadequate safety personnel in China to secure biosecurity.”

    “In 2017, there is an article in Nature where scientists say they are very concerned about a biosafety level 4 laboratory in China doing all of this controversial research. We don’t feel they have the experience or the expertise to do that.”

    “In 2018, we have the cables from the U.S. State Department saying – we are in this lab in China and we are very concerned that they are not taking appropriate precautions. And we are hoping that the United States government is coming to help them because this could be a very bad result. That was reported on by Josh Rogin in the Washington Post. You can read these cables.”

    “In 2019, the Global Health Security Index for the very first time looks at biosecurity for 195 nations. No one has ever done anything that comprehensive. They found that China was not even in the top fifty of the most biosecure countries.” 

    “NBC reported that in October 2019 there was cell phone silence at the Wuhan lab. They were concerned that might have had something to do with an accident.”

    You had all of these warnings. You had precedent. Then you have a massive cover-up. Milton Leitenberg in the Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists goes over that cover-up in great detail in an article in June titled “Did the SARS-CoV-2 virus arise from a bat coronavirus research program in a Chinese laboratory? Very possibly.” 

    “Leitenberg goes over the cover-up in detail. China orders the virus destroyed. They punish those who were publishing stories about it. They refused to make any records from the labs available. They put out disinformation that it came from a U.S. military lab.” 

    What about the so called batwoman?

    “The Chinese virologist Shi Zhengli. She works at the Wuhan Institute of Virology. She says she didn’t sleep a wink for days, fearful that the virus came from her lab. But now she assures us that it didn’t come from her lab. She may be right or she may be wrong. I don’t know. It may have come from the other lab or from someone else working there. But she herself was so frightened about the possibility that her research had created this pandemic that she didn’t sleep a wink for days. That’s enough to say to me – that research should never happen.”

    What you call gain of threat research was banned for a while, correct?

    “That’s correct. Gain of function research is used for different kinds of research. If you were to be working with a plant and were trying to get the plant to fixate nitrogen better, that would be gain of function for that plant. There is nothing wrong with gain of function research. But to use the term as they do is dishonest. The term gain of function sounds innocuous. Gain of function – that doesn’t sound bad.”

    You don’t want to ban gain of function research.

    “I don’t want to ban gain of function research. I’m going to take away the double speak and call it what it is – gain of threat research on potential pandemic viruses. That’s what I want to ban. No one in the world should be doing gain of threat research on potentially pandemic viruses. It’s the definition of insanity.”

    In 2014, the Obama administration declared a moratorium on any federal funding of gain of threat research. The reason they did this was because two researchers – Ron Fouchier in the Netherlands and Yoshihiro Kawaoka in Wisconsin – were working on the H5N1 bird flu, which had a 60 percent mortality rate, but was not transmissible through the air. It killed a few hundred people, but because it was not transmissible, it didn’t go very far. But they decided they were going to try and turn it into a transmissible virus and publish their results.”

    “With a 60 percent mortality rate, if that virus escaped, you have a potential 1.6 billion casualties.” 

    Did they actually turn it into a transmissible virus?

    “According to them, they did yes.”

    What are the ethics of turning that into a transmissible virus?

    “Marc Lipsitch, professor of epidemiology and director of the Center for Communicable Disease Dynamics at the Harvard School of Public Health said this ‘We have accepted principles, embodied in the Nuremberg Code, that say that biomedical experiments posing a risk to human subjects should only be undertaken if they provide benefits that sufficiently offset the risks – and if there are no other means of obtaining those benefits. Although these experiments don’t involve people directly, they do put human life and well-being at risk.’” 

    [For the complete q/a format Interview with Andrew Kimbrell, see 34 Corporate Crime Reporter 30(10), Monday June 27, 2020, print edition only.]

Digest powered by RSS Digest